diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2015-07-13 22:12:57 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2015-07-13 22:12:57 +0000 |
| commit | 4b3fc95cce2e262c8570ac41b7eb3958badbdb49 (patch) | |
| tree | 6c86768f507415d8823d4ff3efd3beb349bae1ea /Master/texmf-dist/doc | |
| parent | 3bd1986be7ec187300f2a1b833f58a4a6f449012 (diff) | |
minitoc v61 (13jul15)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@37852 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc')
608 files changed, 70128 insertions, 3207 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/CATALOG b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/CATALOG deleted file mode 100644 index 8d2409b150d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/CATALOG +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -Name: minitoc -Problems-To: jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr -Author: Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -Date: 2008/07/16 -Version: 60 -Description: Mini tables of contents per chapter, part or section. -Also mini lists of figures and tables. -Titles are language dependent (via package options). -License: LPPL 1.3 -LPPL maintenance status: author-maintained -Current Maintainer: Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert. - -This work consists of all the files listed in the `minitoc.l' file -distributed with it. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/INSTALL b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/INSTALL index 37b19623bde..411d8e606f6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/INSTALL +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/INSTALL @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Installation of the minitoc package (version #60 2008/07/16). +Installation of the minitoc package. This package contains a lot of files. The list of all files is given in minitoc.l. @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ appear in more than one class). Each class specifies the function and the placement of its files. (0) The files minitoc.ins and minitoc.dtx are the basic source files - of this package. The file minitoc-fr.dtx loads minitoc.dtx but + of this package. The (derived) file minitoc-fr.dtx loads minitoc.dtx but selects the french documentation. The language selection is done by using \ifcase ... \or ... \fi constructs. @@ -20,15 +20,11 @@ the function and the placement of its files. (2) INSTALL is a file describing the installation of the package. You are reading it. - minitoc.l contains the list of all files of the minitoc - distribution. - README is a file describing briefly the minitoc package, - plus some useful infos. - CATALOG contains basic infos about the minitoc package - (abstract, date, author, version, licence). + minitoc.l contains the list of all files of the minitoc distribution. + README is the usual file briefly describing the minitoc package. TODO lists some suggested developments of the package. Comments and suggestions are welcome. -(3) Examples of documents: +(3) Example documents: mtc-2c.tex, mtc-2nd.tex, mtc-3co.tex, mtc-add.tex, mtc-ads.tex, mtc-amm.tex, mtc-apx.tex, mtc-art.tex, mtc-bk.tex, mtc-bo.tex, mtc-ch0.tex, mtc-cri.tex, @@ -46,162 +42,14 @@ the function and the placement of its files. and summary of commands. (5) minitoc.dtx, minitoc.ins, minitoc.bib, minitoc.ist, minitoc.lan, en-mtc.bst, are the source of the documentation - in (non perfect) english. -(6) The files aaland-f.png, acadian-m.pdf, acadie-f.png, acadien-m.pdf, - afghan-f.png, africa-lf.png, africa-lo.pdf, - afrsud-l.pdf, afrsud-p.pdf, - albania.pdf, albania-f.png, alb2.png, alba-eth.pdf, - algeria-f.png, allemand.jpg, alsace-f.png, - andorra-f.png, argentina-f.png, - anglo1.pdf, angola-f.png, - arab-l.jpg, arabw.png, - armenia-f.png, armeniad.pdf, armenian-l.png, armeniar.jpg, - aruba-f.png, australia-f.png, austria-f.png, azerbaijan-f.png, - bahamas-f.png, bahrain-f.png. - baltes.jpg, bangla.png, bangla1.png, bangla2.png, - bangladesh-f.png, barbados-f.png, - basque-de.png, basque-df.png, basque1.pdf, basque2.pdf, - be-dg-f.png, belarus-f.png, belgique.pdf, belgium-f.png, - belize-f.png, bengali-m.jpg, benin-f.png, bolivia-f.png, - bolzano-f.png, bosnia.pdf, bosnia-hz-f.png, - bozen-f.png, brazil.pdf, brazil-f.png, brazilp.pdf, - bretagne.pdf, brussels-f.png - bulgaria-f.png, bulgariar.jpg, bulgarski.png, - bulgmap.png, bur-f.png, burkina-f.png, burundi-f.png, - buryatia.pdf, buryatia-l.pdf, california-f.png, - cambodia-f.png, cameroon-f.png, - canada.pdf, canada-f.png, canada-l.pdf, canada-pe.png, - canada-pf.pdf, canada1.pdf, cap-verde-f.png, castille-f.png, - catalan-d.pdf, catalan-p.pdf, catalonia-f.png, chile-f.png, - caucasus.pdf, central-africa-f.png, chad-f.png, - china-ae.png, china-af.png, china-ch.png, - china-f.png, china-l.pdf, china-w.png, - chine1.pdf, chine2.pdf, cis-f.png, - colombia-f.png, comoros-f.png, congo-f.png, corsica-f.jpg, - costa-rica-f.jpg, cplp-0.png, cplpmap.png, - croatia-f.png, croatia-un.png, croatie2.png, cuba-f.png, - cyprus-f.png, - cyr-alf.png, cz1.pdf, cz3.png, czech-f.png, czechd.pdf, - dane-f.png, danemark.jpg, danishd.pdf, danishg.pdf, - devanagari.png, djibouti-f.png, - dominica-f.png, dominican-f.png, dutchw.pdf, - east-timor-f.png, ecosse1.pdf, ecosse2.pdf, ecosse3.pdf, - ecuador-f.jpg, egypt-f.png, el-salvador-f.png, - england-f.jpg, equa-guinea-f.png, eritrea-f.png, - espa-l.pdf, espa-o.png, esperanto-f.png, - estonia-a.pdf, estonia-b.pdf, estonia-f.png, - eth2.png, ethiolang.png, ethiopia.pdf, - ethiopia-f.png, ethiopia-p.pdf, - euro-lan.png, euro-lan1.png, euro-lan2.png, - eusk-f.png, euskara.png, faroe-f.png, - farsi.pdf, farsi-logo.png, - feroe.jpg, fiji-f.png, - finland-f.png, finlande1.png, finlande2.pdf, - finnishd.pdf, finnishl.pdf, flanders-f.png, france-f.png, - france-lr.png, franco.png, francophonie-f.png, gabon-f.png, - gael-ft.pdf, gaid.jpg, - galicia-f.png, galicia-m.pdf, galicia-mp.pdf, galician-l.png, - galles1.pdf, galles2.pdf, georgia-f.png, germ-w.png, - german-c.pdf, german-d.pdf, german-m.pdf, germany-f.jpg, - ghana-f.png, gibraltar-f.png, - grece1.pdf, grece2.pdf, greece-f.png, greeka.png, greekm.jpg, - greenland-f.png, guatemala-f.jpg, - guinea-bissau-f.png, guinea-f.png, - gwenn-f.png, haiti-f.jpg, hangul.png, hanja.png, hanzi.png, - hin.png, hindi-b.png, hindi-p.png, - hrv.png, hispano.png, honduras-f.png, - hun1.png, hun2.jpg, hungary-f.png, - iceland-f.png, imongolia-f.png, - inde1.pdf, inde2.jpg, india-f.png, - indonesia-f.png, indonesia1.pdf, indonesia2.pdf, - iran-f.png, iranian.jpg, iraq-f.png, - ireland-f.png, irish.png, irlande.pdf, - islam-pbc.png, islam-sw.pdf, - islande.png, islandep.jpg, isr1.pdf, isr2.pdf, israel-f.png, - italian.pdf, italy-f.png, italo1.png, italysm.png, - ivory-f.png, ivrit.png, jamaica-f.png, - japan-f.png, japon1.pdf, japon2.jpg, - jordan-f.png, jutland-f.png, - kannada-n.png, karnad1.jpg, karnataka.jpg, karnataka-f.jpg, - kazakhstan-f.png, kenya-f.png, - kerala.jpg, kerala-f.jpg, khalka.pdf, kiribati-f.png, - korea-n-f.png, korea-s-f.png, - korean1.png, korean2.jpg, - kos-alb.png, kos-ml.png, kosovo-f.png, - kuwait-f.png, kyrgyzstan-f.png, - lamed3.png, lang-g.png, - laos-f.png, latvia-f.png, latvian-d.png, latvian-r1.png, - lebanon-f.png, lettonie.jpg, leur.png, liberia-f.png, - libya-f.jpg, liech-f.png, lithuania-f.jpg, lituanie.png, - lorraine-f.jpg, louisiana-f.png, - ls-f.png, luso1.pdf, luso2.pdf, lux-f.png, macau-f.png, - macedonia-f.png, madagascar-f.png, maine-f.jpg, - malawi-f.png, malayalam.pdf, malayalam.png, - malaysia-f.png, malaysia1.pdf, malaysia2.pdf, mali-f.png, - malta1-f.png, manchu.jpg, manchuria.jpg, manjuc.jpg, - manjui.png, mauritania-f.png, mauritius-f.png, - mex1.pdf, mex2.pdf, mex3.pdf, mexico-f.jpg, mexip.pdf, - meyalu.png, moldova-f.png, monaco-f.png, - mondep.png, mongasie.pdf, mongolcy.png, - mongolia-f.png, mongolian.pdf, mongols.png, mongoltr.png, - montenegro-f.jpg, morocco-f.png, - mozambique-f.png, namibia-f.png, - nbrunswick-f.png, ncyprus-f.png, - neder.pdf, netherlands-antilles-f.png, netherlands-f.png, - new-york-f.png, newzealand-f.png, nicaragua-f.png, - nice-f.png, niger-f.png, nigeria-f.png, nihongo.png, - norvege-c.pdf, norvege-t.pdf, norway-f.png, norway-p.pdf, - occ-f.png, occdial1.jpg, occdial2.png, occitanie.png, - occtaur.jpg, oman-f.png, opole-f.png, - pakistan-f.png, palestine-f.png, - panama-f.png, paraguay.png, paraguay-f.png, paraguayp.pdf, - peru-f.png, philippines-f.png, - poland-f.png, polish-d.jpg, polmin.jpg, - pologne.pdf, polski-f.png, - portu-a.png, portu-b.png, portu-p.jpg, portu-r.jpg, - portugal.pdf, portugal-f.png, puerto-rico-f.png, - qatar-f.png, quebec-f.png, rdcongo-f.png, - romania-f.png, romanian.pdf, - rus-cyr.png, rus-re.png, - rus-su.pdf, russia-f.png, russian.png, - russian-e.pdf, russian-n.png, russian-w.png, rwanda-f.png, - saint-lucia-f.png, same.png, same-f.png, sami-f.png, - samoa-f.png, san-marino-f.png, sao-f.png, - saudi-arabia-f.png, scotland-f.png, senegal-f.png, - serb-a.pdf, serbia-f.png, serbia-f2.png, - serbia1.pdf, seychelles-f.png, singapore-f.png, - slovak-ok.png, slovakia.pdf, slovakia-f.png, - slovenia-f.png, slovenian.png, slovenie.pdf, - solomon-islands-f.png, somalia-f.png, - sorabe-1.jpg, sorabe-2.jpg, sorben.jpg, sorbian.jpg, - south-africa-f.png, - spain.png, spain-f.png, spilhennig.png, - start.jpg, stop.png, sudan-f.png, - suede-a.pdf, suede-fin.pdf, suisse-f.png, suriname-f.png, - svenska.png, swahili.pdf, fswahili.pdf, swahili-m.png, - sweden.pdf, sweden-f.png, syria-f.png, - taiwan-f.png, tajikistan-f.png, tanzania-f.png, - thai.pdf, thai.png, thailand-f.png, togo-f.png, - tonga-f.png, tunisia-f.png, turkey-f.png, turkish.png, - turkmenistan-f.png, turquie.pdf, tuvalu-f.png, - uae-f.png, uganda-f.png, - uighur-f.png, uighur.pdf, uk-f.png, - ukra.png, ukraine.jpg, ukraine-f.png, ukrainep.pdf, - uruguay-f.png, us-f.png, usa-f.png, uzbekistan-f.png, - vanuatu-f.png, vatican-f.jpg, venezuela-f.png, - vermont-f.png, - viet2.pdf, viet3.pdf, viet4.pdf, viet-w.pdf, vietnam-f.png, - vojvodina-f.png, - wales-f.png, wallonia-f.png, wallonie.pdf, - wiki.png, wikif.png, wrs-a.png, wrs-c.png, - xinjiang.png, xinjiangc.png, xyugo.png, - yemen-f.png, zambia-f.png, zanzibar-f.png, zimbabwe-f.png, - are images to include. + in (non-perfect) english. +(6) The file lamed3.png + is an image to include. (7) minitoc-fr.dtx, minitoc-fr.bib, minitoc-fr.ist, frbib.sty, fr-mtc.bst, minitoc-fr.lan are the source (and tools) of the documentation in french. (8) minitoc.pdf - is the documentation in (non perfect) english, + is the documentation in (non-perfect) english, in PDF format. (9) minitoc-fr.pdf is the documentation in french, in PDF format. @@ -275,19 +123,33 @@ to your needs): disk space under your home directory. -- the SAME PRECAUTIONS as for tmk are needed. -The file minitoc.tds.zip contains a ZIP archive of a TDS-compliant -hierarchy of all files of the minitoc package. It has been prepared by -the pmk or tmk scripts. +A file minitoc.tds.zip containing a ZIP archive of a TDS-compliant +hierarchy for minitoc can be prepared by the pmk or tmk scripts. This +is no longer distributed. -Note that the PostScript documentation files may be printed -recto-verso on some printers. They are no more distributed on -the CTAN archives but the scripts prepare them. - -Note that minitoc.dtx and minitoc-fr.dtx are (not so trivial) examples -of using minitoc with hyperref. They show how the combinaison of -these two packages may be useful. +minitoc.dtx and minitoc-fr.dtx are (not so trivial) examples of using +minitoc with hyperref. They show how the combinaison of these two +packages may be useful. For a more detailed description of the installation of the minitoc package, see the ``Installation'' chapter in minitoc.pdf (in english) ou in minitoc-fr.pdf (in french). +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +Cleaning: making the package creates a lot of files. You can get back +to just the sources by removing: + *.aux *.bbl *.blg *.brf *.idx *.ilg1 *.ind *.ist *.lan *.lo? *.log1 + *.maf *.mld *.mlo *.out *.pdf *.pre *.sty *.tex *.toc tmp/ + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +For concreteness: the v61 distribution was made like this: + rm -rf work; mkdir work + cp * work # copy source files to working directory + cd work + rm -rf /tmp/*.?mk # remove last run + csh -f pmk >&out # look at out file + cd .. # back to source dir + rm -rf work + cp /tmp/*.tmk/tds/minitoc.tds.zip .. # to parent + zip minitoc-upload.zip minitoc.tds.zip minitoc # the way ctan wants it + Upload to http://ctan.org/upload. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/README index 619c5a7e82f..03f9dba9d5c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/README @@ -1,33 +1,36 @@ -README file for the minitoc package, version 60 (2008/07/16) +README file for the minitoc package. -The minitoc package is useful to add mini-tables-of-contents (minitocs) -at the beginning of every chapter. They are also minilofs and minilots. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +This package is looking for a maintainer. +The original author, Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, +passed away in 2009. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +The minitoc package is used to add mini-tables-of-contents (minitocs) +at the beginning of every chapter. There is also minilofs and minilots. At the part level, they are parttocs, partlofs and partlots. If the type of document does not use chapters, they are section level secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots. -The list of the files is in minitoc.l. - -The (long) history is now in the minitoc.dtx file, as part of the -documentation. +The (long) history is in the minitoc.dtx file, +as part of the documentation. -The installation is now described in the INSTALL file and the -minitoc.dtx file, as a chapter of the documentation. +The description of all the (many) files in the package and their +installation is described in the INSTALL file and the minitoc.dtx file, +as a chapter of the documentation. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert ONERA/Toulouse/SRI -Office national d'\'etudes et de Recherches A\'erospatiales -Centre de Toulouse -Service r\'eseaux et informatique -Complexe scientifique de Rangueil -2, Avenue \'Edouard Belin -BP 4025 -F-31055 TOULOUSE CEDEX -FRANCE +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +This work is the minitoc package. -Phone +33-05-62-25-25-15 +This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +of this license or (at your option) any later version. +The latest version of this license is in + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +version 2003/12/01 or later. -Email: jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr +This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". -Please send me any (constructive) suggestions and comments. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The list of all files belonging to the distribution is +given in the file `minitoc.l'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/TODO b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/TODO index 264b8a78306..3432a85a1f5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/TODO +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/TODO @@ -1,3 +1,8 @@ +First and foremost: this package is looking for a maintainer. +The original author, Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, +passed away in 2009. + +Jean-Pierre's todo list: Problem FAQ 34: should this strategy for fonts be implemented? Problem of allowing secttocs for the book and report classes: needs a lot of rewrite. Is it important? Delayed. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/aaland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/aaland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 113d3c982d8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/aaland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadian-m.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadian-m.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5488029836d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadian-m.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadie-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadie-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 94b96b8505e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadie-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadien-m.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadien-m.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2b671141122..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/acadien-m.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afghan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afghan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 982da358d0d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afghan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/africa-lf.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/africa-lf.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 098f252022c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/africa-lf.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/africa-lo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/africa-lo.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a9353eb65c9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/africa-lo.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afrsud-l.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afrsud-l.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 535374abc8d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afrsud-l.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afrsud-p.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afrsud-p.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 674c496398d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/afrsud-p.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alb2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alb2.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 25e59462503..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alb2.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alba-eth.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alba-eth.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6eab69078c8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alba-eth.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/albania-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/albania-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4351114b30b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/albania-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/albania.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/albania.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0246add4b65..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/albania.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/algeria-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/algeria-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ab5b5139984..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/algeria-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/allemand.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/allemand.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 07b979b0eed..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/allemand.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alsace-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alsace-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 725e1496a15..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/alsace-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/andorra-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/andorra-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ed0c985dc6f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/andorra-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/anglo1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/anglo1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c650728b136..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/anglo1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/angola-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/angola-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2c2339bff31..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/angola-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/arab-l.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/arab-l.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0de0d11ef37..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/arab-l.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/arabw.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/arabw.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a787d02fac1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/arabw.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/argentina-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/argentina-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fd0cc2ea28d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/argentina-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armenia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armenia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9563fc44672..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armenia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armeniad.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armeniad.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fc8c9ce71db..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armeniad.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armenian-l.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armenian-l.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6d03345f25f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armenian-l.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armeniar.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armeniar.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c08c4c7c432..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/armeniar.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/aruba-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/aruba-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 747dfa6a1ff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/aruba-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/australia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/australia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8227c04f86c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/australia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/austria-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/austria-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 26faeded892..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/austria-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/azerbaijan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/azerbaijan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e2164aadd93..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/azerbaijan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bahamas-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bahamas-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 00f8057c0b0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bahamas-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bahrain-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bahrain-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1d5a02da917..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bahrain-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/baltes.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/baltes.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index eaa7b94bef5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/baltes.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0ab3bd875c9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla1.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 04ed73024ef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla1.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla2.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1ac5a77ccb1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangla2.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangladesh-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangladesh-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 50c3a771423..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bangladesh-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/barbados-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/barbados-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2a6ab757a5e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/barbados-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque-de.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque-de.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5d086b89736..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque-de.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque-df.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque-df.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6d8ccfcf927..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque-df.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 55342d6c370..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8e1b051983f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/basque2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/be-dg-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/be-dg-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c83b102cf38..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/be-dg-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belarus-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belarus-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 24c17cdde0e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belarus-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belgique.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belgique.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 73cf252beee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belgique.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belgium-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belgium-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0e26d936989..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belgium-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belize-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belize-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 04d36fd5574..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/belize-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bengali-m.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bengali-m.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ce69582fbb5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bengali-m.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/benin-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/benin-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6d0d4c6d5f7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/benin-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/boldsc.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/boldsc.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7a7366c0236 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/boldsc.sty @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +%% LaTeX2e file `./boldsc.sty' +%% generated by the `filecontents' environment +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. +%% +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +\ProvidesPackage{boldsc}[1996/11/12] +\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}{% + <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>% + <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>genb*ecxc% +}{} +\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{b}{sc}{<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bolivia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bolivia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ed17f12fcd2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bolivia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bolzano-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bolzano-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index da68088ce73..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bolzano-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bosnia-hz-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bosnia-hz-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ca9fe173011..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bosnia-hz-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bosnia.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bosnia.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index de9f2380143..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bosnia.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bozen-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bozen-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2fa254d0558..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bozen-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazil-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazil-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b472acf347e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazil-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazil.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazil.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0ef7b1299e7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazil.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazilp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazilp.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e5b470dc0c0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brazilp.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bretagne.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bretagne.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0c43a30dbc7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bretagne.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brussels-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brussels-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5238c66c76c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/brussels-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgaria-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgaria-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 37cb3d45428..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgaria-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgariar.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgariar.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b36f60887ea..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgariar.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgarski.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgarski.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8a2e0b4d3a5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgarski.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgmap.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgmap.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0b5ff01cb3e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bulgmap.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bur-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bur-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b470ea028bc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/bur-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/burkina-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/burkina-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0eaf22733c8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/burkina-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/burundi-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/burundi-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ee06ab3c3a0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/burundi-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/buryatia-l.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/buryatia-l.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 19d6a61595a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/buryatia-l.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/buryatia.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/buryatia.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5ae06fa19ff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/buryatia.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/california-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/california-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d9af186006b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/california-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cambodia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cambodia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a2799feaabf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cambodia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cameroon-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cameroon-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c2c7079c53a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cameroon-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c4042c28265..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-l.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-l.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1cb65b9b482..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-l.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-pe.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-pe.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 695e2db8933..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-pe.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-pf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-pf.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d7f32795945..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada-pf.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3c6751d128d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 01abd38e0a1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/canada1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cap-verde-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cap-verde-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 843fcf8a368..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cap-verde-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/castille-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/castille-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3a88136930e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/castille-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalan-d.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalan-d.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 18ce37fdfa1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalan-d.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalan-p.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalan-p.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4a4ecb8d83c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalan-p.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalonia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalonia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ca39f583d04..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/catalonia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/caucasus.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/caucasus.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 20244e89326..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/caucasus.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/central-africa-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/central-africa-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d54dab7c421..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/central-africa-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chad-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chad-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2df0e4b1907..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chad-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chile-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chile-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 38acd2066db..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chile-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-ae.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-ae.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f1442e30444..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-ae.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-af.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-af.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7431843bcc6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-af.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-ch.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-ch.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index df311503ede..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-ch.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e859c7f0832..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-l.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-l.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bac9b206763..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-l.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-w.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-w.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5fc96c9e4fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/china-w.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chine1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chine1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 47c891cb0fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chine1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chine2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chine2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1279ee6dbdd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/chine2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cis-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cis-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5b67dd280bf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cis-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cmk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cmk index 8c3a267fab5..925a6ded93f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cmk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cmk @@ -1,3 +1,3 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/sh pdftops -level2sep -paper A4 -duplex minitoc.pdf minitoc.ps pdftops -level2sep -paper A4 -duplex minitoc-fr.pdf minitoc-fr.ps diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/colombia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/colombia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b584d3843e6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/colombia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/comoros-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/comoros-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index de6b0e59ffd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/comoros-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/congo-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/congo-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c81c77e82ce..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/congo-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/corsica-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/corsica-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 83f902a2f89..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/corsica-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/costa-rica-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/costa-rica-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5e0100e1210..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/costa-rica-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cplp-0.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cplp-0.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c2e91c7329a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cplp-0.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cplpmap.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cplpmap.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8d92dd75901..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cplpmap.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e17e7a64626..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatia-un.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatia-un.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8c1a61339ab..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatia-un.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatie2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatie2.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 222704ddf4f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/croatie2.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cuba-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cuba-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 70092b5371d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cuba-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cyprus-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cyprus-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 41751357a5d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cyprus-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cyr-alf.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cyr-alf.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2057ffb2448..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cyr-alf.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cz1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cz1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 31ee4b0f65a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cz1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cz3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cz3.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5caf0e1a29a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/cz3.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/czech-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/czech-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9f64152412c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/czech-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/czechd.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/czechd.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 38b9a9c8fa7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/czechd.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dane-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dane-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 60ba68941f5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dane-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danemark.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danemark.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 222491dd335..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danemark.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danishd.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danishd.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 607fbbb665a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danishd.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danishg.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danishg.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1b84f1d02f3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/danishg.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dblaccnt.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dblaccnt.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..040ab68fa1e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dblaccnt.sty @@ -0,0 +1,367 @@ +%% LaTeX2e file `./dblaccnt.sty' +%% generated by the `filecontents' environment +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. +%% +% Copyright 2000 Frank Mittelbach <frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org>. +% License: LPPL, version 1.3a or newer, according to +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +% +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. +% +% +% This is the file dblaccnt.tex which implements support for multiple +% accents. +% +% +% The code below handles only the case of +% +% \acc1 \acc2 ... glyph +% +% with or without nesting braces. +% +% \acc1 {\acc2 a} +% +% etc. will be handled correctly by removing the brace group during +% the scanning process. This means in particular that conceptually +% any accent command can only handle single token arguments! +% +% It should also work for combinations generated from inputenc, i.e., +% are presented as 8bit tokens or, after passing through something like +% an .aux file, as \IeC{\acc1} \IeC{\acc2} ... +% +% If you use OT1 encoding you have to explicitly reload it (with +% \usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}). +% +% +% History +% +% 1.0 2000/01/27 +% +% Initial release. +% +% 1.1 2005/04/21 +% +% Make it work with LaTeX release 2003/12/01. +% Add copyright message and history. +% + +\ProvidesPackage{dblaccnt}[2005/04/21 v1.1 double accent support] + +\endlinechar \m@ne + + +% We must redefine two internal LaTeX commands to provide hooks for +% assembling accents. + +% Here we test whether #1 (the command to be executed) is \chardef or +% #3 (the encoding) is `?'. If both are false, \assemble@accent@cmds +% will be used. +% +% The first case catches \DeclareTextSymbol, the second catches +% \ProvideTextCommandDefault. Both checks are ugly hacks which hopefully +% disappear in the near future. +% +\def\@dec@text@cmd#1#2#3{ + \ifx#1\chardef + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \else + \ifx#1\chardef@text@cmd + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \else + \if#3? + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \else + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + % start looking for acc tokens + \expandafter\assemble@accent@cmds + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \fi + \fi + \fi + \let\@ifdefinable\@rc@ifdefinable + \expandafter#1\csname#3\string#2\endcsname +} + + +% The redefined \@tabacckludge macro below assures that the top-level +% definition of the accents (which contains \assemble@accent@cmds) +% will be called. +% +\def\@make@tabacc#1#2{ + \expandafter\def\csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname{#2} +} + +\@make@tabacc{'}{\@acci} +\@make@tabacc{`}{\@accii} +\@make@tabacc{=}{\@acciii} + + +% Here the redefinition of second internal LaTeX macro. +% +\def\@tabacckludge#1{ + \csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname +} + + +% We only look ahead for further accents if we are to typeset. +% +\def\assemble@accent@cmds{ + \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect + \expandafter\assemble@tokensinit + \fi +} + + +% The init is special as we have to parse over some of the expansion +% of the encoding specific command; for example, \^ might expand to +% +% \assemble@accent@cmds \OT1-cmd \^ \OT1\^ +% ^^^^^^ one token +% +% We start \assemble@tokens with the number of hits so far (\@empty), +% zero the actual code for the current, e.g., \OT1\^ in the above +% example (resp. the corresponding macro in the current font +% encoding), and as a third argument we will pick up the next token +% or group in the input stream for testing. +% +\def\assemble@tokensinit#1#2#3{ + % the usual test for availability in the current encoding + % similar to the test in \@changed@cmd + \@inmathwarn#2 + \expandafter\ifx\csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname ?\string#2\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\def\csname ?\string#2\endcsname{ + \TextSymbolUnavailable#2 + } + \fi + \global\expandafter\let + \csname\cf@encoding \string#2\expandafter\endcsname + \csname ?\string#2\endcsname + \fi + + % here we substitute the current encoding + \expandafter\assemble@tokens@\expandafter\@empty + \csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname +} + + +% The next commands should be considered only as a proof of concept +% -- they can most certainly be streamlined. Here is roughly what +% they do: +% +% \assemble@tokens: If the picked up token is \IeC then get rid of it +% and parse the next token (or group) which is expected to be the +% argument of \IeC. This is done by restarting the whole process. +% Otherwise we have to figure out if the current token (#3) is an +% 8-bit from inputenc, i.e., expanding to \IeC{...}. This is +% handled by calling \assemble@tokensz passing an expansion of #3 +% as well as #3 (or more exactly, its first token since the braces +% get removed in this process) itself. +% +% \assemble@tokensz: Test if the expansion start with \IeC in which +% case it is assumed that it comes from an inputenc 8bit; the next +% token will be considered as its argument and used for further +% processing in \assemble@tokensx. Otherwise the unexpanded #3 +% from above is used. +% +% \assemble@tokensx: If this cmd is called its third argument should +% contain a normalized token from the input stream, i.e. +% +% {..} -> .. +% \IeC{..} -> .. +% ^^xx (expanding to) \IeC{..} -> .. +% +% Now all :-) that remains is testing whether the expansion of this +% token starts with \assemble@accent@cmds, since in this case we have +% found another accent cmd. +% +% #1 is the number of hits, #2 is the real definition in that +% encoding, and #3 is the next token (or group). +% +% The macros \assemble@tokens@ and \assemble@tokens@@ are +% intermediate steps to test whether #3 is empty; if yes, we simply +% expand #2. +% +\def\assemble@tokens@#1#2#3{ + \assemble@tokens@@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#3\@empty} +} + +\def\assemble@tokens@@#1#2#3#4{ + \ifx#4\@empty + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi + {#2{}} + {\assemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}} +} + +\def\assemble@tokens#1#2#3{ + \ifx\IeC#3 + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi + % try again but pick up argument of \IeC + {\assemble@tokens@{#1}{#2}} + % this will get rid of a group argument -- nasty :-) + {\expandafter\assemble@tokensz#3\relax\assemble@tokensz{#1}{#2}#3} +} + +\def\assemble@tokensz#1#2\assemble@tokensz#3#4#5{ + \ifx#1\IeC + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi + {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#2} + {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#5} +} + +% \assemble@tokensx: This passes an expanded and unexpanded version +% of #3 to \ifassemble@tokens to do the actual processing. +% +% \ifassemble@tokens: If we have found another accent command then +% keep its name and record that we had another hit and restart the +% scanning via \assemble@tokens, i.e., we append an `x' to the +% ``hit'' argument that we carry around for no good reason, and we +% append the official name of the accent command (which was picked +% up as part of the expansion of the input token) to the argument, +% storing the list of accents found so far. Note that we do use +% the official name, e.g. `\"', not `\OT1\"' -- the latter is only +% used for the very first accent! +% +% If it turns out that we don't have an accent command here it is +% time to stop the scanning and do some processing. Now finally the +% ``hit'' argument and the list of collected accents comes into play: +% We construct a command which name consists of the string +% ``handle@accent'', followed by a number of `x's each for each hit +% earlier on. Thus in a situation like \"\^a we would execute +% \handle@accentx and in case of \"a \handle@accent. This command +% gets as its arguments the collected accents followed by the token +% which stopped the scanning proccess, e.g. +% +% \handle@accentx \OT1\" \^ {a} +% +% and its purpose is to determine how to produce a glyph from it +% (e.g. as a composite or as a part composite or ...) +% +\def\assemble@tokensx#1#2#3{ + \expandafter + \ifassemble@tokens#3\@empty\@empty\@empty\ifassemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}} + +\def\ifassemble@tokens#1#2#3#4\ifassemble@tokens#5#6#7{ + % next token was defined via \DeclareText... + \ifx#1\assemble@accent@cmds + % thus #3 is its official name + \expandafter\assemble@tokens@ + \else + % execute what has been assembled and exit + \csname handle@accent#5\endcsname#6{#7} + \expandafter\@gobbletwo + \fi + % first two args to \assemble@tokens on next pass + {#5x}{#6#3} +} + + +% Depending on the number of accents found, \handle@accent[x[x]] will +% be called. + +% ONLY ONE: We check whether \#1-#2 is a known command (a composite) +% and execute it, otherwise try to execute #1{#2} as an accent +% command. +% +\def\handle@accent#1#2{ + \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname\relax + #1{#2} + \else + \csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname + \fi +} + +% TWO IN A ROW: We check for \#1-#2-#3. If undefined, we apply #1 to +% whatever is the result of #2{#3}. One could think of a more +% complex algorithm here, e.g., if #1-#2 is known as a composite +% modifier (whatever that is) apply that before trying the above but +% this is probably not necessary. +% +\def\handle@accentx#1#2#3{ + \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname\relax + #1{#2{#3}} + \else + \csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname + \fi +} + +% MORE THAN TWO: (Not handled so far.) If there are more than three, +% then the parsing will die at some point when \handle@accentxx... +% will turn out to be \relax, and then one accent will become an +% argument of another -- too bad. +% +\def\handle@accentxx#1#2#3#4{ + % catch more than two accents in a row + \errmessage{Too many accents, dropping first} + #2#3#4 +} + + +% This is simpler now. +% +\def\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4{ + \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname + #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3\endcsname{#4} +} + +% This is new. +% +\def\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4#5{ + \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname + #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3-\string#4\endcsname{#5} +} + +% This also. +% +\catcode\z@=11\relax +\def\DeclareTextDoubleComposite#1#2#3#4#5{ + \def\reserved@a{\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1{#2}{#3}{#4}} + \bgroup + \lccode\z@#5 + \lowercase{ + \egroup + \reserved@a ^^@} +} +\catcode\z@=15\relax + + +% Now we reinitialize the \@acc... macros to use our new definitions. +% +\AtBeginDocument{ + \let\@acci \' + \let\@accii \` + \let\@acciii \= +} + + +\endlinechar `\^^M + +\endinput + +% end of dblaccnt.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/devanagari.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/devanagari.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 127252f23e1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/devanagari.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/djibouti-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/djibouti-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8b4701a6150..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/djibouti-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dominica-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dominica-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7a84a199ee1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dominica-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dominican-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dominican-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 610df854ac7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dominican-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dutchw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dutchw.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 567d825a2b2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/dutchw.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/east-timor-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/east-timor-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 65cef7e3503..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/east-timor-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f519e31a6b5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index db6b99e281d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse3.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse3.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c0cac3b5da5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecosse3.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecuador-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecuador-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3c794f974b3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ecuador-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/egypt-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/egypt-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9133d622b2f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/egypt-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/el-salvador-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/el-salvador-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e4ef594c363..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/el-salvador-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/emk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/emk index 74bd3410906..d7a02ed56b0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/emk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/emk @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/csh -f if ( -f minitoc.dtx ) then echo 'Creating the english documentation...' if ( -f minitoc.maf ) then diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/en-mtc.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/en-mtc.bst new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..51768748658 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/en-mtc.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1351 @@ +%%% Modification of BibTeX style file /usr/share/texmf/bibtex/bst/base/plain.bst +%%% ... by urlbst, version 0.5 (marked with "% urlbst") +%%% See <http://www.astro.gla.ac.uk/users/norman/distrib/urlbst/> +%%% Added webpage entry type, and url and lastchecked fields. +%%% Further modified into en-mtc.bst by Jean-Pierre Drucbert for minitoc; +%%% released under the original license(s). +%%% Original headers follow... + + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + eprint % urlbst + doi % urlbst + url % urlbst + lastchecked % urlbst + } + {} + { label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +STRINGS { urlintro eprinturl eprintprefix doiprefix doiurl } % urlbst... +INTEGERS { hrefform addeprints adddoiresolver } +% Following constants may be adjusted by hand, if desired +FUNCTION {init.config.constants} +{ + "Available from: " 'urlintro := % prefix before URL + "http://arxiv.org/abs/" 'eprinturl := % prefix to make URL from eprint ref + "arXiv:" 'eprintprefix := % text prefix printed before eprint ref + "http://dx.doi.org/" 'doiurl := % prefix to make URL from DOI + "doi:" 'doiprefix := % text prefix printed before DOI ref + #0 'addeprints := % 0=no eprints; 1=include eprints + #0 'adddoiresolver := % 0=no DOI resolver; 1=include it + #0 'hrefform := % 0=no crossrefs; 1=hypertex xrefs; 2=hyperref refs +} +INTEGERS { + bracket.state + outside.brackets + open.brackets + within.brackets + close.brackets +} +% ...urlbst to here +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'outside.brackets := % urlbst + #1 'open.brackets := + #2 'within.brackets := + #3 'close.brackets := + + #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +% urlbst +FUNCTION {output.nonnull.original} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +% urlbst... +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ % Save the thing we've been asked to output + 's := + % If the bracket-state is close.brackets, then add a close-bracket to + % what is currently at the top of the stack, and set bracket.state + % to outside.brackets + bracket.state close.brackets = + { "]" * + outside.brackets 'bracket.state := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + bracket.state outside.brackets = + { % We're outside all brackets -- this is the normal situation. + % Write out what's currently at the top of the stack, using the + % original output.nonnull function. + s + output.nonnull.original + } + { % Still in brackets. Add open-bracket or (continuation) comma, add the + % new text (in s) to the top of the stack, and move to the close-brackets + % state, ready for next time (unless inbrackets resets it). If we come + % into this branch, then output.state is carefully undisturbed. + bracket.state open.brackets = + { " [" * } + { ", " * } % bracket.state will be within.brackets + if$ + s * + close.brackets 'bracket.state := + } + if$ +} + +% Call this function just before adding something which should be presented in +% brackets. bracket.state is handled specially within output.nonnull. +FUNCTION {inbrackets} +{ bracket.state close.brackets = + { within.brackets 'bracket.state := } % reset the state: not open nor closed + { open.brackets 'bracket.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lastchecked} +{ lastchecked empty$ + { "" } + { inbrackets "cited " lastchecked * } + if$ +} +% ...urlbst to here + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ outside.brackets 'bracket.state := % urlbst + newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ + bracket.state close.brackets = % urlbst + { "]" * } + 'skip$ + if$ + add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {slant} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "\emph{\sffamily " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{ff~}\bgroup\scshape {vv~}{ll}\egroup{{}}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > + { "," * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " \upshape\rmfamily et~al." * } + { " and " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", editors" * } + { ", editor" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + %{ title "t" change.case$ } On laisse le titre tel quel. + { title } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + { "\oldstylenums{" year * "}" * } + { month " " * "\oldstylenums{" * year * "}" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " of " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "volume and number" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "number" } + { "Number" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " in " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { ":" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "chapter" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "In " booktitle slant * } + { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle slant * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "Technical Report" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "In \emph{\sffamily " journal * "}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " \upshape\rmfamily et~al." * } + { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "In " + } + { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "\emph{\sffamily " * series * "}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "In \emph{\sffamily " booktitle * "}" * } + if$ + } + { "In " key * } + if$ + } + { "In " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +% urlbst... +% Functions for making hypertext links. +% In all cases, the stack has (link-text href-url) +% +% make 'null' specials +FUNCTION {make.href.null} +{ + pop$ +} +% make hypertex specials +FUNCTION {make.href.hypertex} +{ + "\special {html:<a href=" quote$ * + swap$ * quote$ * "> }" * swap$ * + "\special {html:</a>}" * +} +% make hyperref specials +FUNCTION {make.href.hyperref} +{ + "\href {" swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" * +} +FUNCTION {make.href} +{ hrefform #2 = + 'make.href.hyperref % hrefform = 2 + { hrefform #1 = + 'make.href.hypertex % hrefform = 1 + 'make.href.null % hrefform = 0 (or anything else) + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.url} +{ url empty$ + { "" } + { hrefform #1 = + { % special case -- add HyperTeX specials + urlintro "\url{" url * "}" * url make.href.hypertex * } + { urlintro "\url{" * url * "}" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.eprint} +{ eprint empty$ + { "" } + { eprintprefix eprint * eprinturl eprint * make.href } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.doi} +{ doi empty$ + { "" } + { doiprefix doi * doiurl doi * make.href } + if$ +} + +% Output a URL. We can't use the more normal idiom (something like +% `format.url output'), because the `inbrackets' within +% format.lastchecked applies to everything between calls to `output', +% so that `format.url format.lastchecked * output' ends up with both +% the URL and the lastchecked in brackets. +FUNCTION {output.url} +{ url empty$ + 'skip$ + { new.block + format.url output + format.lastchecked output + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.web.refs} +{ + new.block + output.url + addeprints eprint empty$ not and + { format.eprint output.nonnull } + 'skip$ + if$ + adddoiresolver doi empty$ not and + { format.doi output.nonnull } + 'skip$ + if$ +% addeprints +% { eprint empty$ +% 'skip$ +% { format.eprint output.nonnull } +% if$ +% } +% 'skip$ +% if$ +} + +% Webpage entry type. +% Title and url fields required; +% author, note, year, month, and lastchecked fields optional +% See references +% ISO 690-2 http://www.nlc-bnc.ca/iso/tc46sc9/standard/690-2e.htm +% http://www.classroom.net/classroom/CitingNetResources.html +% http://neal.ctstateu.edu/history/cite.html +% http://www.cas.usf.edu/english/walker/mla.html +% for citation formats for web pages. +FUNCTION {webpage} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { editor empty$ + 'skip$ % author and editor both optional + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + } + { editor empty$ + { format.authors output.nonnull } + { "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ +% author empty$ +% 'skip$ +% { format.authors output.nonnull } +% if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + inbrackets "online" output +% new.block % NO PERIOD + year empty$ + 'skip$ + { format.date "year" output.check } + if$ + lastchecked empty$ + 'skip$ + { format.lastchecked output } + if$ + new.block + format.url "url" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% ...urlbst to here + + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal slant "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.btitle output + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + address output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"January"} + +MACRO {feb} {"February"} + +MACRO {mar} {"March"} + +MACRO {apr} {"April"} + +MACRO {may} {"May"} + +MACRO {jun} {"June"} + +MACRO {jul} {"July"} + +MACRO {aug} {"August"} + +MACRO {sep} {"September"} + +MACRO {oct} {"October"} + +MACRO {nov} {"November"} + +MACRO {dec} {"December"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { " \upshape\rmfamily et al." * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { longest.label } + +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} + +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.config.constants} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/england-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/england-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b78c7325bf4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/england-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/equa-guinea-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/equa-guinea-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9aad0367678..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/equa-guinea-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eritrea-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eritrea-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f18f430d026..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eritrea-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/espa-l.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/espa-l.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 60d0afb8999..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/espa-l.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/espa-o.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/espa-o.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 95f0a24f29c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/espa-o.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/esperanto-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/esperanto-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a2ad741948b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/esperanto-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-a.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-a.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 046ee5ac9f8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-a.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-b.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-b.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d76f2e87e25..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-b.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5a12b5b0179..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/estonia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eth2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eth2.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 11d49a084cc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eth2.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiolang.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiolang.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index adf6e9d9776..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiolang.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3f8d20b1cc6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia-p.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia-p.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index da2ee247659..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia-p.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 455f1bdda1d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ethiopia.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4a73b6ce8ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan1.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7739b894b7f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan1.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan2.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a1e3404db29..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euro-lan2.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eusk-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eusk-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 65f9d568901..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/eusk-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euskara.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euskara.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2ccf654a874..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/euskara.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2c.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2c.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3ddefe386a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2c.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2c.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2c.tex index 8d37b483a9e..84ee7856763 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2c.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2c.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% {report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-2c.tex}% @@ -78,7 +77,111 @@ \end{multicols} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-2c.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2nd.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2nd.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..57ca71ca6d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2nd.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2nd.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2nd.tex index e7a60109886..1b2bcc00e2c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2nd.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-2nd.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> %% Test de french2.mld: %% « seconde » ou « deuxième » partie? %% compilez 3 fois. @@ -38,7 +37,7 @@ \usepackage[french]{babel} \usepackage{franc,frnew} \usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} \usepackage{mypatches} \begin{document} \ifmtcsecondpart @@ -65,7 +64,111 @@ Il y a une partie ou plus de deux parties: deuxième. \chapter{P3C2} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-2nd.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-3co.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-3co.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..372577c4f91 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-3co.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-3co.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-3co.tex index 769a9c0b085..74a7efe7bd9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-3co.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-3co.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-3co.tex}% [2007/02/19] @@ -121,7 +120,111 @@ a multicolumn table of contents} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] \clearpage \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-3co.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.bib new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d23a9f9df89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.bib @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +@MISC{minitoc, + TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf}}", + MONTH=jul, + YEAR=2008} + +@MISC{minitoc-fr, + TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf}}", + MONTH=jul, + YEAR=2008} + +@MISC{shorttoc, + TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf}}", + MONTH=aug, + YEAR=2002} + +@BOOK{dark, + TITLE="{Against a Dark Background}", + AUTHOR="Banks, Iain Menzies", + PUBLISHER="Bantam Books", + ISBN="0553292240 (pb)", + YEAR=1993} + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..77a547f8fbd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.tex index bc778ff3e20..60702f27dd3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-add.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} %% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-add.tex}% @@ -162,7 +161,111 @@ I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-add.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ads.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ads.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..475da993d45 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ads.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ads.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ads.tex index 719cb874576..9f2515d3953 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ads.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ads.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside,12pt,a4paper]{article} \ProvidesFile{mtc-ads.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -226,7 +225,111 @@ I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-ads.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-amm.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-amm.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bb899204e50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-amm.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-amm.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-amm.tex index b712fea912d..5c48acc778d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-amm.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-amm.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside]{memoir} \ProvidesFile{mtc-amm.tex}% [2007/08/29] @@ -69,7 +68,111 @@ Afterthoughts appendix \lipsum[8] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-amm.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-apx.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-apx.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b72bb8880b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-apx.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-apx.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-apx.tex index 829a04dbc9f..6e9aeda6a85 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-apx.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-apx.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-apx.tex}% [2007/03/22]% @@ -68,7 +67,111 @@ Second appendix \end{mtchideinmaintoc} % end of hiding \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-apx.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-art.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-art.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0c16690d8fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-art.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-art.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-art.tex index 2df5e425cda..22b58b65d9b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-art.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-art.tex @@ -18,18 +18,17 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> %% mtc-art.tex -%% This file contains a set of tests for the minitoc.sty version #60 +%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc %% package. You can alter most of parameters to test. %% article (\section must be defined) \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article} @@ -208,7 +207,111 @@ bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla \subsection{D3} \lipsum[65] \subsection{D4} \lipsum[66] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-art.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bk.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bk.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c270b13b0f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bk.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bk.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bk.tex index fb0bb681958..ad4a12e3f8f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bk.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bk.tex @@ -18,19 +18,18 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% A example file (differs from previous versions) %% mtc-bk.tex -%% This file contains a set of tests for the minitoc.sty version #60 package file. +%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc package file. %% You can alter most of parameters to test. %% Class: book/report (\chapter must be defined). %% You can use a copy of this file to play with minitoc commands and parameters. @@ -235,7 +234,111 @@ \lipsum[68] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-bk.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bo.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..128a5a97a29 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bo.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bo.tex index a1ecf8d48ea..e8f51fe00f7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bo.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-bo.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[10pt]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-bo.tex}% [2007/04/17] @@ -54,7 +53,7 @@ \usepackage[francais]{babel} \usepackage{franc,frnew} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} \usepackage{mypatches} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -196,7 +195,111 @@ Texte dans la section \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-bo.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ch0.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ch0.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..39adcbe254b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ch0.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ch0.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ch0.tex index 2f190781847..20bb279947e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ch0.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ch0.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-ch0.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -78,7 +77,111 @@ dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do things by halves around here. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-ch0.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-cri.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-cri.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cb979d8094c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-cri.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-cri.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-cri.tex index bf514b3708d..51d0d0e0ada 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-cri.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-cri.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% {report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-cri.tex}% @@ -85,7 +84,111 @@ Présentation des lecteurs\ldots \section{Deuxième section~D} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-cri.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fko.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fko.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a31d91ab452 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fko.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fko.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fko.tex index 5fd6095e93a..7e13cc7fdfb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fko.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fko.tex @@ -18,20 +18,19 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[german,a4paper,oneside]{scrbook} \ProvidesFile{mtc-fko.tex}% [2007/02/19] -\usepackage{babel} +\usepackage[germanb]{babel} \usepackage[tight]{minitoc} \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} % optional \mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\sectfont\small} @@ -46,7 +45,111 @@ Auch der Text \glqq Inhaltsangabe\grqq\ will so wie koma es definiert. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-fko.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo1.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b89fa473873 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo1.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo1.tex index d4ca01ea235..7fa763649ae 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo1.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo1.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-fo1.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -55,7 +54,111 @@ \subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-fo1.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a279f03bdd8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo2.tex index 62ea30ccebb..84866d7fbf3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-fo2.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-fo2.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -63,7 +62,111 @@ \subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] \subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-fo2.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-gap.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-gap.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..96172bca7ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-gap.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-gap.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-gap.tex index 22714e0e7ad..c91e2f5d8ea 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-gap.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-gap.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[a4paper,oneside,12pt]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-gap.tex}[2007/01/04]% \usepackage{txfonts,vruler} % vertical graduation to note positions (Zhuhan Jiang) @@ -50,7 +49,111 @@ \chapter{First chapter of third part} \chapter{Second chapter of third part} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-gap.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi1.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..51fb3401df0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi1.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi1.tex index 59e5759c25c..794c8c55815 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi1.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi1.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-hi1.tex}% [2007/01/04]% @@ -86,7 +85,111 @@ \end{table} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-hi1.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5f5bda0ab98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi2.tex index ea29cc89ed4..fde601b85bd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hi2.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-hi2.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -84,7 +83,111 @@ \end{table} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-hi2.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hia.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hia.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1b75167ebb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hia.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hia.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hia.tex index 78a1a38bd44..02ff9d6f7a0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hia.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hia.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass% [oneside,a4paper]{article} \ProvidesFile{mtc-hia.tex}% @@ -77,7 +76,111 @@ \lipsum[11] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-hia.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hir.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hir.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9fa184b6fa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hir.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hir.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hir.tex index ab8fc51c756..f1ce90e2437 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hir.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hir.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[a4paper]{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-hir.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -74,7 +73,111 @@ \lipsum[11] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-hir.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hop.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hop.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fc40963dbc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hop.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hop.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hop.tex index bc4db4d8665..7e3f8c24f72 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hop.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-hop.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside,12pt]{scrbook} \ProvidesFile{mtc-hop.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -68,7 +67,111 @@ \end{figure} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-hop.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-liv.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-liv.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dccc9c6f6a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-liv.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-liv.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-liv.tex index 895046df195..168e691789a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-liv.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-liv.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[10pt,twoside,openright]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-liv.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -197,7 +196,111 @@ Il y a eu beaucoup de verbiage autour de l'aptitude supposée du modèle~[...] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-liv.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mem.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mem.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..05d6c6a8803 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mem.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mem.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mem.tex index 3d7f5fd64b1..e734943746d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mem.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mem.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass% [oneside]{memoir} \ProvidesFile{mtc-mem.tex}% @@ -55,7 +54,111 @@ \section{S-2-two} \lipsum[7] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-mem.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mm1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mm1.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c0f5ec59b15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mm1.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mm1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mm1.tex index f7b38fad6ea..a031196cca1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mm1.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mm1.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside]{memoir} \ProvidesFile{mtc-mm1.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -58,7 +57,111 @@ \section{Third section} \lipsum[3] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-mm1.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mu.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mu.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..20b49544c82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mu.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mu.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mu.tex index 270a01a6545..20a4431aff4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mu.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-mu.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[12pt]{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-mu.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -100,7 +99,111 @@ Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn. \end{thebibliography} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-mu.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-nom.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-nom.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..928f9a21f9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-nom.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-nom.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-nom.tex index 1f33286d496..fc98669cce7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-nom.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-nom.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-nom.tex}% [2007/04/02] @@ -58,7 +57,111 @@ follows easily. \nomenclature{$i$}{The imaginary unit}% \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-nom.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ocf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ocf.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..36b8c32971d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ocf.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ocf.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ocf.tex index 6292db44cc3..e1dd4c645df 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ocf.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ocf.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[oneside]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-ocf.tex}% [2007/04/02] @@ -76,7 +75,111 @@ \section{Zulu} \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-ocf.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ofs.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ofs.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e57a66368a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ofs.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ofs.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ofs.tex index 77ba664f5b7..f3bc393f0ed 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ofs.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-ofs.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[a4paper]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-ofs.tex}% [2007/04/17] @@ -77,7 +76,111 @@ \section{Zulu} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-ofs.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-sbf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-sbf.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3fb2004bd16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-sbf.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-sbf.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-sbf.tex index d48bf6d1205..478c4facfde 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-sbf.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-sbf.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[12pt]{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-sbf.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -81,7 +80,111 @@ Figure~\vref{3figs} contains two top ``subfigures'' and Figure~\vref{3figs-c}. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-sbf.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-scr.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-scr.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..18017f12dad --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-scr.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-scr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-scr.tex index 3a0681f38c0..64ca4f0da7c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-scr.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-scr.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[12pt,halfparskip,liststotoc,bibtotoc]{scrreprt} \ProvidesFile{mtc-scr.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -74,7 +73,111 @@ Text.\\ Hier sollte nun der Anhang sein, davor das Verzeichnis dafür. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-scr.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-syn.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-syn.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..15d80523653 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-syn.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-syn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-syn.tex index 31207b397a6..315ca5e5b83 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-syn.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-syn.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[a4paper,twoside,12pt]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-syn.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -62,7 +61,111 @@ Some more text. Some more text. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-syn.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tbi.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tbi.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bcc348770b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tbi.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tbi.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tbi.tex index 2a0575e2ff8..4701ec9261a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tbi.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tbi.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[a4paper]{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-tbi.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -72,7 +71,111 @@ \adjustmtc \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-tbi.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tlc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tlc.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..be7ca1feca5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tlc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tlc.tex index 79063890d87..9e01c4799ad 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlc.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tlc.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass{article} \ProvidesFile{mtc-tlc.tex}% [2007/01/04] @@ -60,7 +59,111 @@ \subsection{History} \ldots \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-tlc.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tsf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tsf.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bd9087c0e3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tsf.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tsf.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tsf.tex index 5df52690fcb..f1eac9ab6bc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tsf.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-tsf.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass{report} \ProvidesFile{mtc-tsf.tex}[2008/04/03]% \usepackage{fullpage} @@ -97,7 +96,111 @@ subfigures (figures~\ref{fig+C}, \ref{fig+D}, and \ref{fig+F}) should have centered labels. \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-tsf.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-vti.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-vti.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f0805a2f4fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-vti.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-vti.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-vti.tex index be20b004ec7..fafe518248d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-vti.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/mtc-vti.tex @@ -18,16 +18,15 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> \documentclass[10pt,a4paper,oneside]{book} \ProvidesFile{mtc-vti.tex}[2008/06/26]% \usepackage{lipsum} @@ -71,7 +70,111 @@ \lipsum[3] \end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% %% End of file `mtc-vti.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/faroe-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/faroe-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index badc4d694d1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/faroe-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/farsi-logo.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/farsi-logo.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 168a730c880..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/farsi-logo.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/farsi.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/farsi.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8bad36dd4e1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/farsi.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/feroe.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/feroe.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ac3502522e7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/feroe.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fiji-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fiji-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d6cdd382615..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fiji-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1ace35dea3c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finlande1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finlande1.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d590e17b025..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finlande1.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finlande2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finlande2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2e32dfd3b28..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finlande2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finnishd.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finnishd.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 02dd1f83b18..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finnishd.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finnishl.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finnishl.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 937b5c1f0d0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/finnishl.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/flanders-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/flanders-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d7856d1d796..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/flanders-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fmk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fmk index 3f3095764ea..5a65fd79f06 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fmk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fmk @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/csh -f if ( -f minitoc-fr.dtx ) then echo 'Creating the french documentation...' if ( -f minitoc-fr.maf ) then diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fr-mtc.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fr-mtc.bst new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e076f1c08b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fr-mtc.bst @@ -0,0 +1,1387 @@ +%%% Modification of BibTeX style file frplain1.bst +%%% ... by urlbst, version 0.5 (marked with "% urlbst") +%%% See <http://www.astro.gla.ac.uk/users/norman/distrib/urlbst/> +%%% Added webpage entry type, and url and lastchecked fields. +%%% Added eprint support. +%%% Added DOI support. +%%% Added hyperref support. +%%% Further modified into fr-mtc.bst by Jean-Pierre Drucbert for minitoc; +%%% released under the original license(s). +%%% Original headers follow... + +% +% J'ai modifie' le style pour qu'il soit plus international. +% En plus les titres sont laisse's tels quels, avec majuscules/minuscules. +% +% Ronan Keryell@cri.ensmp.fr. +% +% 01/02/1995 : utilisation des macros de frbib.sty pour avoir des noms +% francise's pour les << editeur >>, << et >>, etc. +% +% 26/04/1994 : les noms passent en petites capitales. +% modification de la cle' dans format.lab.names +% et rajout des fonctions output.guillemet et +% output.check.guillemet. +% ??/02/2005 : (Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert) suppression d'une +% virgule avant « et » dans une liste. +% 0202/2006 : (Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert) l'année en +% chiffres anciens. + +ENTRY + { address + author + booktitle + chapter + edition + editor + howpublished + institution + journal + key + month + note + number + organization + pages + publisher + school + series + title + type + volume + year + eprint % urlbst + doi % urlbst + url % urlbst + lastchecked % urlbst + } + {} + { label } + +INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } + +STRINGS { urlintro eprinturl eprintprefix doiprefix doiurl } % urlbst... +INTEGERS { hrefform addeprints adddoiresolver } +% Following constants may be adjusted by hand, if desired +FUNCTION {init.config.constants} +{ + "Disponible depuis: " 'urlintro := % prefix before URL + "http://arxiv.org/abs/" 'eprinturl := % prefix to make URL from eprint ref + "arXiv:" 'eprintprefix := % text prefix printed before eprint ref + "http://dx.doi.org/" 'doiurl := % prefix to make URL from DOI + "doi:" 'doiprefix := % text prefix printed before DOI ref + #1 'addeprints := % 0=no eprints; 1=include eprints + #1 'adddoiresolver := % 0=no DOI resolver; 1=include it + #2 'hrefform := % 0=no crossrefs; 1=hypertex xrefs; 2=hyperref refs +} +INTEGERS { + bracket.state + outside.brackets + open.brackets + within.brackets + close.brackets +} +% ...urlbst to here +FUNCTION {init.state.consts} +{ #0 'outside.brackets := % urlbst + #1 'open.brackets := + #2 'within.brackets := + #3 'close.brackets := + + #0 'before.all := + #1 'mid.sentence := + #2 'after.sentence := + #3 'after.block := +} + +STRINGS { s t } + +% urlbst +FUNCTION {output.nonnull.original} +{ 's := + output.state mid.sentence = + { ", " * write$ } + { output.state after.block = + { add.period$ write$ + newline$ + "\newblock " write$ + } + { output.state before.all = + 'write$ + { add.period$ " " * write$ } + if$ + } + if$ + mid.sentence 'output.state := + } + if$ + s +} + +% urlbst... +FUNCTION {output.nonnull} +{ % Save the thing we've been asked to output + 's := + % If the bracket-state is close.brackets, then add a close-bracket to + % what is currently at the top of the stack, and set bracket.state + % to outside.brackets + bracket.state close.brackets = + { "]" * + outside.brackets 'bracket.state := + } + 'skip$ + if$ + bracket.state outside.brackets = + { % We're outside all brackets -- this is the normal situation. + % Write out what's currently at the top of the stack, using the + % original output.nonnull function. + s + output.nonnull.original + } + { % Still in brackets. Add open-bracket or (continuation) comma, add the + % new text (in s) to the top of the stack, and move to the close-brackets + % state, ready for next time (unless inbrackets resets it). If we come + % into this branch, then output.state is carefully undisturbed. + bracket.state open.brackets = + { " [" * } + { ", " * } % bracket.state will be within.brackets + if$ + s * + close.brackets 'bracket.state := + } + if$ +} + +% Call this function just before adding something which should be presented in +% brackets. bracket.state is handled specially within output.nonnull. +FUNCTION {inbrackets} +{ bracket.state close.brackets = + { within.brackets 'bracket.state := } % reset the state: not open nor closed + { open.brackets 'bracket.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.lastchecked} +{ lastchecked empty$ + { "" } + { inbrackets "cit\'e " lastchecked * } + if$ +} +% ...urlbst to here + +FUNCTION {output} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.guillemet} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "<<~" swap$ * "~>>" * output.nonnull } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + 'output.nonnull + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.check.guillemet} +{ 't := + duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } + { "<<~" swap$ * "~>>" * output.nonnull } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.bibitem} +{ outside.brackets 'bracket.state := % urlbst + newline$ + "\bibitem{" write$ + cite$ write$ + "}" write$ + newline$ + "" + before.all 'output.state := +} + +FUNCTION {fin.entry} +{ + bracket.state close.brackets = % urlbst + { "]" * } + 'skip$ + if$ + add.period$ + write$ + newline$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block} +{ output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.block 'output.state := } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence} +{ output.state after.block = + 'skip$ + { output.state before.all = + 'skip$ + { after.sentence 'output.state := } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {not} +{ { #0 } + { #1 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {and} +{ 'skip$ + { pop$ #0 } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {or} +{ { pop$ #1 } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.block + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} +{ empty$ + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} +{ empty$ + swap$ empty$ + and + 'skip$ + 'new.sentence + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {field.or.null} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {emphasize} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {slant} +{ duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ "" } + { "\emph{\sffamily " swap$ * "}" * } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } + +FUNCTION {format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { s nameptr "{ff~}\bgroup\scshape {vv~}{ll}\egroup{{}}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr #1 > + { namesleft #1 > + { ", " * t * } + { numnames #2 > +% { "," * } + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + t "others" = + { " \upshape\rmfamily et~al." * } + { " \andname{} " * t * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + 't + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.authors} +{ author empty$ + { "" } + { author format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.editors} +{ editor empty$ + { "" } + { editor format.names + editor num.names$ #1 > + { ", \editornames{}" * } + { ", \editorname{}" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.title} +{ title empty$ + { "" } + %{ title "t" change.case$ } On laisse le titre tel quel. + { title } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {n.dashify} +{ 't := + "" + { t empty$ not } + { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = + { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not + { "--" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } + { "-" * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + while$ + } + if$ + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ * + t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := + } + if$ + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.date} +{ year empty$ + { month empty$ + { "" } + { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ + month + } + if$ + } + { month empty$ + { "\oldstylenums{" year * "}" * } + { month " " * "\oldstylenums{" * year * "}" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.btitle} +{ title emphasize +} + +FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} +{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < + { "~" } + { " " } + if$ + swap$ * * +} + +FUNCTION {either.or.check} +{ empty$ + 'pop$ + { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.bvolume} +{ volume empty$ + { "" } + { "\volumename{}" volume tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + 'skip$ + { " \ofname{} " * series emphasize * } + if$ + "\volumename{} \andname{} \numbername{}" number either.or.check + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.number.series} +{ volume empty$ + { number empty$ + { series field.or.null } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { "\numbername{}" } + { "\Numbername{}" } + if$ + number tie.or.space.connect + series empty$ + { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } + { " \inname{} " * series * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + { "" } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.edition} +{ edition empty$ + { "" } + { output.state mid.sentence = + { edition "l" change.case$ " \editionname{}" * } + { edition "t" change.case$ " \editionname{}" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +INTEGERS { multiresult } + +FUNCTION {multi.page.check} +{ 't := + #0 'multiresult := + { multiresult not + t empty$ not + and + } + { t #1 #1 substring$ + duplicate$ "-" = + swap$ duplicate$ "," = + swap$ "+" = + or or + { #1 'multiresult := } + { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } + if$ + } + while$ + multiresult +} + +FUNCTION {format.pages} +{ pages empty$ + { "" } + { pages multi.page.check + { "\pagesname{}" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } + { "\pagename{}" pages tie.or.space.connect } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} +{ volume field.or.null + number empty$ + 'skip$ + { "(" number * ")" * * + volume empty$ + { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { duplicate$ empty$ + { pop$ format.pages } + { "{\froff$:$}" * pages n.dashify * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} +{ chapter empty$ + 'format.pages + { type empty$ + { "\chaptername{}" } + { type "l" change.case$ } + if$ + chapter tie.or.space.connect + pages empty$ + 'skip$ + { ", " * format.pages * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} +{ booktitle empty$ + { "" } + { editor empty$ + { "\Inname{} " booktitle slant * } + { "\Inname{} " format.editors * ", " * booktitle slant * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} +{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ + month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ + and and and and and + key empty$ not and + { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} +{ type empty$ + 'skip$ + { pop$ + type "t" change.case$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.tr.number} +{ type empty$ + { "\technicalreportname{}" } + 'type + if$ + number empty$ + { "t" change.case$ } + { number tie.or.space.connect } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} +{ key empty$ + { journal empty$ + { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * + warning$ + "" + } + { "\Inname{} \emph{\sffamily " journal * "}" * } + if$ + } + { "\Inname{} " key * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} +{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ + editor num.names$ duplicate$ + #2 > + { pop$ " et~al." * } + { #2 < + 'skip$ + { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = + { " \upshape\rmfamily et~al." * } + { " \andname{} " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} +{ volume empty$ + { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ + "\Inname{} " + } + { "\Volumename{}" volume tie.or.space.connect + " of " * + } + if$ + editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { series empty$ + { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" * + } + { "\emph{\sffamily " * series * "}" * } + if$ + } + { key * } + if$ + } + { format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} +{ editor empty$ + editor field.or.null author field.or.null = + or + { key empty$ + { booktitle empty$ + { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * + crossref * warning$ + "" + } + { "\Inname{} \emph{\sffamily " booktitle * "}" * } + if$ + } + { "\Inname{} " key * } + if$ + } + { "\Inname{} " format.crossref.editor * } + if$ + " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * +} + +% urlbst... +% Functions for making hypertext links. +% In all cases, the stack has (link-text href-url) +% +% make 'null' specials +FUNCTION {make.href.null} +{ + pop$ +} +% make hypertex specials +FUNCTION {make.href.hypertex} +{ + "\special {html:<a href=" quote$ * + swap$ * quote$ * "> }" * swap$ * + "\special {html:</a>}" * +} +% make hyperref specials +FUNCTION {make.href.hyperref} +{ + "\href {" swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" * +} +FUNCTION {make.href} +{ hrefform #2 = + 'make.href.hyperref % hrefform = 2 + { hrefform #1 = + 'make.href.hypertex % hrefform = 1 + 'make.href.null % hrefform = 0 (or anything else) + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.url} +{ url empty$ + { "" } + { hrefform #1 = + { % special case -- add HyperTeX specials + urlintro "{\froff\url{" url * "}}" * url make.href.hypertex * } + { urlintro "{\froff\url{" * url * "}}" * } + if$ + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.eprint} +{ eprint empty$ + { "" } + { eprintprefix eprint * eprinturl eprint * make.href } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {format.doi} +{ doi empty$ + { "" } + { doiprefix doi * doiurl doi * make.href } + if$ +} + +% Output a URL. We can't use the more normal idiom (something like +% `format.url output'), because the `inbrackets' within +% format.lastchecked applies to everything between calls to `output', +% so that `format.url format.lastchecked * output' ends up with both +% the URL and the lastchecked in brackets. +FUNCTION {output.url} +{ url empty$ + 'skip$ + { new.block + format.url output + format.lastchecked output + } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {output.web.refs} +{ + new.block + output.url + addeprints eprint empty$ not and + { format.eprint output.nonnull } + 'skip$ + if$ + adddoiresolver doi empty$ not and + { format.doi output.nonnull } + 'skip$ + if$ +% addeprints +% { eprint empty$ +% 'skip$ +% { format.eprint output.nonnull } +% if$ +% } +% 'skip$ +% if$ +} + +% Webpage entry type. +% Title and url fields required; +% author, note, year, month, and lastchecked fields optional +% See references +% ISO 690-2 http://www.nlc-bnc.ca/iso/tc46sc9/standard/690-2e.htm +% http://www.classroom.net/classroom/CitingNetResources.html +% http://neal.ctstateu.edu/history/cite.html +% http://www.cas.usf.edu/english/walker/mla.html +% for citation formats for web pages. +FUNCTION {webpage} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { editor empty$ + 'skip$ % author and editor both optional + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + } + { editor empty$ + { format.authors output.nonnull } + { "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ * warning$ } + if$ + } + if$ +% author empty$ +% 'skip$ +% { format.authors output.nonnull } +% if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + inbrackets "en ligne" output +% new.block % NO PERIOD + year empty$ + 'skip$ + { format.date "year" output.check } + if$ + lastchecked empty$ + 'skip$ + { format.lastchecked output } + if$ + new.block + format.url "url" output.check + new.block + note output + fin.entry +} +% ...urlbst to here + + +FUNCTION {article} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + new.block + crossref missing$ + { journal slant "journal" output.check + format.vol.num.pages output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.article.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {book} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {booklet} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + howpublished address new.block.checkb + howpublished output + address output + format.date output + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inbook} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } + { format.authors output.nonnull + crossref missing$ + { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + crossref missing$ + { format.bvolume output + format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.number.series output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + } + { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check + new.block + format.book.crossref output.nonnull + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {incollection} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.chapter.pages output + new.sentence + publisher "publisher" output.check + address output + format.edition output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.chapter.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {inproceedings} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + new.block + crossref missing$ + { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + format.pages output + address empty$ + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + organization output + publisher output + } + if$ + } + { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull + format.pages output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } + +FUNCTION {manual} +{ output.bibitem + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output.nonnull + address output + } + if$ + } + { format.authors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { address new.block.checka + address output + } + 'skip$ + if$ + } + { organization address new.block.checkb + organization output + address output + } + if$ + format.edition output + format.date output + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {mastersthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + new.block + "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {misc} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors output + title howpublished new.block.checkb + format.btitle output.guillemet + howpublished new.block.checka + howpublished output + format.date output + new.block + note output + address output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry + empty.misc.check +} + +FUNCTION {phdthesis} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + new.block + "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull + school "school" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {proceedings} +{ output.bibitem + editor empty$ + { organization output } + { format.editors output.nonnull } + if$ + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + format.bvolume output + format.number.series output + address empty$ + { editor empty$ + { publisher new.sentence.checka } + { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb + organization output + } + if$ + publisher output + format.date "year" output.check + } + { address output.nonnull + format.date "year" output.check + new.sentence + editor empty$ + 'skip$ + { organization output } + if$ + publisher output + } + if$ + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {techreport} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + new.block + format.tr.number output.nonnull + institution "institution" output.check + address output + format.date "year" output.check + new.block + note output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {unpublished} +{ output.bibitem + format.authors "author" output.check + new.block + format.btitle "title" output.check.guillemet + new.block + note "note" output.check + format.date output + output.web.refs % urlbst + fin.entry +} + +FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } + +MACRO {jan} {"\janname{}"} + +MACRO {feb} {"\febname{}"} + +MACRO {mar} {"\marname{}"} + +MACRO {apr} {"\aprname{}"} + +MACRO {may} {"\mayname{}"} + +MACRO {jun} {"\junname{}"} + +MACRO {jul} {"\julname{}"} + +MACRO {aug} {"\augname{}"} + +MACRO {sep} {"\sepname{}"} + +MACRO {oct} {"\octname{}"} + +MACRO {nov} {"\novname{}"} + +MACRO {dec} {"\decname{}"} + +MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} + +MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} + +MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} + +MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} + +MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} + +MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} + +MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} + +MACRO {ieeetcad} + {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} + +MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} + +MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} + +MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} + +MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} + +MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} + +MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} + +MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} + +MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} + +MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} + +MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} + +MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} + +MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} + +READ + +FUNCTION {sortify} +{ purify$ + "l" change.case$ +} + +INTEGERS { len } + +FUNCTION {chop.word} +{ 's := + 'len := + s #1 len substring$ = + { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } + 's + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.names} +{ 's := + #1 'nameptr := + "" + s num.names$ 'numnames := + numnames 'namesleft := + { namesleft #0 > } + { nameptr #1 > + { " " * } + 'skip$ + if$ + s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := + nameptr numnames = t "others" = and + { " \upshape\rmfamily et al." * } + { t sortify * } + if$ + nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := + namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := + } + while$ +} + +FUNCTION {sort.format.title} +{ 't := + "A " #2 + "An " #3 + "The " #4 t chop.word + chop.word + chop.word + sortify + #1 global.max$ substring$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.sort} +{ author empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} +{ author empty$ + { editor empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} +{ author empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { author sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} +{ editor empty$ + { organization empty$ + { key empty$ + { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ + "" + } + { key sortify } + if$ + } + { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } + if$ + } + { editor sort.format.names } + if$ +} + +FUNCTION {presort} +{ type$ "book" = + type$ "inbook" = + or + 'author.editor.sort + { type$ "proceedings" = + 'editor.organization.sort + { type$ "manual" = + 'author.organization.sort + 'author.sort + if$ + } + if$ + } + if$ + " " + * + year field.or.null sortify + * + " " + * + title field.or.null + sort.format.title + * + #1 entry.max$ substring$ + 'sort.key$ := +} + +ITERATE {presort} + +SORT + +STRINGS { longest.label } + +INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } + +FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} +{ "" 'longest.label := + #1 'number.label := + #0 'longest.label.width := +} + +FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} +{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := + number.label #1 + 'number.label := + label width$ longest.label.width > + { label 'longest.label := + label width$ 'longest.label.width := + } + 'skip$ + if$ +} + +EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} + +ITERATE {longest.label.pass} + +FUNCTION {begin.bib} +{ preamble$ empty$ + 'skip$ + { preamble$ write$ newline$ } + if$ + "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {begin.bib} + +EXECUTE {init.config.constants} +EXECUTE {init.state.consts} + +ITERATE {call.type$} + +FUNCTION {end.bib} +{ newline$ + "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ +} + +EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/franc.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/franc.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..59683a4ddb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/franc.sty @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +%% LaTeX2e file `./franc.sty' +%% generated by the `filecontents' environment +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. +%% +\ProvidesPackage{franc}[1994/12/16] +\def\figurename{Figure} +\def\tablename{Table} +\def\contentsname{Table des Mati\`eres} +\def\listfigurename{Liste des Figures} +\def\listtablename{Liste des Tableaux} +\def\bibname{Bibliographie} +\def\indexname{Index} +\def\chaptername{Chapitre} +\def\appendixname{Appendice} +\def\partname{Partie} +\def\abstractname{R\'esum\'e} +\def\seename{voir} +\def\alsoseename{voir aussi} +\def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm er}$\else\number\day\fi \space\ifcase\month\or +janvier\or f\'evrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or juin\or +juillet\or ao\^ut\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or d\'ecembre\fi +\space\number\year} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/france-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/france-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f4889760337..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/france-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/france-lr.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/france-lr.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7d8f5349ccc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/france-lr.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/franco.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/franco.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ff27dd94f50..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/franco.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/francophonie-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/francophonie-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f58947564f2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/francophonie-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/frbib.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/frbib.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ba6aa9c354e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/frbib.sty @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +%% LaTeX2e file `./frbib.sty' +%% generated by the `filecontents' environment +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. +%% +% +% Pour la bibliographie: +% +% En fonction du style french, par de'faut en anglais : +% Si on ne fait pas de traduction de mots en franc,ais ou que cette notion +% n'existe pas, on fait tout en anglais : + +%%% Correction --bg 2001/08/03 +%%%\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\let\ifFTR\iffalse\fi +\def\@tempa{\let\ifFTR\iffalse} +\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\expandafter\@tempa\fi + +\newcommand{\andname}{\ifFTR et\else and\fi} +\newcommand{\editorname}{\ifFTR \'editeur\else editor\fi} +\newcommand{\editornames}{\ifFTR \'editeurs\else editors\fi} +\newcommand{\volumename}{\ifFTR volume\else volume\fi} +\newcommand{\Volumename}{\ifFTR Volume\else volumes\fi} +\newcommand{\ofname}{\ifFTR de\else of\fi} +\newcommand{\numbername}{\ifFTR num\'ero\else number\fi} +\newcommand{\Numbername}{\ifFTR Num\'ero\else Number\fi} +\newcommand{\inname}{\ifFTR dans\else in\fi} +\newcommand{\Inname}{\ifFTR Dans\else In\fi} +\newcommand{\editionname}{\ifFTR \'edition\else edition\fi} +%\def\pagename{\ifFTR page\else page \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty. +\newcommand{\pagesname}{\ifFTR pages\else pages\fi} +%\newcommand{\chaptername}{\ifFTR chapitre\else \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty. +\newcommand{\technicalreportname}{\ifFTR Rapport Technique\else Technical + Report\fi} +\newcommand{\revisionname}{\ifFTR R\'evision\else Revision\fi} +\newcommand{\janname}{\ifFTR janvier\else January\fi} +\newcommand{\febname}{\ifFTR f\'evrier\else February\fi} +\newcommand{\marname}{\ifFTR mars\else March \fi} +\newcommand{\aprname}{\ifFTR avril\else April\fi} +\newcommand{\mayname}{\ifFTR mai\else May\fi} +\newcommand{\junname}{\ifFTR juin\else June\fi} +\newcommand{\julname}{\ifFTR juillet\else July\fi} +\newcommand{\augname}{\ifFTR ao\^ut\else August\fi} +\newcommand{\sepname}{\ifFTR septembre\else September\fi} +\newcommand{\octname}{\ifFTR octobre\else October\fi} +\newcommand{\novname}{\ifFTR novembre\else November\fi} +\newcommand{\decname}{\ifFTR d\'ecembre\else December\fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/frnew.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/frnew.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..45597bc4bb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/frnew.sty @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +%% LaTeX2e file `./frnew.sty' +%% generated by the `filecontents' environment +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. +%% +%permet dans la frappe de retrouver les habitudes de +%la dactylographie francaise qui conseille de mettre +%un espace avant les signes de ponctuation ; : ! ? +%et d'empecher pourtant une coupure de ligne a cet +%endroit dans le traitement +\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% + \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~\do\!\do\?\do\:\do\;} +\catcode`\@=11 +\catcode`\;=\active +\catcode`\:=\active +\catcode`\!=\active +\catcode`\?=\active +\def;{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string;} +\def:{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\penalty\@M\ \fi\string:} +\def!{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string!} +\def?{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string?} +\let\old@C\^ +\let\old@T\" +%\uccode"10=`I +%\uccode"11=`J +\uccode`\i=`I +\uccode`\j=`J +%\def\^#1{\ifx#1i{\old@C\i}\else{\old@C #1}\fi} +%\def\"#1{\ifx#1i{\old@T\i}\else{\old@T #1}\fi} +\def\og{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}} +\def\fg{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\,\rangle\!\rangle$}} +\def\guill#1{\og\relax #1\relax\fg} +\frenchspacing +\def\fron{\catcode`\;=\active +\catcode`\:=\active +\catcode`\!=\active +\catcode`\?=\active +\frenchspacing} +\def\froff{\catcode`\;=12 +\catcode`\:=12 +\catcode`\!=12 +\catcode`\?=12 +\nonfrenchspacing} +\def\@tochtitle{Table des Chapitres} +\def\@utochtitle{TABLE DES CHAPITRES} +\def\@Hint{Indications} +%%% Espace apres le : +\fron diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fswahili.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fswahili.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d0be7d283b7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/fswahili.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gabon-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gabon-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0d37bde326f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gabon-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gael-ft.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gael-ft.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4470690673b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gael-ft.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gaid.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gaid.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 069193767f7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gaid.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 97d658ef609..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-m.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-m.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d4870badf16..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-m.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-mp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-mp.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 061af90ddc3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galicia-mp.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galician-l.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galician-l.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4512638cf18..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galician-l.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galles1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galles1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 18f1db01368..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galles1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galles2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galles2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b9120585366..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/galles2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/georgia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/georgia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 829221b9d2c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/georgia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/germ-w.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/germ-w.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 21a3ccd51bb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/germ-w.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-c.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-c.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 02b94f6267f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-c.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-d.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-d.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2c592822411..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-d.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-m.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-m.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8dd958cfbd3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/german-m.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/germany-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/germany-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7e08b3283ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/germany-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ghana-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ghana-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7f74a1abd28..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ghana-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gibraltar-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gibraltar-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 83fbbd4967c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gibraltar-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/grece1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/grece1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8cbfa4afab0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/grece1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/grece2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/grece2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 82fd4152806..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/grece2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greece-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greece-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 87bec0cceb5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greece-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greeka.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greeka.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fe54b1001f7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greeka.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greekm.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greekm.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3d8f454697b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greekm.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greenland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greenland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3ab9f8a1951..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/greenland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guatemala-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guatemala-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 21a6543e04a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guatemala-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guinea-bissau-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guinea-bissau-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index eaeb777ca6b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guinea-bissau-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guinea-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guinea-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 093efe92b55..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/guinea-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gwenn-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gwenn-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 69017c78059..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/gwenn-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/haiti-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/haiti-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b426e79a5f3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/haiti-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hangul.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hangul.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 37b0881bba8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hangul.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hanja.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hanja.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4fd3b9f7d19..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hanja.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hanzi.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hanzi.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5892452837a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hanzi.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hin.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hin.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 779779f0235..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hin.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hindi-b.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hindi-b.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b7dc35e9f56..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hindi-b.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hindi-p.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hindi-p.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9429dcea73d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hindi-p.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hispano.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hispano.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f33aea5c2ca..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hispano.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/honduras-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/honduras-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a66fcf17f17..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/honduras-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hrv.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hrv.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dd4aa1a1d79..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hrv.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hun1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hun1.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 70424d1d82a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hun1.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hun2.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hun2.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f5717e033a3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hun2.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hungary-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hungary-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2351b049f54..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/hungary-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iceland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iceland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 03ed7a58473..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iceland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lamed3.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/images/lamed3.png Binary files differindex a2395a0c3da..a2395a0c3da 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lamed3.png +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/images/lamed3.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/imk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/imk index f32b9b792b1..e053e597171 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/imk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/imk @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/csh -f set w=`whoami`.imk set OLD=/tmp/$w/OLD if ( -d $OLD ) then diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/imongolia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/imongolia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 08aa19e135b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/imongolia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/inde1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/inde1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5fd59c61e77..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/inde1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/inde2.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/inde2.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b4d50768a3b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/inde2.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/india-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/india-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0d761af31fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/india-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0a861e52739..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 54894583666..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7d1d4864a1c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/indonesia2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iran-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iran-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 01f660a00d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iran-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iranian.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iranian.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a31cc3b2eea..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iranian.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iraq-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iraq-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 65285ffe140..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/iraq-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ireland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ireland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 130c3547164..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ireland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/irish.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/irish.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dbee5f3e6e0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/irish.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/irlande.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/irlande.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4fe8f024e8f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/irlande.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islam-pbc.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islam-pbc.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9a02df81c70..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islam-pbc.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islam-sw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islam-sw.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d24d06ec1bf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islam-sw.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islande.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islande.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3288288df2c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islande.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islandep.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islandep.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a905bc7704d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/islandep.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/isr1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/isr1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c187e0bcc31..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/isr1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/isr2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/isr2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f391d8a7634..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/isr2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/israel-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/israel-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2a6ee60e3c9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/israel-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italian.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italian.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b5865e45c56..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italian.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italo1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italo1.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2665a36c515..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italo1.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italy-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italy-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 819c7ba2e43..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italy-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italysm.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italysm.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7f8a2ed5d65..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/italysm.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ivory-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ivory-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 076c30afd70..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ivory-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ivrit.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ivrit.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index aabdada932a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ivrit.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jamaica-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jamaica-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3395e886116..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jamaica-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a6b91904590..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japon1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japon1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2ff5d8deba6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japon1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japon2.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japon2.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 45e530293d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/japon2.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jordan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jordan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 018b3d637de..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jordan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jutland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jutland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6b9d6947d78..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/jutland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kannada-n.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kannada-n.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 321163f8ce9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kannada-n.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnad1.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnad1.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bcbc292593d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnad1.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnataka-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnataka-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 970de69de4f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnataka-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnataka.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnataka.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d0e8b711e58..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/karnataka.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kazakhstan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kazakhstan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 98f2654ebea..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kazakhstan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kenya-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kenya-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 11b098cdde9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kenya-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kerala-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kerala-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9069accefa2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kerala-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kerala.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kerala.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 50888aabbd9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kerala.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/khalkha.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/khalkha.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1521ed88a81..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/khalkha.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kiribati-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kiribati-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5818ee81964..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kiribati-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korea-n-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korea-n-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 77039f0ecd1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korea-n-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korea-s-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korea-s-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dd231a03cda..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korea-s-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korean1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korean1.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2b35e30707a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korean1.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korean2.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korean2.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 34ec20fe850..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/korean2.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kos-alb.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kos-alb.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5ea323cba78..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kos-alb.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kos-ml.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kos-ml.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0097e0bbff8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kos-ml.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kosovo-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kosovo-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 389a83f3b46..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kosovo-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kuwait-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kuwait-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e64ab7b0496..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kuwait-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kyrgyzstan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kyrgyzstan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8f05633f852..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/kyrgyzstan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lang-g.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lang-g.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1c4f818715c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lang-g.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/laos-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/laos-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 06783dd27fa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/laos-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e38e416470a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvian-d.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvian-d.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 895797a8273..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvian-d.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvian-r1.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvian-r1.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index af75ebdf969..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/latvian-r1.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lebanon-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lebanon-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c350a24470e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lebanon-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lettonie.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lettonie.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 20f1a58bced..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lettonie.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/leur.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/leur.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3d10aec16e6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/leur.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/liberia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/liberia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ccd3c64c22d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/liberia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/libya-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/libya-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b20415dd671..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/libya-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/liech-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/liech-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7ce89b37586..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/liech-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lithuania-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lithuania-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 731110ff1f6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lithuania-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lituanie.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lituanie.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cead19999fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lituanie.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lorraine-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lorraine-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 215353970ed..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lorraine-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/louisiana-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/louisiana-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ec12c6d01ae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/louisiana-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ls-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ls-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3e82c6c17a8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ls-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/luso1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/luso1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f52db5bb0e5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/luso1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/luso2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/luso2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a1d4935138f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/luso2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lux-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lux-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8cec0d52539..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/lux-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/macau-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/macau-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f80fdc15805..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/macau-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/macedonia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/macedonia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 91f93be8c15..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/macedonia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/madagascar-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/madagascar-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b323338a8ec..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/madagascar-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/maine-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/maine-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c51f8c03246..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/maine-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malawi-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malawi-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f3121015718..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malawi-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malayalam.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malayalam.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c5556215da8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malayalam.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malayalam.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malayalam.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 47292511a44..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malayalam.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dbde9a0116e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 200cffd1148..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6e4a8398cff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malaysia2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mali-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mali-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b9c25b6c06c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mali-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malta1-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malta1-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8772311ef75..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/malta1-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manchu.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manchu.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index df28d032530..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manchu.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manchuria.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manchuria.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3e41474c14a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manchuria.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manjuc.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manjuc.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6984ee65a49..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manjuc.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manjui.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manjui.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8f1bd14ec94..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/manjui.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mauritania-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mauritania-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 945f729e2aa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mauritania-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mauritius-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mauritius-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b3eb0af2b56..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mauritius-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4a6f55cea1a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 711eb3cd2b5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex3.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex3.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cf6fe9083f0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mex3.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mexico-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mexico-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index da0e68a884f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mexico-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mexip.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mexip.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 086705c8f18..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mexip.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/meyalu.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/meyalu.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 19d49bcf540..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/meyalu.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.bib index f96b5301194..ae668513ab0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.bib +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.bib @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +% minitoc-fr.bib by Jean-Pierre Drucbert. Part of the minitoc package. + @STRING{pub-SV = "Springer Verlag"} @STRING{pub-SV+adr = "Berlin, Germany~/ Heidelberg, Germany~/ @@ -11,24 +13,21 @@ @MISC{minitoc, TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package", AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2008} @MISC{minitoc-fr, TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}", AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2008} @MISC{shorttoc, TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package", AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2002} @@ -46,7 +45,7 @@ AUTHOR={Johannes L. Braams and David P. Carlisle and Alan Jeffrey and Leslie Lamport and Frank \mbox{Mittelbach} and Chris A. Rowley and Rainer Sch{\"o}pf}, TITLE = {The {\LaTeXe} {S}ources}, - URL = "http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/source2e.tex", + URL = "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/source2e.tex", YEAR = 2003} @BOOK{TLC2, @@ -89,7 +88,7 @@ MONTH = apr, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/appendix/appendix.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/appendix/appendix.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{babel, @@ -97,7 +96,7 @@ TITLE = "{\textsf{Babel}}, a multilingual package for use with {\LaTeX}'s standard document classes", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/babel.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/babel.pdf", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{babel-user, @@ -105,13 +104,13 @@ TITLE = "{\textsf{Babel}}, a multilingual package for use with {\LaTeX}'s standard document classes (user)", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/user.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/user.pdf", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{hyperref, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian and Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{\froff Hypertext marks in {\LaTeX}: a manual for {\textsf{hyperref}}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2006} @@ -119,7 +118,7 @@ TITLE="{T}he {M}emoir {C}lass", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memman.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memman.pdf", EDITION="sixi{\`e}me", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -128,7 +127,7 @@ TITLE="{T}he {M}emoir {C}lass {(Addendum)}", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memmanadd.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memmanadd.pdf", EDITION="seconde", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2007} @@ -137,7 +136,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{notoccite}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/notoccite.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/notoccite.sty", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2000} @@ -145,7 +144,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{placeins}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/placeins/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/placeins/", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2002} @@ -153,7 +152,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{tocbibind}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind/tocbibind.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind/tocbibind.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2004} @@ -161,7 +160,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{tocloft}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft/tocloft.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft/tocloft.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2003} @@ -169,7 +168,7 @@ TITLE = "The {\textsf{titlesec}} and {\textsf{titletoc}} packages", AUTHOR="Bezos, Javier", NOTE="{\froff\url{http://www.tex-tipografia.com/contact.html}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/titlesec/titlesec.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/titlesec/titlesec.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2005} @@ -177,7 +176,7 @@ TITLE="{ArabTeX Version~3}", AUTHOR={Lagally, Klaus}, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:lagallyk@acm.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/arabtex/doc/html/arabtex.htm", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/arabtex/doc/html/arabtex.htm", MONTH=oct, YEAR=2003} @@ -197,7 +196,7 @@ TITLE="{M}on{\TeX} -- {A} {Q}uick {G}uide {\emph{(draft)}}", AUTHOR="Corff, Oliver", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:corff@zedat.fu-berlin.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/mongolian/montex/doc/mlsquick.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/mongolian/montex/doc/mlsquick.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2002} @@ -205,7 +204,7 @@ TITLE="Mon{\TeX} -- Mongolian for {\LaTeXe}, {I}mplementation {L}evel {S}ystem {D}ocumentation", AUTHOR="Corff, Oliver and Dorj, Dorjpalam", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:corff@zedat.fu-berlin.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/mongolian/montex/doc/montex.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/mongolian/montex/doc/montex.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2002} @@ -228,7 +227,7 @@ TITLE="{\froff{Arm\TeX}: a {S}ystem for {W}riting in {A}rmenian with {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} ({\'e}crit en arm{\'e}nien)}", AUTHOR="Dachian, Sergue{\"\i} and Dalalyan, Arnak and Akopian, Vartan", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/armtex/v2.0/manual.ps", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/armtex/v2.0/manual.ps", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:Serguei.Dachian@univ-lemans.fr}, \url{http://www-scf.usc.edu/~vakopian/programs/progs.html}}", MONTH=jun, @@ -299,7 +298,7 @@ AUTHOR = "Patashnik, Oren", TITLE = "{{\BibTeX ing}}", NOTE = "{D}ocumentation pour les utilisateurs normaux de {{\BibTeX}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf", MONTH = feb, YEAR = 1988 } @@ -308,7 +307,7 @@ TITLE = "{Designing {\BibTeX} Styles}", NOTE = "{L}a partie de la documentation de {{\BibTeX}} qui n'int{\'e}resse pas tous les utilisateurs", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf", MONTH = feb, YEAR = 1988 } @@ -335,14 +334,14 @@ AUTHOR="Kryukov, Alexej M. and Ivanov, Dmitry", TITLE="Typesetting multilingual documents with {ANTOMEGA}", MONTH=sep, - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/antomega.html", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/antomega.html", YEAR=2003} @BOOK{JMPL1, AUTHOR={Bayart, Benjamin}, TITLE="{J}oli manuel pour {\LaTeXe}", PUBLISHER="{G}uide local pour l'{ESIEE}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/JoliManuelPourLaTeX.ps.gz", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/JoliManuelPourLaTeX.ps.gz", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:bayartb@edgard.fdn.fr}}", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1995} @@ -352,7 +351,7 @@ TITLE="Une courte{~({\froff?})} introduction {\`a~\LaTeXe}", JOURNAL="{Cahiers GUTenberg}", NOTE="{Traduction de{~\cite{NSSL2E}} en fran{\c c}ais par \oname{Matthieu}{Herrb}, adaptation et compl{\'e}ments par \oname{Daniel}{Flipo}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/lshort/french/flshort-3.20.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/lshort/french/flshort-3.20.pdf", MONTH=feb, ISSN="1140-9304", VOLUME="{h}ors-s{\'e}rie num{\'e}ro{~2}", @@ -361,7 +360,7 @@ @MISC{NSSL2E, AUTHOR={Oetiker, Tobias and Partl, Hubert and Hyna, Helene and Schlegl, Elisabeth}, TITLE="{The Not So Short Introduction to \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/lshort/english/lshort.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/lshort/english/lshort.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2006} @@ -370,21 +369,21 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Lickert, Knut", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:knut@lickert.net} et \url{http://tex.lickert.net/packages/minutes/index.html}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minutes/minutes.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minutes/minutes.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{needspace, TITLE="The {\textsf{needspace}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/needspace.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/needspace.sty", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2003} @MISC{txfonts, TITLE="The {TX} {F}onts", AUTHOR="Ryu, Young", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/fonts/txfonts/doc/txfontsdocA4.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/txfonts/doc/txfontsdocA4.pdf", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2000} @@ -392,7 +391,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{ifmtarg}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R. and Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}, \url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/ifmtarg.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/ifmtarg.sty", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2000} @@ -400,7 +399,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{abstract}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/abstract/abstract.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/abstract/abstract.pdf", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2004} @@ -408,7 +407,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{xr}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/xr.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/xr.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=1994} @@ -426,7 +425,7 @@ TITLE="{E}thiopian {L}anguage {S}upport for the {\textsf{Babel}} {P}ackage", AUTHOR="Beyene, Berhanu and Kudlek, Manfred and Kummer, Olaf and Metzinger, Jochen", ORGANIZATION="{U}niversit{\"a}t {H}amburg", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/ethiopia/ethiop/doc/ethiodoc.ps", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/ethiopia/ethiop/doc/ethiodoc.ps", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1998} @@ -434,7 +433,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{sectsty}} package v2.0.2", AUTHOR={{McDonnell}, Rowland}, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:rowland.mcdonnell@physics.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/sectsty/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/sectsty/", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2002} @@ -442,7 +441,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{subfig}} {P}ackage", AUTHOR={Cochran, Steven Douglas}, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:sds@cs.cmu.edu}, \url{mailto:cochran@ieee.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/subfig.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/subfig.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -450,7 +449,7 @@ TITLE="{T}ypesetting {M}alayalam {U}sing {\LaTeXe}", AUTHOR="Alex, A.J.", NOTE="{\froff\url{malayalamtex@gmail.com} et \url{mailto:alexaj@myrealbox.com}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/malayalam/doc/mm-usr.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/malayalam/doc/mm-usr.pdf", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2007} @@ -458,21 +457,21 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{comment}} package", AUTHOR="E{\ij}khout, Victor", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:victor@eijkhout.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/comment/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/comment/", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1999} @MISC{fontsel, TITLE="{\LaTeXe} font selection", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/fntguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/fntguide.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2004} @MISC{guarani, TITLE="Typesetting {G}uaraní with {\TeX}", AUTHOR="Bezos, Javier", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/guarani/guarani.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/guarani/guarani.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2004} @@ -488,14 +487,14 @@ TITLE="{T}ame the {B}ea{ST} ({T}he {B} {to~X} of{{~~\BibTeX}})", AUTHOR="Markey, Nicolas", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:markey@lsv.ens-cachan.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2005} @MISC{classes, AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and Mittelbach, Frank and Braams, Johannes L.", TITLE="{S}tandard {D}ocument {C}lasses for {\LaTeX} {version~2e}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -504,7 +503,7 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption/ccaption.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption/ccaption.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{caption, @@ -512,7 +511,7 @@ MONTH = dec, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{caption-eng, @@ -520,7 +519,7 @@ MONTH = dec, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{caption2, @@ -528,7 +527,7 @@ MONTH = nov, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption2.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption2.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{cap-anleitung, @@ -536,7 +535,7 @@ Tabellenbeschriftungen mit dem \textsf{caption}-Paket}", AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR = 2007} @@ -545,7 +544,7 @@ MONTH = sep, AUTHOR = "Hennig, Stephan", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:stephanhennig@arcor.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/mcaption/mcaption.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/mcaption/mcaption.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @BOOK{YH2004, @@ -575,7 +574,7 @@ MONTH = aug, AUTHOR = "Basso, Pierre and Ulrich, Stephan", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:Pierre.Basso@lim.univ-mrs.fr}, \url{mailto:stefanulrich@users.sourceforge.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/bibtopic/bibtopic.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/bibtopic/bibtopic.pdf", YEAR = 2002} @MISC{bibunits, @@ -583,7 +582,7 @@ MONTH = may, AUTHOR = "Hansen, Thorsten", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:thorsten.hansen@psychol.uni-giessen.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/bibunits/bibunits.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/bibunits/bibunits.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{chapterbib, @@ -591,7 +590,7 @@ MONTH = feb, AUTHOR = "Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cite/chapterbib.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cite/chapterbib.sty", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{multibib, @@ -599,7 +598,7 @@ MONTH = jan, AUTHOR = "Hansen, Thorsten", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:thorsten.hansen@psychol.uni-giessen.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/multibib/multibib.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/multibib/multibib.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{hangcaption, @@ -607,7 +606,7 @@ MONTH = aug, AUTHOR = "Jones, David{~}M.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:dmjones@theory.lcs.mit.edu}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex209/contrib/misc/hangcaption.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex209/contrib/misc/hangcaption.sty", YEAR = 1992} @BOOK{lunde1993, @@ -629,21 +628,21 @@ @MISC{usrguide, TITLE="{\LaTeXe} for authors", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/usrguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/usrguide.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2001} @MISC{clsguide, TITLE="{\LaTeXe} for Class and Package writers", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/clsguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/clsguide.pdf", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2003} @MISC{cyrguide, TITLE="Cyrillic language support in {\LaTeX}", AUTHOR="Volovich, Vladimir and Lemberg, Werner and {{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/cyrguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/cyrguide.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=1999} @@ -659,28 +658,28 @@ @MISC{koma, TITLE = "{\KOMAScript{}, a versatile {\LaTeXe} bundle}", AUTHOR = "Neukam, Frank and Kohm, Markus and Kielhorn, Axel and Morawski, Jens-Uwe", - URL = "http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguien.pdf", + URL = "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguien.pdf", MONTH = dec, YEAR = 2007} @MISC{komab, TITLE = "{\KOMAScript{}, ein wandelbares {\LaTeXe}-Paket}", AUTHOR = "Neukam, Frank and Kohm, Markus and Kielhorn, Axel and Morawski, Jens-Uwe", - URL = "http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguide.pdf", + URL = "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguide.pdf", MONTH = dec, YEAR = 2007} @MISC{varsects, TITLE="The {\textsf{varsects}} package", AUTHOR="Taupin{\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, Daniel", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/taupin/varsects.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/taupin/varsects.sty", MONTH=nov, YEAR=1998} @MISC{xr-hyper, AUTHOR="Carlisle, David P.", TITLE="{The \textsf{xr-hyper} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2000} @@ -688,7 +687,7 @@ AUTHOR="{American Mathematical Society}", ADDRESS="Providence, Rhode Island", TITLE="{\froff Instructions for Preparation of Papers and Monographs: \AmS-\LaTeX}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/amslatex/classes/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/classes/", NOTE="{Voir \texttt{instr-l.pdf}}", YEAR=1999} @@ -770,7 +769,7 @@ AUTHOR="Breitenlohner, Peter", PUBLISHER="{The \NTS\ Team}", ADDRESS="{Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Physik, M\"unchen}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/systems/e-tex/v2/doc/etex_man.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/e-tex/v2/doc/etex_man.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1998} @@ -779,7 +778,7 @@ TITLE = "Albanian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:zami1st@yahoo.com}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/albanian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/albanian.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{bahasa, @@ -788,7 +787,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:joerg.knappen@alpha.ntp.springer.de}, \url{mailto:mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasa.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasa.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{bahasam, @@ -797,7 +796,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:joerg.knappen@alpha.ntp.springer.de}, \url{mailto:mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}, \url{mailto:bob.margolis@ntlworld.com}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasam.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasam.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{hebrew2, @@ -805,7 +804,7 @@ TITLE = "Hebrew language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/hebrew.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/hebrew.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{basque, @@ -814,7 +813,7 @@ TITLE = "Basque support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:lg.ehu.es}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/basque.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/basque.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{breton, @@ -822,7 +821,7 @@ TITLE = "Breton language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:Christian.Rolland@univ-brest.fr}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/breton.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/breton.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{bulgarian, @@ -830,7 +829,7 @@ TITLE = "Bulgarian language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:georgi.boshnakov@umist.ac.uk}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/bulgarian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/bulgarian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{catalan, @@ -838,7 +837,7 @@ TITLE = "Catalan language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:badenes@imec.be}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/catalan.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/catalan.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{croatian, @@ -846,7 +845,7 @@ TITLE = "Croatian language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:paica@cernvm.cern.ch}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/croatian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/croatian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{czech, @@ -854,7 +853,7 @@ TITLE = "Czech language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:lokajick@cernvm}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/czech.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/czech.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{danish, @@ -862,7 +861,7 @@ TITLE = "Danish language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:larsen@cernvm.cern.ch}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/danish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/danish.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{dutch, @@ -870,7 +869,7 @@ TITLE = "Dutch language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/dutch.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/dutch.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{english, @@ -878,7 +877,7 @@ TITLE = "English support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/english.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/english.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{esperanto, @@ -888,7 +887,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:ruizaltb@cernvm.cern.ch}, \url{mailto:knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/esperanto.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/esperanto.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{estonian, @@ -896,7 +895,7 @@ TITLE = "Estonian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}, {\froff\url{mailto:saar@aai.ee}}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/estonian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/estonian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{finnish, @@ -904,7 +903,7 @@ TITLE = "Finnish support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:kanerva@cernvm}, \url{mailto:keranen@cernvm}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/finnish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/finnish.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{frenchb, @@ -912,7 +911,7 @@ TITLE = "{A Babel language definition file for French}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:Daniel.Flipo@univ-lille1.fr}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/frenchb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/frenchb.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{galician, @@ -920,7 +919,7 @@ TITLE = "Galician support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:mcarriba@eunetcom.net}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/galician.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/galician.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{germanb, @@ -928,7 +927,7 @@ TITLE = "German support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/germanb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/germanb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{greek, @@ -937,7 +936,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr} ou \url{mailto:apostolo@obelix.ee.duth.gr}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/greek.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/greek.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{icelandic, @@ -945,7 +944,7 @@ TITLE = "Icelandic support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:einar@lif.hi.is}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/icelandic.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/icelandic.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{interlingua, @@ -953,7 +952,7 @@ TITLE = "Interlingua support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:kleiweg@let.rug.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/interlingua.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/interlingua.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{irish, @@ -963,7 +962,7 @@ \url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:fraser@cernvm}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/irish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/irish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{italian, @@ -972,7 +971,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it}, \url{mailto:beccari@polito.it}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/italian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/italian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{latin, @@ -981,7 +980,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:claudio.beccari@polito.it}, avec l'aide de \oname{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}, (\url{mailto:kkz@alfa.mimuw.edu.pl})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/latin.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/latin.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{lsorbian, @@ -989,7 +988,7 @@ TITLE = "{Lower Sorbian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:edi@kaihh.hanse.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/lsorbian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/lsorbian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{magyar, @@ -998,7 +997,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, avec l'aide de \oname{Attila}{Koppanyi} (\url{mailto:attila@cernvm.cern.ch})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/magyar.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/magyar.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ngermanb, @@ -1006,7 +1005,7 @@ TITLE = "New German support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/ngermanb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/ngermanb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{norsk, @@ -1021,7 +1020,7 @@ \oname{Rune}{Kleveland} (\url{mailto:runekl@math.uio.no}) a ajout\'e les d\'efinitions de raccourcis}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/norsk.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/norsk.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{polish, @@ -1030,7 +1029,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:elmar@uni-paderborn.de}, \url{mailto:massa@uni-paderborn.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/polish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/polish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{portuges, @@ -1041,7 +1040,7 @@ am{\'e}liorations. \url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:jramalhe@cernvm}, \url{mailto:Jose-Pedro_Ramalhete@macmail}, \url{mailto:arnaldo@vnet.ibm.com}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/portuges.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/portuges.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{romanian, @@ -1050,7 +1049,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:hhu@cernvm.cern.ch}, \url{mailto:robertj@uni-paderborn.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/romanian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/romanian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{russianb1, @@ -1059,7 +1058,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:cyrtug@mir.msk.su}, \url{mailto:TeX@vvv.vsu.ru} et \url{mailto:wl@gnu.org}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/russianb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/russianb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{samin, @@ -1068,7 +1067,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:Regnor.Jernsletten@sami.uit.no} ou \url{mailto:Regnor.Jernsletten@eunet.no}}", MONTH = feb, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/samin.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/samin.dtx", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{scottish, @@ -1076,7 +1075,7 @@ TITLE = "Scottish support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:fraser@cernvm}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/scottish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/scottish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{serbian, @@ -1085,7 +1084,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:dejan@yunix.com}, \url{mailto:slobodan@archimed.filfak.ac.ni.yu}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/serbian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/serbian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{slovak, @@ -1094,7 +1093,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:chlebikj@mff.uniba.cs}, \url{mailto:Tobias.Schlemmer@web.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/slovak.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/slovak.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{slovene, @@ -1102,7 +1101,7 @@ TITLE = "Slovene support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:leon.zlajpah@ijs.si}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/slovene.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/slovene.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{spanish, @@ -1110,7 +1109,7 @@ TITLE = "Spanish support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:jbezos@wanadoo.es} ou \url{mailto:babel@braams.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = feb, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/spanish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/spanish.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{swedish, @@ -1119,7 +1118,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:hellman@cernvm.cern.ch}; am{\'e}liorations pour la version~2.0 par \oname{Erik}{{\"O}sthols} (\url{mailto:erik_osthols@yahoo.com})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/swedish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/swedish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{turkish, @@ -1128,7 +1127,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:rz6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de}, avec l'aide de \oname{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} et \oname{Turgut}{Uyar} (\url{mailto:uyar@cs.itu.edu.tr})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/turkish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/turkish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ukraineb, @@ -1137,7 +1136,7 @@ TITLE = "Ukrainian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:ashv@icmp.lviv.ua}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/ukraineb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/ukraineb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{usorbian, @@ -1145,7 +1144,7 @@ TITLE = "{Upper Sorbian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:edi@kaihh.hanse.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/usorbian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/usorbian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{welsh, @@ -1153,7 +1152,7 @@ TITLE = "Welsh support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/welsh.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/welsh.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{stdclsdv, @@ -1161,14 +1160,14 @@ MONTH = jul, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/stdclsdv/stdclsdv.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/stdclsdv/stdclsdv.pdf", YEAR = 2000} @INPROCEEDINGS{hyperref-paper, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", BOOKTITLE="{Euro\TeX'99 Proceedings}", TITLE="{PDF information and navigation elements with hyperref, pdf\TeX, and thumbpdf}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/paper.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/paper.pdf", PUBLISHER="TUG", YEAR=1999} @@ -1177,7 +1176,7 @@ TITLE = "Romanian {\TeX}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:adriaan@cs.kun.nl}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/romanian/RomanianTeX/romanian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/romanian/RomanianTeX/romanian.dtx", YEAR = 1996} @MISC{spanish4, @@ -1193,7 +1192,7 @@ TITLE="{\TeX{} for the \mbox{Impatient}}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:impatient@tug.org}}", MONTH=sep, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/impatient/book.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/impatient/book.pdf", YEAR=2003} @MISC{fr-impatient, @@ -1202,7 +1201,7 @@ NOTE="{Traduction en fran{\c c}ais de~\cite{impatient} par \oname{Marc}{Chaudemanche}, {\froff\url{mailto:marc.chaudemanche@groupe-mma.fr}}}", MONTH=sep, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/impatient/fr/fbook.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/impatient/fr/fbook.pdf", YEAR=2004} @INPROCEEDINGS{X2ENC, @@ -1325,7 +1324,7 @@ @MISC{malayalam-o, TITLE="{Typesetting Malayalam Using~$\Omega/\aleph$}", - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/malayalam-omega.html", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/malayalam-omega.html", AUTHOR="Alex, A.J.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:indicTeX@gmail.com}}", MONTH=nov, @@ -1355,7 +1354,7 @@ TITLE="{The UK \TeX{} FAQ. Your 423 Questions Answered}", AUTHOR="Fairbairns, Robin", NOTE="Version{~}3.17", - URL="http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/help/uk-tex-faq/newfaq.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/uk-tex-faq/newfaq.pdf", HOWPUBLISHED="{Visible aussi ici: \froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}}", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2007} @@ -1379,7 +1378,7 @@ @MISC{HLATEX, TITLE="{H\LaTeX: a \LaTeX\ package for the Korean language support}", AUTHOR="Koaunghi, Un", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/korean/HLaTeX/hlguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/korean/HLaTeX/hlguide.pdf", HOWPUBLISHED="{En cor\'een}", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2005} @@ -1515,7 +1514,7 @@ TITLE="{The \textsf{docstrip} program}", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank and Duchier, Denys and Braams, Johannes L. and Woli{\'n}ski, Marcin and Wooding, Mark", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/docstrip.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/docstrip.dtx", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -1536,7 +1535,7 @@ HOWPUBLISHED="{En polonais et anglais; voir aussi {\froff\url{http://www.tug.org/teTeX/tetex-texmfdist/doc/latex/platex/platex.html}}}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:M.Olko@Litterae.com.pl} and \url{mailto:wolinski@gust.org.pl}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/polski/polski.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/polski/polski.dtx", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2008} @@ -1545,14 +1544,14 @@ MONTH = jul, AUTHOR = "Braun, Felix", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:fbraun@atdot.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/jura/jura.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/jura/jura.pdf", YEAR = 1998} @MISC{urlbst, TITLE="{The \textsf{urlbst} package}", AUTHOR="Gray, Norman", NOTE="{\froff\url{http://www.astro.gla.ac.uk/users/norman/}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/urlbst/urlbst.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/urlbst/urlbst.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2007} @@ -1627,14 +1626,14 @@ @MISC{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty, AUTHOR="Harin, Alexander and Zhytnikov, Vadim V. and Maslov, Vadim", TITLE="The {\textsf{cmcyralt.sty}} file", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1994} @MISC{cmcyralt/russian.sty, AUTHOR="Boyko, Victor", TITLE="The {\textsf{russian.sty}} file", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/russian.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/russian.sty", MONTH=jan, YEAR=1995} @@ -1648,7 +1647,7 @@ @MISC{lhcyr, TITLE="{The LHCYR collection}", AUTHOR="Zhytnikov, Vadim V. and Maslov, Vadim", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/lhcyr/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/lhcyr/", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru}, \url{mailto:vadik@cs.umd.edu}}", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1998} @@ -1731,21 +1730,21 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:sven@tde.lu.se}, Department of Applied Electronics, University of Lund, Box 118, S-221 00 Lund, Sweden}", TITLE="{\SLaTeX:} Swedish speaking version of {\LaTeX}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/swedish/slatex/slatex.1", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/swedish/slatex/slatex.1", MONTH=nov, YEAR=1989} @MISC{ltoutput, TITLE="{{\LaTeXe} Kernel (Output Routine)}", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2000} @MISC{float, TITLE="{An Improved Environment for Floats}", AUTHOR="Lingnau, Anselm", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/float/float.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/float/float.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:anselm@strathspey.org}}", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2001} @@ -1753,7 +1752,7 @@ @MISC{encguide, TITLE="{\LaTeX} font encodings", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/encguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/encguide.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2006} @@ -1770,7 +1769,7 @@ AUTHOR="Lapko, Olga G.", TITLE="The \textsf{floatrow} package", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:Lapko.O@g23.relcom.ru}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/floatrow/floatrow.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/floatrow/floatrow.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2005} @@ -1778,7 +1777,7 @@ AUTHOR="Lindgren, Ulf A.", TITLE="{FncyChap~V1.33}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:ulf.a.lindgren@ericsson.com}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/fncychap/fncychap.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fncychap/fncychap.pdf", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2005} @@ -1786,7 +1785,7 @@ AUTHOR="Tinnefeld, Karsten", TITLE="{The \textsf{quotchap} document style}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:tinnefeld@irb.cs.uni-dortmund.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/quotchap/quotchap.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/quotchap/quotchap.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1998} @@ -1794,7 +1793,7 @@ AUTHOR="Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", TITLE="{The \textsf{romannum} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/romannum/romannum.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/romannum/romannum.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2005} @@ -1806,7 +1805,7 @@ Via F. Marzolo, 8 -- 35131 PADOVA -- Italy}", TITLE="{The \textsf{sfheaders} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/sfheaders/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/sfheaders/", MONTH=sep, YEAR=1997} @@ -1817,7 +1816,7 @@ Abt.~Biophysikalische Chemie}", TITLE="{\textsf{alnumsec.sty}: Using alphanumeric section numbering with standard sectioning commands}", - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/alnumsec/alnumsec.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/alnumsec/alnumsec.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2005} @@ -1825,7 +1824,7 @@ AUTHOR="Cochran, Steven Douglas", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:sds@cs.cmu.edu}, \url{mailto:cochran@ieee.org}}", TITLE="{The \textsf{captcont} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/captcont/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/captcont/", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2002} @@ -1844,15 +1843,15 @@ TITLE="{The \textsf{vruler} package}", AUTHOR="Jiang, Zhuhan", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:zhuhan@neumann.une.edu.au}, et - regardez \url{http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/vruler.html}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/vruler.sty", + regardez \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/vruler.html}}", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/vruler.sty", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1996} @MISC{doc, TITLE="{The \textsf{doc} and \textsf{shortverb} packages}", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/doc.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/doc.dtx", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -1868,7 +1867,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{tocvsec2}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2/tocvsec2.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2/tocvsec2.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2004} @@ -1891,7 +1890,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{lipsum}} package", AUTHOR = "Happel, Patrick", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:patrick.happel@rub.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/lipsum/lipsum.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/lipsum/lipsum.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2005} @@ -1899,7 +1898,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{subfigure}} package", AUTHOR={Cochran, Steven Douglas}, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:sds@cs.cmu.edu}, \url{mailto:cochran@ieee.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/obsolete/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure/", MONTH=mar, YEAR=1995} @@ -1934,7 +1933,7 @@ TITLE="An environment for multicolumn output", AUTHOR = "Mittelbach, Frank", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2000} @@ -1942,7 +1941,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{geometry}} package", AUTHOR={Umeki, Hideo}, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:hideo.umeki@toshiba.co.jp}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/geometry/manual.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/geometry/manual.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2002} @@ -1950,7 +1949,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{wrapfig}} package", AUTHOR={Arseneau, Donald}, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/wrapfig/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/wrapfig/", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2003} @@ -1960,7 +1959,7 @@ AUTHOR="Trettin, Mark", NOTE="{{T}raduction en anglais par \oname{J{\"u}rgen}{Fenn}, \froff\url{mailto:Mark@Trettin@gmx.de} et \url{mailto:juergen.fen@gmx.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/l2tabu/english/l2tabuen.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/l2tabu/english/l2tabuen.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2006} @@ -1973,7 +1972,7 @@ \froff\url{mailto:Mark@Trettin@gmx.de}, \url{mailto:juergen.fen@gmx.de} et \url{mailto:Yvon.Henel@wanadoo.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/l2tabu/french/l2tabufr-heavy.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/l2tabu/french/l2tabufr-heavy.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2004} @@ -1981,7 +1980,7 @@ TITLE="{Typesetting Arabic and Farsi with the {\Arabi} package. The Users Guide}", AUTHOR="Jabri, Youssef", - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/arabi.html", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/arabi.html", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:yjabri@ensa.univ-oujda.ac.ma}, \'Ecole des sciences appliqu{\'e}es, Bo{\^{\i}}te~696, Oujda, Maroc}", MONTH=dec, @@ -2001,14 +2000,14 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{color}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.dtx", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.dtx", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2005} @MISC{dtxtut, AUTHOR={Pakin, Scott}, TITLE="{How to Package Your \LaTeX{} Package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/dtxtut/dtxtut.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/dtxtut/dtxtut.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:scott+dtx@pakin.org}}", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2004} @@ -2017,7 +2016,7 @@ TITLE = "The {\textsf{docmfp}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/docmfp/docmfp.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/docmfp/docmfp.pdf", MONTH = mar, YEAR = 2005} @@ -2030,7 +2029,7 @@ \url{mailto:d.wujastyk@ucl.ac.uk}, \url{mailto:zdenek.wagner@gmail.com} and \url{mailto:i@kevincarmody.org}}; page d'accueil: {\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org/}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/devanagari/velthuis/doc/generic/velthuis/manual.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/devanagari/velthuis/doc/generic/velthuis/manual.pdf", MONTH = may, YEAR = 2006} @@ -2182,7 +2181,7 @@ @MISC{flynn, TITLE="{Formatting information. A beginner's introduction to typesetting with {\LaTeX}}", AUTHOR="Flynn, Peter", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/beginlatex/beginlatex-3.6.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/beginlatex/beginlatex-3.6.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:peter.silmaril.ie}}", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2005} @@ -2247,7 +2246,7 @@ @MISC{splitbib, TITLE="{Split your bibliography into categories}", AUTHOR="Markey, Nicolas", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/splitbib/splitbib.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/splitbib/splitbib.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:markey@lsv.ens-cachan.fr}}", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2005} @@ -2396,7 +2395,7 @@ @MISC{btxfaq, AUTHOR = "Shell, Michael and Hoadley, David", TITLE = "{{\BibTeX} {T}ips and {FAQ}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxFAQ.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxFAQ.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{http://www.michaelshell.org/}}", MONTH = jan, YEAR = 2007} @@ -2414,20 +2413,20 @@ TITLE="{\emph{MakeIndex}, An Index Processor For {\LaTeX}}", AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie", NOTE="{Technical report, Electronic document in \emph{MakeIndex} distribution}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf", YEAR=1987} @MISC{TFIG, AUTHOR="Lehman, Philipp", TITLE="{The Font Installation Guide}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2004} @MISC{mongolian, AUTHOR="Batmunkh, Dorjgotov", TITLE="{Mongolian support from the \textsf{babel} system}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/mongolian/babel/mongolian.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/mongolian/babel/mongolian.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2007} @@ -2435,7 +2434,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{afterpage}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/afterpage.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/afterpage.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1995} @@ -2443,7 +2442,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{multitoc}} package", AUTHOR = "Schr{\"o}der, Martin", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:martin.schroeder@acm.org}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ms/multitoc.dtx", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ms/multitoc.dtx", MONTH=jun, YEAR=1999} @@ -2455,14 +2454,14 @@ PAGES="17--90", TITLE="{Graham Williams' {\TeX} Catalogue}", URL="http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-1/tb66catal.pdf", - NOTE="Derni{\`e}re version {\`a}: {\froff\url{http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/catalogue.html}}", + NOTE="Derni{\`e}re version {\`a}: {\froff\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/catalogue.html}}", YEAR=2000} @MISC{cite, TITLE="The {\textsf{cite}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cite/cite.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cite/cite.sty", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2003} @@ -2473,7 +2472,7 @@ \textsf{babel}}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:mcarriba@eunetcom.net}, \url{mailto:jmugica@digi21.net}}", MONTH = jan, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/galician/galician.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/galician/galician.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @INCOLLECTION{chinois, @@ -2533,7 +2532,7 @@ AUTHOR="Fear, Simon", NOTE="{En l'absence de l'auteur, contacter \oname{Danie}{Els}, \froff\url{mailto:dnjels@sun.ac.za}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/booktabs/booktabs.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/booktabs/booktabs.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2003} @@ -2543,7 +2542,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org}. La maintenance de ce paquetage est faite par \oname{Werner}{Lemberg}, \url{mailto:wl@gnu.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/dblaccnt.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/dblaccnt.sty", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2005} @@ -2551,21 +2550,21 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{url}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/url.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/url.sty", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2005} @MISC{varioref, TITLE="The {\textsf{varioref}} package", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/varioref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/varioref.pdf", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2003} @MISC{fullpage, TITLE="{A package to Set Margins to Full Page}", AUTHOR="Daly, Patrick W.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/preprint/fullpage.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/preprint/fullpage.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1999} @@ -2575,14 +2574,14 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:thomas@henloch.de}. La fonte a {\'e}t{\'e} con{\c c}ue par \oname{Martin}{Vogel}, \froff\url{mailto:marvosym.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/fonts/psfonts/marvosym/marvodoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/psfonts/marvosym/marvodoc.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2006} @MISC{symbols, AUTHOR={Pakin, Scott}, TITLE="{The Comprehensive {\LaTeX} Symbols List}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/symbols/comprehensive/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/symbols/comprehensive/", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:scott+dtx@pakin.org}}", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -2590,7 +2589,7 @@ @MISC{morefloats, AUTHOR={Hosek, Don}, TITLE="{The \textsf{morefloats} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/morefloats.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/morefloats.sty", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:dhosek@ymir.claremont.edu}}", MONTH=jul, YEAR=1990} @@ -2608,14 +2607,14 @@ (Author-Year and Numerical Schemes)}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:daly@mps.mpg.de}. Ce document d{\'e}crit le paquetage \textsf{natbib} (version~8.0)}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natbib.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natbib.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2007} @MISC{natnotes, AUTHOR={Daly, Patrick~W.}, TITLE="{Reference sheet for \texttt{natbib} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natnotes.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natnotes.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:daly@mps.mpg.de}}", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2007} @@ -2624,7 +2623,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{overcite}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cite/overcite.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cite/overcite.sty", MONTH=may, YEAR=2003} @@ -2634,7 +2633,7 @@ NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:HubertJG@open.min.de}, \url{mailto:Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de}, \url{mailto:j.tkadlec@email.cz}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/pict2e/pict2e.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/pict2e/pict2e.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2008} @@ -2642,7 +2641,7 @@ TITLE="{The main structure of documents}", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank and Rowley, Chris A. and Jeffrey, Alan and Carlisle, David P.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -2656,35 +2655,35 @@ @MISC{proc, AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and {{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}} and Braams, Johannes L.", TITLE="{Producing proceedings articles with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/proc.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/proc.dtx", MONTH=nov, YEAR=1995} @MISC{slides, AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank", TITLE="{Producing slides with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/slides.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/slides.dtx", MONTH=aug, YEAR=1997} @MISC{letter, AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and Mittelbach, Frank and Sch{\"o}pf, Rainer", TITLE="{Standard Letter Document Class for \LaTeX{} version~2e}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/letter.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/letter.dtx", MONTH=apr, YEAR=1999} @MISC{ltxdoc, AUTHOR="Carlisle, David P.", TITLE="{The file \texttt{ltxdoc.dtx} for use with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx", MONTH=aug, YEAR=1999} @MISC{ltnews, AUTHOR="Jeffrey, Alan and {{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", TITLE="{The file \texttt{ltnews.dtx} for use with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltnews.cls", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltnews.cls", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2001} @@ -2696,7 +2695,7 @@ \url{mailto:aroberts@usq.edu.au}. \textbf{Ce paquetage est obsol{\`e}te, utilisez désormais le paquetage \textsf{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc}}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/", MONTH = may, YEAR = 1999} @@ -2705,7 +2704,7 @@ AUTHOR = "Lemberg, Werner and H{\`a}n, Th{\'{\^e}} Th{\`a}nh", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:wl@gnu.org}, \url{mailto:hanthethanh@gmx.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/", MONTH = oct, YEAR = 2006} @@ -2751,21 +2750,21 @@ @MISC{ntg, TITLE="{NTG Document Classes for \LaTeX{} version~2e}", AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and E{\ij}khout, Victor and Braams, Johannes L.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/ntgclass.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/ntgclass.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2004} @MISC{i-ntg, TITLE="{Introduction to the Dutch \LaTeX{} document classes}", AUTHOR="E{\ij}khout, Victor and Braams, Johannes L.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/classdoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/classdoc.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1994} @MISC{newcommand, AUTHOR={Pakin, Scott}, TITLE="{The \textsf{newcommand.py} utility}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/support/newcommand/newcommand.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/support/newcommand/newcommand.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:scott+dtx@pakin.org}}", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2005} @@ -2773,8 +2772,8 @@ @MISC{hypernat, AUTHOR={Berger, Jens}, TITLE="{The \textsf{hypernat} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/hypernat.sty", - NOTE="{\froff\url{http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/hypernat.html}}", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/hypernat.sty", + NOTE="{\froff\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/hypernat.html}}", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2001} @@ -3133,7 +3132,7 @@ AUTHOR="Veytsman, Boris and Schandl, Bernd and Netherton, Lee and Radhakrishnan, C. V.", TITLE="{\textsf{nomencl} A Package to create a Nomenclature}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{http://sarovar.org/projects/nomencl}}", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -3151,7 +3150,7 @@ @MISC{calc, TITLE="{The {\textsf{calc}} package (Infix notation arithmetic in \LaTeX)}", AUTHOR = "Thorup, Kresten Krab and Jensen, Frank and Rowley, Chris A.", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/calc.dtx", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/calc.dtx", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2005} @@ -3160,7 +3159,7 @@ TITLE="{\froff Documentation for \texttt{fancybox.sty}: Box tips and tricks for \LaTeX}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:tvz@Princeton.EDU}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/fancybox/fancybox.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancybox/fancybox.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2000} @@ -3168,7 +3167,7 @@ AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{The \textsf{hypcap} package}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:oberdiek@uni-freiburg.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/hypcap.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/hypcap.pdf", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2007} @@ -3247,14 +3246,14 @@ AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{The \textsf{ifpdf} package}", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:oberdiek@uni-freiburg.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/ifpdf.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/ifpdf.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2006} @MISC{psnfss, AUTHOR="Schmidt, Walter", TITLE="{Using common PostScript fonts with {\LaTeX}. PSNFSS Version~9.2}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/psnfss/psnfss2e.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/psnfss/psnfss2e.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2004} @@ -3339,49 +3338,49 @@ @MISC{hyperref-o, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{hyperref package options}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/options.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/options.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2006} @MISC{hyperref-changelog, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{ChangeLog for the \textsf{hyperref} bundle}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2007} @MISC{hyperref-rdm, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{README for the \textsf{hyperref} bundle}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2007} @MISC{hyperref-pdf, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{Hypertext marks in {\LaTeX}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2007} @MISC{backref, AUTHOR="Carlisle, David P. and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{Back referencing from bibliographical citations}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR=2006} @MISC{nameref, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{Section name references in {\LaTeX}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2007} @MISC{flowfram, TITLE="{Creating Flow Frames for Posters, Brochures or Magazines using \textsf{flowfram.sty} v~1.07}", AUTHOR="Talbot, Nicola L. C.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", MONTH=mar, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:nlct@cmp.uea.ac.uk}, School of Computing Sciences, University of East Anglia, Norwich. NR4~7TJ, United~Kingdom}", @@ -3390,7 +3389,7 @@ @MISC{ffuserguide, TITLE="{Creating Flow Frames for Posters, Brochures or Magazines using \textsf{flowfram.sty}}", AUTHOR="Talbot, Nicola L. C.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", MONTH=mar, NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:nlct@cmp.uea.ac.uk}, School of Computing Sciences, University of East Anglia, Norwich. NR4~7TJ, United~Kingdom}", @@ -3401,7 +3400,7 @@ MONTH = jan, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:rotfloat@sommerfeldt.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/rotfloat/rotfloat.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/rotfloat/rotfloat.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{trivfloat, @@ -3409,13 +3408,13 @@ MONTH = jun, AUTHOR = "Wright, Joseph A.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:joseph.wright@morningstar2.co.uk}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/trivfloat/trivfloat.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/trivfloat/trivfloat.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{rotating, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian and Barroca, Leonor", TITLE="{A style option for rotated objects in {\LaTeX}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/rotating/rotating.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/rotating/rotating.dtx", MONTH=sep, YEAR=1997} @@ -3467,7 +3466,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{textcase}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/textcase/textcase.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/textcase/textcase.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR=2004} @@ -3533,7 +3532,7 @@ @MISC{nomentbl, AUTHOR="Elmegaard, Brian and Egan, Patrick", TITLE="{The \textsf{nomentbl} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/nomentbl/nomentbl.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomentbl/nomentbl.pdf", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:be@mek.dtu.dk}}", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2006} @@ -3549,14 +3548,14 @@ @MISC{frenchle, TITLE="L'extension {\textsf{frenchle}} pour {\LaTeX} (notice d'utilisation)", AUTHOR="Gaulle{\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, Bernard", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/french/frenchle/frenchle.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/french/frenchle/frenchle.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1997} @MISC{frenchpro, TITLE="Notice d'utilisation de l'extension {\textsf{frenchpro}} pour {\LaTeX}", AUTHOR="Gaulle{\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, Bernard", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/french/frenchpro/french/ALIRE.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/french/frenchpro/french/ALIRE.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=1997} @@ -3585,7 +3584,7 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledmac.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledmac.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ledpar, @@ -3593,7 +3592,7 @@ MONTH = apr, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledpar.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledpar.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ledarab, @@ -3601,7 +3600,7 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledarab.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledarab.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @BOOK{icelandic2, @@ -3627,7 +3626,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{chngpage}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/chngpage.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/chngpage.sty", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2003} @@ -3726,9 +3725,7 @@ TITLE="{Writing Greek with the \texttt{greek} option of the {\textsf{babel}} package}", AUTHOR="Syropoulos, Apostolos", - HOWPUBLISHED="{\froff\url{http://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/usage.tex}}", - URL="http://www.tug.org/texlive/Contents/live/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf", - NOTE="{\froff\url{mailto:apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}}", + HOWPUBLISHED="{\froff\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/usage.tex}}", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1997} @@ -4098,14 +4095,14 @@ @MISC{p-xargs, AUTHOR="P{\'e}gouri{\'e}-Gonnard, Manuel", TITLE="{The \textsf{xargs} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2008} @MISC{p-xargs-fr, AUTHOR="P{\'e}gouri{\'e}-Gonnard, Manuel", TITLE="{L'extension \textsf{xargs}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2008} @@ -4269,7 +4266,7 @@ @MISC{makerobust, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{The {\textsf{makerobust}} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/makerobust.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/makerobust.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2006} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx index cda494148de..b022de40b7b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlo.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ %% -%% This is file `mtc-tlo.tex', +%% This is file `minitoc-fr.dtx', %% generated with the docstrip utility. %% %% The original source files were: %% -%% minitoc.dtx (with options: `mtc-tlo') +%% minitoc.dtx (with options: `minitoc-fr') %% This is a generated file. %% %% @@ -18,34 +18,124 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% %% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' %% distributed with it. %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlo.tex}[2007/06/13]% -\usepackage{tocloft} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{*}{\normalfont\small} -\frontmatter -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -\cftpagenumbersoff{sec} -\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalfont\small} -\mainmatter -\chapter{First Chapter} \minitoc -\section{Section A} \section{Section B} -\chapter{Second Chapter} \minitoc -\section{Section A} \section{Section B} -\end{document} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}% + [2015/07/13 minitoc v61 french documentation start file] +\input{minitoc.dtx} + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + %% + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \endinput %% -%% End of file `mtc-tlo.tex'. +%% End of file `minitoc-fr.dtx'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.ist index 28074b3cc0c..10ce80f1011 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.ist +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.ist @@ -1,11 +1,10 @@ %% LaTeX2e file `./minitoc-fr.ist' %% generated by the `filecontents' environment -%% from source `minitoc' on 2008/07/16. +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. %% %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> %% %% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system. %% -------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.lan b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.lan index 94be14b72d5..968a0af85bc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.lan +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.lan @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ %% LaTeX2e file `./minitoc-fr.lan' %% generated by the `filecontents' environment -%% from source `minitoc' on 2008/07/16. +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. %% \def\LANG{1} \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf Binary files differindex ff67656d880..ae799429492 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bib index 673587e0265..e1484eb9a31 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bib +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bib @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +% minitoc.bib by Jean-Pierre Drucbert. Part of the minitoc package. + @STRING{pub-SV = "Springer Verlag"} @STRING{pub-SV+adr = "Berlin, Germany~/ Heidelberg, Germany~/ London, UK~/ etc."} @@ -10,24 +12,21 @@ @MISC{minitoc, TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package", AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - NOTE="{\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2008} @MISC{minitoc-fr, TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}", AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - NOTE="{\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2008} @MISC{shorttoc, TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package", AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - NOTE="{\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2002} @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ AUTHOR = {Johannes L. Braams and David P. Carlisle and Alan Jeffrey and Leslie Lamport and Frank \mbox{Mittelbach} and Chris A. Rowley and Rainer Sch{\"o}pf}, TITLE = {The {\LaTeXe} {S}ources}, - URL = "http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/source2e.tex", + URL = "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/source2e.tex", YEAR =2003} @BOOK{TLC2, @@ -88,7 +87,7 @@ MONTH = apr, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/appendix/appendix.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/appendix/appendix.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{babel, @@ -96,7 +95,7 @@ TITLE = "{\textsf{Babel}}, a multilingual package for use with {\LaTeX}'s standard document classes", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/babel.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/babel.pdf", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{babel-user, @@ -104,13 +103,13 @@ TITLE = "{\textsf{Babel}}, a multilingual package for use with {\LaTeX}'s standard document classes (user)", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/user.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/user.pdf", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{hyperref, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian and Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{Hypertext marks in {\LaTeX}: a manual for {\textsf{hyperref}}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2006} @@ -118,7 +117,7 @@ TITLE="{T}he {M}emoir {C}lass", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memman.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memman.pdf", EDITION="sixth", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -127,7 +126,7 @@ TITLE="{T}he {M}emoir {C}lass {(Addendum)}", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memmanadd.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/memmanadd.pdf", EDITION="second", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2007} @@ -136,7 +135,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{notoccite}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/notoccite.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/notoccite.sty", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2000} @@ -144,7 +143,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{placeins}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/placeins/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/placeins/", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2002} @@ -152,7 +151,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{tocbibind}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind/tocbibind.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind/tocbibind.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2004} @@ -160,7 +159,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{tocloft}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft/tocloft.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft/tocloft.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2003} @@ -168,7 +167,7 @@ TITLE = "The {\textsf{titlesec}} and {\textsf{titletoc}} packages", AUTHOR="Bezos, Javier", NOTE="{\url{http://www.tex-tipografia.com/contact.html}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/titlesec/titlesec.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/titlesec/titlesec.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2005} @@ -176,7 +175,7 @@ TITLE="{ArabTeX Version~3}", AUTHOR={Lagally, Klaus}, NOTE="{\url{mailto:lagallyk@acm.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/arabtex/doc/html/arabtex.htm", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/arabtex/doc/html/arabtex.htm", MONTH=oct, YEAR=2003} @@ -196,7 +195,7 @@ TITLE="{M}on{\TeX} -- {A} {Q}uick {G}uide {\emph{(draft)}}", AUTHOR="Corff, Oliver", NOTE="{\url{mailto:corff@zedat.fu-berlin.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/mongolian/montex/doc/mlsquick.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/mongolian/montex/doc/mlsquick.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2002} @@ -204,7 +203,7 @@ TITLE="Mon{\TeX} -- Mongolian for {\LaTeXe}, {I}mplementation {L}evel {S}ystem {D}ocumentation", AUTHOR="Corff, Oliver and Dorj, Dorjpalam", NOTE="{\url{mailto:corff@zedat.fu-berlin.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/mongolian/montex/doc/montex.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/mongolian/montex/doc/montex.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2002} @@ -227,7 +226,7 @@ TITLE="{{Arm\TeX}: a {S}ystem for {W}riting in {A}rmenian with {\TeX} and {\LaTeX} (written in armenian)}", AUTHOR="Dachian, Sergue{\"\i} and Dalalyan, Arnak and Akopian, Vartan", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/armtex/v2.0/manual.ps", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/armtex/v2.0/manual.ps", NOTE="{\url{mailto:Serguei.Dachian@univ-lemans.fr}, \url{http://www-scf.usc.edu/~vakopian/programs/progs.html}}", MONTH=jun, @@ -297,7 +296,7 @@ AUTHOR = "Patashnik, Oren", TITLE = "{{\BibTeX ing}}", NOTE = "Documentation for general {{\BibTeX}} users", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf", MONTH = feb, YEAR = 1988 } @@ -305,7 +304,7 @@ AUTHOR = "Patashnik, Oren", TITLE = "{Designing {\BibTeX} Styles}", NOTE = "The part of {{\BibTeX}}'s documentation that's not meant for general users", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf", MONTH = feb, YEAR = 1988 } @@ -332,14 +331,14 @@ AUTHOR="Kryukov, Alexej M. and Ivanov, Dmitry", TITLE="Typesetting multilingual documents with {ANTOMEGA}", MONTH=sep, - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/antomega.html", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/antomega.html", YEAR=2003} @BOOK{JMPL1, AUTHOR={Bayart, Benjamin}, TITLE="{J}oli manuel pour {\LaTeXe}", PUBLISHER="{G}uide local pour l'{ESIEE}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/JoliManuelPourLaTeX.ps.gz", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/JoliManuelPourLaTeX.ps.gz", NOTE="{\url{mailto:bayartb@edgard.fdn.fr}}", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1995} @@ -350,7 +349,7 @@ JOURNAL="{Cahiers GUTenberg}", NOTE="{F}rench translation of{~\cite{NSSL2E}} by {\oname{Matthieu}{Herrb}}, adaptation and complements by {\oname{Daniel}{Flipo}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/lshort/french/flshort-3.20.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/lshort/french/flshort-3.20.pdf", MONTH=feb, ISSN="1140-9304", VOLUME="{s}pecial issue number{~2}", @@ -359,7 +358,7 @@ @MISC{NSSL2E, AUTHOR={Oetiker, Tobias and Partl, Hubert and Hyna, Helene and Schlegl, Elisabeth}, TITLE="{The Not So Short Introduction to \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/lshort/english/lshort.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/lshort/english/lshort.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2006} @@ -368,21 +367,21 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Lickert, Knut", NOTE="{\url{mailto:knut@lickert.net} et \url{http://tex.lickert.net/packages/minutes/index.html}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minutes/minutes.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minutes/minutes.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{needspace, TITLE="The {\textsf{needspace}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/needspace.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/needspace.sty", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2003} @MISC{txfonts, TITLE="The {TX} {F}onts", AUTHOR="Ryu, Young", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/fonts/txfonts/doc/txfontsdocA4.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/txfonts/doc/txfontsdocA4.pdf", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2000} @@ -390,7 +389,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{ifmtarg}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R. and Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}, \url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/ifmtarg.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/ifmtarg.sty", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2000} @@ -398,7 +397,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{abstract}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/abstract/abstract.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/abstract/abstract.pdf", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2004} @@ -406,7 +405,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{xr}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/xr.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/xr.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=1994} @@ -424,7 +423,7 @@ TITLE="{E}thiopian {L}anguage {S}upport for the {\textsf{Babel}} {P}ackage", AUTHOR="Beyene, Berhanu and Kudlek, Manfred and Kummer, Olaf and Metzinger, Jochen", ORGANIZATION="{U}niversit{\"a}t {A}amburg", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/ethiopia/ethiop/doc/ethiodoc.ps", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/ethiopia/ethiop/doc/ethiodoc.ps", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1998} @@ -432,7 +431,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{sectsty}} package v2.0.2", AUTHOR={{McDonnell}, Rowland}, NOTE="{\url{mailto:rowland.mcdonnell@physics.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/sectsty/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/sectsty/", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2002} @@ -440,7 +439,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{subfig}} {P}ackage", AUTHOR={Cochran, Steven Douglas}, NOTE="{\url{mailto:sds@cs.cmu.edu}, \url{mailto:cochran@ieee.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/subfig.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/subfig/subfig.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -448,7 +447,7 @@ TITLE="{T}ypesetting {M}alayalam {U}sing {\LaTeXe}", AUTHOR="Alex, A.J.", NOTE="{\url{malayalamtex@gmail.com} and \url{mailto:alexaj@myrealbox.com}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/malayalam/doc/mm-usr.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/malayalam/doc/mm-usr.pdf", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2007} @@ -456,21 +455,21 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{comment}} package", AUTHOR="E{\ij}khout, Victor", NOTE="{\url{mailto:victor@eijkhout.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/comment/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/comment/", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1999} @MISC{fontsel, TITLE="{\LaTeXe} font selection", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/fntguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/fntguide.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2004} @MISC{guarani, TITLE="Typesetting {G}uaraní with {\TeX}", AUTHOR="Bezos, Javier", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/guarani/guarani.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/guarani/guarani.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2004} @@ -486,14 +485,14 @@ TITLE="{T}ame the {B}ea{ST} ({T}he {B} {to~X} of{{~~\BibTeX}})", AUTHOR="Markey, Nicolas", NOTE="{\url{mailto:markey@lsv.ens-cachan.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2005} @MISC{classes, AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and Mittelbach, Frank and Braams, Johannes L.", TITLE="{S}tandard {D}ocument {C}lasses for {\LaTeX} {version~2e}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -502,7 +501,7 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption/ccaption.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption/ccaption.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{caption, @@ -510,7 +509,7 @@ MONTH = dec, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{caption-eng, @@ -518,7 +517,7 @@ MONTH = dec, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{caption2, @@ -526,7 +525,7 @@ MONTH = nov, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption2.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption2.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{cap-anleitung, @@ -534,7 +533,7 @@ Tabellenbeschriftungen mit dem \textsf{caption}-Paket}", AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\url{mailto:caption@sommerfee.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR = 2007} @@ -543,7 +542,7 @@ MONTH = sep, AUTHOR = "Hennig, Stephan", NOTE="{\url{mailto:stephanhennig@arcor.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/mcaption/mcaption.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/mcaption/mcaption.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @BOOK{YH2004, @@ -573,7 +572,7 @@ MONTH = aug, AUTHOR = "Basso, Pierre and Ulrich, Stephan", NOTE="{\url{mailto:Pierre.Basso@lim.univ-mrs.fr}, \url{mailto:stefanulrich@users.sourceforge.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/bibtopic/bibtopic.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/bibtopic/bibtopic.pdf", YEAR = 2002} @MISC{bibunits, @@ -581,7 +580,7 @@ MONTH = may, AUTHOR = "Hansen, Thorsten", NOTE="{\url{mailto:thorsten.hansen@psychol.uni-giessen.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/bibunits/bibunits.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/bibunits/bibunits.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{chapterbib, @@ -589,7 +588,7 @@ MONTH = feb, AUTHOR = "Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cite/chapterbib.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cite/chapterbib.sty", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{multibib, @@ -597,7 +596,7 @@ MONTH = jan, AUTHOR = "Hansen, Thorsten", NOTE="{\url{mailto:thorsten.hansen@psychol.uni-giessen.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/multibib/multibib.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/multibib/multibib.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{hangcaption, @@ -605,7 +604,7 @@ MONTH = aug, AUTHOR = "Jones, David{~}M.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:dmjones@theory.lcs.mit.edu}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex209/contrib/misc/hangcaption.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex209/contrib/misc/hangcaption.sty", YEAR = 1992} @BOOK{lunde1993, @@ -627,21 +626,21 @@ @MISC{usrguide, TITLE="{\LaTeXe} for authors", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/usrguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/usrguide.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2001} @MISC{clsguide, TITLE="{\LaTeXe} for Class and Package writers", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/clsguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/clsguide.pdf", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2003} @MISC{cyrguide, TITLE="Cyrillic language support in {\LaTeX}", AUTHOR="Volovich, Vladimir and Lemberg, Werner and {{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/cyrguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/cyrguide.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=1999} @@ -657,28 +656,28 @@ @MISC{koma, TITLE = "{\KOMAScript{}, a versatile {\LaTeXe} bundle}", AUTHOR = "Neukam, Frank and Kohm, Markus and Kielhorn, Axel and Morawski, Jens-Uwe", - URL = "http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguien.pdf", + URL = "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguien.pdf", MONTH = dec, YEAR = 2007} @MISC{komab, TITLE = "{\KOMAScript{}, ein wandelbares {\LaTeXe}-Paket}", AUTHOR = "Neukam, Frank and Kohm, Markus and Kielhorn, Axel and Morawski, Jens-Uwe", - URL = "http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguide.pdf", + URL = "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguide.pdf", MONTH = dec, YEAR = 2007} @MISC{varsects, TITLE="The {\textsf{varsects}} package", AUTHOR="Taupin{\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, Daniel", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/taupin/varsects.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/taupin/varsects.sty", MONTH=nov, YEAR=1998} @MISC{xr-hyper, AUTHOR="Carlisle, David P.", TITLE="{The \textsf{xr-hyper} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2000} @@ -686,7 +685,7 @@ AUTHOR="{American Mathematical Society}", ADDRESS="Providence, Rhode Island", TITLE="{Instructions for Preparation of Papers and Monographs: \AmS-\LaTeX}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/amslatex/classes/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/classes/", NOTE="{See \texttt{instr-l.pdf}}", YEAR=1999} @@ -767,7 +766,7 @@ AUTHOR="Breitenlohner, Peter", PUBLISHER="{The \NTS\ Team}", ADDRESS="{Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Physik, M\"unchen}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/systems/e-tex/v2/doc/etex_man.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/e-tex/v2/doc/etex_man.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1998} @@ -776,7 +775,7 @@ TITLE = "Albanian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:zami1st@yahoo.com}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/albanian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/albanian.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{bahasa, @@ -785,7 +784,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:joerg.knappen@alpha.ntp.springer.de}, \url{mailto:mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasa.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasa.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{bahasam, @@ -794,7 +793,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:joerg.knappen@alpha.ntp.springer.de}, \url{mailto:mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}, \url{mailto:bob.margolis@ntlworld.com}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasam.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/bahasam.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{hebrew2, @@ -802,7 +801,7 @@ TITLE = "Hebrew language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/hebrew.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/hebrew.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{basque, @@ -811,7 +810,7 @@ TITLE = "Basque support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:lg.ehu.es}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/basque.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/basque.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{breton, @@ -819,7 +818,7 @@ TITLE = "Breton language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:Christian.Rolland@univ-brest.fr}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/breton.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/breton.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{bulgarian, @@ -827,7 +826,7 @@ TITLE = "Bulgarian language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:georgi.boshnakov@umist.ac.uk}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/bulgarian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/bulgarian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{catalan, @@ -835,7 +834,7 @@ TITLE = "Catalan language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:badenes@imec.be}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/catalan.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/catalan.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{croatian, @@ -843,7 +842,7 @@ TITLE = "Croatian language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:paica@cernvm.cern.ch}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/croatian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/croatian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{czech, @@ -851,7 +850,7 @@ TITLE = "Czech language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:lokajick@cernvm}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/czech.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/czech.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{danish, @@ -859,7 +858,7 @@ TITLE = "Danish language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:larsen@cernvm.cern.ch}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/danish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/danish.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{dutch, @@ -867,7 +866,7 @@ TITLE = "Dutch language support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/dutch.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/dutch.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{english, @@ -875,7 +874,7 @@ TITLE = "English support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/english.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/english.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{esperanto, @@ -885,7 +884,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:ruizaltb@cernvm.cern.ch}, \url{mailto:knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/esperanto.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/esperanto.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{estonian, @@ -893,7 +892,7 @@ TITLE = "Estonian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}, {\url{mailto:saar@aai.ee}}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/estonian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/estonian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{finnish, @@ -901,7 +900,7 @@ TITLE = "Finnish support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:kanerva@cernvm}, \url{mailto:keranen@cernvm}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/finnish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/finnish.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{frenchb, @@ -909,7 +908,7 @@ TITLE = "{A Babel language definition file for French}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:Daniel.Flipo@univ-lille1.fr}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/frenchb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/frenchb.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{galician, @@ -917,7 +916,7 @@ TITLE = "Galician support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:mcarriba@eunetcom.net}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/galician.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/galician.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{germanb, @@ -925,7 +924,7 @@ TITLE = "German support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/germanb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/germanb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{greek, @@ -934,7 +933,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr} or \url{mailto:apostolo@obelix.ee.duth.gr}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/greek.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/greek.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{icelandic, @@ -942,7 +941,7 @@ TITLE = "Icelandic support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:einar@lif.hi.is}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/icelandic.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/icelandic.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{interlingua, @@ -950,7 +949,7 @@ TITLE = "Interlingua support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:kleiweg@let.rug.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/interlingua.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/interlingua.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{irish, @@ -960,7 +959,7 @@ \url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:fraser@cernvm}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/irish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/irish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{italian, @@ -969,7 +968,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it}, \url{mailto:beccari@polito.it}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/italian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/italian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{latin, @@ -978,7 +977,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:claudio.beccari@polito.it}, with help from \oname{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}, (\url{mailto:kkz@alfa.mimuw.edu.pl})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/latin.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/latin.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{lsorbian, @@ -986,7 +985,7 @@ TITLE = "{Lower Sorbian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:edi@kaihh.hanse.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/lsorbian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/lsorbian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{magyar, @@ -995,7 +994,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, with help from \oname{Attila}{Koppanyi} (\url{mailto:attila@cernvm.cern.ch})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/magyar.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/magyar.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ngermanb, @@ -1003,7 +1002,7 @@ TITLE = "New German support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/ngermanb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/ngermanb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{norsk, @@ -1018,7 +1017,7 @@ \oname{Rune}{Kleveland} (\url{mailto:runekl@math.uio.no}) added the shorthand definitions}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/norsk.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/norsk.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{polish, @@ -1027,7 +1026,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:elmar@uni-paderborn.de}, \url{mailto:massa@uni-paderborn.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/polish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/polish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{portuges, @@ -1037,7 +1036,7 @@ contributed brasilian translations and suggestions for enhancements. \url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:jramalhe@cernvm}, \url{mailto:Jose-Pedro_Ramalhete@macmail}, \url{mailto:arnaldo@vnet.ibm.com}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/portuges.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/portuges.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{romanian, @@ -1046,7 +1045,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:hhu@cernvm.cern.ch}, \url{mailto:robertj@uni-paderborn.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/romanian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/romanian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{russianb1, @@ -1055,7 +1054,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:cyrtug@mir.msk.su}, \url{mailto:TeX@vvv.vsu.ru} et \url{mailto:wl@gnu.org}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/russianb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/russianb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{samin, @@ -1064,7 +1063,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:Regnor.Jernsletten@sami.uit.no} or \url{mailto:Regnor.Jernsletten@eunet.no}}", MONTH = feb, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/samin.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/samin.dtx", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{scottish, @@ -1072,7 +1071,7 @@ TITLE = "Scottish support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:fraser@cernvm}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/scottish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/scottish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{serbian, @@ -1081,7 +1080,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:dejan@yunix.com}, \url{mailto:slobodan@archimed.filfak.ac.ni.yu}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/serbian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/serbian.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{slovak, @@ -1090,7 +1089,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:chlebikj@mff.uniba.cs}, \url{mailto:Tobias.Schlemmer@web.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/slovak.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/slovak.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{slovene, @@ -1098,7 +1097,7 @@ TITLE = "Slovene support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:leon.zlajpah@ijs.si}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/slovene.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/slovene.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{spanish, @@ -1106,7 +1105,7 @@ TITLE = "Spanish support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:jbezos@wanadoo.es} or \url{mailto:babel@braams.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = feb, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/spanish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/spanish.dtx", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{swedish, @@ -1115,7 +1114,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:hellman@cernvm.cern.ch}; enhancements for version~2.0 by \oname{Erik}{{\"O}sthols} (\url{mailto:erik_osthols@yahoo.com})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/swedish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/swedish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{turkish, @@ -1124,7 +1123,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:rz6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de}, with help from \oname{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} and \oname{Turgut}{Uyar} (\url{mailto:uyar@cs.itu.edu.tr})}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/turkish.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/turkish.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ukraineb, @@ -1133,7 +1132,7 @@ TITLE = "Ukrainian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:ashv@icmp.lviv.ua}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/ukraineb.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/ukraineb.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{usorbian, @@ -1141,7 +1140,7 @@ TITLE = "{Upper Sorbian support from the {\textsf{babel}} system}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:edi@kaihh.hanse.de}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/usorbian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/usorbian.dtx", YEAR = 2008} @MISC{welsh, @@ -1149,7 +1148,7 @@ TITLE = "Welsh support from the {\textsf{babel}} system", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}}", MONTH = mar, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/babel/welsh.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/welsh.dtx", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{stdclsdv, @@ -1157,14 +1156,14 @@ MONTH = jul, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/stdclsdv/stdclsdv.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/stdclsdv/stdclsdv.pdf", YEAR = 2000} @INPROCEEDINGS{hyperref-paper, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", BOOKTITLE="{Euro\TeX'99 Proceedings}", TITLE="{PDF information and navigation elements with hyperref, pdf\TeX, and thumbpdf}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/paper.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/paper.pdf", PUBLISHER="TUG", YEAR=1999} @@ -1173,7 +1172,7 @@ TITLE = "Romanian {\TeX}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:adriaan@cs.kun.nl}}", MONTH = oct, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/romanian/RomanianTeX/romanian.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/romanian/RomanianTeX/romanian.dtx", YEAR = 1996} @MISC{spanish4, @@ -1189,7 +1188,7 @@ TITLE="{\TeX{} for the \mbox{Impatient}}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:impatient@tug.org}}", MONTH=sep, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/impatient/book.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/impatient/book.pdf", YEAR=2003} @MISC{fr-impatient, @@ -1198,7 +1197,7 @@ NOTE="{French translation of~\cite{impatient} by \oname{Marc}{Chaudemanche}, \url{mailto:marc.chaudemanche@groupe-mma.fr}}", MONTH=sep, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/impatient/fr/fbook.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/impatient/fr/fbook.pdf", YEAR=2004} @INPROCEEDINGS{X2ENC, @@ -1321,7 +1320,7 @@ @MISC{malayalam-o, TITLE="{Typesetting Malayalam Using~$\Omega/\aleph$}", - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/malayalam-omega.html", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/malayalam-omega.html", AUTHOR="Alex, A.J.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:indicTeX@gmail.com}}", MONTH=nov, @@ -1351,7 +1350,7 @@ TITLE="{The UK \TeX{} FAQ. Your 423 Questions Answered}", AUTHOR="Fairbairns, Robin", NOTE="Version{~}3.17", - URL="http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/help/uk-tex-faq/newfaq.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/uk-tex-faq/newfaq.pdf", HOWPUBLISHED="{Also visible here: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}}", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2007} @@ -1375,7 +1374,7 @@ @MISC{HLATEX, TITLE="{H\LaTeX: a \LaTeX\ package for the Korean language support}", AUTHOR="Koaunghi, Un", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/korean/HLaTeX/hlguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/korean/HLaTeX/hlguide.pdf", HOWPUBLISHED="{In korean}", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2005} @@ -1510,7 +1509,7 @@ TITLE="{The \textsf{docstrip} program}", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank and Duchier, Denys and Braams, Johannes L. and Woli{\'n}ski, Marcin and Wooding, Mark", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/docstrip.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/docstrip.dtx", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -1531,7 +1530,7 @@ HOWPUBLISHED="{In polish and english; see also \url{http://www.tug.org/teTeX/tetex-texmfdist/doc/latex/platex/platex.html}}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:M.Olko@Litterae.com.pl} and \url{mailto:wolinski@gust.org.pl}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/polski/polski.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/polski/polski.dtx", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2008} @@ -1540,14 +1539,14 @@ MONTH = jul, AUTHOR = "Braun, Felix", NOTE="{\url{mailto:fbraun@atdot.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/jura/jura.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/jura/jura.pdf", YEAR = 1998} @MISC{urlbst, TITLE="{The \textsf{urlbst} package}", AUTHOR="Gray, Norman", NOTE="\url{http://www.astro.gla.ac.uk/users/norman/}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/urlbst/urlbst.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/urlbst/urlbst.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2007} @@ -1622,14 +1621,14 @@ @MISC{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty, AUTHOR="Harin, Alexander and Zhytnikov, Vadim V. and Maslov, Vadim", TITLE="The {\textsf{cmcyralt.sty}} file", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1994} @MISC{cmcyralt/russian.sty, AUTHOR="Boyko, Victor", TITLE="The {\textsf{russian.sty}} file", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/russian.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cmcyralt/russian.sty", MONTH=jan, YEAR=1995} @@ -1643,7 +1642,7 @@ @WEBPAGE{lhcyr, TITLE="{The LHCYR collection}", AUTHOR="Zhytnikov, Vadim V. and Maslov, Vadim", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/lhcyr/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/lhcyr/", NOTE="{\url{mailto:vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru}, \url{mailto:vadik@cs.umd.edu}}", MONTH=dec, YEAR=1998} @@ -1726,21 +1725,21 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:sven@tde.lu.se}, Department of Applied Electronics, University of Lund, Box 118, S-221 00 Lund, Sweden}", TITLE="{\SLaTeX:} Swedish speaking version of {\LaTeX}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/swedish/slatex/slatex.1", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/swedish/slatex/slatex.1", MONTH=nov, YEAR=1989} @MISC{ltoutput, TITLE="{{\LaTeXe} Kernel (Output Routine)}", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2000} @MISC{float, TITLE="{An Improved Environment for Floats}", AUTHOR="Lingnau, Anselm", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/float/float.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/float/float.pdf", NOTE="{\url{mailto:anselm@strathspey.org}}", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2001} @@ -1748,7 +1747,7 @@ @MISC{encguide, TITLE="{\LaTeX} font encodings", AUTHOR="{{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/doc/encguide.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/doc/encguide.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2006} @@ -1764,7 +1763,7 @@ AUTHOR="Lapko, Olga G.", TITLE="The \textsf{floatrow} package", NOTE="{\url{mailto:Lapko.O@g23.relcom.ru}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/floatrow/floatrow.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/floatrow/floatrow.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2005} @@ -1772,7 +1771,7 @@ AUTHOR="Lindgren, Ulf A.", TITLE="{FncyChap~V1.33}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:ulf.a.lindgren@ericsson.com}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/fncychap/fncychap.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fncychap/fncychap.pdf", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2005} @@ -1780,7 +1779,7 @@ AUTHOR="Tinnefeld, Karsten", TITLE="{The \textsf{quotchap} document style}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:tinnefeld@irb.cs.uni-dortmund.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/quotchap/quotchap.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/quotchap/quotchap.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1998} @@ -1788,7 +1787,7 @@ AUTHOR="Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", TITLE="{The \textsf{romannum} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/romannum/romannum.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/romannum/romannum.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2005} @@ -1800,7 +1799,7 @@ Via F. Marzolo, 8 -- 35131 PADOVA -- Italy}", TITLE="{The \textsf{sfheaders} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/sfheaders/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/sfheaders/", MONTH=sep, YEAR=1997} @@ -1811,7 +1810,7 @@ Abt.~Biophysikalische Chemie}", TITLE="{\textsf{alnumsec.sty}: Using alphanumeric section numbering with standard sectioning commands}", - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/alnumsec/alnumsec.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/alnumsec/alnumsec.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2005} @@ -1819,7 +1818,7 @@ AUTHOR="Cochran, Steven Douglas", NOTE="{\url{mailto:sds@cs.cmu.edu}, \url{mailto:cochran@ieee.org}}", TITLE="{The \textsf{captcont} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/captcont/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/captcont/", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2002} @@ -1838,15 +1837,15 @@ TITLE="{The \textsf{vruler} package}", AUTHOR="Jiang, Zhuhan", NOTE="{\url{mailto:zhuhan@neumann.une.edu.au}, and look - at \url{http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/vruler.html}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/vruler.sty", + at \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/vruler.html}}", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/vruler.sty", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1996} @MISC{doc, TITLE="{The \textsf{doc} and \textsf{shortverb} packages}", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/doc.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/doc.dtx", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -1862,7 +1861,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{tocvsec2}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2/tocvsec2.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2/tocvsec2.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2004} @@ -1885,7 +1884,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{lipsum}} package", AUTHOR = "Happel, Patrick", NOTE="{\url{mailto:patrick.happel@rub.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/lipsum/lipsum.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/lipsum/lipsum.pdf", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2005} @@ -1893,7 +1892,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{subfigure}} package", AUTHOR={Cochran, Steven Douglas}, NOTE="{\url{mailto:sds@cs.cmu.edu}, \url{mailto:cochran@ieee.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/obsolete/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure/", MONTH=mar, YEAR=1995} @@ -1927,7 +1926,7 @@ TITLE="An environment for multicolumn output", AUTHOR = "Mittelbach, Frank", NOTE="{\url{mailto:Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2000} @@ -1935,7 +1934,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{geometry}} package", AUTHOR={Umeki, Hideo}, NOTE="{\url{mailto:hideo.umeki@toshiba.co.jp}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/geometry/manual.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/geometry/manual.pdf", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2002} @@ -1943,7 +1942,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{wrapfig}} package", AUTHOR={Arseneau, Donald}, NOTE="{\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/wrapfig/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/wrapfig/", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2003} @@ -1952,7 +1951,7 @@ commands and packages)}", AUTHOR="Trettin, Mark", ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:Mark@Trettin@gmx.de} and \url{mailto:juergen.fen@gmx.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/l2tabu/english/l2tabuen.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/l2tabu/english/l2tabuen.pdf", NOTE="{E}nglish translation by {\oname{J{\"u}rgen}{Fenn}}", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2006} @@ -1965,7 +1964,7 @@ ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:Mark@Trettin@gmx.de}, \url{mailto:juergen.fen@gmx.de} and \url{mailto:Yvon.Henel@wanadoo.fr}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/l2tabu/french/l2tabufr-heavy.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/l2tabu/french/l2tabufr-heavy.pdf", NOTE="{English translation by {\oname{J{\"u}rgen}{Fenn}}, french translation by {\oname{Yvon}{Henel}}}", MONTH=jun, @@ -1975,7 +1974,7 @@ TITLE="{Typesetting Arabic and Farsi with the {\Arabi} package. The Users Guide}", AUTHOR="Jabri, Youssef", - URL="http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/arabi.html", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/arabi.html", NOTE="{\url{mailto:yjabri@ensa.univ-oujda.ac.ma}, \'Ecole des sciences appliqu{\'e}es, Bo{\^{\i}}te~696, Oujda, Maroc}", MONTH=dec, @@ -1995,14 +1994,14 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{color}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.dtx", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.dtx", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2005} @MISC{dtxtut, AUTHOR={Pakin, Scott}, TITLE="{How to Package Your \LaTeX{} Package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/dtxtut/dtxtut.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/dtxtut/dtxtut.pdf", NOTE="{\url{mailto:scott+dtx@pakin.org}}", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2004} @@ -2011,7 +2010,7 @@ TITLE = "The {\textsf{docmfp}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/docmfp/docmfp.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/docmfp/docmfp.pdf", MONTH = mar, YEAR = 2005} @@ -2025,7 +2024,7 @@ \url{mailto:zdenek.wagner@gmail.com} and \url{mailto:i@kevincarmody.org}, home page: \url{http://devnag.sarovar.org/}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/devanagari/velthuis/doc/generic/velthuis/manual.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/devanagari/velthuis/doc/generic/velthuis/manual.pdf", MONTH = may, YEAR = 2006} @@ -2191,7 +2190,7 @@ @MISC{flynn, TITLE="{Formatting information. A beginner's introduction to typesetting with {\LaTeX}}", AUTHOR="Flynn, Peter", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/beginlatex/beginlatex-3.6.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/beginlatex/beginlatex-3.6.pdf", NOTE="{\url{mailto:peter.silmaril.ie}}", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2005} @@ -2242,7 +2241,7 @@ @MISC{splitbib, TITLE="{Split your bibliography into categories}", AUTHOR="Markey, Nicolas", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/splitbib/splitbib.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/splitbib/splitbib.pdf", NOTE="{\url{mailto:markey@lsv.ens-cachan.fr}}", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2005} @@ -2390,7 +2389,7 @@ @MISC{btxfaq, AUTHOR = "Shell, Michael and Hoadley, David", TITLE = "{{\BibTeX} {T}ips and {FAQ}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxFAQ.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxFAQ.pdf", NOTE="{\url{http://www.michaelshell.org/}}", MONTH = jan, YEAR = 2007} @@ -2408,20 +2407,20 @@ TITLE="{\emph{MakeIndex}, An Index Processor For {\LaTeX}}", AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie", NOTE="{Technical report, Electronic document in \emph{MakeIndex} distribution}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf", YEAR=1987} @MISC{TFIG, AUTHOR="Lehman, Philipp", TITLE="{The Font Installation Guide}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/", MONTH=dec, YEAR=2004} @MISC{mongolian, AUTHOR="Batmunkh, Dorjgotov", TITLE="{Mongolian support from the \textsf{babel} system}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/mongolian/babel/mongolian.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/mongolian/babel/mongolian.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2007} @@ -2429,7 +2428,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{afterpage}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/afterpage.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/afterpage.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1995} @@ -2437,7 +2436,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{multitoc}} package", AUTHOR = "Schr{\"o}der, Martin", NOTE="{\url{mailto:martin.schroeder@acm.org}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ms/multitoc.dtx", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ms/multitoc.dtx", MONTH=jun, YEAR=1999} @@ -2449,14 +2448,14 @@ PAGES="17--90", TITLE="{Graham Williams' {\TeX} Catalogue}", URL="http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-1/tb66catal.pdf", - NOTE="Last version at: {\url{http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/catalogue.html}}", + NOTE="Last version at: {\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/catalogue.html}}", YEAR=2000} @MISC{cite, TITLE="The {\textsf{cite}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cite/cite.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cite/cite.sty", MONTH=nov, YEAR=2003} @@ -2467,7 +2466,7 @@ \textsf{babel}}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:babel@bramms.cistron.nl}, \url{mailto:mcarriba@eunetcom.net}, \url{mailto:jmugica@digi21.net}}", MONTH = jan, - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/galician/galician.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/galician/galician.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @INCOLLECTION{chinois, @@ -2527,7 +2526,7 @@ AUTHOR="Fear, Simon", NOTE="{In the absence of the author, contact \oname{Danie}{Els}, \url{mailto:dnjels@sun.ac.za}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/booktabs/booktabs.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/booktabs/booktabs.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2003} @@ -2537,7 +2536,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org}, The current maintainer is \oname{Werner}{Lemberg}, \url{mailto:wl@gnu.org}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/dblaccnt.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/dblaccnt.sty", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2005} @@ -2545,21 +2544,21 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{url}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/url.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/url.sty", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2005} @MISC{varioref, TITLE="The {\textsf{varioref}} package", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/varioref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/varioref.pdf", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2003} @MISC{fullpage, TITLE="{A package to Set Margins to Full Page}", AUTHOR="Daly, Patrick W.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/preprint/fullpage.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/preprint/fullpage.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1999} @@ -2569,14 +2568,14 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:thomas@henloch.de}, The font was designed by \oname{Martin}{Vogel}, \url{mailto:marvosym.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/fonts/psfonts/marvosym/marvodoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/fonts/psfonts/marvosym/marvodoc.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2006} @MISC{symbols, AUTHOR={Pakin, Scott}, TITLE="{The Comprehensive {\LaTeX} Symbols List}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/info/symbols/comprehensive/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/info/symbols/comprehensive/", NOTE="{\url{mailto:scott+dtx@pakin.org}}", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -2584,7 +2583,7 @@ @MISC{morefloats, AUTHOR={Hosek, Don}, TITLE="{The \textsf{morefloats} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/morefloats.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/morefloats.sty", NOTE="{\url{mailto:dhosek@ymir.claremont.edu}}", MONTH=jul, YEAR=1990} @@ -2602,14 +2601,14 @@ (Author-Year and Numerical Schemes)}", NOTE="{This paper describes the \textsf{natbib} package (version~8.0), \url{mailto:daly@mps.mpg.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natbib.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natbib.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2007} @MISC{natnotes, AUTHOR={Daly, Patrick~W.}, TITLE="{Reference sheet for \texttt{natbib} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natnotes.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/natbib/natnotes.pdf", NOTE="{\url{mailto:daly@mps.mpg.de}}", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2007} @@ -2618,7 +2617,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{overcite}} package", AUTHOR="Arseneau, Donald", NOTE="{\url{mailto:asnd@reg.triumf.ca}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/cite/overcite.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cite/overcite.sty", MONTH=may, YEAR=2003} @@ -2628,7 +2627,7 @@ NOTE="{\url{mailto:HubertJG@open.min.de}, \url{mailto:Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de}, \url{mailto:j.tkadlec@email.cz}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/pict2e/pict2e.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/pict2e/pict2e.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2008} @@ -2636,7 +2635,7 @@ TITLE="{The main structure of documents}", AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank and Rowley, Chris A. and Jeffrey, Alan and Carlisle, David P.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2004} @@ -2650,35 +2649,35 @@ @MISC{proc, AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and {{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}} and Braams, Johannes L.", TITLE="{Producing proceedings articles with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/proc.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/proc.dtx", MONTH=nov, YEAR=1995} @MISC{slides, AUTHOR="Mittelbach, Frank", TITLE="{Producing slides with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/slides.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/slides.dtx", MONTH=aug, YEAR=1997} @MISC{letter, AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and Mittelbach, Frank and Sch{\"o}pf, Rainer", TITLE="{Standard Letter Document Class for \LaTeX{} version~2e}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/letter.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/letter.dtx", MONTH=apr, YEAR=1999} @MISC{ltxdoc, AUTHOR="Carlisle, David P.", TITLE="{The file \texttt{ltxdoc.dtx} for use with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx", MONTH=aug, YEAR=1999} @MISC{ltnews, AUTHOR="Jeffrey, Alan and {{\LaTeX3} {Project} {Team}}", TITLE="{The file \texttt{ltnews.dtx} for use with \LaTeXe}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/base/ltnews.cls", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/ltnews.cls", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2001} @@ -2689,7 +2688,7 @@ \url{mailto:verna@inf.enst.fr}, \url{mailto:Bernd.Jaehne@aeon.de}, \url{mailto:aroberts@usq.edu.au}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/", MONTH = may, YEAR = 1999} @@ -2698,7 +2697,7 @@ AUTHOR = "Lemberg, Werner and H{\`a}n, Th{\'{\^e}} Th{\`a}nh", NOTE="{\url{mailto:wl@gnu.org}, \url{mailto:hanthethanh@gmx.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/vietnamese/vntex/tex/latex/vntex/", MONTH = oct, YEAR = 2006} @@ -2744,21 +2743,21 @@ @MISC{ntg, TITLE="{NTG Document Classes for \LaTeX{} version~2e}", AUTHOR="Lamport, Leslie and E{\ij}khout, Victor and Braams, Johannes L.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/ntgclass.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/ntgclass.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=2004} @MISC{i-ntg, TITLE="{Introduction to the Dutch \LaTeX{} document classes}", AUTHOR="E{\ij}khout, Victor and Braams, Johannes L.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/classdoc.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ntgclass/classdoc.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1994} @MISC{newcommand, AUTHOR={Pakin, Scott}, TITLE="{The \textsf{newcommand.py} utility}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/support/newcommand/newcommand.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/support/newcommand/newcommand.pdf", NOTE="{\url{mailto:scott+dtx@pakin.org}}", MONTH=jan, YEAR=2005} @@ -2766,8 +2765,8 @@ @MISC{hypernat, AUTHOR={Berger, Jens}, TITLE="{The \textsf{hypernat} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/hypernat.sty", - NOTE="{\url{http://dante.ctan.org/CTAN/help/Catalogue/entries/hypernat.html}}", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/hypernat.sty", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/entries/hypernat.html}}", MONTH=jul, YEAR=2001} @@ -3117,7 +3116,7 @@ AUTHOR="Veytsman, Boris and Schandl, Bernd and Netherton, Lee and Radhakrishnan, C. V.", TITLE="{\textsf{nomencl} A Package to create a Nomenclature}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf", NOTE="{\url{http://sarovar.org/projects/nomencl}}", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2005} @@ -3135,7 +3134,7 @@ @MISC{calc, TITLE="{The {\textsf{calc}} package (Infix notation arithmetic in \LaTeX)}", AUTHOR = "Thorup, Kresten Krab and Jensen, Frank and Rowley, Chris A.", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/tools/calc.dtx", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/calc.dtx", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2005} @@ -3144,7 +3143,7 @@ TITLE="{Documentation for \texttt{fancybox.sty}: Box tips and tricks for \LaTeX}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:tvz@Princeton.EDU}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/fancybox/fancybox.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancybox/fancybox.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2000} @@ -3152,7 +3151,7 @@ AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{The \textsf{hypcap} package}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:oberdiek@uni-freiburg.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/hypcap.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/hypcap.pdf", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2007} @@ -3231,14 +3230,14 @@ AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{The \textsf{ifpdf} package}", NOTE="{\url{mailto:oberdiek@uni-freiburg.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/ifpdf.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/ifpdf.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2006} @MISC{psnfss, AUTHOR="Schmidt, Walter", TITLE="{Using common PostScript fonts with {\LaTeX}. PSNFSS Version~9.2}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/required/psnfss/psnfss2e.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/psnfss/psnfss2e.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2004} @@ -3325,49 +3324,49 @@ @MISC{hyperref-o, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{hyperref package options}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/options.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/options.pdf", MONTH=sep, YEAR=2006} @MISC{hyperref-changelog, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{ChangeLog for the \textsf{hyperref} bundle}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2007} @MISC{hyperref-rdm, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{README for the \textsf{hyperref} bundle}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=2007} @MISC{hyperref-pdf, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{Hypertext marks in {\LaTeX}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2007} @MISC{backref, AUTHOR="Carlisle, David P. and Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{Back referencing from bibliographical citations}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR=2006} @MISC{nameref, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian", TITLE="{Section name references in {\LaTeX}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.pdf", MONTH=may, YEAR=2007} @MISC{flowfram, TITLE="{Creating Flow Frames for Posters, Brochures or Magazines using \textsf{flowfram.sty} v~1.07}", AUTHOR="Talbot, Nicola L. C.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", MONTH=mar, NOTE="{\url{mailto:nlct@cmp.uea.ac.uk}, School of Computing Sciences, University of East Anglia, Norwich. NR4~7TJ, United~Kingdom}", @@ -3376,7 +3375,7 @@ @MISC{ffuserguide, TITLE="{Creating Flow Frames for Posters, Brochures or Magazines using \textsf{flowfram.sty}}", AUTHOR="Talbot, Nicola L. C.", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/flowfram/doc/", MONTH=mar, NOTE="{\url{mailto:nlct@cmp.uea.ac.uk}, School of Computing Sciences, University of East Anglia, Norwich. NR4~7TJ, United~Kingdom}", @@ -3387,7 +3386,7 @@ MONTH = jan, AUTHOR = "Sommerfeldt, Axel", NOTE="{\url{mailto:rotfloat@sommerfeldt.de}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/rotfloat/rotfloat.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/rotfloat/rotfloat.pdf", YEAR = 2004} @MISC{trivfloat, @@ -3395,13 +3394,13 @@ MONTH = jun, AUTHOR = "Wright, Joseph A.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:joseph.wright@morningstar2.co.uk}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/trivfloat/trivfloat.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/trivfloat/trivfloat.pdf", YEAR = 2007} @MISC{rotating, AUTHOR="Rahtz, Sebastian and Barroca, Leonor", TITLE="{A style option for rotated objects in {\LaTeX}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/rotating/rotating.dtx", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/rotating/rotating.dtx", MONTH=sep, YEAR=1997} @@ -3453,7 +3452,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{textcase}} package", AUTHOR = "Carlisle, David P.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:carlisle@cs.man.ac.uk}}", - URL="http:/www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/textcase/textcase.pdf", + URL="http:/mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/textcase/textcase.pdf", MONTH=oct, YEAR=2004} @@ -3519,7 +3518,7 @@ @MISC{nomentbl, AUTHOR="Elmegaard, Brian and Egan, Patrick", TITLE="{The \textsf{nomentbl} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/nomentbl/nomentbl.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomentbl/nomentbl.pdf", NOTE="{\url{mailto:be@mek.dtu.dk}}", MONTH=apr, YEAR=2006} @@ -3535,14 +3534,14 @@ @MISC{frenchle, TITLE="L'extension {\textsf{frenchle}} pour {\LaTeX} (notice d'utilisation)", AUTHOR="Gaulle{\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, Bernard", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/french/frenchle/frenchle.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/french/frenchle/frenchle.pdf", MONTH=feb, YEAR=1997} @MISC{frenchpro, TITLE="Notice d'utilisation de l'extension {\textsf{frenchpro}} pour {\LaTeX}", AUTHOR="Gaulle{\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, Bernard", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/language/french/frenchpro/french/ALIRE.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/language/french/frenchpro/french/ALIRE.pdf", MONTH=jun, YEAR=1997} @@ -3571,7 +3570,7 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledmac.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledmac.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ledpar, @@ -3579,7 +3578,7 @@ MONTH = apr, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledpar.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledpar.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @MISC{ledarab, @@ -3587,7 +3586,7 @@ MONTH = mar, AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledarab.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac/ledarab.pdf", YEAR = 2005} @BOOK{icelandic2, @@ -3613,7 +3612,7 @@ TITLE="The {\textsf{chngpage}} package", AUTHOR = "Wilson, Peter R.", NOTE="{\url{mailto:herries.press@earthlink.net}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/misc/chngpage.sty", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/misc/chngpage.sty", MONTH=aug, YEAR=2003} @@ -3712,9 +3711,7 @@ TITLE="{Writing Greek with the \texttt{greek} option of the {\textsf{babel}} package}", AUTHOR="Syropoulos, Apostolos", - HOWPUBLISHED="{\url{http://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/usage.tex}}", - URL="http://www.tug.org/texlive/Contents/live/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf", - NOTE="{\url{mailto:apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}}", + HOWPUBLISHED="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/babel/usage.tex}}", MONTH=oct, YEAR=1997} @@ -4084,14 +4081,14 @@ @MISC{p-xargs, AUTHOR="P{\'e}gouri{\'e}-Gonnard, Manuel", TITLE="{The \textsf{xargs} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2008} @MISC{p-xargs-fr, AUTHOR="P{\'e}gouri{\'e}-Gonnard, Manuel", TITLE="{L'extension \textsf{xargs}}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/xargs/", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2008} @@ -4255,7 +4252,7 @@ @MISC{makerobust, AUTHOR="Oberdiek, Heiko", TITLE="{The {\textsf{makerobust}} package}", - URL="http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/makerobust.pdf", + URL="http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/makerobust.pdf", MONTH=mar, YEAR=2006} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bug b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bug index 9e237afebe4..ea1e3678c6b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bug +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.bug @@ -1,6 +1,8 @@ -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% minitoc.bug #60 2008/07/16 -There is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about -minitoc.sty. If your version is < 60, please upgrade. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% minitoc.bug v61 2015/07/13 +This is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about +minitoc.sty. If your version is < v61, please upgrade. + +First: this package is looking for a maintainer. If a problem arises, it is often wise to: a) use the hints option, and b) read the DOCUMENT.log file, which may contain pertinent diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f3956adc46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,60174 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 +%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 +%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in: +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". +% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. +% +% This work consists of all the files listed in the file minitoc.l +% distributed with it. +% +% \fi +% +% \iffalse +%<*driver> +\ProvidesFile{minitoc.dtx}% +%</driver> +%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/05] +%<package>\ProvidesPackage{minitoc} +%<*package> + [2015/07/13 v61 minitoc.dtx file] +%</package> +%<package>\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +%<*driver> +\listfiles +\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,oneside,openright]{book} +%\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,twoside,openright]{book} +\newlength{\iwidth} +\newlength{\awidth} +\newlength{\bwidth} +\newlength{\cwidth} +\newlength{\dwidth} +\newlength{\wkdim} +\setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +\addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% +% To add a kind of minitoc in the index +% +%\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\section*{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}\phantomsection} +\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\phantomsection\textbf{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}} +% +% To frame a flag. +\newlength{\flagframethickness} +\setlength{\flagframethickness}{.1pt} +\newcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{black}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup} +\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\flagframethickness}{1mm}} +\AtBeginDocument{\definecolor{FBcolor}{gray}{.93}} +\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{FBcolor}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup}} +\newcommand{\flagboxa}[1]{\raisebox{-2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}} +\newcommand{\flagboxu}[1]{\raisebox{2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}} +% +\def\ATOC#1{{#1}\stepcounter{section}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}#1}} +\newlength{\widthinc}\setlength{\widthinc}{3.5cm} +\makeatletter\@mparswitchfalse\makeatother % les notes marginales à gauche! +\makeatletter +\def\mydotfill#1{% Filling dots; #1 = separation (dimension) + \leavevmode + \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{\cdot}\hss}\hfill + \kern\z@} +\def\mysymbfill#1#2{% Filling symbols; #1 = separation (dimension) #2 = symbol; + \leavevmode + \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{#2}\hss}\hfill + \kern\z@} +\makeatother +\let\RR\raggedright % or \RaggedRight ? +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lan}{\input{\jobname.lan}}{\typeout{WARNING: \jobname.lan NOT FOUND}\def\LANG{0}} +\IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\usepackage{marvosym}\def\myCoffeecup{~\Coffeecup}}{\let\myCoffeecup\relax} +\IfFileExists{mparhack.sty}{\usepackage{mparhack}}{} % not used if oneside. +\usepackage{chngpage} % to enlarge the biblio +\IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort&compress,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}\citeindextrue}{} +\IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\usepackage[tight]{shorttoc}}{} +\IfFileExists{fnbreak.sty}{\usepackage{fnbreak}}{} % Checks split footnotes +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\usepackage{ifthen} +\newcounter{currlevel}\setcounter{currlevel}{-1} +\makeatletter +\gdef\@idxitem#1{% + \par + \hangindent 40\p@ + \ifthenelse{#1 > \value{currlevel}}{{% + \nobreak + }{\ifthenelse{#1 = \value{currlevel}}{% + \pagebreak[0]% + }{% + \pagebreak[2]% + }}% + \setcounter{currlevel}{#1}% + \hangindent 40pt +}}% +\makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\makeatletter +\providecommand*{\toclevel@chaptersom}{0} +\makeatletter\providecommand*{\toclevel@sectionsom}{0} +\let\nouppercase\relax +\def\Shorttableofcontents#1#2{\bgroup\c@tocdepth=#2\@restonecolfalse + \if@tightshtoc + \parsep\z@ + \fi + \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\section*{{#1} + \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{sectionsom}{#1}}% + {\chapter*{{#1} + \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chaptersom}{#1}}% + \@startshorttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi\egroup} +\def\l@chaptersom{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}} +\makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \IfFileExists{repeatindex.sty}{\usepackage{repeatindex}}{}% To improve the index; DOES NOT WORK %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\IfFileExists{sectsty.sty}{\usepackage[garrulous]{sectsty}% To fix long sectionning titles... + \partfont{\RR}% + \chapterfont{\RR}% + \sectionfont{\RR}% + \subsectionfont{\RR}% + \subsubsectionfont{\RR}}{} % NOT \paragraph or \subparagraph ! +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \usepackage[space,sort]{cite} % cite does not work well with hyperref... +%\RequirePackage[nocompress,sort]{cite}[2003/11/04] % cite[compress] or cite[sort] does not work well with hyperref; +% use a recent recent version of cite.sty to use its sort option. +% In fact, I use (above): \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}}{} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\providecommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak} +\providecommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]} +\providecommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak} +\or\relax +\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{-}\nolinebreak} +\fi +\let\bibpreamble\relax +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries This bibliography contains many URLs; you must be aware that +some of them might be inaccessible because they are obsolete, or because their site is down or encounters +some unexpected problem. Note also that the response of some sites may be slow (several seconds). +For instance, the entries +\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, from the \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/} +site, are very difficult to contact. + +The URLs beginning with ``\texttt{https:}'' to the TUGboat site may have a restricted access to the TUG members during +one year after publication. Being a member of TUG is useful and cheap! + +Some URLs may contain an extension not supported by your Web browser; in such cases, you should try to access to the +document manually. An example is~\cite{JMPL1}, whose extension is \suffix{.ps.gz}. + +Some URLs are too long for some tools; when possible, I shortened the URL to display only the contents the +directory, as for~\cite{pdftex}, or by using an URL to the catalogue entry (as for~\cite{arabi} +and~\cite{antomega}); when not possible, you should try +to access to the document manually.\par\lneed{12}% +}} +\or\relax +\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries Cette bibliographie contient de nombreux URLs; vous devez être +avertis que certains d'entre eux pourraient être inaccessibles parce qu'ils sont obsolètes, parce que leur site +est inactif ou subit un problème inattendu. Notez aussi que certains sites peuvent être lents à~répondre (quelques +secondes). +Par exemple, les entrées +\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, depuis le site \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/}, +sont très difficiles à~atteindre. + +Les URLs commençant par {\froff\og{} \texttt{https:}~\fg{}} vers le site de TUGboat peuvent avoir leur accès restreint +aux membres du TUG pendant un an après leur publication. Être membre du TUG est utile et n'est pas très cher! + +Certains URLs peuvent contenir un suffixe non supporté par votre navigateur Web; dans un tel cas, vous devriez +essayer d'accéder au document manuellement. Un exemple est~\cite{JMPL1}, dont le suffixe est \suffix{.ps.gz}. + +Certains URLs sont trop longs pour certains logiciels; lorsque c'était possible, j'ai raccourci l'URL pour +n'afficher que le contenu du répertoire, ainsi par exemple pour~\cite{pdftex}, ou en utilisant un URL vers +l'entrée dans le catalogue (comme pour~\cite{arabi} and~\cite{antomega}); lorsque ce n'était pas possible, +vous devrez essayer d'accéder manuellement au document.\par\lneed{12}% +}} +\fi +% inclusion graphique centrée verticalement +% #1=hauteur apparente [0pt] optionnelle, #2=largeur, #3=fichier image +% \newlength{\hivc}\setlength{\hivc}{0pt} +% \newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\setlength{\hivc}{#1}\leavevmode\rule[-.5\hivc]{0pt}{\hivc}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}} +\newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}} +% +\renewcommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]} +\renewcommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\usepackage[english2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} +\or\relax +\usepackage[french2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} +\fi +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\emph{see}} +\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{see}~#1} +\or\relax +\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\textit{voir}} +\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{voir}~#1} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% NEW INDEX COMMANDS +% -- packages +\newcommand{\pack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipack{#1}} +\newcommand{\upack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\ipack}[1]{\ipackA{#1}\ipackB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- packages with special names (#1=real name, #2=sort) +\newcommand{\packa}[2]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipacka{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\upacka}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\ipacka}[2]{\ipackaA{#1}{#2}\ipackaB{#1}{#2}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- classes +\newcommand{\class}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\iclass{#1}} +\newcommand{\uclass}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\iclass}[1]{\iclassA{#1}\iclassB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- scripts +\newcommand{\scrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iscrp{#1}} +\newcommand{\uscrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\iscrp}[1]{\iscrpA{#1}\iscrpB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +% -- tools +\newcommand{\tool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\itool{#1}} +\newcommand{\utool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\itool}[1]{\itoolA{#1}\itoolB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- examples +\newcommand{\exam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iexam{#1}} +\newcommand{\uexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\iexam}[1]{\iexamA{#1}\iexamB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(example document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Examples=\protect\leavevmode Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(exemple de document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Exemples=\protect\leavevmode Exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +% -- old examples +\newcommand{\oexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioexam{#1}} +\newcommand{\uoexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ioexam}[1]{\ioexamA{#1}\ioexamB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(old example document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Old Examples=\protect\leavevmode Old Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(ancien exemple de document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Anciens exemples=\protect\leavevmode Anciens exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +% -- features +\newcommand{\feat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ifeat{#1}} +\newcommand{\ufeat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ifeat}[1]{\ifeatA{#1}\ifeatB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (feature)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Features=\protect\leavevmode Features\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (dispositif)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Dispositifs=\protect\leavevmode Dispositifs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- extensions/suffixes +\newcommand{\suffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\isuffix{#1}} +\newcommand{\usuffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\isuffix}[1]{\isuffixA{#1}\isuffixB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (extension)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Extensions=\protect\leavevmode Extensions\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (suffixe)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Suffixes=\protect\leavevmode Suffixes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- options (minitoc) +\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iopt{#1}} +\newcommand{\optd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptd{#1}} +\newcommand{\uopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\iopt}[1]{\ioptA{#1}\ioptB{#1}} +\newcommand{\ioptd}[1]{\ioptdA{#1}\ioptdB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default option)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option par défaut)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- options (other packages) +% \newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}\ioptp{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptp{#1}{#2}} +%\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}} +\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ioptp}[2]{\ioptpA{#1}{#2}\ioptpB{#1}{#2}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(\protect\textsf{#2} package)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(paquetage \protect\textsf{#2})}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- language options +\newcommand{\lopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ilopt{#1}} +\newcommand{\loptd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iloptd{#1}} +\newcommand{\ulopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ilopt}[1]{\iloptA{#1}\iloptB{#1}} +\newcommand{\iloptd}[1]{\iloptdA{#1}\iloptdB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(language option)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default language option)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(option de langue)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option de langue par défaut)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- names +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- authors names in bib +\newcommand{\bname}[3]{\bnameA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bnameB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\newcommand{\bnamea}[4]{\bnameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\bnameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}} + +\newcommand\sksep{\ensuremath{\hookrightarrow}}% % put before the bib. refs in the index +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}} +\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}} +\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}} +\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}} +\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- tool names in bib +\newcommand{\btool}[2]{\btoolA{#1}{#2}\btoolB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\btoola}[3]{\btoolaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\btoolaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- pack names in bib +\newcommand{\bpack}[2]{\bpackA{#1}{#2}\bpackB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\bpacka}[3]{\bpackaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bpackaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- class names in bib -- nom, [ nom-tri ], clé-bib +\newcommand{\bclass}[2]{\bclassA{#1}{#2}\bclassB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\bclassa}[3]{\bclassaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bclassaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- environments +\newcommand{\env}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ienv{#1}} +\newcommand{\uenv}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ienv}[1]{\ienvA{#1}\ienvB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environment)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environments=\protect\leavevmode Environments>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environnement)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environnements=\protect\leavevmode Environnements>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- files +\newcommand{\xfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixfile{#1}} +\newcommand{\uxfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ixfile}[1]{\ixfileA{#1}\ixfileB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (file)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Files=\protect\leavevmode Files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (fichier)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Fichiers=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- graphic files +\newcommand{\xgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrf{#1}} +\newcommand{\uxgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ixgrf}[1]{\ixgrfA{#1}\ixgrfB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(graphic file)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Graphic files=\protect\leavevmode Graphic files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier graphique)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Fichiers graphiques=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers graphiques\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- flags (graphic) files +\newcommand{\xgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrfl{#1}} +\newcommand{\uxgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ixgrfl}[1]{\ixgrflA{#1}\ixgrflB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(flag file)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Flags files=\protect\leavevmode Flags files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier drapeau)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Fichiers drapeaux=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers drapeaux\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- .mld /mlo couples +\newcommand{\xmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}} +\newcommand{\ixmldo}[1]{\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}} +\newcommand{\uxmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- depth counters +\newcommand{\dcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\idcnt{#1}} +\newcommand{\udcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\idcnt}[1]{\idcntA{#1}\idcntB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(depth counter)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Depth counters=\protect\leavevmode Depth counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(compteur de profondeur)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs de profondeur=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs de profondeur\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- counters +\newcommand{\cnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\icnt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ucnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\icnt}[1]{\icntA{#1}\icntB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (counter)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Counters=\protect\leavevmode Counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (compteur)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- commands +\newcommand{\lit}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} % literal string +\newcommand{\clit}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} % literal command string +\newcommand{\com}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}\icom{#1}} +\newcommand{\ucom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} +\newcommand{\icom}[1]{\icomA{#1}\icomB{#1}} +\newcommand{\fkcom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[fake]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{fake#1}} +\newcommand{\ncom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[no]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{no#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (command)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commands=\protect\leavevmode Commands\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (commande)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commandes=\protect\leavevmode Commandes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- messages +%\newcommand{\mess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\imess{#1}} +%\newcommand{\umess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +% \let\Buttonbox\Ovalbox % to be changed easily +\def\Buttonbox#1{\fbox{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily +% \def\Buttonbox#1{\keystroke{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily +\newcommand{\lmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\footnotesize + \hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}} +\newcommand{\phmess}{\footnotesize + \item[]{\textcolor{white}{\Buttonbox{\phantom{\texttt{M0000}}}}}} +\newcommand{\RMP}[1]{\reversemarginpar + \marginpar[{\raggedleft\strut\footnotesize\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}}% + }\normalmarginpar} +\newcommand{\NMP}[1]{\normalmarginpar + \marginpar[{\raggedleft\Strutt\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}% + }\normalmarginpar} +\newcommand{\imess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\RMP{#1}} +\newcommand{\jmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\NMP{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +\newcommand{\HPH}{\footnotesize\hphantom{\fbox{\texttt{M0000}}}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- Stacked Messages in Margin \SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\ \lmess{W0055}} +\newcommand{\SMM}[1]{\bgroup% + \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. + \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \protect #1% + \end{tabular}}\egroup} +% -- idem. plus a Z dangerous bend above +\newcommand{\SMMZ}[1]{\bgroup% + \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. + \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex] + \protect #1% + \end{tabular}}\egroup} +% -- idem. plus a ZZ double dangerous bend above +\newcommand{\SMMZZ}[1]{\bgroup% + \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. + \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex] + \protect #1% + \end{tabular}}\egroup} +% Redefine \virage and \Virage (beware to the braces!) +\AtBeginDocument{% +\renewcommand{\virage}{% + \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt}\hfill\null\\ + \HPH + \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar} +\renewcommand{\Virage}{% + \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\ + \HPH + \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar}% +} %%% ATBEGINDOCUMENT +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\gdef\envname{environment} +\gdef\envsname{environments} +\gdef\Envsname{Environments} +\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% + \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} +%\def\generalname{General} +\gdef\generalname{} +\or\relax +\gdef\envname{environnement} +\gdef\envsname{environnements} +\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} +\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% + \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} +%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} +\gdef\generalname{} +\fi +\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\setlength{\ptcindent}{0pt} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\makeatletter +\InputIfFileExists{ltxdoc.cfg}% +{\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used^^J% + *************************************}} +{} +\RequirePackage{doc} +\renewenvironment{theglossary}{% +\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi +\columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@ +% \twocolumn[\glossary@prologue]% +\onecolumn \glossary@prologue%JPFD +\raggedright +\GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces} +{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} +\AtBeginDocument{\MakeShortVerb{\|}} +\AtBeginDocument{\providecommand{\phantomsection}{}} +\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmtt/m/n}{} +\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmtt}{\skewchar\font 48} % '60 +\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{m}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{} +\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{} +\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{} +\CodelineNumbered +\DisableCrossrefs +\setlength{\textwidth}{375pt} % was 355pt +\newlength{\winf}\setlength{\winf}{\textwidth} % width in frame +\newlength{\winp}\setlength{\winp}{\textwidth} % width in minipage +\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} +\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} +\addtolength\marginparwidth{30pt} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{20pt} +\addtolength\evensidemargin{20pt} +\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} +\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}} +\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax} +\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} +\providecommand\marg[1]{% + {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}} +\providecommand\oarg[1]{% + {\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}} +\providecommand\parg[1]{% + {\ttfamily(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily)}} +\def\oc@scan#1{% + \ifx\oc@bslash#1% + \egroup\let\next\oc@bslash\else + \ifcat a\noexpand#1% + #1\let\next\oc@scan\else + \ifx\oc@percent#1% + \def\next{\char`\%\egroup}% + \else + #1\let\next\egroup + \fi\fi\fi\next} +\def\oc@bslash{\bgroup\oc@ttf\char`\\\oc@scan}% +\def\oc@verb#1{% + \catcode`#1\active + \uccode`\~`#1% + \uppercase{\def~{{\oc@ttf\char`#1}}}} +\begingroup + \obeyspaces% + \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\ + /catcode`/\/active + /catcode`<=/catcode`{% + /catcode`>=/catcode`}% + /catcode`/{/active% + /catcode`/}/active% + /gdef/oldc< \end{oldcomments}>% + /gdef/begmac< \begin{macrocode}>% + /gdef/obs</def <</oc@ttf/ >>>% +/endgroup% +\begingroup + \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\ + \catcode`\\=13 + /catcode`/|=/catcode`/% + /catcode`/%=13 + /gdef/oldcomments{| + /makeatletter + /let/do/oc@verb/dospecials + /frenchspacing/@vobeyspaces/obs + /raggedright + /oc@verb/>| + /oc@verb/<| + /let\/oc@bslash + /let%/oc@percent + /obeylines + /parindent/z@ + /ttfamily/expandafter/let/expandafter/oc@ttf/the/font + /rmfamily + /hfuzz/maxdimen + } +/endgroup +\begingroup + \sloppy% + \obeylines% + \gdef\oc@percent#1^^M{% + \ifvmode% + \def\commentline{#1}% + \ifx\commentline\oldc% + \end{oldcomments}% + \else% + \ifx\commentline\begmac% + \begin{macrocode}% + \else% + \leavevmode% + #1^^M% + \fi\fi% + \else% + {\oc@ttf\char`\%}#1^^M% + \fi}% +\endgroup% +% \@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{part} +\def\partname{File} +\newcommand*{\DocInclude}[1]{% + \relax + \clearpage + \docincludeaux + \IfFileExists{#1.fdd}{\def\currentfile{#1.fdd}}{\def\currentfile{#1.dtx}}% + \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux\relax + \@latexerr{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha + \else \@docinclude#1 \fi} +\def\@docinclude#1 {\clearpage +\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi +\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\edef\@tempb{#1}\@for +\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi +\if@tempswa \let\@auxout\@partaux \if@filesw +\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux +\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi +\let\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex\PrintIndex +\let\PrintIndex\relax +\let\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges\PrintChanges +%\let\PrintChanges\relax +\let\@ltxdoc@theglossary\theglossary +\let\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary\endtheglossary +\part{\currentfile}% + {\let\ttfamily\relax + \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}% +\DocInput{\currentfile}% +\let\PrintIndex\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex +\let\PrintChanges\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges +\let\theglossary\@ltxdoc@theglossary +\let\endtheglossary\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary +\clearpage +\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi +\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi\let\@auxout\@mainaux} +\gdef\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw + \immediate\write\@indexfile + {\string\indexentry{#1}% + {\filesep\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}% +\let\filesep\@empty +\def\aalph#1{\@aalph{\csname c@#1\endcsname}} +\def\@aalph#1{% + \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or + j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or + t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\or A\or B\or C\or + D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or + N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or + X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi} +\def\docincludeaux{% + \def\thepart{\aalph{part}}\def\filesep{\thepart-}% + \let\filekey\@gobble + \g@addto@macro\index@prologue{% + \gdef\@oddfoot{\parbox{\textwidth}{\strut\footnotesize + \raggedright{\bfseries File Key:} \filekey}}% + \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% + \global\let\docincludeaux\relax + \gdef\@oddfoot{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@\currentfile\endcsname\relax + File \thepart: {\ttfamily\currentfile} % + \else + \GetFileInfo{\currentfile}% + File \thepart: {\ttfamily\filename} % + Date: \filedate\ % + Version \fileversion + \fi + \hfill\thepage}% + \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% +\def\task#1#2{} +% ``Change History'' in TOC +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\gdef\envname{environment} +\gdef\envsname{environments} +\gdef\Envsname{Environments} +\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% + \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} +%\def\generalname{General} +\gdef\generalname{} +\or\relax +\gdef\envname{environnement} +\gdef\envsname{environnements} +\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} +\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% + \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} +%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} +\gdef\generalname{} +\fi +\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI +\let\sv@glossary@prologue\glossary@prologue +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Change History}} +\or\relax +\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Historique des modifications}} +\fi +%% redefine \glossaryentry +\def\nouse#1{\mbox{}} +%%% +% morefloats.sty ... +% \iffalse +%% This is morefloats.sty as of 27-July-1990 +%% Don Hosek, Quixote <dhosek@ymir.claremont.edu> +% \fi +% +% The task at hand is to increase \LaTeX's current limit of 18 unprocessed +% floats in memory at once to 36. An examination of latex.tex reveals that +% this is accomplished by allocating an insert register for each unprocessed +% float. A quick check of lplain.lis reveals that there is room, in fact, +% for 230 additional unprocessed floats, but \TeX's main memory would be +% exhausted long before that happened. +% +% First we allocate the additional insert registers needed: +\newinsert\bx@S +\newinsert\bx@T +\newinsert\bx@U +\newinsert\bx@V +\newinsert\bx@W +\newinsert\bx@X +\newinsert\bx@Y +\newinsert\bx@Z +\newinsert\bx@AA +\newinsert\bx@BB +\newinsert\bx@CC +\newinsert\bx@DD +\newinsert\bx@EE +\newinsert\bx@FF +\newinsert\bx@GG +\newinsert\bx@HH +\newinsert\bx@II +\newinsert\bx@JJ +\newinsert\bx@KK +\newinsert\bx@LL +\newinsert\bx@MM +\newinsert\bx@NN +\newinsert\bx@OO +\newinsert\bx@PP +\newinsert\bx@QQ +\newinsert\bx@RR +\newinsert\bx@SS +\newinsert\bx@TT +\newinsert\bx@UU +\newinsert\bx@VV +\newinsert\bx@WW +\newinsert\bx@XX +\newinsert\bx@YY +\newinsert\bx@ZZ +\newinsert\bx@AAA +\newinsert\bx@BBB +% +% That accomplished, the next step is to define the macro \verb+\@freelist+ +% which is merely a list of the box registers each preceded by \verb+\@elt+. +% This approach allows processing of the list to be done far more efficiently. +% A similar approach is used by Mittelbach \& Sch\"opf's \texttt{doc.sty}~\cite{doc} to +% keep track of control sequences which should not be indexed. +\gdef\@freelist{\@elt\bx@A\@elt\bx@B\@elt\bx@C\@elt\bx@D\@elt\bx@E + \@elt\bx@F\@elt\bx@G\@elt\bx@H\@elt\bx@I\@elt\bx@J + \@elt\bx@K\@elt\bx@L\@elt\bx@M\@elt\bx@N + \@elt\bx@O\@elt\bx@P\@elt\bx@Q\@elt\bx@R + \@elt\bx@S\@elt\bx@T\@elt\bx@U\@elt\bx@V + \@elt\bx@W\@elt\bx@X\@elt\bx@Y\@elt\bx@Z + \@elt\bx@AA\@elt\bx@BB\@elt\bx@CC\@elt\bx@DD + \@elt\bx@EE\@elt\bx@FF\@elt\bx@GG\@elt\bx@HH + \@elt\bx@II\@elt\bx@JJ\@elt\bx@KK\@elt\bx@LL + \@elt\bx@MM\@elt\bx@NN\@elt\bx@OO\@elt\bx@PP + \@elt\bx@QQ\@elt\bx@RR\@elt\bx@SS\@elt\bx@TT + \@elt\bx@UU\@elt\bx@VV\@elt\bx@WW\@elt\bx@XX + \@elt\bx@YY\@elt\bx@ZZ\@elt\bx@AAA\@elt\bx@BBB} +\makeatother +%%% +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +% \PageIndex +% \RecordChanges +\input{minitoc.pre} +\providecommand{\capstart}{\empty} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\usepackage{fancybox} +% \usepackage[english]{keystroke} % ERRORS +\or\relax +\froff\usepackage{fancybox}\fron +% \usepackage[french]{keystroke} % ERRORS +\fi +% +%%%% FANCYHDR +% \usepackage{fancyhdr} +%%%% FANCYHDR +\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% + \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} +\providecommand{\hyperlink}[2]{\empty} +\providecommand{\hypertarget}[2]{\empty} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \makeatletter +% \def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble +% \string#1\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}% +% \@esphack} +% \def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\main}% +% \@esphack} +% \def\SpecialIndex@#1#2{% +% \@SpecialIndexHelper@#1\@nil +% \def\@tempb{ }% +% \ifcat \@tempb\@gtempa +% \special@index{\quotechar\space\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar +% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar\space\verbatimchar#2}% +% \else +% \def\@tempb##1##2\relax{\ifx\relax##2\relax +% \def\@tempc{\special@index{\quotechar##1\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar +% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar##1\verbatimchar#2}}% +% \else +% \def\@tempc{\special@index{##1##2\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar +% \bslash##1##2\verbatimchar#2}}% +% \fi}% +% \expandafter\@tempb\@gtempa\relax +% \@tempc +% \fi} + \makeatletter + \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{% + #1\actualchar + {\string\ttfamily\space#1} + (\envname)% + \encapchar \string\main}% + \special@index{\Envsname\levelchar{% + \string\ttfamily\space#1}\encapchar + \string\main}\@esphack} + \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack + {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}% + \@esphack} + \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack + \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1} + (\envname)\encapchar \string\usage}% + \index{Envsname\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar + \string\usage}\@esphack} +% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{} +% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{} +\gdef\main#1{\textsf{#1}} +\gdef\usage#1{\textit{#1}} +% \gdef\hyperpage#1{\textbf{#1}} + \makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% NEW ENV + \makeatletter + \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}% + \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}% + } +% + \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack + {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}% + \@esphack} + \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}% + \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}% + } +% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{} +% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{} +\let\ohyperpage\hyperpage +\gdef\main#1{\textbf{#1}} +\gdef\usage#1{\textsf{#1}} +\gdef\hyperpage#1{\textit{\ohyperpage{#1}}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\ifcase\LANG\relax + \includecomment{ENGLISH} + \excludecomment{FRENCH} + \typeout{ENGLISH DOC} +\or\relax + \excludecomment{ENGLISH} + \includecomment{FRENCH} + \typeout{FRENCH DOC} +\else\relax + \includecomment{ENGLISH} + \excludecomment{FRENCH} + \typeout{BAD LANGUAGE: ENGLISH DOC BY DEFAULT} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1} +\def\ABK{\penalty-1\xspace} +\def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} +\def\NC{\penalty-1\hspace{2em}\P~} +\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage +\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{% + \clearpage + {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}% + } +\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage +\interfootnotelinepenalty=9999 +\let\svfinalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits +\finalhyphendemerits=\maxdimen +\lefthyphenmin=3 +\righthyphenmin=3 +%%% pb \envname +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\gdef\envname{environment} +\gdef\envsname{environments} +\gdef\Envsname{Environments} +\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% + \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} +%\def\generalname{General} +\gdef\generalname{} +\or\relax +\gdef\envname{environnement} +\gdef\envsname{environnements} +\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} +\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% + \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} +%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} +\gdef\generalname{} +\fi +%%% fixed notes +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~and~\texttt{o} are the letter~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~is the zero digit.} +\or\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~et~\texttt{o} sont la lettre~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~est le chiffre zéro.} +\fi +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Spoken in Acadia and some parts of the south +of the USA, like Louisiane.} +\or\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Parlée en Acadie et dans certaines parties du +sud des États-Unis, comme la Louisiane; voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Français_cadien}\,.} +\fi +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{By \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) and the +\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. See the \upack{Farsi\TeX} site at~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}} +\or\relax +\froff\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{Par \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) et le +\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. Voir le site de \upack{Farsi\TeX} à~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}\fron +\fi +\ifx\KOMAScript\undefined% + \DeclareRobustCommand{\KOMAScript}{\textsf{K\kern.05em O\kern.05em M\kern.05em A\kern.1em-\kern.1em Script}} +\fi +\ifx\PLaTeX\undefined +\makeatletter +\DeclareRobustCommand\PLaTeX{% after latex.dtx + P\kern-.08em L\kern-.36em + {\setbox0\hbox{T}% + \vbox to\ht0{\hbox{% + \csname S@\f@size\endcsname + \fontsize\sf@size\z@ + \math@fontsfalse\selectfont + A} + \vss}% + }% + \kern-.15em + \TeX\@}% +\makeatother +\fi +\def\PLaTeXe{P\LaTeXe} +\def\quocngu{Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}} +%%%% Strings by language +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUAGE}} +\def\OFFSET{\mbox{OFFSET}} +\def\NB{\mbox{NUMBER}} +\def\NNN{\mbox{LINE}} +\def\PREPA{\mbox{PREPARATION}} +\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASS}} +\def\INAME{\mbox{INTERNAL\_NAME}} +\def\SEQ{\mbox{SEQUENCE}} +\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NEW\_TITLE}} +\def\FILE{\mbox{FILE}} +\def\CTR{\mbox{COUNTER}} +\def\VAL{\mbox{VALUE}} +\def\EXTEN{\mbox{EXTENSION}} +\def\STRING{\mbox{STRING}} +\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMAND}} +\def\PACK{\mbox{PACK}} +\or\relax +\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUE}} +\def\OFFSET{\mbox{DÉPLACEMENT}} +\def\NB{\mbox{NOMBRE}} +\def\NNN{\mbox{LIGNE}} +\def\PREPA{\mbox{PRÉPARATION}} +\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASSE}} +\def\INAME{\mbox{NOM\_INTERNE}} +\def\SEQ{\mbox{SÉQUENCE}} +\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NOUVEAU\_TITRE}} +\def\FILE{\mbox{FICHIER}} +\def\CTR{\mbox{COMPTEUR}} +\def\VAL{\mbox{VALEUR}} +\def\EXTEN{\mbox{SUFFIXE}} +\def\STRING{\mbox{CHAÎNE}} +\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMANDE}} +\def\PACK{\mbox{PAQUETAGE}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% On float pages, push the floats to the top +\makeatletter +\setlength{\@fptop}{\topskip} +\addtolength{\@fptop}{-10pt} +\setlength{\@fpsep}{1.5\baselineskip plus 0fil} +\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fill} +\makeatother +\usepackage{dblaccnt} % here! +\def\magicminitoc{\columnwidth=\linewidth\null\hfilneg\hspace*{-\itemindent}\hspace*{-\leftmargin}\hspace*{-\labelwidth}\minitoc\hfill\null} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newsavebox{\Citname}% See TLC2 p 849 +\newenvironment{Citation}[1]% + {\sbox\Citname{#1}\unskip\noindent}% + {\null\hspace*{\fill}\nolinebreak[1]% + \quad\hspace*{\fill}% + \finalhyphendemerits=0\relax + \usebox{\Citname}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newsavebox{\BMTC} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Load hypernat.sty to compress citations; beware to the catcode of ``:''. +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{} +\or\relax +\froff\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{}\fron +\fi +\begin{document} +\pagestyle{headings} +% \setcounter{lofdepth}{2} +% \mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2} +\raggedbottom +\addtolength{\marginparsep}{.5em}%ESSAI +\setlength{\marginparpush}{1.0ex}% +% % FANCYHDR +% \renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% +% \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} +% \pagestyle{fancy} +% \fancyhf{} % RAZ +% %\newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\marginparwidth}\addtolength{\fancyoff}{\marginparsep} +% \newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\leftmargin} +% \fancyheadoffset[RO,LE]{\fancyoff} +% \fancyhead[RO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage} +% \fancyhead[RE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage} +% \fancyhead[LO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark} +% \fancyhead[LE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark} +% \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.4pt} +% \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt} +% \addtolength{\headheight}{2pt} +% % FANCYHDR +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\let\fron\relax +\let\froff\relax +\selectlanguage{english}\nonfrenchspacing + \def\reftextfaceafter {on the \reftextvario{facing}{next} page}% + \def\reftextfacebefore{on the \reftextvario{facing}{preceding} page}% + \def\reftextafter {on the \reftextvario{next}{following} page}% + \def\reftextbefore {on the \reftextvario{page before}{preceding page}}% + \def\reftextcurrent {on \reftextvario{this}{this} page}% +%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}% + \def\reftextfaraway#1{on page~\pageref{#1}}% + \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{on pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}% + \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} to~\ref{#2}}% +\or\relax +\fron\selectlanguage{french}\frenchspacing + \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Liste des figures}% + \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Liste des tableaux}% + \renewcommand\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Fig.) + \renewcommand\tablename{{\scshape Tableau}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Tab.) + \def\reftextfaceafter {page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}% + \def\reftextfacebefore{page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}% + \def\reftextafter {page suivante}% + \def\reftextbefore {page pr\'ec\'edente}% + \def\reftextcurrent {sur cette page}% +%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}% + \def\reftextfaraway#1{page~\pageref{#1}}% + \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}% + \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} \`a~\ref{#2}}% +\fi +%% small in index +\let\svtheindex\theindex +%% preface of index + \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}% + \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}% +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\long\def\Indexhead{In this index, italic style numbers (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) are page numbers +(and hyperlinks, thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), normal roman numbers +(123) are code line +references for usage, bold roman numbers (\textbf{123}) are code line references for definitions; +colored numbers in square brackets, like this:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc}, are bibliographic references, eventually +sorted and compressed. + +The names of commands, environments, files, suffixes, options, features, messages identifiers\,\footnote{The +messages identifiers appear in the right margin of the text, near the points of usage.}, and languages, +are in \texttt{typewriter} font +(\textbf{\texttt{bold}} for default options or the default language). +The names of tools, packages and classes are in \textsf{sans serif} font. +The people names are in \textrm{roman} for the first names, in \textsc{Small Caps} for the family names, +separated by a comma, the +family name first\,\footnote{For some oriental names (like japanese, korean, vietnamese or indian names), +it is sometimes difficult to know which is the first or the last +name.}, like in ``\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie'' in the index.% + +Some commands (like the internal names of language specific letters) are not indexed. + +\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}} +% +\par\bigskip}% +\or\relax +\long\def\Indexhead{Dans cet index, les nombres en italique (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) sont des numéros de pages +(et des hyperliens, grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), +les nombres en fonte romaine normale (123) sont des références à~des lignes de code d'utilisation, +les nombres en fonte romaine grasse (\textbf{123}) sont des références à~des lignes de code de définition; +les nombres colorés entre crochets carrés, comme ceci:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc-fr}, sont des références bibliographiques, +éventuellement triées et compressées. + +Les noms des commandes, environnements, fichiers, suffixes, options, dispositifs, identificateurs de messages\,\footnote{Les +identificateurs de messages apparaissent dans la marge droite du texte, près des points d'utilisation.} et +langues sont en fonte de \texttt{machine à~écrire} (\textbf{\texttt{grasse}} pour les options et la langue par défaut). +Les noms des outils, des paquetages et des classes sont en fonte \textsf{sans empattement}. +Les noms de personnes sont en \textrm{romain} pour les prénoms, en \textsc{Petites Capitales} +pour les noms de familles, séparés par +une virgule, le nom de famille en premier\,\footnote{Pour certains noms orientaux (par exemple, japonais, coréens, +vietnamiens ou indiens), il est parfois difficile de savoir quel est le prénom ou le nom de famille.}, +comme dans «~\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie~» dans l'index.% + +Certaines commandes (comme les noms internes de lettres spécifiques de certaines langues) ne sont pas indexées. + +\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}} +% +\par\bigskip}% +\fi +\makeatletter + \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\hspace*{15pt}}% + \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\hspace*{30pt}}% +\makeatother +%% \def\theindex{\svtheindex\small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}\setlength{\columnsep}{45pt}\sloppy} +\makeatletter +\renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \columnsep=2.1em% + \def\item{\@idxitem{0}\relax}% + \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\relax\hspace*{15pt}}% + \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\relax\hspace*{30pt}}% + \begin{multicols}{2}[\chapter*{\indexname}\Indexhead][10\baselineskip]% + \mtcaddchapter[\indexname]% + \@mkboth{\indexname}{\indexname}% + \small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}% + \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% + \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}% + \setlength{\columnsep}{2.1em}% + \sloppy\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\thispagestyle{plain}\pagestyle{myheadings}\def\item{\@idxitem{0}}% +%% \raggedcolumns + \setcounter{collectmore}{-1}% Not perfect, but acceptable. + \raggedbottom}% + {\end{multicols}} +\makeatother +\nonfrenchspacing +\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\mtcsetformat{minilof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\mtcsetformat{minilot}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\raggedbottom +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \def\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`\^^?=11} + \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} + \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1} + \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight} + \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt} + \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index}% + \markboth{Index}{Index}% + Numbers written in italic refer to the page + where the corresponding entry is described; + numbers underlined refer to the + code line of the + definition; numbers in roman refer to the + code lines + where the entry is used.} + \DocInput{minitoc.dtx} + \clearpage +%% \begin{SMOOTH} + \xspaceskip=0.6em plus 0.1em minus .2em % tiny extensible +\def\pfill{\unskip\hspace*{1ex}\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak + \dotfil\hspace*{1ex}\ignorespaces}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% \PrintChanges +% \end{RaggedRight} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \end{SMOOTH} + \flushbottom + \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\citeindexfalse}{} + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} + \mtcsetrules{minitoc}{on} + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.5ex}\relax\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.ex]\raggedcolumns}% + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\relax\vspace{-1.5ex}}% + \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}% + \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}% + \setlength{\awidth}{\textwidth} + \addtolength{\awidth}{-1pt} +% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxrule} +% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxsep} +% \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex} + \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-1\baselineskip\kern.5ex} + \makeatletter\savebox{\BMTC}{\relax{\begin{minipage}[t]{\awidth}\minitoc[l]\end{minipage}}}\makeatother% + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}% + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}% + \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}% + \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}% + \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[0] + \PrintIndex + \end{mtchideinmaintoc} + \AtEndDocument{\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}} + \mtcfixindex[chapter] +\end{document} +%</driver> +% \fi +% +% \CheckSum{0} +% +% \CharacterTable +% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +% +% +% \lefthyphenmin=3 +% \righthyphenmin=3 +% \hyphenation{Mittelbach} +% \hyphenation{Jackowski} +% \hyphenation{Impatient} +% \hyphenation{make-index} +% \hyphenation{hyper-link} +% +% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty} +% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@input} +% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle} +% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa} +% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue} +% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum} +% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin} +% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup} +% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef} +% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\egroup} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist} +% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endinput,\endtrivlist} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global} +% \DoNotIndex{\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet} +% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcase} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item} +% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\ignorespaces,\index,\item} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower} +% \DoNotIndex{\let,\llap,\lower} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing} +% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage\nonfrenchspacing} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc} +% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\raggedleft,\rm,\sc} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut} +% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\small,\space,\string,\strut} +% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt} +% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@} +% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\z@} +% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary} +% \DoNotIndex{\`,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary} +% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\markboth,\mathcode} +% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\mathcode} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip} +% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox} +% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle} +% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\raise,\rangle} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb} +% \DoNotIndex{\section,\TeX,\underline,\verb} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar} +% \DoNotIndex{\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar} +% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]} +% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode} +% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@} +% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q} +% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H} +% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z} +% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0} +% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\makeatletter,\makeatother} +% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother} +% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined} +% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc} +% \DoNotIndex{\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc} +% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode} +% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifmmode} +% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\newtoks} +% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf} +% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault} +% \DoNotIndex{\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault} +% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault} +% \DoNotIndex{\*} +% \DoNotIndex{\ } +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\MessageBreak} +% ^^A lettres de l'hébreu +% \DoNotIndex{\alef,\ayin,\bet,\finalmem,\finalnun,\kaf,\lamed,\mem,\nun,\resh,\shin,\tav,\tet,\vav,\yod} +% ^^A lettres hebrew2 +% \DoNotIndex{\hebalef} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebayin} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebbet} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalmem} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalnun} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebkaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\heblamed} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebmem} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebnun} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebresh} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebshin} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebtav} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebtet} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebvav} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebyod} +% ^^A lettres arabi +% \DoNotIndex{\T} +% \DoNotIndex{\alef} +% \DoNotIndex{\alefhamza} +% \DoNotIndex{\dal} +% \DoNotIndex{\fa} +% \DoNotIndex{\ha} +% \DoNotIndex{\jeem} +% \DoNotIndex{\kaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\lam} +% \DoNotIndex{\meem} +% \DoNotIndex{\qaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\ra} +% \DoNotIndex{\seen} +% \DoNotIndex{\sheen} +% \DoNotIndex{\waw} +% \DoNotIndex{\yahamza} +% ^^A lettres bulgares +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres du cyrillique +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyro} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyry} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres farsi3 +% \DoNotIndex{\alef} +% \DoNotIndex{\dal} +% \DoNotIndex{\fa} +% \DoNotIndex{\ha} +% \DoNotIndex{\jeem} +% \DoNotIndex{\kaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\lam} +% \DoNotIndex{\meem} +% \DoNotIndex{\nun} +% \DoNotIndex{\ra} +% \DoNotIndex{\seen} +% \DoNotIndex{\sheen} +% \DoNotIndex{\taa} +% \DoNotIndex{\waw} +% \DoNotIndex{\ya} +% ^^A lettres mongolb +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyry} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres russianb +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyro} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres serbianc +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres ukrainian +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu} +% ^^A not true macros +% \DoNotIndex{\PTC@,\MTC@,\STC@} +% +% \GetFileInfo{minitoc.dtx} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \title{{\Large The \textsf{minitoc} package}\thanks{This document +% corresponds to \textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}} +% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, et al.} +% \or\relax +% \title{{\Large Le paquetage \textsf{minitoc}}\thanks{Ce document +% correspond à~\textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, daté \filedate.}} +% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, et al.} +% \fi +% \makeatletter +% \let\SVtitle\@title +% \let\SVdate\@date +% \let\SVauthor\@author +% +% \def\@maketitle{% +% \newpage +% \null +% \vskip 2em% +% \begin{center}% +% \let \footnote \thanks +% {\LARGE \SVtitle \par}% +% \vskip 1.5em% +% {\large +% \lineskip .5em% +% \begin{tabular}[t]{c}% +% \SVauthor +% \end{tabular}\par}% +% \vskip 1em% +% {\large \SVdate}% +% \end{center}% +% \par +% \vskip 1.5em} +% \makeatother +% \maketitle +% \doparttoc +% ^^A \dopartlof \dopartlot +% \dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot +% {\parskip=0pt +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Summary}{0}}{} +% \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents} +% \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{List of figures} +% \renewcommand{\listtablename}{List of tables} +% \or\relax +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Sommaire}{0}}{} +% \fi +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \makeatletter +% \let\l@chaptersom\l@chapter +% \makeatother +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \tableofcontents +% \mtcaddchapter +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \listoffigures +% \mtcaddchapter +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \listoftables +% \mtcaddchapter +% } +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% \let\svmacro\macro +% \let\svendmacro\endmacro +% \let\svenvironment\environment +% \let\svendenvironment\endenvironment +% ^^A \renewenvironment{macro}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeMacro{#1}}{\egroup} +% ^^A \renewenvironment{environment}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeEnv{#1}}{\egroup} +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter*{About this document\markboth{About this document}{About this document}} +% \markboth{About this document}{About this document} +% \mtcaddchapter[About this document] +% This document is rather thick, but please, be not afraid: you do not need to read every page. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The most useful chapters are in the first part (``{User's Manual}'', page~\pageref{p+UM}): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item the chapter~``The \upack{minitoc} package'', page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, describes the essential commands to use +% the package; +% \item the chapter ``Frequently Asked Questions'', page~\pageref{FAQ}, may help you to solve some +% specific problems; +% \item the chapter ``Memento'', page~\pageref{c+memento}, is a set of tables to be used as a +% remainder of the commands of this package; +% \item the chapter ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, gives the code of some documents showing the +% basic usage of the \upack{minitoc} package and some interesting situations; +% \item the chapter ``Messages'', page~\pageref{c+messages}, is certainly boring, but it should be searched if you get some +% warning or error messages from the \upack{minitoc} package, because it explains them and also the informative +% messages (table~\vref{t+allmess} will help you to find the meaning of a message); +% \item the chapter ``Jargon'', page~\pageref{c+jargon}, attemps to explain +% most of the technical terms used here; +% \item the chapter ``Installation'', page~\pageref{c+installation}, describes +% all the files included in the distribution of the package; +% \item the chapter ``Postface'', page~\pageref{c+postface}, +% gives an abbreviated history of the package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item The second part, ``Implementation'', page~\pageref{p+ID}, is much more technical; you can read it if you are +% interested in the details of the coding of the package. +% The chapter ``Language definition (\suffix{.mld}) and object +% (\suffix{.mlo}) files'', page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, may be useful if you are interested by some language. +% This chapter contains many maps and illustrations. +% \item The third part, ``Complements'', page~\pageref{p+complements}, contains a bibliography, a detailed history of +% the package, a list of acknowlegments, and an index. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \bigskip +% +% For this document, I have used: +% \begin{itemize} +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{% +% \item a short table of contents (summary), with the \com{shorttoc} command from my \pack{shorttoc} +% package~\cite{shorttoc}, displaying only parts and chapters;}{\relax} +% \item a main table of contents (\com{tableofcontents}), with a maximum depth~(6); +% \item a main list of figures (\com{listoffigures}) and a main list of tables (\com{listoftables}); +% \item for each part, a table of contents displaying only the chapters (\com{parttoc} with +% \dcnt{parttocdepth} equal to~1); +% ^^A \item for each part, a list of figures (\com{partlof}) and a list of tables (\com{partlot}) when useful; +% \item for each chapter, a complete table of contents (\com{minitoc} with \dcnt{minitocdepth} equal to~6); +% \item for each chapter, a list of figures (\com{minilof}) and a list of tables (\com{minilot}) when useful; +% \item customized parameters for the layout of the mini-tables; as the PDF version of the documentation uses hyperlinks +% (with the help of the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}), +% these mini-tables should help you to navigate within the document; +% \item some hyperlinks, placed in the right margin, contain a message identifier; the link points to the description +% of the message in the ``Messages'' chapter; try this one:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001} +% \item some flags, with hyperlinks to articles (mainly in Wikipedia) about countries or languages; +% \item the \pack{calc} package~\cite{calc} to make some computations with comfort; +% \ifBT\relax +% \item the \pack{booktabs} package~\cite{booktabs} to format the tables; +% \else\fi +% \item the \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} and \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} packages to document the code; +% \item many other packages to improve the presentation of the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \chapter*{À~propos de ce document\markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document}} +% \markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document} +% \mtcaddchapter[À~propos de ce document] +% Ce document est assez épais, mais s'il vous plaît, n'en soyez pas effrayés: vous n'avez pas besoin de lire toutes +% les pages. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les chapitres les plus utiles sont dans la première partie («~{Manuel de l'utilisateur}~», page~\pageref{p+UM}): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item le chapitre~«~Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~», page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, décrit les commandes essentielles +% pour utiliser le paquetage; +% \item le chapitre «~Questions fréquemment posées~», page~\pageref{FAQ}, peut vous aider à~résoudre certains +% problèmes spécifiques; +% \item le chapitre «~Mémento~», page~\pageref{c+memento}, est un ensemble de tableaux à~utiliser +% comme aide-mémoire des commandes de ce paquetage; +% \item le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, donne le code de quelques documents montrant +% l'utilisation basique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et quelques situations intéressantes; +% \item le chapitre «~Messages~», page~\pageref{c+messages}, est certainement +% fastidieux, mais il faut le consulter lorsque vous recevez des messages d'avertissement ou d'erreur du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, parce qu'il les explique ainsi que les messages informatifs (le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} +% vous aidera à~trouver la signification d'un message); +% \item le chapitre «~Jargon~», +% page~\pageref{c+jargon}, essaye d'expliquer la plupart des termes techniques utilisés ici; +% \item le chapitre «~Installation~», +% page~\pageref{c+installation}, décrit tous les fichiers inclus dans la distribution du paquetage; +% \item le chapitre «~Postface~», page~\pageref{c+postface}, donne un historique abrégé du paquetage. +% \end{itemize} +% \item La deuxième partie, «~Implantation~», page~\pageref{p+ID}, est bien plus technique; vous pouvez la lire si vous êtes +% intéressés par les détails du codage du paquetage. +% Le chapitre «~Fichiers de définition (\suffix{.mld}) et objets (\suffix{.mlo}) de langue~», +% page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, peut être utile si vous êtes intéressés par une certaine langue. +% Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses cartes et illustrations. +% \item La troisième partie, «~Compléments~», page~\pageref{p+complements}, contient une bibliographie, un historique +% détaillé du paquetage, une liste des remerciements et un index. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \bigskip +% +% Pour ce document, j'ai utilisé: +% \begin{itemize} +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{% +% \item une table des matières abrégée (sommaire), avec la commande \com{shorttoc} de mon +% paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}, n'affichant que les parties et chapitres;}{\relax} +% \item une table des matières principale (\com{tableofcontents}), avec une profondeur maximale~(6); +% \item une liste principale des figures (\com{listoffigures}) et une liste principale des tableaux +% (\com{listoftables}); +% \item pour chaque partie, une table des matières ne montrant que les chapitres (\com{parttoc} avec +% \dcnt{parttocdepth} égale à~1); +% ^^A \item pour chaque partie, une liste des figures (\com{partlof}) +% ^^A et une liste des tableaux (\com{partlot}) lorsque c'est utile; +% \item pour chaque chapitre, une table des matières complète (\com{minitoc} avec \dcnt{minitocdepth} égale à~6); +% \item pour chaque chapitre, une liste des figures (\com{minilof}) et une liste des tableaux (\com{minilot}) +% lorsque c'est utile; +% \item des paramètres adaptés pour la mise en page mini-tables; comme la version PDF de la documentation utilise +% des hyperliens, (à~l'aide du paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}), ces mini-tables devraient +% vous aider à~vous déplacer dans le document; +% \item quelques hyperliens, placés dans la marge de droite, contiennent un identificateur de message; le lien +% renvoie à~la description du message dans le chapitre «~Messages~»; +% \item quelques drapeaux avec des hyperliens vers des articles (principalement de Wikipedia) sur des pays ou des langues; +% essayez celui-ci:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001} +% \item le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} pour faire certains calculs plus confortablement; +% \ifBT\relax +% \item le paquetage \pack{booktabs}~\cite{booktabs} pour formater les tableaux; +% \else\fi +% \item les paquetages \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} et \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} pour documenter le code; +% \item de nombreux autres paquetages pour améliorer la présentation de la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \part{User's Manual}\label{p+UM} +% \or\relax +% \part{Manuel de l'utilisateur}\label{p+UM} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \parttoc +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty} +% ^^A \partlof +% ^^A \partlot +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{The \upack{minitoc} package}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc} +% \or\relax +% \frenchspacing +% \chapter{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc} +% \fi +% ^^A \pagestyle{headings} +% \minitoc +% \lsneed{5} +% \mtcskip +% \minilof +% \lsneed{5} +% \mtcskip +% \minilot +% \section{Introduction} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package, initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} and \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, has been +% almost completely redesigned by \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse). +% A summary of the evolution of this package is given in the chapter~\vref{c+postface}. +% This package creates a mini-table of contents +% (a ``minitoc''\,\footnote{The \upack{minitoc} package introduces +% its own jargon, explained in this document. +% It should not be too difficult, however, to learn and use; it will be used here, of course.})% +% at the beginning of each chapter of a document. +% It is also possible to have a mini-list of +% figures (a ``minilof'') and a mini-list of tables (a ``minilot''). +% The document class should of course define chapters +% (classes like \class{book} or \class{report}~\cite{classes}) or sections +% (classes like \class{article}\,\footnote{As the standard \class{proc} class~\cite{proc}, and the \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} and +% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews} classes, load the standard +% \class{article} class, these classes will be just considered as variants of the \class{article} class.})~\cite{classes}. +% Thus, this package should not be used with +% document classes without standard sectionning commands (like \class{letter}). +% When the document class defines a ``part'' sectionning level +% (i.e.,~classes like \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article}), +% you can create a ``partial'' table of contents +% (a ``parttoc'') at the beginning of each part of a document. +% It is also possible to have a partial list of figures (a ``partlof'') +% and a partial list of tables (a ``partlot''). +% When the document class has no \com{chapter} command +% but has a \com{section} command, you may use section +% level tables of contents (``secttocs'') at the beginning of each section; and you can also have section level +% lists of figures (``sectlofs'') or of tables (``sectlots''). +% +% All these tables (``minitocs'', ``partlots'', ``sectlofs'', etc.) are collectively referenced as ``mini-tables'' +% (or sometimes ``mini-lists''). +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, écrit initialement par \name{Nigel}{Ward} et \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, a été presque +% complètement reconstruit par \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse). +% Un résumé de l'évolution de ce paquetage est donné dans le chapitre~\vref{c+postface}. +% Ce paquetage crée une mini-table des matières (une «~minitoc~»\,\footnote{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% introduit son propre jargon, expliqué dans ce document. Il ne devrait, cependant, pas être trop difficile de +% l'apprendre et de l'utiliser; il sera évidemment utilisé ici.}) au début de chaque chapitre d'un document. +% Il est aussi possible d'avoir une +% mini-liste des figures (une «~minilot~») et une mini-liste des tableaux (une «~minilot~»). La classe de document +% devrait, bien sûr, définir des chapitres (classes telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}) ou des sections +% (classes telles que \class{article}\,\footnote{Puisque la classe standard \class{proc}~\cite{proc}, ainsi que les classes +% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} et \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}, chargent la classe +% standard \class{article}, ces classes seront simplement considérées comme des variantes de la classe \class{article}.})~\cite{classes}. +% Donc, ce paquetage ne devrait pas être utilisé avec des classes de document ne possédant pas les commandes de +% sectionnement standard (classes telles que \class{letter}). +% Lorsque la classe de document définit un niveau de sectionnement «~partie~» (c'est-à-dire des classes telles +% que \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}), vous pouvez créer une table des matières +% «~partielle~» (une «~parttoc~») au début de chaque partie d'un document. Il est aussi possible d'avoir une liste +% des figures partielle (une «~partlof~») et une liste des tableaux partielle (une «~partlot~») au début de chaque +% partie d'un document. Lorsque la classe de document ne possède pas de commande \com{chapter} mais a une +% commande \com{section}, vous pouvez utiliser des tables des matières au niveau section («~secttocs~») au +% début de chaque section; et vous pouvez aussi avoir des listes des figures («~sectlofs~») ou des tableaux («~sectlots~») +% au niveau section. +% +% Toutes ces tables («~minitocs~», «~partlofs~», «~sectlots~», etc.) sont collectivement référencées sous le terme de +% «~mini-tables~» (ou parfois «~mini-listes~»). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Important restrictions}\label{note+sectionning}% +% \textbf{Note}\virage: you cannot use chapter level and section level mini-tables in the same document. +% This restriction is intented to avoid documents with full of local +% tables of contents, lists of figures and tables at every sectionning level. +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Restrictions importantes}\label{note+sectionning}% +% \textbf{Note}\virage: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser des mini-tables au niveau chapitre et au niveau section dans +% le même document. Cette restriction est destinée à~éviter des documents pleins de mini-tables des matières, +% listes de figures et listes de tableaux locales à~chaque niveau de sectionnement. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: the commands relative +% to the part level are defined only if the document class defines \com{part}. +% The commands relative +% to the section level are defined only if the document class +% defines \com{section} but does not define \com{chapter}. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: les commandes relatives au niveau partie ne sont définies que si la classe de document +% définit \com{part}. +% Les commandes relatives au niveau section ne sont définies que si la classe de document définit \com{section} +% mais ne définit pas \com{chapter}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Version} +% The current version of this package is~\#61. You will find a resumed history of the package in the ``Postface'' +% chapter (chapter~\vref{c+postface}) and a more detailed history in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Version} +% La version courante de ce paquetage est~\#61. Vous trouverez un historique résumé de ce paquetage dans le +% chapitre «~Postface~» (chapitre~\vref{c+postface}) et un historique plus détaillé dans «~Historique des +% modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{License} +% This package must be distributed and/or may be modified under the +% conditions of the \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (as convenient) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% \begin{quote} +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} +% \end{quote} +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of \LaTeX{} +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% But please don't bother me about hacked versions; they will not be supported. +% However, suggestions for corrections and reasoned improvements are welcome. +% \or\relax +% \section{Licence} +% Ce paquetage doit être distribué et/ou peut être modifié sous les conditions de la +% \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, soit la version~1.3 de cette licence soit (au choix) toute version +% ultérieure. La plus récente version de cette licence est dans +% \begin{quote}\froff +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} +% \end{quote} +% et la version~1.3 ou ultérieure fait partie de toutes les distributions de \LaTeX{} version 2003/12/01 ou +% ultérieure. +% +% Mais, s'il vous plaît, ne me parlez pas de versions bricolées; elles ne seront pas maintenues. +% Cependant, les suggestions de corrections et d'améliorations raisonnables sont les bienvenues. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Using the \upack{minitoc} package} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Loading the package and creating the mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Charger le paquetage et créer les mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\usepackage} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To use the \upack{minitoc} package, you must insert a command: +% \or\relax +% Pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, vous devez insérer une commande: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% in the preamble of the document\,\footnote{This command must +% be placed \emph{after} any modification done on the sectionning +% commands; if you modify some sectionning commands after loading the +% \upack{minitoc} package, this one might not work properly.}. +% The mini-table of contents will be in the chapter, +% after the \com{chapter} command, at the point of the \com{minitoc} +% command. The \com{minitoc} command may occur \emph{almost anywhere}\,\footnote{``Almost anywhere'' means +% ``in a normal place'', like between two paragraphs of normal text, or in a (wide enough) minipage, but not in a +% too strange position (like a marginal note or a footnote). Even a multicolumn or a floating environment can be used, +% but with care. But note that a minitoc can be rather long, if the chapter is complex and if you are asking for +% details with a high value for \dcnt{minitocdepth}. +% As an example, I~once used a \com{afterpage} command +% (\pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage}) to place the long +% minilof of chapter~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (so the minilof was forced to begin at the top of the next page).} inside a chapter. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Of course, it is better +% to put it at the beginning of the chapter, eventually after some introductory material. But you can also decide +% to put it at the end of the chapter. You should use the same conventions in all chapters. If you want to add the +% mini-table of contents for a chapter, you must use the sequence given in table~\vref{mtc+minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% dans le préambule du document\,\footnote{Cette commande doit être placée \emph{après} toute modification faite sur +% les commandes de sectionnement; si vous modifiez des commandes de sectionnement après le chargement du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, celui-ci pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement.}. +% La mini-table des matières sera dans le chapitre, après la commande \com{chapter}, à~l'emplacement de la +% commande \com{minitoc}. La commande \com{minitoc} peut se placer \emph{presque +% n'importe~où}\,\footnote{<<~Presque n'importe~où~>> signifie <<~en un endroit normal~>>, comme entre deux alinéas +% de texte normal, ou dans une minipage (suffisamment large), mais pas dans une position trop bizarre (comme une +% note marginale ou infrapaginale). Même un environnement multi-colonnes ou flottant peut être utilisé, mais avec +% soin. Mais notez qu'une minitoc peut être assez longue, si le chapitre est complexe et si vous demandez des +% détails avec une valeur élevée de \dcnt{minitocdepth}. +% Par exemple, il m'est arrivé d'utiliser une commande \com{afterpage} (paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage}) +% pour placer la longue minilof du chapitre~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (pour forcer la minilof à~commencer en haut de la +% page suivante).} à~l'intérieur d'un chapitre. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début du chapitre, éventuellement +% après un texte introductif. Mais vous pouvez aussi décider de la placer à~la fin du chapitre. Vous devriez +% utiliser les mêmes conventions dans tous les chapitres. Si vous souhaitez ajouter la mini-table des matières pour +% un chapitre, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[ht] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc} +% \centering +% {\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \emph{or:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \ldots&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dominitoc}&&\\ +% \com{dominilof}&&\\ +% \com{dominilot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{minitoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&&\\ +% \com{minilof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&&\\ +% \com{minilot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[ht] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc} +% \centering +% {\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \emph{ou:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dominitoc}&&\\ +% \com{dominilof}&&\\ +% \com{dominilot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{minitoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&\\ +% \com{minilof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&\\ +% \com{minilot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}}% +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For each mini-table of contents, an auxiliary file will be +% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, +% where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter number. +% ``Absolute'' means that this number is unique, +% and always increasing from the first chapter\,\footnote{The concept of an ``absolute'' counter for the +% mini-tables has solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis}, +% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}.}. +% The suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} for mini-lists of figures and +% is \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} for mini-lists of tables. +% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and +% section~\vref{.8+3}). There are similar commands for mini-tables at the part or section level, depending on the +% document class. +% \or\relax +% Pour chaque mini-table des matières, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme +% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu du chapitre. «~Absolu~» signifie que ce numéro est +% unique, et croit toujours depuis le premier chapitre\,\footnote{Le concept d'un compteur <<~absolu~>> pour les +% mini-tables a résolu certains problèmes ténébreux, et aussi frappé d'obsolescence certaines commandes, telles que +% \com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}.}. +% Le suffixe est \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} pour les mini-listes de figures et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} pour +% les mini-listes de tableaux. +% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les +% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). Il y a des commandes similaires aux +% niveaux partie ou section, selon la classe du document. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Preparing the mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Préparation des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands\,\footnote{The code of these \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} commands is directly derived from that of +% the \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission.} +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, and \com{dominilot} (for mini-tables at the chapter level), +% take respectively the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} files, +% and cut slices from them to create the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes\,\footnote{Le code de ces commandes \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} est directement dérivé de celui du +% paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.} +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre, prennent +% respectivement les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}, +% et en +% prélèvent des tranches pour créer les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} +% et \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, and \com{dosectlot} (for mini-tables at the section level) +% and \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, and \com{dopartlot} (for mini-tables at the part level) are analog. +% +% The\virage{} \com{mtcprepare} command invokes (and replaces) all these preparation commands when they are available +% with the document class and if the adequate contents file exists. +% This command accepts also an optional argument to set the default position of the title +% for \emph{all} the mini-tables. +% +% All\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} the preparation commands are \emph{ignored} if the \com{nofiles} command is invoked +% in the preamble, to avoid to overwrite the mini-table auxiliary files. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% To\virage{} obtain a satisfactory result (i.e.,~non empty), please note that all these commands must +% \emph{imperatively be put before} any command analog to the \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures}, +% and \com{listoftables} commands, or their \verb|\fake...| siblings. +% +% It\virage{} is also \emph{strongly} recommended to put these commands \emph{before} any sectionning command producing an +% entry in the table of contents (for the \verb|\do...toc| commands), and \emph{before} +% any \com{caption}-like command +% producing an entry in the list of figures (for the \verb|\do...lof| commands) or in the list of tables +% (for the \verb|\do...lot|) commands; else disorder in the mini-tables might result. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Les commandes \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau section), +% et \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et \com{dopartlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau partie) sont +% analogues. +% +% La\virage{} commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque (et remplace) toutes ces commandes de préparation lorsqu'elles sont +% disponibles pour la classe du document et si le fichier de contenu adéquat existe. +% Cette commande accepte aussi un argument optionnel pour établir la position par défaut du titre +% pour \emph{toutes} les mini-tables. +% +% Toutes\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} les commandes de préparation sont \emph{ignorées} si +% la commande \com{nofiles} est invoquée dans le préambule, pour éviter d'écraser les fichiers auxiliaires des mini-tables. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Pour\virage{} obtenir un résultat satisfaisant (c'est-à-dire, non vide), veuillez noter que toutes ces commandes doivent +% \emph{impérativement être placées avant} toute commande analogue aux commandes \com{tableofcontents}, +% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}, ou leurs cousines \verb|\fake...|! +% +% Il\virage{} est aussi \emph{fortement} recommandé de placer ces commandes \emph{avant} toute commande de +% sectionnement produisant une entrée dans la table des matières (pour les commandes \verb|\do...toc|), et +% \emph{avant} toute commande analogue à~\com{caption} produisant une entrée dans la liste des figures (pour les +% commandes \verb|\do...lof|) ou dans la liste des tableaux (pour les commandes \verb|\do...lot|); sinon les +% mini-tables pourraient être dans le désordre. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Placing the mini-tables}\label{s+placing} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Placement des mini-tables}\label{s+placing} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcskip} command may be used to add a vertical +% skip between two mini-tables. Its height is +% \com{mtcskipamount} (equal to \com{bigskipamount} by default). +% \com{mtcskip} eliminates any immediate previous vertical +% skip, to not accumulate vertical space when a mini-table is +% empty and skipped by the \optd{checkfiles} option. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcskip} peut être utilisée pour ajouter un saut vertical entre deux mini-tables. Sa hauteur +% est \com{mtcskipamount} (égale à~\com{bigskipamount} par défaut). \com{mtcskip} élimine tout saut vertical +% qui précède immédiatement, afin de ne pas accumuler des espaces verticaux lorsqu'une mini-table est vide et donc +% ignorée par l'option \optd{checkfiles}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The section-level table of contents will be in the section, +% after the \com{section} command, at the point of the \com{secttoc} command. The \com{secttoc} command +% may occur \emph{almost anywhere} inside a section. It is often better to put it at the beginning of the section, +% or after some short introductory material. You should use the same conventions in all sections. If you want to add +% a~section-level table of contents for a section, you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières au niveau section sera dans la section, après la commande \com{section}, à~l'emplacement +% de la commande \com{secttoc}. La commande \com{secttoc} peut être placée \emph{presque n'importe~où} +% à~l'intérieur d'une section. Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début de la section, ou éventuellement +% après un texte introductif. Vous devriez utiliser les mêmes conventions dans toutes les sections. Si vous +% souhaitez ajouter la table des matières au niveau section pour une section, vous devez utiliser la séquence +% donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \emph{or:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlof}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{secttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{sectlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{sectlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[t!] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \emph{ou:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlof}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{secttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{sectlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{sectlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For each section-level table of contents, an auxiliary file will be +% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, +% where \meta{N} is the absolute section number. +% The suffix is \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} for section-level lists of figures and +% is \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} for section-level lists of tables. +% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and +% section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \or\relax +% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau section, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme +% \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section. +% Le suffixe est \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} pour les +% listes de figures au niveau section et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau section. +% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les +% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\usepackage} +% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{rem+FB}As\imess{W0056} floats (figures and tables) could drift\footnote{% +% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}% +% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. +% There is a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places +% relative to the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship +% that slips its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}} +% somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and +% sectlots can be rather strange. In order to have a better +% behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the +% \opt{insection} option in the \com{usepackage} command: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}| +% \end{verse} +% if you want more consistent sectlofs and sectlots. +% The \opt{insection} option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its \optp{verbose}{placeins} +% and \optp{section}{placeins} options. +% Sometimes, it might be necessary to use the \com{FloatBarrier} command of this package to correctly place the +% figure or table and have a correct mini-table. +% The options \optp{above}{placeins} or \optp{below}{placeins} options should not be used, because they allow +% floats to drift above +% or below a \com{FloatBarrier} (or a section limit): the barrier becomes ``porous'' upwards\footnote{But a float +% can not drift upwards beyond the top of the current page.}~($\uparrow$) or +% downwards~($\downarrow$), or both~($\updownarrow$). The \optp{section}{placeins} option makes a more ``watertight'' +% barrier~($\equiv$). This is illustrated by the figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% The \pack{placeins} package, by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, is available +% on CTAN archives; note that the file \xfile{placeins.sty} contains its own +% documentation, with a copy in \xfile{placeins.txt}. You need a version whose date is at least 2005/04/18. +% \begin{figure}[p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{section}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{below}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \caption{Float barriers}\label{f+barrier} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{figure} +% +% Since version~\#45, this option also loads the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput} +% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}) to force a float to appear \emph{after} its reference. +% The \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options of the \pack{placeins} package are no more used, +% because they allowed the floats to move out of the section. +% +% In\virage{} all cases, it is \emph{strongly} recommended to verify the position of +% the floats and, if necessary, to look at the messages of the \pack{placeins} package +% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% The placement of floats is a very complex problem, so some manual intervention may be necessary, like the use +% of the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} or, better, of the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow}. +% \or\relax +% \label{rem+FB}Comme\imess{W0056} les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) pourraient +% dériver\,\footnote{\selectlanguage{english}% +% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}% +% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. There is +% a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places relative to +% the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship that slips +% its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}} +% quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression +% du texte de la section, les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur +% comportement de ces mini-tables, il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option +% \opt{insection} dans la commande \com{usepackage}: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}| +% \end{verse} +% si vous désirez des sectlofs et sectlots plus cohérentes. +% L'option \opt{insection} charge le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}. +% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} ou \optp{below}{placeins} ne devraient pas être utilisées, car elles permettent aux éléments +% flottants de dériver au-dessus ou en dessous d'une \com{FloatBarrier} (ou d'une limite de section): +% la barrière devient «~poreuse~» vers l'amont\,\footnote{Mais un élément flottant ne peut pas dériver vers +% l'amont au-delà du sommet de la page courante.}~($\uparrow$) ou vers l'aval~($\downarrow$), ou dans les +% deux sens~($\updownarrow$). +% Il peut même être nécessaire d'utiliser la commande \com{FloatBarrier} de ce paquetage pour placer +% correctement la figure ou la table et avoir une mini-table correcte. +% L'option \optp{section}{placeins} place une barrière plus étanche~($\equiv$). +% Ceci est illustré par la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% Le paquetage \pack{placeins}, de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, est disponible sur les archives CTAN; +% notez que le fichier \xfile{placeins.sty} +% contient sa propre documentation, dont une copie est dans \xfile{placeins.txt}. Il vous faut une version plus +% récente que 2005/04/18. +% \begin{figure}[p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{section}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{above}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \caption{Barrières pour les flottants}\label{f+barrier} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{figure} +% +% Depuis la version~\#45, cette option charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} +% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}) pour forcer un élément flottant à~n'apparaître qu'\emph{après} sa référence. +% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins} du paquetage \pack{placeins} ne sont plus utilisées, +% car elles permettaient aux éléments de sortir de la section. +% +% Dans\virage{} tous les cas, il est \emph{fortement} recommandé de +% vérifier la position des éléments flottants et, si nécessaire, de regarder les messages du paquetage \pack{placeins} +% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Le placement des éléments flottants est un problème très complexe, donc une intervention manuelle peut être nécessaire, +% comme l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float}, ou, mieux, du paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want to add the partial table of contents for a part, +% you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtc+parttoc}. +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez ajouter une table des matières partielle pour une partie, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée +% dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+parttoc}. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[t!] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \emph{or:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{doparttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlof}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{parttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{partlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{partlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[t] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \emph{ou:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{doparttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlof}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{parttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{partlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{partlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For each partial table of contents, an auxiliary file will be +% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, +% where \meta{N} is the absolute part number. +% The suffix is \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} for partial lists of figures and +% is \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} for partial lists of tables. +% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short +% extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \or\relax +% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau partie, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme +% \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie. +% Le suffixe est \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} pour les +% listes de figures au niveau partie et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau partie. +% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les +% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: the user is responsible of asking or not asking +% a mini-table (mini-toc, -lof or -lot) for some chapter. Asking a minilof for a +% chapter without any figure would result in an empty and ugly mini-list +% of figures (i.e.,~the title and two horizontal rules). +% He is also responsible of requiring or not requiring +% a partial toc (lof or lot) for some part. Asking a partlof for a +% part without any figure would result in an empty and ugly part +% list of figures (i.e.,~the title alone on a page). Analogous remarks +% apply to section-level mini-tables (secttoc, sectlof, and +% sectlot) and to the part-level mini-tables (parttoc, partlof, and partlot). +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: l'utilisateur est responsable de demander ou non une mini-table (mini-lof, -lof ou -lof) pour +% un certain chapitre. Demander une minilof pour un chapitre sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une mini-liste +% des figures vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre et deux filets horizontaux). Il est aussi responsable de demander +% ou non une table des matières partielle (ou une liste partielle des figures ou des tableaux) pour une certaine +% partie. Demander une partlot pour une partie sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une liste partielle des figures +% vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre seul sur une page). Des remarques analogues s'appliquent aux mini-tables +% au niveau section (secttoc, sectlof et sectlot) et aux mini-tables au niveau partie (parttoc, partlof et partlot). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% But since version \#35, empty mini-tables are just ignored and +% this problem should disappear in normal circumstances. Nevertheless, it is recommended +% to put no \com{minitoc} command in +% a chapter without sections and no \com{minilof} or +% \com{minilot} command in a chapter without figures or tables. +% The \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package option +% (default) skips empty mini-tables (with a note in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file); +% the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option restores +% the old behaviour (empty mini-tables are displayed). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Mais depuis la version~\#35, les mini-tables vides sont simplement ignorées et ce problème devrait disparaître +% dans des circonstances normales. Néanmoins, il est recommandé de ne pas mettre de commande \com{minitoc} dans un +% chapitre sans sections ni de commande \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot} dans un chapitre sans figures ou sans +% tableaux. L'option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir la section~\vref{s+placing}), active par +% défaut, saute les mini-tables vides (avec un note dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}); l'option de paquetage +% \opt{nocheckfiles} rétablit l'ancien comportement (les mini-tables vides sont imprimées). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, the mini-tables and partial tables of contents +% contain only references higher and to sections and +% subsections. The counters \dcnt{parttocdepth}, +% \dcnt{minitocdepth} and \dcnt{secttocdepth}, +% similar to \dcnt{tocdepth}, allow the user to modify this behaviour. Mini or partial +% lists of figures or tables are not affected by the value of +% these counters, but if there are depth counters for these lists (\dcnt{lofdepth} and +% \dcnt{lotdepth}), as done by the \pack{subfigure} and +% \pack{subfig} packages~\cite{subfigure,subfig}\label{h.subfig} from +% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, new depth counters are created if necessary, with obvious names like +% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, +% and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Par défaut, les mini-tables et tables des matières partielles ne contiennent que les références jusqu'aux sections et +% sous-sections. Les trois compteurs \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} +% et \dcnt{secttocdepth}, similaires à~\dcnt{tocdepth}, permettent à~l'utilisateur de +% modifier ce comportement. Les mini-listes des figures ou des tableaux ne sont pas affectées par ces compteurs, mais +% s'il existe des compteurs de profondeur pour ces listes (\dcnt{lofdepth} et +% \dcnt{lotdepth}), comme cela est fait par les paquetages\label{h.subfig} +% \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} et +% \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, de nouveaux compteurs sont créés si +% nécessaire, portant des noms évidents tels que \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, +% \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Starred chapters, parts and sections}\label{s+starred.chap} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Chapitres, parties et sections étoilés}\label{s+starred.chap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{NOTE}: if using \com{chapter*} and a +% \or\relax +% \textbf{NOTE}: si vous utilisez \com{chapter*} et une commande +% \fi +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% command\Virage{} to add something in the +% table of contents, the numbering of the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files would be altered. +% To avoid that problem, a first method is to say: +% \or\relax +% pour\Virage{} ajouter quelque chose dans la table des matières, la numérotation des fichiers auxiliaires de +% \upack{minitoc} serait altérée. Pour éviter ce problème, une première méthode est de dire: +% \fi +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addstarredpart}\verb|{...}|\\ +% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{...}|\\ +% \com{addstarredsection}\verb|{...}| +% \end{quote} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands apply only for the level of a part-, mini- or +% sect-toc; for lower levels, the usual command is sufficient: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes ne s'appliquent que pour le niveau d'une part-, mini- ou +% sect-toc; pour des niveaux inférieurs, utilisez, comme d'habitude: +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| +% \end{quote} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So, to add a section-level entry in the global toc and in the +% minitoc of a starred chapter: +% \or\relax +% Donc, pour ajouter une entrée de niveau section dans la table des matières globale et dans la minitoc +% d'un chapitre étoilé: +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{verse} +% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\ +% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{First section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{First section}|\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{Second section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Second section}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% \begin{verse} +% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\ +% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{Première section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Première section}|\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{Seconde section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Seconde section}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There is sometimes a problem with mini-tables when +% you use \com{chapter*} (or \com{section*}): the minitocs +% appear in the wrong chapter. You can add a \com{adjustmtc} +% (or \com{adjuststc} or \com{adjustptc}) command at the end +% of the starred chapter (or section or part) to increment the +% corresponding counter. Do not use commands like \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| or \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| +% (which should work, but it is cheating), because the \pack{mtcoff} package (see section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) knows +% what to do about \com{adjustmtc} (and others), but can do +% nothing about \com{stepcounter} or \com{addtocounter}, as they are a standard basic commands +% of \LaTeX, not \upack{minitoc} specific commands. Syntax:\nopagebreak +% \or\relax +% Il y a parfois un problème avec des mini-tables lorsque vous utilisez \com{chapter*} (ou \com{section*}):\ les +% minitocs apparaissent dans le mauvais chapitre. Vous pouvez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} (ou +% \com{adjuststc}, ou \com{adjustptc}) à~la fin du chapitre étoilé (ou de la section ou partie étoilée) pour +% incrémenter le compteur correspondant. N'utilisez pas de commandes telles que \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| +% ou \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| (ceci +% devrait marcher, mais c'est de la triche), parce que le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (voir la section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) +% sait quoi faire avec \com{adjustmtc} (et autres), mais ne sait pas quoi faire de \com{stepcounter} ou +% \com{addtocounter}, car ce sont des +% commandes \LaTeX{} basiques standard, pas des commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}. Syntaxe:\nopagebreak +% \fi +% \begin{quote} +% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad +% \com{adjustmtc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad +% \com{adjuststc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% where \emph{n} is the increment (default:~1). +% \or\relax +% où \emph{n} est l'incrément (défaut:~1). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are similar commands to \emph{decrement} or \emph{increment} by~1 these counters: +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}; +% the same remarks as above apply. These commands have no argument. +% But a more clever way to solve this problem would be using commands similar to: +% \or\relax +% Il y~a des commandes similaires pour \emph{décrémenter} ou \emph{incrémenter} de~1 ces compteurs: +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}; +% les mêmes remarques que ci-dessus s'appliquent. Ces commandes n'ont pas d'argument. +% Mais une manière plus élégante de résoudre ce problème serait d'utiliser des commandes similaires~à: +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% This\virage{} command adds an entry in the table of contents (and adjusts the +% counter, because it calls \com{adjustmtc}). The +% table~\vref{t+mtcadd} summarizes these commands, that you put +% \emph{after} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ +% If the optional argument is omitted or empty or blank, no entry will +% be visible in the table of contents nor in the minitocs. +% If the optional argument is something invisible +% (like~\verb|~|, \com{space} or \com{quad}), the result will be strange +% but still logically correct. See also section~\vref{faq.30} for the problems with \com{mtcaddpart}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% Cette\virage{} commande ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières (et ajuste le compteur, +% car elle appelle \com{adjustmtc}). +% Le tableau~\vref{t+mtcadd} liste ces commandes, que vous placez \emph{après} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ Si +% l'argument optionnel est omis, ou est vide ou blanc, aucune entrée ne sera visible dans la table des matières ni +% dans les minitocs. Si l'argument optionnel est quelque chose d'invisible (comme~\verb|~|, \com{space} ou \com{quad}), +% le résultat sera étrange mais cependant logiquement correct. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.30} pour les +% problèmes avec \com{mtcaddpart}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[th] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Adding an entry in the ToC for +% a starred part, chapter, or section}\label{t+mtcadd} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Level}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\ +% \midrule +% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \thickline +% \textbf{Level}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\ +% \hline +% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[th] +% \changeskips +% \caption[Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une +% section étoilés]{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une +% section étoilés}\label{t+mtcadd} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Niveau}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\ +% \midrule +% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \thickline +% \textbf{Niveau}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\ +% \hline +% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Typesetting of the mini-tables} +% The mini-tables are typeset in a \env{verse}-like environment, and can be split over several pages. +% \or\relax +% \section{Composition des mini-tables} +% Les mini-tables sont composées dans un environnement analogue à~\env{verse}, et donc peuvent s'étendre sur +% plusieurs pages. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Chapter-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The mini-table of contents is typeset in the \com{mtcfont} +% font, which is \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default. +% In fact, the font \com{mtcfont} is selected at the beginning of a minitoc, minilof or minilot. More +% selective choices are made with the following fonts. +% Section entries are typeset +% in the \com{mtcSfont} font, which is \verb|\small\bfseries| by default. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% La mini-table des matières est composée dans la fonte \com{mtcfont}, qui est +% \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut. +% En fait, la fonte \com{mtcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une minitoc, minilof ou minilot. Des choix +% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. +% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte +% \com{mtcSfont}, qui est \verb|\small\bfseries| par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the +% commands \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} are available +% (by default, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) to enable the use of various fonts. Mini lists of figures and tables are +% typeset in the fonts \com{mlffont} and \com{mltfont}, which are \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default. +% There are also \com{mlfSfont} and \com{mltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. +% See tables~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Thanks to \name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, +% who contributed these tables initially.}. +% \or\relax +% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, +% paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} sont disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) pour permettre +% l'utilisation de fontes diverses. Les mini-listes de figures et de tableaux sont composées dans les fontes +% \com{mlffont} et \com{mltfont}, qui sont \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut. +% Il y a aussi \com{mlfSfont} et \com{mltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. +% Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Merci à~\name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, +% qui a fourni ces tableaux initialement.}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note\Virage{} that the default choice of fonts is certainly not perfect and hence it is not definitive. A~symptom of this +% imperfection is the presence of poor alignments in the mini-tables, if bold and non-bold fonts are mixed\,\footnote{This +% appears, e.g., if you are using the Computer Modern Roman (CMR) fonts~\cite{cmt}. +% The symptom disappears if you do not use bold +% CMR fonts or if you use the TX fonts (\pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts}), +% for instance\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, like in this document}{\relax}. See also section~\vref{faq.29}.} +% (the true length of +% \texttt{1em} is not the same for the fonts). This can often be adjusted by changing some fonts.\par +% \or\relax +% Notez\Virage{} que le choix de fontes par défaut n'est certainement pas parfait et n'est donc pas définitif. +% Un symptôme de +% cette imperfection est la présence d'alignements imprécis dans les mini-tables, si des fontes grasses et non-grasses +% sont mélangées\,\footnote{Ceci apparaît notamment si vous utilisez les fontes Computer Modern Roman (CMR)~\cite{cmt}. +% Le symptôme disparaît si vous n'utilisez plus de fontes CMR grasses ou si vous utilisez les fontes TX (paquetage +% \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts}), par exemple\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, comme dans ce document}{\relax}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.29}.} +% (la longueur effective de \texttt{1em} n'est pas la même pour ces fontes). +% Ceci peut souvent être corrigé en changeant quelques fontes. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \footnotesize +% \caption{Fonts and titles for the mini-table commands}\label{t+mtc+f1} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \toprule +% Command +% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with +% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with +% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english; +% changed by the language definition files or +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries\ by default.} +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \thickline +% Command +% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with +% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with +% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english; +% changed by the language definition files or +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries{} by default.} +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \footnotesize +% \caption{Fontes et titres pour les commandes de mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f1} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \toprule +% Commande +% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Fonte du titre}{choix par défaut}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais; +% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.} +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \thickline +% Commande +% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Fonte du }{choix par défaut}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais; +% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.} +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \small +% \caption{Fonts for the mini-table entries}\label{t+mtc+f2} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% Level&Font&Default setting\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapter\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Subsection +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \thickline +% Level&Font&Default setting\\ +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapter\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Subsection +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \small +% \caption{Fontes pour les entrées des mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f2} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapitre\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Sous-section +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \thickline +% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\ +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapitre\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Sous-section +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \fi +% ^^A \ifFLP\floatpagestyle{plain}\fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% \caption{Available languages}\label{t+languages} +% \ilopt{afrikaan}% +% \ilopt{afrikaans}% +% \ilopt{albanian}% +% \ilopt{arab}% +% \ilopt{arabic}% +% \ilopt{arab2}% +% \ilopt{arabi}% +% \ilopt{armenian}% +% \ilopt{bahasai}% +% \ilopt{bahasa}% +% \ilopt{indon}% +% \ilopt{indonesian}% +% \ilopt{bahasam}% +% \ilopt{malay}% +% \ilopt{meyalu}% +% \ilopt{bangla}% +% \ilopt{basque}% +% \ilopt{bengali}% +% \ilopt{bicig}% +% \ilopt{uighur}% +% \ilopt{bicig2}% +% \ilopt{uighur2}% +% \ilopt{bicig3}% +% \ilopt{uighur3}% +% \ilopt{bithe}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{brazil}% +% \ilopt{brazilian}% +% \ilopt{breton}% +% \ilopt{bulgarian}% +% \ilopt{bulgarianb}% +% \ilopt{buryat}% +% \ilopt{buryat2}% +% \ilopt{catalan}% +% \ilopt{chinese1}% +% \ilopt{chinese2}% +% \ilopt{croatian}% +% \ilopt{czech}% +% \ilopt{danish}% +% \ilopt{devanagari}% +% \ilopt{hindi}% +% \ilopt{dutch}% +% \iloptd{english}% +% \ilopt{american}% +% \ilopt{australian}% +% \ilopt{british}% +% \ilopt{canadian}% +% \ilopt{newzealand}% +% \ilopt{UKenglish}% +% \ilopt{USenglish}% +% \ilopt{english1}% +% \ilopt{english2}% +% \ilopt{esperant}% +% \ilopt{esperanto}% +% \ilopt{estonian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopia}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian2}% +% \ilopt{farsi1}% +% \ilopt{farsi2}% +% \ilopt{farsi3}% +% \ilopt{finnish}% +% \ilopt{finnish2}% +% \ilopt{french}% +% \ilopt{frenchb}% +% \ilopt{frenchle}% +% \ilopt{frenchpro}% +% \ilopt{francais}% +% \ilopt{acadien}% +% \ilopt{canadien}% +% \ilopt{french1}% +% \ilopt{french2}% +% \ilopt{galician}% +% \ilopt{german}% +% \ilopt{austrian}% +% \ilopt{germanb}% +% \ilopt{germanb2}% +% \ilopt{greek}% +% \ilopt{greek-mono}% +% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}% +% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}% +% \ilopt{guarani}% +% \ilopt{hangul1}% +% \ilopt{hangul2}% +% \ilopt{hangul3}% +% \ilopt{hangul4}% +% \ilopt{hangul-u8}% +% \ilopt{hanja1}% +% \ilopt{hanja2}% +% \ilopt{hanja-u8}% +% \ilopt{hebrew}% +% \ilopt{hebrew2}% +% \ilopt{hindi-modern}% +% \ilopt{icelandic}% +% \ilopt{interlingua}% +% \ilopt{irish}% +% \ilopt{italian}% +% \ilopt{italian2}% +% \ilopt{japanese}% +% \ilopt{japanese2}% +% \ilopt{japanese3}% +% \ilopt{japanese4}% +% \ilopt{japanese5}% +% \ilopt{japanese6}% +% \ilopt{kannada}% +% \ilopt{latin}% +% \ilopt{latin2}% +% \ilopt{latinc}% +% \ilopt{latinc2}% +% \ilopt{latvian}% +% \ilopt{latvian2}% +% \ilopt{letton}% +% \ilopt{letton2}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian2}% +% \ilopt{lowersorbian}% +% \ilopt{lsorbian}% +% \ilopt{magyar}% +% \ilopt{hungarian}% +% \ilopt{magyar2}% +% \ilopt{magyar3}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-b}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{mexican}% +% \ilopt{mongol}% +% \ilopt{mongolb}% +% \ilopt{mongolian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb}% +% \ilopt{ngerman}% +% \ilopt{naustrian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb2}% +% \ilopt{norsk}% +% \ilopt{norsk2}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk2}% +% \ilopt{occitan}% +% \ilopt{occitan2}% +% \ilopt{polish}% +% \ilopt{polish2}% +% \ilopt{polski}% +% \ilopt{portuguese}% +% \ilopt{portuges}% +% \ilopt{romanian}% +% \ilopt{romanian2}% +% \ilopt{romanian3}% +% \ilopt{russian}% +% \ilopt{russianb}% +% \ilopt{russianc}% +% \ilopt{russian2m}% +% \ilopt{russian2o}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca1}% +% \ilopt{russian-lh}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}% +% \ilopt{samin}% +% \ilopt{scottish}% +% \ilopt{serbian}% +% \ilopt{serbianc}% +% \ilopt{slovak}% +% \ilopt{slovene}% +% \ilopt{spanish}% +% \ilopt{castillan}% +% \ilopt{castillian}% +% \ilopt{spanish2}% +% \ilopt{spanish3}% +% \ilopt{spanish4}% +% \ilopt{swahili}% +% \ilopt{swedish}% +% \ilopt{swedish2}% +% \ilopt{thai}% +% \ilopt{turkish}% +% \ilopt{ukrainian}% +% \ilopt{ukraineb}% +% \ilopt{uppersorbian}% +% \ilopt{usorbian}% +% \ilopt{vietnam}% +% \ilopt{vietnamese}% +% \ilopt{welsh}% +% \ilopt{xalx}% +% \ilopt{khalkha}% +% \ilopt{xalx2}% +% \ilopt{xalx3}% +% \centering +% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small +% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing +% \begin{multicols}{4} +% \begin{itemize} +% ^^A \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em +% ^^A \def\labelitemi{--} +% \item afrikaan (afrikaans) +% \item albanian +% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{c}$ +% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$ +% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item armenian\,$^c$ +% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$ +% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$ +% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$ +% \item basque +% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$ +% \item brazil (brazilian) +% \item breton +% \item bulgarian\,$^c$ +% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$ +% \item buryat\,$^c$ +% \item buryat2\,$^c$ +% \item catalan +% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item croatian +% \item czech +% \item danish +% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$ +% \item dutch +% \item english$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish) +% \item english1 +% \item english2 +% \item esperant (esperanto) +% \item estonian +% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$ +% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$ +% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item finnish +% \item finnish2 +% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien) +% \item french1 +% \item french2 +% \item galician +% \item german (austrian) +% \item germanb +% \item germanb2 +% \item greek\,$^c$ +% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item guarani\,$^h$ +% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$ +% \item icelandic\,$^f$ +% \item interlingua +% \item irish +% \item italian +% \item italian2 +% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item kannada\,$^c$ +% \item latin +% \item latin2 +% \item latinc +% \item latinc2 +% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$ +% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$ +% \item lithuanian +% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian) +% \item magyar (hungarian) +% \item magyar2 +% \item magyar3 +% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$ +% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$ +% \item mexican +% \item mongol\,$^c$ +% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$ +% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian) +% \item ngermanb2 +% \item norsk +% \item norsk2 +% \item nynorsk +% \item nynorsk2 +% \item occitan +% \item occitan2 +% \item polish +% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item polski\,$^c$ +% \item portuguese (portuges) +% \item romanian +% \item romanian2 +% \item romanian3 +% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item samin +% \item scottish +% \item serbian +% \item serbianc\,$^c$ +% \item slovak +% \item slovene +% \item spanish (castillan, castillian) +% \item spanish2 +% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$ +% \item spanish4 +% \item swahili +% \item swedish +% \item swedish2 +% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$ +% \item turkish +% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item uppersorbian (usorbian) +% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$ +% \item welsh +% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$ +% \item xalx2\,$^c$ +% \item xalx3\,$^c$ +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \hrule +% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[()]The languages between parentheses are aliases of a main language +% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file +% of that main language. +% \item[$^{\dagger}$] The presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory. +% \item[$^a$] The \ulopt{arab(ic)}\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} and \lopt{arab2} languages require the use of the +% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}). +% \item[$^b$] The \ulopt{russian} language is not yet supported +% by the \pack{babel} system~\cite{babel,babel-user}, but +% \lopt{russianb}~\cite{russianb} is supported if you use +% babel-3.6 or a higher version; \lopt{russianc} is an extra. Look also at other \suffix{.mld} files for russian. +% \item[$^c$] Some languages may require specific fonts. +% \item[$^d$] Requires the \pack{CJK} package~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[$^e$] Requires \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), the version of \LaTeX\ for Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). +% \item[$^f$] Requires a 8-bits input encoding. +% \item[$^g$] Uses also a \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \item[$^h$] Requires a specific input encoding. +% \item[$^i$] The \lopt{bicig} language is also known as \lopt{uighur}. +% \item[$^j$] The \lopt{arabi} and \lopt{farsi3} languages require the use of the +% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% ^^A \vspace*{2\baselineskip} +% \caption{Langues disponibles}\label{t+languages} +% \ilopt{afrikaan}% +% \ilopt{afrikaans}% +% \ilopt{albanian}% +% \ilopt{arab}% +% \ilopt{arabic}% +% \ilopt{arab2}% +% \ilopt{arabi}% +% \ilopt{armenian}% +% \ilopt{bahasai}% +% \ilopt{bahasa}% +% \ilopt{indon}% +% \ilopt{indonesian}% +% \ilopt{bahasam}% +% \ilopt{malay}% +% \ilopt{meyalu}% +% \ilopt{bangla}% +% \ilopt{basque}% +% \ilopt{bengali}% +% \ilopt{bicig}% +% \ilopt{uighur}% +% \ilopt{bicig2}% +% \ilopt{uighur2}% +% \ilopt{bicig3}% +% \ilopt{uighur3}% +% \ilopt{bithe}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{brazil}% +% \ilopt{brazilian}% +% \ilopt{breton}% +% \ilopt{bulgarian}% +% \ilopt{bulgarianb}% +% \ilopt{buryat}% +% \ilopt{buryat2}% +% \ilopt{catalan}% +% \ilopt{chinese1}% +% \ilopt{chinese2}% +% \ilopt{croatian}% +% \ilopt{czech}% +% \ilopt{danish}% +% \ilopt{devanagari}% +% \ilopt{hindi}% +% \ilopt{dutch}% +% \iloptd{english}% +% \ilopt{american}% +% \ilopt{australian}% +% \ilopt{british}% +% \ilopt{canadian}% +% \ilopt{newzealand}% +% \ilopt{UKenglish}% +% \ilopt{USenglish}% +% \ilopt{english1}% +% \ilopt{english2}% +% \ilopt{esperant}% +% \ilopt{esperanto}% +% \ilopt{estonian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopia}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian2}% +% \ilopt{farsi1}% +% \ilopt{farsi2}% +% \ilopt{farsi3}% +% \ilopt{finnish}% +% \ilopt{finnish2}% +% \ilopt{french}% +% \ilopt{frenchb}% +% \ilopt{frenchle}% +% \ilopt{frenchpro}% +% \ilopt{francais}% +% \ilopt{acadien}% +% \ilopt{canadien}% +% \ilopt{french1}% +% \ilopt{french2}% +% \ilopt{galician}% +% \ilopt{german}% +% \ilopt{austrian}% +% \ilopt{germanb}% +% \ilopt{germanb2}% +% \ilopt{greek}% +% \ilopt{greek-mono}% +% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}% +% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}% +% \ilopt{guarani}% +% \ilopt{hangul1}% +% \ilopt{hangul2}% +% \ilopt{hangul3}% +% \ilopt{hangul4}% +% \ilopt{hangul-u8}% +% \ilopt{hanja1}% +% \ilopt{hanja2}% +% \ilopt{hanja-u8}% +% \ilopt{hebrew}% +% \ilopt{hebrew2}% +% \ilopt{hindi-modern}% +% \ilopt{icelandic}% +% \ilopt{interlingua}% +% \ilopt{irish}% +% \ilopt{italian}% +% \ilopt{italian2}% +% \ilopt{japanese}% +% \ilopt{japanese2}% +% \ilopt{japanese3}% +% \ilopt{japanese4}% +% \ilopt{japanese5}% +% \ilopt{japanese6}% +% \ilopt{kannada}% +% \ilopt{latin}% +% \ilopt{latin2}% +% \ilopt{latinc}% +% \ilopt{latinc2}% +% \ilopt{latvian}% +% \ilopt{latvian2}% +% \ilopt{letton}% +% \ilopt{letton2}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian2}% +% \ilopt{lowersorbian}% +% \ilopt{lsorbian}% +% \ilopt{magyar}% +% \ilopt{hungarian}% +% \ilopt{magyar2}% +% \ilopt{magyar3}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-b}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{mexican}% +% \ilopt{mongol}% +% \ilopt{mongolb}% +% \ilopt{mongolian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb}% +% \ilopt{ngerman}% +% \ilopt{naustrian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb2}% +% \ilopt{norsk}% +% \ilopt{norsk2}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk2}% +% \ilopt{occitan}% +% \ilopt{occitan2}% +% \ilopt{polish}% +% \ilopt{polish2}% +% \ilopt{polski}% +% \ilopt{portuguese}% +% \ilopt{portuges}% +% \ilopt{romanian}% +% \ilopt{romanian2}% +% \ilopt{romanian3}% +% \ilopt{russian}% +% \ilopt{russianb}% +% \ilopt{russianc}% +% \ilopt{russian2m}% +% \ilopt{russian2o}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca1}% +% \ilopt{russian-lh}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}% +% \ilopt{samin}% +% \ilopt{scottish}% +% \ilopt{serbian}% +% \ilopt{serbianc}% +% \ilopt{slovak}% +% \ilopt{slovene}% +% \ilopt{spanish}% +% \ilopt{castillan}% +% \ilopt{castillian}% +% \ilopt{spanish2}% +% \ilopt{spanish3}% +% \ilopt{spanish4}% +% \ilopt{swahili}% +% \ilopt{swedish}% +% \ilopt{swedish2}% +% \ilopt{thai}% +% \ilopt{turkish}% +% \ilopt{ukrainian}% +% \ilopt{ukraineb}% +% \ilopt{uppersorbian}% +% \ilopt{usorbian}% +% \ilopt{vietnam}% +% \ilopt{vietnamese}% +% \ilopt{welsh}% +% \ilopt{xalx}% +% \ilopt{khalkha}% +% \ilopt{xalx2}% +% \ilopt{xalx3}% +% \centering +% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small +% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing +% \begin{multicols}{4} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item afrikaan (afrikaans) +% \item albanian +% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{a,c}$ +% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$ +% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item armenian\,$^c$ +% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$ +% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$ +% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$ +% \item basque +% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$ +% \item brazil (brazilian) +% \item breton +% \item bulgarian\,$^c$ +% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$ +% \item buryat\,$^c$ +% \item buryat2\,$^c$ +% \item catalan +% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item croatian +% \item czech +% \item danish +% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$ +% \item dutch +% \item english\,$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish) +% \item english1 +% \item english2 +% \item esperant (esperanto) +% \item estonian +% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$ +% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$ +% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item finnish +% \item finnish2 +% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien) +% \item french1 +% \item french2 +% \item galician +% \item german (austrian) +% \item germanb +% \item germanb2 +% \item greek\,$^c$ +% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item guarani\,$^h$ +% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$ +% \item icelandic\,$^f$ +% \item interlingua +% \item irish +% \item italian +% \item italian2 +% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item kannada\,$^c$ +% \item latin +% \item latin2 +% \item latinc +% \item latinc2 +% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$ +% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$ +% \item lithuanian +% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian) +% \item magyar (hungarian) +% \item magyar2 +% \item magyar3 +% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$ +% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$ +% \item mexican +% \item mongol\,$^c$ +% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$ +% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian) +% \item ngermanb2 +% \item norsk +% \item norsk2 +% \item nynorsk +% \item nynorsk2 +% \item occitan +% \item occitan2 +% \item polish +% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item polski\,$^c$ +% \item portuguese (portuges) +% \item romanian +% \item romanian2 +% \item romanian3 +% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item samin +% \item scottish +% \item serbian +% \item serbianc\,$^c$ +% \item slovak +% \item slovene +% \item spanish (castillan, castillian) +% \item spanish2 +% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$ +% \item spanish4 +% \item swahili +% \item swedish +% \item swedish2 +% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$ +% \item turkish +% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item uppersorbian (usorbian) +% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$ +% \item welsh +% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$ +% \item xalx2\,$^c$ +% \item xalx3\,$^c$ +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \hrule +% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[()] Les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} +% chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de celle-ci. +% \item[$^{\dagger}$] La présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire. +% \item[$^a$] Les langues <<~\ulopt{arab(ic)}~>>\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} et <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage +% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}). +% \item[$^b$] La langue <<~\uopt{russian}~» n'est pas encore supportée par le +% système \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, +% mais <<~\lopt{russianb}~>>~\cite{russianb} est supportée si vous utilisez +% babel-3.6 ou une version supérieure; <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est un supplément. Regardez aussi les autres +% fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour le russe. +% \item[$^c$] Certaines langues peuvent requérir des fontes spécifiques. +% \item[$^d$] Requiert le paquetage \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[$^e$] Requiert \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). +% \item[$^f$] Requiert un codage en entrée sur 8~bits. +% \item[$^g$] Utilise aussi un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. +% \item[$^h$] Requiert un codage en entrée spécifique. +% \item[$^i$] La langue \lopt{bicig} est aussi connue sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{\lopt{uighur}}). +% \item[$^j$] Les langues <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> et <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage +% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% ^^A \vspace*{-2\baselineskip} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi +% ^^A \afterpage{\clearpage} +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Titles for chapter-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Titles are typeset in the \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| by +% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by +% \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} +% and \com{mlttitle}, which +% are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default. +% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for +% languages other than english. +% +% \lneed{6} +% The language definition files like +% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (the suffix +% \suffix{.mld} means ``minitoc language definition (file)'') +% (and many others, see the list in table~\vref{t+languages} and section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available. +% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). +% You can change the language of these titles by using the +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. +% \or\relax +% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des +% titres sont définis par \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} et \com{mlttitle}, qui sont les +% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. Ces titres devraient être redéfinis +% par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} pour les langues autres que l'anglais. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Les fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} +% et \xfile{english.mld} (le suffixe \suffix{.mld} signifie «~\emph{minitoc language definition +% (file)}~») (et bien d'autres, voir la liste dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont +% disponibles. Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée +% (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). +% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces +% titres en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Part-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau partie} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The partial table of contents is typeset in the \com{ptcfont} +% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% In fact, the font \com{ptcfont} is selected at the beginning of a parttoc, partlof or partlot. More +% selective choices are made with the following fonts. +% Chapter entries are typeset in the \com{ptcCfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default. +% Section entries are typeset in the \com{ptcSfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières au niveau partie est composée dans la fonte \com{ptcfont}, qui est définie comme +% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% En fait, la fonte \com{ptcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une parttoc, partlof ou partlot. Des choix +% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. +% Les entrées de type chapitre sont composées dans la fonte +% \com{ptcCfont}, qui est \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut. +% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte \com{ptcSfont}, qui est +% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the +% commands \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, +% \com{ptcPfont}, and \com{ptcSPfont} are available +% (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you +% want to use various fonts. +% \or\relax +% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, paragraphes et +% sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, \com{ptcPfont} et \com{ptcSPfont} sont +% disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous souhaitez utiliser diverses fontes. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Partial lists of figures and tables are +% typeset in the fonts \com{plffont} and \com{pltfont}, which are +% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% There are also \com{plfSfont} and \com{pltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. +% \or\relax +% Les listes de figures et de tableaux au niveau partie sont composées dans les fontes \com{plffont} et \com{pltfont}, qui +% sont \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% Il y a aussi \com{plfSfont} et \com{pltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Titles for part-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau partie} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Titles are typeset in the \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| by +% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by +% \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} +% and \com{plttitle}, which +% are the strings ``Table of Contents'', +% ``List of Figures'' and ``List of Tables'' by default. +% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for +% languages other than english. +% +% \lneed{3} +% The language definition files like +% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and many others; for a complete list, see +% table~\vref{t+languages}) are available. Read also section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). +% You can change the language of these titles by using the +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. +% \or\relax +% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des +% titres sont définis par \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} et \com{plttitle}, qui sont les +% chaînes «~Table of Contents~», «~List of Figures~» et «~List of Tables~» par défaut. +% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} +% pour les langues autres que l'anglais. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de +% nombreux autres; pour une liste complète, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}) sont disponibles. Lire aussi +% la section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). +% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres +% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Section-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau section} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The section-level table of contents +% is typeset in the \com{stcfont} +% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% In fact, the font \com{stcfont} is selected at the beginning of a secttoc, sectlof or sectlot. +% +% More selective choices are made with the following fonts. +% Subsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default. +% Subsubsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSSfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières au niveau section est composée dans la fonte \com{stcfont}, qui est définie comme +% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% En fait, la fonte \com{stcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une secttoc, sectlof ou sectlot. +% +% Des choix plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. +% Les entrées de sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSfont}, qui est +% \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut. +% Les entrées de sous-sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSSfont}, qui est +% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For paragraphs and subparagraphs, the +% commands \com{stcPfont} and \com{stcSPfont} +% are available (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you +% want to use various fonts. Section-level lists of figures and tables are +% typeset in the fonts \com{slffont} and \com{sltfont}, which are +% defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% There are also \com{slfSfont} and \com{sltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. +% \or\relax +% Pour les paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{stcPfont} et \com{stcSPfont} sont disponibles +% (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous désirez utiliser diverses fontes. Les listes de figures et de +% tableaux au niveau section sont composées dans les fontes \com{slffont} et \com{sltfont}, qui sont définies +% comme étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% Il y a aussi \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Titles for section-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Titles are typeset in the \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by +% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by +% \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} +% and \com{slttitle}, which are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default. +% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for +% languages other than english. +% +% \lneed{3} +% The language definition files like \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and also many others, as listed in +% table~\vref{t+languages} and explained in section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available. +% You can easily prepare a similar file for your preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). +% You can change the language of these titles by using the +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. +% \or\relax +% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des +% titres sont définis par \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} et \com{slttitle}, qui sont les +% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. +% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} ou \com{mtcsettitle} +% pour les langues autres que l'anglais. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de +% nombreux autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous pouvez +% facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). +% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres +% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Position of the titles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Position des titres} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the part level} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau partie} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{doparttoc}, +% \com{dopartlof} and \com{dopartlot} accept an optional argument +% to change the default position of the +% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title). +% The change is global for all the document. +% If you want to change the position of the title for only one parttoc +% (or partlof or partlof), just use such an optional argument with the +% command \com{parttoc} (or \com{partlof} or \com{partlot}). +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et +% \com{dopartlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: +% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou +% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. +% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule parttoc (ou partlof ou partlot), il vous suffit +% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande +% \com{parttoc} (ou \com{partlof} ou \com{partlot}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the chapter level} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dominitoc}, +% \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} accept an optional argument +% to change the default position of the +% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for ``empty'' (``no'' title). +% The change is global for all the document. +% If you want to change the position of the title for only one minitoc +% (or minilof or minilof), just use such an optional argument with the +% command \com{minitoc} (or \com{minilof} or +% \com{minilot}). +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et +% \com{dominilot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: +% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou +% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. +% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule minitoc (ou minilof ou minilot), il vous suffit +% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande +% \com{minitoc} (ou \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the section level} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dosecttoc}, +% \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} accept +% an optional argument to change the default position of the +% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title). +% The change is global for all the document. +% If you want to change the position of the title for only one secttoc +% (or sectlof or sectlof), just use such an optional argument with the +% command \com{secttoc} (or \com{sectlof} or +% \com{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et +% \com{dosectlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: +% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou +% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. +% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlot), il vous suffit +% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande +% \com{secttoc} (ou \com{sectlof} ou \com{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Summary of the positionning of titles} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Résumé du positionnement des titres} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To summarize: by default, all titles are on the left. However, each one of the +% following preparation commands: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}\\ +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% accepts an optional argument to change the positionning of the +% title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, \texttt{[e]} or \texttt{[n]} for empty (no +% title), for all the corresponding mini-tables (for all mini-tables in the case of \com{mtcprepare}). +% \or\relax +% Pour résumer, par défaut, tous les titres sont sur la gauche. Cependant, chacune des commandes de préparation +% suivantes: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}\\ +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% accepte un argument optionnel pour modifier le positionnement du titre: \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), +% \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, \texttt{[e]} ou \texttt{[n]} pour vide (pas de +% titre), pour toutes les mini-tables correspondantes (de toutes les mini-tables dans le cas de +% \com{mtcprepare}). +% \fi +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following insertion commands: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% accept the same optional arguments, but these options change the +% positionning only for the title of the current mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes d'insertion suivantes: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% acceptent les mêmes arguments optionnels, mais ces options changent le positionnement seulement pour le +% titre de la mini-table courante. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Line spacing in the mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\tightmtctrue} +% \begin{macro}{\tightmtcfalse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% With the commands \com{tightmtctrue} (or the \opt{tight} +% package option) and \com{tightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{loose} +% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space +% between contents lines. +% \or\relax +% Avec les commandes \com{tightmtctrue} (ou l'option de paquetage \opt{tight}) et +% \com{tightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les +% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\parsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But\imess{I0043} with the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl}, +% \class{scrbook} and \class{scrreprt}), it may sometimes be necessary +% to use the following options or commands, because we need to set \com{parskip} to zero in place of +% \com{parsep} to tighten the mini-table. The efficiency of the following options depends on the options given +% to these \KOMAScript{} classes (\optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script} option, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} option and variants). +% \or\relax +% Mais\imess{I0043} avec les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl}, +% \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}), il peut être +% nécessaire d'utiliser les options ou commandes suivantes, car il nous faut forcer à~zéro \com{parskip} au lieu +% de \com{parsep} pour resserrer la mini-table. L'efficacité des options ci-dessous dépend des options données +% à~ces classes \KOMAScript{} (options \optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} et variantes). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtctrue} +% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtcfalse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \KOMAScript{} classes, with the commands \com{ktightmtctrue} (or the \opt{k-tight} +% package option) and \com{ktightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{k-loose} +% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space +% between contents lines. +% \or\relax +% Pour les classes \KOMAScript, avec les commandes \com{ktightmtctrue} (ou l'option de +% paquetage \opt{k-tight}) et +% \com{ktightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{k-loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les +% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified commands for fonts}\label{s+simp-font-commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commandes simplifiées pour les fontes}\label{s+simp-font-commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the fonts for mini-tables, there are two +% useful commands: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{sectionning-level}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% will redefine \com{mtcSSfont} and \com{mlfSfont} with the given font commands. +% +% Note that \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| allows also to redefine \com{ptcfont}, etc. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Moreover, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}| +% \end{quote} +% will redefine \com{ptifont} (for titles in the parttocs, partlofs and partlofs) with the given font commands. +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des fontes des mini-tables, il y~a deux commandes utiles: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% Par exemple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% redéfinira \com{mtcSSfont} et \com{mlfSfont} avec les commandes de fontes données. +% +% Notez que \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| permet aussi de redéfinir \com{ptcfont}, etc. +% +% \lneed{5} +% De plus, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}| +% \end{quote} +% redéfinira \com{ptifont} (pour les titres dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlofs) avec les commandes de fontes +% données. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table titles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les titres des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the titles for mini-tables, the +% \com{mtcsettitle} command is also available: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{title string}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description of contents}| +% \end{quote} +% will redefine \com{mtctitle} with the given string. This command checks that you redefine a title for a +% mini-table type available in your document class. +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des titres des mini-tables, la commande +% \com{mtcsettitle} est aussi disponible: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{chaîne titre}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% Par exemple, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description du contenu}| +% \end{quote} +% redéfinira \com{mtctitle} avec la chaîne donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous redéfinissez un titre pour un +% type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table depths} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les profondeurs des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the depths for mini-tables, the +% \com{mtcsetdepth} command is also available: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}| +% \end{quote} +% will set the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} with the given value. This command checks that you set a depth for a +% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its depth). +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des profondeurs des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande +% \com{mtcsetdepth}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% Par exemple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}| +% \end{quote} +% forcera le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez une profondeur +% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer sa +% profondeur). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table offsets} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les déplacements des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the offsets for mini-tables, the +% \com{mtcsetoffset} command is also available: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{offset}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{3} +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}| +% \end{quote} +% will set the macro \com{mtcoffset} to the given value. This command checks that you set a offset for a +% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its offset). +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des déplacements des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande +% \com{mtcsetoffset}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{déplacement}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{3} +% Par exemple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}| +% \end{quote} +% forcera la macro \com{mtcoffset} à~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez un déplacement +% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer son +% déplacement). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} the argument of \com{mtcsetoffset} is \emph{not} verified. It must be a length value, +% without shrink nor stretch part. A positive offset is towards the right, a negative one towards the left. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} l'argument de \com{mtcsetoffset} \emph{n'est pas} vérifié. Ce doit être une valeur de +% longueur, sans partie compressible ou extensible. Un déplacement positif se fait vers la droite, un déplacement +% négatif se fait vers la gauche. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Polymorphic entries in the mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{polymorphic entry} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Entrées polymorphes dans les mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The title of a sectionning command can appear in several places: +% a)~at the beginning of the section, of the chapter or of the part; +% b)~in the page header; +% c)~in the main TOC; +% d)~in the minitoc of the chapter (for a section title or lower); +% e)~in the parttoc of the part (for a chapter title or lower). +% A sectionning command has two arguments: an optionnal one, \textsl{OA}, and a mandatory one, \textsl{MA}, like in: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\section[|\textsl{OA}\verb|]{|\textsl{MA}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \textsl{OA} is taken as \textsl{MA} if omitted. Normaly, \textsl{OA} is used in the TOC and in the minitables, as in +% the page headers when necessary. \textsl{MA} is used as title for the sectionning unit and is the default for +% \textsl{OA}. But, some times, you may need to have a different version (a~variant) for a sectionning unit title +% in a minitable. So, it is now possible to define such variants by detecting if that title is used inside some +% minitable: the following flags are defined (when meaningful): +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag:}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% But these flags are used to build three new commands, to be called from inside the optionnal argument +% (\textsl{OA}) of a +% sectionning command or that of a caption: +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% Such entries are ``polymorphic''. +% See the example~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, for a short demonstration. +% \or\relax +% Le titre d'une commande se sectionnement peut apparaître en plusieurs endroits: +% a)~au début de la section, du chapitre ou de la partie; +% b)~dans l'en-tête de page; +% c)~dans la table des matières principale; +% d)~dans la minitoc du chapitre (pour un titre de section ou inférieur); +% e)~dans la parttoc de la partie pour un titre de chapitre ou inférieur). +% Une commande de sectionnement a deux arguments: un facultatif, \textsl{AF}, et un obligatoire, \textsl{AO}, comme dans: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\section[|\textsl{AF}\verb|]{|\textsl{AO}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \textsl{AF} est pris égal à~\textsl{AO} si omis. Normalement, \textsl{AF} est utilisé dans la table des +% matières principale et dans les minitables, ainsi que dans les en-têtes de page si nécessaire. +% \textsl{AO} est utilisé comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement est la valeur par défaut pour~\textsl{OA}. +% Mais, parfois, vous pouvez vouloir une version différente (une variante) comme titre d'unité de +% sectionnement dans une minitable. Donc, il est maintenant possible de définir de telles variantes en détectant +% si ce titre est utilisé à~l'intérieur d'une minitable: les indicateurs suivants sont définis (lorsqu'ils ont un sens): +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur:}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% Mais ces indicateurs sont utilisés pour construire trois nouvelles commandes, devant être appelées depuis +% l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel +% (\textsl{AO}) d'une commande de sectionnement ou de celui d'un caption: +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~». +% Voir l'exemple~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, pour une courte démonstration. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Languages for the titles}\label{fo+lang} +% Most of the strings defined in the language definition files (\suffix{.mld}) were taken from the +% superb \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} of \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, +% some were adapted, others were made available by gentle users +% or taken from specific packages, like \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, +% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, +% \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} (armenian)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bangla, bengali)~\cite{bangtex}, +% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (spanish)~\cite{spanish4}. +% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, +% \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, +% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinese, +% korean-hangûl/hanja, japanese, thai)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, +% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polish), +% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (swedish), +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi or iranian), or \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} +% --- latvian (letton), +% \lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}, \lopt{polish2}, \lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o} and \lopt{spanish3} +% need \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), i.e.,~the Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) version of \LaTeX, (see~\cite{antomega}), +% or even found by searching on the Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} for upper cyrillic bulgarian, +% \xfile{japanese.mld} for japanese, \xfile{serbianc.mld} for cyrillic serbian). +% Other languages are welcome\,\footnote{I~am searching for the titles in corsican, in +% particular.}. See table~\vref{t+languages}. +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Langues pour les titres}\label{fo+lang} +% La plupart des chaînes définies dans les fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) ont été prises +% dans le superbe paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, certaines ont été adaptées, +% d'autres ont été mises à~disposition par d'aimables utilisateurs ou prises dans des paquetages spécifiques, tels +% que \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} +% (arménien)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bânglâ, bengalî)~\cite{bangtex}, +% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (espagnol)~\cite{spanish4}. +% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} pour \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and +% \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinois, +% coréen-hangûl/hanja, japonais, thaï)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, +% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polonais), +% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (suédois), +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi ou iranien) +% \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} --- le latvien (letton), des variantes de grec +% (\lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}), de polonais (\lopt{polish2}), de russe (\lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o}) et +% d'espagnol (\lopt{spanish3}) ont besoin +% de \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), c'est-à-dire de la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), +% (voir~\cite{antomega}), --- ou ont même été trouvées en +% cherchant sur le Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} pour le haut bulgare cyrillique, \xfile{japanese.mld} pour le +% japonais, \xfile{serbianc.mld} pour le serbe cyrillique). D'autres langues sont les bienvenues\,\footnote{Je recherche +% notamment les titres pour le corse (\emph{corsican}).}. +% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But\Virage{} for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi, hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese, +% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai and some variants of russian.}, the sources of the titles use some exotic encodings which +% are difficult to manipulate in a +% \suffix{.dtx} file, hence the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper which loads a special file, +% nicknamed a \suffix{.mlo} +% file\,\footnote{The extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the +% \suffix{.dtx} file in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package, but via \env{filecontents} +% environments in the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file, and playing with the ``catcode'' of +% the ``delete'' character. +% \or\relax +% Mais\Virage{} pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour le chinois, le farsi, le coréen (hangûl et +% hanja), le japonais, le \lopt{malayalam-omega}, le thaï et certaines variantes du russe.}, les sources des titres +% utilisent quelques +% codages exotiques qu'il est difficile de manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, donc le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors +% un simple emballage qui charge un fichier spécial, surnommé fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le +% suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langue pour minitoc).}, qui n'est pas +% engendré par le fichier \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais via des +% environnements \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}, +% et en jouant sur le «~catcode~» du caractère «~delete~». +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Altering the layout of the mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Modifier la mise en page des mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The layout of a mini-table is described in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (this figure is adapted from~\cite{tocloft}), +% which defines some internal commands (these are not \emph{dimensions}, but \LaTeX{} commands, created by +% \com{newcommand}, modifiable via \com{renewcommand}). +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, which is the separation between the dots in the dotted line. It is a pure number +% expressing \emph{math units}; 18~math units make \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' +% in the current font. As the real size of \texttt{1em} is font dependent, the separation between the dots +% may vary if you use different fonts for different types of entries in the mini-tables. +% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, is the width of the space reserved for the page number. It is a \LaTeX\ command +% containing the representation of a length (e.g.,~\texttt{1.55em}). +% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, is the distance (margin) between the right border of the table and the end of the +% dotted line. It should be larger than \com{@pnumwidth}, and can be a rubber length (i.e.,~contain +% some glue, like \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); if you specify the ``\texttt{...~plus~1fil}'' portion, +% the text of the entry will be ragged on right; it is useful if you have long entries, and it can avoid +% most hyphenations. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% La mise en page est décrite dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (cette figure a été adaptée de~\cite{tocloft}), qui +% définit certaines commandes internes (ce ne sont pas des \emph{dimensions}, mais des commandes \LaTeX, crées par +% \com{newcommand}, modifiables via \com{renewcommand}). +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, qui est la séparation entre les points de conduite dans une ligne de points. C'est un +% nombre pur exprimant des \emph{unités mathématiques}; 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un +% cadratin), qui est à~peu près la largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Comme la taille effective de +% \texttt{1em} dépend de la fonte, la séparation entre les points peut varier si vous utilisez des fontes +% différentes pour des types différents d'entrées dans les mini-tables. +% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, qui est la largeur de l'espace réservé pour le numéro de page. C'est une commande +% \LaTeX\ contenant la représentation d'une longueur (par~ex., \texttt{1.55em}). +% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, est la distance (marge) entre le bord droit de la table et la fin de la ligne de +% points de conduite. Elle devrait être plus grande que \com{@pnumwidth}, et peut être une longueur +% élastique (c'est-à-dire contenir de la glu, comme \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); si vous spécifiez la +% portion «~\texttt{...~plus~1fil}~», le texte de l'entrée sera en déchiqueté sur la droite; ceci est utile si +% vous avez des entrées longues, et peut éviter la plupart des coupures de mots. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \newcommand{\maxx}{120} ^^A picture width +% \newcommand{\maxxm}{118} ^^A \maxx - 2\ +% \newcommand{\maxy}{55} ^^A picture height +% \newcommand{\maxym}{53} ^^A \maxy - 2 +% \newcommand{\maxyp}{57} ^^A \maxy + 2 +% \newcommand{\findent}{20} ^^A indent +% \newcommand{\findentp}{22} ^^A \findent + 2 +% \newcommand{\fnumwidth}{10} ^^A numwidth +% \newcommand{\ftocrmarg}{30} ^^A \@tocrmarg +% \newcommand{\fpnumwidth}{20} ^^A \@pnumwidth +% \newcommand{\fipn}{30} ^^A \findent + \fnumwidth +% \newcommand{\frmarg}{90} ^^A \maxx - \ftocrmarg +% \newcommand{\frnum}{100} ^^A \maxx - \fpnumwidth +% \newcommand{\fyi}{10} ^^A 1st y height +% \newcommand{\fyim}{8} ^^A \fyi - 2 +% \newcommand{\fyii}{20} ^^A 2nd y height +% \newcommand{\fyiii}{25} ^^A 3rd y height +% \newcommand{\fyiv}{30} ^^A 4th y height +% \newcommand{\fyv}{40} ^^A 5th y height +% \newcommand{\fyvp}{42} ^^A \fyv + 2 +% \newcommand{\flin}{4} ^^A length of leader lines +% \newcommand{\frmargm}{89} ^^A \frmarg (90) - a little bit +% \begin{figure}[tp] +% \centering +% \setlength{\unitlength}{\linewidth} +% \divide \unitlength by \maxx +% \icom{mtcindent}\icom{@pnumwidth}\icom{@tocrmarg}\icom{numwidth}\icom{@dotsep}% +% \icom{linewidth}\icom{mtcindent}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp) +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}} +% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}} +% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}} +% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}} +% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyii){title end} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){continue\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}} +% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){Heading\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}} +% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.} +% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}} +% \end{picture} +% \caption{Layout of a ToC (LoF, LoT) entry}\label{fig+ltoc} +% \or\relax +% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp) +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}} +% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}} +% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}} +% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}} +% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyii){fin du titre} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){suite\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}} +% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){En-tête\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}} +% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.} +% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}} +% \end{picture} +% \caption{Mise en page d'une entrée dans une table des matières (liste des figures, liste des tableaux)}\label{fig+ltoc} +% \fi +% \end{figure} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As these commands are internal (their names contain the ``\texttt{@}'' character) and must have a local effect only +% on the specified kinds of mini-tables, you should alter them indirectly via the \com{mtcsetformat} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; \emph{parameter} is +% one of the \texttt{dotinterval} (for \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (for \com{@pnumwidth}), or +% \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) keywords; so: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}| +% \end{quote} +% will set the right margin to \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} in the lists of tables at the part level. The elasticity +% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) is useful if the table captions are long (it prevents most hyphenations). +% \or\relax +% Puisque ces commandes sont internes (leurs noms contiennent le caractère «~\texttt{@}~») et doivent avoir un +% effet local seulement sur les types spécifiés de mini-tables, vous devriez les modifier indirectement via la commande +% \com{mtcsetformat}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; \emph{paramètre} est +% l'un des mots-clés \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (pour \com{@pnumwidth}) +% ou \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}); ainsi: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}| +% \end{quote} +% établira la marge de droite à~\texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} dans la liste des tableaux au niveau partie. L'élasticité +% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) est utile si les captions des tableaux sont longs (elle évite bien des coupures de mots). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that the \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) parameter should obviously be greater than the +% \texttt{pagenumwidth} parameter (this appears in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}). +% +% If the \texttt{dotinterval} parameter (for \com{@dotsep}) is large enough (try 450, then increase or decrease), +% the dots of leaders will be so much spread out that they will disappear. +% \or\relax +% Notez que le paramètre \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}) devrait manifestement être plus grand que +% le paramètre \texttt{pagenumwidth} (ceci est visible dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}). +% +% Si le paramètre \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}) est suffisamment grand (essayez 450, puis augmentez ou +% diminuez), les points de conduite seront tellement espacés qu'ils disparaîtront. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Horizontal rules}\label{t+horiz} +% \ifBT +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){5-7} +% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \midrule +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{pltrule}&partlots&\com{nopltrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§lofs&\com{noslfrule}§lofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§lots&\com{nosltrule}§lots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \else +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\ +% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \hline +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&partlots&\com{noplfrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§lofs&\com{noslfrule}§lofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§lots&\com{nosltrule}§lots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \fi +% +% \bigskip +% +% \medfigrule +% +% \bigskip +% +% \caption{Page numbers}\label{t+pn} +% {\ttfamily% +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Filets horizontaux}\label{t+horiz} +% \ifBT +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){5-7} +% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \midrule +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{pltrule}&parttocs&\com{nopltrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§tocs&\com{noslfrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§tocs&\com{nosltrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \else +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\ +% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \hline +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§tocs&\com{noslfrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§tocs&\com{nosltrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \fi +% +% \bigskip +% +% \medfigrule +% +% \bigskip +% +% \caption{Numéros de pages}\label{t+pn} +% {\ttfamily% +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Special Features} +% \or\relax +% \section{Dispositifs spéciaux} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Horizontal Rules} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Filets horizontaux} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, most of mini-tables have horizontal rules after their +% titles and at their ends. The exception is the ``parttoc'' in a \class{book}- or +% \class{report}-like document (i.e.,~when \com{chapter} is defined). To activate +% or deactivate these rules, the commands of the table~\vref{t+horiz} are available. +% But you can also use the following command, which is simpler: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; +% if the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected; +% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, la plupart des mini-tables ont des filets horizontaux après leurs titres et à~leurs fins. L'exception +% est la «~parttoc~» dans un document de type analogue à~\class{book} ou \class{report} (c'est-à-dire lorsque +% la commande \com{chapter} est définie). Pour activer ou désactiver ces filets, les commandes du +% tableau~\vref{t+horiz} sont disponibles. Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante, plus simple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; +% si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées; +% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lsneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Page Numbers, Leaders} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Numéros de pages, points de conduite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, the page numbers are listed in each minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Some authors want only the section +% titles (with the section numbers), +% but without page numbers. Hence the obvious declarations of table~\vref{t+pn} are available. +% But you can also use the following command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; +% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, +% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, +% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4] +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, +% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, +% \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% If the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les numéros de page sont cités dans chaque minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Certains auteurs désirent avoir +% seulement les titres des sections (avec les numéros des sections), mais pas les numéros des pages. Donc les +% déclarations évidentes du tableau~\vref{t+pn} sont disponibles. +% Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; +% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, +% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, +% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4] +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, +% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, +% \texttt{-}, et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% Si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In the mini-tables, they are leaders of dots between +% the section titles and the page numbers. The \opt{undotted} +% package option removes these dots. The \optd{dotted} package option +% is the default. See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \or\relax +% Dans les mini-tables, il y~a des points de conduite entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages. +% L'option de paquetage \opt{undotted} supprime ces points de conduite. L'option de paquetage +% \optd{dotted} est le choix par défaut. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Features for parttocs and other mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Dispositifs pour les parttocs et autres mini-tables} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, a parttoc (or a partlof or a +% partlot), in a \class{book}- or \class{report}-class document, is preceded and followed by a +% \com{cleardoublepage} (which acts like \com{clearpage} in a one-side document), and has a page style of +% \texttt{empty}. Since version~\#32, you can modify this +% behaviour by redefining the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, whose meaning +% is often obvious. A feature defined as \com{empty} does nothing. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, une parttoc (ou une partlof ou une partlot), dans un document de classe \class{book} ou +% \class{report}, +% est précédée et suivie par une \com{cleardoublepage} (qui agit comme \com{clearpage} dans un document en recto), +% et a un style de page \texttt{empty}. Depuis la version~\#32, vous pouvez modifier ce comportement en +% redéfinissant les commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, dont la signification est souvent évidente. +% Un dispositif défini comme étant \com{empty} ne fait rien. +% \fi +% \afterpage{\clearpage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[p] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Features for mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features} +% {\small\ttfamily% +% \let\Strut\relax +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}% +% \else +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcX{1}@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\\hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabularx}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[p] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Dispositifs pour les mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features} +% {\small\ttfamily% +% \let\Strut\relax +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}% +% \else +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\\hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabularx}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The command: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{keyword}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% allows you to redefine any of these commands. \emph{mini-table} is one of the mini-table names: +% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{keyword} is one of the followings: \feat{before}, +% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} or \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commands} is either a sequence of commands like \com{clearpage}, +% \com{cleardoublepage}, +% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., either \com{empty} (does nothing). +% \or\relax +% La commande: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{mot-clé}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% vous permet de redéfinir chacune de ces commandes. \emph{mini-table} est l'un des noms de type de mini-table: +% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{mot-clé} est l'un des suivants: \feat{before}, +% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commandes} est soit une séquence de commandes telles que \com{clearpage}, +% \com{cleardoublepage}, \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., soit \com{empty} (ne fait rien). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection[Remark about page styles]{Remark about page styles\,\footnote{This remark is taken and adapted +% from a draft of the second edition of the JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, by +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, where he comments the \upack{minitoc} package.}} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection[Remarque sur les styles de page]{Remarque sur les styles de page\,\footnote{Cette remarque est +% tirée et adaptée d'une version préliminaire de la seconde édition du JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, par +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, où il commente le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle} +% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle} +% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \Virage{}default commands for +% part-level mini-tables page styles are defined as being simply a standard \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}| command, +% because in document classes defining the \com{chapter} command (like \class{book} or \class{report}), +% the part-level mini-tables are on their own pages. +% If the document is printed +% recto-verso, the first page is recto. Usually, these pages are not numbered and have no header and no footer. This +% behaviour is a consequence from the default definitions of the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. If you want an +% other behaviour, you can change these definitions. Note that, by default, only the \emph{first} page of these +% mini-tables are in the \texttt{empty} page style. You can set the style of this first page by using +% \com{thispagestyle} and set the style of the following pages by using \com{pagestyle}, but you must not forget +% to reset the normal style after the mini-table. Look at this short theorical example\,\footnote{This example shows that +% the third argument can be a \emph{sequence} of commands: we set the style of the current page and the style of the +% following pages.}: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{pagestyle}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}| +% \end{verse} +% where we add a \com{cleardoublepage} before each parttoc, then we set the \texttt{empty} page style for +% the first page of the parttocs, +% the \texttt{myheadings} page style for the following pages of the parttocs, +% and set \texttt{headings} page style for the pages after the mini-table, after a +% \com{cleardoublepage}. +% \or\relax +% Les\Virage{} commandes par défaut pour les styles de page des mini-tables au niveau partie +% sont définies comme étant simplement \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|, car +% dans les classes de document définissant la commande \com{chapter} (comme \class{book} ou \class{report}), +% les mini-tables au niveau partie sont sur +% leurs propres pages. Si le document est imprimé recto-verso, la première page est recto. Habituellement, ces pages +% ne sont pas numérotées et n'ont ni en-tête ni bas de page. Ce comportement est une conséquence des définitions par défaut +% des commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. Si vous désirez un comportement différent, vous pouvez changer +% ces définitions. Notez que, par défaut, seule la \emph{première} page de ces mini-tables est composée dans le +% style de page \texttt{empty}. Vous pouvez établir le style de cette première page en utilisant +% \com{thispagestyle} et établir le style des pages suivantes en utilisant \com{pagestyle}, mais vous ne devez +% pas oublier de rétablir le style normal après la mini-table. Regardez ce court exemple théorique\,\footnote{Cet exemple +% montre que le troisième argument peut être une \emph{séquence} de commandes: nous établissons le style de la page +% courante et le style des pages suivantes.}: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{thispagestyle}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}| +% \end{verse} +% où nous ajoutons une commande \com{cleardoublepage} avant chaque parttoc, puis nous établissons le style de page +% \texttt{empty} pour la première page des parttocs, le style de page \texttt{myheadings} pour les pages +% suivantes des parttocs, et établissons le style de page \texttt{headings} pour les pages après la mini-table, +% après une commande \com{cleardoublepage}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The ``Chapter~0'' Problem (solved)}\label{faq.5} +% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter +% number zero (or even a weirder number). +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Le problème du <<~Chapitre~0~>> (résolu)}\label{faq.5} +% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro~un, mais par le chapitre numéro~zéro (ou même +% portant un numéro plus bizarre). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \begin{description} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item[Before version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \or\relax +% \item[Avant la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To make the \upack{minitoc} +% package work with such documents, you must insert the command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}} +% \end{quote} +% before the \com{dominitoc} and analogous commands. \meta{N}~is the number +% of the first chapter. This command \emph{does not} +% modify the numbering of chapters, you must use a +% \begin{verse} +% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}| +% \end{verse} +% command to get a first chapter +% numbered~0. The \com{firstpartis} and +% \com{firstsectionis} commands are similar for parts and sections with +% a non standard numbering. +% \or\relax +% Pour que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec de tels documents, vous devez insérer la commande: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}} +% \end{quote} +% avant la commande \com{dominitoc} et les commandes analogues. \meta{N}~est le numéro du premier chapitre. Cette +% commande \emph{ne modifie pas} la numérotation des chapitres, vous devez utiliser une commande +% \begin{verse} +% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}| +% \end{verse} +% pour obtenir un premier chapitre numéroté~0. Et les deux commandes \com{firstpartis} +% et \com{firstsectionis} sont similaires pour des parties et sections avec une numérotation non standard. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item[Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \or\relax +% \item[Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commands are now obsolete, as this +% problem has been solved (via the ``absolute'' numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files). +% Thus now they just produce harmless warnings. +% \or\relax +% Ces\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commandes sont désormais obsolètes, car ce problème +% a été résolu (via la numérotation «~absolue~» +% des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables). Elles produisent désormais seulement des avertissements bénins. +% \fi +% \end{description} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \subsection{Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index}\label{special.entries} +% \subsection{Special Entries in the TOC}\label{special.entries} +% \or\relax +% ^^A \subsection{Entrées spéciales pour la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la +% ^^A bibliographie et l'index}\label{special.entries} +% \subsection{Entrées spéciales dans la TdM}\label{special.entries} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} you want to add entries in the Table of Contents for +% objects like the Table of Contents itself, the List of +% Figures, the List of Tables, the Bibliography or the Index, +% you should use the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} +% (package available from the CTAN archives). +% \or\relax +% Si\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} vous souhaitez ajouter des entrées dans la table des matières pour des objets tels que la table de +% matières elle-même, la liste des figures, la liste de tableaux, la bibliographie ou l'index, vous devriez +% utiliser le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} (paquetage disponible sur les archives CTAN). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But these entries are considered as chapters (or sections in +% an article class document) when the \suffix{.toc} file is +% scanned to prepare the minitocs (the \com{dominitoc} phase). +% \or\relax +% Mais ces entrées sont considérées comme des chapitres (ou des sections dans un document de classe article) +% lorsque le fichier est analysé pour préparer les minitocs (la phase \com{dominitoc}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note\imess{I0043} that the same problems appear if you use one of the \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or +% \class{scrartcl} \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} with some options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, +% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, and \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}). +% The solutions are the same ones. +% \or\relax +% Notez\imess{I0043} que les mêmes problèmes apparaissent lorsque vous utilisez l'une des classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} +% \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or \class{scrartcl} avec certaines options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, +% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script} et \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}). +% Les solutions sont les mêmes. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So you must add an \com{mtcaddchapter} command, \emph{without +% argument}, after each of the involved commands \com{tableofcontents}, +% \com{listoffigures}, and \com{listoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Donc vous devez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}, \emph{sans argument}, après chacune des commandes +% \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables} mises en jeu. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the bibliography, you should add a \com{adjustmtc} command after the \com{bibliography} command. +% \or\relax +% Pour la bibliographie, vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} après la commande \com{bibliography}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\printglossary} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the glossary, it is a bit more complicated, you should add the +% following commands just after the \com{printglossary} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} this can be done by: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% where the optional argument is the level for the glossary entry in the TOC\@. +% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else +% the \texttt{section} level. +% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is +% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, +% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. +% \or\relax +% Pour le glossaire, c'est un peu plus compliqué; +% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printglossary}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} ceci peut être remplacé par: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée du glossaire dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si +% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. +% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est +% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} de vérifier le résultat et, si +% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the index, it is like for the glossary, you should add the +% following commands just after the \com{printindex} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} this can be done by: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% where the optional argument is the level for the index entry in the TOC\@. +% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else +% the \texttt{section} level. +% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is +% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, +% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. +% \or\relax +% Pour l'index, c'est comme pour le glossaire: +% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printindex}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} ceci peut être remplacé par: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée d'index dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si +% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. +% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est +% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si +% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the nomenclature\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or the \pack{nomentbl} +% package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} calls \pack{nomencl}).}, +% it is like for the glossary, you should add the +% following commands just after the \com{printnomenclature} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{W0096}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{E0040}} this can be done by: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% where the optional argument is the level for the nomenclature entry in the TOC\@. +% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else +% the \texttt{section} level. +% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is +% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, +% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. +% \or\relax +% Pour la nomenclature\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le paquetage +% \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} appelle \pack{nomencl}).}, c'est comme pour le glossaire, +% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printnomenclature}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% Mais ceci peut être remplacé par: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée de la nomenclature dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si +% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. +% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est +% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \virage\emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si +% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Of course, in documents were the TOC, LOF, LOT, bibliography +% and/or glossary (or index or nomenclature) are processed as starred sections, you must +% modify these additions to use section level commands. +% +% \lneed{5} +% And proceed \virage\emph{with extreme care}, tracking in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file the +% insertion of \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files (and siblings). They are +% some examples in the \exam{mtc-add.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}), +% and \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) files distributed with +% \upack{minitoc}. The \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example shows how much that problem is difficult. +% \or\relax +% Bien sûr, les documents dans lesquels la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la +% bibliographie et/ou le glossaire (ou l'index ou la nomenclature) sont traités comme des sections étoilées, +% modifiez ces additions pour utiliser des commandes au niveau section. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Et procédez \virage\emph{avec grand soin}, en suivant dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} l'insertion des +% fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (et +% analogues). Il y~a divers exemples dans les fichiers +% \exam{mtc-add.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}) et +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) +% distribués avec \upack{minitoc}. +% L'exemple \exam{mtc-ads.tex} montre combien ce problème est difficile. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cite} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This option loads the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in +% sectionning commands or captions: if you then run \BibTeX{} using the \texttt{unsrt} (unsorted) style, or a +% similar style, these citations get numbered starting +% from the page in the table of contents where is the parasite citation, not the number they should have in the main text. +% The \pack{notoccite} package prevents this. As \upack{minitoc} prints TOCs, it is subject to the same problem. +% See also \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}. +% \or\relax +% Cette option charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% Elle évite des problèmes avec des commandes \com{cite} situées dans des commandes de sectionnement ou des +% captions: si vous exécutez alors \BibTeX{} en utilisant le style \texttt{unsrt} (non trié), ou un +% style similaire, ces citations seront numérotées en commençant à~la page de la table des matières où se trouve la +% citation parasite, et non avec le numéro qu'elles auraient dans le texte principal. Le paquetage +% \pack{notoccite} évite ceci. Comme \upack{minitoc} imprime des tables des matières, il est sujet au même +% problème. +% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% The \optd{listfiles} package option creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary files into the +% file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\footnote{This package option is now (since version~\#48) the default (list created).}. +% This feature can help you to remove these auxiliary +% files which are no more necessary after the \LaTeX\ run. +% Under Unix or Linux, you can try: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+ +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} crée une liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc dans le +% fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Cette option de paquetage est désormais (depuis la version~\#48) +% le choix par défaut (liste créée).}. +% Ce dispositif peut vous aider à~supprimer ces +% fichiers auxiliaires qui ne sont plus nécessaires après l'exécution de \LaTeX. +% Sous Unix ou Linux, vous pouvez essayer: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+ +% \end{quote} +% \fi +% ^^A \clearpage +% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This package option detects some actions and the loading of some packages and classes +% known as interacting with \upack{minitoc}, +% and also some frequent misuses and errors. This list of interacting packages and classes is, of course, not closed. +% If a known package is loaded, +% this option writes some hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and +% emits a warning. The hints written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file may suggest you to consult the +% present document or +% the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file. \virage\emph{Your advice about this option will be welcome.} +% This option is activated by default, but you can inhibit it via the \opt{nohints} option. +% The following (potential) problems are currently detected: +% \or\relax +% Cette option du paquetage détecte certaines actions et le chargement de certains paquetages et classes connus pour +% interagir avec \upack{minitoc}, ainsi que certaines mauvaises utilisations et erreurs fréquentes. La liste des +% paquetages et classes qui interagissent n'est évidemment pas close. Si un tel paquetage (ou classe) est chargé, +% cette option écrit quelques indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% et émet un avertissement. Les +% indications écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} peuvent vous suggérer de consulter +% le présent document ou le +% fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}. \virage\emph{Votre avis sur cette option sera le bienvenu.} Cette +% option est activée par défaut, mais vous pouvez l'inhiber via l'option \opt{nohints}. +% Les problèmes (potentiels) suivants sont actuellement détectés: +% \fi +% \begin{itemize} +% \lneed{11} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Alteration of some of the following commands\,\footnote{The commands containing the ``\texttt{@}'' character +% in their names are internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of a package or of a class; they are sometimes altered by +% another packages; reconsider then the loading order of the packages.}: +% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter}, +% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect}, and \com{@ssect}. +% Note that the \pack{hyperref} (see section~\vref{faq.17}) package alters these commands at +% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, hence this problem might be reported if you use this package, +% but these alterations seem harmless. Note that the \pack{hyperref} must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% L'altération de certaines des commandes suivantes\,\footnote{Les commandes contenant le caractère <<~\texttt{@}~>> +% dans leurs noms sont des commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; elles sont parfois +% altérées par d'autres paquetages; reconsidérez l'ordre de chargement des paquetages.}: +% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter}, +% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect} et \com{@ssect}. +% Mais le paquetage \pack{hyperref} (voir la section~\vref{faq.17}) altère ces commandes lors de +% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, donc ce problème pourrait être signalé si vous utilisez ce paquetage, mais +% ces altérations semblent bénignes. Notez que le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Presence\virage{} of the following packages or classes, which need some precautions: +% \class{amsbook} (class), +% \class{memoir} (class), +% \pack{appendix}, +% \pack{placeins} (beware to its options and its release date (2005/04/18 at least)), +% \class{scrbook} (class), +% \class{scrreprt} (class), +% \class{scrartcl} (class), +% \pack{tocbibind}, and +% \pack{tocloft}. +% \or\relax +% Présence\virage{} des paquetages et classes suivants, qui demandent certaines précautions: +% \class{amsbook} (classe), +% \pack{appendix}, +% \pack{placeins} (attention à~ses options et à~sa date (au moins 2005/04/18)), +% \class{scrbook} (classe), +% \class{scrreprt} (classe), +% \class{scrartcl} (classe), +% \pack{tocbibind} et +% \pack{tocloft}. +% \fi +% \lneed{7} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Presence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}} +% of the following packages or classes, which, unfortunately, are \emph{incompatible} +% with the \upack{minitoc} package: +% \class{amsart} (class), +% \class{amsproc} (class), +% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{This package has its own system for minitocs.}, \class{jura} (class), +% \pack{titlesec}, and +% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}The \upack{titlesec} package redefines +% the sectionning commands in a way +% completely alien to the standard \LaTeX\ way; hence \upack{minitoc} and \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} are +% fundamentaly \emph{incompatible}, and it is very sad.}. +% \or\relax +% Présence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}} +% des paquetages ou classes suivants, qui, malheureusement, sont \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}: +% \class{amsart} (classe), +% \class{amsproc} (classe), +% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage a son propre système de minitocs.}, \class{jura} (classe), +% \pack{titlesec} et +% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}Le paquetage \upack{titlesec} redéfinit les +% commandes de sectionnement d'une manière complètement étrangère à~la manière standard de \LaTeX; +% donc \upack{minitoc} et \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} sont fondamentalement incompatibles, +% et ceci est fort regrettable.}. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~, +% usage of \com{sectlot} without calling \com{dosectlot}; +% or the reverse. +% \or\relax +% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~, +% utilisation de \com{sectlot} sans appeler \com{dosectlot}; +% ou l'inverse. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, of \com{sectlot} +% without calling \fkcom{listoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, de +% \com{sectlot} sans appeler \fkcom{listoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{8} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Usage of \com{sectlof} and/or \com{sectlot} without +% using the \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option of \upack{minitoc} +% (or the \pack{placeins} package without +% its \optp{section}{placeins} option). +% \or\relax +% Utilisation de \com{sectlof} et/ou \com{sectlot} sans utiliser l'option de paquetage +% \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} de \upack{minitoc} (ou le paquetage \pack{placeins} +% sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} +% you are using short extensions (because of your operating system or the \opt{shortext} +% package option, see section~\vref{MS-DOS}) and go beyond the limit of 99~parts, chapters or sections, +% the \optd{hints} package option displays a warning. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} +% vous utilisez des suffixes courts (à~cause de votre système d'exploitation ou de l'option de paquetage +% \opt{shortext}, voyez à~la section~\vref{MS-DOS}) et que vous allez au-delà de la +% limite de 99~parties, chapitres ou sections, +% l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} signale un avertissement. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.abstract} +% If the \pack{abstract}\imess{I0040} package~\cite{abstract} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its +% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents, +% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section. +% This is detected and you should add a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| +% command after your \env{abstract} environment. +% \or\relax\label{h.abstract} +% Si le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé +% avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou équivalente) est ajoutée +% à~la table des matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe de document définit \com{chapter}, sinon +% comme une section étoilée. Ceci est détecté et vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou +% \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sectsty} +% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. The interaction has been pointed out +% by \name{Bil}{Kleb}. +% \or\relax\label{h.sectsty} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. L'interaction a été signalée par +% \name{Bil}{Kleb}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.varsects} +% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} +% (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.varsects} +% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} +% (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.fncychap} +% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} +% (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.fncychap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} +% (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.hangcaption} +% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} +% (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.hangcaption} +% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} +% (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.quotchap} +% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} +% (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.quotchap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} +% (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.romannum} +% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} +% (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.romannum} +% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} +% (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sfheaders} +% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} +% (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.sfheaders} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} +% (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.alnumsec} +% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} +% (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.alnumsec} +% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} +% (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.captcont} +% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} +% (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.captcont} +% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} +% (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \item +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption} +% If one of the \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; +% now use the \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (written by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (written by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption} +% Si l'un des +% paquetages \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez +% maintenant le paquetage \upack{caption}.}, (tous deux écrits par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{4} +% \bigskip +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat} +% If one of the\imess{I0053} \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, or \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages +% is used, you must remember that \emph{you can not use} the \upack{minitoc} facilities for preparing +% mini-tables of floats of the new defined types. +% \or\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat} +% Si\imess{I0053} l'un des paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} ou \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} +% est utilisé, vous devez vous souvenir que \emph{vous ne pouvez pas utiliser} les facilités +% de \upack{minitoc} pour préparer des mini-tables de flottants des types nouvellement définis. +% \fi +% \bigskip +% \lneed{4} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{I0006} you try to insert empty mini-tables, the \optd{hints} option gives a global warning (except if you +% used also the \opt{nocheckfiles} option, see section~\vref{s+placing}). +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{I0006} vous essayez d'insérer des mini-tables vides, l'option \optd{hints} vous donne un avertissement +% global (sauf si vous avez aussi utilisé l'option \opt{nocheckfiles}, voyez la +% section~\vref{s+placing}). +% \fi +% \bigskip +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you use\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} one of the obsolete commands +% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris}, or \com{firstsectionis}), +% a warning is issued for each use, of course, but also a global hint as reminder. +% \or\relax +% Si vous utilisez\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} l'une des commandes obsolètes +% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} ou +% \com{firstsectionis}), un avertissement est émis pour chaque utilisation, bien sûr, mais aussi une +% indication (\emph{hint}) globale comme rappel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{2} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you invoke a same preparation command more than once, an informative hint is issued for each spurious +% invocation. +% \or\relax +% Si vous invoquez une même commande de préparation plus d'une fois, un \emph{hint} informatif est émis pour +% chaque invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \end{itemize} +% ^^A +% ^^A \clearpage +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Usage with MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Under\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS (and other PC oriented old operating systems), +% the filename extensions are limited to 3 characters. +% The \upack{minitoc} package determines dynamically the type of +% extensions available and will use it. +% All other modifications will be done automatically. +% The \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} +% extensions will become \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter +% number. +% The extensions \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} become +% \suffix{.F}\meta{N} and \suffix{.T}\meta{N}. +% The \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} +% extensions become \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute part number. +% The extensions \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} become +% \suffix{.G}\meta{N} and \suffix{.U}\meta{N}. +% The \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} +% extensions become \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute section +% number. +% The extensions \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} become +% \suffix{.H}\meta{N} and \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. All these extensions are listed in table~\vref{t+suffixes}. +% Of course, this implies a limit of 99~chapters in a +% document, but do you really need so many chapters (or sections in an +% article)? The limit of 99~parts does not seem too serious for +% most documents, but for sections, it could be tragical. +% The \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+hints}) will report such situations. +% See also section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \begin{table}[th] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Extensions of the auxiliary files}\label{t+suffixes} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{long extensions}&\textbf{short extensions}\\ +% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\ +% \midrule +% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\ +% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\ +% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\ +% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\ +% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% Sous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS +% (et autres vieux systèmes d'exploitation pour PC), les suffixes des noms de fichiers sont +% limités à~3~caractères. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} détermine dynamiquement le type de suffixes disponible et +% l'utilisera. Toutes les autres modifications seront faites automatiquement. Les suffixes \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} deviendront +% \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de chapitre. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.F}\meta{N} et \suffix{.T}\meta{N}. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.G}\meta{N} et \suffix{.U}\meta{N}. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.H}\meta{N} et \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. +% Tous ces suffixes sont listés dans le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes}. +% Bien sûr, ceci implique une limite de 99~chapitres dans un document, mais avez-vous vraiment besoin d'autant de +% chapitres (ou de sections dans un article)? La limite de 99~parties ne semble pas trop grave pour la plupart des +% documents, mais pour les sections, ceci pourrait être tragique. L'option \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+hints}) +% signalera de telles situations. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \begin{table}[th] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Suffixes des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{t+suffixes} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{suffixes longs}&\textbf{suffixes courts}\\ +% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\ +% \midrule +% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\ +% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\ +% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\ +% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\ +% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Why several \LaTeX{} runs are required?} +% The mini-tables, at part, chapter and section levels, +% are using some space on the first pages on each chapter, part or section, +% thus the page numbers are altered. After the first \LaTeX\ run, the +% mini-tables and lists, partial tables and lists +% and section-level tables and lists +% will be empty (in fact skipped since version \#35); +% after the second run, they appear (if not empty), +% but because they modify the page numbering, page numbers +% are wrong; after the third \LaTeX\ run, the mini, part- and section-level +% tables and lists should be correct (see figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}). +% \or\relax +% \section{Pourquoi plusieurs exécutions de \LaTeX\ sont-elles nécessaires?} +% Les mini-tables, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section, occupent un certain espace sur les premières pages de +% chaque partie, chapitre ou section, donc la numérotation des pages est altérée. Après la première exécution de +% \LaTeX, les mini-tables (aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section) seront vides (et en fait sautées depuis la +% version~\#35); après la deuxième exécution, elles apparaissent (lorsqu'elles ne sont pas vides), mais puisqu'elles +% modifient la numérotation des pages, les numéros des pages y~sont faux; après la troisième exécution, les +% mini-tables devraient être correctes (voir la figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le paquetage \upack{mtcoff} }\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If a document has been prepared with the \upack{minitoc} package, +% it contains many \upack{minitoc} specific commands, most of them being +% \com{dominitoc}, +% \com{faketableofcontents}, and \com{minitoc} commands (and their +% equivalents for lists of figures and tables). +% If you want to typeset +% this document without any mini-table, you have just to replace the +% \upack{minitoc} package by the \pack{mtcoff} package (without option), and all these +% commands will be ignored, eventually writing warning messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% At least two \LaTeX\ runs will be necessary to get a correct page numbering and cross references. +% It also sanitizes the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, +% \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files from \upack{minitoc} specific +% commands which are now spurious. +% \or\relax +% Si un document a été préparé avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il contient de nombreuses commandes +% spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}, dont la plupart sont des commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{faketableofcontents} et +% \com{minitoc} (et leurs équivalentes pour les listes de figures et de tableaux). +% Si vous souhaitez composer ce document sans aucune mini-table, il vous suffit de remplacer le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (sans option), et toutes ces commandes seront ignorées, en +% écrivant éventuellement des messages d'avertissement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% Au moins deux exécutions +% de \LaTeX\ seront nécessaires pour avoir une numérotation des pages et des références croisées correctes. +% Ceci nettoie aussi les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} en y~éliminant les +% commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc} devenues superflues. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \cleardoublepage +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{FAQ} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Questions fréquemment posées}\label{FAQ} +% \fi +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \minitoc +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \mtcskip +% ^^A \lsneed{5} +% \lneed{6} +% ^^A \mtcskip +% \minilof +% \mtcskip +% \minilot +% +% \addtocounter{section}{-1} ^^A % Trick to get a section numbered zero +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction} +% \or\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about +% the \upack{minitoc.sty} package. If the version has a number less than~61, please +% upgrade to version~\#61. This list is also given in the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file, +% in pure text form. The numbering of this list is done by date of the first occurrence of the question. +% +% If a problem arises, it is often wise to: a)~use the \optd{hints} option (see section~\vref{s+hints}), +% which is activated by default, and b)~read the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, which may contain pertinent +% messages. If you do not find a solution, ask a question on an adequate news group, like \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} +% (in french) or \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english) preferably, groups which I try to follow, or send me a mail +% in last ressort (please join a minimal but complete example~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{See also: +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} +% and \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices.} (or~``MCE'') +% reproducing the problem; this example should use the \opt{hints} option). +% \or\relax +% Voici une liste de problèmes et de questions fréquemment posées («~foire aux questions~») à~propos du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. Si votre version a un numéro plus petit que~61, vous êtes priés de faire une mise à~jour +% à~la version~\#61. Cette liste est aussi donnée dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}, sous +% forme de texte pur (et en anglais). La numérotation de cette liste est faite selon la date de la première occurrence +% de la question. +% +% Si un problème survient, il est souvent avisé: a)~d'utiliser l'option \optd{hints} (voir la +% section~\vref{s+hints}), qui est activée par défaut, et b)~de lire le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, qui +% peut contenir des messages pertinents. Si vous ne trouvez pas de solution, posez une question sur un groupe de +% discussion adéquat, tel que \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français), ou \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais) de préférence, +% que j'essaye de suivre, ou envoyez moi un courrier en dernier recours (prière de joindre un exemple complet +% minimal~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{Voir aussi: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} +% et \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils.} (ou «~ECM~»\/) reproduisant +% le problème; cet exemple devrait utiliser l'option \opt{hints}). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (1) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Avoiding a page break near the rules before and after a mini-table} +% \or\relax +% \section{Éviter une coupure de page près des filets avant et après une mini-table} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This problem seemed solved since version~\#8, but version~\#12 added better fixes. +% You may have to make some final tuning with \com{enlargethispage}. +% See the \LaTeX\ manual~\cite{latex-manual}. +% The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} may also be useful. +% \or\relax +% Ce problème semblait résolu depuis la version~\#8, mais la version~\#12 a ajouté de meilleures corrections. Vous +% pouvez devoir faire quelques ajustements ultimes avec \com{enlargethispage}. Voir le manuel +% \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual}. Il peut aussi être utile d'utiliser le paquetage +% \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (2) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Implementing others layouts for a mini-table} +% \or\relax +% \section{Implanter d'autres mises en page pour une mini-table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Suggestions are welcome, but look at the section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% There are yet some examples in chapter~\vref{c+exdocs}, for some layouts, like mini-tables on two or three columns. +% \or\relax +% Les suggestions sont les bienvenues, mais voyez la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% Il y~a quelques exemples dans le chapitre~\vref{c+exdocs}, pour quelques mises en page, comme des mini-tables +% sur deux ou trois colonnes. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (3) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{A ``\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}'' command in a contents line makes an error} +% \or\relax +% \section{Une commande «~\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}~» dans une entrée de contenu provoque une erreur} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macro}{\linebreak} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Use \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. The \verb|\\| command should be used only in tabular material (\env{tabular} +% environment and similar, or in the +% \env{tabbing} environment) and in math arrays and equations, or in the \env{quote}-like environments. +% \or\relax +% Utilisez \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. La commande \verb|\\| ne devrait être utilisée que dans du matériel +% de tableau (environnement \env{tabular} ou similaire, ou dans l'environnement \env{tabbing}) et dans les +% tableaux (\emph{arrays}) et équations mathématiques, ou dans des environnements similaires à~\env{quote}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (4) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Reordering chapters makes havoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{Changer l'ordre des chapitres crée le chaos} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{If you reorder chapters, havoc follows\ldots\ mini-tables +% going in wrong chapters.} +% \or\relax +% \emph{Si vous changez l'ordre des chapitres, le chaos en découle,\ldots\ +% avec les mini-tables allant dans les mauvais chapitres.} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The best way seems to make one run with the \pack{mtcoff} +% package replacing the \upack{minitoc} package, then restore +% the \upack{minitoc} package and re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times +% (yes, it is time consuming\ldots). See figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}\footnote{I~used the \pack{pict2e} +% package~\cite{pict2e}, by \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} and \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, to prepare this figure.}. +% Running with the \pack{mtcoff} package ensures that the standard auxiliary files +% are cleared from ``spurious'' commands introduced by \upack{minitoc}. +% A more radical solution is to delete the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, +% \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files relative to the document, then +% re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times. +% \or\relax +% La meilleure méthode semble d'effectuer une exécution avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} remplaçant +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, puis de rétablir le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au +% moins trois fois (oui, cela prend du temps\ldots). Voir la figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le +% paquetage \pack{pict2e}~\cite{pict2e}, de \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} +% et \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, +% pour préparer cette figure.}. +% Exécuter avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} +% garantit que les fichiers auxiliaires standard seront purgés des commandes «~superflues~» introduites par +% \upack{minitoc}. Une solution plus radicale est de détruire les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} +% et \suffix{.lot} relatifs au document, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au moins trois fois. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{figure}[tp] +% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize +% \def\NUM{\meta{N}} +% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{% +% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0) +% \thicklines +% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}} +% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}} +% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}} +% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}} +% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}} +% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}} +% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}} +% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}} +% \end{picture}} +% \egroup +% \begin{flushleft} +% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt +% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of +% contents, which is likely inaccurate. +% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are likely inaccurate. +% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of contents, which is accurate. +% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are accurate. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{minipage} +% \end{flushleft} +% \caption{Three compilations for \upack{minitoc}}\label{fig+mtc+3comp} +% \end{figure} +% \or\relax +% \begin{figure}[tp] +% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize +% \def\NUM{\meta{N}} +% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{% +% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0) +% \thicklines +% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}} +% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}} +% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}} +% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}} +% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}} +% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}} +% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}} +% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}} +% \end{picture}} +% \egroup +% \begin{flushleft} +% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt +% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement inexacte. +% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement inexactes. +% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement exacte. +% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement exactes. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{minipage} +% \end{flushleft} +% \caption{Trois compilations pour \upack{minitoc}}\label{fig+mtc+3comp} +% \end{figure} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (5) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Extensions for the names of auxiliary files}\label{.8+3} +% \or\relax +% \section{Suffixes pour les noms des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{.8+3} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{This package creates auxiliary files with extensions like \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. +% Some operating systems allow only 3~characters extensions. What to do?}\par +% \lneed{3} +% No\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification is needed: all became automatic since +% version \#28! If you insist to use 3~characters extensions, +% even on operating systems allowing more, just use the package +% option \opt{shortext}. Then you will get first the +% autoconfiguration messages, then a message saying that you +% will use short extensions. But then be careful to not have more +% than 99~mini-tables of the same kind (even empty)! +% \or\relax +% \emph{Ce paquetage crée des fichiers auxiliaires ayant des suffixes tels que \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. Certains +% systèmes d'exploitation ne permettent que des suffixes limités à~3~caractères. Que faire?}\par +% \lneed{3} +% Aucune\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification n'est nécessaire: +% tout est devenu automatique depuis la version \#28! Si vous voulez vraiment +% utiliser des suffixes de 3~caractères, utilisez simplement l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}. +% Alors vous recevrez d'abord les messages d'autoconfiguration, puis un message disant que vous allez +% utiliser des suffixes courts. +% Mais alors faites attention à~ne pas avoir plus 99~mini-tables du même type (même vides)! +% \fi +% +% ^^A (6) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Playing with the chapter number} +% \or\relax +% \section{Jouer avec le numéro de chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{Do not cheat}\virage{} with the ``\texttt{chapter}'' counter, i.e.,~do not write ugly things like: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}| +% \end{verse} +% The mechanism would break. It is better to add \com{chapter} commands, +% to create empty (but numbered in a legal way) chapters. +% Since version~\#10, the \upack{minitoc} package works with appendices. +% Version \#19 allows to begin with a chapter other that number~1. +% ^^A And look at~``Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index'', section~\vref{special.entries}. +% And look at~``Special Entries in the TOC'', section~\vref{special.entries}. +% +% Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08), the numbering of chapters and that of minitocs are independent, so that problem just +% vanished. +% +% The same remarks apply to the \texttt{part} and \texttt{section} counters. +% \or\relax +% \emph{Ne trichez pas}\virage{} avec le compteur «~\texttt{chapter}~», donc n'écrivez pas des horreurs telles que: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}| +% \end{verse} +% Ceci casserait la mécanique du paquetage. Il vaut mieux ajouter des commandes \com{chapter}, afin de +% créer des chapitres vides (mais numérotés d'une manière légale). Depuis la version~\#10, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% fonctionne avec les appendices. +% La version \#19 vous permet de commencer par un chapitre numéroté autrement que un. +% Et regardez «~Entrées spéciales dans la TdM~», section~\vref{special.entries}. +% +% Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08), la numérotation des chapitres et celle des minitocs sont indépendantes, +% donc ce problème a disparu. +% +% Les mêmes remarques s'appliquent aux compteurs \texttt{part} et \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (7) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Supported document classes}\label{s+supported+classes} +% \or\relax +% \section{Classes de document supportées}\label{s+supported+classes} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{W0017} \upack{minitoc} package is restricted to document classes which define +% chapters in the standard way, like ``\class{book}'' and ``\class{report}'', +% or sections in the standard way, like ``\class{article}''~\cite{classes}. +% There are ``parttocs'' if the document class defines the \com{part} command. +% Note that classes like ``\class{letter}''~\cite{letter}, which have not the classical sectionning structure, cannot be +% supported. Classes using sectionning commands with other names are not supported\,\footnote{This would be +% very difficult: any user can create new sectionning commands (often with the help from some packages) with +% standard or new names; this is only limited by the imagination. The \upack{minitoc} package relies on the +% names of the standard sectionning commands and on the syntax of these commands.}. +% See also section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{W0017} paquetage \upack{minitoc} est restreint aux classes de document qui définissent les chapitres +% de la manière standard, comme «~\class{book}~» et «~\class{report}~», ou les sections de la manière standard, +% comme «~\class{article}~»~\cite{classes}. Il y~a des «~parttocs~» si la classe de document définit +% la commande \com{part}. Notez que des classes telles que «~\class{letter}~»~\cite{letter}, +% qui n'ont pas la structure de sectionnement classique, ne +% peuvent pas être supportées. Les classes utilisant des commandes de sectionnement portant d'autres noms ne sont +% pas supportées\,\footnote{Ce serait très difficile: tout utilisateur peut créer de nouvelles commandes de +% sectionnement (souvent à~l'aide de certains paquetages) portant des noms standard ou nouveaux; ceci n'est limité +% que par l'imagination. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} s'appuie sur les noms des commandes de sectionnement standard +% et sur la syntaxe de ces commandes.}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (8) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX{} versions} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compatibilité avec les versions de \LaTeX{}} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{W0021} users have failed to make \upack{minitoc} to work. They got a message like: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.| +% \verb|Trying to continue...| +% \end{verse} +% or:\imess{W0022} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| +% \end{verse} +% The \com{reset@font} command has been added to \xfile{latex.tex} +% on September~29th, 1991 and the \com{@inputcheck} command +% on March~18th, 1992 and this version of \xfile{latex.tex} has been +% released on March~25th, 1992. If you get this message, you +% have an old version of \xfile{latex.tex}. Get a recent one from +% the archives (or a recent distribution) +% and regenerate a \xfile{latex.fmt} format via \texttt{initex} (or your configuration tool). +% \or\relax +% Certains\imess{W0021} utilisateurs ne sont pas parvenus à~faire fonctionner \upack{minitoc}. +% Ils ont reçu un message tel que: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.| +% \verb|Trying to continue...| +% \end{verse} +% ou:\imess{W0022} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| +% \end{verse} +% La commande \com{reset@font} a été ajoutée à~\xfile{latex.tex} le 29~septembre 1991, et la commande +% \com{@inputcheck} le 18~mars 1992, et cette version de \xfile{latex.tex} a été distribuée le 25~mars 1992. Si +% vous obtenez un tel message, vous avez une vieille version de \xfile{latex.tex}. Obtenez une version récente +% depuis les archives (ou une distribution récente) +% et régénérez un format \xfile{latex.fmt} via \texttt{initex} (ou votre outil de configuration). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (9) +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Other mini-tables}\label{faq.9} +% \or\relax +% \section{Autres mini-tables}\label{faq.9} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some demanding users want to have minilof, minilot and +% minibbl (mini-bibliographies per part, chapter or section). First, ``minibbl'' is another problem, strongly +% related to the \BibTeX's dealing with \suffix{.aux} files. Look +% at the \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits}, +% \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic}, and \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib} packages. +% Version~\#13 has implemented basic minilofs and minilots. +% Minibbls are not the aim of this package\footnote{See {\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}. +% \or\relax +% Certains utilisateurs exigeants désirent avoir des minilofs, minilots et minibbls. Tout d'abord, les «~minibbls~» +% (mini-bibliographies par partie, chapitre ou section) sont un autre problème, +% fortement lié au traitement par \BibTeX\ des fichiers \suffix{.aux}. +% Regardez les paquetages \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits}, +% \pack{multibib}~\cite{bibunits}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic} et \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib}. +% La version~\#13 a implanté les minilofs et minilots basiques. Les minibbls ne sont pas l'objet de ce +% paquetage{\froff\,\footnote{Voir~: \froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (10) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Why so many auxiliary files?}\label{faq.10} +% \or\relax +% \section{Pourquoi autant de fichiers auxiliaires?}\label{faq.10} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This package creates a lot of auxiliary files and some users +% have argued that it is too many. A deep redesign would be +% necessary to avoid that. Using only one big auxiliary file +% (or one for all minitocs, one for all minilofs, \ldots) +% would make the reading of such file very slow, as it would +% be read for each \ucom{miniXXX} macro! +% Moreover, this would make the \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package +% option impractical to implement. +% Note that the many files \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., may be +% deleted after the \LaTeX{} run. They are rebuilt by the preparation commands +% (like \com{dominitoc} and siblings). +% But, since version \#35, +% \upack{minitoc} is able to detect and skip empty \uxfile{*.mtc*} files +% (and siblings) to avoid ugly titles with just two thin rules. +% It would not be easy to do with only one big auxiliary file. +% Since version \#44, the \optd{listfiles} package option is available to create a list of these auxiliary +% files; see section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \or\relax +% Ce paquetage crée des tas de fichiers auxiliaires et certains utilisateurs ont argué qu'il y en avait trop. +% Une réorganisation profonde serait nécessaire pour éviter ce grand nombre. Utiliser un seul grand fichier +% auxiliaire (ou un pour toutes les minitocs, un pour toutes les minilofs, etc.) rendrait la lecture de ce +% fichier très lente, car il devrait être lu pour chaque commande \ucom{miniXXX}! De plus, ceci +% rendrait l'implantation de l'option \optd{checkfiles} (section~\vref{s+placing}) pratiquement impossible. +% Notez que les nombreux fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., peuvent être détruits après l'exécution de \LaTeX. +% Ils sont reconstruits par les commandes de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc} et ses analogues). +% Mais, depuis la version \#35, \upack{minitoc} est capable de détecter et sauter les fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*} (et +% analogues) vides pour éviter des titres isolés avec seulement deux filets fins. +% Tout ceci ne serait pas facile à~faire avec un seul gros fichier auxiliaire. +% Depuis la version \#44, l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est disponible pour créer une liste de ces +% fichiers auxiliaires; voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{5} +% These files contain the mini-tables extracted from the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files. +% They are no more useful after the \LaTeX\ run. If you run \LaTeX\ via a script or a ``makefile'', it may be +% useful to add to it a cleaning feature (which should be optional, to allow debugging). The +% table~\vref{t+suffixes} gives the list of the extensions for these files (note that a \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} +% auxiliary file is also created as a scratch file). +% +% As an example, you can look at the \tool{rubber} tool~\cite{rubber} +% (written in Python) provided by \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}: +% \begin{quote} +% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% Ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables extraites des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. +% Ils ne sont plus utiles après l'exécution de \LaTeX. Si vous exécutez \LaTeX\ au moyen d'un script ou +% d'un «~makefile~», il peut être utile de lui ajouter un dispositif de nettoyage (qui devrait être optionnel, +% pour permettre la mise au point). Le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} donne la liste des suffixes pour ces fichiers +% (notez qu'un fichier auxiliaire \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi créé comme fichier de travail). +% +% Comme exemple, vous pouvez regarder l'outil \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} +% (écrit en Python) fourni par \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}: +% {\froff\begin{quote} +% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} +% \end{quote}} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (11) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-tables at levels other than chapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-tables à~des niveaux autres que le chapitre} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here also, some redesign was needed. From version~\#15, there are parttocs, partlofs and +% partlots for the part level in \class{book}\texttt{\BAR}\class{report}-like and \class{article}-like documents, +% secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots for the section level in \class{article}-like +% documents. Note that you can not have minitocs features at chapter +% and section level in the same document, because doing so would make +% an almost unreadable monster. The user must choose the main class of +% the document according to the size of it (e.g.,~do not write an article +% of more than 100~sections: this is a report, or even a book!). +% +% \begin{center}\ttfamily +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{center} +% \or\relax +% Ici aussi, une reconstruction a été nécessaire. Depuis la version~\#15, il y a des parttocs, partlofs et partlots +% pour le niveau partie dans les documents dont la classe est similaire +% à~\class{book}, \class{report} ou \class{article}, +% des secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots pour le niveau section dans les documents dont la classe est similaire +% à~\class{article}. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas avoir les dispositifs de \upack{minitoc} aux niveaux chapitre et +% section dans le même document, car cela produirait un monstre presque illisible. L'utilisateur doit choisir la classe de +% base du document selon la taille de celui-ci (par exemple, ne pas écrire un article de plus de 100~sections: c'est +% un rapport, ou même un livre!). +% \begin{center}\ttfamily +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{center} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (12) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Incompatibility with \LaTeX2.09} +% \or\relax +% \section{Incompatibilité avec \LaTeX2.09} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The more recent version of \LaTeXe{} adds \com{protect} before +% \com{contentsline} in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lof} +% files. The version~\#17 of \upack{minitoc} attempts to be compatible with \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX2.09. +% This will be the \emph{last} +% version usable with \LaTeX2.09. Versions~\#18 and later are \LaTeXe{} specific, and no more compatible +% with \LaTeX2.09, which is completely obsolete. +% \or\relax +% La version la plus récente de \LaTeXe{} ajoute \com{protect} avant \com{contentsline} dans +% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lof}. La version~\#17 de \upack{minitoc} tente d'être compatible +% avec \LaTeXe{} et \LaTeX2.09. Ce sera la \emph{dernière} version utilisable avec \LaTeX2.09. Les versions~\#18 et +% ultérieures sont spécifiques de \LaTeXe, et ne sont plus compatibles avec \LaTeX2.09, qui est totalement obsolète. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (13) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Documents resetting the chapter number at each part} +% \or\relax +% \section{Documents ré-initialisant le numéro de chapitre pour chaque partie} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} works with document classes resetting +% chapter (or section) number at each part (or chapter). This is possible because the auxiliary files for the +% mini-tables have now an \emph{absolute} number. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec les classes de document qui ré-initialisent le numéro de +% chapitre (ou de section) pour chaque partie (ou chapitre). Ceci est possible car les fichiers auxiliaires pour les +% mini-tables ont désormais un numéro \emph{absolu}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (14) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The mini-tables have too much spaced lines} +% From version~\#29, you can have tight mini-tables with the \opt{tight} option, and +% with the \opt{k-tight} option for the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (since version~\#43). +% \or\relax +% \section{Les mini-tables ont leurs lignes trop espacées} +% Depuis la version~\#29, vous pouvez avoir des mini-tables plus resserrées avec l'option \opt{tight}, +% avec l'option \opt{k-tight} pour les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (depuis la version~\#43). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (15) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The secttocs are wrong} +% Secttocs did not work: corrected (version~\#38). +% \or\relax +% \section{Les secttocs sont fausses} +% Les secttocs ne fonctionnent pas: corrigé (version~\#38). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (16) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Removing the lines of dots} +% The lines of dots (leaders) between section titles and page numbers are removed by the \opt{undotted} +% option (\#29). See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Retirer les points de conduite} +% Les lignes de points (points de conduite) entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages sont retirés par +% l'option \opt{undotted} (\#29). Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (17) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Using the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version~\#31, \upack{minitoc} works correctly with the powerful \pack{hyperref} +% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% using the work of \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and should no more be used. +% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.} +% If you add the loading of the \pack{hyperref} package to a document yet using \upack{minitoc}, +% you will get error message about spurious closing braces. Just let finish the \LaTeX\ run, +% then re-\LaTeX\ the document. There will be no problem if you remove the loading of +% \pack{hyperref} and add it again: the problem occurs only when upgrading from +% \upack{minitoc}~\#30 to \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) with a document already processed and adding +% \pack{hyperref} at the same time! It seems better to process the document with \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) +% without \pack{hyperref}, then with \pack{hyperref}, because some internal commands written +% into the auxiliary files have been modified. If used, the \pack{hyperref} package must be loaded \emph{before} +% \upack{minitoc}. Note that the documents \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} show (not so) basic examples +% of the use of the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne enfin correctement avec le puissant paquetage +% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, grâce à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, qui a utilisé les travaux de +% \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \emph{Donc\Virage{} le paquetage \pack{minitoc-hyper}~\cite{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être +% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.} +% Si vous ajoutez le chargement du paquetage \pack{hyperref} à~un +% document utilisant déjà \upack{minitoc}, vous recevrez un message d'erreur concernant des accolades fermantes en +% trop. Il suffit de laisser se terminer l'exécution de \LaTeX, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ sur le document. Il n'y +% aura aucun problème si vous enlevez le chargement de \pack{hyperref} puis l'ajoutez de nouveau; ce problème ne +% se produit que lorsque vous passez de \upack{minitoc} version~\#30 à~\upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) +% avec un document déjà traité et en ajoutant \pack{hyperref} en même temps! Il semble préférable de traiter le +% document avec \upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) sans \pack{hyperref}, puis avec \pack{hyperref}, +% parce que certaines commandes internes écrites dans les fichiers auxiliaires ont été modifiées. S'il est utilisé, +% le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}. Notez que les documents +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} montrent des exemples (qui ne sont pas vraiment) basiques de +% l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (18) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Problem while upgrading \upack{minitoc}} +% If upgrading from version~\#30 or lower to +% version~\#31 or higher, you should delete the \suffix{.aux}, +% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} files of the document, +% else the first \LaTeX{} run with version~\#31 or higher will +% produce a lot of errors (the next run should be ok). See also the section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Problème lors de la mise à~jour de \upack{minitoc}} +% Lors de la mise à~jour de la version~\#30 ou inférieure vers la version~\#31 ou supérieure, vous devriez détruire +% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} du document, sinon la première exécution de \LaTeX{} avec +% la version~\#31 ou supérieure produira beaucoup d'erreurs (l'exécution suivante devrait être correcte). Voir aussi +% la section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (19) +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{A local TOC for the set of appendices}\label{faq.19}% +% \or\relax +% \section{Une TdM locale pour l'ensemble des appendices}\label{faq.19}% +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\appendix} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some users need a table of contents for the appendices, +% but without putting the entries of it into the main table of +% contents. The solution is to put the appendices in a \com{part} +% subdivision of the document and ask for a table of contents at +% the \com{part} level: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % after \begin{document}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \com{appendix}\\ +% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % create a part level subdivision|\\ +% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % create a local table of contents|\\ +% \verb|% To suppress the appendix part in the main toc|\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\ +% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{First appendix}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \verb|% Add this at the end of appendices if there is something|\\ +% \verb|% after the appendices (like an index or a bibliography)|\\ +% \verb|% to put a bound to the contents of \parttoc|\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}| +% \end{verse} +% See also section~\vref{faq.25}. +% \or\relax +% Certains utilisateurs ont besoin d'une table des matières pour les appendices, mais sans mettre les entrées de +% cette table dans la table des matières principale. Une solution est de mettre les appendices dans une subdivision +% \com{part} du document et de demander une table des matières au niveau de cette partie: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % après \begin{document}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \icom{appendix}\verb|\appendix|\\ +% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % crée une subdivision de niveau partie|\\ +% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % crée une table des matières locale|\\ +% \verb|% Pour supprimer la partie appendices dans la TdM principale|\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\ +% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{Premier appendice}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \verb|% Ajoutez ceci à la fin des appendices s'il y a quelque chose|\\ +% \verb|% après les appendices (comme un index ou une bibliographie)|\\ +% \verb|% pour placer une borne au contenu de \parttoc|\\ +% \icom{atttocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}| +% \end{verse} +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.25}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (20) +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{environment}{appendices} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you use the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} +% you will observe a serious problem with minitocs in the \env{appendices} environment +% (and after it): they do not +% match with their respective appendices. In fact, the environnement opening \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| hides a +% \com{addcontentsline} command for a chapter or a section, putting trouble +% in the numbering of minitocs or secttocs. Several solutions are available. The first one is to add a +% \com{adjustmtc} or \com{adjuststc} command +% (depending on the level of the appendices, chapter or section) after \emph{each} +% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}} command. +% An other solution is to add the following commands in the preamble +% \emph{after} the loading of the \pack{appendix} package: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}| +% \end{verse} +% if appendices are at the chapter level, OR: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}| +% \end{verse} +% if appendices are at the section level. +% +% These two solutions may be modified by replacing \com{adjustmtc} by the sequence: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\ +% OR\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}| +% \end{quote} +% when it is necessary to delimit the end of the preceding chapter or section\,\footnote{In fact, the commands +% \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} and \com{sectend} should not be used directly by the user, in normal circumstances.}. +% +% A rather more elegant solution is to add an entry into the TOC via the \com{addappheadtotoc} command offered by +% the \pack{appendix} package. As this entry is a chapter-level (or section-level) entry, it delimits correctly +% the end of the preceding chapter or section. +% +% See also the \exam{mtc-amm.tex} example file (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}), +% which uses the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, +% which includes itself the \pack{appendix} package functionnality (these packages and this class are from the same author). +% \or\relax +% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} vous observerez un +% sérieux problème avec les minitocs dans l'environnement \env{appendices} (et après lui): elles ne correspondent +% pas avec leurs appendices respectifs. En fait, l'ouverture de l'environnement par \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| dissimule une +% commande \com{addcontentsline} pour un chapitre ou une section, semant le trouble dans la numérotation des +% minitocs ou secttocs. Plusieurs solutions sont disponibles. La première consiste à~ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} +% ou \com{adjuststc} (selon que les appendices sont au niveau chapitre ou section) après \emph{chaque} commande +% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}}. Une autre solution est d'ajouter les commandes suivantes dans le préambule +% \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \pack{appendix}: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}| +% \end{verse} +% si les appendices sont au niveau chapitre, OU: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}| +% \end{verse} +% si les appendices sont au niveau section. +% +% Ces deux solutions peuvent être modifiées en remplaçant \com{adjustmtc} par la séquence: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\ +% OU\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}| +% \end{quote} +% lorsqu'il est nécessaire de délimiter la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) précédent(e)\,\footnote{En fait, les +% commandes \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} et \com{sectend} ne devraient pas être appelées directement par +% l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales.}. +% +% Une solution plus élégante consiste à~ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières via la +% commande \com{addappheadtotoc} fournie par le paquetage \pack{appendix}. Comme cette entrée est une entrée +% au niveau chapitre (ou au niveau section), elle délimite correctement la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) +% précédent(e). +% +% Voir aussi le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex} (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}), +% qui utilise la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, +% qui inclut elle-même la fonctionnalité du paquetage \pack{appendix} (ces paquetages et cette classe sont du même auteur). +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (21) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% (This\imess{I0047} answer is given in the documentation of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}.) +% The \pack{tocloft} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) and \upack{minitoc} packages +% have an unfortunate interaction\,\footnote{Discovered by \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, which fortunately can be fixed. +% In the normal course of events, when \upack{minitoc} is used in a chaptered +% document it will typeset section +% entries in the minitocs in bold font. If \pack{tocloft} is used in +% conjunction with \upack{minitoc}, then the minitoc section entries are +% typeset in the normal font, except for the page numbers which are in +% bold font, while the ToC section entries are all in normal font. +% +% One cure, if you want the minitoc section entries to be all in normal small +% font, is to put: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% or: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% in the preamble. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Otherwise, the cure is the following incantation: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}| +% \end{verse} +% To have the section entries in both the ToC and the minitocs in bold then +% put the incantation in the preamble. To have only the minitoc section +% entries in bold while the ToC entries are in the normal font, +% put the incantation between the \com{tableofcontents} +% command and the first \com{chapter} command. +% +% As \pack{tocloft} is a very powerful and useful package, these cures are worth to be added if you need the +% benefits of this package. See also section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \or\relax +% (Cette\imess{I0047} réponse est donnée dans la documentation du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}.) +% Les paquetages \pack{tocloft} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) et \upack{minitoc} ont une fâcheuse +% interaction\,\footnote{Découverte par \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, qui, heureusement, peut être corrigée. +% Dans le cours normal des choses, lorsque \upack{minitoc} est utilisé dans un document avec chapitres, il +% composera les entrées de sections dans une fonte grasse. Si \pack{tocloft} est utilisé en conjonction avec +% \upack{minitoc}, alors les entrées de sections dans les minitocs sont composées dans la fonte normale, sauf pour +% les numéros de pages qui sont en fonte grasse, tandis que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières +% principale sont entièrement en fonte normale. +% +% Un remède, si vous voulez que toutes des entrées de sections dans les minitocs soient en fonte normale, est de +% placer: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% ou: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% dans le préambule. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Sinon, le remède est l'incantation suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}| +% \end{verse} +% Pour que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs soient toutes en gras, +% placez l'incantation dans le préambule. Pour que ces entrées soient en gras dans les minitocs mais en fonte +% normale dans la table des matières principale, placez l'incantation entre la commande \com{tableofcontents} et +% la première commande \com{chapter}. +% +% Puisque \pack{tocloft} est un paquetage très puissant et très utile, cela vaut la peine d'ajouter ces remèdes si +% vous voulez profiter des avantages de ce paquetage. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (22) +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir} +% \fi +% \SMMZZ{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offers basically the functionnalities +% of the \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} +% and \pack{tocloft} packages (this class and these packages have the same author, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), +% hence it has the same problems; +% see above the available solutions (sections~\vref{faq+appendix}, +% \vref{special.entries}, and~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectively). +% If your version of the \class{memoir} class is recent, the syntax of the \com{chapter} command is +% different and the \class{memoir} class \emph{could be no more compatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, but a +% patch is inserted to fix the problem. Hopefully, if your version of the \class{memoir} class +% is more recent than 2005/09/25, the patch is no more necessary. +% +% If you are using the \class{memoir} class (or the \pack{tocloft} package), +% the \com{mtcsetfont} command has no effect (\com{mtcsettitlefont} works); you should use the font +% commands which are specific of the \class{memoir} class (or of the \pack{tocloft} package). +% +% If you still want to use the \com{mtcsetfont} commands while using the \class{memoir} class (or of the +% \pack{tocloft} package), you must disable the \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft} font commands. This is done by +% the following commands: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax| +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% La classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offre essentiellement les fonctionnalités des +% paquetages \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} et \pack{tocloft} (cette classe et ces paquetages ont +% le même auteur, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), +% et donc elle a les mêmes problèmes; voir ci-dessus les solutions disponibles (sections~\vref{faq+appendix}, +% \vref{special.entries} et~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectivement). +% Si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente, la syntaxe de la commande \com{chapter} +% est différente et la classe \class{memoir} \emph{pourrait n'être plus compatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% mais une modification est insérée pour corriger le problème. Heureusement, si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} +% est plus récente que 2005/09/25, la correction n'est plus nécessaire. +% +% Si vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir} (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), la commande \com{mtcsetfont} +% n'a aucun effet (\com{mtcsettitlefont} fonctionne); vous devriez utiliser les commandes de fontes qui +% sont spécifiques de la classe \class{memoir} (ou du paquetage \pack{tocloft}). +% +% Si vous souhaitez quand même utiliser les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} tout en utilisant la classe \class{memoir} +% (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), vous devez désactiver les commandes de fontes de \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft}. +% Ceci peut être fait par les commandes suivantes: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax| +% \end{quote} +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (23) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{There are too many commands for fonts, titles, and depths} +% \or\relax +% \section{Il y a trop de commandes pour les fontes, les titres et les profondeurs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version \#41, the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands are available. You do not need anymore +% to know \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#41, les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} sont disponibles. Vous +% n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version \#42, the \com{mtcsettitle} command is available. +% You do not need anymore to know \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#42, la commande \com{mtcsettitle} est disponible. +% Vous n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version \#43, the \com{mtcsetdepth} command is available. +% You do not need anymore to know the counters \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#43, la commande \com{mtcsetdepth} est disponible. +% n'avez plus besoin de connaître les compteurs \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (24) +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section[Compatibility with the \texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}} document classes]% +% {Compatibility with the {\AmS} document classes}\label{s+AMS} +% This problem has been pointed out by \name{Henri}{Massias}. +% \or\relax +% \section[Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'\texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}}]% +% {Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'{\AmS}}\label{s+AMS} +% Ce problème a été signalé par \name{Henri}{Massias}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Unfortunately, the \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart} +% and \class{amsproc} document classes are +% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}. +% The \class{amsbook} document class requires the insertion of commands if you want +% a list of figures and/or a list of tables: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{listoffigures}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added|\\ +% \com{listoftables}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% Malheureusement, les classes de document \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart} +% et \class{amsproc} sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% La classe de document \class{amsbook} requiert l'insertion de commandes si vous désirez +% une liste des figures et/ou une liste des tableaux: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{listoffigures}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout|\\ +% \com{listoftables}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (25) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Hiding some entries from the main table of contents}\label{faq.25}% +% \or\relax +% \section{Cacher certaines entrées dans la table des matières principale}\label{faq.25}% +% \fi +% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is a problem similar to that of section~\vref{faq.19}. +% An example is having a local table of contents for a chapter (\com{minitoc}) whose entries should not appear in +% the main table of contents. Just use the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Title}\texttt{\}}\\ +% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{level}\texttt{]}\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sub-title}\texttt{\}}\\ +% .{}.{}.\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}} +% \end{quote} +% This environment accepts an optional numeric argument, which is the depth of hiding in the main toc (default: +% \texttt{-1}, complete hiding). +% You can look at the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file:\label{mtc-apx.tex} +% \or\relax +% C'est un problème similaire à~celui de la section~\vref{faq.19}. +% Un exemple est d'avoir une table des matières locale pour un chapitre (\com{minitoc}) dont les entrées ne +% doivent pas apparaître dans la table des matières principale. Utilisez simplement l'environnement +% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Titre}\texttt{\}}\\ +% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{niveau}\texttt{]}\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sous-titre}\texttt{\}}\\ +% .{}.{}.\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}} +% \end{quote} +% Cet environnement accepte un argument optionnel numérique, qui est la profondeur de masquage dans la table des +% matières principale (par défaut: \texttt{-1}, masquage complet). Vous pouvez regarder le fichier d'exemple +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}:\label{mtc-apx.tex} +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-apx> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-apx.tex}% + [2007/03/22]% +\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text +\usepackage{tocbibind} % adds some entries in the main TOC. +\usepackage[tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} \setcounter{parttocdepth}{3} +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc % prepare the mini-tables +\tableofcontents +\mtcaddchapter % because tocbibind adds a chapter entry in the TOC +\chapter{First} +\minitoc +First chapter +\section{First section} \lipsum[1] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[2] +\chapter{Second} +\minitoc +Second +\section{First section of second chapter} \lipsum[3] +\section{Second section of second chapter} \lipsum[4] +\appendix % begins the appendices +\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices} % adds a part entry in the TOC +\adjustptc % fixes the parttoc counter ptc +\mtcsettitle{parttoc}{List of Appendices} % changes the parttoc title +\parttoc % adds a partial toc for the appendices +\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] % hides the details of the appendices in the main TOC, +% % but chapter-level entries would be still visible in the main TOC +% % if you use 0 in place of -1 as optional argument. +\chapter{First appendix} +\minitoc +First appendix +\section{First section} \lipsum[5] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[6] +\chapter{Second appendix} +\minitoc +Second appendix +\section{First section of second appendix} \lipsum[7] +\section{Second section of second appendix} \lipsum[8] +\end{mtchideinmaintoc} % end of hiding +\end{document} +%</mtc-apx> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Of course, the environments \env{mtchideinmainlof} +% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} are also available, to hide some entries in the main +% list of figures or of tables. +% +% Note\virage{} that the position of the end of these environments must be adjusted to include a page break (like +% the one done by a \com{chapter} command), else the restore command might be inserted too early into the +% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} or \suffix{.lot} file. There is an example file +% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex} +% \or\relax +% Bien sûr, les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont aussi disponibles, pour +% masquer certaines entrées dans la liste principale des figures ou des tableaux. +% +% Notez\virage{} que la position de la fin de ces environnements doit être ajustée pour inclure un saut de page +% (comme celui fait par une commande \com{chapter}), sinon la commande de restauration pourrait être insérée +% trop tôt dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} ou \suffix{.lot}. Voici un fichier d'exemple +% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex} +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hi1> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi1.tex}% + [2007/01/04]% +\usepackage% + [tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominilof \listoffigures +\dominilot \listoftables +\chapter{First} +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA2} +\end{table} +\chapter{Second} +\minilof \minilot +%%---------------------- +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the environment forms. +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements. +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{mtchideinmainlof} +\begin{mtchideinmainlot} +\begin{figure} +\caption{BBBB1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{BBBB2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TBBBB1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TBBBB2} +\end{table} +\chapter{Third} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the environment forms. +% \or\relax +% Nous terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements. +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\end{mtchideinmainlot} +\end{mtchideinmainlof} +%%---------------------- +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC2} +\end{table} +\end{document} +%</mtc-hi1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But\virage{} it is also possible to use \emph{commands} in place of these environments: +% you place a \com{mtchideinmainlof} +% (or \com{mtchideinmainlot}) command in the first figure (or table) to +% hide, \emph{before} its caption and a \com{endmtchideinmainlof} (or \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) command at the end of +% the last figure (or table) to hide, \emph{after} its caption, like in this example file +% (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex} +% \or\relax +% Mais\virage{} il est aussi possible d'utiliser des \emph{commandes} à~la place de ces environnements: vous placez une +% commande \com{mtchideinmainlof} (ou \com{mtchideinmainlot}) dans +% la première figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{avant} son caption et une commande \com{endmtchideinmainlof} +% (ou \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) à~la fin de la dernière figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{après} son caption, +% comme dans cet exemple de fichier (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hi2> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi2.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage% + [tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominilof \listoffigures +\dominilot \listoftables +\chapter{First} +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA2} +\end{table} +\chapter{Second} +\minilof \minilot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\virage{} begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{before} the caption of the first ``hidden'' +% entry. +% \or\relax +% Nous\virage{} commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{avant} +% le caption de la \emph{première} entrée «~masquée~». +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{figure} +\mtchideinmainlof % <-- +\caption{BBBB1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{BBBB2} +\endmtchideinmainlof % <-- +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\mtchideinmainlot % <-- +\caption{TBBBB1} +\end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\virage{} terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{after} the caption of the \emph{last} ``hidden'' +% entry. +% \or\relax +% Nous\virage{} terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{après} +% le caption de la \emph{dernière} entrée «~masquée~». +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table} +\caption{TBBBB2} +\endmtchideinmainlot % <-- +\end{table} +\chapter{Third} +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC2} +\end{table} +\end{document} +%</mtc-hi2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \flushcolumns +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This method, recommended while more delicate to apply, is much more reliable in delimiting the hiding domain: +% it solves the problem of the asynchronism between the writing of floats and the writing of the normal text. +% \or\relax +% Cette méthode, recommandée bien que plus délicate à~appliquer, est bien plus fiable dans la délimitation du domaine de +% masquage: elle résout le problème de l'asynchronisme entre l'écriture des éléments flottants et celle du texte normal. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (26) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Defining your own \usuffix{.mld} file}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}% +% \or\relax +% \section{Définir votre propre fichier \usuffix{.mld}}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}% +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, you should not directly modify one of the distributed \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. +% The simplest way to alter some +% title is to redefine the corresponding command via \com{renewcommand} or better via +% \com{mtcsettitle}. +% If you really want to have your own \suffix{.mld} file, you copy an existing \suffix{.mld} file +% into one with a new name (not +% the name of a distributed \suffix{.mld} file). Then you modify this new \suffix{.mld} file and you can use it via +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}. You can always contact me to add this new \suffix{.mld} file to the +% distribution. These remarks apply also to the \emph{language}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} pairs of language definition files. +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, vous ne devriez pas modifier directement l'un des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo} de la +% distribution. La +% manière la plus simple de modifier un certain titre est de redéfinir la commande correspondante via +% \com{renewcommand} ou mieux, via \com{mtcsettitle}. Si vous souhaitez vraiment avoir votre propre fichier +% \suffix{.mld}, vous copiez un fichier \suffix{.mld} existant vers un fichier portant un nouveau nom +% (pas le nom d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} de la distribution). Puis vous modifiez ce nouveau fichier \suffix{.mld} et +% vous pourrez l'utiliser via \com{mtcselectlanguage}. Vous pouvez toujours me contacter pour ajouter ce nouveau +% fichier \suffix{.mld} à~la distribution. Ces remarques s'appliquent aussi aux paires +% \emph{langue}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} de fichiers de définition de langues. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (27) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{abstract} package}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{environment}{abstract} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its +% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents, +% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section. +% This problem is detected by the \optd{hints} option and you should add +% a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| +% command after your \env{abstract} environment. +% \or\relax +% Lorsque le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé avec son option +% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou similaire) est ajoutée dans la table des +% matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe du document définit \com{chapter}, sinon comme une section +% étoilée. Ce problème est détecté par l'option \optd{hints} et vous devriez ajouter une commande +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}. +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (28) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty} +% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (29) +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Strange alignment in the minitocs}\label{faq.29} +% \emph{In minitocs, subsections titles are not aligned with sections, as they are in the main table of contents.} +% \or\relax +% \section{Alignement bizarre dans les minitocs}\label{faq.29} +% \emph{Dans les minitocs, les titres des sous-sections ne sont pas alignés avec les sections, +% alors qu'ils le sont dans la table des matières principale.} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@part} +% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@section} +% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax % +% The entries of a table of contents are formatted via internal commands like +% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc. +% +% The ``part'' and ``chapter'' levels (and ``section'' for an article) use +% specific commands which are somewhat complex for a more elaborated formatting. +% For the ``section'' (in the \class{report} and \class{book} classes) and lower levels, +% these commands are (\class{book} class, \xfile{book.cls}) by default: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}| +% \end{quote} +% which will be applied in the main table of contents and in the minitocs. The +% arguments of \com{@dottedtocline} are +% \begin{enumerate}[1)] +% \item the logical depth (which will be compared to \dcnt{tocdepth} or \dcnt{minitocdepth}). +% \item the indentation. +% \item the width reserved for the section/subsection/\ldots\ number. +% \end{enumerate} +% In the standard \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article} classes~\cite{classes}, the dimensions +% (second and third arguments) are given in ``em'' units, and this unit +% depends on the current font. In the main table of contents, +% the section and subsection entries are witten in the \emph{same} font, hence +% usually the alignment is correct. But in the minitocs, the section entries +% are written in a bold font while the subsection entries are written in +% a non bold font (the default font choices are given in table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), hence one ``em'' has +% different sizes in these two fonts and the alignement is changed. +% +% There are several solutions: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Redefine the \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} commands +% to use font independent units (pt, mm, pc, etc.). This +% redefinition must be performed in a package or via a command defined by a package or between \com{makeatletter} +% and \com{makeatother}, because these commands have a~\verb|@| in +% their names; you must use \com{renewcommand*} to redefine +% these commands. +% \item Use\virage{} the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} to change the indentation, with +% font independent units. But then see \emph{also} section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \item Use the same font for the section and subsection entries +% in the minitocs, using the \com{mtcsetfont} command (see section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) or +% redefining the \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} commands (see table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), or similar. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% +% Les entrées d'une table des matières sont mises en forme par des commandes internes telles que +% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc. +% +% Les niveaux «~partie~» et «~chapitre~» (et «~section~» pour un article) utilisent des +% commandes spécifiques qui sont assez complexes pour une mise en forme plus élaborée. +% Pour les niveaux «~section~» (dans les classes \class{report} et \class{book}) et inférieurs, +% ces commandes sont (class \class{book}, \xfile{book.cls}) par défaut: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}| +% \end{quote} +% qui seront appliquées dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs. Les +% arguments de \com{@dottedtocline} sont +% \begin{enumerate}[1)] +% \item la profondeur logique (qui sera comparée à~\dcnt{tocdepth} ou \dcnt{minitocdepth}); +% \item l'indentation; +% \item la largeur réservée pour le numéro de section/sous-section/\ldots +% \end{enumerate} +% Dans les classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}~\cite{classes}, les dimensions +% (deuxième et troisième arguments) sont données en unités «~em~», et cette unité +% dépend de la fonte courante. Dans la table des matières principale, les entrées de sections et de sous-sections +% sont écrites dans la \emph{même} fonte, donc normalement l'alignement est correct. Mais dans les +% minitocs, les entrées pour les sections sont écrites dans une fonte grasse tandis que celles des sous-sections +% sont écrites dans une fonte non grasse (les choix par défaut pour ces fontes sont donnés dans +% le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), donc un «~em~» a des tailles différentes +% dans ces deux fontes et l'alignement est altéré. +% +% Il y a plusieurs solutions: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Redéfinir les commandes \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} pour utiliser +% des unités indépendantes de la fonte (pt, mm, pc, etc.). Cette +% redéfinition doit être effectuée dans un paquetage ou via une commande définie dans un paquetage +% ou entre \com{makeatletter} +% et \com{makeatother}, puisque ces commandes contiennent un~\verb|@| dans leurs noms; +% vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand*} pour redéfinir ces commandes. +% \item Utiliser\virage{} le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} pour changer l'indentation, avec des unités +% indépendantes de la fonte. Mais alors regardez \emph{aussi} la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \item Utiliser la même fonte pour les entrées de sections et de sous-sections dans les minitocs, +% en utilisant la commande \com{mtcsetfont} (voir la section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) ou +% en redéfinissant les commandes \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} (voir le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), ou analogues. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Useful precautions with starred sectionning commands}\label{faq.30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The\virage{} headers are not modified by \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} or \com{section*}; +% it is \emph{necessary} to use \com{markboth} or \com{markright} to get correct page headers for +% the current and following pages. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item If\virage{} you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{chapter*} or a \com{section*} command, you +% must use \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} or \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} +% \emph{after} the starred sectionning command. +% If you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{part*} command, the page number in the +% table of contents would be wrong, because \com{part*} implies a \com{clearpage} or a +% \com{cleardoublepage} before the first page of the part. Use the sequence +% \begin{quote}\small +% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage if openany option.|\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \section{Précautions utiles avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées}\label{faq.30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les\virage{} en-têtes ne sont pas modifiés par \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} ou \com{section*}; +% il est \emph{nécessaire} d'utiliser \com{markboth} ou \com{markright} pour obtenir des en-têtes de +% pages corrects pour la page courante et les suivantes. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item Si\virage{} vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande \com{chapter*} ou +% \com{section*} command, vous devez utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} ou +% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} \emph{après} la commande de sectionnement étoilée. +% Si vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande pour une commande \com{part*}, +% le numéro de page dans la table des matières serait erroné, car \com{part*} implique une commande +% \com{clearpage} ou \com{cleardoublepage} avant la première page de la partie. Utilisez la +% séquence +% \begin{quote}\small +% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage si option openany.|\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (31) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with packages for captions}\label{faq.31} +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}} +% one of the \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; now use a recent +% version of the +% \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package, because such packages alter (redefine) the +% commands listing figures and tables. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec des paquetages pour les captions}\label{faq.31}\ipack{caption}\ipack{caption2}\ipack{ccaption}\ipack{mcaption} +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}i +% l'un des paquetages \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez +% maintenant une version récente du paquetage \upack{caption}.}~\cite{caption2}, (qui ont tous deux été écrits +% par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car de tels paquetages altèrent (redéfinissent) +% les commandes de listage des figures et tableaux. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (32) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Bad interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32} +% When the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} packages are used in a document +% of class \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, +% the chapter header ``Chapter'' does not appear on the first page of the chapter. +% +% This problem is fixed in version~\#44 of \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Mauvaise interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32} +% Lorsque les paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} sont utilisés dans un document +% dont la classe est \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, l'en-tête de chapitre «~Chapitre~» n'apparaît pas +% sur la première page du chapitre. +% +% Ce problème est corrigé dans la version~\#44 de \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (33) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{varsects} package}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects} +% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects} +% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (34) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Initial font settings}\label{faq.34} +% The setting of the fonts in the mini-tables is a rather complex problem. If we take the parttocs as an example, +% there is a \com{ptcfont} font-command which is used for two purposes\footnote{The same remarks apply +% to the other mini-tables.}: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item First, to be used as default value for some other font-commands (like \com{ptcSPfont}). As its +% default value is used in the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, the value of these other +% commands is \emph{not altered} if you modify \com{ptcfont}. You must modify these commands one at a +% time. +% \item Second, it is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc, partlof or partlot to set an initial font command. +% Then each entry of the mini-table calls its own font command (like \com{ptcSPfont}). Thus, if you +% modify \com{ptcfont}, you can obtain a global effect on the fonts in the parttocs, partlofs, and +% partlots. So you can play with the various parameters of the fonts (family, shape, series, size), if +% you want fancy mini-tables; but it is rather difficult. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \lneed{6} +% In\Virage{} the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, we have a sequence of commands: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% to define some default fonts. But this sequence is executed only once. If you alter \com{ptcfont}, the modification is +% not applied to these font commands. The command \com{ptcfont} is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc. +% \com{ptcCfont} is invoked for each chapter entry in a parttoc (\com{ptcSfont} for each section entry, etc.). +% So \com{ptcfont} can be used to define some global characteristics for the fonts in the parttocs, while +% \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) can be used to customize the fonts for each level of entries. +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Note that if you say: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% after loading the \upack{minitoc} package, these font commands will be ``associated'' to \com{ptcfont}, hence if you +% modify \com{ptcfont} (by via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| or \com{renewcommand}), they will follow the +% modification. But if you modify one of these commands via \com{renewcommand} or +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} is an example), +% the association is broken. But you could be more clever by saying something like +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% to preserve the association and modify only some parameters of a minitoc font command. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% For levels above subsection (part, chapter and section), the fonts a more specific in general, but you can, of course, +% say something like \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| to make a similar association. +% You can even make other associations, like this: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|% for high sectionning levels:|\\ +% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% for low sectionning levels:|\\ +% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% then for each level:|\\ +% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% Then you can redefine \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| to act on several fonts in one step, but you must +% use \com{renewcommand}. You cannot act on \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| with \com{mtcsetfont}. +% +% Note that only the fonts for parttocs are used in the examples above; but, of course, the situation is the same for +% minitocs and secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| and \verb|\lowlevelsfont| are macro names that you can choice, they are not +% part of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% \section{Choix initiaux des fontes}\label{faq.34} +% Le choix des fontes dans les mini-tables est un problème assez compliqué. Si nous prenons par exemple les +% parttocs, il y~a une commande de fonte \com{ptcfont} qui est utilisée dans deux buts\,\footnote{Les mêmes +% remarques s'appliquent aux autres mini-tables.}: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Premièrement, pour être utilisée comme valeur par défaut pour quelques autres commandes de fontes (telles +% que \com{ptcSPfont}). Comme sa valeur par défaut est utilisée dans l'initialisation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, la valeur de ces autres commandes \emph{n'est pas modifiée} si vous modifiez +% \com{ptcfont}. Vous devez modifiez ces commandes une à~la fois. +% \item Deuxièmement, elle est invoquée au début de chaque parttoc, partlof ou partlot pour établir une commande +% de fonte initiale. Puis chaque entrée de la mini-table appelle sa propre commande de fonte (comme +% \com{ptcSPfont}). Donc, si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont}, vous pouvez obtenir un effet global sur les +% fontes dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. Vous pouvez ainsi jouer avec les divers paramètres des +% fontes (famille, forme, graisse, taille), si vous voulez des mini-tables enjolivées; mais ceci est assez +% difficile. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \lneed{6} +% Dans\Virage{} l'initialisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, nous avons une séquence de commandes: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% pour définir quelques fontes par défaut. Mais cette séquence n'est exécutée qu'une seule fois. Si vous altérez +% \com{ptcfont}, la modification n'est pas appliquée à~ces commandes de fontes. La commande \com{ptcfont} est +% invoquée au début de chaque parttoc. \com{ptcCfont} est invoquée pour chaque entrée de chapitre dans une parttoc +% (\com{ptcSfont} pour chaque entrée de section, etc.). Ainsi \com{ptcfont} peut être utilisée pour définir +% quelques caractéristiques globales pour les fontes dans les parttocs, tandis que \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) peuvent +% être utilisées pour personnaliser les fontes pour chaque niveau d'entrées. +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Notez que si vous dites: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{def}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% après avoir chargé le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ces commandes de fontes seront «~associées~» à~\com{ptcfont}, +% donc si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont} (par une commande \com{renewcommand} ou via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}|), +% elles suivront la modification. Mais si vous modifiez l'une de ces commandes via +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} est un exemple) ou \com{renewcommand}, +% l'association est rompue. Mais vous pourriez agir plus subtilement en disant quelque chose comme +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% pour préserver l'association et modifier seulement quelques paramètres d'une commande de fonte minitoc. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Pour les niveaux au-dessus de la sous-section (partie, chapitre et section), les fontes sont plus spécifiques en +% général, mais vous pouvez, bien sûr, utiliser une définition telle que +% \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| pour faire une +% association similaire. Vous pouvez même faire d'autres associations, comme ceci: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|% pour les hauts niveaux de sectionnement:|\\ +% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% pour les bas niveaux de sectionnement:|\\ +% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% puis pour chaque niveau:|\\ +% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% Puis vous pouvez redéfinir \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou \verb|\lowlevelsfont| pour agir sur plusieurs fontes en une +% seule fois, mais vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand}. Vous ne pouvez pas agir sur \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou +% \verb|\lowlevelsfont| avec \com{mtcsetfont}. +% +% Notez que seules les fontes pour les parttocs ont été utilisées dans les exemples ci-dessus; mais, bien sûr, la +% situation est la même pour les minitocs et les secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| et \verb|\lowlevelsfont| sont des +% noms de macros que vous pouvez choisir, ils ne font pas partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (35) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \KOMAScript{} classes}\label{faq.35} +% If\imess{I0043} a \KOMAScript{} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible with \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or +% \class{scrartcl}), is used, some class options may cause problems with the \upack{minitoc} package, because these +% options add chapter or section entries in the table of contents. See section~\vref{special.entries}. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec les classes \KOMAScript}\label{faq.35} +% Si\imess{I0043} une classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible avec \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} ou +% \class{scrartcl}), est utilisée, certaines options de la classe peuvent poser des problèmes avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, car elles ajoutent des entrées de chapitre ou de section dans la table des matières. Voir la +% section~\vref{special.entries}. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (36) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \uclass{jura} class or the \upack{alphanum} package}\label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum} +% The \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} class loads the \pack{alphanum} package, +% which redefines the sectionning structure in a +% non-standard way, after the loading of the \class{report} class. +% This class and this package are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{jura} ou le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}% +% \label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum} +% La classe \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} charge le paquetage \pack{alphanum}, +% qui redéfinit la structure de sectionnement d'une +% manière non-standard, après le chargement de la classe \class{report}. +% Cette classe et ce paquetage sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (37) +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \usuffix{.mld} files and the \upack{babel} package}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld} +% If you are using the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, you can automatize the loading of the +% \suffix{.mld} file by adding some code in the preamble of your document, like this: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\ +% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{language1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{language2}\verb|}}}| +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{language1} is the language name for \pack{babel} and \emph{language2} the language name for +% \upack{minitoc}; there are often identical, but there are exceptions (when you use a locally customized \suffix{.mld} +% file, for instance). +% \or\relax +% \section{Les fichiers \usuffix{.mld} et le paquetage \upack{babel}}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld} +% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, vous pouvez automatiser le chargement du +% fichier \suffix{.mld} en ajoutant du code dans le préambule de votre document, comme ceci: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\ +% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{langue1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{langue2}\verb|}}}| +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{langue1} est le nom de langue pour \pack{babel} et \emph{langue2} le nom de langue pour \upack{minitoc}; +% ils sont souvent identiques, mais il y~a des exceptions (lorsque vous utilisez un fichier \suffix{.mld} adapté +% localement, par exemple). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (38) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap} +% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (39) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap} +% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (40) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{romannum} package}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum} +% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the numbering of +% the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum} +% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (41) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders} +% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the +% sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (42) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec} +% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the +% numbering of the sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec} +% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (43) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{captcont} package}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont} +% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the caption +% commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont} +% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% les commandes pour les captions. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (44) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Vertical spaces (gaps) for parttocs, partlofs, and partlots titles}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps} +% These vertical gaps were hard-coded like for the chapter +% heads in the \class{book} and \class{report} document classes. +% The values were 50pt and 40pt, but some users want +% to adjust them for the titles of the part-level mini-tables. +% Since version~\#45, these gaps are defined by \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} +% and \com{mtcgapafterheads}, with these defaults values. These +% commands apply globally to parttocs, partlofs and partlots. +% They are \emph{commands}, \virage\emph{not} dimensions, so they must be +% modified via \com{renewcommand} (but \emph{not} via \com{setlength}). +% An example of use is given in the \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file:\label{mtc-gap.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Espacements verticaux (\emph{gaps}) pour les titres des parttocs, +% partlofs et partlots}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps} +% Ces sauts verticaux (\emph{gaps}) étaient codés «~en dur~» comme pour +% les têtes de chapitres dans les classes de document \class{book} +% et \class{report}. Les valeurs étaient 50pt et 40pt, mais +% certains utilisateurs désirent les ajuster pour les titres +% des mini-tables au niveau partie. +% Depuis la version~\#45, ces sauts sont définis par \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} +% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}, avec ces valeurs par défaut. +% Ces commandes s'appliquent globalement aux parttocs, partlofs et partlots. +% Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \virage\emph{pas} des dimensions, +% donc elles doivent être modifiées via \com{renewcommand} +% (mais \emph{pas} via \com{setlength}). +% Un exemple d'utilisation est donné dans le fichier document \exam{mtc-gap.tex}:\label{mtc-gap.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-gap> +\documentclass[a4paper,oneside,12pt]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-gap.tex}[2007/01/04]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use the \pack{vruler} package (by \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) to display a vertical ruler showing the position of the titles: +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{vruler} (de \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) pour placer une échelle verticale montrant la position +% des titres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{txfonts,vruler} % vertical graduation to note positions (Zhuhan Jiang) +\usepackage[english2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\setvruler[1cm][0][10][3][0][0pt][0pt][0pt][] % with vruler package +\doparttoc \faketableofcontents +\part{First part} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A normal parttoc, with the normal gaps before and after it. +% \or\relax +% Une parttoc normale, avec des sauts verticaux normaux avant et après elle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\parttoc +\chapter{First chapter of first part} \chapter{Second chapter of first part} +\part{Second part} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We set large gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons de plus grands sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{100pt} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{80pt} +\parttoc +\chapter{First chapter of second part} \chapter{Second chapter of second part} +\part{Third part} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We set small gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons de plus petits sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{20pt} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{10pt} +\parttoc +\chapter{First chapter of third part} \chapter{Second chapter of third part} +\end{document} +%</mtc-gap> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (45) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Vertical spacing before the bottom rule of a minitable}\label{faq.45} +% The little spacing between a minitable and its bottom rule is implemented as a vertical kern that should +% be sufficient to allow the +% descending parts of the letters of the last entry of the mini-table. The values should depend on +% the line spacing and of the font size. They are defined as macros that you can adjust by redefining them via +% \com{renewcommand}. The (empirical) default values are given in table~\vref{t+kernafters}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Espacement vertical avant le filet inférieur d'une minitable}\label{faq.45} +% Le petit espacement entre une minitable et le filet qui est en-dessous d'elle est réalisé par un crênage +% vertical qui devrait suffire pour les jambages des lettres de la dernière entrée de la +% minitable. Les valeurs devraient dépendre de l'interlignage et de la taille de la fonte. +% Elles sont définies comme des macros que vous pouvez ajuster en les redéfinissant via \com{renewcommand}. +% La table~\vref{t+kernafters} donne les valeurs par défaut (empiriques). +% \fi +% \begin{table}[!htb] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption{Kernings before minitable bottom rules}\label{t+kernafters} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default value}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \or\relax +% \caption{Crênage avant le filet inférieur des minitables}\label{t+kernafters} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Valeur par défaut}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% +% ^^A (46) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Another interaction between the \upack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc} packages}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft} +% \emph{I~encountered an interaction between \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}. +% I want to force \upack{minitoc} to not display the page numbers, but because +% of \pack{tocloft} it doesn't. Here is an example code:} +% \else\relax +% \section{Une autre interaction entre les paquetages \upack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft} +% \emph{J'ai rencontré une interaction entre \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}. +% Je veux forcer \upack{minitoc} à~ne pas afficher les numéros de pages, +% mais, à~cause de \pack{tocloft}, il n'y arrive pas. Voici +% un exemple de code:} +% \fi\relax +% \begin{quote} +% \com{documentclass}\verb|[12pt,a4paper]{book}|\\ +% \com{usepackage}\verb|{tocloft}|\\ +% \com{usepackage}\verb|{minitoc}|\\ +% \ienv{document}\verb|\begin{document}|\\ +% \com{frontmatter}\\ +% \com{dominitoc}\com{tableofcontents}\\ +% \com{mainmatter}\\ +% \com{chapter}\verb|{Chapter}|\\ +% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\ +% \verb|\chapter{Second Chapter}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{minitoc}{off}|\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\ +% \verb|\end{document}| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{If I comment the line loading the \pack{tocloft} package, +% I~will get a minitoc without page numbers as I~wanted.} +% \else\relax +% \emph{Si je commente la ligne chargeant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, +% j'obtiens bien une minitoc sans numéros de pages comme désiré.} +% \fi\relax +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% When using together \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}, the \pack{tocloft} package must be +% loaded first, and its commands take precedence to format the entries +% in the TOC (and in minitocs). To suppress the page numbers, you should try +% the \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| command (from \pack{tocloft}), which is described +% in the \xfile{tocloft.pdf} documentation~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} is the level +% of entry (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). There are similar remarks about +% font related commands. +% +% The \pack{tocloft} package is more specialized in that job than \upack{minitoc}, so if it is +% loaded, \upack{minitoc} uses the \pack{tocloft} tools. +% There is the corrected example (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}): +% \else\relax +% Lors de l'utilisation simultanée de \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}, +% le paquetage \pack{tocloft} doit être chargé le premier, et ses +% commandes prennent le pas pour mettre en forme les +% entrées dans la table des matières (et les minitocs). Pour +% supprimer les numéros de pages, vous devriez essayer la +% commande \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| (de \pack{tocloft}), qui est décrite dans la documentation +% \xfile{tocloft.pdf}~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} +% est le niveau de l'entrée (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). +% Il y a des remarques similaires sur les commandes concernant les fontes. +% +% Le paquetage \pack{tocloft} est davantage spécialisé dans +% ce travail que \upack{minitoc}, donc s'il est chargé, \upack{minitoc} +% se sert des outils de \pack{tocloft}. Voici l'exemple +% corrigé (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}): +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tlo> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlo.tex}[2007/06/13]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must load \pack{tocloft} \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous devons charger \pack{tocloft} \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{tocloft} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the global font for the minitoc entries: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la fonte globale pour les entrées des minitocs: +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{*}{\normalfont\small} +\frontmatter +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the section entries in the minitocs, we suppress the page numbers and change the font +% by using commands from the \pack{tocloft} package: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, nous supprimons les numéros de pages et changeons la fonte en +% utilisant des commandes venant du paquetage \pack{tocloft}: +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +\cftpagenumbersoff{sec} +\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalfont\small} +\mainmatter +\chapter{First Chapter} \minitoc +\section{Section A} \section{Section B} +\chapter{Second Chapter} \minitoc +\section{Section A} \section{Section B} +\end{document} +%</mtc-tlo> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (47) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption} +% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption} +% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (48) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{flowfram} package}\label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram} +% The \pack{flowfram}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, which +% has its own system of minitocs, is hence \emph{incompatible} +% with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}% +% \label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram} +% Le paquetage \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}}\pack{flowfram}, qui a son propre +% système de minitocs, est donc \emph{incompatible} +% avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Memento}\label{c+memento} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Mémento}\label{c+memento} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \minilot +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[!hbtp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Package options}\label{t+OPT} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NO*}&Short extensions for auxiliary files.\\ +% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables.\\ +% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ +% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Presence of leaders (dotted lines).\\ +% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NO*}&Keeps floats (figures and tables) from drifting +% outside of their section. Useful if you use sectlofs/sectlots.\\ +% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NO*}&Useful if you have \com{cite} commands +% in sectionning titles and use an unsorted bibliographic style.\\ +% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Lists the minitoc auxiliary files +% into \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\ +% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Adds hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% file. Useful to detect some problems. Option \opt{nohints} is inadvisable.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Language options are listed in +% table~\vref{t+languages}. Default: \loptd{english}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[!hbtp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Options du paquetage}\label{t+OPT} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NON*}&Suffixes courts pour les fichiers auxiliaires.\\ +% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables.\\ +% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables (classes \KOMAScript).\\ +% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Présence de points de conduite.\\ +% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NON*}&Empêche les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) de dériver en dehors de +% leur section. Utile si vous utilisez des sectlofs/sectlots.\\ +% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NON*}&Utile si vous avez des commandes \com{cite} dans les titres de +% sectionnements et utilisez un style de bibliographie sans tri.\\ +% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Liste les fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc +% dans \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\ +% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Ajoute des indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Utile pour détecter certains problèmes. L'option \opt{nohints} est déconseillée.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Les options de langue sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages}. +% Défaut: \loptd{english}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{General commands}\label{t+SUC} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{faketableofcontents}&Replaces \com{tableofcontents} +% if you want mini-tables of contents but no main table of contents.\\ +% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Replaces \com{listoffigures} +% if you want mini-lists of figures but no main list of figures.\\ +% \com{fakelistoftables}&Replaces \com{listoftables} +% if you want mini-lists of tables but no main list of tables.\\ +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Loads \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to select a language for mini-tables titles.\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the depth for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{offset}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the offset for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{sectionning-level}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Redefines a minitoc font command.\\ +% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{value}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the layout of some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{title string}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the title for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the font of the title for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&To add a vertical skip between the mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskipamount}&Length of \com{mtcskip}. Default: \com{bigskipamount}.\\ +% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default.\\ +% \com{tightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables.\\ +% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ +% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ +% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number). Default.\\ +% \com{undottedmtctrue}&No dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number).\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes générales}\label{t+SUC} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{faketableofcontents}&Remplace \com{tableofcontents} +% si vous souhaitez des mini-tables des matières mais pas de table des matières principale.\\ +% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Remplace \com{listoffigures} +% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des figures mais pas de liste des figures principale.\\ +% \com{fakelistoftables}&Remplace \com{listoftables} +% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des tableaux mais pas de liste des tableaux principale.\\ +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Charge \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour sélectionner une langue pour les titres des mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change la profondeur pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{déplacement}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change le déplacement pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de +% fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Redéfinit une commande de fonte minitoc.\\ +% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{valeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change la mise en page de certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{chaîne titre}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change le titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change la fonte du titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&Pour ajouter un saut vertical entre les mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskipamount}&Longueur de \com{mtcskip}. Défaut: \com{bigskipamount}.\\ +% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut.\\ +% \com{tightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées.\\ +% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\ +% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\ +% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Points de conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page). Défaut.\\ +% \com{undottedmtctrue}&Pas de points conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page).\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Part level commands}\label{t+SUC-P-a} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \texttt{partlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a parttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a partlof is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &After each \com{part} command for which a partlot is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Depth of the following parttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2.\\ +% &Has no action on partlofs and partlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcindent}&Left/right indentation of a partial table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{ptcoffset}&Horizontal offset for parttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{plfoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{pltoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcfont}&Font command for parttoc.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\ +% &or: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcCfont}&Font command for parttoc, chapter entries.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{ptcSfont}&Font command for parttoc, section entries.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\ +% &or: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcPfont}&Font command for parttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSPfont}&Font command for parttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{plffont}&Font for partlof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{plfSfont}&Font for partlof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltfont}&Font for partlot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltSfont}&Font for partlot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{ptctitle}&Title of parttocs. Default: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\ +% \com{plftitle}&Title of partlofs. Default: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\ +% \com{plttitle}&Title of partlots. Default: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\ +% \com{ptifont}&Font for partXXX titles.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\ +% &or: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\ +% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Vertical gap before part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 50pt\\ +% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Vertical gap after part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 40pt\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the +% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{partXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dopartXXX} +% commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, +% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{ptcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{t+SUC-P-a} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{partlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une parttoc est +% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlof est +% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Profondeur des parttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ +% &N'a aucune action sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une table partielle. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{ptcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les parttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{plfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{pltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\ +% &ou: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcCfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées chapitres.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{ptcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sections.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\ +% &ou: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{plffont}&Fonte pour les partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{plfSfont}&Fonte pour les partlofs (sous-figures). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltfont}&Fonte pour les partlots. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltSfont}&Fonte pour les partlots (sous-tables). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{ptctitle}&Titre des parttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\ +% \com{plftitle}&Titre des partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\ +% \com{plttitle}&Titre des partlots. Défaut: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\ +% \com{ptifont}&Fonte pour les titres des partXXX.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\ +% &ou: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\ +% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Saut vertical avant le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 50pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Saut vertical après le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 40pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la +% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{partXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dopartXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, +% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{ptcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Chapter level commands}\label{t+SUC-C} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minitoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilof is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilot is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Depth of the following minitocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on minilofs and minilots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcoffset}&Horizontal offset for minitocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mlfoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mltoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcfont}&Font command for minitoc.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSfont}&Font command for minitoc, section entries.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcPfont}&Font command for minitoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for minitoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mlffont}&Font for minilof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mlfSfont}&Font for minilof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltfont}&Font for minilot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltSfont}&Font for minilot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtctitle}&Title of minitocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{mlftitle}&Title of minilofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{mlttitle}&Title of minilots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{mtifont}&Font for miniXXX titles.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the +% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{miniXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dominiXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, +% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{mtcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{t+SUC-C} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minitoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Profondeur des minitocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ +% &N'a aucune action sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minitocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mlfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sections.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mlffont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mlfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtctitle}&Titre des minitocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{mlftitle}&Titre des minilofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{mlttitle}&Titre des minilots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{mtifont}&Fonte pour les titres des miniXXX.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la +% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{miniXXX}, +% global pour les commandes \ucom{dominiXXX}. +% Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, +% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{mtcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Section level commands}\label{t+SUC-S} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a secttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a sectlof is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &After each \com{section} command for which a sectlot is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Depth of the following secttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{stcoffset}&Horizontal offset for secttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{slfoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{sltoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcfont}&Font command for secttoc.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stcSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcSSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcPfont}&Font command for secttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for secttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{slffont}&Font for sectlof.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{slfSfont}&Font for sectlof (subfigures).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltfont}&Font for sectlot.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltSfont}&Font for sectlot (subtables).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stctitle}&Title of secttocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{slftitle}&Title of sectlofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{slttitle}&Title of sectlots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{stifont}&Font for sectXXX titles.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the +% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{sectXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dosectXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, +% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{stcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes au niveau section}\label{t+SUC-S} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une secttoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Profondeur des secttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ +% &N'a aucune action sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ +% \ucom{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{stcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les secttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{slfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{sltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{slffont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{slfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stctitle}&Titre des secttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{slftitle}&Titre des sectlofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{slttitle}&Titre des sectlots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{stifont}&Fonte pour les titres des sectXXX.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la +% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{sectXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dosectXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, +% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{stcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for horizontal rules}\label{t+SUC-rules} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{mtcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{stcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{slfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilots.\\ +% \ncom{sltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Vertical kerning between a parttoc and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Vertical kerning between a partlof and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Vertical kerning between a partlot and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Vertical kerning between a minitoc and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&Vertical kerning between a minilof and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&Vertical kerning between a minilot and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Vertical kerning between a secttoc and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Vertical kerning between a sectlof and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Vertical kerning between a sectlot and its bottom rule.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{By default, parttocs have no rules; minitocs and secttocs have rules. In +% articles, parttocs have rules.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{t+SUC-rules} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{mtcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{stcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{slfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilots.\\ +% \ncom{sltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une parttoc et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Crênage vertical entre une partlof et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Crênage vertical entre une partlot et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Crênage vertical entre une minitoc et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&Crênage vertical entre une minilof et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&Crênage vertical entre une minilot et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une secttoc et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlof et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlot et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Par défaut, les parttocs n'ont pas de filets; les minitocs et secttocs ont +% des filets. Dans les articles, les parttocs ont des filets.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for page numbers}\label{t+SUC-pn} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilots.\\ +% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{By default, the page numbers are present.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour les numéros de pages}\label{t+SUC-pn} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilots.\\ +% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Par défaut, les numéros de pages sont présents.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for mini-tables features}\label{t+SUC-P-b} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a parttoc.\\ +% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlof.\\ +% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlot.\\ +% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a parttoc.\\ +% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlof.\\ +% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlot.\\ +% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a parttoc file.\\ +% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlof file.\\ +% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlot file.\\ +% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a parttoc file.\\ +% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlof file.\\ +% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlot file.\\ +% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a parttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlof.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlot.\\ +% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a minitoc.\\ +% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilof.\\ +% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilot.\\ +% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a minitoc.\\ +% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilof.\\ +% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilot.\\ +% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minitoc file.\\ +% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilof file.\\ +% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilot file.\\ +% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minitoc file.\\ +% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilof file.\\ +% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilot file.\\ +% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minitoc.\\ +% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilof.\\ +% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilot.\\ +% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a secttoc.\\ +% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlof.\\ +% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlot.\\ +% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a secttoc.\\ +% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlof.\\ +% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlot.\\ +% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a secttoc file.\\ +% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlof file.\\ +% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlot file.\\ +% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a secttoc file.\\ +% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlof file.\\ +% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlot file.\\ +% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a secttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlof.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlot.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\ +% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{t+SUC-P-b} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \null\hspace*{-.35em}\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth+.35em}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une parttoc.\\ +% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlof.\\ +% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlot.\\ +% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une parttoc.\\ +% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlof.\\ +% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlot.\\ +% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\ +% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\ +% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\ +% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\ +% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\ +% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\ +% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une parttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlof.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlot.\\ +% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minitoc.\\ +% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilof.\\ +% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilot.\\ +% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une minitoc.\\ +% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilof.\\ +% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilot.\\ +% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\ +% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\ +% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\ +% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\ +% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\ +% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\ +% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minitoc.\\ +% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilof.\\ +% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilot.\\ +% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une secttoc.\\ +% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlof.\\ +% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlot.\\ +% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une secttoc.\\ +% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlof.\\ +% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlot.\\ +% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\ +% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\ +% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\ +% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\ +% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\ +% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\ +% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une secttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlof.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlot.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\ +% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Preparation and insertion commands}\label{t+SUC-PI} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Level}}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){3-5} +% & &\textbf{part}&\textbf{chapter}&\textbf{section}\\ +% \midrule +% table of contents&preparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% list of figures &preparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% list of tables &preparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% all &preparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Each of these commands accepts one optional argument~\emph{p}, +% which specifies the position of the +% title of the mini-table. This argument~\emph{p} has a global effect for the preparation commands, but local for the +% insertion commands. It is a letter: \texttt{[l]}~for left aligned (default), \texttt{[c]}~for centered, +% \texttt{[r]}~for right aligned, \texttt{[e]}~or \texttt{[n]}~for empty (no title).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes de préparation et d'insertion}\label{t+SUC-PI} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Niveau}}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){3-5} +% & &\textbf{partie}&\textbf{chapitre}&\textbf{section}\\ +% \midrule +% table des matières&préparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% liste des figures &préparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% liste des tableaux &préparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% tous &préparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Chacune de ces commandes accepte un argument optionnel~\emph{p}, +% qui spécifie la position du titre de la mini-table. Cet argument~\emph{p} a un effet global dans les commandes de +% préparation, mais local dans les commandes d'insertion. C'est une lettre: \texttt{[l]}~pour aligné à~gauche +% (défaut), +% \texttt{[c]}~pour centré, \texttt{[r]}~pour aligné à~droite, \texttt{[e]}~ou \texttt{[n]}~pour vide (pas de titre).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Adjustment commands}\label{t+SUC-A} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc} by~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc} by~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc} by~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{decrementptc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{decrementmtc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{decrementstc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{incrementptc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{incrementmtc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{incrementstc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{part*} in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{chapter*} in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{section*} in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Adjusts the entry for the glossary in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Adjusts the entry for the index in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Adjusts the entry for the nomenclature in the ToC.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environment to hide entries in the main ToC.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environment to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environment to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: recommended form.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes d'ajustement}\label{t+SUC-A} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc} de~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc} de~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc} de~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{decrementptc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{decrementmtc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{decrementstc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{incrementptc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{incrementmtc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{incrementstc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{part*} dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{chapter*} dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{section*} dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Ajuste l'entrée pour le glossaire dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Ajoute l'entrée pour l'index dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Ajoute l'entrée pour la nomenclature dans la TdM.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la TdM principale.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: forme recommandée.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tpb] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Classes and packages needing some precautions with \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs} +% \centering +% \bgroup\mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Names}&\textbf{Author(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Reference(s)}\\ +% \midrule +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} and\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, and \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lass.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}ackage.}\\ +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Any class not defining the main standard sectionning commands is +% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.}\\ +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tpb] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Classes et paquetages nécessitant quelques précautions avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs} +% \centering +% \bgroup\mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Noms}&\textbf{Auteur(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Référence(s)}\\ +% \midrule +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} et \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} et\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn} et \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lasse.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}aquetage.}\\ +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Toute classe ne définissant pas les principales commandes de sectionnement standard +% est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.}\\ +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Checking if inside a minitable}\label{t+ifinside} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Commands for polymorphic entries}\label{t+polym}\index{polymorphic entry} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \else\relax +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Tester si à~l'intérieur d'une minitable}\label{t+ifinside} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Commandes pour des entrées polymorphes}\label{t+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[btp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Obsolete commands}\label{t+SUC-O} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first part.\\ +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first chapter.\\ +% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first section.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{These commands have no effect (except a harmless warning).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[btp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes obsolètes}\label{t+SUC-O} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première partie.\\ +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro du premier chapitre.\\ +% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première section.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Ces commandes n'ont aucun effet (excepté un avertissement bénin).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Examples of documents}\label{c+exdocs} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Exemples de documents}\label{c+exdocs} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \minitoc +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}% +% \raggedcolumns +% \mtcskip +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter shows the code of some examples of documents. +% Some are extracted or derived from real documents, others are just demonstrations to illustrate problems or features. +% The code of some specific example files has been shown earlier: +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}, +% and \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre montre le code de quelques exemples de documents. +% Certains ont été extraits ou inspirés de documents réels, les autres sont de simples démonstrations pour illustrer +% des problèmes ou des possibilités. +% Le code de fichiers d'exemples spécifiques a déjà été montré: +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}) et +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} is often used to provide filling text. +% \or\relax +% Notez que le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} est souvent utilisé pour fournir du texte de bourrage. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2c.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2c.tex}}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a two columns layout. +% The layout uses the \pack{multicol} standard package~\cite{multicol} and its \env{multicols} environment. +% We set \com{mtcindent} to zero. We test several combinations. If a minitoc is long enough to be splitted on +% both columns, the result may be funny. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document avec une mise en page sur deux +% colonnes. +% La mise en page utilise le paquetage standard \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} et son environnement \env{multicols}. +% Nous forçons \com{mtcindent} à~zéro. Si une minitoc est assez longue pour se répartir sur les deux colonnes, +% le résultat peut être bizarre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-2c> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% + {report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-2c.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage% + [tight,latin,listfiles]{minitoc} +\usepackage[latin]{babel} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Two first chapters with a standard chapter head, a minitoc on one full width column, then the body of the chapter +% on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Deux premiers chapitres avec un en-tête standard, une minitoc sur la largeur complète, puis le corps du chapitre sur +% deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Primum capitulum} +\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc] +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[1-2] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[3-4] +\end{multicols} +\chapter{Secundum capitulum} +\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc] +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[5-6] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[7-8] +\section{Tertia sectio} +\lipsum[9-10] +\end{multicols} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A third chapter entirely on two columns, so the chapter head and the minitoc are in the first column: +% \or\relax +% Un troisième chapitre entièrement sur deux colonnes, dont l'en-tête du chapitre et la minitoc sont +% dans la première colonne: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{multicols}{2} +\chapter{Tertium capitulum} +\minitoc +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[11-12] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[13-14] +\section{Tertia sectio} +\lipsum[15-16] +\end{multicols} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A fourth chapter, with the chapter head on one column, and the minitoc and the chapter body on two columns (the +% minitoc is in the first column): +% \or\relax +% Un quatrième chapitre, avec l'en-tête de chapitre sur une seule colonne, mais la minitoc et le corps du chapitre +% sur deux colonnes (la minitoc est dans la première colonne): +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Quadrum capitulum} +\begin{multicols}{2} +\minitoc +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[16-17] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[18-19] +\section{Tertia sectio} +\lipsum[20-21] +\end{multicols} +\end{document} +%</mtc-2c> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} +% This document tests the \xfile{french2.mld} minitoc language definition file +% (section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) and its +% supporting code in the \upack{minitoc} package. First, the preamble of the document uses the \lopt{french2} +% minitoc package language option\footnote{The \pack{franc}, \pack{frnew} and \pack{mypatches} packages are local +% additions, provided with the \upack{minitoc} package documentation sources.}: +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} +% Ce document teste le fichier minitoc de définition de langue \xfile{french2.mld} +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) et le code +% qui en assure le support dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tout d'abord, le préambule du document utilise +% l'option de langue \lopt{french2} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}\,\footnote{Les paquetages \pack{franc}, +% \pack{frnew} et \pack{mypatches} sont des additions locales, fournies avec les sources de la documentation +% française du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-2nd> +%% Test de french2.mld: +%% « seconde » ou « deuxième » partie? +%% compilez 3 fois. +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-2nd.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[french2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\usepackage[french]{babel} +\usepackage{franc,frnew} +\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{mypatches} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test if there is only two parts: if yes, we will use ``seconde''. +% Else (three or more parts), we will use ``deuxième''. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons s'il y a seulement deux parties: si oui, nous utiliserons «~seconde~». +% Sinon (trois parties ou plus), nous utiliserons «~deuxième~». +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifmtcsecondpart +Il n'y a que 2 parties: seconde. +\else +Il y a une partie ou plus de deux parties: deuxième. +\fi +\clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document, with two parts: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document, avec deux parties: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\doparttoc +\faketableofcontents +\part{P1} +\parttoc +\chapter{P1C1} +\chapter{P1C2} +\part{P2} +\parttoc +\chapter{P2C1} +\chapter{P2C2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want also a third part, comment out this line and recompile 3~times: +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez aussi une troisième partie, commentez la ligne suivante et recompilez 3~fois: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Commentez la ligne suivante puis recompilez 2 ou 3 fois. +\end{document} +\part{P3} +\parttoc +\chapter{P3C1} +\chapter{P3C2} +\end{document} +%</mtc-2nd> +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Observe the titles of the parttocs when the document has two then three parts. Note the changes after each +% compilation. You can play by adding and removing parts. It would be interesting to add a starred part, with +% starred chapters, at the beginning of the document, this part and these chapters having their entries in the TOC. +% For instance, try to add the following lines after \com{faketableofcontents}: +% \or\relax +% Observez les titres des parttocs lorsque le document a deux puis trois parties. Notez les changements après +% chaque compilation. Vous pouvez jouer en ajoutant et enlevant des parties. Il serait intéressant d'ajouter une +% partie étoilée, avec des chapitres étoilés, au début du document, cette partie et ces chapitres ayant leurs +% entrées dans la table des matières. Par exemple, essayez d'ajouter les lignes suivantes +% après \com{faketableofcontents}: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{part*}\verb|{Partie étoilée}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[Partie étoilée]|\\ +% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[-2] % IMPORTANT <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<|\\ +% \com{parttoc}\\ +% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Premier chapitre étoilé}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[Premier chapitre étoilé]|\\ +% \verb|\chapter*{Second chapitre étoilé}|\\ +% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[Second chapitre étoilé]| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% and you will see how the parttoc of the new starred part is titled. +% \or\relax +% et vous verrez comment la parttoc de la nouvelle partie étoilée est titrée. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-3co.tex} document file}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} +% This document shows how to prepare a minitoc on three columns, +% with some modifications of the code the \env{mtc@verse} environment. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-3co.tex}}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} +% Ce document montre comment préparer une minitoc sur trois +% colonnes, grâce à~quelques modifications du code de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we will use a wide paper format (A3) to set the text +% on two columns and the main TOC on three columns, with the +% \pack{multitoc} package~\cite{multitoc} (by \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}). +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous utiliserons un format de papier large (A3) +% pour composer le texte sur deux colonnes et la table des +% matières principale sur trois colonnes, avec le paquetage +% \pack{multitoc}~\cite{multitoc} (de \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-3co> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-3co.tex}% + [2007/02/19] +\usepackage[a3paper]{geometry} +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage[toc]{multitoc} +\renewcommand{\multicolumntoc}{3} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\multicolumnmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtc@verse} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we load the \upack{minitoc} package, set some +% parameters and define the number of columns for the +% minitocs. We alter the \env{mtc@verse} environment to add a +% \env{multicols} environment\footnote{Some vertical adjustments are necessary.}: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% établissons quelques paramètres et définissons le nombre de +% colonnes pour les minitocs. +% Nous altérons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse} pour lui +% ajouter un environnement \env{multicols}\,\footnote{Quelques ajustements verticaux sont nécessaires.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\newcommand{\multicolumnmtc}{3} +\makeatletter +\let\SV@mtc@verse\mtc@verse +\let\SV@endmtc@verse\endmtc@verse +\def\mtc@verse#1{\SV@mtc@verse#1\removelastskip% + \begin{multicols}{\multicolumnmtc}\raggedcolumns\leavevmode\unskip + \vskip -1.5ex \vskip -1\baselineskip} +\def\endmtc@verse{\end{multicols}\SV@endmtc@verse} +\makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the document, preparing the minitocs and the main TOC. +% The (first) chapter begins with its minitoc, then the text +% on two columns. We use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} to provide filling text; +% the section number is used to select a \emph{lipsum} paragraph. +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le document, en préparant les minitocs et la +% table des matières principale. Le (premier) chapitre commence +% avec sa minitoc, puis le texte sur deux colonnes. Nous +% utilisons le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} pour +% fournir du texte de bourrage; +% le numéro de section est utilisé pour choisir un paragraphe \emph{lipsum}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\chapter{First chapter} +\minitoc +\begin{multicols}{2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use a lot of sections, to have a minitoc large enough to +% use the three columns. A subsection with a long title gives +% a good result (we have used \com{mtcsetformat} to avoid hyphenations). +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons beaucoup de sections, pour avoir une minitoc +% suffisamment grande pour utiliser les trois colonnes. Une +% sous-section avec un titre long donne un bon résultat (nous avons utilisé \com{mtcsetformat} pour éviter les +% coupures). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{First section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Tenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Eleventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twelfth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fourteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Sixteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Seventeenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Eighteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Nineteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twentieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\subsection{A very long subsection title, for the fun in +a multicolumn table of contents} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirtieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fortieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fiftieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\end{multicols} +\clearpage +\end{document} +%</mtc-3co> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-add.tex} document file}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-add.tex}}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows how to add special entries in the table of contents, and the interaction with the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre comment ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, ainsi que l'interaction avec +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-add> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} +%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-add.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{url} +\usepackage{tocbibind} +\usepackage{makeidx} +\makeatletter +\newif\ifscan@allowed +\scan@allowedtrue +\makeatother +\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}% +\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak + \dotfil~\ignorespaces}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Load the \upack{minitoc} package, or \pack{mtcoff}. +% \or\relax +% Charger le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ou \pack{mtcoff}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeindex +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call the mini-table preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons les commandes de préparation des mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We are using the \pack{tocbibind} package to add special entries in the table of contents, so we must take +% the precautions specified in section~\vref{special.entries}: +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, +% donc nous devons prendre les précautions spécifiées dans la section~\vref{special.entries}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents \mtcaddchapter +\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter +\listoftables \mtcaddchapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a chapter, we want a minitoc, a minilof and a minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Pour un chapitre, nous voulons une minitoc, une minilof et une minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{First chapter}\index{chapter!normal} +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the text of the chapter, with sections, figures and tables: +% \or\relax +% Puis le texte du chapitre, avec des figures et des tableaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{First section} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table} + +\section{Second section} +A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ +\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}\index{a}% +\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}\index{cannot}% +\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}\index{I}% +\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}\index{land}% +\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}\index{to}\index{tree}% +\index{would}\index{yes}% +\textsf{A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. +But I imagine that he would, yes.}\\ +\hbox{}\hfill +Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks}~(1993),~\textsl{Against~a~dark~background.}% +\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred chapter requires a special treatment; three solutions are possible. +% You can test variations on +% the \com{mtcaddchapter} command. Just uncomment one (and +% only one) of the \com{mtcaddchapter} commands after +% \com{chapter*} in the source code of \exam{mtc-add.tex}. +% For each case, look at the Table of Contents +% and the involved chapter. +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre étoilé nécessite un traitement spécial; trois solutions sont possibles. Vous pouvez tester des +% variations sur la commande \com{mtcaddchapter}. Il suffit de décommenter une et une seule des trois +% commandes \com{mtcaddchapter} après \com{chapter*} dans le code source de \exam{mtc-add.tex}. Pour chaque +% cas, regardez la table des matières et le chapitre concerné. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Second chapter, starred} +\index{chapter!starred} +%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 3 FOLLOWING LINES +\mtcaddchapter[Second chapter, starred] % OK +%% \mtcaddchapter[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. OK +%% \addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \mtcaddchapter[] % BAD SOLUTION +%% \mtcaddchapter % BAD SOLUTION +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\index{tests} + +This is a starred chapter; you can test here variations on +the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| command. Just uncomment one (and +only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| commands after +\verb|\chapter*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. +For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents +and at this chapter. +\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% +\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{chapter}\index{code}% +\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}\index{each}% +\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}% +\index{index}\index{is}\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}% +\index{lot}\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}% +\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}% +\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}% +\index{variations}\index{you}% +I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. + +\chapter{Third chapter} +\index{chapter!normal} +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +\section{Third section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table} + +\section{Fourth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As we want to add an entry for the bibliography in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package +% for that, we must add a correction with \com{adjustmtc}: +% \or\relax +% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour la bibliographie dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons +% donc le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous ajoutons une correction avec \com{adjustmtc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\nocite* +\def\noopsort#1{\relax} +\bibliographystyle{plain} +\bibliography{mtc-add} +\adjustmtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As we want to add an entry for the index in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package +% for that, we must add a correction; two solutions are available: use \com{mtcfixindex} or +% the other given three lines: +% \or\relax +% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour l'index dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour cela, nous devons ajouter une correction; deux solutions sont +% disponibles: utiliser \com{mtcfixindex} ou les trois autres lignes données: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\printindex +\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines +%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{} +%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{} +%% \mtcaddchapter +%% + +\appendix +\chapter{App.~1} +\index{chapter!appendix} +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +\section{Fifth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Fifth table} \end{table} + +\section{Sixth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The next chapter asks for a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot, but contains no tables; hence +% the \upack{minitoc} package will give some warnings. +% \or\relax +% Le chapitre suivant demande une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot, mais ne contient aucun tableau; donc le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} émettra quelques avertissements. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{App.~2} +\index{chapter!appendix} +%% contains no tables but asks for a minilot! No minilot printed. +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +\section{Seventh section} +\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure} + +\section{Eighth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure} + +\end{document} +%</mtc-add> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we need also its small bibliographic data base: +% \or\relax +% Et nous avons aussi besoin de sa petite base bibliographique: +% \fi +% \begin{itemize} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% \item la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-addbib> +@MISC{minitoc, + TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf}}", + MONTH=jul, + YEAR=2008} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr}: +% \or\relax +% \item la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +@MISC{minitoc-fr, + TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf}}", + MONTH=jul, + YEAR=2008} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item the documentation of the \upack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc}: +% \or\relax +% \item la documentation du paquetage \upack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +@MISC{shorttoc, + TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf}}", + MONTH=aug, + YEAR=2002} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item a novel~\cite{dark} from which a short citation is taken: +% \or\relax +% \item un roman~\cite{dark} d'où une courte citation est extraite: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +@BOOK{dark, + TITLE="{Against a Dark Background}", + AUTHOR="Banks, Iain Menzies", + PUBLISHER="Bantam Books", + ISBN="0553292240 (pb)", + YEAR=1993} +%</mtc-addbib> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But the database created this way must be trimmed of some spurious lines; +% on Unix-like systems, do\footnote{Note that we should use no preamble for +% this file in \xfile{minitoc.ins}; nevertheless, some spurious lines are still generated. This +% problem is not yet corrected now, so we keep the solution.}: +% \or\relax +% Mais la base ainsi créée doit être purgée des lignes superflues; +% sur les systèmes analogues à~Unix, faites\,\footnote{Notez que nous +% ne devrions pas utiliser de préambule pour ce fichier dans \xfile{minitoc.ins}; néanmoins, des lignes +% superflues sont encore produites. Ce problème n'est pas encore corrigé, donc nous conservons cette solution.}: +% \fi +% \begin{verse}\small +% \verb"cat mtc-add.bib | grep -v '^%%' > addbib;mv addbib mtc-add.bib" +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ads.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} +% This document uses the \class{article} class and shows some problems for adding special entries in the +% table of contents and some problems with floating objects. We need to use the \pack{tocbibind} +% package~\cite{tocbibind} for the first ones and the \upack{minitoc} \opt{insection} package option to avoid +% the drift if floating objects outside of their section. That gives the following document preamble: +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ads.tex}}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} +% Ce document utilise la classe \class{article} et montre quelques problèmes pour ajouter des entrées spéciales +% dans la table des matières et quelques problèmes avec les objets flottants. Il nous faut utiliser le paquetage +% \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} pour les premiers et l'option \opt{insection} du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour éviter la dérive des objets flottants hors de leur section. Ceci donne le +% préambule suivant: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ads> +\documentclass[oneside,12pt,a4paper]{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ads.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{url,tocbibind,makeidx} +\makeatletter \newif\ifscan@allowed \scan@allowedtrue \makeatother +\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}% +\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak + \dotfil~\ignorespaces}% +\usepackage[tight,hints,insection]{minitoc} +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +\makeindex +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de préparation: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dopartlof \dopartlot +\dosecttoc \dosectlof \dosectlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands to prepare the table of contents, the list of figures and the list of tables. As we use the +% \pack{tocbibind} package, we must add some \com{mtcaddsection} commands: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes pour préparer la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. Comme nous +% utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous devons ajouter quelques commandes \com{mtcaddsection}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +\setcounter{parttocdepth}{6} +\setcounter{secttocdepth}{6} +\tableofcontents \mtcaddsection +\listoffigures \mtcaddsection +\listoftables \mtcaddsection +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document: a part with its part-level mini-tables, some sections with their section-level +% mini-tables. The document has an index and contains figures and tables. +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document: une partie avec ses mini-tables au niveau partie, quelques sections leurs mini-tables au +% niveau section. Le document a un index et contient des figures et des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part{Part~1} +\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot + +\section{First section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{First subsection} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Second subsection} +A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ +\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}% +\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}% +\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}% +\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}% +\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}% +\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}% +A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. +But I imagine that he would, yes.\\ +\hbox{}\hfill Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}% +\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here, we try a starred section, with its entry in the table of contents. You can try several solutions (good or bad). +% \or\relax +% Ici, nous essayons une section étoilée, avec son entrée dans la table des matières. Vous pouvez essayer plusieurs +% solutions (bonnes ou mauvaises). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section*{Second section, starred} +\index{section!starred} +%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES +\mtcaddsection[Second section, starred] % OK +%% \mtcaddsection[] % BAD +%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. +%% \mtcaddsection % BAD +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\index{tests} + +This is a starred section; you can test here variations on +the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and +only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after +\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. +For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents +and at this section. +\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% +\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}% +\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}% +\index{Contents}\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}% +\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}% +\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}% +\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}\index{source}% +\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}\index{the}% +\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}% +\index{variations}\index{you}% +I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. + +\section{Third section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Third subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Fourth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table} + +\subsubsection{Even a sub-sub-section!} +\subsubsection{And yet another one} + +\part{Part~2} +\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot + +\section{Fourth section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Fifth subsection} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table}[tp] \caption{Fifth table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Sixth subsection} +A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ +\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}% +\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}% +\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}% +\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}% +\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}% +\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}% +A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. +But I imagine that he would, yes.\\ +\hbox{}\hfill +Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}% +\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table} + +\section*{Fifth section, starred} +\index{section!starred} +%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES +\mtcaddsection[Fifth section, starred] % OK +%% \mtcaddsection[] % OK +%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. +%% \mtcaddsection % OK +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\index{tests} + +This is a starred section; you can test here variations on +the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and +only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after +\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. +For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents +and at this section.\index{a}% +\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% +\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}% +\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}% +\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}% +\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}% +\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}% +\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}% +\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}% +\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}% +\index{uncomment}\index{variations}\index{you}% +I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. + +\section{Sixth section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Seventh subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Seventh table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Eighth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Eighth table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The bibliography: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{adjuststc}: +% \or\relax +% La bibliographie: comme nous voulons une entrée pour elle dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{adjuststc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\nocite* +\def\noopsort#1{\relax} +\bibliographystyle{plain} +\bibliography{mtc-add} +\adjuststc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The index: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{mtcfixindex}: +% \or\relax +% L'index: comme nous voulons une entrée pour lui dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{mtcfixindex}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\printindex +\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines +%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{} +%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{} +%% \mtcaddsection + +\appendix +\section{App.~1} +\index{section!appendix} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Ninth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Ninth table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Tenth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Tenth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Tenth table} \end{table} + +\section{App.~2} +\index{section!appendix} +%% contains no tables but asks for a sectlot! No sectlot printed. +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Eleventh subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Twelfth figure} \end{figure} + +\subsection{Twelfth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Thirdteenth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Fourteenth figure} \end{figure} + +\end{document} +%</mtc-ads> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-amm.tex} document file}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-amm.tex}}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This example shows the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a \class{memoir} class document when +% the \upack{minitoc} package is loaded. First, the preamble: +% \or\relax +% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} +% lorsque le paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été chargé. Tout d'abord, le préambule: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-amm> +\documentclass[oneside]{memoir} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-amm.tex}% + [2007/08/29] +\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text +\usepackage{hyperref} +\usepackage{memhfixc} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +\adjustmtc +\chapter{First chapter} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] +\section{First section} +\lipsum[2] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{environment}{appendices} +% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The appendices are set in an \env{appendices} environment; we can add an entry in the TOC with +% \com{addappheadtotoc} (a command from the \class{memoir} class): +% \or\relax +% Les appendices sont composés dans un environnement \env{appendices}; nous pouvons ajouter une entrée dans la table +% des matières avec \com{addappheadtotoc} (une commande fournie par la classe \class{memoir}): +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{appendices} +\addappheadtotoc +\adjustmtc %correction! +\chapter{Afterthoughts} +\minitoc +\lipsum[3] +Afterthoughts appendix +\section{Further remarks} +\lipsum[4] +\chapter{Last wills} +\minitoc +\section{Testament} +\lipsum[5] +\end{appendices} +\chapter{Conclusion} +\minitoc +\section{Bye} +\lipsum[6] +\chapter{Back from Hell} +\minitoc +\section{Not dead yet!} +\lipsum[7] +\section{I will survive} +\lipsum[8] +\end{document} +%</mtc-amm> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-apx.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-apx.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-apx.tex}}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-apx.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-art.tex} document file}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-art.tex}}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains sections but no chapters, so it must use an +% \class{article}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and +% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows: +% \or\relax +% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des sections mais pas de chapitres, +% donc il doit utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\class{article}. Vous devriez travailler sur +% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec +% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-art> +%% mtc-art.tex +%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc +%% package. You can alter most of parameters to test. +%% article (\section must be defined) +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-art.tex}% + [2007/06/06] +\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text +%% \usepackage{hyperref} % If used, load it BEFORE minitoc +\usepackage[tight,insection]{minitoc} +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents +\setlength{\stcindent}{24pt} % indentation of secttocs, default +%% % font for secttocs, default +\renewcommand{\stcfont}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% +%% % font for secttocs, subsections +%% \renewcommand{\stcSSfont}{\small\sf}% +%% % you can make experiments with +%% % \stcSSSfont, \stcPfont and \stcSPfont +%% % but it is ``fontomania''... +\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want to use sections numbered in each part (the section number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each +% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the secttoc files is +% independent on the numbering of the sections (it is absolute). +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez utiliser des sections numérotées dans chaque partie (le numéro de section repart à~1 au début de +% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers +% secttoc est indépendante de celle des sections (elle est absolue). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test +%%% resetting section number in each part +%%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{section}{part} \makeatother +%%% END TEST +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in +% the mini-tables): +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et +% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables): +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dosecttoc +\dosectlof[c] % center titles of the sectlofs +\dosectlot +\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff +\dopartlof % added in version #15 +\dopartlot % added in version #15 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print. +% \or\relax +% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\faketableofcontents % or \tableofcontents +\fakelistoffigures % to check compatibility +\fakelistoftables % to check compatibility +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands; +% we define a part, with a parttoc, a partlof (with the title on the right) and a parttoc: +% \or\relax +% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement; +% nous définissons une partie, avec une parttoc, une partlof (avec le titre sur la droite) et une parttoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part{First Part} \parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A section, in two columns mode, with a secttoc (title on the right), and a sectlof; this section contains +% subsections to make a non-empty secttoc but no figures (to detect an empty sectlof). +% \or\relax +% Une section, en mode deux colonnes, avec une secttoc (titre sur la droite), et une sectlof; cette section contient +% des sous-sections pour que la secttoc ne soit pas vide mais pas de figures (pour détecter une sectlof vide). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\twocolumn\sloppy % the secttoc in twocolumn layout is ugly, + % but works. Ideas to make it better? +\section{AAAAA} % a section with a lot of sections +\secttoc[r] % secttoc title on the right +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +\lipsum[1] +\subsection{S1} \lipsum[2] +\subsection{S2} \lipsum[3] +\subsection{S3} \lipsum[4] +\subsection*{S4} +%% \addcontentsline{toc}{starsubsection}{*S4*} +\lipsum[5] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A lot of subsections: +% \or\relax +% Un tas de sous-sections: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\subsection{S5} \lipsum[6] +\subsection{S6} \lipsum[7] +\subsection{S7} \lipsum[8] +\subsection{S8} \lipsum[9] +\subsection{S9} \lipsum[10] +\subsection{S10} \lipsum[11] +\subsection{S11} \lipsum[12] +\subsection{S12} \lipsum[13] +\subsection{S13} \lipsum[14] +\subsection{S14} \lipsum[15] +\subsection{S15} \lipsum[16] +\subsection{S16} \lipsum[17] +\subsection{S17} \lipsum[18] +\subsection{S18} \lipsum[19] +\subsection{S19} \lipsum[20] +\subsection{S20} \lipsum[21] +\subsection{S21} \lipsum[22] +\subsection{S22} \lipsum[23] +\subsection{S23} \lipsum[24] +\subsection{S24} \lipsum[25] +\subsection{S25} \lipsum[26] +\subsection{S26} \lipsum[27] +\subsection{S27} \lipsum[28] +\subsection{S28} \lipsum[29] +\subsection{S29} \lipsum[30] +\subsection{S30} \lipsum[31] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We return to the one column mode. Then a section with a secttoc and a sectlof (there are subsections and figures). +% The \opt{insection} package option should ensure that floating objects (like figures) do not drift outside +% their section. +% \or\relax +% Nous revenons au mode une colonne. Puis une section avec une secttoc et une sectlof (il y~a des sous-sections et +% des figures). +% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} devrait garantir que les objets flottants (tels que les figures) ne +% dérivent pas en dehors de leur section. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column +\section{BBBBB} +\secttoc +\mtcskip % put some skip here +\sectlof % a sectlof +\lipsum[32] +\subsection{T1} \lipsum[33] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F1} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\subsubsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command +\lipsum[34] +\paragraph{TTT1} \lipsum[35] +\subparagraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[36] +\begin{figure}[t] +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\subsection{T2} \lipsum[37] +\section*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-section. should have no secttoc +%% \addstarredsection{CCCCC} +\mtcaddsection[CCCCC] +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +\lipsum[38] +\subsection{U1} \lipsum[39] +\subsubsection{UU1} \lipsum[40] +\paragraph{UUU1} \lipsum[41] +\subparagraph{UUUU1} \lipsum[42] +\subsection{U2} \lipsum[43] +\part{Second Part} +\parttoc +\partlof[c] +\partlot +%% % the following section should have no secttoc, +\section{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \secttoc, +%% \secttoc +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +% % the secttoc appears +\lipsum[44] +\subsection{V1} \lipsum[45] +\subsubsection{VV1} \lipsum[46] +\paragraph{VVV1} \lipsum[47] +\subparagraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[48] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\lipsum[49] \subsection{V2} \lipsum[50] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We change the depth of the secttocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces): +% \or\relax +% Nous changeons la profondeur des secttocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{EEEEE} % this section should have a secttoc +{% % left brace, see below +\setcounter{secttocdepth}{3} % depth of sect table of contents; + % try with different values. +\secttoc +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +} % right brace +%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change on secttocdepth. +\lipsum[51] +\subsection{W1} % with the given depth +\lipsum[52] +\subsubsection{WW1} \lipsum[53] +\paragraph{WWW1} \lipsum[54] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla +\subparagraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[55] +\subsection{W2} \lipsum[56] +\chapter*{} +\part{Appendices} +\parttoc \mtcskip +\partlof \mtcskip +\partlot +\FloatBarrier +\appendix +\section{Comments} \lipsum[57] +\secttoc +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +\subsection{C1} \lipsum[58] +\subsection{C2} \lipsum[59] +\subsection{C3} \lipsum[60] +\begin{figure}[hb] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\subsection{C4} \lipsum[61] +\FloatBarrier +\section{Evolution} +\secttoc +\sectlof % empty +\sectlot % empty +\lipsum[62] +\subsection{D1} \lipsum[63] \subsection{D2} \lipsum[64] +\subsection{D3} \lipsum[65] \subsection{D4} \lipsum[66] +\end{document} +%</mtc-art> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bk.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bk.tex}}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains chapters, so it must use a +% \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and +% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows: +% \or\relax +% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des chapitres, donc il doit +% utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\upack{book} ou à~\class{report}. Vous devriez travailler sur +% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec +% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-bk> +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% A example file (differs from previous versions) +%% mtc-bk.tex +%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc package file. +%% You can alter most of parameters to test. +%% Class: book/report (\chapter must be defined). +%% You can use a copy of this file to play with minitoc commands and parameters. +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} % the report class uses less pages +%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-bk.tex}% + [2007/06/06] +\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text +%% \usepackage{hyperref} % if used, load it BEFORE minitoc +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} % tight option make shorter mini-tables +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents +\setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} % indentation of minitocs, default +\renewcommand{\mtcfont}{\small\rm} % font for minitocs, default +\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\small\bf} % font for minitocs, sections, default +%% \renewcommand{\mtcSSfont}{\small\sf} % font for minitocs, subsections +%% you can make experiments with \mtcSSSfont, \mtcPfont and \mtcSPfont +%% but it is ``fontomania''... +\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want to use chapters numbered in each part (the chapter number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each +% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the minitoc files is +% independent on the numbering of the chapters (it is absolute). +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez utiliser des chapitres numérotés dans chaque partie (le numéro de partie repart à~1 au début de +% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers +% minitoc est indépendante de celle des chapitres (elle est absolue). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test resetting chapter number in each part +%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{chapter}{part} \makeatother +%%% END TEST +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in +% the mini-tables): +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et +% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables): +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\mtcpagenumbers +\noptcrule +%% \nomtcrule % suppresses minitoc rules +%% \nomtcpagenumbers % suppresses minitoc page numbers +%% \nomlfpagenumbers % ---------- minilof ---- ------- +%% \nomltpagenumbers % ---------- minilot ---- ------- +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\dominilof[c] % centers title of minilof's +\dominilot +\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff +\dopartlof % added in version #15 +\dopartlot % added in version #15 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print. +% \or\relax +% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents % or \faketableofcontents +\listoffigures % or \fakelistoffigures +\fakelistoftables % or \listoftables +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Uncomment the following line if the first chapter must be numbered~``0'': +% \or\relax +% Décommentez la ligne suivante si le premier chapitre doit être numéroté~«~0~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% \addtocounter{chapter}{-1} % to begin with Chapter 0 +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part{First Part} +\parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot[r] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter, in two column mode, with a minitoc (title on the right): +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre, en mode deux colonnes, avec une minitoc (titre sur la droite): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\twocolumn\sloppy % the minitoc in twocolumn layout is ugly, +\chapter{AAAAA} % a chapter with a lot of sections +\minitoc[r] % minitoc title on the right +\lipsum[1] +\section{S1} \lipsum[2] +\section{S2} \lipsum[3] +\section{S3} \lipsum[4] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred section; we want an entry in the TOC, so we add it the normal way: +% \or\relax +% Une section étoilée: nous voulons une entrée dans la table des matières, donc nous l'ajoutons de la manière +% normale: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section*{S4} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}{S4}} +\lipsum[5] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A lot of subsections: +% \or\relax +% Un tas de sous-sections: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{S5} \lipsum[6] +\section{S6} \lipsum[6] +\section{S7} \lipsum[7] +\section{S8} \lipsum[9] +\section{S9} \lipsum[10] +\section{S10} \lipsum[11] +\section{S11} \lipsum[12] +\section{S12} \lipsum[13] +\section{S13} \lipsum[14] +\section{S14} \lipsum[15] +\section{S15} \lipsum[16] +\section{S16} \lipsum[17] +\section{S17} \lipsum[18] +\section{S18} \lipsum[19] +\section{S19} \lipsum[20] +\section{S20} \lipsum[21] +\section{S21} \lipsum[22] +\section{S22} \lipsum[23] +\section{S23} \lipsum[24] +\section{S24} \lipsum[25] +\section{S25} \lipsum[26] +\section{S26} \lipsum[27] +\section{S27} \lipsum[28] +\section{S28} \lipsum[29] +\section{S29} \lipsum[30] +\section{S30} \lipsum[31] +\subsection{SS1} \lipsum[32] +\section{S31} \lipsum[33] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We return to one column mode. A new chapter, with a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot: +% \or\relax +% Nous revenons au mode sur une colonne. Un nouveau chapitre, avec une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column +\chapter{BBBBB} +\minitoc +\mtcskip % put some skip here +\minilof % a minilof +\mtcskip % put some skip here +\minilot % a minilot +\lipsum[34] +\section{T1} \lipsum[35] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F1} % (tables are similar) +\end{figure} +\begin{table}[b] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{T1} % (tables are similar) +\end{table} +\clearpage +\subsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command +\lipsum[36] +\subsubsection{TTT1} \lipsum[37] +\paragraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[38] +\begin{figure} +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption +\end{figure} +\section{T2} \lipsum[39] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph*} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred chapter with an entry added in the TOC; all subordinate (lower) +% sectionning commands must also be starred. +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée ajoutée dans la table des matières; +% toutes les commandes de sectionnement subalternes (plus basses) doivent aussi être étoilées. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-chapter; could have a minitoc. +\addstarredchapter{CCCCC} +\lipsum[40] +\section*{U1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U1} +\lipsum[41] +\subsection*{UU1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{UU1} +\lipsum[42] +\subsubsection*{UUU1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsubsection}{UUU1} +\lipsum[43] +\paragraph*{UUUU1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{paragraph}{UUUU1} +\lipsum[44] +\section*{U2} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U2} +\lipsum[45] +\part{Second Part} +\parttoc +\partlof[c] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter has no minitoc, but if you uncomment \com{minitoc}, +% the minitoc will appear. +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre n'a pas de minitoc, mais si vous décommentez \com{minitoc}, +% la minitoc apparaîtra. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% % the following chapter should have no minitoc, +\chapter{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \minitoc, +%% \minitoc % the minitoc appears +\lipsum[46] +\section{V1} \lipsum[47] +\subsection{VV1} \lipsum[48] +\subsubsection{VVV1} \lipsum[49] +\paragraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[50] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\lipsum[51] +\section{V2} \lipsum[52] +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We change the depth of the minitocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces): +% \or\relax +% Nous changeons la profondeur des minitocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{EEEEE} % this chapter should have a minitoc +{% % left brace, see below +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} % depth of mini table of contents; + % try with different values. +\minitoc +} % right brace +%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change +%% on minitocdepth. +\lipsum[53] +\section{W1} % with the given depth +\lipsum[54] +\subsection{WW1} \lipsum[55] +\subsubsection{WWW1} \lipsum[56] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables here, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\lipsum[57] +\paragraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[58] +\subparagraph{WWWWW1} \lipsum[59] +\section{W2} \lipsum[60] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\appendix} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here, we encounter a classical problem: to make a local table of contents for a set +% of appendices, while hiding these entries in the main table of contents. First, we +% create a part, with its parttoc: +% \or\relax +% Ici, nous rencontrons un problème classique: faire une table des matières locale pour un ensemble d'appendices, +% et tout en masquant ces entrées dans la table des matières principale. Tout d'abord, nous créons une partie, avec sa +% parttoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\appendix +\part{Appendices} +\parttoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we begin a \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, with the hiding depth as optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous commençons un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, avec la profondeur de masquage requise: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] +\chapter{Comments} +\minitoc +\section{C1} \lipsum[61] +\section{C2} \lipsum[62] +\section{C3} \lipsum[63] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\section{C4} +\chapter{Evolution} +\minitoc +\minilof %Empty => invisible +\minilot %Empty => invisible +\section{D1} \lipsum[64] +\section{D2} \lipsum[65] +\section{D3} \lipsum[66] +\section{D4} \lipsum[67] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% We terminate the part by adding a marker in the TOC file, then we must close this \env{mtchideinmaintoc} +% environment: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Nous terminons la partie en ajoutant un marqueur dans le fichier table des matières, puis nous devons fermer +% cet environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% this line closes the omitted part +\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin} +%% this line restore the depth in the main TOC +\end{mtchideinmaintoc} +\lipsum[68] +\end{document} +%</mtc-bk> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bo.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bo.tex}}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a two column layout for some +% portions and the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. The aim is to begin a chapter with a special head and a +% preliminary block containing a minitoc and some indications, on two columns. +% The preamble loads the \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry}, which defines the global page layout, +% the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, the \pack{color} package~\cite{color}, because we want a colored +% background +% for the minitoc, the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}, to change some parameters of the minitoc, and, at +% least, the \upack{minitoc} package itself: +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant une mise en page sur +% deux colonnes pour certaines portions et le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Le but est de commencer +% un chapitre avec un en-tête spécial et un bloc préliminaire contenant une minitoc et quelques indications, sur +% deux colonnes. +% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry}, +% qui définit la mise en page globale, le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, +% le paquetage \pack{color}~\cite{color}, +% car nous voulons un fond coloré pour la minitoc, le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour changer +% quelques paramètres de la minitoc, et, enfin, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lui-même: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-bo> +\documentclass[10pt]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-bo.tex}% + [2007/04/17] +\usepackage[paperwidth=8.5in,paperheight=11in,% + lmargin=1.25in,rmargin=1.25in,tmargin=1in,bmargin=1in]{geometry} +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage{color} +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\addtolength} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecnumwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use the \pack{tocloft} package and its commands to set the indentations in the TOC and the minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocloft} et ses commandes pour établir les indentations dans la table des +% matières et la minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{tocloft} +\setlength{\cftsecindent}{0cm} +\setlength{\cftsecnumwidth}{15 pt} +\setlength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecindent} +\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecnumwidth} +\setlength{\cftsubsecnumwidth}{20 pt} +\setlength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecindent} +\addtolength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecnumwidth} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that if we want to suppress the page numbers in the minitoc, we must use the commands from \pack{tocloft}: +% \or\relax +% Notez que si nous voulons supprimer les numéros de page dans la minitoc, nous devons utiliser les commandes +% de \pack{tocloft}: +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cftpagenumbersoff{sec} +\cftpagenumbersoff{subsec} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and change the indentation, suppress the rules and change the minitoc +% title. The \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref} can also be loaded (\emph{after} \upack{minitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et changeons l'indentation, supprimons les filets et changeons le +% titre. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref} peut aussi être chargé (\emph{après} \upack{minitoc}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[francais,tight]{minitoc} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\nomtcrule % pas de filets en haut et en bas de la mini-tdm +\nomtcpagenumbers % pas de numéro de pages +% (non fonctionnel avec tocloft) +\renewcommand{\mtctitle}{Contenu de la rencontre} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load also some packages for the french language (some are local): +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons aussi quelques paquetages pour la langue française: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[francais]{babel} +\usepackage{franc,frnew} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{mypatches} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code redefines the format of the chapter head: +% \or\relax +% Ce code redéfinit le format de l'en-tête de chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% MACRO POUR AVOIR LE MOT « RENCONTRE » AU LIEU DE « CHAPITRE » % +% Sans saut de ligne (modification du code qui se trouve dans la FAQ) % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\makeatletter +\def\@makechapterhead#1{% + \vspace*{10\p@}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \normalfont + \interlinepenalty\@M + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne + \Huge\bfseries\sffamily Rencontre \thechapter\\% \quad + \fi + \Huge\bfseries\sffamily #1\par\nobreak + \vskip 10\p@ +}} +\def\@makeschapterhead#1{% + \vspace*{10\p@}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont + \interlinepenalty\@M + \Huge \sffamily #1\par\nobreak + \vskip 10\p@ +}} \makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define an environment (\env{pageUn}) for the block placed at the beginning of a chapter. This block +% contains a minitoc, then a sequence of informations given by the 6~parameters of the environment. The block +% uses a \env{multicols} environment to typeset on two columns. Some decorations are added: rules, colored +% background for the minitoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons un environnement (\env{pageUn}) pour le bloc placé en début de chapitre. Ce bloc contient +% une minitoc, puis une séquence d'informations données par les 6~paramètres de l'environnement. Ce bloc utilise +% un environnement \env{multicols} pour composer sur deux colonnes. Quelques décorations sont ajoutées: des +% filets, un fond coloré pour la minitoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%: ENVIRONNEMENT POUR LA PAGE 1 DES RENCONTRES % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% param1: date de la rencontre +% param2: nombre de périodes +% param3: liste des documents distribués +% param4: messages +% param5: lecture +% param6: exercices +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newenvironment{pageUn}[6]{% +\parindent = 0.0in +\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} +\begin{multicols}{2} + {\large \bfseries Math. pour médecine nucléaire\\ + \textit{(#2)}} + \vfill\columnbreak + \raggedleft\bfseries Automne 2003\\ + #1 +\end{multicols} +\vspace{-18pt} +\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} + +\setlength{\columnseprule}{.3pt} \setlength{\columnsep}{1cm} +\begin{multicols}{2}% + +%: TABLE DES MATIÈRES (col. gauche) +\colorbox[cmyk]{.1,0,0,0}{% + \parbox{\linewidth}{% + \setcounter{minitocdepth}{3}% + \minitoc% + }} +%\vfill \columnbreak ~ \vfill + +\mtcskip + +%: DOCUMENTS DISTRIBUÉS (début col. droite) + +{\large \bfseries Documents distribués} +\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$} #3 \end{itemize} + +%: MESSAGES AUX ÉTUDIANTS + +\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Messages} +\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$}#4\end{itemize} + +%: LECTURE +\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Lecture}\vspace{-6pt} \par#5 \par + +% EXERCICES +\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Exercices}\vspace{-6pt}\par#6\par + +%\newpage +\end{multicols}% +} +%{\newpage} +{\hrule} + +%\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.2} %interligne + +%\pagestyle{empty} %pas de # de page +%\parindent = 0.0in +\parskip = 0.1in + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%: REDÉFINIR LES SECTIONS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\renewcommand{\thesection}{\Alph{section}} +%\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter-\Alph{section}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%% +%: BEGIN % +%%%%%%%%%% +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \faketableofcontents +\chapter{Première étape (début)} +%\minitoc +\begin{pageUn} + {%1 Date du cours + lundi 25 août + } + {%2 Durée du cours + 2 périodes + } + {%3 Liste des documents à~distribuer + \item Plan de cours + \item Fiche d'identification + \item Grille horaire + \item Feuilles d'exercices supplémentaires + } + {%4 Ne pas oublier + \item Acheter le livre de référence + \item Apporter une disquette + } + {%5 Lecture + Lire les pages ppp à~ppp et ppp à~ppp + } + {%6 Exercice + Faire les exercices nnn de la page ppp + } +\end{pageUn} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Titre de la section} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +Texte dans la section + +%% +\subsection{Une sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + +%% +\subsection{Une autre sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Titre d'une autre section} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +Texte dans la section + +%% +\subsection{Une sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + +%% +\subsection{Une autre sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Encore une autre section} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +Texte dans la section + +\end{document} +%</mtc-bo> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a starred first chapter, +% inducing the ``Chapter Zero'' problem. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant un premier chapitre +% étoilé, induisant le problème du «~Chapitre~zéro~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ch0> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ch0.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[tight,english]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first chapter is starred, but contains real numbered sections. We add an entry in the TOC for this chapter +% and see that its sections are using ``0'' as chapter number: +% \or\relax +% Le premier chapitre est étoilé, mais contient de vraies sections numérotées. Nous ajoutons une entrée pour ce +% chapitre dans la table des matières et voyons que ses sections utilisent «~0~» comme numéro de chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Chapter One (starred)} +\mtcaddchapter[Fake chapter one] +\minitoc +\section{Chap 1, section 1} +That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and +Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize +worldwide parties to celebrate. + +Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved +Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for +one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, +organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to +organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, +dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do +things by halves around here. + +\subsection{Chap 1, section 1, subsection 1} +That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and +Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize +worldwide parties to celebrate. + +Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved +Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for +one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, +organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to +organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, +dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do +things by halves around here. +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second chapter is normal: +% \or\relax +% Le second chapitre est normal: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Chapter Two (numbered one)} +\minitoc +\section{Chapter 2, section 1} +That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and +Thunderbird 1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize +worldwide parties to celebrate. + +Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved +Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for +one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, +organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to +organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, +dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do +things by halves around here. +\end{document} +%</mtc-ch0> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-cri.tex} document file}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-cri.tex}}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\part*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document +% with a starred part and starred chapters. Note the use of the adjustment commands. +% This example is not commented: just follow the insertion of the mini-tables in the \xfile{mtc-cri.log} file. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document +% avec une partie étoilée et des chapitres étoilés. Notez l'utilisation des commandes d'ajustement. +% Cet exemple n'est pas commenté: suivez simplement l'insertion des mini-tables dans le fichier \xfile{mtc-cri.log}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-cri> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% + {report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-cri.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[francais]{babel} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage% + [french2,tight]% + {minitoc} + +\mtcsetdepth{parttoc}{2} + +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\part*{Présentation générale} +\mtcaddpart[Présentation générale] +\adjustptc[-2] +\parttoc + +Texte de la +présentation générale\ldots + +\chapter*{Les auteurs} +\mtcaddchapter[Les auteurs] +Présentation des auteurs\ldots + +\chapter*{Les lecteurs} +\mtcaddchapter[Les lecteurs] +Présentation des lecteurs\ldots + +\part{Première partie} +\parttoc +\chapter*{Introduction} +\mtcaddchapter[Introduction] +\chapter{Premier chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~A} +\section{Deuxième section~A} +\chapter{Deuxième chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~B} +\section{Deuxième section~B} + +\part{Deuxième partie} +\parttoc +\chapter{Premier chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~C} +\section{Deuxième section~C} +\chapter{Deuxième chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~D} +\section{Deuxième section~D} +\end{document} +%</mtc-cri> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}}% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fko.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fko.tex}}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is a document using the \class{scrbook} class. Without any precaution, some entries in the minitocs are +% not in the right font (bold sans serif) like in the main table of contents; moreover, the language of the +% minitoc titles is not correct because the options of the \pack{babel} package are not transferred to the +% \upack{minitoc} package. To solve the language problem, we just set ``\lopt{german}'' as a \emph{global} option in +% the \com{documentclass} command (\pack{babel} and \upack{minitoc} will hence use this global option). +% \or\relax +% C'est un document qui utilise la classe \class{scrbook}. Sans aucune précaution, certaines entrées dans les minitocs ne +% sont pas dans la fonte correcte (grasse et sans empattements) comme dans la table des matières principale; de +% plus, la langue des titres des minitocs n'est pas correcte car les options du paquetage \pack{babel} ne sont +% pas transmises au paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Pour résoudre ce problème de langue, nous mettons +% simplement «~\lopt{german}~» comme option \emph{globale} dans la commande \com{documentclass} (\pack{babel} +% et \upack{minitoc} utiliseront donc cette option globale). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-fko> +\documentclass[german,a4paper,oneside]{scrbook} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-fko.tex}% + [2007/02/19] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we load the packages and set some parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous chargeons les paquetages et établissons quelques paramètres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[germanb]{babel} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} % optional +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \begin{macro}{\sectfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we set explicitly the fonts for the entries\footnote{Here we only gave the commands for the section entries in +% the minitocs, but analog commands may be used for lower entries.} and the font of the titles of the minitocs, +% knowing that the font command \com{sectfont} is defined in \xfile{scrbook.cls}; we change also the title for +% the minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous établissons explicitement les fontes pour les entrées\,\footnote{Nous ne donnons ici que les commandes +% pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, mais des commandes analogues peuvent être utilisées pour des +% entrées inférieures.} et la fonte des titres des minitocs, en sachant que la commande de fonte \com{sectfont} +% est définie dans \xfile{scrbook.cls}; nous changeons aussi le titre des minitocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\sectfont\small} +\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\sectfont\large} +\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Inhalt} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the body of the document, with a chapter (with a minitoc) containing a section. The section entry did not +% appear in bold sans serif in the original document (before the corrections). +% \or\relax +% Et voici le corps du document, avec un chapitre (et sa minitoc) contenant une section. L'entrée de section +% n'apparaissait pas en gras sans empattement dans le document original (avant les corrections). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% +\chapter{Ein serifenloses Kapitel} +\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc +\section{Dieser Text ist in minitoc serifenlos} +Auch der Text \glqq Inhaltsangabe\grqq\ will +so wie koma es definiert. +\end{document} +%</mtc-fko> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level +% entries); you can compare the results. +% \or\relax +% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau +% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-fo1> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo1.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{txfonts} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc \tableofcontents +\part{Introduction} \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A first copy, with default fonts: +% \or\relax +% Une première copie, avec les fontes par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A second copy, roman bold font for chapter entries: +% \or\relax +% Une deuxième copie, fonte romaine grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A third copy, typewriter bold font for chapter entries: +% \or\relax +% Une troisième copie, fonte bâton grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A fourth copy, not bold typewriter font for chapter entries: +% \or\relax +% Une quatrième copie, fonte bâton non grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +\chapter{A very short chapter} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] +\section{First section} \lipsum[2] +\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] +\subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[5] +\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] +\subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] +\end{document} +%</mtc-fo1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level +% entries); you can compare the results. As the fonts are not declared the same way, compare the results +% with those of \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}). +% \or\relax +% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau +% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. Comme les fontes ne sont pas déclarées de la même manière, +% comparez les résultats avec ceux de \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-fo2> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo2.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{txfonts} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{11} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We declare the fonts with the old method: +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons les fontes avec l'ancienne méthode: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections) + \def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections) + \def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs) + \def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs) + \def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures) + \def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures) + \def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables) + \def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables) +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\part{Introduction} +\clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A first version of the parttoc, with the fonts defined above: +% \or\relax +% Une première version de la parttoc, avec les fontes définies ci-dessus: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A second version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a roman bold font: +% \or\relax +% Une deuxième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte romane grasse: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A third version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a typewriter bold font: +% \or\relax +% Une troisième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton grasse: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A fourth version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a non bold typewriter font: +% \or\relax +% Une quatrième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton non grasse: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +\chapter{A very short chapter} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] +\section{First section} \lipsum[2] +\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] \subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[5] +\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] \subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] +\end{document} +%</mtc-fo2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-gap.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-gap.tex}}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-gap.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hia.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hia.tex}}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables +% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{article} class. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains +% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{article}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hia> +\documentclass% + [oneside,a4paper]{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hia.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage% + [tight,insection]% + {minitoc} +\dosectlot +\begin{document} +\listoftables +\section{First section} +\sectlot +\lipsum[1] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My first visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[2] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[3] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\mtchideinmainlot +\caption{My first hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[4-6] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[7] +\section{Second section} +\sectlot +\lipsum[8] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My last hidden table} +\endmtchideinmainlot +\end{table} +\lipsum[9] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A third visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[10] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{A fourth visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[11] +\end{document} +%</mtc-hia> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hir.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hir.tex}}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables +% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{report} class. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains +% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{report}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hir> +\documentclass[a4paper]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hir.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\dominilot +\begin{document} +\listoftables +\chapter{First chapter} +\minilot +\lipsum[1] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My first visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[2] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[3] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\mtchideinmainlot % <-- +\caption{My first hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[4-6] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[7] +\chapter{Second chapter} +\minilot +\lipsum[8] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My last hidden table} +\endmtchideinmainlot % <-- +\end{table} +\lipsum[9] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A third visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[10] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{A fourth visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[11] +\end{document} +%</mtc-hir> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}}% +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hop.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hop.tex}}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of class \class{scrbook}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de la classe \class{scrbook}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hop> +\documentclass[oneside,12pt]{scrbook} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hop.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage[hints]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the minitocs and the minilofs, we print the TOC but not the LOF (while the LOF file is prepared): +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les minitocs et les minilofs, nous imprimons la table des matières mais pas la liste des figures +% (cependant son fichier est préparé): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +\dominilof \fakelistoffigures +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\part*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred part with its entry in the TOC: +% \or\relax +% Une partie étoilée avec son entrée dans la table des matières: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part*{Part 1: Strategic Marketing} +\mtcaddpart[Part 1: Strategic Marketing] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then two chapters with their minitocs and minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Puis deux chapitres avec leurs minitocs et minilofs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Chapter 1} +\minitoc \minilof +\section{Section one of first chapter} \lipsum[1] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture one of first chapter} +\end{figure} + +\section{Section two of first chapter} \lipsum[2] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture two of first chapter} +\end{figure} + +\chapter{Chapter 2} +\minitoc \minilof + +\section{Section one of second chapter} \lipsum[3] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture one of second chapter} +\end{figure} +\cleardoublepage +\section{Section two of second chapter} \lipsum[4] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture two of second chapter} +\end{figure} +\end{document} +%</mtc-hop> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-liv.tex} document file}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-liv.tex}}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of \class{book} class, with +% customized TOC and minitocs. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{book}, avec +% une table de matières et des minitocs personnalisées. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-liv> +\documentclass[10pt,twoside,openright]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-liv.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we want that empty pages be really empty, without page number nor headers, +% so we redefine \com{cleardoublepage}: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous souhaitons que les pages vides le soient vraiment, sans numéro de page ni en-tête, donc nous +% redéfinissons \com{cleardoublepage}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeatletter +\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% +\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage + \if@twoside + \ifodd\c@page\else + \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage + \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi + \fi + \fi + }% +\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% +\makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the encodings, for input and output, because the document is in french and uses accented letters: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les codages, en entrée et en sortie, car le document est en français et utilise des lettres +% accentuées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load two packages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, to customize the TOC and the minitocs, and +% \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, to customize the sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons deux paquetages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour adapter la table des matières et les minitocs, +% et \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, pour adapter les commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{tocloft} +\usepackage{sectsty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package then some complementary local packages for the french language: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} puis quelques paquetages locaux complémentaires pour le français: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[french,undotted,tight]{minitoc} +\usepackage[english,francais]{babel} +\usepackage{franc,frnew,mypatches} +\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\addtolength} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsetrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterfont} +% \begin{macro}{\thesection} +% \begin{macro}{\sectionfont} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We make some customizations: indentation for the subsection entries in the TOC and the minitocs, depth of the +% TOC, numerotation depth, depth of the minitocs, some fonts: +% \or\relax +% Nous faisons quelques adaptations: indentation pour les entrées de sous-sections dans la table des matières et +% les minitocs, profondeur de la table des matières, profondeur de la numérotation, profondeur des minitocs, +% quelques fontes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{1em} % for tocloft +\cftsetrmarg{2.55em plus 1fil} % to avoid hyphenations in the ToC (tocloft). +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1} +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{4} +\chapterfont{\huge\bfseries\sffamily} % for sectsty +\renewcommand{\thesection}{\arabic{section}} +\sectionfont{\Large\raggedright} % for sectsty (to avoid hyphenations in section titles) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some informations for the title page: +% \or\relax +% Des informations pour la page de titre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\title{Systèmes d'occultation} \author{Laurent~\textsc{Bloch}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection*} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the document body\footnote{The text has been shortened, so there is an undefined reference; do not worry.}: +% \or\relax +% Et le corps de document\,\footnote{Le texte a été abrégé, donc il reste une référence non satisfaite; ne vous +% inquiétez pas.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\dominitoc \tableofcontents + +\chapter{Définition et contrôle du travail à~faire}% +\label{chap+controle} +\minitoc + +\section{Le modèle de la grande industrie et le taylorisme}% +\index{taylorisme} +C'est au \textsc{xviii}\fup{e}~siècle que la vision du travail comme +marchandise est vraiment devenue dominante, pour s'imposer au +\textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle dans l'organisation type de la grande usine +industrielle. + +\subsection*{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel}\index{centre d'appel} +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel} +Aujourd'hui le taylorisme\index{taylorisme} au sens +strict est en déclin parce qu'il n'est plus guère adapté aux +besoins de la production industrielle contemporaine non plus qu'aux +nouvelles normes de comportement individuel et collectif. + +\section{Tout travail émet de la pensée} +Le travail a vocation à~produire du sens, pour son auteur comme pour +son destinataire. + +\section{Théorie et pratique de la commande publique} +En France, les prestations de service commandées par les +services publics à~des entreprises font l'objet de contrôles +de leur bonne réalisation selon des procédures et des règles +qui sont des cas particuliers d'un ensemble plus vaste, la +réglementation des marchés publics de l'État, dont nous +allons donner ci-dessous une brève description. + +\subsection{Réglementation des marchés publics} +Le dispositif juridique, réglementaire et comptable qui encadre les +actes contractuels de la puissance publique en France est très~[...] + +\subsubsection{Premier principe: séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable} +Le premier élément du dispositif est le principe de +séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable. Il a été +instauré en 1319 par l'ordonnance portant création de la~[...] + +\subsubsection{Second principe: contrôle \emph{a~priori}} +Le second élément du dispositif est le principe du contrôle +\emph{a~priori}. Lorsque le directeur de l'organisme public +de recherche pris ici comme exemple (l'ordonnateur) décide~[...] + +\subsubsection{Le Code des Marchés Publics} +Le troisième pilier de la commande publique est le Code des Marchés +Publics (CMP), qui régit tous les contrats, conclus par des organismes +publics ou des collectivités territoriales, dont le montant excède un~[...] + +\subsection{La pratique des marchés publics} +Lorsque l'administration française fait réaliser un système +informatique par un prestataire, elle est en position de maître +d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}. Elle rédige (ou fait rédiger) un +cahier des charges\index{cahier des charges} qui décrit les +spécifications du système à~réaliser. Ce cahier des charges constitue~[...] + +\subsection{Quels sont les services publics «~rentables~»?} +Pour parler comme les informaticiens, nous pouvons identifier un +« effet de bord », c'est-à-dire une conséquence non intentionnelle de +la réglementation des marchés publics: les administrations ne disposent +d'aucun moyen pour envisager la notion d'investissement. Le~[...] + +\section{Projet et cahier des charges}\index{cahier des charges} +Jean-Pierre~\textsc{Boutinet} nous guidera ici pour ce qui concerne +l'histoire de la notion de~[...] + +\subsection{La frontière entre conception et fabrication} +La vision classique de la conduite d'un projet informatique de gestion +est la suivante: le maître d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}~[...] + +\subsection{Bâtiment, mécanique, programmation} +Nous y reviendrons au chapitre~\ref{chap+travail}, mais nous savons +déjà que la mise en {\oe}uvre de l'informatique s'est beaucoup +inspirée des procédures de travail les plus élaborées du +\textsc{xx}\fup{e}~siècle~[...] + +\chapter{Le travail informatique} +\minitoc + +\section{De la nature de l'informatique} + +\subsection{Premières croyances}\label{sub+premcroyances} +Les premiers ordinateurs, qui entrèrent en fonction à~l'extrême fin +des années 1940 et durant les années 1950, étaient consacrés à~des +travaux militaires ou scientifiques puisque, à~cette époque, +on pensait~[...] + +\subsection{Comment l'informatique diffère des mathématiques} +J'aimerai à~l'occasion de cette analyse attirer l'attention du +lecteur sur une question qui est une source constante de malentendus +au sujet de la programmation. + +\subsubsection{Les preuves de programme} +L'écriture de programmes informatiques obéit à~de tout autres principes. +Il convient de préciser cette affirmation pour la préserver~[...] + +\section{Programmation dans le monde réel} +\subsection{La vraie nature de la programmation des ordinateurs} + +Alors, comment s'écrivent les programmes informatiques? Et +d'ailleurs, qu'est-ce qu'une erreur\index{erreur} de programmation? +Ces questions sont liées et elles sont, bien sûr, au c{\oe}ur de notre +préoccupation. + +\subsection{Méthodes de programmation} +Un processeur quelconque est caractérisé par le jeu des actions +élémentaires qu'il est capable d'effectuer. Ces actions élémentaires +sont appelées les \emph{primitives} du processeur, ou, si le +processeur est une machine, les «~instructions machine~». Un~[...] + +\subsection{Méthodes de construction de programmes} +Nous avons décrit ci-dessus le processus élémentaire de la +programmation, celui qui consiste à~écrire les instructions ou les +expressions qui vont composer un programme. + +\subsubsection{La programmation structurée} +Le premier courant de pensée qui associa la recherche d'une syntaxe +claire et expressive à~une organisation logique et commode des unités +de programme fut la \emph{programmation +structurée}\index{programmation!structurée} des années 1970, dont~[...] + +\subsubsection{La programmation par objets} +Après la programmation structurée vint un autre courant significatif: +la programmation par objets\index{programmation!par objets}, inventée +en Norvège à~la fin des années 1960 par l'équipe de~[...] + +\subsubsection{Excès dans la pensée} +Il y a eu beaucoup de verbiage autour de l'aptitude supposée du +modèle~[...] +\end{document} +%</mtc-liv> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mem.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mem.tex}}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document. +% First, the preamble: +% \or\relax +% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir}. +% Tout d'abord, le préambule: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-mem> +\documentclass% + [oneside]{memoir} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-mem.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +%% \usepackage{hyperref} +%% \usepackage{memhfixc} +\usepackage% + [tight]{minitoc} +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use the starred form \com{tableofcontents*} specific of the \class{memoir} class. Note that the +% the \com{chapter} command has \emph{two} optional arguments in the \class{memoir} class. +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons la forme étoilée \com{tableofcontents*} spécifique de la classe \class{memoir}. Notez que la +% commande \com{chapter} a \emph{deux} arguments optionnels dans la classe \class{memoir}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents* + +\chapter[oneA][oneB]{oneC} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] \newpage \lipsum[2] +\section{S-1-one} \lipsum[3] +\section{S-1-two} \lipsum[4] + +\chapter[twoA][twoB]{twoC} +\minitoc +\lipsum[4] \newpage \lipsum[5] +\section{S-2-one} \lipsum[6] +\section{S-2-two} \lipsum[7] +\end{document} +%</mtc-mem> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document and shows some of +% the necessary adaptations for fonts. +% First, the preamble: +% \or\relax +% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} et +% montre certaines des adaptations nécessaires pour les fontes. +% Tout d'abord, le préambule: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-mm1> +\documentclass[oneside]{memoir} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-mm1.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We inhibit some font commands of the \class{memoir} class: +% \or\relax +% Nous inhibons certaines commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty} +\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we redefine them: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous les redéfinissons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape} +\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and try to use some minitoc font +% commands, but without any success: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et essayons d'utiliser quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour +% les fontes, mais sans aucun succès: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% hyperref before minitoc, optional +%% \usepackage[linktocpage=true]{hyperref}\usepackage{memhfixc} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalsize\scshape} % <- no scshape +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{subsection}{\normalsize\scshape}% <- no scshape +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But if we use the font commands of the \class{memoir} class, it works! +% \or\relax +% Mais si nous utilisons les commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}, cela marche! +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty} +\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty} +\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape} +\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But for mini-table titles (font and text), we can use the \upack{minitoc} commands: +% \or\relax +% Mais pour les titres des mini-tables (fonte et texte), nous pouvons utiliser les commandes de \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\Large\scshape} +%% this is working beautifully -> +\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Chapter Contents} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The document body: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents* + +\chapter[OneA][OneB]{OneC} +\minitoc +\section{This section} \lipsum[1] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[2] +\section{Third section} \lipsum[3] +\end{document} +%</mtc-mm1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mu.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mu.tex}}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document, +% the minitoc being inserted in the text with the \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document, +% la minitoc étant incrustée dans le texte grâce au paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-mu> +\documentclass[12pt]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-mu.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\usepackage{wrapfig} +\newcommand{\LangSig}[1]{\textsc{[#1]}} % smallcaps +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{environment}{wrapfigure} +% \begin{environment}{minipage} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\linewidth} +% \begin{macro}{\vspace} +% \begin{macro}{\baselineskip} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter, with its minitoc set in a \env{minipage}, included in a \env{wrapfigure} environment on the half +% of the text width, with some vertical adjustements: +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre, avec sa minitoc composée dans une \env{minipage}, incluse dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure} +% sur la moitié de la largeur du texte, avec quelques ajustements verticaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Mulspren}\label{chapter+mulspren} +\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{0.5\linewidth} +\begin{minipage}{\linewidth} +\vspace{-2.\baselineskip} +\minitoc +\vspace{-1.\baselineskip} +\end{minipage} +\end{wrapfigure} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The remaining of the text: +% \or\relax +% Le reste du texte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +The previous chapter examined many end-user programming environments +and found that most contain cognitive programming gulfs. +These gulfs were often created when programing environments used +multiple notations, and could manifest themselves in a variety of +usability problems, ranging from users being unable to understand +a program representation, to not wanting to execute their programs. +Conversely, the previous chapter also found circumstances where multiple +notations helped users understand programs. +It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming +environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating +programming gulfs. +It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming +environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating +programming gulfs. + +This chapter introduces our programming environment, Mulspren. +Mulspren was designed to avoid these gulfs and gain the potential +benefits of multiple notations. +Users program using two notations, one similar to English and one +similar to conventional code. +Changes in one notation are immediately reflected in the other notation, +and users can move rapidly and seamlessly between the notations. +This is programming using dual notations. +When the program is executed, both notations are animated. +Mulspren's language signature is \LangSig{Re/Wr/Wa + Re/Wr/Wa + Wa}. + +Papers describing Mulspren have been published in~\cite{Wright02-2} +and~\cite{Wright03-3}. + +\section{section 1} +\section{section 2 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla +bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla} +\section{section 3} +\section{section 4} +\section{section 5 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla +bla bla bla bla bla} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\bibitem} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% I tried to find some articles of the net to fill the citations: +% \or\relax +% J'ai essayé de trouver quelques articles pour remplir les citations: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{thebibliography}{1} +\bibitem{Wright02-2} +Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn. +\newblock Mulspren: a multiple language simulation programming + environment. +\newblock In {\em HCC '02: Proceedings of the IEEE 2002 Symposia + on Human Centric Computing Languages and Environments (HCC'02)}, + page 101, Washington, DC, USA, 2002. IEEE Computer Society. + +\bibitem{Wright03-3} +Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn. +\newblock Evaluation of two textual programming notations for children. +\newblock In {\em AUIC '05: Proceedings of the Sixth Australasian + conference on User interface}, pages 55--62, Darlinghurst, Australia, + Australia, 2005. + Australian Computer Society, Inc. +\end{thebibliography} +\end{document} +%</mtc-mu> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-nom.tex} document file}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-nom.tex}}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document\,\footnote{It is derived from the example given in the documentation of \pack{nomencl}.} shows +% the interaction of the \upack{minitoc} package with the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}, +% when this package uses its option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'exemple donné dans la documentation de \pack{nomencl}.} montre +% l'interaction du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}, lorsque celui-ci +% utilise son option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-nom> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-nom.tex}% + [2007/04/02] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\makenomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the packages and prepare the nomenclature: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons les paquetages et préparons la nomenclature: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[intoc]{nomencl} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\makenomenclature +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the minitocs and the table of contents: +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les minitocs et la table des matières: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A first chapter, with its minitoc, a section and some +% entries for the nomenclature: +% \or\relax +% Un premier chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section et +% quelques entrées pour la nomenclature: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Angels} +\minitoc +\section{Main equations} +\begin{equation} + a=\frac{N}{A} +\end{equation}% +\nomenclature{$a$}{The number of angels per unit area}% +\nomenclature{$N$}{The number of angels per needle point}% +\nomenclature{$A$}{The area of the needle point}% +The equation $\sigma = m a$% +\nomenclature{$\sigma$}{The total mass of angels per unit area}% +\nomenclature{$m$}{The mass of one angel} +follows easily. +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We print the nomenclature; but that adds a chapter entry in +% the TOC because of the \optp{intoc}{nomencl} option of the +% \pack{nomencl}, hence we add a correction with +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (try to remove the correction and +% look at the result: the next minitocs are wrong): +% \or\relax +% Nous imprimons la nomenclature; mais ceci ajoute une entrée +% de chapitre dans la table des matières à~cause de +% l'option \optp{intoc}{nomencl} de \pack{nomencl}, donc nous +% ajoutons une correction avec \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (essayez +% de retirer correction et regardez le résultat: les minitocs +% suivantes sont fausses): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\printnomenclature \mtcfixnomenclature +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A second chapter, with its minitoc, a section, and an entry +% in the nomenclature. This entry will be present in the +% nomenclature printed above. +% \or\relax +% Un second chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section, et une +% entrée dans la nomenclature. Cette entrée sera présente dans la +% nomenclature imprimée plus haut. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Demons} +\minitoc +\section{False equations} +\begin{equation} i=\sqrt{-1} \end{equation} +\nomenclature{$i$}{The imaginary unit}% +\end{document} +%</mtc-nom> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \feat{open} and +% \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package +% to prepare a minitoc on three columns. +% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation des dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. +% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ocf> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ocf.tex}% + [2007/04/02] +\usepackage{multicol} % to make multi-columns. +\usepackage[french]{babel} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage{fullpage} +% to allow a page breaks before a section +\let\osection\section \def\section{\penalty-1\relax\osection} +% +\usepackage[french,tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\feat{open}'' feature for minitocs opens a \env{multicols} +% environment, with 3~columns: +% \or\relax +% Le dispositif «~\feat{open}~» pour les minitocs ouvre un +% environnement \env{multicols}, avec 3~colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{3}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\feat{close}'' feature for minitocs close the \env{multicols} environment: +% \or\relax +% Le dispositif «~\feat{close}~» pour les minitocs ferme l'environnement \env{multicols}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the \env{multicols} environment adds some vertical spacing before and after it, we added some corrections. +% +% \or\relax +% Comme l'environnement \env{multicols} ajoute un peu d'espacement avant et après lui, nous avons ajouté quelques +% corrections. + +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns} +% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the number of sections is not a multiple of three (or some entries are long), we cannot always balance the +% columns nicely, so we use ragged columns, using the ``\feat{before}'' and ``\feat{after}'' features: +% \or\relax +% Comme le nombre de sections n'est pas un multiple de trois (ou lorsque certaines entrées sont longues), nous ne +% pouvons pas toujours équilibrer les colonnes agréablement, donc nous utilisons des colonnes inégales, grâce aux +% dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» et «~\feat{after}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the body of the document, a chapter with many sections, +% listed in a~minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Et le corps du document, un chapitre avec beaucoup de +% sections, listées dans une minitoc: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\chapter{Premier chapitre} +\minitoc +% A lot of sections +\section{Alfa} +\section{Bravo} +\section{Charlie} +\section{Delta} +\section{Echo} +\section{Fox-Trot} +\section{Golf} +\section{Hotel} +\section{India} +\section{Juliet} +\section{Kilo} +\section{Lima} +\section{Mike} +\section{November} +\section{Oscar} +\section{Papa} +\section{Quebec} +\section{Romeo} +\section{Sierra} +\section{Tango} +\section{Uniform} +\section{Victor} +\section{Whiskey} +\section{X-Ray} +\section{Yankee} +\section{Zulu} +\end{document} +%</mtc-ocf> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \com{mtcsetoffset} command to shift a minitoc to the left, trying to put it +% along the left margin of the text. The \feat{open} and \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package are +% also used to prepare the minitoc on three columns. +% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler vers la gauche une minitoc, en +% essayant de la placer le long de la marge gauche du texte. Les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont aussi utilisés pour préparer la minitoc sur trois colonnes. +% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ofs> +\documentclass[a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ofs.tex}% + [2007/04/17] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage{fullpage} +%\usepackage[a4paper]{geometry} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns} +% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We remove the minitoc indentation and set up the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features: +% \or\relax +% Nous retirons l'indentation de la minitoc et mettons en place les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.1ex}\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.5ex]} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\kern-2.ex} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the document with a chapter and its minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le document par un chapitre et sa minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \faketableofcontents +\chapter{Introduction} +\minitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the minitoc is not aligned on the left margin of the text, we set a negative offset and print again the minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Comme la minitoc n'est pas alignée sur la marge gauche du texte, nous établissons un décalage négatif et +% ré-imprimons la minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-1.75em} +\mtcskip \minitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But then the minitoc does not use the full width of the text; it would be better to modify both the offset and the +% indentation, each by the half of the total correction: +% \or\relax +% Mais alors la minitoc n'utilise pas toute la largeur du texte; il serait mieux de modifier à~la fois le décalage +% et l'indentation, par moitiés de la correction nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.875em} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.875em} +\mtcskip \minitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then a lot of sections, with some text: +% \or\relax +% Puis un tas de sections, avec du texte quelconque: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{Alfa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Bravo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Charlie} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Delta} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Echo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fox-Trot} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Golf} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Hotel} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{India} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Juliet} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Kilo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Lima} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Mike} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{November} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Oscar} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Papa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Quebec} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Romeo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Sierra} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Tango} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Uniform} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Victor} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Whiskey} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{X-Ray} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Yankee} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Zulu} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\end{document} +%</mtc-ofs> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} if you add a sub-section in this example, the corresponding entry in the minitoc +% may stick out if it appears in the last column, and the offset and the indentation should then be corrected again. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} si vous ajoutez une sous-section dans cet exemple, l'entrée correspondante dans la minitoc +% peut dépasser si elle apparaît dans la dernière colonne, et alors le décalage et l'indentation doivent de +% nouveau être corrigés. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedxxxline} +% \begin{macro}{\ext@subfigure} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the +% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth. +% +% The preamble loads the \pack{subfigure} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures +% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et +% ajuster leur profondeur. +% +% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfigure} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la +% liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-sbf> +\documentclass[12pt]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-sbf.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{subfigure} +\makeatletter +\renewcommand{\l@subfigure}{\@dottedxxxline{\ext@subfigure}{2}{3.9em}{3.3em}} +\makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} package (to have nice cross-references) and the \upack{minitoc} package: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} (pour avoir de meilleures références croisées) et le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{varioref} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\newcommand} +% \begin{macro}{\goodap} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigtopskip} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigbottomskip} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some features for the layout of the subfigures, then the depth of the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques dispositifs pour la mise en place des sous-figures, puis la profondeur de la liste des +% figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\goodap}{% + \hspace{\subfigtopskip}% + \hspace{\subfigbottomskip}} +\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the depth of the mini-lists of figures, then some fonts: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la profondeur des mini-listes des figures, puis quelques fontes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{partlof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{partlof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{minilof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{minilof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +%% no tables in this document +%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the minilofs, the table of contents and the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les minilofs, la table des matières et la liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominilof \listoffigures \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter, with is minilof, twice but with different depths: +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre, avec sa minilof, deux fois mais avec des profondeurs différentes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{First Chapter} +\minilof \mtcskip +\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} \minilof +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A figure containing three subfigures and their captions: +% \or\relax +% Une figure contenant trois sous-figures et leurs captions: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{figure} +\centering + \fbox{% + \begin{minipage}{3.5in}% + \raggedright + \begin{center} + \subfigure[First]{% + \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 15mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}% + \hspace{\subfigtopskip}\hspace{\subfigbottomskip}% + \subfigure[Second Figure]{% + \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\ + \subfigure[Third]{\label{3figs-c}% + \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\ + \caption{Three subfigures.}\label{3figs}% + \end{center} + \vspace{4pt}% + This figure contains two top `subfigures' and + Figure~\ref{3figs-c}. + \end{minipage}} +\end{figure} +Figure~\vref{3figs} contains two top ``subfigures'' and +Figure~\vref{3figs-c}. +\end{document} +%</mtc-sbf> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-scr.tex} document file}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-scr.tex}}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} document class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, +% \class{scrreprt}. +% Some precautions are needed, because these classes have specific interfaces with the TOC (class options and +% commands). +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une classe de document +% {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, +% \class{scrreprt}. Certaines précautions sont nécessaires, car ces classes ont des interfaces spécifiques avec la +% table des matières (options de classe et commandes). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-scr> +\documentclass[12pt,halfparskip,liststotoc,bibtotoc]{scrreprt} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-scr.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{4} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{longtable} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{hyperref} package, if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, s'il est utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{hyperref} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% With a {\KOMAScript} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, use the \opt{k-tight} package option in place of \opt{tight}; +% as it is a document in german, use also a language package option: +% \or\relax +% Avec une classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, utilisez l'option de paquetage \opt{k-tight} au lieu +% de \opt{tight}; comme c'est un document en allemand, utilisez aussi une option de langue pour le paquetage: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[k-tight,germanb]{minitoc} +\usepackage[germanb]{babel} +\begin{document} +\pagenumbering{Roman} % page number in Roman, reset to 1 (I) +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In this document class, with the \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, the \com{listoftables} macro +% adds a chapter entry in +% the TOC, so we must add \com{mtcaddchapter} after \com{listoftables}: +% \or\relax +% Dans cette classe de document, avec l'option de classe \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, la macro \com{listoftables} ajoute une +% entrée de niveau chapitre dans la table des matières, donc nous devons ajouter \com{mtcaddchapter} +% après \com{listoftables}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\listoftables \mtcaddchapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\appendix} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% With the \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, it is necessary to add a \com{adjustmtc} command after \com{bibliography}. +% This problem is similar to the one of compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package. +% \or\relax +% Avec l'option de classe \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, il est nécessaire d'ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} +% après \com{bibliography}. +% Ce problème est similaire à~celui de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\clearpage +\pagenumbering{arabic} % page number in arabic digits +\setcounter{page}{1} % forced to 1 + +\chapter{Test 1}\label{cha:test-1} + +Text. + +\section{Tabelle}\label{sec:tabelle} + +\begin{table} + \centering + \begin{longtable}[l]{ll} + \underline{Ausbildungsbetrieb} \hspace{10mm} & Kommanditgesellschaft +\\ + \underline{Ausbildender} & Hammer \\ + Ausbildungsstätte & XXXXX Ort + \end{longtable} + \caption{Ausbildungsbetrieb} +\end{table} + +Text. + +\appendix +\chapter{Dokumente} +\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc + +\section{Anhang}\label{sec:anhang} +Text.\\ +Hier sollte nun der Anhang sein, davor das Verzeichnis dafür. +\end{document} +%</mtc-scr> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-syn.tex} document file}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-syn.tex}}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when +% the table of contents is not at the beginning of the +% document, but is preceded by some starred chapters. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% lorsque la table des matières n'est pas au début du +% document, mais est placée après quelques chapitres étoilés. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We have the preamble, then we invoke \com{dominitoc} to +% prepare the minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Nous avons le préambule, puis nous invoquons \com{dominitoc} +% pour préparer les minitocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-syn> +\documentclass[a4paper,twoside,12pt]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-syn.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some starred chapters, with calls to \com{mtcaddchapter} +% to synchronize. The optional argument is used when an entry +% in the ToC is wanted: +% \or\relax +% Quelques chapitres étoilés, avec des appels +% à~\com{mtcaddchapter} pour synchroniser. L'argument +% optionnel est utilisé lorsque quune entrée dans la table des +% matières est désirée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{ } % Dedication chapter, no title +\mtcaddchapter % Added for a starred chapter + % without entry in the ToC +Dedication goes here + +\chapter*{Abstract} +\mtcaddchapter[Abstract] % Added for a starred chapter + % with an entry in the ToC +Abstract goes here + +\chapter*{Declaration} +\mtcaddchapter[Declaration] % Added for a starred chapter + % with an entry in the ToC +Declaration goes here +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The table of contents comes here. Looking at the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file shows that the minitoc files inserted +% after here are from one chapter to far: we add a correction. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières vient ici. En regardant le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, nous voyons que les fichiers minitoc insérés +% après ce point correspondent à~un chapitre de trop: nous ajoutons +% une correction: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents \decrementmtc % Synchro added (look at the .log file) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following chapters are normal (unstarred): +% \or\relax +% Les chapitres suivants sont normaux (non étoilés): +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Chapter One} +\minitoc +\section{Section 1} Some text. +\section{Section 2} Some text. + +\chapter{Chapter Two} +\minitoc +\section{Another Section 1} +Some more text. +\section{Another Section 2} +Some more text. +\end{document} +%</mtc-syn> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document using +% the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document utilisant le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tbi> +\documentclass[a4paper]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tbi.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We dont want an entry for the TOC in the TOC: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} for the \pack{tocbibind} package: +% \or\relax +% Nous ne voulons pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} pour +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[nottoc]{tocbibind} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As there is no entry for the TOC in the TOC, no correction is necessary; we comment out the usual +% correction\,\footnote{It is recommended to keep this comment; you could change your mind.}: +% \or\relax +% Puisqu'il n'y a pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières, aucune correction n'est +% nécessaire: nous mettons la correction habituelle en commentaire\,\footnote{Il est recommandé de conserver ce +% commentaire; vous pourriez changer d'avis.}: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%% tocbibind compatibility +%% not used if nottoc option : +%% \mtcaddchapter[] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred chapter with an entry in the TOC; we add it; +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée dans la table des matières; nous l'ajoutons: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Introduction} +\mtcaddchapter[Introduction] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some normal chapters: +% \or\relax +% Quelques chapitres normaux: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Title of chapter~1} +\minitoc +\section{as1} \section{as2} +\chapter{Title of chapter~2} +\minitoc +\section{bs1} \section{bs2} +\chapter{Title of chapter~3} +\minitoc +\section{cs1} \section{cs2} +\chapter{Title of chapter~4} +\minitoc +\section{ds1} \section{ds2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC: +% \or\relax +% Un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Conclusion} +\mtcaddchapter[Conclusion] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Yet another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC, but with starred sections, also listed in the TOC: +% \or\relax +% Encore un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières, mais avec des sections étoilées, +% elles aussi listées dans la table des matières: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Appendices} +\mtcaddchapter[Appendices] +\minitoc +\section*{first appendix} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}% + {first appendix} +\section*{second appendix} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}% + {second appendix} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The list of figures has an entry in the TOC (via the \pack{tocbibind} package), so a correction must be applied: +% \or\relax +% La liste des figures a une entrée dans la table des matières (via le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}), donc une +% correction doit être appliquée: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%% tocbibind compatibility +\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\bibitem} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{tocbibind} package adds an entry in the TOC for the bibliography, so we must add the recommended +% correction: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières pour la bibliographie, donc nous +% devons ajouter la correction recommandée: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{thebibliography}{3} + \bibitem {s1}{title ...} +\end{thebibliography} +%% tocbibind compatibility +\adjustmtc +\end{document} +%</mtc-tbi> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of the \class{article} class. +% It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{article}. +% C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tlc> +\documentclass{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlc.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\textwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\textheight} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Dimensions of the text on the page: +% \or\relax +% Dimensions du texte sur la page: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength{\textwidth}% + {124.20126pt} +\setlength{\textheight}% + {19\baselineskip} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{4} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and set some parameters (indentation, base font and depth) for the secttocs: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et établissons quelques paramètres (indentation, fonte de base et +% profondeur) pour les secttocs: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{minitoc} +\setlength{\stcindent}{0pt} +\mtcsetfont{secttoc}{*}% + {\footnotesize} +\mtcsetdepth{secttoc}{3} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the secttocs, without title, and the table of contents which is not printed: +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les secttocs, sans titre, et la table des matières qui n'est pas imprimée: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dosecttoc[e] \faketableofcontents + +\section{Afghanistan} \secttoc +\subsection{Geography} +\subsubsection{Total area} + 647,500 km2 +\subsubsection{Land area} + 647,500 km2 +\subsection{History} \ldots + +\section{Albania} \secttoc +\subsection{Geography} +\subsubsection{Total area} + 28,750 km2 +\subsubsection{Land area} + 27,400 km2 +\subsection{History} \ldots +\end{document} +%</mtc-tlc> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}}% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document\footnote{It is derived from one of the examples distributed with +% the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}.} shows +% the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the +% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth. +% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. +% +% The preamble loads the \pack{subfig} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'un des exemples distribués avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}.} +% montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures +% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et +% ajuster leur profondeur. +% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. +% +% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfig} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la +% liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tsf> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tsf.tex}[2008/04/03]% +\usepackage{fullpage} +\usepackage[config=altsf]{subfig} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is utility code to make graduated rules and a box around a figure. +% \or\relax +% Ceci est du code utilitaire pour faire un trait gradué et une boîte autour d'une figure. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\testtemp +\newcommand{\ru}[1]{% + \testtemp #1% + \advance\testtemp .5pt \divide\testtemp 2% + \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{% + \vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt\hfil}\hfil}% + \hbox to 0pt{\hss\vrule height3mm depth0pt width.25pt\hss}% + \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{% + \hfil\vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt}\hfil}} +%% +\fboxsep=-\fboxrule +\newcommand{\figbox}[1]{% + \fbox{\vbox to 1in{% + \vfil\hbox to 2in{\parbox{2in}{\centering #1}}\vfil + \vbox to 0pt{\vss\hbox to 2in{\hfil\ru{1.1in}\hfil}}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document. We set the depth of the list of figures and prepare the minilofs and the list of +% figures: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document. Nous définissons la profondeur de la liste des figures et préparons les minilofs et la liste +% des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} \dominilof \listoffigures +\newpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter containing a figure with subfigures. We print its minilof twice, with different depths: +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre contenant une figure avec des sous-figures. Nous imprimons sa minilof deux fois, avec des +% profondeurs différentes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Reference Test} +\minilof \mtcskip +\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} +\minilof + +\begin{figure}[ht]% + \centering + \subfigure{% + \label{fig+A}\figbox{SUBFIGURE ONE:\\(no opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[]{% + \label{fig+B}\figbox{SUBFIGURE TWO:\\(empty opt)}}\\ + + \subfigure[Subfigure Three.]{% + \label{fig+C}\figbox{SUBFIGURE THREE:\\(opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[][Subfigure Four.]{% + \label{fig+D}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FOUR:\\(empty opt and opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[][]{% + \label{fig+E}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FIVE:\\(both empty opt)}}\\ + + \subfigure[The Sixth Subfigure.][Subfigure Six.]{% + \label{fig+F}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SIX:\\(both opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[The Seventh Subfigure][]{% + \label{fig+G}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SEVEN:\\(opt and empty opt)}} + + \caption{Optional argument test.}% + \label{fig+main}% +\end{figure} + +The figure~\ref{fig+main} on page~\pageref{fig+main} is composed +of the seven subfigures~\subref{fig+A} (aka: \ref{fig+A}), +\subref{fig+B} (aka: \ref{fig+B}), \subref{fig+C} (aka: \ref{fig+C}), +\subref{fig+D} (aka: \ref{fig+D}), \subref{fig+E} (aka: \ref{fig+E}), +\subref{fig+F} (aka: \ref{fig+F}), and \subref{fig+G} (aka: \ref{fig+G}). + +\section{Centering Test} +Note that figures~\ref{fig+B}, \ref{fig+E} and \ref{fig+G} are centered. +This means that \verb|\subfigcapskip| has been set to zero and is not +offsetting the simple label to the left. Also the remaining captioned +subfigures (figures~\ref{fig+C}, \ref{fig+D}, and \ref{fig+F}) should +have centered labels. +\end{document} +%</mtc-tsf> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \flushcolumns +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-vti.tex} document file}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-vti.tex}}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \exam{mtc-vti.tex} example shows how to change the sectionnal titles when they appear in a mini-table: a +% section title (or a chapter title) can have variants in a parttoc or in a minitoc (similar effects are possible +% with figure ou table titles). Such entries are said ``polymorphic'' (section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% First, the preamble of the document, with utility packages: +% \or\relax +% L'exemple \exam{mtc-vti.tex} montre comment changer des titres de sectionnements lorsqu'ils apparaissent dans +% une mini-table: un titre de section (ou de chapitre) peut avoir des variantes dans une parttoc ou une minitoc +% (des effets similaires sont possibles avec des titres de figures ou de tableaux). +% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~» (section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% Tout d'abord, le préambule du document, avec les paquetages utilitaires: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-vti> +\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-vti.tex}[2008/06/26]% +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{txfonts} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the demonstration, we will use a parttoc and a minitoc, so we must prepare them: +% \or\relax +% Pour la démonstration, nous utiliserons une parttoc et une minitoc, donc nous devons les préparer: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\doparttoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will use a multi-form title for the first section: a form to appear in the parttoc (``Alfa in parttoc''), +% a form to appear in the minitoc of the chapter (``Alfa in minitoc''), a form to appear elsewhere (``Alfa out subtoc''), +% and a form as title at the beginning othe section (``Alfa the first section''). So we define a command +% \ucom{alfati} using the flags \com{ifinparttoc} and \com{ifinminitoc} to select which title is used in each of +% its instances. +% \or\relax +% Nous utiliserons un titre multi-forme pour la première section: une forme devant apparaître dans la parttoc +% («~Alfa in parttoc~»), une forme pour apparaître dans la minitoc du chapitre (<<~Alfa in minitoc~»), +% une forme pour apparaître ailleurs («~Alfa out subtoc~»), et une forme comme titre en début de la section +% («~Alfa the first section~»). Donc nous définissons une commande \ucom{alfati} utilisant les +% indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc} et \com{ifinminitoc} pour sélectionner le titre à~utiliser dans chacune des ses instances. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\alfati{\ifinparttoc Alfa in parttoc + \else\ifinminitoc Alfa in minitoc + \else Alfa out subtoc + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But we can define a more general macro, \ucom{varsecti}, with three arguments for the three variants +% of a section title\,\footnote{You will eventually need to define similar macros for other sectionning commands or for +% figures or table titles; proceed with care from this model.}: +% \or\relax +% Mais nous pouvons définir une macro plus générale, \ucom{varsecti}, avec trois arguments pour les trois variantes +% d'un titre de section\,\footnote{Vous aurez éventuellement besoin de définir des macros similaires pour d'autres +% commandes de sectionnement ou pour les titres de figures ou de tableaux; procédez avec soin à~partir de ce modèle.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\varsecti}[3]% + {\ifinparttoc{#1}\relax + \else\ifinminitoc{#2}\relax + \else{#3}\relax + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the document with a table of contents, a part with its parttoc and a chapter with its minitoc. And an other +% chapter. You can verify that the entry for the ``Alfa'' section varies in the main toc, the parttoc, the +% minitoc and the effective title of the section. +% Note that the variable title (here \ucom{alfati}) should be defined \virage\emph{before} any use, like in the main +% toc or any minitable. +% \or\relax +% Puis le document avec une table des matières, une partie avec sa parttoc et un chapitre avec sa minitoc. Puis un +% autre chapitre. Vous pouvez vérifier que l'entrée pour la section «~Alfa~» change dans la table des matières +% principale, la parttoc, la minitoc et dans le titre effectif de la section. +% Notez que le titre variable (ici \ucom{alfati}) doit être défini \virage\emph{avant} toute utilisation, comme +% dans la table des matières principale ou dans une des minitables. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents +\part{Part~A} +\parttoc + +\chapter{One} +\minitoc +\section[\protect\alfati]{Alfa the first section} +\lipsum[1] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We can use the more general macro \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{This macro is not part of the \upack{minitoc} package, it is +% just an example.}, with its three arguments given when the section begins; but that macro must +% be \virage\emph{protected} (or look at the \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} package by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), +% or declared ``robust'' by \com{DeclareRobustCommand} as above: +% \or\relax +% Nous pouvons utiliser la macro plus générale \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{Cette macro ne fait pas partie du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, c'est simplement un exemple.}, avec ses trois arguments fournis lors du début de la section; +% mais cette macro doit être \virage\emph{protégée} (ou regardez le paquetage \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} +% de \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), ou déclarée «~robuste~» par \com{DeclareRobustCommand} comme plus haut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section[\varsecti{Bravo in parttoc}% + {Bravo in minitoc}% + {Bravo out of subtoc}]% % in maintoc and headers + {Bravo the second section} % local title +\lipsum[2] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But is is even easier to use a ``polymorphic'' entry in the optionnal argument\,\footnote{They are no secttocs +% in a book-class document, but all the four arguments of \com{mtcpolymtoc} must be specified, even empty!}: +% \or\relax +% Mais il est encore plus facile d'utiliser une entrée «~polymorphique~» dans l'argument optionnel\,\footnote{Il +% n'y~a pas de secttocs dans un document de classe book, mais les quatre arguments de \com{mtcpolymtoc} doivent +% tous être spécifiés, même vides!}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Two} +\minitoc +\section[\mtcpolymtoc% + {Charlie in parttoc}% + {Charlie in minitoc}% + {Charlie in secttoc}% % <- see/voir note + {Charlie out subtoc}]% + {Charlie} +\lipsum[3] +\end{document} +%</mtc-vti> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% \minilot +% \mtcskip +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \def\mstrut{\rule[-5pt]{0pt}{5pt}} +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption[Message identifiers]{Message identifiers (click on a message identifier to see its meaning).}\label{t+allmess} +% \or\relax +% \caption[Identificateurs des messages]{Identificateurs des messages (cliquez sur un identificateur de message +% pour voir sa signification).}\label{t+allmess} +% \fi\relax +% ^^A {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}} +% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}} +% \toprule +% \mstrut\lmess{E0001}&&\lmess{E0002}&&\lmess{E0003}&&\lmess{E0004}&&\lmess{E0005}&&\lmess{E0006}&&\lmess{E0007}&&\lmess{E0008}&&\lmess{E0009}&&\lmess{E0010}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0011}&&\lmess{E0012}&&\lmess{E0013}&&\lmess{E0014}&&\lmess{E0015}&&\lmess{E0016}&&\lmess{E0017}&&\lmess{E0018}&&\lmess{E0019}&&\lmess{E0020}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0021}&&\lmess{E0022}&&\lmess{E0023}&&\lmess{E0024}&&\lmess{E0025}&&\lmess{E0026}&&\lmess{E0027}&&\lmess{E0028}&&\lmess{E0029}&&\lmess{E0030}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0031}&&\lmess{E0032}&&\lmess{E0033}&&\lmess{E0034}&&\lmess{E0035}&&\lmess{E0036}&&\lmess{E0037}&&\lmess{E0038}&&\lmess{E0039}&&\lmess{E0040}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0041}&&\lmess{E0042}&&\lmess{E0043}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{F0001}&&\lmess{F0002}&&\lmess{F0003}&&\lmess{F0004}&&\lmess{F0005}&&\lmess{F0006}&&\lmess{F0007}&&\lmess{F0008}&&\lmess{F0009}&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{I0000}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0001}&&\lmess{I0002}&&\lmess{I0003}&&\lmess{I0004}&&\lmess{I0005}&&\lmess{I0006}&&\lmess{I0007}&&\lmess{I0008}&&\lmess{I0009}&&\lmess{I0010}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0011}&&\lmess{I0012}&&\lmess{I0013}&&\lmess{I0014}&&\lmess{I0015}&&\lmess{I0016}&&\lmess{I0017}&&\lmess{I0018}&&\lmess{I0019}&&\lmess{I0020}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0021}&&\lmess{I0022}&&\lmess{I0023}&&\lmess{I0024}&&\lmess{I0025}&&\lmess{I0026}&&\lmess{I0027}&&\lmess{I0028}&&\lmess{I0029}&&\lmess{I0030}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0031}&&\lmess{I0032}&&\lmess{I0033}&&\lmess{I0034}&&\lmess{I0035}&&\lmess{I0036}&&\lmess{I0037}&&\lmess{I0038}&&\lmess{I0039}&&\lmess{I0040}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0041}&&\lmess{I0042}&&\lmess{I0043}&&\lmess{I0044}&&\lmess{I0045}&&\lmess{I0046}&&\lmess{I0047}&&\lmess{I0048}&&\lmess{I0049}&&\lmess{I0050}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0051}&&\lmess{I0052}&&\lmess{I0053}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{M0001}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{W0001}&&\lmess{W0002}&&\lmess{W0003}&&\lmess{W0004}&&\lmess{W0005}&&\lmess{W0006}&&\lmess{W0007}&&\lmess{W0008}&&\lmess{W0009}&&\lmess{W0010}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0011}&&\lmess{W0012}&&\lmess{W0013}&&\lmess{W0014}&&\lmess{W0015}&&\lmess{W0016}&&\lmess{W0017}&&\lmess{W0018}&&\lmess{W0019}&&\lmess{W0020}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0021}&&\lmess{W0022}&&\lmess{W0023}&&\lmess{W0024}&&\lmess{W0025}&&\lmess{W0026}&&\lmess{W0027}&&\lmess{W0028}&&\lmess{W0029}&&\lmess{W0030}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0031}&&\lmess{W0032}&&\lmess{W0033}&&\lmess{W0034}&&\lmess{W0035}&&\lmess{W0036}&&\lmess{W0037}&&\lmess{W0038}&&\lmess{W0039}&&\lmess{W0040}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0041}&&\lmess{W0042}&&\lmess{W0043}&&\lmess{W0044}&&\lmess{W0045}&&\lmess{W0046}&&\lmess{W0047}&&\lmess{W0048}&&\lmess{W0049}&&\lmess{W0050}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0051}&&\lmess{W0052}&&\lmess{W0053}&&\lmess{W0054}&&\lmess{W0055}&&\lmess{W0056}&&\lmess{W0057}&&\lmess{W0058}&&\lmess{W0059}&&\lmess{W0060}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0061}&&\lmess{W0062}&&\lmess{W0063}&&\lmess{W0064}&&\lmess{W0065}&&\lmess{W0066}&&\lmess{W0067}&&\lmess{W0068}&&\lmess{W0069}&&\lmess{W0070}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0071}&&\lmess{W0072}&&\lmess{W0073}&&\lmess{W0074}&&\lmess{W0075}&&\lmess{W0076}&&\lmess{W0077}&&\lmess{W0078}&&\lmess{W0079}&&\lmess{W0080}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0081}&&\lmess{W0082}&&\lmess{W0083}&&\lmess{W0084}&&\lmess{W0085}&&\lmess{W0086}&&\lmess{W0087}&&\lmess{W0088}&&\lmess{W0089}&&\lmess{W0090}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0091}&&\lmess{W0092}&&\lmess{W0093}&&\lmess{W0094}&&\lmess{W0095}&&\lmess{W0096}&&\lmess{W0097}&&\lmess{W0098}&&\lmess{W0099}&&\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \end{table} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% This chapter lists and comments the messages given by the \upack{minitoc} package, and is associates, +% \pack{mtcoff} and \pack{mtcpatchmem}\footnote{The +% texts of the messages given in this chapter may slighty differ from the real text, because some messages contain +% variable elements and the layout may vary.}. +% The table~\vref{t+allmess} lists all messages; in this table, you can click on a message identifier to find quickly its meaning. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The first line of each message contains usually the name of the package and an unique identifier (this +% identifier may be useful to search in this chapter of the documentation, but has no special meaning, +% except the leading letter: \texttt{I}~for informative, \texttt{W}~for warning, and \texttt{E}~for error). +% \item Informative messages are written only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file; the prefix is~\texttt{F} +% for the warning messages from the \pack{mtcoff} package and~\texttt{M} for the informative message from +% the \pack{mtcpatchmem} package. +% \item Warning messages are shown on the screen (but often too quickly to be seen, because normally \LaTeX\ does not stop +% for warnings) and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% \item Error messages are shown on the screen and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, +% but \LaTeX\ stops, so you can ask for help by typing~``\texttt{h}''. +% \item In this chapter, some words in the messages are typeset in italic characters; they represent the variable +% parts of the message: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \emph{ARG1}~The first argument of the command. +% \item \emph{ARG2}~The second argument of the command. +% \item \emph{ARG3}~The third argument of the command. +% \item \emph{\CCC}~The name of the class of your document. +% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~The name of the command. +% \item \emph{\CTR}~The name of a \LaTeX\ counter. +% \item \emph{document}~The name of your document, without its \suffix{.tex} extension. +% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~The extension part of the name of a file. +% \item \emph{\FILE}~The name of a file (often a minitoc auxiliary file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} +% file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file, or the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file). +% \item \emph{\INAME}~The name of an internal macro redefined by a \verb|\mtcset...| command. +% \item \emph{\LLL}~The name of the language (for \com{mtcselectlanguage}). +% \item \emph{\NNN}~The number of the line in the source file. +% \item \emph{macro}~The name of a minitoc font command redefined by \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~The new value of a title redefined by \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item \emph{\NB}~The number of mini-tables of the given type in your document (when you are using short +% extensions and that number is greater than~99). +% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~The new value of an offset redefined by \com{mtcsetoffset}. +% \item \emph{\PREPA}~The name of a minitoc preparation command. +% \item \emph{\SEQ}~A sequence of commands used to redefine an internal macro via a \verb|\mtcset...| command. +% \item \emph{\STRING}~A string of characters, often part of a command name. +% \item \emph{\VAL}~The new value of a counter. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% The messages are produced using macros from the \pack{mtcmess} package, described in chapter~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% Ce chapitre liste et commente les messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, et ses associés \pack{mtcoff} et +% \pack{mtcpatchmem}\,\footnote{Les +% textes des messages donnés dans ce chapitre peuvent être légèrement différents du texte réel, car certains +% messages contiennent des éléments variables et la mise en page peut aussi varier.}. +% Le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} liste tous les messages; vous pouvez cliquer dans ce tableau sur un identifieur de message pour +% trouver rapidement sa signification. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item La première ligne de chaque message contient normalement le nom du paquetage et un identificateur unique +% (il peut être utile pour chercher dans ce chapitre de la documentation, mais n'a aucune signification +% particulière, sauf la lettre de tête: \texttt{I}~pour informatif, \texttt{W}~pour avertissement (\emph{warning}), +% et \texttt{E}~pour erreur); le préfixe est~\texttt{F} pour les messages d'avertissement émis par le +% paquetage \pack{mtcoff} et~\texttt{M} pour le message informatif émis par le paquetage \pack{mtcpatchmem}. +% \item Les messages informatifs ne sont écrits que dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \item Les messages d'avertissement (\emph{warning}) sont affichés sur l'écran (mais souvent trop rapidement pour +% être vus, car normalement \LaTeX\ ne s'arrête pas pour les avertissements) et sont écrits dans +% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \item Les messages d'erreur (\emph{error}) sont affichés sur l'écran et écrits dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, mais \LaTeX\ s'arrête, donc vous pouvez demander de l'aide +% en tapant~«~\texttt{h}~» (\emph{help}). +% \item Dans ce chapitre, certains mots dans les messages sont écrits en italique; ils représentent les parties +% variables du message: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \emph{ARG1}~Le premier argument de la commande. +% \item \emph{ARG2}~Le deuxième argument de la commande. +% \item \emph{ARG3}~Le troisième argument de la commande. +% \item \emph{\CCC}~Le nom de la classe de votre document. +% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~Le nom de la commande. +% \item \emph{\STRING}~Une chaîne de caractères, faisant souvent partie d'un nom de commande. +% \item \emph{\CTR}~Le nom d'un compteur \LaTeX. +% \item \emph{document}~Le nom de votre document, sans son suffixe \suffix{.tex}. +% \item \emph{\FILE}~Le nom d'un fichier (Souvent un fichier auxiliaire minitoc, le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, +% ou le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}). +% \item \emph{\LLL}~Le nom de la langue (pour \com{mtcselectlanguage}). +% \item \emph{\NNN}~Le numéro de la ligne dans le fichier source. +% \item \emph{macro}~Le nom d'une commande de fonte minitoc redéfinie par \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~La nouvelle valeur d'un titre redéfinie par \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item \emph{\NB}~Le nombre de mini-tables du type donné dans votre document (lorsque vous utilisez des +% suffixes courts et que ce nombre dépasse~99). +% \item \emph{\INAME}~Le nom d'une macro interne redéfinie par une commande \verb|\mtcset...|. +% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~La nouvelle valeur d'un déplacement (décalage) redéfinie par \com{mtcsetoffset}. +% \item \emph{\PREPA}~Le nom d'une commande minitoc de préparation. +% \item \emph{\SEQ}~Une séquence de commandes utilisée pour redéfinir une macro interne via une commande +% \verb|\mtcset...|. +% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~La partie suffixe du nom d'un fichier. +% \item \emph{\VAL}~La nouvelle valeur d'un compteur. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% Les messages sont produits en utilisant des macros du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}, +% décrit au chapitre~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}. +% \fi +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Messages from the \upack{minitoc} package} +% \or\relax +% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Informative messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages informatifs} +% \fi +% \begin{xmessage}[I0000] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package: minitoc 2015/07/13 v61 Package minitoc (JPFD/et al.)| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is the announce message of the \upack{minitoc} package, with its name, date and version. ``JPFD'' are my +% initials. This message has no real identifier because it is emitted by \com{ProvidesPackage}, but, for indexing it, +% we use \texttt{I0000}. +% \or\relax +% Ceci est le message annonçant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec son nom, sa date et sa version. «~JPFD~» sont +% mes initiales. Ce message n'a pas d'identificateur réel car il est émis par \com{ProvidesPackage}, mais, pour +% l'indexer, nous utilisons \texttt{I0000}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0001|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) *** minitoc package, version 61 ***.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Remember the version of the package. +% \or\relax +% Rappel de la version du paquetage. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0002|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Autoconfiguration of extensions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package tries to determine if short or long extensions for file names are used by the operating +% system. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye de déterminer si des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers ou longs sont +% utilisés par le système d'exploitation. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0003|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the chapter level, +% but \emph{not} the mini-table commands at the section level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des +% mini-tables au niveau chapitre, \emph{mais pas} les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% \begin{xmessage}[I0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0004|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros NOT available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} available, so you cannot use the mini-table commands at the +% chapter level, but, if the \com{section} sectionning command is available, you can use mini-table commands at +% the section level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les +% commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre, mais, si la commande de sectionnement \com{section} est +% disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0005|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) compatible with hyperref.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This version of \upack{minitoc} is compatible with the \pack{hyperref} package. +% \or\relax +% Cette version de \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0006|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb| is empty on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The auxiliary file for a mini-table is found empty (or inexistent) when \upack{minitoc} tries to insert it. If +% the \optd{checkfiles} option is active, it is skipped. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est trouvé vide (ou inexistant) lorsque \upack{minitoc} essaye de +% l'insérer. Si l'option \optd{checkfiles} est active, il est sauté. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0007|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are activated|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The horizontal rules will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les filets horizontaux seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0008|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are inhibited|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The horizontal rules will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les filets horizontaux seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0009|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Listing minitoc auxiliary files.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Creating the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.maf file.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used the \optd{listfiles} package option. A list of the minitoc auxiliary files is written in the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. It may be helpful to delete these files. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% This option is the default since version~\#48. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. Une liste des fichiers auxiliaires pour minitoc est +% écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Ceci peut être utile pour détruire ces fichiers. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% Cette option est active par défaut depuis la version~\#48. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0010] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0010|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: The |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language is selected.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has been successfully loaded for the \emph{\LLL} language\footnote{The +% \xfile{english.mld} file is always loaded first, to have english as default language.} +% by the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command at line~\emph{\NNN}. The titles for the mini-tables are changed. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} a été correctement chargé pour la langue \emph{\LLL},\footnote{Le +% fichier \xfile{english.mld} est toujours chargé d'abord, pour avoir l'anglais comme langue par défaut.} par la commande +% \com{mtcselectlanguage} à~la ligne~\emph{\NNN}. Les titres pour les mini-tables sont changés. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0011] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0011|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language object selected.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has successfully (indirectly) loaded +% the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc object file. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a (indirectement) chargé avec succès le fichier minitoc objet de langue +% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0012] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0012|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating system is able to use long extensions; this will be the +% default. +% \or\relax +% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation est capable d'utiliser des suffixes longs; ce sera +% le choix par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0013] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0013|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth redefines the counter|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\CTR}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetdepth} macro changes the value of the specified depth counter and forces it to \emph{\VAL}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetdepth} change la valeur du compteur de profondeur spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL} +% demandée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0014] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0014|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature redefines the macro| +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfeature} macro has redefined the internal macro \emph{\INAME} with the given \emph{\SEQ}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetfeature} a redéfini la macro interne \emph{\INAME} par la \emph{\SEQ} donnée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0015] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0015|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{macro}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfont} command redefines the (old style) \emph{macro} by the given \emph{\SEQ} of font +% commands. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} redéfinit la macro (en ancien style) par la \emph{\SEQ} de commandes de fontes +% donnée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0016] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0016|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as "|\emph{ARG3}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{mtcsetformat} redefines an internal macro with the value given by its third argument. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetformat} redéfinit une macro interne avec la valeur de son troisième argument. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0017] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0017|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\NTITLE}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A mini-table title is redefined via the \com{mtcsettitle} macro. +% \or\relax +% Un titre de mini-table est redéfini via la macro \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0018] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0018|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro redefines the (old style) \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} macro which the given sequence +% \emph{\SEQ}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} redéfinit la macro \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} (ancien style) par la séquence \emph{\SEQ} +% donnée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0019] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0019|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) No hints have been written|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{hints} package option has detected no potential problem. +% \or\relax +% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} n'a détecté aucun problème potentiel. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0020] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0020|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) old version of the memoir class.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The version of the \class{memoir} class is old. The \upack{minitoc} package does not need to patch this class. +% \or\relax +% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est ancienne. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas besoin de corriger +% cette classe. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0021] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0021|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are activated|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The page numbers will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les numéros de pages seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0022] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0022|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are inhibited|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The page numbers will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les numéros de pages seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0023] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0023|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) part level macros available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{part} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the part level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des +% mini-tables au niveau partie. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0024] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0024|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINITOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dominitoc} command prepares the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files for minitocs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dominitoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minitoc} pour les minitocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0025] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0025|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{doparttoc} command prepares the \texttt{parttoc} auxiliary files for parttocs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{doparttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{parttoc} pour les parttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0026] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0026|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dosecttoc} command prepares the \texttt{secttoc} auxiliary files for secttocs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dosecttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{secttoc} pour les secttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0027] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0027| +% \verb|(minitoc) recent version of the memoir class.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The version of the \class{memoir} class is recent. The \upack{minitoc} package will try to patch it. +% \or\relax +% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va essayer de corriger cette +% classe. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0028] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0028|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{section} sectionning command is available but the \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} +% available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the section level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} est disponible mais la commande de sectionnement +% \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au +% niveau section. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0029] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0029|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros NOT available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{section} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the section level commands of +% the \upack{minitoc} package are not available. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au +% niveau section du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0030] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0030|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) the memoir class is loaded:|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) compatibility attempted.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \class{memoir} document class is used. The \upack{minitoc} package tries to ensure compatibility. +% \or\relax +% La classe de document \class{memoir} est utilisée. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye d'assurer la compatibilité. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0031] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0031|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for UNIX-like|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (long extensions) file names.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating uses UNIX-like (long extensions) file names. +% \or\relax +% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers à~la mode UNIX +% (suffixes longs). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0032] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0032|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) This version of the memoir class uses|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) a version of \chapter which is|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) incompatible with the minitoc package.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) We try to patch.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \class{memoir} class uses a version of the \com{chapter} command which needs to be corrected because its syntax has +% been changed. A patch is loaded. +% \or\relax +% La classe \class{memoir} utilise une version de la commande \com{chapter} qui a besoin d'être corrigée car sa +% syntaxe a changé. Une correction (\emph{patch}) est chargée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0033] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0033|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Writing |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% An auxiliary file for a mini-table is written by a \upack{minitoc} preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Un fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est écrit par une commande \upack{minitoc} de préparation +% (telle que \com{dominitoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0034] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0034|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dominilof} command prepares the \upack{minilof} auxiliary files for minilofs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dominilof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minilof} pour les minilofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0035] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0035|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dopartlof} command prepares the \texttt{partlof} auxiliary files for partlofs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dopartlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlof} pour les partlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0036] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0036|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dosectlof} command prepares the \texttt{sectlof} auxiliary files for sectlofs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dosectlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlof} pour les sectlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0037] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0037|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dominilot} command prepares the \texttt{minilot} auxiliary files for minilots from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dominilot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{minilot} pour les minilots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0038] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0038|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dopartlot} command prepares the \texttt{partlot} auxiliary files for partlots from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dopartlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlot} pour les partlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0039] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0039|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dosectlot} command prepares the \texttt{sectlot} auxiliary files for sectlots from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dosectlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlot} pour les sectlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Informative messages for hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Messages informatifs pour les indications (\emph{hints})} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0040] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0040|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ``abstract'' package has been|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You need to look at the|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) documentation to adjust.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using the \pack{abstract} package with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, +% you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq.27}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{abstract} avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, +% vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq.27}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0041] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0041|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsbook class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using the \class{amsbook} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{amsbook}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0042] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0042|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The appendix package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \pack{appendix} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+appendix}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{appendix}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+appendix}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0043] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0043|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The KOMAScript |\emph{\CCC}\verb| class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \emph{\CCC} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}. +% The classes involved here are \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl}, i.e., the \KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi la classe \emph{\CCC}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. +% Les classes concernées ici sont \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl}, c'est-à-dire les +% classes \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatibles avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0044] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0044|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The memoir class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using the \class{memoir} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0045] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0045|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The |\texttt{\bs}\PREPA\verb| command|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) has been invoked more than once|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A minitoc preparation command has been invoked more than once. +% \or\relax +% Une commande minitoc de préparation a été invoquée plus d'une fois. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0046] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0046|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocbibind package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \pack{tocbibind} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0047] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0047|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocloft package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \pack{tocloft} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0048] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0048|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Using \mtcprepare may induce some|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hints about the preparation commands,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) because it invokes ALL the preparation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) commands allowed by the document class,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without any previous check.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcprepare} command invoke all the possible preparation commands, depending only on the document class and the +% available contents files. It does not known exactly what you want, so it can prepare too many mini-tables +% files. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque toutes les commandes de préparation possibles, selon la classe du document et +% les fichiers de contenu disponibles. Elle ne sait pas exactement ce que vous désirez, donc elle peut préparer trop +% de fichiers de mini-tables. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0049] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0049|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ==> You requested the hints option.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints are eventually given below.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you have requested the \optd{hints} package option (which is set by default), some ``hints'' are eventually +% given in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can find them easily by searching for the string +% ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' with a text editor. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous avez demandé l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} (qui est activée par défaut), quelques +% «~indications~» (\emph{hints}) sont éventuellement écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. Vous +% pourrez les trouver facilement en recherchant la chaîne «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0050] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0050|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld" file is missing.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or +% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution +% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue \emph{\LLL} ne sera pas +% disponible. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0051] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0051|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo" file is missing.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or +% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution +% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue ne sera pas +% disponible. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0052] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0052|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset redefines the offset|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\OFFSET}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetoffset} macro changes the value of the specified offset and forces it to \emph{\VAL}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetoffset} change la valeur du déplacement spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL} +% demandée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0053] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0053|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You have loaded the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package;|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) please be aware that the minitoc package|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) facilities can not be used for new types|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) of floats defined by the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package does not manage new types of floats defined via the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} +% and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{As the +% \pack{trivfloat} and \pack{rotfloat} packages load the \pack{float} package, this message will then appear twice!}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne traite pas les nouveaux types de flottants définis via les +% paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{Comme les paquetages +% \pack{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat} chargent le paquetage +% \pack{float}, ce message apparaîtra alors deux fois!}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Warning messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0001|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixglossary without|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the +% \com{mtcfixglossary} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very +% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), +% donc la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). +% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0002|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixindex without|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the +% \com{mtcfixindex} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very +% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), +% donc la macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). +% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0003|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \firstchapteris is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0004|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \firstpartis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0005|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \firstsectionis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0006|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixglossary can only be used|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcfixglossary} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because +% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix +% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0007|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixindex can only be used|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcfixindex} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because +% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix +% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0008|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilof} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dominilof} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilof}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0009|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilot} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dominilot} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilot}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0010] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0010|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) MINITOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominitoc} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dominitoc} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominitoc}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dominitoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0011] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0011|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlof} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dopartlof} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlof}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0012] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0012|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlot} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dopartlot} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlot}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0013] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0013|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{doparttoc} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{doparttoc} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{doparttoc}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{doparttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0014] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0014|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlof} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dosectlof} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlof}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0015] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0015|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlot} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dosectlot} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlot}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0016] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0016|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosecttoc} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dosecttoc} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosecttoc}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dosecttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0017] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0017|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) no section or chapter level macros available|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} and \com{section} sectionning commands are not defined. Your document class is likely +% without any sectionning command, so the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. \emph{Verify your main +% document class.} +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. Votre classe de document +% est probablement sans aucune commande de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. \emph{Vérifiez +% la classe principale de votre document.} +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0018] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0018|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: part level macros NOT available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{part} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the part level commands of the +% \upack{minitoc} package are not available. It is a warning message because most classes with sectionning commands +% define the \com{part} command, so you should verify which class you are using. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au +% niveau partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. C'est un message d'avertissement +% (\emph{warning}) car la plupart des classes ayant des commandes de sectionnement définissent la commande +% \com{part}, donc vous devriez vérifier quelle classe vous utilisez. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0019] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0019|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (8+3) file names.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The autofiguration has found that the operating system uses file names with short extensions (8+3 scheme). +% \or\relax +% L'autoconfiguration a trouvé que le système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts +% (schéma 8+3). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0020] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0020|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You have forced the use of short extensions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used the \opt{shortext} package option to force the use of short extensions (8+3 scheme). This action +% limits the number of usable mini-tables of each kind and may be problematic if you have more that 99~mini-tables +% of the same kind. If your operating system allows for long extensions, do not use the \opt{shortext} package +% option, except for testing purposes. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez spécifié l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} pour forcer l'utilisation de suffixes courts (schéma +% 8+3). Cette action limite le nombre de mini-tables utilisables dans chaque sorte et peut poser des problèmes si +% vous avez plus de 99~mini-tables du même genre. Si votre système d'exploitation permet des suffixes longs, +% n'utilisez pas l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}, sauf à~des fins de test. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0021] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue...| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\virage{} are using an obsolete version of \LaTeX, but the \upack{minitoc} package will still try to continue. It would be +% better to update your \LaTeX\ installation. +% \or\relax +% Vous\virage{} utilisez une version obsolète de \LaTeX, mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va quand même essayer de continuer. Il +% serait préférable de mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0022] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Your\Virage{} version of \LaTeX\ is very obsolete, and almost unusable with the \upack{minitoc} package. You can try to +% continue the compilation, but you are urged to update your \LaTeX\ installation as soon as possible. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez une version totalement périmée de \LaTeX, presque inutilisable avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Vous pouvez essayer de continuer la compilation, mais vous êtes instamment priés de mettre à~jour votre installation +% de \LaTeX{} dès que possible. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0093] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0093|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in your installation.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in the \jobname.log file.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The full list of the missing language files|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is gigen in the W0094 warning message.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Please install the missing files from|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) a recent distribution|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system. +% Search for the \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} and +% \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} info messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file to find which files are missing. +% You can retrieve them from a recent distribution or from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, +% else some language options will not be available. +% The full list of the missing language files is given in the \texttt{W0094}\imess{W0094} +% warning message. +% \or\relax +% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. Cherchez les +% messages informatifs \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} et \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} pour +% trouver quels fichiers sont manquants. Vous pouvez les récupérer depuis une distribution récente ou depuis les +% archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon certaines options de langue ne seront pas disponibles. +% La liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants est donnée dans le message d'avertissement \imess{W0094}\texttt{W0094}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0094] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0094|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Missing minitoc language file(s):|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) ...|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system. +% The list is given in the message. +% \or\relax +% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. +% Leur liste est donnée dans le message. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0095] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0095|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixnomenclature without|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very +% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), +% donc la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). +% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0096] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0096|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixnomenclature can only be used|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because +% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix +% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0098] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0098|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) --- You have used the \nofiles command|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in your preamble; all preparation commands|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in the body of the document will be ignored.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used the \com{nofiles} command in the preamble of your document; hence the preparation commands will be +% ignored in your document. Please verify that the mini-table auxiliary files are in their final state. +% See page~\pageref{x+W0098}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande \com{nofiles} dans le préambule de votre document; veuillez vérifier que les +% fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-ables sont dans leur état final. Voir page~\pageref{x+W0098}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Warning messages for hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Messages d'avertissement pour les indications (\emph{hints})} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0023] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0023|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- It may be the consequence|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) of loading the ``hyperref'' package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some sectionning commands have been altered \emph{after} the loading of the \upack{minitoc} package. The +% \pack{hyperref} package does that, but it is harmless. For other packages or user-made alterations, it is +% recommended to alter the sectionning commands only \emph{before} loading the \upack{minitoc} package. See +% section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \or\relax +% Certaines commandes de sectionnement ont été modifiées \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref} fait cela, mais sans dommages. Pour des altérations faites par d'autres paquetages +% ou par l'utilisateur, il est recommandé de modifier les commandes de sectionnement seulement \emph{avant} le +% chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0024] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0024|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints have been written|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{hints} package option has detected some potential problems and written hints into the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can search it for the ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' string with a text +% editor. +% \or\relax +% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} a détecté des problèmes potentiels et écrit des indications (\emph{hints}) +% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Vous pouvez l'examiner en y cherchant la chaîne +% «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0025] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0025|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The alphanum package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{alphanum} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. The +% compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{alphanum} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La +% compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0026] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0026|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsart class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsart} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsart} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0027] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0027|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsproc class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsproc} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsproc} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0028] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0028|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \chapter command is altered|\\ +% \verb| after minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{chapter}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the +% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this +% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. +% \or\relax +% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{chapter}. La plupart d'entre-eux +% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est +% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans +% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0029] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0029|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: --- The jura class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \class{jura} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{jura} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0030] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0030|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \part command is altered|\\ +% \verb| after minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{part}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the +% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this +% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. +% \or\relax +% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{part}. La plupart d'entre-eux +% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est +% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans +% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0031] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0031|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without the section option,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which implies it. Try to inverse the|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loading order and use consistent options.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You may have got a message|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using the \pack{placeins} package, but without its \optp{section}{placeins} option, while +% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which implies it. See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, +% near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol\DBEND. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}, alors que +% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui l'implique. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, +% près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~»\DBEND. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0032] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0032|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package loaded is|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) too old. You should use a version|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) dated of 2005/04/18 at least.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using an obsolete version of the \pack{placeins} package. Please update it from the CTAN archives or a +% recent distribution. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez une version obsolète du paquetage \pack{placeins}. Vous devriez le mettre à~jour depuis les +% archives CTAN ou une distribution récente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0033] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0033|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{caption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{caption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0034] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0034|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption2 package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{caption2} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. Note that the \pack{caption2} package is now obsolete; please use a recent version of +% the \pack{caption} package. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{caption2} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. Notez que le paquetage \pack{caption2} est désormais obsolète; veuillez utiliser +% une version récente du paquetage \pack{caption}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0035] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0035|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ccaption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{ccaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{ccaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0036] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0036|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The mcaption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{mcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{mcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0037] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0037|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sectsty package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{sectsty} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.28}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{sectsty} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.28}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0038] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0038|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The varsects package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{varsects} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.33}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{varsects} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.33}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0039] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0039|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \section command is altered|\\ +% \verb| after minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{section}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the +% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this +% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. +% \or\relax +% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{section}. La plupart d'entre-eux +% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est +% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans +% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0040] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0040|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titletoc package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titletoc} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with +% the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titletoc}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0041] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0041|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty minilofs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty minilofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0042] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0042|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty minilots.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty minilots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0043] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0043|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty minitocs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty minitocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minitocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0044] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0044|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty partlofs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty partlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0045] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0045|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty partlots.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty partlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0046] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0046|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty parttocs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty parttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des parttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0047] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0047|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty sectlofs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty sectlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0048] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0048|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty sectlots.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty sectlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0049] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0049|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty secttocs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty secttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des secttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0050] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0050|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb| command: \firstchapteris.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0051] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0051|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb| command: \firstpartis.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0052] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0052|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb| command: \firstsectionis.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0053] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0053|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 chapters (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~chapters, so the number of the auxiliary +% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective chapters in your document. See +% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~chapitres, donc le numéro du fichier +% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de chapitres effectifs dans votre document. +% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0054] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0054|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 parts (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~parts, so the number of the auxiliary +% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective parts in your document. See +% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~parties, donc le numéro du fichier +% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de parties effectives dans votre document. +% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0055] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0055|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 sections (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~sections, so the number of the auxiliary +% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective sections in your document. See +% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~sections, donc le numéro du fichier +% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de sections effectives dans votre document. +% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0056] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0056|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You are using \dosectlof and/or|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \dosectlot, \sectlof and/or \sectlot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hence the ``insection'' package|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) option is recommended.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are asking for mini-lists of figures or tables at the section level. But as floats (figures and tables) could +% drift somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and sectlots can be rather strange. +% In order to have a better behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the \opt{insection} package option. +% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez demandé des mini-listes des figures ou des tables au niveau section. Mais Comme les éléments flottants +% (figures et tableaux) pourraient dériver quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression du texte de la section, +% les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur comportement de ces mini-tables, +% il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0057] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0057|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the minilofs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dominilof}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais les minilofs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dominilof}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0058] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0058|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the minilots have not been prepared +% (via \com{dominilot}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais les minilots n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dominilot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0059] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0059|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the minitocs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dominitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais les minitocs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dominitoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0060] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0060|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the partlofs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dopartlof}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais les partlofs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dopartlof}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0061] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0061|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the partlots have not been prepared +% (via \com{dopartlot}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais les partlots n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dopartlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0062] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0062|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \doparttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the parttocs have not been prepared +% (via \com{doparttoc}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais les parttocs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{doparttoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0063] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0063|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the sectlofs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dosectlof}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais les sectlofs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dosectlof}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0064] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0064|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the sectlots have not been prepared +% (via \com{dosectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais les sectlots n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dosectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0065] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0065|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosecttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the secttocs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dosecttoc}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais les secttocs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dosecttoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0066] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0066|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \listoffigures nor|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoffigures.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0067] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0067|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables| nor\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoftables.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0068] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0068|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0069] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0069|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0070] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0070|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0071] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0071|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0072] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0072|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0073] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0073|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0074] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0074|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0075] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0075|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \doparttoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \parttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0076] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0076|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlof|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0077] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0077|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlot|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0078] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0078|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominitoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0079] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0079|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilof|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0080] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0080|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilot|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some minilots (via \com{dominilot}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des minilots (via \com{dominilot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0081] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0081|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosecttoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \secttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0082] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0082|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlof|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0083] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0083|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlot|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0084] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0084|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the above option,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the above option and|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) use consistent options.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{above}{placeins} option, while +% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it. +% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{above}{placeins}, alors que +% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle. +% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~». +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0085] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0085|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the below option,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the below option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and use consistent options.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{below}{placeins} option, while +% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it. +% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{below}{placeins}, alors que +% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle. +% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~». +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0086] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0086|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The fncychap package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{fncychap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.38}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{fncychap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.38}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0087] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0087|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The quotchap package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{quotchap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.39}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{quotchap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.39}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0088] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0088|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The romannum package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{romannum} package alters the numbering of some sectionning +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.40}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{romannum} altère la numérotation de certaines commandes +% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.40}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0089] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0089|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sfheaders package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{sfheaders} package alters the sectionning +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.41}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders} altère les commandes +% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.41}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0090] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0090|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The alnumsec package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{alnumsec} package alters the sectionning +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.42}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec} altère les commandes +% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.42}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0091] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0091|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The captcont package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{captcont} package alters the caption +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.43}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{captcont} altère les commandes pour les captions +% et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.43}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0092] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0092|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The hangcaption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{hangcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.47}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.47}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0097] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0097|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The flowfram package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{flowfram} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, +% because it has its own definitions for minitocs. The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{flowfram} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% car il a ses propres définitions pour des minitocs. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être +% insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0099] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0099|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titlesec package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titlesec} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with +% the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titlesec}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Error messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages d'erreur} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0001|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb| not usable| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro; even \com{part} is +% undefined. Verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixglossary}; +% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0002|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb| not usable| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixindex} macro; even \com{part} is +% undefined. Verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixindex}; +% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0003|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \env{mtchideinmainlof} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the +% hiding in the main list of figures will be strange. +% \or\relax +% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), +% donc le masquage dans la liste des figures principale sera étrange. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0004|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the +% hiding in the main list of tables will be strange. +% \or\relax +% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), +% donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux principale sera étrange. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0005|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the +% hiding in the main table of contents will be strange. +% \or\relax +% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmaintoc} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), +% donc le masquage dans la table des matières principale sera étrange. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0006|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known language,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\ +% \verb|Press RETURN| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} minitoc language definition +% file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your +% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mld} files of the \upack{minitoc} package, +% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mld} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local +% hierarchy) or be in the working directory. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger le fichier minitoc de définition de langue +% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de +% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers +% \suffix{.mld} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier +% \suffix{.mld} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le +% répertoire de travail. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0007|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known minitoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) language object file (.mlo),|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\ +% \verb|Press RETURN| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load indirectly the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc language +% object file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your +% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mlo} files of the \upack{minitoc} package, +% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mlo} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local +% hierarchy) or be in the working directory. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger (indirectement) le fichier minitoc objet de langue +% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de +% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers +% \suffix{.mlo} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier +% \suffix{.mlo} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le +% répertoire de travail. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0008|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth attempts to use|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined counter (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|depth).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are trying to set the depth for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the +% document class, and the loaded packages. +% \or\relax +% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et +% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0009|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. +% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0010] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0010|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0011] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0011|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0012] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0012|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a feature param|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (before, after, open, close, pagestyle).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be \feat{before}, \feat{after}, +% \feat{open}, \feat{close}, or \texttt{thispagestyle}. +% \or\relax +% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être \feat{before}, \feat{after} +% \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0013] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0013|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{arg1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; +% it should be the type of a mini-table (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0014] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0014|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a sectionning level|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (part...subparagraph) or * .|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; it should be a sectionning level (i.e., a sectionning +% command without its backslash), like \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}. +% \or\relax +% Le deuxième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un niveau de sectionnement (c'est-à-dire, +% une commande de sectionnement sans sa contre-oblique), comme \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0015] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0015|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0016] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0016|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\texttt{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a formatting param choosen from:|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetformat} macro is wrong. It should be one of the following keywords: +% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin}, or \texttt{dotinterval}. +% \or\relax +% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être l'un des mots-clés suivants: +% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin} ou \texttt{dotinterval}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0017] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0017|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong first|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|)..|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} macro must be a type of minitable (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0018] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0018|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong second|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes +% suivantes\,\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0019] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0019|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetrules} est incorrect. +% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0020] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0020|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetrules} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes +% suivantes\,\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0021] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0021|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a \com{mtcsettitle} macro is incorrect; it should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsettitle} est incorrect; +% ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0022] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0022|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} must be a mini-table type. You likely misspelt it. +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} doit être un type de mini-table. Vous avez probablement +% fait une faute de frappe. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0023] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0023|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfeature has incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro are \emph{incompatible}. You should verify them. +% \or\relax +% Les\Virage{} premier et deuxième arguments de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} sont \emph{incompatibles}. +% Vous devriez les vérifier. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0024] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0024|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfont has incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfont} macro takes a mini-table type as first argument, a sectionning level as second argument (or +% a star), and a sequence of font commands as third argument. The second argument must have a lower level than the first one +% (i.e., it is meaningless to specify the font for the chapter level entries for a minitoc or a secttoc). +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetfont} prend un type de mini-table comme premier argument (ou une étoile), un niveau de +% sectionnement comme deuxième argument et une séquence de commandes de fontes comme troisième argument. Le deuxième +% argument doit être de plus bas niveau que le premier (par exemple, il est absurde de spécifier la fonte pour les +% entrées de niveau chapitre dans une minitoc ou une secttoc). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0025] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0025|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetformat has incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro are \emph{incompatible}. +% One is likely to be misspelt. +% \or\relax +% Les\Virage{} premier et second arguments d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} sont \Virage\emph{incompatibles}. +% Il est probable qu'il y~ait une faute de frappe dans l'un d'eux. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0026] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0026|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixglossary|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults +% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. +% \or\relax +% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris +% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0027] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0027|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixindex|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixindex} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults +% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. +% \or\relax +% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixindex} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris +% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0028] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0028|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unable to patch the memoir class.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|So it remains incompatible. Sorry.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Your\Virage{} version of the \class{memoir} class is really \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package +% and cannot be automatically patched. Please update the \class{memoir} class and/or the \upack{minitoc} package +% from the CTAN archives or a recent distribution. +% \or\relax +% Votre\Virage{} version de la classe \class{memoir} est vraiment \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et ne peut pas être corrigée automatiquement. Vous êtes priés de mettre à~jour +% la classe \class{memoir} et/ou le paquetage \upack{minitoc} depuis les archives ou une distribution récente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0029] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0029|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{mtchideinmainlof} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of figures could be incorrect. +% \or\relax +% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlof} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des figures +% principale pourrait être incorrect. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0030] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0030|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{mtchideinmainlot} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of tables could be incorrect. +% \or\relax +% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlot} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux +% principale pourrait être incorrect. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0031] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0031|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main table of contents could be incorrect. +% \or\relax +% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la table des matières +% principale pourrait être incorrect. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0032] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0032|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You are using the \mtcloadmlo command|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) outside of a .mld file.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It will be ignored| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is \emph{forbidden} to use the \com{mtcloadmlo} macro outside of a \suffix{.mld} file (which is loaded via +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). The command is ignored. +% \or\relax +% Il est \emph{interdit} d'utiliser la macro \com{mtcloadmlo} en dehors d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} (qui est chargé via +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). La commande est ignorée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0033] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0033|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitle uses|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}. +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0034] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0034|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitlefont uses|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}. +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0035] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0035|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You have used the `insection' option in|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) a document where chapters are defined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) This is not compatible: option ignored.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Remove this option.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \opt{insection} package option is intended for \class{article}-like document classes, to prevent floats +% from drifting out of their section. It is pointless for \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document +% classes, where floats are contained in their chapter. +% \or\relax +% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} est destinée aux classes de document analogues à~\class{article}, +% pour empêcher les éléments flottants de dériver en dehors de leur section. Elle est sans objet pour les classes +% de document analogues à~\class{book} ou \class{report}, où les éléments flottants sont contenus dans leur +% chapitre. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0036] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0036|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The minitoc language object file (.mld),|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) english.mld is not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with default values.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.| +% \verb|Type <return> to continue| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \xfile{english.mld} language definition file can not be found. You should verify your installation of the +% \upack{minitoc} package. As an interim solution, we provide the missing english titles. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \xfile{english.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. Vous devriez vérifier votre +% installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais manquants. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0037] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0037|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The \|\emph{\COMMAND}\verb| command is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the document class.|\\ +% \verb||\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb| ... |\\ +% \verb| |\\ +% \verb|l.39 \dominitoc[r]|\\ +% \verb| |\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used a preparation or insertion command +% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) which is not available for the +% document class you are using. Please verify that the document +% class is compatible with \upack{minitoc} and if the level of +% the mini-table is available in the document class +% (section-level mini-tables are not available in \class{book}- or +% \class{report}-like classes, chapter-level mini-tables are not +% available in \class{article}-like classes, mini-tables are not +% available in \class{letter}-like classes, etc.). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé une commande de préparation ou d'insertion +% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) qui n'est pas disponible pour la +% classe de document que vous utilisez. Veuillez vérifier que +% votre classe de document est compatible avec \upack{minitoc} +% et si le niveau de mini-table est disponible dans la classe de +% document (les mini-tables au niveau section ne sont pas +% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{book} ou +% \class{report}, les mini-tables au niveau chapitre ne sont pas +% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{article}, les mini-tables +% ne sont pas disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{letter}, etc.). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0038] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0038|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) A mandatory minitoc language object file,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld, is not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) current/default values.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.| +% \verb|Type <return> to continue| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The mandatory \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} language definition file can not be found. +% You should verify your installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% As an interim solution, we provide the default english titles. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier obligatoire \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. +% Vous devriez vérifier votre installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0039] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0039|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb| not usable| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro; even \com{part} is +% undefined. Verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature}; +% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0040] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0040|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixnomenclature|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults +% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. +% \or\relax +% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris +% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0041] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0041|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset attempts to use|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined mini-table type (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are trying to set the offset for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the +% document class, and the loaded packages. +% \or\relax +% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et +% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0042] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0042|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. +% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0043] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0043|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Messages from the \upack{mtcoff} package}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{mtcoff} package gives only warning messages; their numbers begin with~\texttt{F}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} ne donne que des messages d'avertissement; leurs numéros commencent par~\texttt{F}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Warning messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0001|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{addstarredchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{addstarredchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0002|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredpart{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{addstarredpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{addstarredpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0003|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredsection{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{addstarredsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{addstarredsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0004|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcaddchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcaddchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0005|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcaddpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcaddpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0006|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcaddsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcaddsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0007|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) You should scan (backwards) your .log|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) file to find some commands needing|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) to be replaced if you decide to|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) document. It is more wise to keep the|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \usepackage lines for minitoc and mtcoff|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) and to comment out only one of them.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have replaced the use of the \upack{minitoc} package by its substitute \pack{mtcoff}. +% It is recommended to keep the \com{usepackage} lines for both \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} +% and to comment out only one of them. If you decide to \emph{definitely} stop using \upack{minitoc} for this document, +% it is wise to scan (backwards) the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file (after a compilation using \pack{mtcoff}) +% to locate some commands needing to be replaced. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez remplacé l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} par son substitut \pack{mtcoff}. +% Il est recommandé de conserver les lignes \com{usepackage} à~la fois pour \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff} +% et d'en mettre une seule en commentaire. Si vous décidez d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} d'utiliser \upack{minitoc} +% pour ce document, il est prudent d'examiner (en remontant depuis la fin) le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% (après une compilation utilisant \pack{mtcoff}) pour localiser quelques commandes qu'il faut remplacer. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0008|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \kernafter|\emph{\STRING}\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using one of the \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package. +% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust +% the position of the bottom rule of a type of minitables. Any other usage is +% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour +% ajuster la position du filet inférieur d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage +% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0009|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using one of the \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package. +% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust +% the horizontal position of a type of minitables. Any other usage is +% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour +% ajuster la position horizontale d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage +% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Message from the \upack{mtcpatchmem} package}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% \or\relax +% \section{Message émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcpatchmem}}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[M0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: M0001|\\ +% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using a version of the \class{memoir} class which needs a correction. This correction has been +% automatically loaded if necessary. Very recent versions should not need it anymore. See +% chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez une version de la classe \class{memoir} qui nécessite une correction. Cette correction a été +% chargée automatiquement si nécessaire. Les versions très récentes ne devraient plus en avoir besoin. Voir le +% chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \def\jsection#1{\section*{\null\hspace*{-1cm}\fbox{\mbox{#1}}}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em} +% \minitoc +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt} +% \mtcskip +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +% \minilot +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} +% This chapter attempts to explain some terms used in this documentation, and describes some useful files and suffixes. +% Many data come from the documentations of various cited packages (often from the abstract), and +% from~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}. +% \clearpage +% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \jsection{.\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{``.''} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\usuffix{.aux}]\isuffix{.aux} The suffix of the name for an \emph{auxiliary} file of a \LaTeX{} document. It carries +% some information from a \LaTeX{} run to the next. +% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.cls} The suffix for the name of a document class file, loaded via \com{documentclass}. +% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} The suffix of the name for a documented source file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. This file +% is often associated with a \suffix{.ins} file to generate the package or class. Compiling a \suffix{.dtx} +% file with \LaTeX{} generates the documentation. +% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} The suffix of the name for an installation file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. When +% compiled with \LaTeX, it extracts the files of the package or class from an \suffix{.dtx} file. +% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lof} The suffix of the name of the ``list of figures'' file. +% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} The suffix of the name of the log file (compilation report). +% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} The suffix of the name of the ``list of tables'' file. +% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\isuffix{.maf} The suffix of the name of the file generated by the \optd{listfiles} package option. This file +% contains the list of the minitoc auxiliary files. +% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language definition file. A minitoc language definition file +% contains the definitions for the mini-table titles in a given language. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language object file. For some exotic languages, the encoding +% makes not easy to put direcly the titles in a \suffix{.mld} file; +% hence the \suffix{.mld} file must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\isuffix{.ptc} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} The suffix for the name of a package file, loaded via \com{usepackage}. +% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} The suffix of the name of a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ normal source file. +% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} The suffix of the name of the ``table of contents'' file. +% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[absolute numbering] The auxiliary files for the mini-tables have a suffix containing an \emph{absolute +% number}, i.e.,~the number is unique and always increasing from the first part, chapter or section; this has +% solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis}, +% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}. The absolute numbering has been introduced in +% version~\#23. +% \item[\upack{abstract}] The \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) needs some +% precautions if used with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[adjustment] Some \upack{minitoc} commands and environments are known as ``adjustment commands'' because +% they are used in +% some circumstances to ``adjust'' a counter or to alter the displaying of contents files. These commands and +% environments are +% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc}, +% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, +% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, +% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, +% \env{mtchideinmainlof}, and +% \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% It is \virage\emph{strongly recommended} that the user verifies the result of such adjustments in the final document. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\feat{after}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{after} a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\pack{afterpage}] The \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} package is used to add code to be executed \emph{after} the +% next page break. +% \item[\upack{alnumsec}] +% The \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} allows you to use alphanumeric section +% numbering, e.g. A.~Introduction; III.~International Law. It's +% output is similar to the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}), +% but you can use the standard \LaTeX\ sectionning commands. Thus it is possible to switch numbering +% schemes easily. Greek letters, double letters~(bb) and different delimiters around them are supported. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.alnumsec} and +% section~\vref{faq.42}). +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{alphanum}] The \pack{alphanum}\imess{W0025} package, which is part of the specialized \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}, +% by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{3} +% \item[\AmS] The\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}} +% American Mathematical Society~\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}. This society has developped some document classes: +% unfortunately, \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package; +% \class{amsbook} is compatible but needs precautions. +% \item[\uclass{amsart}, \xfile{amsart.cls}]\iclass{amsart} A\imess{W0026} document class for articles~\cite{amslatex}, +% provided by the American Mathematical +% Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\uclass{amsbook}, \xfile{amsbook.cls}]\iclass{amsbook} A\imess{I0041} document class for books~\cite{amslatex}, +% provided by the American Mathematical +% Society (\AmS). This class is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package, but needs some precautions. +% See section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \item[\uclass{amsproc}, \xfile{amsproc.cls}]\iclass{amsproc} A\imess{W0027} document class for conference +% proceedings~\cite{amslatex}, +% provided by the American Mathematical Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is +% \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% is a language support package for \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), based on the original +% \xfile{omega.sty} file of the Omega project~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). However, it provides some additional useful +% functionalities. +% Some languages definition files (\suffix{.mld}) use titles taken from \pack{Antomega}: \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, +% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld}, and \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\env{appendices}] See \upack{appendix} below. +% \item[\upack{appendix}] The\imess{I0042} \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) +% provides various ways of formatting the titles of appendices. Also (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} +% environments\ienv{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} +% are provided that can be used, for instance, for per chapter/section appendices. If this package +% is used with \upack{minitoc}, some precautions are needed (see section~\vref{faq+appendix}). +% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} is a system (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents in the +% \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{farsi} languages. The titles in \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} come from the \xfile{arabic.ldf} +% and \xfile{farsi.ldf} files of this system. +% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} is a package (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents +% in the \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{hebrew} languages. The titles in \xfile{arab.mld} (or \xfile{arabic.mld}), +% \xfile{arab2.mld} and +% \xfile{hebrew.mld} come from \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, while those of \xfile{hebrew2.mld} come +% from \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} is a package (prepared by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, +% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) to prepare \LaTeX{} +% documents in the \lopt{armenian} language. The titles in \xfile{armenian.mld} come from Arm\TeX. +% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part} +% and \com{section} (and below), but not \com{chapter}. It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package +% and you can make mini-tables at the part and section levels (but, of course, not at the unavailable chapter level). +% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}] +% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the beginning of the document (if fact, at the very +% end of its preamble, but inside it, which implies some restrictions), at the point where \verb|\begin{document}| is +% processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any conflicts with other packages +% trying to do the same. +% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}] +% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the end of the document, at the point +% where \verb|\end{document}| is processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any +% conflicts with other packages trying to do the same. +% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Since version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} detects automaticaly if the extensions (suffixes) +% of the file names are limited to 3~characters (like under MS-DOS) or not. This process is named autoconfiguration. +% The package option \opt{shortext} forces the limitation to 3~characters. +% \item[auxiliary] During the preparation of a document, the \LaTeX\ system uses some \textbf{auxiliary} files to +% store information. The standard auxiliary files are \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (for cross-reference +% labels, counters, etc.), \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} for the table of contents, +% \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} for the list of figures, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} for the list of +% tables. The \upack{minitoc} package creates its own auxiliary files, to store the contents of each +% mini-table. These files are the \emph{minitoc auxiliary files}, whose names are +% \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{extension}, the table~\vref{t+suffixes} lists the possible extensions. +% See also the \suffix{.maf} extension above. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{babel}] The \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and others) is +% a large package useful to write \LaTeX\ documents in many languages, not only english. +% Many titles for mini-tables come directly from the \pack{babel} package. +% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} A package for typesetting documents in the \lopt{bangla} +% (\lopt{bengali}) language using the {\TeX/\LaTeX} systems; see~\cite{bangtex}. +% \item[\feat{before}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{before} a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\BibTeX] A program by \name{Oren}{Patashnik} to make bibliographies in \LaTeX{} documents. Distributed with \LaTeX. +% See~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}. +% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{bibtopic} for including several bibliographies in a document. +% These bibliographies might be considered to cover different topics (hence the name) or bibliographic +% material (e.g., primary and secondary literature) and the like. +% \item[\upack{bibunits}] The \pack{bibunits} package~\cite{bibunits} allows separate bibliographies for different +% units or parts of the text. The units can be chapters, sections or \env{bibunit} environments. This +% package is compatible with a wide variety of packages, including, but not limited to, \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, +% \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} and \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}, +% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and +% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many +% auxiliary files). +% \item[\pack{booktabs}] This nice package~\cite{booktabs} helps to the preparation of better tables, \emph{without} +% vertical rules nor double rules. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{calc}] The \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} package makes easier the numeric computations (on counters and dimensions) +% when preparing a \LaTeX{} document. +% \item[cappuccino] See ``minutes'' below. +% \item[\upack{captcont}] The \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} provides support for retaining +% a figure or caption number across several float environments --- usually over several pages. It allows +% control over the contents of the List-of-Figures and the List-of-Tables pages. It should be compatible +% with all other packages that modify or extend the float environment and with the \pack{subfig} +% package~\cite{subfig} in particular. +% \item[\upack{caption}] The \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} provides many ways to customize the captions +% in floating environments such \env{figure} and \env{table} and cooperates with many other packages. +% \item[\upack{caption2}] The\footnote{This text comes from the documentation of the \pack{caption} package. +% The \pack{caption} and \pack{caption2} packages have the same author, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.} +% \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} used to be an experimental side-version +% of the regular \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} and has been superseed by the new release of +% the regular \pack{caption} package version~\mbox{3.0} in December 2003. \pack{caption2} is still +% some kind of supported, that means it will be part of future releases and bugs will still be fixed, +% so existing documents using this package will still compile. But \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} will \emph{not} answer +% questions about this package anymore except questions on migrating to the regular version of +% the \pack{caption} package. And it will \emph{not} be adapted or enhanced in the future. +% +% So please don't use this package for new documents. It's old, it's obsolete and it starts to begin smell bad! +% +% Please ignore all hints in books or other documents which try to tell you that the \pack{caption2} package should +% be used instead of the \pack{caption} package -- these hints are outdated since December 2003. +% \item[catcode] Short for ``category code''. In\footnote{This definition is taken from +% ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} +% the first place, it's wise to have a precise idea of what your keyboard sends to the machine. There are 256~characters +% that \TeX\ might encounter at each step, in a file or in a line of text typed directly on your terminal. These +% 256~characters are classified into 16~categories numbered~0 to~15. See table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \def?{\phantom{0}} +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Category codes}\label{t+J+catcodes} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}cll@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{Category}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% ?0&Escape character&(\texttt{\bs}~usually)\\ +% ?1&Beginning of group&(\texttt{\{}~usually)\\ +% ?2&End of group&(\texttt{\}}~usually)\\ +% ?3&Math shift&(\texttt{\$}~usually)\\ +% ?4&Alignment tab&(\texttt{\&}~usually)\\ +% ?5&End of line&(\emph{return}~usually)\\ +% ?6&Parameter&(\texttt{\#}~usually)\\ +% ?7&Superscript&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~usually)\\ +% ?8&Subscript&(\texttt{\_}~usually)\\ +% ?9&Ignored character&(\emph{null}~usually)\\ +% 10&Space&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~usually)\\ +% 11&Letter&(\texttt{A}, \dots, \texttt{Z} and~\texttt{a}, \dots, \texttt{z})\\ +% 12&Other character&(none of the above or below)\\ +% 13&Active character&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~usually)\\ +% 14&Comment character&(\texttt{\%}~usually)\\ +% 15&Invalid character&(\emph{delete}~usually)\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% It's not necessary for you to learn these code numbers; the point is only that \TeX\ responds to 16~different +% types of characters. At first, ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}'' led you to believe that there were just two types --- the +% escape character and the others --- and then you were told about two more types, the grouping symbols~\texttt{\{} +% and~\texttt{\}}. The category code for any character can be changed at any time, but it is usually wise to stick to a +% particular scheme. +% \item[\upack{ccaption}] The \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} provides commands for ``continuation captions'', +% unnumbered captions, and a legend heading for any environment. Methods are provided to define captions +% for use outside float environments, and to define new float environments and subfloats. Tools are provided +% for defining your own captioning styles. +% \item[\upack{chngpage}] The \pack{chngpage} package (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) provides commands to change +% the page layout in the middle of a document, and to robustly check for typesetting on odd or even pages. +% \item[Chapter~0] +% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter number zero (or even a weirder number). +% This caused a serious problem in old versions of the \upack{minitoc} package: the minitocs appeared in the +% wrong chapters, and a first correction was the introduction of specific commands (\com{firstchapteris} and +% co.). With the addition of the absolute numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files (see \emph{absolute} above), +% the problem was solved in \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, and these commands became obsolete. +% See section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] The \pack{chapterbib} package~\cite{chapterbib} allows multiple bibliographies in a +% \LaTeX\ document, including items \com{cite}'d in more than one bibliography. Despite the name +% ``\pack{chapterbib}'', \emph{the bibliographies are for each included file}, not necessarily for each +% chapter. +% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles} +% A package option of \upack{minitoc}. It checks every mini-table to look if it is empty; then empty mini-tables +% are \emph{not} printed. This is the default. The opposite package option (\opt{nocheckfiles}) prints even the +% empty mini-tables, which look ugly. See section~\vref{o+checkfiles}. +% \item[\upack{CJK}] The \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and others), is a set of packages and fonts to +% prepare \LaTeX\ documents in some oriental language, like chinese, japanese, korean (with Hangûl or Hanja fonts), +% and thai, plus some variants of russian. +% The titles of mini-tables for these languages come from some \pack{CJK} files and were inserted in +% \suffix{.mld} files when possible, or in \suffix{.mlo} files when the encoding is incompatible with the +% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx} mechanism; +% then the \suffix{.mld} file must input the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \pack{CJK} implements the GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8, and CNS encodings (on 16~bits, except UTF~8 on 24~bits). +% See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Encoding schemes implemented in \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{1~byte}&\textbf{2~bytes}&\textbf{3~bytes}\\ +% \midrule +% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\ +% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\ +% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% Some encoding schemes (Big~5, SJIS) have gaps in the range of the second byte. +% It is difficult to input Big~5 and SJIS encoding directly into \TeX\ since some of the values used for the +% encodings' second bytes are reserved for control characters: `\texttt{\{}', `\texttt{\}}', and +% `\texttt{\bs}'. Redefining them breaks a lot of things in \LaTeX; to avoid this, preprocessors are normally +% used which convert the second byte into a number followed by a delimiter character. For further details, +% please refer to~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} discusses in great detail all \pack{CJK} encodings which are +% or have been in use. +% Please note that the \upack{minitoc} package uses the \suffix{.mlo} files as a workaround for this problem; +% see section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% \item[class] The \textbf{class}\footnote{This note is extracted from~\cite{NSSL2E}, then adapted.} is the first +% information \LaTeX{} needs to know when processing an +% input file; it is the type of document the author wants to create. This +% is specified with the \com{documentclass} command. +% \begin{quote} +% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{class}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \noindent Here \emph{class} specifies the type of document to be created. +% Table~\vref{t+documentclasses} lists the standard document classes~\cite{classes}. The \LaTeXe{} distribution provides additional +% classes for other documents, including letters and slides, but the \upack{minitoc} package has not +% been tested with all these classes. The +% \emph{options} parameters customize the behaviour of the document +% class. The options have to be separated by commas. +% The standard classes supported by the \upack{minitoc} package +% are listed in section~\vref{s+supported+classes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Standard document classes}\label{t+documentclasses} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Class}&\textbf{Usage}\\ +% \midrule +% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&For articles in scientific journals, presentations, short reports, program documentation, +% invitations, \ldots\\ +% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&For preparing conference proceedings; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ +% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&For preparing the documentation of a package or of a class; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ +% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&For preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ +% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&For longer reports containing several chapters, small books, PhD theses, \ldots\\ +% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&For real books.\\ +% \class{letter}~\cite{letter}&For letters; as this class has no sectionning commands, do not use \upack{minitoc} with +% this class.\\ +% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&For slides; the class uses big sans serif +% letters. You might want to consider using Beamer\TeX{}$^a$ instead. +% Do not use \upack{minitoc} with these classes.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}\hfill\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{close}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately after (\emph{close}) the insertion +% of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the documentation files in PostScript format from the ones in PDF format. +% This script should be adapted to your needs. +% \item[CMR] For ``Computer Modern Roman''. The roman subset of the Computer Modern fonts. See ``Computer Modern'' +% below. +% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in english. +% \item[Computer Modern] A set of fonts~\cite{cmt} designed by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} for \TeX. Initially +% they were built with {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (a program also created by \textsc{Knuth}), but PostScript +% type~1 (vector) versions +% exist today, with extensions (for accented characters, mainly): the EC-fonts (European Computer Modern), +% the cm-super fonts, etc. +% \item[counter] A \TeX\ register containing an integer value. There are 256 counters (from~0 to~255) in \TeX, but +% \LaTeX\ uses some of them, and many packages need some counters for their own usage. An extended version +% derived from \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, allows more counters. Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) also offers more counters. +% \item[CTAN] The \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, a~set of computer archives containing most of +% the \TeX\ related resources (like fonts, sofware, documentations, packages). They are accessible via +% Internet. See \url{http://ctan.org}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] I~needed to use the \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} package to typeset ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' +% entry~\cite{han} in the bibliography, because its author's first name contains a double +% accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}. +% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in german. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Depths for sectionning commands}\label{t+j+depths} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Class:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\ +% \midrule +% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\ +% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\ +% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\ +% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\ +% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\ +% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\ +% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\ +% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \item[depth] In the standard documents classes (and in most classes) with sectionning commands, we have a notion of +% \textbf{depth}. The depth of a sectionning command determines the numbering level in its title (from the value of the +% \dcnt{secnumdepth} counter), and the entries for a given sectionning command appear in the main table of contents +% if the depth of this sectionning command is lower than or equal to the value of the \dcnt{tocdepth} counter; see +% table~\vref{t+j+depths} for the depths of the sectionning commands in the main document classes. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The mechanism is analog for the parttocs, minitocs, and secttocs, using the values of the \dcnt{parttocdepth}, +% \dcnt{minitocdepth}, and \dcnt{secttocdepth} counters. If you use sub-figures or sub-tables, the corresponding +% mini-tables use counters like \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, +% \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[descriptor] (file descriptor). A software entity describing the interface between a program and a file. +% For most programs and operating systems, the number of file descriptors is limited. For \TeX{} (and \LaTeX), +% there are 16~file descriptors for writing and 16~file descriptors for reading. +% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] The \emph{\devnag{} for \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) package~\cite{devanagari} provides a +% way to typeset high-quality \devnag{} text with \TeX{}. \devnag{} is a script used for writing and printing +% Sanskrit and a number of languages in Northern and Central India such as Hindi and Marathi, as well as Nepali. +% The \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package was originally developed in May 1991 by Frans Velthuis for the University of Groningen, +% The Netherlands, and it was the first system to provide support for the \devnag{} script for \TeX{}. +% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] A PostScript header file, which tries to activate recto-verso printing. It works +% ^^A with some HP and Canon PostScript printers. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\texttt{em}] A length unit equal (approximatively) to the width of a~``m'' letter in the current font. +% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script +% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style derived from the \xfile{plain.bst}\isuffix{.bst} standard style, but +% modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst} to add an~\texttt{URL} field. Family names of authors +% and editors are in small caps, years are in old style digits. +% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the font (e.g., whether the 65th character is ``A''). +% The most common value for TeX font encoding is OT1. The other predefined option is T1 (extended \TeX). There's also +% US~ASCII (7~bit), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bit), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}), +% etc. See table~\vref{t+var-encodings} and ~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Various encodings}\label{t+var-encodings} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Comment}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ansinew}&Windows~3.1 ANSI encoding, extension of Latin-1.\\ +% \texttt{applemac}&Macintosh encoding.\\ +% \texttt{ascii}&ASCII encoding for the range 32--127.\\ +% \texttt{cp1250}&Windows 1250 (Central and Eastern Europe) code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp1251}&Windows 1251 (Cyrillic) code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonym for \texttt{ansinew}.\\ +% \texttt{cp1257}&Windows 1257 (Baltic) code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp437}&IBM~437 code page, which is the original +% American code page and contains letters, digits, +% mathematical symbols, and some characters useful in the +% construction of pseudographics.\\ +% \texttt{cp437de}&IBM~437 code page (German version).\\ +% \texttt{cp850}&IBM~850 code page, almost the same as +% ISO~Latin~1, but character arrangement is not the same.\\ +% \texttt{cp852}&IBM~852 code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp855}&IBM~855 code page (Cyrillic).\\ +% \texttt{cp865}&IBM~865 code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp866}&IBM~866 code page (MS-DOS Cyrillic).\\ +% \texttt{decmulti}&DEC Multinational Character Set encoding.\\ +% \texttt{latin1}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for most Western European languages, including Danish, +% Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, Flemish, French, +% German, Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, +% Spanish, and Swedish. Some non-European languages, such as +% Hawaiian and Indonesian, are also written in this +% character set.\\ +% \texttt{latin2}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for most Central European languages, including Croatian, +% Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Slovak, and Slovenian.\\ +% \texttt{latin3}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for Esperanto, Maltese, Turkish, and Galicean. However, +% \texttt{latin5} is the prefered character set for +% Turkish.\\ +% \texttt{latin4}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for the Baltic languages (Latvian, Estonian, and +% Lithuanian), Greenlandic, and Lappish (Sámi).\\ +% \texttt{latin5}&Is essentially the same as +% \texttt{latin1}, except that some Turkish characters replace +% less commonly used Icelandic letters.\\ +% \texttt{next}&Next encoding.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[environment] An environment is a delimited domain in a document, where special rules apply. Such a +% domain is delimited by \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| and may take +% arguments, like this: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\ +% \verb|\end{minipage}| +% \end{quote} +% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} is an extented version of \TeX, with much more +% registers and many new primitives; it supports also left-to-right and right-to-left writing. +% \item[ethiop]\ipack{ethiop} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{ethiop} giving the \lopt{ethiopian} language support for the \pack{babel} +% package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[extension] The name of a file is often made of 2~parts: a \emph{base name} and an \emph{entension}, +% separated by a dot. On some old operating systems, the base name is limited to 8~characters and the extension +% to 3~characters (the ``8+3'' scheme). See also sections~\vref{MS-DOS} and~\vref{.8+3}. +% It is strongly recommended to not have more than one dot in a file name. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] See \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} below. +% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} A package~\cite{farsi} to typeset a document in the \lopt{farsi} (iranian, persian) language. +% See~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}. But this package is today available only for \LaTeX2.09. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} and~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% \item[features] A feature (for the \upack{minitoc} package) is a set of actions executed at each occurrence of +% a mini-table of a given type. Five features are associated to each mini-table type: a ``\feat{before}'' feature +% (executed before the whole mini-table), an ``\feat{after}'' feature (executed after the whole mini-table), +% a ``\feat{open}'' feature, executed just before inserting the mini-table file, +% a ``\feat{close}'' feature, executed just after inserting the mini-table file, +% and a +% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature, which is executed with the mini-table to set its page style. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\env{filecontents}] +% A special \LaTeX{} environment. It allows to create a file (whose name is passed as an argument of the +% environment) by writing the contents of the environment into that file: +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{file}\}}\\ +% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contents}~~\ldots}\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}} +% \end{quote} +% This environment should be used \emph{before} \com{documentclass}. It is used in \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% to prepare the \suffix{.mlo} files (see section~\vref{fo+lang}) and some files used in the compilation +% of the documentation. +% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] An obsolete command, temporarily used as a workaround for the Chapter~0 problem; +% see~\textbf{Chapter~0} and \textbf{absolute numbering} above, and section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above. +% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above. +% \item[\pack{float}] This package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} improves the interface for defining floating +% objects such as figures and tables in \LaTeX{}. It adds the notion of a `float style' that governs appearance +% of floats. New kinds of floats may be defined using a \com{newfloat} command analogous to \com{newtheorem}. +% This package also incorporates the functionality of \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}'s package \pack{here}, +% giving floating environments a \texttt{[H]} option which means `PUT IT HERE' (as opposed to the +% standard \texttt{[h]} option which means `You may put it here if you like'). +% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}] +% A macro from the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. It sets up a ``barrier'' against the drift of +% floats (like figures or tables). +% \item[\pack{floatrow}] This package~\cite{floatrow} (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} is an extension of the +% \pack{float} package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), reusing its code, with extensions from +% the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} (by \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}). +% \item[\pack{flowfram}] This\imess{W0097} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} is designed to enable you +% to create text \emph{frames} +% in a document such that the contents of the \env{document} environment flow from one frame to the next in the +% order that they were defined. This is useful for creating posters or magazines or any other form of document that +% does not conform to the standard one or two column layout. As this package defines its own system of +% minitocs, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script +% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{fncychap}] The \pack{fncychap}\imess{W0086} package~\cite{fncychap} provides a set of commands for changing +% the format used for some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: +% \class{book} and \class{report}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.fncychap} and +% section~\vref{faq.38}). +% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet newsgroup about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in french. +% \item[\upack{franc.sty}]\ipack{franc} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\upack{frbib.sty}]\ipack{frbib} A small package file used to prepare the bibliography of the french documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style file used to prepare the bibliography of the french +% documentation. +% It has been updated from the standard \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} for french by \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, then I added +% some adaptations for french (like last names in small caps for authors and editors, years in old style digits), +% then modified with the \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} tool to add an \texttt{URL} field. +% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{geometry}] The \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry} provides a flexible and complete user interface to page +% dimensions. You can specify them by using intuitive parameters to get your desired page layout. For instance, +% if you want to set margins (the left, right, top and bottom margins) to 2cm from each edge of +% the paper, what you need is just: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}| +% \end{quote} +% This powerful (and recommended) package is used in some example documents and in this documentation. +% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} A \LaTeX\ package to compose text in \ilopt{guarani}Guaraní, +% the main language spoken in Paraguay. +% The file \xfile{guarani.ldf}, included in this package, defines the titles. See~\cite{guarani} and +% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] The \pack{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} package~\cite{hangcaption} defines a variant of the +% \com{caption} command to produce captions with hanging indentation. This package is likely +% obsolete (1992, \LaTeX2.09). +% \item[Hindi] For the Hindi language, see the \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package~\cite{devanagari} above. The +% \upack{minitoc} package accepts the \lopt{devanagari} and \lopt{hindi} language options, which are +% synonyms. A \lopt{hindi-modern} language option is also available. +% See also~\cite{hindi99} about the Hindi language. +% \item[hint] An indication, a clue to detect a problem. It is also a message written (into the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file) by the \optd{hints} option (see below). +% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It verifies the loading order of some +% packages, the invocation order of some \upack{minitoc} commands, the consistency between main \upack{minitoc} +% commands, etc., and gaves warnings and other useful hints (mainly in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file). This is +% a default option (use the \opt{nohints} option to skip these checks). +% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} A system to write documents in the Korean language, using \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (see below). +% Written by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}. It uses special Hangûl or Hanja fonts and the UTF-8 input +% encoding. +% \item[hyperlink] In a document, a reference to another object which is dynamicaly found (via a click with the +% mouse). This requires a special type of document (PDF, PostScript with hypertext features) and a suitable +% viewer (PDF viewer, recent PS viewer). This is useful to navigate in a document or in many documents, +% which can be remote documents. +% \lneed{4} +% \item[\upack{hyperref}] The\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}} +% \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} is used to emend cross-referencing commands in +% \LaTeX\ to produce some sort of \com{special} commands; there are +% backends for the \com{special} set defined for \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} \texttt{dvi} processors, +% for embedded pdfmark commands for processing by \tool{Acrobat Distiller} +% (\tool{dvips} and \tool{dvipsone}), for \tool{dviwindo}, +% for \textbf{pdf\TeX}, for \textbf{\TeX4ht}, and for \tool{VTEX}'s pdf and HTML +% backends. +% +% This package derives from, and builds on, the work of the \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} +% project, described in \cite{hypertex}. It extends +% the functionality of all the \LaTeX\ cross-referencing commands +% (including the table of contents, bibliographies, etc.) to produce +% \com{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links; +% it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc} +% hypertext links (hyperlinks), including those to external documents and URLs. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] The \pack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{ifmtarg} provides an if-then-else command +% for testing if a macro argument is empty (``empty'' meaning zero or more spaces only). +% \item[\pack{ifthen}] The \pack{ifthen} package~\cite{ifthen} implements an \com{ifthenelse} command for \LaTeXe. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} +% An example of shell script, which prepares the \upack{minitoc} package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}. +% See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uopt{insection}] The \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} +% with adequate options to avoid the floats (like figures and tables) to drift outside of their sections. +% This package option is recommended if you use sectlofs or sectlots in your document. See +% section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \item[insertion] The insertion commands of the \upack{minitoc} package insert a mini-table in the document. +% A~corresponding \emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before. The insertion commands +% are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot},\\ +% \com{mtcprepare} +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] A text file describing the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. See +% chapter~\vref{c+installation}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{jobname}] A \TeX\ primitive containing the name of the document in preparation, i.e.,~the name of +% the file read first by \TeX{} (or \LaTeX), without its extension. Very useful to build the names of other +% files. +% \item[\uclass{jura}] The \class{jura}\imess{W0029} class~\cite{jura}, by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the +% \upack{minitoc} package. It is used for german judicial documents. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] A project~\cite{kannadatex} to use \LaTeX{} for typesetting in the +% Kannada language. See section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}. +% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. This option tries to set a loose line spacing in the mini-tables. +% Analog to the \optd{loose} +% package option for standard classes. +% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% This option tries to set a tight line spacing in the mini-tables. Analog to the \opt{tight} +% package option for standard classes. +% \lneed{3} +% \item[\KOMAScript] +% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} is a very complex bundle. You may see this, because it +% is not only one class or one package but a bundle of many classes and +% packages. The classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, +% \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2}, and \class{scrreprt}) +% are counterparts to the standard classes but never they come with +% only the same commands, environments, options and optional possibilities +% like the standard classes nor they result in the same look-a-like. +% +% \lneed{5} +% The \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl} classes are compatible with the +% \upack{minitoc} package, with some precautions (see section~\vref{special.entries}). +% The \class{scrlettr} and \class{scrlttr2} have no sectionning commands, so +% the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless with them. +% +% \lneed{5} +% \KOMAScript{} comes with a lot of classes, packages, commands, +% environments and possibilities. Some of these you may find also at the +% standard classes, many of them you wouldn't. Some are even supplements +% to the \LaTeX{} kernel. +% +% The main classes of the {\KOMAScript} bundle are designed as +% counterparts to the standard {\LaTeX} classes. This means that the +% {\KOMAScript} bundle contains replacements for the three standard +% classes \class{book}, \class{report}, and \class{article}. +% There is also a replacement for the standard class \class{letter}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[Lambda] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of +% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) is called ``\emph{Lambda}'' ($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% \item[Lamed] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of +% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) is called ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} is a typesetting system that is very +% suitable for producing scientific and mathematical +% documents of high typographical quality. It is also suitable for +% producing all sorts of other documents, from simple letters +% to complete books. \LaTeX{} uses \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} as its +% formatting engine (from~\cite{NSSL2E}). +% +% In fact, \LaTeX{} is a macro package that enables authors to typeset and print +% their work at the highest typographical quality, using a predefined, +% professional layout. \LaTeX{} was originally written by +% \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. It uses the +% \TeX{} formatter as its typesetting engine. +% These days \LaTeX{} is maintained by \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} +% and his team. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% In 1994 the \LaTeX{} package was (deeply) updated by the +% \LaTeX3 team, led \mbox{by~\name{Frank}{Mittelbach}}, +% to include some long-requested improvements, and to re\-unify all the +% patched versions which had cropped up since the release of +% \LaTeX2.09 some years earlier. To distinguish the new version from +% the old, it is called \LaTeXe. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \LaTeX{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech'' or ``Lah-tech.'' If you refer to +% \LaTeX{} in an \texttt{ASCII} environment, you type \texttt{LaTeX}. +% \LaTeXe{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech two~e'' and typed \texttt{LaTeX2e}. +% \item[\LaTeX2.09] An obsolete version of the \LaTeX\ program, before 1994; it is no more supported. +% Do not use it\footnote{Except in the case of a very old document; if possible, try to convert +% it.}. Use the current version of \LaTeXe, which is supported and much more efficient. +% \item[\LaTeXe] The current version of the \LaTeX\ program, after 1994; it is supported. +% \item[\LaTeX3] The future version of \LaTeX, whose development is still in progress. +% \item[leaders] A repetitive sequence of dots (or of one another small character), regulary spaced, used to link +% two objects on the same line (leading from a title to a page number in a table of contents or the like). +% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} A\Virage{} standard document class~\cite{letter} to prepare letters for postal +% mail (mail on paper). As such documents have no sectionning commands nor structure, the \upack{minitoc} package +% is pointless (hence \emph{incompatible}) with them. +% \item[\upack{lipsum}] The \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} allows to easily insert sentences +% in a test file with a minimum of typing. The sentences are in latin but are modified and made nearly +% senseless. I have used this package in some of the examples of documents. +% See also~\url{http://lipsum.com} for the origin of this text (pieces of +% \emph{De Finibus Bonorum et Malorum} by Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero}). +% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary +% files (these files contains the mini-tables and may be removed after the \LaTeX\ run) in the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. Default. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[LOF, LoF] An acronym for ``list of figures''. +% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of figures. +% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a loose line spacing in the +% mini-tables. It is the default. The opposite option is \opt{tight}. +% \item[LOT, LoT] An acronym for ``list of tables''. +% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of tables. +% \item[LPPL] The \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, available at +% \begin{quote} +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} +% \end{quote} +% Its current version is 1.3 (2003-12-01). The \upack{minitoc} package is distributed under this license. +% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltxdoc}, for preparing the documentation of a package or of a class. +% For the \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. +% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltnews}, for preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release. For the +% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{and} \com{makeatother}] Many\footnote{Informations +% from~\cite[page~843]{TLC2}.} internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of +% packages and classes contain the \texttt{@}~character in their names. This effectively prevents such names +% from being used in documents for user-defined commands. However, it also means that they cannot appear in a +% document, even in the preamble, without taking special precautions. As it is sometimes necessary to have +% such bits of ``internal code'' in the preamble, the commands \com{makeatletter} +% and \com{makeatother} make it easy to do: the difficult bit is to remember to add them, failure to do +% so can result in some strange errors. And these two commands \Virage\emph{should never be used in a package or class file}. +% \item[makefile] A special text file containing instructions describing the creation and the installation of a +% piece of software, using the ``\textbf{make}'' utility; \textbf{make} is a nice tool coming from the Unix +% operating system, but variants exists. +% \item[\upack{mcaption}] The \pack{mcaption}\imess{W0036} package~\cite{mcaption} provides a \env{margincap} +% environment for putting captions in the outer document margin with either a top or bottom alignment. +% \item[\textbf{MCE}] A minimal [complete] example is the smallest possible complete document that illustrates a problem. +% A minimal example file should not include any packages or code that do not contribute to the problem, but must +% include a document class and the \env{document} environment (from~\cite{talbot-mini}). See also~\cite{preusse}, +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} and +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices. +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{memoir}, \xfile{memoir.cls}]\iclass{memoir} A very% +% \SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} +% general and powerful document class +% (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, described in~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); this class +% is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package (with some precautions) if you use a recent version. See +% section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[mini-bibliography] See \textbf{minibbl} below. +% \item[mini-list] Synonym for ``mini-table'' below. +% \item[mini-lof] See ``minilof'' below. +% \item[mini-lot] See ``minilot'' below. +% \item[mini-table] This term refers to a local table of contents (like a table of contents, a list of figures or a +% list of tables) for a sectionning unit (part, chapter or section), by opposition to a global table (the +% table of contents, the list of figures or the list of tables for the whole document). The main aim of the +% \upack{minitoc} package is the creation of such mini-tables. But the term ``minitoc'' is also used to refer +% to such mini-table, as a generic term, because the first versions of the package allowed only tables of +% contents for chapters. +% \item[mini-toc] See ``minitoc'' below. +% \item[minibbl] Short for ``mini-bibliography'', i.e.,~to have a bibliography per part, chapter or section, or +% even by theme or subject. This is out of the domain of the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{faq.9}. +% \item[minilof] A list of figures for a chapter. +% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilofs. +% \item[minilot] A list of tables for a chapter. +% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilots. +% \item[minitoc] A table of contents for a chapter. Also used as a generic term for any mini-table (see +% ``mini-table'' above). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] The source file for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. In +% fact, it just sets \com{jobname} then loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, which itself loads +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}\isuffix{.lan} to select the language used in \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contains +% both english and french documentation fragments, selected by \com{ifcase} constructs with the +% \com{LANG} variable, set to~0 by \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} or to~1 by \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (i.e.,~by +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the french documentation. It +% is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the french language in the documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] The french documentation in PDF format. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] The french documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the +% \scrp{cmk} script). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] A plain text file containing a list of problems and questions about the \upack{minitoc} +% package. See chapter~\vref{FAQ}. +% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the minitocs. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] The file containing the documentation and the commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-hyper.sty}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} A special version~\cite{minitoc-hyper} of the \upack{minitoc} package which has been +% prepared by \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, +% \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} to work with the powerful \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}; +% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} has integrated their work so since version \#31, \upack{minitoc} is compatible with +% \pack{hyperref}. +% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and +% should no more be used. +% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.} +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] The installation file for the \upack{minitoc} package. Compiling it with \LaTeX\ +% produces most of the files of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the english documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] A text file containing the list of all the files being included in the +% \upack{minitoc} package. Files not listed in \xfile{minitoc.l} are files used only to install the package or +% to produce its documentation. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the english language in the documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] The english documentation in PDF format. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} This file contains a \LaTeX{} preamble for the documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] The english documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the +% \scrp{cmk} scripts). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] This file contains the main part of the \upack{minitoc} package, with comments removed. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] A plain text file containing a commented list of the minitoc commands and environments. See +% chapter~\vref{c+memento}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] A ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy containing all files in the +% \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\upack{minutes}] The \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}) is used to prepare +% conference proceedings. The \upack{minitoc} package allows to add ``coffee breaks'' in the table of contents +% via commands like \com{addcoffeeline} and \com{coffeeline} (and internal commands) whose names contain +% the string ``\texttt{coffee}'', hence the footnote about ``cappuccino''{\myCoffeecup} in the +% installation chapter!% +% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{The little cups \myCoffeecup{} come from the \pack{marvosym} package~\cite{marvosym}.}}{} +% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} is a large package to prepare documents in various dialects +% of the Mongol language (Bicig and Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe and Manju, Buryat, Xalx and Khalkha) and in a +% dialect of Russian used in Mongolia (Russianc). Bicig is another name for Uighur. +% You can find many things about Mongolia and Mongolian at the web site~\cite{mongol-web}. +% See also: +% {\small\begin{quote} +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\ +% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\ +% \url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}\\ +% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\ +% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm} +% \end{quote}} +% +% The following description is extracted from~\cite{montex}. +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} is a package which offers support for writing documents in +% Mongolian, Manju, Buryat and Russian. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Mongolian +% can be represented in traditional Uighur script (also known as Classical or Traditional +% Script) and Cyrillic. Manju resembles the Traditional Mongolian script +% (from which it is derived) but uses a rich choice of diacritics in +% order to eliminate numerous ambiguities of the Mongolian script +% ancestor. Modern Buryat, like Mongolian in its present form, is written +% with a Cyrillic alphabet, +% but both Mongolian (35 letters) and Buryat +% (36 letters) use more letters than Russian (33 letters). +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{description} +% \item[Mongolian] +% The word \emph{Mongolian} is actually an umbrella term for +% several languages rather than the precise name of a single language. +% Things become more complicated when names of ethnic groups, languages +% and writing systems are mixed. +% \begin{description} +% \item [Xalx] or Khalkha is the name of the Mongolian +% nationality residing in Mongolia proper. Their +% dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with +% Cyrillic letters. Throughout this text, \emph{Modern +% Mongolian} is used as a synonym. +% \item [Buryat] +% is the name of the Mongolian nationality +% residing in Buryatia, north of Mongolia, east of +% Lake Baikal, being a part of the Russian Federation. +% The Buryat call themselves \emph{Buryaad} while Xalx +% Mongolians call them \emph{Buriad}. The English name +% follows the Russian orthography. +% Linguistically, Xalx and Buryat Mongol are fairly +% close languages; Buryat has a slightly different +% sound system in which the phoneme /s/ partially +% shifted to /h/; the modern Buryat Cyrillic alphabet +% (virtually identical with the Cyrillic alphabet used +% for writing Modern Mongolian) has one additional +% letter (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) for marking the difference to /s/. +% %\enlargethispage*{1ex} +% \item [Bicig] (literally \emph{script} in Mongolian) denotes +% text written in the traditional Mongolian script +% which is also referred to as Uighur. Throughout this +% document, the term \emph{Bicig} will be used on an +% equal footing with \emph{Classical} and +% \emph{Traditional} Mongolian. The latter term is +% used in the names of the Unicode/ISO10646 character +% plane U1800 which contains Mongolian, Manju, Sibe +% and sets of special characters called Ali Gali or +% Galig. In order to identify Mongolian script related +% commands distinct for Mongolian and Manju, the +% Mongolian commands have the name root \lopt{bicig} +% whereas the Manju commands have the name root +% \lopt{bithe}. +% \end{description} +% +% Xalx Mongolian, or Modern Colloquial Mongolian, is about as +% different from the form written in Classical script as modern +% English in phonetical spelling (assume it be written in Shavian +% letters) from the highly historical orthography of Standard English. +% Beyond these differences, Mongolian written in Classical Script +% usually preserves a substantial amount of historical grammatical +% features which make it look a bit like Elizabethan English. +% +% \item[Manju] +% Manju is a Tungusic language closely related to Mongolian. Though +% Manju is virtually not spoken anymore, it has been the official +% language during 300 years of Manju government in Qing Dynasty China. +% Vast amounts of official documents survive, as well as some of the +% finest multilingual dictionaries ever compiled, e.\,g. the +% Pentaglot, or Mirror in Five Languages, a dictionary with 18671 +% entries in five languages (Manju, Tibetan, Mongolian, Uighur and +% Chinese). See~\cite{pentaglot} for more details. Manju writing is derived from Uighur Mongolian by adding +% diacritics in the form of dots and circles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, script with dots and +% circles). +% \end{description} +% \item[MS-DOS] (Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System) An old operating system +% for personnal computers (PCs). +% From the \upack{minitoc} point of view, +% its main drawback is the use of filenames with short extensions (the ``8+3'' scheme), which limits to~99 the number +% of mini-tables for each kind. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns +% page layout. See section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package and its \lopt{french2} +% language option. See section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} A small bibliographic data base for the \exam{mtc-add.tex} +% and \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example documents. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package to +% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddchapter} and the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddsection} and the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}. +% It also shows how it is challenging to manage the mini-lists of floats at the section level. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a +% \class{memoir} class document with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment +% to hide the entries of the appendices in the main TOC and to create a part-level TOC for the appendices. See +% section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} An example of document (\class{article} class) using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} An example of document (\class{book} or \class{report} class) +% using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns +% page layout and using the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. See section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a +% starred first chapter. See section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with starred parts +% and chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} An example file showing the problem of fonts in minitocs when +% using the \class{scrbook} class. See section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Another example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and +% \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. See section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} +% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} specialized environments. See section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} An example file showing the use of the following pairs of commands: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} and \com{endmtchideinmainlof}, +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} and \com{endmtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% See section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for +% some tables in the main list of tables of an \class{article} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for +% some tables in the main list of tables of a \class{report} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \class{scrbook} document class. See section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{book} with +% customized table of contents and minitocs. See section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package +% with the \class{memoir} class. See section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package +% with the \class{memoir} class, if you want to change some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} A document using a minitoc set in a \env{wrapfigure} environment with the +% \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} A document swowing an interaction betwen the \upack{minitoc} +% package and the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}. See section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to +% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to +% prepare a minitoc on three columns and \com{mtcsetoffset} to shift the minitoc to align it on the left. +% See section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}. See section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} +% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. See section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when the table of +% contents is prededed by some starred chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. See section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of +% \class{article} class. It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. See section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} and their interaction about the page numbers in the mini-tables. +% See section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcpolymtoc} command +% and explaining \index{polymorphic entry}``polymorphic entries''. See section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} A package used to provide variants of the standard commands +% \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine}, and \com{PackageError} +% by adding an optional argument for an unique message identifier. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} A package which is used in place of the \upack{minitoc} package to +% ignore all the commands and environments of the \upack{minitoc} package. In fact, it defines them to +% do nothing. Useful if you want a version of your document without any mini-table. +% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} A\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} small package which is automatically loaded if +% necessary when you use the \class{memoir} document class with a version \emph{incompatible} with the +% \upack{minitoc} package, but correctible. It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\texttt{mu}] A length unit normaly used in math mode (\texttt{mu} means ``math unit''); 18~math units make +% \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' in the current font. So the size of \texttt{1mu} +% is font dependent. The separation between dots in the dotted lines in the mini-tables is expressed in math units. +% \item[\upack{multibib}] The \pack{multibib} package~\cite{multibib} allows to create references to multiple +% bibliographies within one document. It thus provides a complementary functionality to packages +% like \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} or \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, which allow +% to create one bibliography for multiple, but different parts of the document. +% \item[\upack{multicol}] The \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol} defines the \env{multicols} environment +% (with a~``\textbf{s}'') to typeset text on several columns. Used in some example documents. +% \item[\upack{multitoc}] This package~\cite{multitoc} allows setting only the table of contents, list of +% figures and/or list of tables in two or more columns (using the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, of course). +% The number of columns can be configured via commands; the +% multicolumn toc(s) can be selected via package options. +% The \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example document uses this package; see section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{natbib}] It is a \LaTeXe{} (but with some support for \LaTeX2.09) package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to act +% as generalized interface for standard and non-standard bibliographic style files (\BibTeX). +% \item[\upack{needspace}] The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} provides commands to reserve space +% at the bottom of a page. If there is not enough space on the current page (column) a new page (column) is started. +% \item[NFSS] The \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}. The \LaTeXe{} font selection system~\cite{fontsel} +% was first released as the ``New Font Selection Scheme'' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993. +% \LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard. +% +% \lneed{7} +% Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}: +% \begin{description} +% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the +% font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are +% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``\TeX{} text'' encoding (OT1), and the ``\TeX{} text extended'' +% encoding (T1) developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{} +% Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name ``Cork encoding''). +% See~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under +% a common name by the font foundry. For instance, ``Adobe Times'', ``ITC +% Garamond'', and \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``Computer Modern Roman'' are all font families. +% \item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is. For instance, ``medium +% weight'', ``narrow'' and ``bold extended'' are all series. +% \item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For +% instance, ``italic'', ``oblique'' and ``upright'' (sometimes called +% ``roman'') are all font shapes. +% \item[size] The design size of the font, for instance ``10pt''. +% \end{description} +% +% \lneed{2} +% The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by +% \LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are given in table~\vref{t+nfss+1}. +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% \caption{Most common font encodings}\label{t+nfss+1} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{T1} &\LaTeX{} extended text (``Cork encoding'')\\ +% \texttt{TS1} &\LaTeX{} symbols (Latin)\\ +% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C}&\LaTeX{} text (Cyrillic)\\ +% \texttt{T3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet\\ +% \texttt{TS3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet (extra symbols)\\ +% \texttt{T4} &\LaTeX{} text (African languages)\\ +% \texttt{T5} &\LaTeX{} text (Vietnamese)\\ +% \texttt{T7} &\LaTeX{} text (reserved for Greek)\\ +% \texttt{OT1} &\TeX{} text (as defined by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OT2} &\TeX{} text for Cyrillic languages (obsolete)\\ +% \texttt{OT3} &International phonetic alphabet (obsolete)\\ +% \texttt{OT4} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Polish language\\ +% \texttt{OT6} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Armenian language\\ +% \texttt{OML} &\TeX{} math italic (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMS} &\TeX{} math symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMX} &\TeX{} math large symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{X2} &\LaTeX{} extended text (Cyrillic)\\ +% \texttt{U} &Unknown \\ +% \texttt{L}\meta{xx}&A local encoding\\ +% \texttt{L7x} &Encoding used for the Lithuanian language\\ +% \texttt{LTH} &Encoding used for the Thai language\\ +% \texttt{LV1} &Encoding used with some \texttt{VTeX} fonts\\ +% \texttt{LY1} &Alternative to \texttt{T1} encoding, for Y\&Y software\\ +% \texttt{PD1} &Implements the PDFDocEncoding for use with \LaTeXe's NFSS.\\ +% \texttt{PU} &Implements the Unicode encoding for use with \LaTeX's NFSS.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% ^^A \end{table} +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} +% ^^A \begin{table}[!tp] +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font families}\label{t+nfss+2} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Family}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{cmr} &Computer Modern Roman \\ +% \texttt{cmss}&Computer Modern Sans \\ +% \texttt{cmtt}&Computer Modern Typewriter \\ +% \texttt{cmm} &Computer Modern Math Italic \\ +% \texttt{cmsy}&Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ +% \texttt{cmex}&Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ +% \texttt{ptm} &Adobe Times \\ +% \texttt{phv} &Adobe Helvetica \\ +% \texttt{pcr} &Adobe Courier\\ +% \texttt{lazy}&Additional \LaTeX{} symbols\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font series}\label{t+nfss+3} +% \centering +% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Series}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ul}&Ultra light\\ +% \texttt{el}&Extra light\\ +% \texttt{l}&Light\\ +% \texttt{sl}&Semi light\\ +% \texttt{m} &Medium \\ +% \texttt{sb} &Semi bold \\ +% \texttt{b} &Bold \\ +% \texttt{eb} &Extra bold \\ +% \texttt{bx}&Bold extended \\ +% \texttt{ub}&Ultra bold \\ +% \texttt{c} &Condensed\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}\hfill\null +% \end{minipage} +% \end{tabularx} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font shapes}\label{t+nfss+4} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Shape}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{n} &Normal (that is ``upright'' or ``roman'') \\ +% \texttt{it}&Italic \\ +% \texttt{sl}&Slanted (or ``oblique'') \\ +% \texttt{sc}&Caps and small caps\\ +% \texttt{u}&Unslanted (upright italic)\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font widths}\label{t+nfss+4a} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Width}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensed\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensed\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensed\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensed\\ +% \texttt{m}&50.0&Medium\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi extended\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Extended\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra extended\\ +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra extended\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{minipage} +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% The ``local'' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only +% locally available, for instance a font containing an organisation's +% logo in various sizes. +% +% \lneed{4} +% There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common +% ones are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+2}. +% The most common values for the font series are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+3}. +% The most common values for the font shape are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4}. +% The most common values for the font width are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% The font size is specified as a dimension, for instance \texttt{10pt} or +% \texttt{1.5in} or \texttt{3mm}; if no unit is specified, \texttt{pt} is assumed. These five +% parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, see table~\vref{t+nfss+5}, for instance. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{The five font parameters of some fonts}\label{t+nfss+5} +% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{\LaTeX{} specification}}& +% \textbf{Font}&\textbf{\TeX{} name}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{OT1}&\texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} & +% Computer Modern Roman 10 point & +% \texttt{cmr10}\\ +% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} & +% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & +% \texttt{cmssi12} \\ +% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} & +% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & +% \texttt{cmmi10} \\ +% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} & +% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & +% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Author commands for fonts}\label{t+nfss+6} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Author command} & +% \textbf{Attribute} & +% \textbf{Value in} \uclass{article} \textbf{class} \\ +% \midrule +% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{rmfamily} & family & \texttt{cmr} \\ +% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{sffamily} & family & \texttt{cmss} \\ +% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{ttfamily} & family & \texttt{cmtt} \\ +% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{mdseries} & series & \texttt{m} \\ +% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{bfseries} & series & \texttt{bx} \\ +% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{upshape} & shape & \texttt{n} \\ +% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{itshape} & shape & \texttt{it} \\ +% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{slshape} & shape & \texttt{sl} \\ +% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{scshape} & shape & \texttt{sc} \\ +% \com{tiny} & size & \texttt{5pt} \\ +% \com{scriptsize} & size & \texttt{7pt} \\ +% \com{footnotesize} & size & \texttt{8pt} \\ +% \com{small} & size & \texttt{9pt} \\ +% \com{normalsize} & size & \texttt{10pt} \\ +% \com{large} & size & \texttt{12pt} \\ +% \com{Large} & size & \texttt{14.4pt} \\ +% \com{LARGE} & size & \texttt{17.28pt} \\ +% \com{huge} & size & \texttt{20.74pt} \\ +% \com{Huge} & size & \texttt{24.88pt}\\ +% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{normal text}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull +% box warning, for instance: +% \begin{verse} +% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\ +% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,} +% \end{verse} +% \lneed{6} +% The table~\vref{t+nfss+6} lists the author commands for fonts which set these five attributes\footnote{The +% values used by these commands are determined by the document class.}. +% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{checkfiles} +% package option (see above). +% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{hints} +% package option (see above). +% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It is the opposite of the +% \optd{listfiles} above. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} This option of the \upack{minitoc} package loads +% the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in sectionning commands or captions. See +% section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[Omega] The Omega typesetting system\,\footnote{Most but not all of this note is taken in the Omega documentation +% \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}. +% See~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} for more information.} +% ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (by \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} and \xname{John}{Plaice}) +% is an extension of \TeX{} that is aimed primarily at improving \TeX's multilingual abilities. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% When the \TeX{} program was originally developed in the mid seventies [\emph{circa} 1975] by +% Professor \xname{Donald~E.}{Knuth} +% it was mainly aimed at typesetting mathematical texts in the english language. Since then \TeX{} has +% made inroads in broader and broader areas of scientific, literary and other scholarly activities in many +% countries all over the world. In 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} froze \TeX, mainly in the interest of stability. +% However, he allows the \TeX{} code to be used as the basis for further developments, so long as the resulting system is +% distributed under a different name. +% +% In Omega all characters and pointers into data-structures are 31-bit +% wide, instead of 8-bit, thereby eliminating many of the trivial +% limitations of \TeX. Omega also allows multiple input and output +% character sets, and uses programmable filters to translate from one +% encoding to another, to perform contextual analysis, etc. Internally, +% Omega uses the universal Unicode/ISO-10646 character set. Omega also +% includes support for multiple writing directions. +% +% These improvements not only make it a lot easier for \TeX{} users to cope +% with multiple or complex languages, like Arabic, Indic, Khmer, Chinese, +% Japanese or Korean, in one document, but also form the basis for future +% developments in other areas, such as native color support and hypertext +% features. +% +% The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of Omega is called +% ``\emph{Lambda}''~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% Extending Omega with the \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} extensions is a separate +% project, known as ``\pack{Aleph}'' ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} and led by \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}. +% The \LaTeX\ for \pack{Aleph} is known as +% ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% There is an experimental system, named \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, which will regroup +% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} and other developments. +% A promising development is \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} by~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, with +% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}. +% \begin{table}[tp!] +% ^^A \changeskips +% \caption{Some systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex} +% \centering +% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc} +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\ +% &&+&&&&+\\ +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\ +% &&&&&&\\ +% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7} +% &&&&&&\\ +% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}} +% \end{array} \] +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{open}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately before +% (\emph{open}) the insertion of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[package] Packages\footnote{This info is taken from~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} and adapted.} are a very important +% feature of \LaTeX. These are extensions to the basic \LaTeX{} commands that are written to files with names +% that end with \suffix{.sty} and are loaded with the command \com{usepackage} in the preamble. Packages can be +% classified by they origin. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{Core} packages (in fact, \textbf{base} and \textbf{required} packages) are an integral part of +% the \LaTeX{} basic installation and are therefore fully standard. +% \item \textbf{Tools} packages are a set written by members of the \LaTeX3 Team and should always be in the +% installation. +% \item \textbf{Graphics} packages are a standardized set for including pictures generated by other programs +% and for handling colors; they are at the same level as the tools packages. +% \item \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX} packages, published by the American Mathematical +% Society\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}, should be in any +% installation\footnote{They are indispensable if you use a lot of mathematics.}. +% \item \textbf{Contributed} packages have been submitted by actual users; certain of these have established +% themselves as ``essential'' to standard \LaTeX{} usage, but all are useful. +% \end{itemize} +% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed at each occurrence of +% a given type of mini-table, to force the page style to use for the current page. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[partlof] A list of figures for a part. +% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlofs. +% \item[partlot] A list of tables for a part. +% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlots. +% \item[parttoc] A table of contents for a part. +% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the parttocs. +% \item[PDF] Portable Document Format~\cite{pdfspec}. A descendant of the PostScript language from Adobe, +% optimized for navigation on the Internet. It adds hypertext, font substitution, and compression features. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{placeins}] The \pack{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}} +% package~\cite{placeins} keeps floats ``in their place'', +% preventing them from floating past a \com{FloatBarrier} command into another section. To use it, declare +% \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} in the preamble and +% insert \com{FloatBarrier} commands at places that floats +% should not move past, perhaps at every \com{section}. The \opt{insection} package option of the +% \upack{minitoc} package does that with adequate options, and loads also the \pack{flafter} package +% (described in~\cite{ltoutput} and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); +% see section~\vref{s+placing}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] A plain text file containing the documentation of +% the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. +% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} A\virage{} version of \LaTeX\ customized +% for the polish (\lopt{polski}) language. It has been replaced by the \pack{polski} package. See~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. +% But the \emph{same} name was referring also to a version of \LaTeX\ customized for the japanese language, +% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}. +% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the \upack{minitoc} package +% and its documentation; you should adapt it to your needs. +% See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[polymorphic entry] An entry\index{polymorphic entry} in the TOC, LOF or LOT which changes its aspect +% depending on the place where it appears (main TOC, minitable, etc.); see section~\vref{ss+polym}. +% \item[PostScript] A page description language, by Adobe. It describes the appearance of a page, including +% elements such as text, graphics, and scanned images, to a printer or visualization device. Introduced by +% Adobe in 1985, it has become the language of choice in high quality printing. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[preamble] In the main file of a \LaTeX{} source document, the part of it between the commands +% \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} and \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. In the preamble, +% you can insert global declarations and the loading of packages via \com{usepackage} commands. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[preparation] The preparation commands of the \upack{minitoc} package prepare the auxiliary files for the +% mini-tables of a given type. A~\emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before any +% insertion command for the mini-table type. The preparation commands are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(part level)\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(chapter level)\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(section level)\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}&(all levels) +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class, for preparing conference proceedings. For the +% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. +% \item[pseudo-chapter] +% Or starred chapter. A chapter introduced by a \com{chapter*} command. By default, it has no entry in +% the table of contents. \com{chapter*} needs some precautions with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{s+starred.chap}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{quotchap}] The \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} provides a set of commands for adding quotations to +% some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: +% \class{book}, and \class{report}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.quotchap} and +% section~\vref{faq.39}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[README] is a plain text file (english) describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package, +% plus some useful infos. +% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}, +% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and +% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many +% auxiliary files). +% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} An example of shell script, which sorts the files +% of the \upack{minitoc} package into classes (one directory +% for each class). It should be run after the scripts +% \scrp{imk} (mandatory) and \scrp{emk} and/or +% \scrp{fmk}, in that sequence. See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{romannum}] The \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} changes the numbers (for sectionning commands) +% generated by \LaTeX{} from arabic digits to roman numerals. This package uses +% the \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.romannum} and +% section~\vref{faq.40}). +% \item[\pack{rotating}] The \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} package performs all the different sorts of +% rotation one might like, including complete figures. +% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] The pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} package provides commands to define new floats +% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, and userdefined ones); +% the \pack{rotating} package~\cite{rotating} provides new environments (\env{sidewaysfigure} +% and \env{sidewaystable}) which are rotated by $90^\circ$ or $270^\circ$. +% But what about new rotated floats, e.g.\ a rotated ruled one? +% This package makes this possible; it builds a bridge between both packages +% and extend the commands from the \pack{float} package to define rotated +% versions of the new floats, too. +% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} is a wrapper for \LaTeX\ and companion programs. +% Its purpose is, given a \LaTeX\ source to process, +% to compile it enough times to resolve all references, possibly running satellite programs such as \textbf{\BibTeX}, +% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., to produce appropriate data files. It has facilities to make +% some post-processing cleanup actions, like deleting the auxiliary files created by \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} See {\KOMAScript} above. +% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} See {\KOMAScript} above. +% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} See {\KOMAScript} above. +% \item[sectionning commands] These are the \LaTeX\ commands which specify the logical structure of your document. +% The main sectionning commands are \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section}, +% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph}, or \com{subparagraph}. +% Some standard document classes have not the \com{chapter} command (like the \class{article} and +% \class{proc} classes), some have no sectionning commands (like the \class{letter} class). In the later +% case, the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. If some of the \com{part}, \com{chapter}, +% or \com{section} commands are not defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands for that level are +% unavailable. If \com{chapter} is defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are not +% defined in the current and older versions of the \upack{minitoc} package, but if \com{chapter} is +% not defined and \com{section} is defined, then the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are +% defined. See section~\vref{note+sectionning}. +% In non-standard document classes, sectionning commands with non-standard names cannot be recognized by the +% \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[sectlof] A list of figures for a section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlofs. +% \item[sectlot] A list of tables for a section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlots. +% \item[\upack{sectsty}] The \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} provides a set of commands for changing +% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article}, +% \class{book}, and \class{report}. This package also works with the {\KOMAScript} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} +% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, and \class{scrreprt}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sectsty} and +% section~\vref{faq.28}). +% \item[secttoc] A table of contents for a section. +% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the secttocs. +% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] The \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (for \LaTeXe) borrows +% some definitions from the standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} classes +% and modifies them in order to print the part, chapter, section, subsection\ldots{} headers with +% the Sans-Serif variant of the current font. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sfheaders} and +% section~\vref{faq.41}). +% \item[shell] In the Unix, Unix-like and Linux operating systems, the \textbf{shell} is a program used as an +% interface between the operating system and the user. It can also be used as a scripting language to write +% programs or scripts to prepare routinely used sequences of tasks. The main shells are the +% Bourne shell (\textbf{sh}), the C~shell (\textbf{csh}), the Korn shell (\textbf{ksh}), +% and their many successors (like \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.). +% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} An\imess{W0020} option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It forces the use of short extensions +% (3~characters) in the names of the minitoc auxiliary files. This option is inactive by default, but is +% automatically activated if your operating system needs short extensions. See \textbf{autoconfiguration} +% above and the section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] The \pack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc} allows to create an other table of +% contents in a document, with an other title and an other depth than the main table of contents. +% \item[SJIS] The SJIS character encoding (for the japanese language), also known as MS-Kanji (Kanji for +% Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}), +% consists of two overlaid character sets: the so-called halfwidth Katakana (JIS X0201-1976, 1-byte characters +% encoded in the range \texttt{0xA1} to \texttt{0xDF}) and the (fullwidth) JIS character set (JIS X0208-1990, +% mapped to the remaining code points). This information is taken from~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} A version of \LaTeX\ customized for the swedish language. See~\cite{slatex}. +% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{splitbib} which allows for sorting a bibliography +% into categories and +% subcategories; this is interesting for lists of publications, for grouping references by subject, by year,~... +% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] The \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv} is intended to be used by the authors +% of \LaTeX{} packages that need to know about the sectional divisions provided by the document class. +% \item[strut] A vertical invisible rule used to force a minimal separation between two lines of text. +% \item[\upack{subfig}] The \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig} provides support for the +% inclusion of small, ``sub-figures'' and ``sub-tables''. It simplifies the positioning, captioning and labeling of +% them within a single \env{figure} or \env{table} environment. In addition, this package allows +% such sub-captions to be written to the List of Figures or List of Tables if desired. +% \item[\upack{subfigure}] The \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure} is an obsolete version (by the same +% author) of the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. +% \item[suffix] See ``extension'' above. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}The \TeX~Directory Structure~\cite{ftds,tds}; a directory structure highly recommended to +% store macros, fonts, and the other implementation-independent \TeX{} system files; it also suggests how to +% incorporate the rest of the \TeX{} files in a single structure; the \index{TDS}TDS has been designed to work on all +% modern systems. +% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} is a computer program created by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}. +% It is aimed at typesetting text and mathematical formulae. +% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} started writing the \TeX{} typesetting +% engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing +% equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at +% that time, especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of +% deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own +% books and articles. \TeX{} as we use it today was released in 1982, +% with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8-bit +% characters and multiple languages. \TeX{} is renowned for being +% extremely stable, for running on many different kinds of computers, +% and for being virtually bug free. The version number of \TeX{} is +% converging to $\pi$ and is now at $3.141592$. +% +% \TeX{} is pronounced ``Tech,'' with a ``ch'' as in the German word +% ``Ach'' or in the Scottish ``Loch.'' In an ASCII environment, \TeX{} +% becomes \texttt{TeX}. +% \item[\upack{thailatex}] The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} allows to typeset +% documents in the Thai language. You can also use the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a tight line spacing in the +% mini-tables. The opposite option is \optd{loose}. +% \item[\upack{titlesec}] The \pack{titlesec}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} package~\cite{titletoc} allows to change the sectioning titles. +% Amongst its many features it provides margin titles, different format in left and right pages, rules above +% and below the title, etc. Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\upack{titletoc}] The\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} \pack{titletoc} package is useful for toc entries formatting, +% providing the possibility of changing the format in the middle of a document, grouping the entries +% in a single paragraph, pretty free-forms entries, partial tocs, etc. +% Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% +% The \xfile{titletoc.sty} file is not part of the \pack{titlesec} package; it's an independent package, +% but it's described in the \pack{titlesec} package documentation~\cite{titletoc}. +% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} A script file which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant +% hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} (to be ajusted to your system). +% \item[TOC, ToC] Acronym for ``table of contents''. +% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] The \pack{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} package~\cite{tocbibind} can be used to add the ToC +% and/or bibliography and/or the index etc., to the Table of Contents listing. But it needs some precautions +% when used with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the table of contents. +% \item[\upack{tocloft}] The \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} provides means of controlling the +% typographic design of the Table of Contents, List of Figures and List of Tables. +% New kinds of ``List of \ldots' can be defined. If you use the \pack{tocloft} package and the +% \upack{minitoc} package, see section~\vref{faq+tocloft} about fixing some minor compatibility issues. +% \item[\xfile{TODO}] is a plain text file (english) which lists some suggested developments of the package, +% not yet implemented. Comments and suggestions are welcome. +% \item[token] A token\footnote{This definition is taken from ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} is either +% (a)~a single character with an attached category code (see ``catcode'' above), or (b)~a control sequence. +% \virage{} You \emph{should} remember two chief things about \TeX's tokens: (1)~A~control sequence is considered to be +% a single object that is no longer composed of a sequence of symbols. Therefore long control sequence names +% are no harder for \TeX\ to deal with than short ones, after they have been replaced by tokens. Furthermore, +% spaces are not ignored after control sequences inside a token list; the ignore-space rule applies only in an +% input file, during the time that strings of characters are being tokenized. (2)~Once a category code has been +% attached to a character token, the attachment is permanent. For instance, if character `\verb|{|' were +% suddenly declared to be of category~12 instead of category~1, the characters `\verb|{|$_1$' already inside token +% lists of \TeX\ would still remain of category~1; only newly made lists would contain `\verb|{|$_{12}$' tokens. +% In other words, individual characters receive a fixed interpretation as soon as they have been read from a file, +% based on the category they have at the time of reading. Control sequences are different, since they can change +% their interpretation at any time. \TeX's digestive processes always know exactly what a character token signifies, +% because the category code appears in the token itself; but when the digestive processes encounter a control sequence +% token, they must look up the current definition of that control sequence in order to figure out what it means. +% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] The \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} (by \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} provides +% a quick method for defining new float types in \LaTeX. A single command sets up a new float in the +% same style as the \LaTeX{} kernel \env{figure} and \env{table} float types. +% \item[\pack{txfonts}] The \pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts} provides the \texttt{TX} fonts, which consist of +% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt +% \item virtual text roman fonts using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with +% some modified and additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings; +% \item \textsf{virtual text sans serif fonts using Adobe Helvetica (or URW NimbusSanL) with +% additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings}; +% \item {\smooth\texttt{monospaced typewriter fonts in the OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1\linebreak[4] encodings}}; +% \item math alphabets using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with modified metrics; +% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of Computer Modern math fonts (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX, +% and Greek letters of CMR); +% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of AmS{} fonts (MSAM and MSBM); +% \item additional math fonts of various symbols. +% \end{enumerate} +% All fonts are in the Type~1 format (in \suffix{.afm} and \suffix{.pfb} files). +% Necessary \suffix{.tfm} and \suffix{.vf} files together with \LaTeXe\ package files and font map files +% (\suffix{.map}) for \tool{dvips} are provided. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[UNIX] A modern operating system, available on many computers and in various flavors. From the +% \upack{minitoc} point of view, it has the advantage of using filenames with long extensions (the length +% limit is too high to be a problem with the number of mini-tables). +% \item[UNIX-like] Operating systems analog to Unix, with the same advantages. Linux is a good example, but others +% exist. +% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} A PERL script, by \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, +% to add a \texttt{webpage} \BibTeX{} entry type, +% and add support for general \texttt{url} and \texttt{lastchecked} fields, to (most) \BibTeX{} \suffix{.bst} files. +% Optionally adds basic support for \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{doi} fields, and \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref} +% support, too. See \cite{hypertex,hyperref.web}. +% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), also called UTF~2 or FSS-UTF, is a special representation +% of Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). It uses multibyte sequences of various lengths, but only 2-byte and 3-byte +% sequences are implemented in \pack{CJK}. ASCII characters will be used as-is --- without this property it would be +% impossible to use UTF~8 with \TeX. See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{varsects}] The \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} provides a set of commands for changing +% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article}, +% \class{book}, and \class{report}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.varsects} and +% section~\vref{faq.33}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \par\reversemarginpar +% \item[Wikipedia] The \index{Wikipedia}Wikipedia\index{Wikipedia} +% is a free, multilingual, open content (neutral, verifiable, modifiable and improvable by anyone) +% encyclopedia project operated by the non-profit Wikimedia Foundation. +% Its name is a portemanteau of the words \emph{wiki} (a type of collaborative website) and \emph{encyclopedia}. +% Launched in 2001 by \name{Jimmy}{Wales} and \name{Larry}{Sanger}, it is the largest, fastest growing and most +% popular general reference work currently available on the Internet. +% \par\normalmarginpar +% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] The \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig} provides the \env{wrapfigure} and +% \env{wraptable} environments to place a figure or table at the side of the page and wrap text around~it. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\scrp{xmk}] An example of shell script, which typesets the example document files into PDF documents. +% \item[\upack{xr}] The \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr} implements a system for eXternal References. I wrote the +% first version of this package, but it had severe problems. \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} rewrote it in a much +% better and more robust way. With his permission, I used some of his code in the \upack{minitoc} package +% to implement the preparation commands (like \com{dominitoc}). If you use also the \pack{hyperref} +% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, use \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} in place of the \upack{xr} package. +% \end{wdesc} +% \end{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em} +% \minitoc +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt} +% \mtcskip +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +% \minilot +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} +% Ce chapitre tente d'expliquer certains termes utilisés dans cette documentation et décrit quelques fichiers et suffixes +% utiles. +% De nombreuses informations proviennent des documentations de divers paquetages cités (souvent du résumé ou +% \emph{abstract}), et +% de~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2F,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}. +% \clearpage +% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \jsection{<<~.~>>\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{<<~.~>>} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\suffix{.aux}] Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier \emph{auxiliaire} d'un document \LaTeX{}. Il transfère +% des informations d'une exécution de \LaTeX{} à~la suivante. +% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.aux} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier classe de document, +% chargé via la commande \com{documentclass}. +% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} Le suffixe du nom pour le fichier source documenté d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX. +% Ce fichier est souvent associé à~un fichier \suffix{.ins} pour engendrer le paquetage ou la classe. +% Compiler un fichier \suffix{.dtx} avec \LaTeX{} engendre la documentation. +% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier d'installation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX. +% Lorsque qu'il est compilé avec \LaTeX, il extrait les fichiers du paquetage ou de la classe depuis un +% fichier \suffix{.dtx}. +% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des figures\fg. +% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} Le suffixe du nom du fichier rapport de compilation. +% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des tableaux\fg. +% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\suffix{.maf} Le suffixe du nom du fichier engendré par l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. +% Option par défaut. +% Ce fichier contient la liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc de définition de langue. Un fichier minitoc de +% définition de langue contient les définitions des titres des mini-tables dans une langue donnée. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc objet de langue. Pour certaines langues +% exotiques, le codage rend difficile l'insertion directe des titres dans un fichier \suffix{.mld}; donc +% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\suffix{.ptc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier paquetage, chargé via \com{usepackage}. +% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} Le suffixe du nom d'un fichier source \TeX\ ou \LaTeX\ normal. +% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} table des matières\fg. +% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[absolue (numérotation)] Les fichiers auxiliaires pour les minitables ont un suffixe contenant un +% \emph{numéro absolu}, c'est-à-dire un numéro qui est unique et toujours croissant depuis la première +% partie, le premier chapitre ou la première section; ceci a résolu quelques problèmes obscurs, et aussi +% frappé d'obsolescence quelques commandes, telles que \com{firstpartis}, +% \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}. La numérotation absolue a été introduite dans +% la version~\#23. +% \item[\upack{abstract}] Le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) nécessite +% quelques précautions s'il est utilisé avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}. +% \item[\feat{after}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{après} un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[ajustement] Quelques commandes et environnements de \upack{minitoc} sont dits \og{} commandes +% d'ajustement\fg{} car ils sont utilisés dans certaines circonstances pour \og{} ajuster\fg{} un compteur ou +% altérer l'affichage de fichiers de contenu. Ces commandes et environnements sont +% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc}, +% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, +% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, +% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, +% \env{mtchideinmainlof} et +% \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% Il est \virage\emph{fortement recommandé} que l'utilisateur vérifie le résultat de tels ajustements dans le +% document final. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\pack{afterpage}] La paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} est utilisé pour ajouter du code qui sera +% exécuté \emph{après} la prochaine coupure de page. +% \item[\upack{alnumsec}] +% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} vous permet d'utiliser une numérotation alphanumérique des sections, +% c'est-à-dire: A.~Introduction; III.~Loi internationale. Ce résultat est similaire +% à~celui du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), +% mais vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de sectionnement standard de \LaTeX. Il est donc possible +% de changer facilement de schéma de numérotation. Lettres grecques, lettres doubles~(bb) et différents +% délimiteurs autour des numéros sont supportés. +% Ce paquetage doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.alnumsec} et la +% section~\vref{faq.42}). +% \item[\upack{alphanum}] Le\imess{W0025} paquetage \pack{alphanum}, qui fait partie de la +% classe spécialisée \class{jura}~\cite{jura}, +% de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \lneed{3} +% \item[\AmS] L'\emph{American Mathematical Society}~\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron.% +% \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}} +% Cette société savante a développé les classes de document suivantes: +% \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont, malheureusement, \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% \class{amsbook} est compatible mais demande des précautions. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \item[\uclass{amsart}]\iclass{amsart} Une\imess{W0026} classe de document pour des articles~\cite{amslatex}, +% fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette classe +% est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{amsbook}]\iclass{amsbook} Une\imess{I0041} classe de document pour des livres~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par +% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% mais requiert des précautions. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{amsproc}]\iclass{amsproc} Une\imess{W0027} classe de document pour des comptes-rendus de +% congrès~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette +% classe est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% est un paquetage de support de langues pour \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), fondé sur le +% fichier \xfile{omega.sty} original du projet Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). Cependant, il offre quelques +% fonctionnalités additionnelles utiles. +% Certains fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) utilisent des titres définis par \pack{Antomega}: +% \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, +% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld} et \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\env{appendices}] Voir \upack{appendix} ci-dessous. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{appendix}] Le\imess{I0042} paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) +% fournit diverses manières de formater les titres des appendices. Des environnements +% nommés (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} +% sont aussi fournis pouvant être utilisés, par exemple, pour des appendices par chapitre ou par section. Si +% ce paquetage est utilisé avec \upack{minitoc}, certaines précautions sont nécessaires (voir la +% section~\vref{faq+appendix}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} est un système (de \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) pour préparer des documents \LaTeX{} dans +% les langues arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou \lopt{farsi}. Les titres dans \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} proviennent +% des fichiers \xfile{arabic.ldf} et \xfile{farsi.ldf} de ce système. +% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} est un paquetage (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) pour préparer des +% documents en langue arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou hébraïque (\lopt{hebrew}). Les titres dans \xfile{arab.mld} (ou \xfile{arabic.mld}), +% \xfile{arab2.mld} et +% \xfile{hebrew.mld} proviennent d'\packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, mais ceux donnés par \xfile{hebrew2.mld} proviennent +% de \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} est un paquetage (réalisé par \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, +% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) pour préparer des +% documents \LaTeX{} en langue arménienne. +% Les titres dans \xfile{armenian.mld} proviennent du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}. +% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle offre des commandes de sectionnement: +% \com{part} et \com{section} (et en dessous), mais pas \com{chapter}. Elle est compatible avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et section (mais, bien +% sûr, pas au niveau chapitre indisponible). +% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}] +% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter au début du document (en fait, à~la fin exacte de +% son préambule, mais à~l'intérieur de celui-ci, ce qui implique quelques restrictions), à~l'endroit +% où \verb|\begin{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans +% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même. +% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}] +% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter à~la fin du document, à~l'endroit +% où \verb|\end{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans +% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même. +% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Depuis la version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} détecte automatiquement si les +% suffixes des noms de fichiers sont limités à~3~caractères (comme sous MS-DOS). Ce processus se nomme +% l'autoconfiguration. L'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} force la limitation à~3~caractères. +% \item[auxiliaire] Pendant la préparation d'un document, le système \LaTeX\ utilise quelques fichiers +% \textbf{auxiliaires} pour stocker des informations. Les fichiers auxiliaires standard sont +% \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (pour les labels de références croisées, les compteurs, etc.), +% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} pour la table des matières, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} pour la liste des figures +% et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} pour la liste des tableaux. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} crée ses propres +% fichiers auxiliaires, pour y~stocker les contenus de chaque mini-table. Ces fichiers sont les +% \emph{fichiers auxiliaires minitoc}, dont les noms sont de la forme \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{suffixe}, +% le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} liste les suffixes possibles. +% Voir aussi le suffixe \suffix{.maf} plus haut. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{babel}] Le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et autres) est un +% vaste paquetage permettant de préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans de nombreuses langues, et pas seulement en +% anglais. De nombreux titres pour les mini-tables proviennent directement du paquetage \pack{babel}. +% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} Un paquetage pour composer des documents dans la langue \lopt{bangla} +% (\lopt{bengali}) en utilisant les systèmes {\TeX/\LaTeX}; voir~\cite{bangtex}. +% \item[\feat{before}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{avant} un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\BibTeX] Un programme écrit par \name{Oren}{Patashnik} pour produire des bibliographies dans des documents \LaTeX. +% Distribué avec \LaTeX. Voir~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}. +% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} Un paquetage~\cite{bibtopic} \LaTeX{} pour inclure plusieurs bibliographies dans +% un document. Ces bibliographies pourraient être considérées comme couvrant des sujets différents (d'où le nom) +% ou du matériel bibliographique (par exemple, documentation de premier et second niveaux), etc. +% \item[\upack{bibunits}] Le paquetage \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} permet de faire des bibliographies +% distinctes pour différentes unités ou partie du texte. Les unités peuvent être des chapitres, des sections ou +% des environnements \env{bibunit}. Ce paquetage est compatible avec une large variété de paquetages, dont +% (mais sans y~être limité) \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} +% et les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement: +% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous). +% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et +% chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires). +% \item[\pack{booktabs}] Ce beau paquetage~\cite{booktabs} vous aide à~préparer de plus belles tables, \emph{sans} +% filets verticaux ni filets doubles. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[cadratin] Voir «~em~» ci-dessous. +% \item[\pack{calc}] Le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} facilite les calculs numériques (sur des compteurs et +% des dimensions) lors le la préparation d'un document \LaTeX. +% \item[cappuccino] Voir «~minutes~» ci-dessous. +% \item[\upack{captcont}] Le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} fournit un support pour conserver +% un numéro de figure ou de caption pour plusieurs environnements flottants --- habituellement sur plusieurs pages. +% Il permet de contrôler le contenu des pages de la liste des figures et de la liste des tableaux. Il devrait +% être compatible avec tous les autres paquetages qui modifient ou étendent l'environnement flottant et avec +% le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} en particulier. +% \item[\upack{caption}] Le paquetage \upack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} offre de nombreuses façons d'adapter les +% captions (légendes) dans des environnements flottants tels que \env{figure} et \env{table}, et coopère +% avec de nombreux autres paquetages. +% \item[\upack{caption2}] Le paquetage\,\footnote{Ce texte provient de la documentation du paquetage \pack{caption}, +% et a été traduit. Les paquetages \pack{caption} et \pack{caption2} ont le même auteur, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.} +% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} était considéré comme étant une version expérimentale +% parallèle du paquetage normal \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} et a été supplanté par la nouvelle version~\mbox{3.0} +% du paquetage normal \pack{caption} en décembre 2003. \pack{caption2} est encore supporté +% d'une certaine manière, ce qui signifie qu'il fera partie des prochaines distributions et que les erreurs +% seront encore corrigées, afin que les documents existants utilisant ce paquetage puissent encore être +% compilés. Mais \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} \emph{ne répondra plus} aux questions concernant ce paquetage sauf +% pour les questions sur le passage à~la nouvelle version du paquetage \pack{caption}. Et ce paquetage +% \emph{ne sera ni adapté ni amélioré} dans le futur. +% +% Vous êtes donc priés de ne pas utiliser ce paquetage pour de nouveaux documents. Il est vieux, il est +% obsolète et il commence à~sentir mauvais! +% +% Vous êtes également priés d'ignorer tous les conseils dans des livres ou autres documents qui essayent de +% vous dire que le paquetage \pack{caption2} devrait être utilisé à~la place du paquetage \pack{caption} -- ces +% conseils sont démodés depuis décembre 2003. +% \item[catcode] Abréviation de «~code de catégorie~» (\emph{category code}). Tout\,\footnote{Cette définition +% est tirée du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} d'abord, il est sage d'avoir une idée précise de ce +% que votre clavier envoie à~la machine. Il y~a 256~caractères que \TeX\ peut rencontrer à~chaque étape, dans un +% fichier ou dans une ligne de texte frappé directement sur votre terminal. Ces 256~caractères sont classés en +% 16~catégories numérotées de~0 à~15. Voir la table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \def?{\phantom{0}} +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Codes de catégorie}\label{t+J+catcodes} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}clZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{Catégorie}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% ?0&Caractère d'échappement&(\texttt{\bs}~habituellement)\\ +% ?1&Début de groupe&(\texttt{\{}~habituellement)\\ +% ?2&Fin de groupe&(\texttt{\}}~habituellement)\\ +% ?3&Début et fin de mode mathématique&(\texttt{\$}~habituellement)\\ +% ?4&Taquet d'alignement&(\texttt{\&}~habituellement)\\ +% ?5&Fin de ligne&(\emph{return}~habituellement)\\ +% ?6&Paramètre&(\texttt{\#}~habituellement)\\ +% ?7&Exposant&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~habituellement)\\ +% ?8&Indice&(\texttt{\_}~habituellement)\\ +% ?9&Caractère ignoré&(\emph{null}~habituellement)\\ +% 10&Espace&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~habituellement)\\ +% 11&Lettre&(\texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z} et~\texttt{a}, \ldots, \texttt{z})\\ +% 12&Autre caractère&(aucun de ceux ci-dessus ou ci-dessous)\\ +% 13&Caractère actif&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~habituellement)\\ +% 14&Caractère commentaire&(\texttt{\%}~habituellement)\\ +% 15&Caractère invalide&(\emph{delete}~habituellement)\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% Il n'est pas nécessaire que vous appreniez ces numéros de code; l'important est que \TeX\ connaisse 16~types +% différents de caractères. Tout d'abord, «~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~» vous laisse croire qu'il n'y a que deux +% types --- le caractère d'échappement et les autres --- puis il vous parle de deux types de plus, les symboles de +% groupement~\texttt{\{} et~\texttt{\}}. Le code de catégorie pour tout caractère peut être changé à~tout moment, +% mais il est habituellement prudent de se conformer à~un schéma particulier. +% \item[\upack{ccaption}] Le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} fournit des commandes pour des +% \og{} captions de continuation\fg, des captions non numérotés, et un en-tête de légende pour tout +% environnement. Des méthodes sont fournies pour définir des captions à~utiliser en dehors des environnements +% flottants et pour définir de nouveaux environnements flottants et des sous-flottants. Des outils sont fournis +% pour définir vos propres styles de captions. +% \item[\upack{chngpage}] Le paquetage \pack{chngpage} (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) fournit des commandes pour changer +% la mise en page au milieu d'un document et pour tester de manière robuste la mise en page pour les pages +% paires ou impaires. +% \item[Chapter~0] +% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro un, mais par un chapitre numéroté zéro (ou même +% avec un numéro plus bizarre). Ceci posait un sérieux problème dans les anciennes versions du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}: les minitocs n'apparaissaient plus dans les bons chapitres, et une première correction +% fut l'introduction de commandes spécifiques (\com{firstchapteris} et analogues). Avec l'ajout de la +% numérotation absolue des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables (voir \emph{absolue} plus haut), le +% problème fut résolu dans \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, et ces commandes devinrent obsolètes. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] Le paquetage \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib} permet d'avoir plusieurs bibliographies +% dans un document \LaTeX, y~compris des éléments cités (par \com{cite}) dans plus d'une bibliographie. +% Un dépit du nom \og{}\pack{chapterbib}\fg, \emph{les bibliographies sont pour chaque fichier inclus par +% \com{include}}, pas nécessairement pour chaque chapitre. +% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles} +% Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle teste chaque mini-table pour voir si elle est vide; puis les +% mini-tables vides \emph{ne sont pas} imprimées. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire +% (\opt{nocheckfiles}) imprime aussi les mini-tables vides, qui sont laides. Voir la +% section~\vref{o+checkfiles}. +% \item[\upack{CJK}] Le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et autres) est un ensemble de paquetages et de +% fontes pour préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans certaines langues orientales, telles que le chinois, +% le coréen (fontes Hangûl ou Hanja), le japonais et le thaï, ainsi que certaines variantes du russe. +% Les titres des mini-tables pour ces langues +% proviennent de fichiers du système \pack{CJK} et ont été insérés dans des fichiers \suffix{.mld} lorsque ceci +% était possible, ou dans des fichiers \suffix{.mlo} lorsque le codage est incompatible avec le mécanisme +% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx}; +% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit alors charger le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant. +% \pack{CJK} implante les codages GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8 et CNS (sur 16~bits, sauf UTF~8 sur 24~bits). +% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Schémas de codage implantés dans \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{1~octet}&\textbf{2~octets}&\textbf{3~octets}\\ +% \midrule +% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\ +% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\ +% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% Certains schémas de codage (Big~5, SJIS) ont des trous dans le domaine du deuxième octet. +% Il est difficile de lire avec les codages Big~5 et SJIS directement vers \TeX\ puisque certaines des valeurs +% utilisées pour les deuxièmes octets des codages sont réservées pour des caractères de contrôle: +% «~\texttt{\{}~», «~\texttt{\}}~» et «~\texttt{\bs}~». Le fait de les redéfinir casse beaucoup de choses dans +% \LaTeX; pour éviter ceci, normalement des préprocesseurs sont utilisés pour convertir le deuxième octet en +% un nombre suivi d'un caractère délimiteur. Pour plus de détails, voir~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} +% y~présente en grand détail tous les codages \pack{CJK} qui sont ou ont été utilisés. +% Notez que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} pour contourner ce problème; +% voir la section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% \item[classe] La \textbf{classe}\,\footnote{Cette note a été extraite de~\cite{NSSL2E}, puis adaptée.} +% est la première information que \LaTeX{} a besoin de connaître lors du traitement d'un fichier d'entrée; +% c'est le type de document que l'auteur souhaite produite. Ceci est spécifié par la commande +% \com{documentclass}. +% \begin{quote} +% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{classe}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \noindent Ici \emph{classe} spécifie le type du document à~produire. +% Le tableau~\vref{t+documentclasses} liste les classes standard de documents~\cite{classes}. La distribution \LaTeXe{} +% fournit d'autres classes pour d'autres documents, y~compris des lettres et des transparents, +% mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas été testé avec toutes ces classes. +% Les paramètres \emph{options} adaptent le comportement de la classe du document. Les options doivent être +% séparées par des virgules. Les classes standard supportées par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont listées +% dans la section~\vref{s+supported+classes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Classes standard de documents}\label{t+documentclasses} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Classe}&\textbf{Usage}\\ +% \midrule +% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&Pour des articles dans des journaux scientifiques, des présentations, des rapports courts, +% de la documentation de programmes, des invitations, \ldots\\ +% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&Pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\ +% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&Pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; analogue à~la classe +% \class{article}.\\ +% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&Pour préparer l'annonce d'une version de \LaTeX{}; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\ +% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&Pour des rapports plus longs contenant plusieurs chapitres, de petits livres, des thèses, \ldots\\ +% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&Pour de vrais livres.\\ +% \class{letter}&Pour des lettres; comme cette classe n'a pas de commandes de sectionnement, n'utilisez pas +% \upack{minitoc} avec cette classe.\\ +% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&Pour des transparents; cette classe utilise de grandes lettres sans empattements. Vous +% pouvez aussi envisager d'utiliser Beamer\TeX{}\,$^a$ à~la place. N'utilisez pas \upack{minitoc} avec ces classes.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{{\froff$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}}\hfill\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{close}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement après +% (fermeture, \emph{close}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer les fichiers de documentation +% en format PostScript à~partir de ceux en format PDF. +% Vous devriez adapter ce script à~vos besoins. +% \item[CMR] Pour «~Computer Modern Roman~». Le sous-ensemble romain des fontes «~Computer Modern~». +% Voir «~Computer Modern~» ci-dessous. +% \item[codage] Un codage (\emph{encoding}) spécifie l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la +% fonte (par exemple, si le soixante-quinzième caractère est un «~A~»). Le codage de fonte le plus courant +% pour \TeX\ est OT1. L'autre option prédéfinie est~T1 (\TeX\ étendu). Il y~a aussi +% US~ASCII (7~bits), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bits), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}), +% etc. Voir la table~\vref{t+var-encodings} et~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Codages divers}\label{t+var-encodings} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Commentaire}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ansinew}&Codage ANSI pour Windows~3.1, extension de Latin-1.\\ +% \texttt{applemac}&Codage Macintosh.\\ +% \texttt{ascii}&Codage ASCII pour l'intervalle 32--127.\\ +% \texttt{cp1250}&Page de code Windows 1250 (Europe centrale et orientale).\\ +% \texttt{cp1251}&Page de code Windows 1251 (cyrillique).\\ +% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonyme de \texttt{ansinew}.\\ +% \texttt{cp1257}&Page de code Windows 1257 (baltique).\\ +% \texttt{cp437}&Page de code IBM~437, qui est la page de code +% américaine d'origine et contient les lettres, les +% chiffres, des symboles mathématiques et quelques +% caractères utiles pour construire des pseudo-graphiques.\\ +% \texttt{cp437de}&Page de code IBM~437 (version allemande).\\ +% \texttt{cp850}&Page de code IBM~850, presque identique à~ISO~Latin~1, +% mais la disposition des caractères n'est pas la même.\\ +% \texttt{cp852}&Page de code IBM~852.\\ +% \texttt{cp855}&Page de code IBM~855 (cyrillique).\\ +% \texttt{cp865}&Page de code IBM~865.\\ +% \texttt{cp866}&Page de code IBM~866 (MS-DOS cyrillique).\\ +% \texttt{decmulti}&Codage du jeu international de caractères DEC.\\ +% \texttt{latin1}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% à~la plupart des langues européennes occidentales, y~compris +% le danois, le néerlandais, l'anglais, le féroéen, le +% finnois, le flamand, le français, l'allemand, +% l'islandais, l'italien, le norvégien, le portugais, +% l'espagnol et le suédois. Certaines langues non +% européennes, comme l'hawaïen et l'indonésien, sont aussi +% écrites avec ce jeu de caractères.\\ +% \texttt{latin2}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% à~la plupart des langues d'Europe centrale, y~compris +% le croate, le tchèque, le hongrois, le polonais, le +% roumain, le slovaque et le slovène.\\ +% \texttt{latin3}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% à~l'espéranto, le maltais, le turc et le galicien. +% Cependant, \texttt{latin5} est le jeu de caractères +% préféré pour le turc.\\ +% \texttt{latin4}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% pour les langues baltes (latvien ou letton, estonien et +% lituanien), le groendlandais et le lapon (sâme, sámi).\\ +% \texttt{latin5}&Est essentiellement identique à~\texttt{latin1}, +% excepté que certains caractères turcs remplacent des +% lettres islandaises moins souvent utilisées.\\ +% \texttt{next}&Codage pour Next.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en anglais. +% \item[compteur] Un registre \TeX\ contenant une valeur entière. Il~y a 256 compteurs (de~0 à~255) dans \TeX, mais +% \LaTeX\ en utilise certains, et de nombreux paquetages ont besoin de quelques compteurs pour leur propre +% usage. Une version étendue, dérivée de \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, permet davantage de compteurs. +% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), lui aussi, permet davantage de compteurs. +% \item[Computer Modern] Pour \og Computer Modern\fg. Un ensemble de fontes~\cite{cmt} conçues +% par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} pour \TeX. Initialement, elles étaient construites avec +% {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (un programme lui aussi créé par \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}), +% mais aujourd'hui il en existe des versions PostScript type~1 (vectoriel), avec des extensions (pour les caractères +% accentués, principalement): les fontes EC (\emph{European Computer Modern}), les fontes cm-super, etc. +% \item[CTAN] Le \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network} (réseau d'archives \TeX\ complètes), un ensemble +% d'archives informatiques contenant la plupart des ressources relatives à~\TeX{} (telles que fontes, +% logiciels, documentations, paquetages). Elles sont accessibles par +% Internet. Voir \url{http://ctan.org}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] J'ai dû utiliser le paquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour préparer l'entrée +% <<~The pdf\TeX\ Program~>>~\cite{han} dans la bibliographie, parce que le prénom de son auteur comporte un +% accent double \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; I used it also to typeset some other vietnamese words. +% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en allemand. +% \item[\emph{depth}] Voir \textbf{profondeur} plus loin. +% \item[descripteur] (de fichier). Une entité logicielle décrivant l'interface entre un programme et un fichier. +% Pour la plupart des programmes et des systèmes d'exploitation, le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers est +% limité. Pour {\TeX} et {\LaTeX}, il y a 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture et 16~descripteurs de +% fichiers en lecture. +% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] Le paquetage \emph{\devnag{} pour \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari})\cite{devanagari} +% offre un moyen pour composer avec une haute qualité du texte \devnag{} avec \TeX{}. \devnag{} est une +% écriture utilisée pour écrire et imprimer le sanskrit et de nombreuses langues d'Inde du nord et centrale +% telles que l'hindi et le marathi, ainsi que le népalais. Le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} a été initialement +% développé en mai~1991 par \name{Frans}{Velthuis} pour l'Université de Groningen, aux Pays-Bas, et ce fut le +% premier système à~supporter l'écriture \devnag{} pour \TeX{}. +% \item[dispositifs] Un dispositif (\emph{feature}) (au sens du paquetage \upack{minitoc}) est un ensemble +% d'actions qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un certain type de mini-table. Cing dispositifs sont +% associés à~chaque type de mini-table: un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (exécuté avant la mini-table complète), un dispositif +% «~\feat{after}~» (exécuté après la mini-table complète), +% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (exécuté juste avant l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable), +% un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (exécuté juste après l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable), +% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~», qui est exécuté avec la +% mini-table pour forcer son style de page. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] Un fichier d'en-tête PostScript, qui essaye d'activer l'impression en recto-verso. +% ^^A Il fonctionne avec certaines imprimantes PostScript HP et Canon. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\textbf{ECM}] Un exemple minimal complet est le plus petit document complet possible qui illustre un +% problème. Un exemple minimal ne devrait aucun paquetegage ni code qui ne contribue pas au problème, mais +% il doit contenir une classe de document et l'environnement \env{document} (d'après~\cite{talbot-mini}). +% Voir aussi~\cite{preusse}, \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} et +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils. +% \item[\texttt{em}] Une unité de longueur égale (approximativement) à~la largeur de la lettre~\og m\fg +% dans la fonte courante. En typographie, c'est un \og cadratin\fg. +% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] Un style bibliographique similaire au style \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} standard, mais +% modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} pour ajouter un champ \texttt{URL}. Les noms de famille +% des auteurs et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) sont en petites capitales, les années en chiffres de style ancien. +% \item[environnement] Un environnement (\emph{environment}) est un domaine délimité dans un document, où des +% règles spéciales s'appliquent. Un tel domaine est délimité +% par \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| et peut prendre des arguments, +% comme ceci: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\ +% \verb|\end{minipage}| +% \end{quote} +% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est une version étendue de \TeX, avec bien plus de +% registres et de nombreuses nouvelles primitives; elle supporte aussi l'écriture de gauche à~droite et de +% droite à~gauche. +% \item[\upack{ethiop}]\ipack{ethiop} Un paquetage~\cite{ethiop} \LaTeX\ offrant le support de la langue éthiopienne pour +% le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[extension] Voir «~suffixe~» plus loin. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] Voir \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} ci-dessous. +% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} Un paquetage~\cite{farsi} pour composer un document dans la langue \lopt{farsi} (iranien, persan). +% Voir~{\froff\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}. Mais ce n'est actuellement disponible que pour \LaTeX2.09. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} et~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% \item[features] Voir «~dispositifs~» plus haut. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\env{filecontents}] Un environnement \LaTeX{} spécial. Il permet de créer un fichier (dont le nom est donné +% en argument de cet environnement) en écrivant le contenu de l'environnement dans ce fichier. +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{fichier}\}}\\ +% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contenu}~\ldots}\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}} +% \end{quote} +% Cet environnement devrait être utilisé \emph{avant} \com{documentclass}. +% Il est utilisé dans \xfile{minitoc.ins} pour préparer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} (voir la +% section~\vref{fo+lang}) et quelques fichiers utilisés dans la compilation de la documentation. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] Une commande obsolète, utilisée temporairement pour contourner le problème +% du Chapitre~0; +% voir~\textbf{Chapitre~0} et \textbf{absolue (numérotation)} plus haut, et la section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus. +% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus. +% \item[\pack{float}] Ce paquetage~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} améliore l'interface de définition +% d'objets flottants tels que figures et tableaux en \LaTeX. Il ajoute la notion de <<~style de flottant~>> +% qui régit l'aspect des flottants. De nouvelles sortes de flottants peuvent être définies en utilisant une +% commande \com{newfloat} analogue à~\com{newtheorem}. Ce paquetage incorpore aussi la fonctionnalité du +% paquetage \pack{here} de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, donnant aux environnements flottants une option +% \texttt{[H]} qui signifie <<~METTEZ-LE ICI~>> (par opposition à~l'option standard \texttt{[h]} qui signifie +% <<~vous pouvez le mettre ici si vous voulez~>>). +% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}] +% Une macro du paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. Elle établit une «~barrière~» contre la dérive +% des éléments flottants (tels que figures ou tableaux). +% \item[\pack{floatrow}] Ce paquetage~\cite{floatrow} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} est une extension du paquetage +% \pack{float}~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), réutilisant son code, avec des extensions venant du +% paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} (de \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}). +% \item[\pack{flowfram}] Ce\imess{W0097} paquetage~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} est conçu pour vous permettre de créer des +% blocs (\emph{frames}) de texte dans un document de manière que le contenu de l'environnement \env{document} +% coule d'un bloc au suivant dans l'ordre où ils ont été définis. Ceci est utile pour créer des posters ou des +% magazines ou toute autre forme de document qui n'est pas conforme à~la mise en page standard sur une ou deux colonnes. +% Comme ce paquetage définit son propre système de minitocs, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{fncychap}] Le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} fournit diverses commandes pour changer +% le format utilisé pour certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes stantard de documents de \LaTeXe: +% \class{book} et \class{report}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.fncychap} et la +% section~\vref{faq.38}). +% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en français. +% \item[\upack{franc}]\ipack{franc} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est +% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\upack{frbib}]\ipack{frbib} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la documentation en +% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] Un fichier de style bibliographique utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la +% documentation en français. +% Il a été amélioré pour le français par \name{Ronan}{Keryell} en partant de la version standard +% \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst}, puis j'ai ajouté quelques adaptations pour le français (comme les noms de famille en +% petites capitales pour les auteurs et les éditeurs, les années en chiffres anciens), +% puis je l'ai modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. +% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est +% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{geometry}] Le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry} fournit une interface utilisateur flexible +% et complète pour les dimensions de la page. Vous pouvez les spécifier en utilisant des paramètres intuitifs +% pour obtenir votre mise en page désirée. Par exemple, si vous voulez établir des marges (à~gauche, à~droite, +% en haut et en bas) à~2\,cm de chaque bord du papier, il vous suffit de dire: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}| +% \end{quote} +% Ce paquetage puissant (et recommandé) est utilisé dans certains des exemples de documents et dans la présente +% documentation. +% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} Un paquetage \LaTeX\ pour composer du texte guarani, la principale langue parlée +% au Paraguay. +% Le fichier \xfile{guarani.ldf}, inclus dans ce paquetage, définit les titres. Voir~\cite{guarani} et la +% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] Le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} définit une variante de la +% commande \com{caption} pour produire des captions (légendes) avec une indentation pendante +% (\emph{hanging indentation}), c'est-à-dire dont la première ligne déborde sur la gauche. Ce paquetage est +% sans doute obsolète (1992, \LaTeX2.09). +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[Hindi] Pour la langue hindi, voir le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}~\cite{devanagari} plus haut. Le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} accepte les options de langue \lopt{devanagari} et \lopt{hindi}, qui sont +% synonymes. Une option de langue \lopt{hindi-modern} est également disponible. +% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\emph{hint}] Une indication, un indice pour détecter un problème. C'est aussi un message écrit (dans +% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}) par l'option \optd{hints} (voir ci-dessous). +% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle vérifie l'ordre ce chargement de certains +% paquetages, l'ordre des invocations de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}, la cohérence entre les +% principales commandes de \upack{minitoc}, etc., et produit des avertissements et d'autres indications +% (\emph{hints}) utiles (principalement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}). +% C'est une option active par défaut +% (utilisez l'option \opt{nohints} pour sauter ces vérifications). +% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} Un système pour écrire des documents en langue coréenne, en utilisant \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) +% (voir plus bas). +% Écrit par \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}. Il utilise des fontes Hangûl +% ou Hanja spéciales et le codage UTF-8 en entrée. +% \item[hyperlien] (\emph{hyperlink}) Dans un document, une référence à~un autre objet qui peut être trouvé de +% manière dynamique (en cliquant avec la souris). Ceci requiert un type spécial de document (PDF, PostScript +% avec dispositifs d'hypertexte) et un visualisateur adapté (visualisateur PDF, visualisateur PostScript +% récent). Ceci est pratique pour naviguer dans un document ou plusieurs documents, qui peuvent être des +% documents distants. +% \lneed{4} +% \item[\upack{hyperref}] Le\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}} +% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} est utilisé pour modifier les commandes +% de références croisées de \LaTeX\ afin de produire une certaine sorte de commandes \com{special}; +% elles sont des prémices de l'ensemble de commandes \com{special} définis pour les processeurs de +% \texttt{dvi} vers \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, pour les commandes \texttt{pdfmark} incluses pour le traitement par +% \tool{Acrobat Distiller} (\tool{dvips} et \tool{dvipsone}), pour \tool{dviwindo}, pour \textbf{pdf\TeX}, +% pour \textbf{\TeX4ht} et pour les outils de conversion en PDF et HTML de \tool{VTEX}. +% +% Ce paquetage dérive de, et est bâti sur, le travail du projet \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, +% décrit dans~\cite{hypertex}. Il étend la fonctionnalité de toutes les commandes de +% références croisées de \LaTeX\ (y~compris la table des matières, les bibliographies, etc.) pour produire des +% commandes \com{special} qu'un programme pilote (\emph{driver}) pourra transformer en liens +% hypertextes; il fournit aussi de nouvelles commandes permettant à~l'utilisateur d'écrire des liens +% hypertextes (hyperliens) \emph{ad hoc}, y~compris ceux vers des documents externes et des URLs. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] Le paquetage \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg} fournit une commande si-alors-sinon +% (\emph{if-then-else}) pour tester si un argument de macro est vide («~vide~» signifiant seulement zéro espaces ou +% plus). +% \item[\pack{ifthen}] Le paquetage \pack{ifthen}~\cite{ifthen} définit une commande \com{ifthenelse} pour \LaTeXe. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui prépare le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% depuis \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant +% de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uopt{insection}]\iopt{insection} L'option de paquetage \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} charge le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} +% avec les options adéquates pour éviter que les éléments flottants (tels que figures et tableaux) dérivent +% en dehors de leurs sections, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} +% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}). +% Cette option de paquetage est recommandée si vous utilisez des sectlofs ou +% des sectlots dans votre document. Voir la section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \item[insertion] Les commandes d'insertion du paquetage \upack{minitoc} insèrent une mini-table dans le document. +% Une commande de \emph{préparation} correspondante doit avoir été invoquée (une seule fois) auparavant. +% Les commandes d'insertion sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+installation}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{jobname}] Une primitive \TeX\ contenant le nom du document en préparation, c'est-à-dire le nom +% du fichier lu en premier par \TeX{} (ou \LaTeX), sans son suffixe. Elle est très utile pour construire les +% noms d'autres fichiers. +% \item[\uclass{jura}] La classe \imess{W0029}\class{jura}~\cite{jura}, de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle est utilisée pour des documents juridiques en allemand. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des +% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement peu serré (\emph{loose}) +% dans les mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \optd{loose} pour les classes standard. +% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des +% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement serré (\emph{tight}) dans les +% mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \opt{tight} pour les classes standard. +% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] Un projet~\cite{kannadatex} pour utiliser \LaTeX{} pout la composition +% dans la langue Kannada language. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}. +% \item[\KOMAScript] +% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} est un ensemble très complexe. +% Vous pouvez le voir, car il n'y a pas seulement +% une seule classe ou un seul paquetage, mais tout un ensemble de classes et paquetages nombreux. Les +% classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2} et +% \class{scrreprt}) sont bien les contreparties des classes standard, mais elles n'ont jamais seulement les +% mêmes commandes, environnements, options et possibilités optionnelles que les classes standard et ne donnent +% pas un résultat de même aspect. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les classes \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl} sont compatibles avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec certaines précautions (voir la section~\vref{special.entries}). +% Les classes \class{scrlettr} et \class{scrlttr2} n'ont pas de commandes +% de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet avec elles. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \KOMAScript{} offre des tas de classes, paquetages, commandes, environnements et possibilités. Vous en +% trouverez certains aussi dans les classes standard, mais il y en a beaucoup que vous ne trouverez pas. +% Certains sont même des ajouts au noyau de \LaTeX. +% +% Les classes principales de l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} sont conçues comme des contreparties des classes +% \LaTeX{} standard. Ceci signifie que l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} contient des remplacements pour les trois +% classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}. Il y a aussi un remplacement pour la +% classe standard \class{letter}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[Lambda] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système +% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) est appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% \item[Lamed] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système +% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) est appelé «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} est un système de préparation de documents qui convient fort bien pour +% produire des documents scientifiques et mathématiques de haute qualité typographique. Il convient aussi pour +% produire toutes sortes d'autres documents, depuis de simples lettres jusqu'à des livres complets. +% \LaTeX{} utilise \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} comme moteur de composition (d'après~\cite{NSSL2E}). +% +% \LaTeX{} est en fait un ensemble de macros \TeX{} qui permet aux auteurs de +% composer et d'imprimer leur document avec la plus haute +% qualité typographique, en utilisant une mise en page +% prédéfinie professionnelle. \LaTeX{} avait été originellement +% écrit par \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. Il utilise le +% formateur \TeX{} comme moteur de composition typographique. +% Aujourd'hui, la maintenance de \LaTeX{} est faite par +% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} et son équipe. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% En 1994, le système \LaTeX{} fut (profondément) mis à~jour par l'équipe de \LaTeX3, +% conduite par \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, pour inclure certaines +% améliorations attendues depuis longtemps, et pour réunifier +% toutes les versions modifiées qui ont pullulé depuis la sortie +% de \LaTeX2.09 quelques années plus tôt. Pour distinguer la +% nouvelle version de l'ancienne, elle est appelée \LaTeXe. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \LaTeX{} se prononce \textbf{[latex]}. Si vous voulez faire référence à~\LaTeX{} dans un environnement +% \texttt{ASCII}, utilisez \texttt{LaTeX}. \LaTeXe{} se prononce \textbf{[latex d\o{}z\o{}]} et s'écrit +% \texttt{LaTeX2e}. +% +% En anglais, cela donne \textbf{[la\i{}tex]} et \usebox{\latexbox}. +% ^^A {\selectlanguage{english}\froff\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}\selectlanguage{french}}. +% \item[\LaTeX2.09] Une version obsolète du programme \LaTeX, antérieure à~1994; elle n'est plus supportée. +% Ne l'utilisez pas\,\footnote{Sauf exceptionnellement, pour un très vieux document; si possible, essayez de le +% convertir.}. Utilisez la version actuelle de \LaTeXe, qui est supportée et bien plus puissante. +% \item[\LaTeXe] La version actuelle du programme \LaTeX, après 1994; elle est supportée. +% \item[\LaTeX3] La future version de \LaTeX, toujours en cours de développement. +% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} Une\Virage{} classe de documents standard~\cite{letter} pour préparer des +% lettres postales (courrier papier). +% Comme de tels documents n'ont ni commandes ni structure de sectionnement, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est +% sans objet pour eux (et est donc \emph{incompatible} avec cette classe). +% \item[\upack{lipsum}] Le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} permet d'insérer facilement du +% texte dans un fichier de test avec un minimum de frappe. Les textes sont en latin mais ont été altérés et +% rendus incompréhensibles. J'ai utilisé ce paquetage dans certains des exemples de documents. +% Voir aussi~\url{http://lipsum.com} pour les origines du texte +% utilisé (des passages du \emph{De finibus bonorum et malorum} de Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero} (\textsc{Cicéron})). +% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle crée une liste des fichiers minitoc +% auxiliaires (ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables et peuvent être éliminés après l'exécution de \LaTeX) +% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Option par défaut. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[LOF, LoF] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of figures}~», ou «~liste des figures~». +% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des figures. +% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement lache des lignes dans +% les mini-tables. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire est \opt{tight}. +% \item[LOT, LoT] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of tables}~», ou «~liste des tableaux~». +% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des tableaux. +% \item[LPPL] La \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, disponible~à: +% \begin{quote} +% {\froff\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}} +% \end{quote} +% Sa version actuelle est (2003-12-01). Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est distribué sous cette licence. +% Une traduction en français de cette licence est disponible~à: +% \begin{quote} +% {\froff\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/french-translations/macros/latex/base/f-lppl.txt}} +% \end{quote} +% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltxdoc}, +% pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une +% classe. Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est +% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut. +% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltnews}, +% pour préparer l'announce d'une version de \LaTeX. +% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est +% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{et} \com{makeatother}] De\,\footnote{Ces informations proviennent +% de~\cite[page~857]{TLC2F}.} nombreuses commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, de paquetages et de classes contiennent +% le caractère~\texttt{@} dans leurs noms. Ceci empêche efficacement que de tels noms soient utilisés dans des +% documents pour des commandes définies par l'utilisateur. Cependant, ceci signifie aussi qu'ils ne peuvent +% pas apparaître dans un document, même pas dans le préambule, sans prendre des précautions spéciales. Comme +% il est parfois nécessaire d'avoir de tels morceaux de «~code interne~» dans le préambule, +% les commandes \com{makeatletter} et \com{makeatother} permettent de le faire facilement: ce +% qui est difficile, c'est de se rappeler qu'il faut les ajouter, faute de quoi des erreurs étranges +% surviennent. Et ces deux commandes \Virage\emph{ne devraient jamais être utilisées dans un fichier de paquetage ou de classe}. +% \item[makefile] Un fichier de texte particulier contenant des instructions pour construire et installer un +% logiciel, à~l'aide de l'utilitaire «~\textbf{make}~»; \textbf{make} est un outil pratique provenant du +% système d'exploitation Unix, mais il en existe des variantes. +% \item[\upack{mcaption}] Le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption}\imess{W0036} fournit un environnement +% \env{margincap} pour placer les captions (légendes) dans la marge externe du document, avec un alignement +% par le haut ou par le bas. +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{memoir}]\iclass{memoir} +% Une\SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} +% très générale et puissante classe de document +% (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, décrite dans~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); +% cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (avec quelques précautions) si vous utilisez +% une version récente. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[mini-bibliographie] Voir \textbf{minibbl} ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-liste] Synonyme de «~mini-table~» ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-lof] Voir «~minilof~» ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-lot] Voir «~minilot~» ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-table] Ce terme désigne une table de contenu locale (comme une table des matières, une liste des +% figures ou une liste des tableaux) pour une unité de sectionnement (partie, chapitre ou section), par +% opposition à~une table globale (la table des matières, la liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux pour +% l'ensemble du document). Le but principal du paquetage \upack{minitoc} est la création de telles +% mini-tables. Mais le terme «~minitoc~» est aussi utilisé pour désigner une telle mini-table, comme un terme +% générique, car les premières versions du paquetage ne permettaient que des tables des matières par chapitre. +% \item[mini-toc] Voir «~minitoc~» ci-dessous. +% \item[minibbl] Abréviation pour «~mini-bibliographie~», c'est-à-dire avoir une bibliographie par partie, par +% chapitre ou par section, ou même par thème ou par sujet. Ceci est en dehors du domaine du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.9}. +% \item[minilof] Une liste des figures pour un chapitre. +% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilofs. +% \item[minilot] Une liste des tableaux pour un chapitre. +% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilots. +% \item[minitoc] Une table des matières pour un chapitre. Aussi utilisé comme terme générique pour toute mini-table (voir +% «~mini-table~» plus haut). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en français du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] Le fichier source pour la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% En fait, il ne fait que définir \com{jobname} puis charger \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, qui lui-même charge +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan} pour choisir la langue utilisée dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contient +% à~la fois des fragments de documentation en anglais et en français, choisis par des constructions +% \com{ifcase} avec la variable \com{LANG}, forcée à~0 par \xfile{minitoc.lan} ou à~1 par +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (c'est-à-dire par \com{jobname}\suffix{.dtx}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est produit lors de la +% compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en +% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue française dans la documentation. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] La documentation en français, en format PDF. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] La documentation en français, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais +% regardez le script \scrp{cmk}). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en anglais du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste de problèmes et +% de questions concernant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir le chapitre~\vref{FAQ}. +% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des minitocs. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] Le fichier contenant la documentation et le code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\upack{minitoc-hyper}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} Une version spéciale~\cite{minitoc-hyper} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% préparée par \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, +% \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} pour fonctionner avec le puissant paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}; +% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} a intégré leur travail et donc depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec +% \pack{hyperref}. +% \emph{Donc le paquetage\Virage{} \pack{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être +% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.} +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] Le fichier d'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Compiler ce fichier avec +% \LaTeX\ produit la plupart des fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en +% anglais. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] Un fichier texte contenant la liste de tous les fichiers inclus dans le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. Les fichiers non listés dans \xfile{minitoc.l} sont des fichiers utilisés seulement pour +% installer le paquetage ou produire sa documentation. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue anglaise dans la documentation. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] La documentation en anglais, en format PDF. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} Ce fichier contient un préambule \LaTeX{} pour la documentation. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] La documentation en anglais, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais +% regarde les script \scrp{cmk}). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] Ce fichier contient la partie principale du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec ses +% commentaires retirés. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste commentée des commandes +% et environnements minitoc. Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] Une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et +% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\upack{minutes}] Le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}) est utilisé +% pour préparer des comptes-rendus de conférences. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} permet d'ajouter +% des «~pauses-café~» dans la table des matières grâce à~des commandes telles que \com{addcoffeeline} et +% \com{coffeeline} (et des commandes internes) dont les noms contiennent la chaîne «~\texttt{coffee}~», +% d'où la note de bas de page sur «~cappuccino~»{\myCoffeecup} dans le chapitre sur l'installation!% +% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{Les petites tasses \myCoffeecup{} proviennent du paquetage \pack{marvosym}~\cite{marvosym}.}}{} +% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} est un important paquetage utilisé +% pour préparer des documents +% dans divers dialectes de la langue mongole (Bicig et Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe et Manju, Buryat, Xalx et Khalkha) et dans +% un dialecte du russe utilisé en Mongolie (Russianc). Bicig est un autre nom pour le Ouïghour. +% Vous pourrez trouver beaucoup d'informations sur la langue mongole et la Mongolie sur le site web~\cite{mongol-web}. +% Voir aussi: +% {\small\froff\begin{quote} +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\ +% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\ +% \mbox{\url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}}\\ +% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\ +% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm} +% \end{quote}} +% La description suivante a été extraite de~\cite{montex} et traduite: +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} est un paquetage qui fournit le support pour écrire des documents en mongol +% (\emph{mongolian}), mandchou (\emph{manju}), bouriate (\emph{buryat}) et russe. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Le mongol peut être représenté en écriture ouïghure (\emph{uighur}) +% traditionnelle +% (appelée aussi écriture classique ou traditionnelle) et en écriture cyrillique. Le mandchou +% (\emph{manju}) ressemble à~l'écriture mongole traditionnelle (dont elle dérive) mais utilise un grand choix de +% signes diacritiques afin d'éliminer de nombreuses ambiguïtés de son ancêtre l'écriture mongole. Le bouriate +% (\emph{buryat}) moderne, comme le mongol dans sa forme actuelle, +% est écrit avec un alphabet cyrillique,% +% mais tant le mongol (35~lettres) que le bouriate (36~lettres) utilisent davantage de lettres +% que le russe (33~lettres). +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{description} +% \item[Mongol] +% Le terme \emph{mongol} (\emph{mongolian} en anglais) recouvre en fait plusieurs langues et n'est pas le nom précis +% d'une seule langue. Les choses se compliquent encore lorsque des noms de groupes ethniques, de langues et de +% systèmes d'écriture sont mélangés. +% \begin{description} +% \item [Xalx] ou Khalkha est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Mongolie proprement dite. +% Leur dialecte forme la base du mongol écrit avec des lettres cyrilliques. +% Dans le présent texte, \emph{mongol moderne} est utilisé comme synonyme. +% \item [Bouriate] (\emph{buryat}) est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Bouriatie +% (\emph{Buryatia}), au nord de la Mongolie, à~l'est du Lac Baïkal, et faisant partie de la +% Fédération Russe. Les Bouriates se nomment eux-mêmes \emph{Buryaad} tandis que les Mongols Xlax +% s'appellent \emph{Buriad}. Le nom anglais suit l'orthographe russe (tandis que le nom français +% est pris phonétiquement). +% Du point de vue linguistique, le mongol xalx et le mongol bouriate sont des langues assez proches; +% le bouriate a un système de sons légèrement différent dans lequel le phonème~\verb|/s/| est +% partiellement décalé vers~\verb|/h/|; l'alphabet moderne bouriate cyrillique (virtuellement +% identique à~l'alphabet cyrillique utilisé pour écrire le mongol moderne) a une lettre +% additionnelle (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) pour marquer la différence avec \verb|/s/|. +% \item [Bicig] (littéralement \emph{écriture} en mongol) désigne le texte écrit avec l'écriture mongole +% traditionnelle, qui est aussi dénommée Ouïghour (\emph{Uighur}). Ici, le texme \emph{bicig} sera +% utilisé sur un pied d'égalité avec le mongol \emph{classique} et \emph{traditionnel}. Ce dernier +% terme est utilisé dans les noms du plan de caractères U1800 de Unicode/ISO10646, qui contient le +% mongol (\emph{mongolian}), le mandchou (\emph{manju}), le Sibe et des ensembles de caractères +% spéciaux appelés Ali Gali ou Galig. Afin d'identifier les commandes concernant l'écriture mongole +% distinctes pour le mongol et le mandchou, les commandes mongoles (\emph{mongolian}) ont un nom +% avec le radical \lopt{bicig} tandis que les commandes manchoues (\emph{manju}) ont un nom +% avec le radical \lopt{bithe}. +% \end{description} +% +% Le Mongol Xalx, ou Mongol Moderne Courant (\emph{Modern Colloquial Mongolian}), est à~peu près aussi différent de +% la forme en écriture classique que l'anglais moderne est différent en orthographe phonétique (en supposant qu'il +% soit écrit en lettres Shaviennes) de l'orthographe hautement historique de l'Anglais Standard. +% Au-delà de ces différences. le mongol écrit en écriture classique conserve habituellement une quantité +% substantielle des aspects grammaticaux historiques qui le font ressembler un peu à~l'anglais élizabéthain. +% +% \item[Manchou] Le mandchou (\emph{mandju}) est une langue du groupe toungouze (\emph{tungusic}) étroitement +% liée au mongol. Bien que le +% mandchou ne soit virtuellement plus parlé, il a été la langue officielle pendant 300~ans de gouvernement mandchou +% sur la Chine de la dynastie Qing. De grandes quantités de documents officiels ont survécu, ainsi que certains +% des meilleurs dictionnaires multilingues jamais réalisés, par exemple le Pentaglote, ou Miroir des Cinq Langues, un +% dictionnaire avec 18671 entrées en cinq langues (mandchou, tibétain, mongol, ouïghour et chinois). +% Voir~\cite{pentaglot} pour plus de détails. L'écriture mandchoue est dérivée du mongol ouïghour par l'ajout +% de signes diacritiques sous la forme de points et de cercles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, écriture +% avec points et cercles). +% \end{description} +% \item[MS-DOS] (\emph{Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System}) Un ancien système +% d'exploitation pour ordinateurs personnels (PCs). Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, son principal +% inconvénient est l'utilisation de noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts (le schéma «~8+3~»), qui limite à~99 +% le nombre de mini-tables dans chaque sorte. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise +% en page sur deux colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et son option de +% langue \lopt{french2}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour +% préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} Une petite base de données bibliographiques pour les exemples +% de documents \exam{mtc-add.tex} et \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter} et le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddsection} et le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% Il montre aussi quel défi représente la gestion des mini-listes de flottants au niveau des sections. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} +% dans un document de classe \class{memoir} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant comment utiliser l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} +% pour masquer les entrées pour les appendices dans la table des matières principale et créer une table des +% matières au niveau partie pour les appendices. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{article}) utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{book} ou \class{report}) utilisant le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise +% en page sur deux colonnes et utilisant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document +% dont le premier chapitre est étoilé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage minitoc avec des parties et des +% chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant le problème des fontes lors de +% l'utilisation de la classe \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec +% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Un autre exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec +% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et +% \com{mtcgapafterheads}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des environnements +% spécialisés \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des paires de commandes: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} et \com{endmtchideinmainlof}, +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} et \com{endmtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les +% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{article}. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les +% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{report}. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de +% document \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un +% livre avec une table des matières et des minitocs personnalisées. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la +% classe \class{memoir}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la +% classe \class{memoir}, dans le cas où vous souhaiteriez changer quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} Un document utilisant une minitoc composée, avec le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}, +% pour être placée dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} Un document montrant une interaction entre le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% et le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} +% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} +% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes et \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler la minitoc afin de +% l'aligner sur la gauche. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le +% paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une +% classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. Voir la +% section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} lorsque +% la table des matières est précédée de quelques chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document +% de la classe \class{article}. C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le +% paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} et leur interaction pour les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le +% paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcpolymtoc} +% et expliquant les \index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}«~entrées polymorphes~». +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} Un paquetage qui est utilisé pour fournir des variantes des commandes +% standard \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine} et \com{PackageError} +% en leur ajoutant un argument optionnel pour un identificateur unique de message. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} Un paquetage qui est utilisé à~la place du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% pour ignorer toutes les commandes et tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. En fait, il les +% définit pour qu'elles/ils ne fassent rien. Utile si vous désirez une version de votre document sans aucune +% mini-table. +% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} Un\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} petit paquetage qui est chargé automatiquement si +% nécessaire lorsque vous utilisez la classe de document \class{memoir} dans une version \emph{incompatible} +% avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais corrigible. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\texttt{mu}] Une unité de longueur utilisée normalement en mode mathématique (\texttt{mu} signifie +% «~\emph{math unit}~»); 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un cadratin), qui est à~peu près la +% largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Donc la taille de \texttt{1mu} dépend de la fonte. +% La séparation entre les points des lignes de pointillés dans les mini-tables est exprimée en unités +% mathématiques. +% \item[\upack{multibib}] Le paquetage \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib} permet de créer des références +% à~plusieurs bibliographies à~l'intérieur d'un même document. Il fournit donc une fonctionnalité +% complémentaire à~des paquetages tels que \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} ou \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, +% qui permettent de créer une seule bibliographie pour plusieurs, mais différentes, parties du document. +% \item[\upack{multicol}] Le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} définit l'environnement \env{multicols} +% (avec un~<<~\textbf{s}~>>) pour composer du texte sur plusieurs colonnes. Utilisé dans certains exemples de documents. +% \item[\upack{multitoc}] Ce paquetage~\cite{multitoc} permet de composer seulement la table des matières, la +% liste des figures et/ou la liste des tableaux sur deux colonnes ou plus (en utilisant le paquetage +% pquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, bien sûr). +% Le nombre de colonnes peut être configuré par des commandes; les tables multi-colonnes peuvent être choisies +% par des options du paquetage. +% L'exemple de document \exam{mtc-3co.tex} utilise ce paquetage; voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{natbib}] C'est un paquetage \LaTeXe{} (mais avec un certain support pour \LaTeX2.09)~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} +% qui agit comme interface généralisée pour des fichiers de styles bibliographiques standard et non-standard (\BibTeX). +% \item[\upack{needspace}] Le paquetage \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace} fournit des commandes pour réserver +% de l'espace en bas d'une page. S'il n'y a pas assez d'espace sur la page (colonne) courante, une nouvelle +% page (colonne) est commencée. +% \item[NFSS] Le «~Nouveau Schéma de Sélection de Fonte~» (\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}). +% Le système de sélection des fontes~\cite{fontsel} \LaTeXe{} +% a été publié pour la première fois sous le nom de «~\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~» (NFSS) en 1989, puis +% dans une seconde version en 1993. \LaTeXe{} inclut NFSS version~2 de manière standard. +% +% \lneed{7} +% Dans \LaTeX, chaque fonte (police) textuelle a cinq \emph{attributs}: +% \begin{description} +% \item[codage\,\footnotemark]\footnotetext{Et non \og{} encodage~\fg, qui est un anglicisme.} (\emph{encoding}) +% Un codage spécifie +% l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la fonte. Les deux codages les plus courants +% utilisés dans \LaTeX{} sont le codage «~texte \TeX~» de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} (OT1) et +% le codage «~texte \TeX{} étendu~» (T1) développé par les membres du \emph{\TeX{} Users Group} pendant une +% conférence sur \TeX{} à~Cork en~1990 (d'où son nom informel de «~codage de Cork~»). Voir~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \item[famille] (\emph{family}) Le nom d'une collection de fontes, habituellement groupées sous un nom commun +% par le fondeur de ces fontes. Par exemple, «~Adobe Times~», «~ITC Garamond~» et «~Computer Modern Roman~» +% de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} sont toutes des familles de fontes. +% \item[graisse] (\emph{series}) Elle détermine comment une fonte est épaisse (\emph{heavy}) ou +% étirée (\emph{extended}). Par exemple, «~medium weight~», «~narrow~» et «~bold extended~» sont toutes des graisses. +% \item[forme] (\emph{shape}) La forme des lettres à~l'intérieur d'une famille de fontes. Par exemple, +% «~italique~» (\emph{italic}), «~oblique~» et «~droit~» (\emph{upright}) (parfois appelé +% «~romain~» (\emph{roman})) sont toutes des formes de fontes. +% \item[taille] (\emph{size}) La taille de conception (\emph{design size}) de la fonte, par exemple «~10pt~». +% \end{description} +% +% \lneed{2} +% Dans \LaTeX, les valeurs possibles pour ces attributs ont reçu des acronymes courts. Les valeurs les plus +% courantes pour le codage d'une fonte sont données dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+1}. +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% \caption{Codages de fontes les plus courants}\label{t+nfss+1} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{T1} & texte \TeX{} étendu («~codage de Cork~») \\ +% \texttt{TS1} & codages des symboles pour \LaTeX{} (latin)\\ +% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C} & texte \LaTeX{} (cyrillique)\\ +% \texttt{T3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}\\ +% \texttt{TS3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}, symboles supplémentaires\\ +% \texttt{T4} & texte \LaTeX{} (langues africaines)\\ +% \texttt{T5} & texte \LaTeX{} (vietnamien)\\ +% \texttt{T7} & texte \LaTeX{} (réservé pour le grec)\\ +% \texttt{OT1} & texte \TeX{} (comme défini par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OT2} & texte \TeX{} pour les langues en cyrillique (obsolète)\\ +% \texttt{OT3} & Alphabet phonétique international (obsolète)\\ +% \texttt{OT4} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue polonaise\\ +% \texttt{OT6} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue arménienne\\ +% \texttt{OML} & italique mathématique \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMS} & symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMX} & grands symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{X2} & texte \LaTeX{} étendu (cyrillique)\\ +% \texttt{U} & inconnu \\ +% \texttt{L}\meta{xx} & un codage local\\ +% \texttt{L7x} & codage utilisé pour la langue lithuanienne\\ +% \texttt{LTH} & codage utilisé pour la langue thaïe\\ +% \texttt{LV1} & codage utilisé par quelques fontes de \texttt{VTeX}\\ +% \texttt{LY1} & alternative au \texttt{T1}, pour les logiciels Y\&Y\\ +% \texttt{PD1} & réalise le codage PDFDocEncoding pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\ +% \texttt{PU} & réalise le codage Unicode pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% ^^A \end{table} +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} +% ^^A \begin{table}[!p] +% ^^A \changeskips +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.50\textwidth} +% ^^A \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Familles de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+2} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Famille}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{cmr} & Computer Modern Roman \\ +% \texttt{cmss} & Computer Modern Sans \\ +% \texttt{cmtt} & Computer Modern Typewriter \\ +% \texttt{cmm} & Computer Modern Math Italic \\ +% \texttt{cmsy} & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ +% \texttt{cmex} & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ +% \texttt{ptm} & Adobe Times \\ +% \texttt{phv} & Adobe Helvetica \\ +% \texttt{pcr} & Adobe Courier\\ +% \texttt{lazy} & Symboles \LaTeX{} additionnels\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} +% ^^A \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Graisses les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+3} +% \centering +% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Graisse}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ul}&Ultra fin\\ +% \texttt{el}&Extra fin\\ +% \texttt{l}&Fin\\ +% \texttt{sl}&Semi fin\\ +% \texttt{m} & Moyen (\emph{medium})\\ +% \texttt{sb} & Demi-gras (\emph{semi-bold}) \\ +% \texttt{b} &Bold \\ +% \texttt{eb} &Extra gras \\ +% \texttt{bx} & Gras étendu (\emph{bold extended})\\ +% \texttt{ub}&Ultra gras \\ +% \texttt{c} & Condensé (\emph{condensed})\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}\hfill\null +% \end{minipage} +% \end{tabularx} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% \newlength{\ww} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \setlength{\ww}{.64\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\ww}{-1.5em} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{\ww} +% \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Formes de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4} +% {\begin{tabularx}{\ww}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Forme}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{n} & Normale (c'est-à-dire «~droite~» (\emph{upright}) ou «~romaine~» (\emph{roman})) \\ +% \texttt{it} & Italique \\ +% \texttt{sl} & Penchée (\emph{slanted}) (ou «~oblique~») \\ +% \texttt{sc} & Capitales et petites capitales (\emph{caps and small caps})\\ +% \texttt{u} & Italique redressée (\emph{upright italic}) \\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.35\textwidth} +% \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Largeurs de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4a} +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Largeur}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensé\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensé\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensé\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensé\\ +% \texttt{m}&50.0&Normal\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi étendu\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Étendu\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra étendu\\ +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra étendu\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{minipage}% +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% Les codages «~locaux~» sont destinés aux codages de fontes qui ne sont disponibles que localement, par +% exemple une fonte contenant le logo d'une organisation dans diverses tailles. +% +% \lneed{4} +% Il y a bien trop de familles de fontes pour les lister toutes, mais certaines familles courantes sont +% listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+2}. +% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour les graisses (\emph{series}) sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+3}. +% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la forme de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4}. +% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la largeur de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% La taille de fonte est spécifiée comme une dimension, par exemple \texttt{10pt} ou +% \texttt{1.5in} ou \texttt{3mm}; si aucune unité n'est spécifiée, \texttt{pt} est pris par défaut. Ces cinq +% paramètres spécifient chaque fonte \LaTeX{}, voir le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+5}, par exemple. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Les cinq paramètres de fontes de quelques fontes}\label{t+nfss+5} +% \centering +% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{Spécification \LaTeX}} & +% \textbf{Fonte} & +% \textbf{Nom \TeX{}} \\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} & +% Computer Modern Roman 10 point & +% \texttt{cmr10} \\ +% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} & +% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & +% \texttt{cmssi12} \\ +% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} & +% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & +% \texttt{cmmi10} \\ +% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} & +% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & +% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes de l'utilisateur pour les fontes}\label{t+nfss+6} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande utilisateur} & +% \textbf{Attribut} & +% \textbf{Valeur dans la classe} \class{article} \\ +% \midrule +% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{rmfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmr} \\ +% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{sffamily} & famille & \texttt{cmss} \\ +% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{ttfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmtt} \\ +% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{mdseries} & graisse & \texttt{m} \\ +% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{bfseries} & graisse & \texttt{bx} \\ +% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{upshape} & forme & \texttt{n} \\ +% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{itshape} & forme & \texttt{it} \\ +% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{slshape} & forme & \texttt{sl} \\ +% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{scshape} & forme & \texttt{sc} \\ +% \com{tiny} & taille & \texttt{5pt} \\ +% \com{scriptsize} & taille & \texttt{7pt} \\ +% \com{footnotesize} & taille & \texttt{8pt} \\ +% \com{small} & taille & \texttt{9pt} \\ +% \com{normalsize} & taille & \texttt{10pt} \\ +% \com{large} & taille & \texttt{12pt} \\ +% \com{Large} & taille & \texttt{14.4pt} \\ +% \com{LARGE} & taille & \texttt{17.28pt} \\ +% \com{huge} & taille & \texttt{20.74pt} \\ +% \com{Huge} & taille & \texttt{24.88pt}\\ +% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{texte normal}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% Ces cinq paramètres sont affichés chaque fois que \LaTeX{} donne un avertissement de débordement de boîte, +% par exemple: +% \begin{verse} +% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\ +% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,} +% \end{verse} +% \lneed{6} +% Le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+6} liste les commandes de fontes que l'utilisateur peut invoquer pour établir ces +% cinq attributs\,\footnote{Les valeurs utilisées par ces commandes sont déterminées par la classe du document.}. +% +% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de +% paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir plus haut). +% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de +% paquetage \optd{hints} (voir plus haut). +% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est l'opposée de +% \optd{listfiles} ci-dessus. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} Cette option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} charge le paquetage +% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). Elle évite des problèmes avec des +% commandes \com{cite} dans des commandes de sectionnement ou dans des captions (légendes). +% Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[Omega] Le système de typographie\,\footnote{L'essentiel (mais pas la totalité) de cette note provient de +% la documentation d'Omega \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}. +% Voir~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} pour plus d'informations.} +% Omega ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (de \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} et \xname{John}{Plaice}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Omega est une extension de \TeX{} conçue surtout afin d'améliorer les capacités multilingues de TeX. +% +% Quand le programme \TeX{} a été développé au milieu des années [mille neuf cent] soixante-dix +% par le professeur \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}, +% il a surtout été conçu pour la mise en page de textes mathématiques en anglais. Depuis lors \TeX{} a fait de grandes +% avancées dans des domaines scientifiques, littéraires et autres, dans tous +% les pays du monde. En 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a gelé \TeX{} avec pour objectif la +% stabilité. Cependant, il permet que le code \TeX{} soit utilisé comme base +% pour des développements futurs, à~condition que le système résultant +% soit distribué sous un autre nom. +% +% En Omega, tous les caractères et les pointeurs dans les structures de +% données sont de 32 bits plutôt que 8 bits, éliminant ainsi beaucoup de +% limitations triviales de \TeX. Omega permet aussi l'utilisation de +% multiples jeux de caractères en entrée et en sortie, et utilise des +% filtres programmables afin de traduire d'un jeu de caractères à~un +% autre, afin de faire de l'analyse contextuelle, etc. En interne, Omega +% utilise le jeu de caractères Unicode/ISO-10646. Omega soutient aussi +% l'utilisation de multiples directions d'écriture. +% +% Ces améliorations non seulement facilitent la tâche des utilisateurs de \TeX{} +% pour gérer des langues multiples et complexes telles que l'arabe, les +% langues indiennes, le khmer, le chinois, le japonais ou le coréen, dans +% un seul document, mais aussi forment la base de développements futurs +% dans d'autres domaines, tels le soutien de la couleur et de l'hypertexte. +% +% Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales d'Omega est +% appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% L'ajout à~Omega des extensions de \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est un projet +% distinct, connu sous le nom de «~\pack{Aleph}~» ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} et conduit par \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}. +% La version de \LaTeX\ pour \pack{Aleph} est connue sous le nom de +% «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% Il~y~a un système expérimental, nommé \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, qui regroupera +% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} et d'autres développements. +% Une voie prometteuse est \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} par~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, avec +% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}. +% \begin{table}[tp!] +% ^^A \changeskips +% \caption{Quelques systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex} +% \centering +% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc} +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\ +% &&+&&&&+\\ +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\ +% &&&&&&\\ +% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7} +% &&&&&&\\ +% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}} +% \end{array} \] +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{open}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement +% avant (ouverture, \emph{open}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un +% type donné de mini-table, pour forcer le style de page à~utiliser pour la page courante. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[paquetage] (\emph{package}) +% Les paquetages\,\footnote{Ces informations ont été extraites de~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} puis adaptées et +% traduites.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Notez que j'utilise le terme <<~paquetage~>> pour traduire +% le terme anglais \emph{package}. D'autres +% préféreront <<~extension~>> (qui signifie <<~suffixe~>> en anglais), <<~package~>> (anglicisme), ou <<~module~>>; +% c'est une question de goût et d'habitude, sans plus.} sont un dispositif très important de \LaTeX. Ce sont des +% extensions aux commandes de base de \LaTeX{} qui sont écrites dans des fichiers dont les noms se terminent par +% \suffix{.sty} et qui sont chargés via la commande \com{usepackage} dans le préambule du document. Les paquetages +% peuvent être classés selon leur origine: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item les paquetages \textbf{centraux} (\emph{core}) (en fait, les paquetages \textbf{basiques} et \textbf{requis}) +% sont une partie fondamentale de l'installation de base de \LaTeX{} et sont donc complètement standard; +% \item les paquetages \textbf{outils} (\emph{tools}) forment un ensemble écrit par les membres de l'équipe +% \LaTeX3 et devraient toujours être présents dans l'installation; +% \item les paquetages \textbf{graphiques} (\emph{graphics}) sont un ensemble standardisé pour l'inclusion de +% dessins produits par d'autres programmes et pour la gestion des couleurs; ils sont au même niveau que +% les paquetages outils; +% \item les paquetages \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX}, publiés par +% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron, devraient +% être présents dans toute installation\,\footnote{Ils sont indispensables si vous utilisez beaucoup +% de mathématiques.}; +% \item les paquetages des \textbf{contributions} (\emph{contributed}) ont été proposés par de vrais +% utilisateurs; certains de ces paquetages se sont révélés comme étant «~essentiels~» dans l'utilisation +% standard de \LaTeX, mais tous sont utiles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item[partlof] Une liste des figures pour une partie. +% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlofs. +% \item[partlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une partie. +% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlots. +% \item[parttoc] Une table des matières pour une partie. +% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des parttocs. +% \item[PDF] \emph{Portable Document Format}~\cite{pdfspec}. Un descendant du langage PostScript d'Adobe, +% optimisé pour la navigation sur l'Internet. Il ajoute des dispositifs d'hypertexte, de substitution de fontes +% et de compression. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{placeins}] Le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}} +% permet de forcer les éléments flottants à~«~rester à~leur place~», en les empêchant de dériver au-delà d'une +% commande \com{FloatBarrier} vers une autre section. Pour l'utiliser, +% déclarez \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} dans le préambule et insérez des commandes +% \com{FloatBarrier} aux endroits que les éléments flottants ne devraient pas franchir, peut-être +% à~chaque \com{section}. L'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} le fait avec des +% options adéquates de \pack{placeins}, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}; +% voir la section~\vref{s+placing}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant la documentation du paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. +% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} Une\virage{} version de \LaTeX\ adaptée +% à~la langue polonaise (\lopt{polski}). A~été remplacée par le paquetage \pack{polski}. Voir~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. +% Mais le \emph{même} nom désignait aussi une version de \LaTeX\ adaptée à~la langue japonaise, +% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}. +% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% et sa documentation; vous devriez l'adapter à~vos besoins. +% Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[points de conduite] (\emph{leaders}) Une séquence répétive de points (ou d'un autre petit caractère), +% espacés régulièrement, utilisée pour relier deux objets sur la même ligne (conduisant d'un titre à~un +% numéro de page dans une table des matières ou analogue). +% \item[polymorphe (entrée)] Une entrée\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} dans la table des matières, la +% liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux, qui change d'aspect selon l'endroit où elle apparaît (TdM +% principale, minitable, etc.); voir la section~\vref{ss+polym}. +% \item[PostScript] Un langage de description de page, par Adobe. Il décrit l'apparence d'une page, y~compris +% d'éléments tels que texte, graphiques et images scannées, vers une imprimante ou un appareil de +% visualisation. Introduit par Adobe en 1985, il est devenu le langage de choix dans l'impression de haute +% qualité. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[préambule] (\emph{preamble}) Dans le fichier principal d'un document \LaTeX{} source, la partie de ce +% fichier qui se trouve entre les commandes \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} et +% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. Dans le préambule, vous pouvez insérer des déclarations globales et le +% chargement de paquetages par des commandes \com{usepackage}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[préparation] Les commandes de préparation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} préparent les fichiers auxiliaires +% pour les mini-tables d'un type donné. Une commande de~\emph{préparation} doit avoir été invoqué +% préalablement (et une seule fois) à~toute commande d'insertion pour le type de mini-table. Les commandes +% de préparation sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(niveau partie)\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(niveau chapitre)\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(niveau section)\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}&(tous niveaux) +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX, pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence. +% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est très semblable à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir +% plus haut. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Profondeurs pour les commandes de sectionnement}\label{t+j+depths} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Classe:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\ +% \midrule +% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\ +% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\ +% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\ +% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\ +% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\ +% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\ +% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\ +% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \item[profondeur] Dans les classes de documents standard (et dans la plupart des classes) ayant des commandes se +% sectionnement, nous avons une notion de \textbf{profondeur} (\emph{depth}). La profondeur d'une commande de +% sectionnement détermine le niveau jusqu'auquel descend la numérotation dans son titre (selon la valeur du compteur +% \dcnt{secnumdepth}), et les entrées pour une commande de sectionnement données apparaissent dans la table +% des matières principale si la profondeur de cette commande de sectionnement est inférieure ou égale à~la +% valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}; consultez le tableau~\vref{t+j+depths} pour les profondeurs des commandes +% de sectionnement dans les principales classes de document. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Le mécanisme est analogue pour les parttocs, minitocs et secttocs, en utilisant les valeurs des compteurs +% \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} et \dcnt{secttocdepth}. Si vous utilisez des sous-figures ou +% des sous-tableaux, les mini-tables correspondantes utilisent des compteurs tels que +% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} +% et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[pseudo-chapitre] +% Ou chapitre étoilé. Un chapitre qui commence par une commande «~étoilée~» \com{chapter*}. +% Par défaut, il n'a pas +% d'entrée dans la table des matières. \com{chapter*} nécessite quelques précautions avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{s+starred.chap}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{quotchap}] Le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} fournit des commandes pour ajouter des +% citations à~certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes standard de document \LaTeXe: +% \class{book} et \class{report}. Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% (voir le point~\vref{h.quotchap} et la section~\vref{faq.39}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[README] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% plus quelques informations utiles. +% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement: +% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous). +% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie +% et chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires). +% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui trie les fichiers +% du paquetage \upack{minitoc} en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe). +% Il devrait être exécuté après les scripts +% \scrp{imk} (obligatoire) et \scrp{emk} et/ou +% \scrp{fmk}, dans cet ordre. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{romannum}] Le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} change les numéros (pour les commandes de +% sectionnement) engendrés par \LaTeX{} de chiffres arabes en chiffres romains. Ce paquetage utilise le +% paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.romannum} et la +% section~\vref{faq.40}). +% \item[\pack{rotating}] Le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} effectue toutes les sortes de rotations +% que vous pouvez souhaiter, y~compris celles de figures complètes. +% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] Le paquetage pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} fournit des commandes pour définir de +% nouveaux flottants de divers styles +% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, et des styles non définis); +% le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} fournit de nouveaux environnements (\env{sidewaysfigure} +% et \env{sidewaystable}) qui sont tournés de $90^\circ$ ou $270^\circ$. +% Mais qu'en est-t-il de nouveaux flottants tournés, par exemple un flottant avec filets et tourné? +% Ce paquetage rend ceci possible; il établit un pont entre les deux paquetages et étend aussi les commandes du +% paquetage \pack{float} pour définir des versions tournées des nouveaux flottants. +% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} est un programme d'emballage (\emph{wrapper}) +% pour \LaTeX\ et ses programmes associés. Son +% but est, étant donné un source \LaTeX\ à~traiter, de le compiler un nombre de fois suffisant pour résoudre +% toutes les références, en exécutant éventuellement des programmes satellites tels que \textbf{\BibTeX}, +% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., pour produire les fichiers de données adéquats. Il a des +% dispositifs pour effectuer certaines actions de nettoyage en post-traitement, comme de détruire les fichiers +% auxiliaires produits par \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. +% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. +% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. +% \item[sectionnement (commandes de)] Ce sont les commandes \LaTeX\ qui spécifies la structure logique de votre document. +% Les principales commandes de sectionnement sont \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section}, +% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph} et \com{subparagraph}. +% Certaines classes standard de documents n'ont pas la commande \com{chapter} (ainsi les classes +% \class{article} et \class{proc}), certaines n'ont pas de commandes de sectionnement (ainsi la classe +% \class{letter}). Dans ce dernier cas, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. Si certaines des +% commandes \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ne sont pas définies, les +% commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour le niveau associé ne sont pas disponibles. Si \com{chapter} est définie, +% les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section ne sont pas définies dans la version courante du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et les antérieures, mais si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais que +% \com{section} l'est, alors les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section sont définies. +% Voir la section~\vref{note+sectionning}. +% Dans les classes non-standard de documents, les commandes de sectionnement portant des noms non-standard ne +% peuvent pas être reconnues par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[sectlof] Une liste des figures pour une section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlofs. +% \item[sectlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlots. +% \item[\upack{sectsty}] Le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer +% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe: +% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. Ce paquetage fonctionne aussi avec +% les classes {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}: +% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sectsty} et la +% section~\vref{faq.28}). +% \item[secttoc] Une table des matières pour une section. +% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des secttocs. +% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (pour \LaTeXe) emprunte +% quelques définitions des classes standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} +% et les modifie afin d'imprimer les en-têtes de partie, chapitre, section, sous-section\ldots{} avec la +% variante Sans-Serif de la fonte courante. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sfheaders} et la +% section~\vref{faq.41}). +% \item[shell] Dans les systèmes d'exploitation Unix, analogues à~Unix et Linux, le \emph{shell} est un programme +% utilisé comme interface entre le système d'exploitation et l'utilisateur. Il peut aussi être utilisé comme +% un langage de programmation pour écrire des programmes ou \emph{scripts} afin de préparer de séquences de +% tâches utilisées de manière routinière. Les principaux \emph{shells} sont le \emph{shell} de Bourne (\textbf{sh}), +% le C~\emph{shell} (\textbf{csh}), le \emph{shell} de Korn (\textbf{ksh}), et leurs nombreux descendants +% (tels que \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.). +% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} Une option\imess{W0020} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle force l'utilisation de suffixes courts +% (3~caractères) dans les noms des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc. Cette option est inactive par défaut, mais +% est automatiquement activée si votre système d'exploitation requiert des suffixes courts. Voir +% \textbf{autoconfiguration} plus haut et la section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] Le paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} permet de créer une autre table des +% matières dans un document, avec un autre titre et une autre profonteur que la table des matières principale. +% \item[SJIS] Le codage SJIS de caractères (pour le japonais), aussi connu sous le nom de MS-Kanji +% (Kanji pour Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}), +% consiste en deux jeux de caractères se recouvrant: celui surnommé Katakana demi-largeur (JIS X0201-1976, +% caractères codés sur 1~octet dans l'intervalle de \texttt{0xA1} à~\texttt{0xDF}) et le jeu de caractères JIS +% (pleine largeur) (JIS X0208-1990, associé aux points de codage restants). +% Cette information provient de~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} Une version of \LaTeX\ adaptée pour la langue suédoise. Voir~\cite{slatex}. +% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} Un paquetage~\cite{splitbib} \LaTeX\ qui permet de trier une bibliographie +% en catégories et sous-catégories; ceci est intéressant pour des listes de publications, pour grouper les +% références par sujet, par année,~... +% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] Le paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv} est destiné à~être utilisé par les +% auteurs de paquetages \LaTeX{} qui ont besoin de savoir quelles divisions de sectionnement sont fournies par +% la classe du document. +% provided by the document class. +% \item[strut] Un trait vertical invisible utilisé pour forcer une séparation minimale entre deux lignes de texte. +% Ce terme anglais signifiant «~étai~» est conservé car il fait partie du jargon \TeX{} et \LaTeX. +% \item[\upack{subfig}] Le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} permet l'inclusion de petites, +% «~sous-~» figures et tables. Il en simplifie le positionnement, l'ajout de légendes (\emph{captions}) et +% l'étiquetage à~l'intérieur d'un seul environnement \env{figure} ou \env{table}. De plus, ce paquetage +% permet que de tels sous-captions (sous-légendes) soient écrits dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des +% tableaux si vous le désirez. +% \item[\upack{subfigure}] Le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} est une version obsolète (par le même +% auteur) du paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. +% \item[suffixe] (\emph{extension}) Le nom d'un fichier est souvent constitué de 2~parties: un \emph{nom de base} +% et un \emph{suffixe}, séparées par un point. Sous certains anciens systèmes d'exploitation, le nom de base +% est limité à~8~caractères et le suffixe à~3~caractères (le schéma «~8+3~»). Voir aussi les sections~\vref{MS-DOS} +% et~\vref{.8+3}. Il est fortement recommandé d'avoir au plus un seul point dans un nom de fichier. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[TDM, TdM] Acronyme pour «~table des matières~» (\emph{TOC, ``table of contents''}). +% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}La \emph{\TeX~Directory Structure}~\cite{tds,ftds}; une structure de répertoires fortement +% recommandée pour ranger les fichiers de macros, fontes et autres fichiers systèmes \TeX{} indépendants de +% l'implantation; elle suggère aussi comment incorporer le reste des fichiers \TeX{} dans une seule structure; +% la \index{TDS}TDS a été pensée pour fonctionner sur tous les systèmes modernes. +% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} est un programme écrit par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}. +% Il est conçu pour la composition de textes et d'équations mathématiques. +% +% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a commencé le développement de \TeX{} en 1977 parce qu'il était +% frustré par la manière avec laquelle ses articles étaient publiés par +% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}. Il avait arrêté de soumettre des +% articles vers 1974 parce que \og{} le résultat final était trop pénible +% à~regarder \fg{}. \TeX{}, tel que nous l'utilisons aujourd'hui, est sorti en +% 1982 et a été amélioré au fil des ans. Ces dernières années \TeX{} a +% atteint une grande stabilité. Aujourd'hui \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} affirme qu'il n'y a +% virtuellement plus de \og{} bug \fg{}. Le numéro de version de \TeX{} tend +% vers $\pi$ et est actuellement $3.141592$. +% +% \TeX{} se prononce \og{} Tech \fg{}, avec un \og{} ch \fg{} comme dans le mot +% écossais \og{} Loch \fg{}. En alphabet phonétique cela donne +% \textbf{[tex]}\dots Dans un environnement \texttt{ASCII}, \TeX{} +% devient \texttt{TeX}. +% \item[\upack{thailatex}] Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex} permet de composer +% des documents en langue thaïe. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement serré des lignes dans +% les mini-tables. L'option contraire est \optd{loose}. +% \item[\upack{titlesec}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} permet de changer les titres de +% sectionnement. Parmi ses nombreux dispositifs, il permet des titres dans la marge, un format différent dans +% les pages de gauche et de droite, des filets au-dessus et en dessous du titre, etc. +% Malheureusement, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\upack{titletoc}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} paquetage \pack{titletoc} est utile pour la mise +% en forme des entrées de la table +% des matières, en offrant la possibilité de changer de format au milieu du document, de regrouper des entrées +% en un seul paragraphe, d'avoir de jolies entrées en format libre, de faire des tables des matières +% partielles, etc. +% Malheureusement, il est avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Le fichier \xfile{titletoc.sty} ne fait pas partie du paquetage \pack{titlesec}; c'est un paquetage +% indépendant, mais il est décrit dans la documentation~\cite{titletoc} du paquetage \pack{titlesec}. +% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} Un fichier script file qui crée une hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{tds,ftds} (à~adapter +% pour votre système). +% \item[TOC] Acronyme pour «~\emph{table of contents}~», ou «~table des matières~». +% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} peut être utilisé pour ajouter une +% entrée pour la table des matières et/ou pour la bibliographie et/ou pour l'index dans la table des matières. +% Mais il nécessite quelques précautions si vous l'utilisez avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur de la table des matières. +% \item[\upack{tocloft}] Le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} offre des outils pour contrôler +% la conception typographique de la table des matières, de la liste des figures et de la liste des tables. De +% nouvelles sortes de «~liste des \ldots~» peuvent être définies. Si vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{tocloft} et le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, regardez la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}, sur la manière de +% traiter quelques problèmes mineurs de compatibilité. +% \item[\xfile{TODO}] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) qui liste quelques propositions de développement du +% paquetage, pas encore réalisées. Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus. +% \item[token] Un \emph{token}\,\footnote{Cette définition est tirée +% du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Gardons cet anglicisme bien pratique!} +% est soit (a)~un seul caractère avec son code de +% catégorie attaché (voir «~catcode~» plus haut), soit (b)~une séquence de contrôle. \virage{} Vous \emph{devriez} +% vous souvenir de deux choses importantes à~propos des \emph{tokens} de \TeX: (1)~Une séquence de contrôle est +% considérée comme étant un seul objet qui n'est plus composée d'une suite de symboles. En conséquence, les noms longs +% de séquences de contrôle ne sont pas plus difficiles à~traiter par \TeX\ que les noms courts, une fois qu'ils +% ont été remplacés par des \emph{tokens}. De plus, les espaces ne sont pas ignorés après les séquences de +% contrôle à~l'intérieur d'une liste de \emph{tokens}; la règle d'ignorance des espaces ne s'applique que dans un +% fichier d'entrée, au moment où les chaînes de caractères sont découpées en \emph{tokens}. (2)~Une fois qu'un +% code de catégorie a été attaché à~un \emph{token} caractère, cet attachement est permanent. Par exemple, si le +% caractère~`\verb|{|' était soudainement déclaré comme étant de catégorie~12 au lieu de catégorie~1, les +% les caractères `\verb|{|$_1$' déjà à~l'intérieur de listes de \emph{tokens} de \TeX\ resteraient encore de +% catégorie~1; seules les listes nouvellement construites contiendraient des \emph{tokens} `\verb|{|$_{12}$'. +% En d'autres termes, les caractères individuels reçoivent une interprétation figée dès qu'ils ont été lus depuis +% un fichier, selon la catégorie qu'ils ont au moment de la lecture. Les séquences de contrôle sont différents, +% car elles peuvent changer d'interprétation à~tout moment. Les processus digestifs de \TeX\ savent toujours +% exactement ce qu'un \emph{token} signifie, parce que le code de catégorie apparaît dans le \emph{token} +% lui-même; mais lorsque les processus digestifs rencontrent un \emph{token} séquence de contrôle, ils doivent +% examiner la définition courante de cette séquence de contrôle afin d'en trouver la signification. +% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] Le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} (de \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} fournit une +% méthode rapide pour définir de nouveaux types de flottants en \LaTeX. Un seule commande définit un nouveau +% flottant dans le même style que les types de flottants \env{figure} et \env{table} du noyau \LaTeX{} kernel. +% \item[\pack{txfonts}] Le paquetage \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts} fournit les fontes \texttt{TX}, qui comprennent +% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt +% \item des fontes romanes textuelles virtuelles utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec quelques +% symboles textuels modifiés ou additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1; +% \item {\textsf{des fontes sans empattement (sans serif) utilisant Adobe Helvetica (ou URW NimbusSanL) avec +% quelques symboles textuels additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}}; +% \item {\smooth\texttt{des fontes à~chasse fixe (dites <<~machine à~écrire~>>) dans\linebreak[4] les +% codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}}; +% \item des alphabets mathématiques utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec des métriques modifiées; +% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes mathématiques +% Computer Modern (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX et les lettres grecques de CMR); +% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes \AmS{} fonts (MSAM et MSBM); +% \item des fontes mathématiques de divers symboles. +% \end{enumerate} +% Toutes ces fontes sont en format Type~1 (dans des fichiers \suffix{.afm} et \suffix{.pfb}). +% Les fichiers \suffix{.tfm} et \suffix{.vf} nécessaires ainsi que les fichiers de paquetage \LaTeXe{} et +% fichiers <<~font map~>> (\suffix{.map}) pour \tool{dvips} sont fournis. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[UNIX] Un système d'exploitation moderne, disponible sur divers types d'ordinateurs et dans diverses +% variantes. Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, il a l'avantage d'utiliser des noms de fichiers avec des +% suffixes longs (la limite est trop haute pour que le nombre de mini-tables soit un problème). +% \item[UNIX (analogues~à)] Les systèmes d'exploitation analogues à~Unix, avec les mêmes avantages. Linux en est +% un bon exemple, mais il en existe d'autres. +% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} Un script PERL script, par \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, pour ajouter un type +% d'entrée \BibTeX{} \texttt{webpage}, +% et ajouter le support des champs généraux \texttt{url} et \texttt{lastchecked}, aux fichiers \suffix{.bst} +% de \BibTeX{} (du moins à~la plupart d'entre eux). Ajoute optionnellement un support basique pour les champs +% \texttt{eprint} et \texttt{doi}, et aussi le support pour \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref}. +% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), aussi appelée UTF~2 ou FSS-UTF, est une représentation +% spéciale d'Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). Elle utilise des séquences de plusieurs octets de longueurs +% diverses, mais seules les séquences d'un, de deux ou de trois octets sont implantées dans \pack{CJK}. +% Les caractères ASCII seront utilisés tels quels --- sans cette propriété, il serait impossible d'utiliser +% UTF~8 avec \TeX. Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{varsects}] Le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer +% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe: +% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.varsects} et la +% section~\vref{faq.33}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \par\reversemarginpar +% \item[Wikipédia] La Wikipédia\index{Wikipedia=Wikipédia}\marginpar{\null\hfill% +% \raisebox{0cm}[2.87cm][0cm]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia}}} +% est un projet d'encyclopédie libre, multilingue et de contenu ouvert (libre, neutre et vérifiable +% que chacun peut éditer et améliorer) géré par la \emph{Wikimedia Foundation} +% à~but non lucratif. Son nom est un assemblage des mots \emph{wiki} (un type de site Web collaboratif) et +% \emph{encyclopedia}. Lancé en 2001 par \name{Jimmy}{Wales} et \name{Larry}{Sanger}, c'est le projet de travail +% de référence général le plus vaste, celui qui croît le plus vite, et le plus populaire disponible sur l'Internet. +% \par\normalmarginpar +% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] Le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig} fournit les environnements \env{wrapfigure} et +% \env{wraptable} pour placer une figure ou un tableau sur le côté de la page et faire que le texte +% enveloppe cette figure ou ce tableau. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\scrp{xmk}] Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui compose les fichiers exemples de documents et produit +% des documents PDF. +% \item[\upack{xr}] Le paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr} met en place un système pour les références externes +% (\emph{eXternal References}). J'en ai écrit la première version, mais elle avait de graves problèmes. +% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} a réécrit ce paquetage d'une manière bien meilleure et plus robuste. Avec sa permission, +% j'ai utilisé une partie de son code dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour réaliser les commandes de +% préparation (telles que \com{dominitoc}). Si vous utilisez aussi le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, utilisez \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} au lieu du paquetage \upack{xr}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \end{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation} +% \fi +% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt +% \minilot +% \egroup +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter describes the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package (version~\#61). +% +% This package contains a lot of files. The list of all files is given in \xfile{minitoc.l}. See +% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% The files are sorted into ``classes'' below (a file can appear in more than one class). Each class specifies +% the function and the placement of its files. +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre décrit l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} (version~\#61). +% +% Ce paquetage contient de nombreux fichiers. La liste de tous les fichiers est donnée dans +% \xfile{minitoc.l}. Voir le tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% Les fichiers sont répartis en «~classes~» ci-dessous (un même fichier peut apparaître dans plusieurs classes). +% Chaque classe spécifie la fonction et le placement de ses fichiers. +% \fi +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \def\CLA{class} +% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), first part}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \or\relax +% \def\CLA{classe} +% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), première partie}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \fi +% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip} +% \medskip +% \fboxsep=1em +% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth +% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries +% \flushleft +% \smash{\vphantom{\mpfootnotemark[0]}}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}% +% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns +% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french} +% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN0}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN1}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.sty} +% \item \xfile{mtcoff.sty} +% \item \xfile{mtcmess.sty} +% \item \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} +% \item \xfile{acadian.mld} +% \item \xfile{acadien.mld} +% \item \xfile{afrikaan.mld} +% \item \xfile{afrikaans.mld} +% \item \xfile{albanian.mld} +% \item \xfile{american.mld} +% \item \xfile{arab.mld} +% \item \xfile{arab2.mld} +% \item \xfile{arabi.mld} +% \item \xfile{arabic.mld} +% \item \xfile{armenian.mld} +% \item \xfile{australian.mld} +% \item \xfile{austrian.mld} +% \item \xfile{bahasa.mld} +% \item \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% \item \xfile{bahasam.mld} +% \item \xfile{bangla.mld} +% \item \xfile{basque.mld} +% \item \xfile{bengali.mld} +% \item \xfile{bicig.mld} +% \item \xfile{bicig2.mld} +% \item \xfile{bicig3.mld} +% \item \xfile{bithe.mld} +% \item \xfile{brazil.mld} +% \item \xfile{brazilian.mld} +% \item \xfile{breton.mld} +% \item \xfile{british.mld} +% \item \xfile{bulgarian.mld} +% \item \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} +% \item \xfile{buryat.mld} +% \item \xfile{buryat2.mld} +% \item \xfile{canadian.mld} +% \item \xfile{canadien.mld} +% \item \xfile{castillan.mld} +% \item \xfile{castillian.mld} +% \item \xfile{catalan.mld} +% \item \xmldo{chinese1} +% \item \xmldo{chinese2} +% \item \xfile{croatian.mld} +% \item \xfile{czech.mld} +% \item \xfile{danish.mld} +% \item \xfile{devanagari.mld} +% \item \xfile{dutch.mld} +% \item \xfile{english.mld} +% \item \xfile{english1.mld} +% \item \xfile{english2.mld} +% \item \xfile{esperant.mld} +% \item \xfile{esperanto.mld} +% \item \xfile{estonian.mld} +% \item \xfile{ethiopia.mld} +% \item \xfile{ethiopian.mld} +% \item \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} +% \item \xmldo{farsi1} +% \item \xmldo{farsi2} +% \item \xfile{farsi3.mld} +% \item \xfile{finnish.mld} +% \item \xfile{finnish2.mld} +% \item \xfile{francais.mld} +% \item \xfile{french.mld} +% \item \xfile{french1.mld} +% \item \xfile{french2.mld} +% \item \xfile{frenchb.mld} +% \item \xfile{frenchle.mld} +% \item \xfile{frenchpro.mld} +% \item \xfile{galician.mld} +% \item \xfile{german.mld} +% \item \xfile{germanb.mld} +% \item \xfile{germanb2.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek-mono.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld} +% \item \xfile{guarani.mld} +% \item \xmldo{hangul1} +% \item \xmldo{hangul2} +% \item \xmldo{hangul3} +% \item \xmldo{hangul4} +% \item \xmldo{hangul-u8} +% \item \xmldo{hanja1} +% \item \xmldo{hanja2} +% \item \xmldo{hanja-u8} +% \item \xfile{hebrew.mld} +% \item \xfile{hebrew2.mld} +% \item \xfile{hindi.mld} +% \item \xfile{hindi-modern.mld} +% \item \xfile{hungarian.mld} +% \item \xfile{icelandic.mld} +% \item \xfile{indon.mld} +% \item \xfile{indonesian.mld} +% \item \xfile{interlingua.mld} +% \item \xfile{irish.mld} +% \item \xfile{italian.mld} +% \item \xfile{italian2.mld} +% \item \xmldo{japanese} +% \item \xmldo{japanese2} +% \item \xmldo{japanese3} +% \item \xmldo{japanese4} +% \item \xmldo{japanese5} +% \item \xmldo{japanese6} +% \item \xfile{kannada.mld} +% \item \xfile{khalkha.mld} +% \item \xfile{latin.mld} +% \item \xfile{latin2.mld} +% \item \xfile{latinc.mld} +% \item \xfile{latinc2.mld} +% \item \xfile{latvian.mld} +% \item \xfile{latvian2.mld} +% \item \xfile{letton.mld} +% \item \xfile{letton2.mld} +% \item \xfile{lithuanian.mld} +% \item \xfile{lithuanian2.mld} +% \item \xfile{lowersorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{lsorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{magyar.mld} +% \item \xfile{magyar2.mld} +% \item \xfile{magyar3.mld} +% \item \xfile{malay.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-b.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} +% \item \xmldo{malayalam-omega} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} +% \item \xfile{manju.mld} +% \item \xfile{mexican.mld} +% \item \xfile{meyalu.mld} +% \item \xfile{mongol.mld} +% \item \xfile{mongolb.mld} +% \item \xfile{mongolian.mld} +% \item \xfile{naustrian.mld} +% \item \xfile{newzealand.mld} +% \item \xfile{ngerman.mld} +% \item \xfile{ngermanb.mld} +% \item \xfile{ngermanb2.mld} +% \item \xfile{norsk.mld} +% \item \xfile{norsk2.mld} +% \item \xfile{nynorsk.mld} +% \item \xfile{nynorsk2.mld} +% \item \xfile{occitan.mld} +% \item \xfile{occitan2.mld} +% \item \xfile{polish.mld} +% \item \xfile{polish2.mld} +% \item \xfile{polski.mld} +% \item \xfile{portuges.mld} +% \item \xfile{portuguese.mld} +% \item \xfile{romanian.mld} +% \item \xfile{romanian2.mld} +% \item \xfile{romanian3.mld} +% \item \xfile{russian.mld} +% \item \xfile{russianb.mld} +% \item \xfile{russianc.mld} +% \item \xfile{russian2m.mld} +% \item \xfile{russian2o.mld} +% \item \xmldo{russian-cca} +% \item \xmldo{russian-cca1} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lh} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyralt} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} +% \item \xfile{samin.mld} +% \item \xfile{scottish.mld} +% \item \xfile{serbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{serbianc.mld} +% \item \xfile{slovak.mld} +% \item \xfile{slovene.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish2.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish3.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish4.mld} +% \item \xfile{swahili.mld} +% \item \xfile{swedish.mld} +% \item \xfile{swedish2.mld} +% \item \xmldo{thai} +% \item \xfile{turkish.mld} +% \item \xfile{uighur.mld} +% \item \xfile{uighur2.mld} +% \item \xfile{uighur3.mld} +% \item \xfile{UKenglish.mld} +% \item \xfile{ukraineb.mld} +% \item \xfile{ukrainian.mld} +% \item \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{USenglish.mld} +% \item \xfile{usorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{vietnam.mld} +% \item \xfile{vietnamese.mld} +% \item \xfile{welsh.mld} +% \item \xfile{xalx.mld} +% \item \xfile{xalx2.mld} +% \item \xfile{xalx3.mld} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN2}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{INSTALL}, \xfile{README}, \xfile{TODO}, +% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN3}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \footnotetext{See continuation in table~\vref{t+files2}.} +% \or\relax +% \footnotetext{Voir la suite dans le tableau~\vref{t+files2}.} +% \fi +% \end{minipage}} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \def\CLA{class} +% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), second part}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \or\relax +% \def\CLA{classe} +% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), seconde partie}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \fi +% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip} +% \medskip +% \fboxsep=1em +% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth +% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries +% \flushleft +% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns +% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french} +% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN4}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.bug} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.sum} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN5}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.bib} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre} +% \item \xfile{en-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN6}):}}}]\NL +% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax +% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \or\relax +% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \fi} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN7}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}\isuffix{.lan} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre} +% \item \xfile{franc.sty}, \xfile{frbib.sty}, \xfile{frnew.sty} +% \item \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN8}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.pdf} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN9}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN10}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk} +% ^^A \item \xfile{duplex2v.pro} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN11}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}} +% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep +% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep) +% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}% +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth} +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption[List of the graphic files]{List of the graphic files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1} +% \or\relax +% \caption[Liste des fichiers graphiques]{Liste des fichiers graphiques (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1} +% \fi +% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \columnseprule=.4pt +% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns +% \xgrf{lamed3.png}, +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}} +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep +% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep) +% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}% +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth} +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption[List of the flag files]{List of the flag files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2} +% \or\relax +% \caption[Liste des fichiers drapeaux]{Liste des fichiers drapeaux (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2} +% \fi +% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \columnseprule=.4pt +% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}} +% \end{table} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{enumerate}[(1)] +% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN0}The files \xfile{minitoc.ins} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% are the basic source files of this package. The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} loads +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} but selects the french documentation. +% The language selection is done by using +% \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN0}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% sont les fichiers sources basiques de ce paquetage. Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} charge +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} mais sélectionne la documentation en français. La sélection de la +% langue est faite en utilisant des constructions \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} +% \ldots\ \com{fi}. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN1}The files \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, +% \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, +% and \emph{all}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} +% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} and \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} files are the package +% itself\,\footnote{The large number of \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files is (partially) a consequence +% of the fact that some languages have +% aliases (or dialects) and hence one \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file for each name (a \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file may load +% another one) and, if necessary, a \suffix{.mlo} file; the english and french languages are evident examples. +% For some languages, the multiplicity of the \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files corresponds to a multiplicity of fonts +% and/or encodings (chinese, greek, japanese, korean, malayalam, polish, russian, serbian), or even +% for spelling reforms (german, greek, norsk). \emph{Note that the presence of +% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory.} Since version~\#50, the \upack{minitoc} package signals the +% missing \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files and gives their list in a warning message.}. +% +% The table~\vref{t+languages} lists the available languages; for each of these languages, a +% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file is available; the languages in parentheses are aliases of a main language +% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file of that main language. +% +% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} is a temporary fix for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class. +% +% The files of this class must be \emph{all} installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds the \suffix{.sty} files. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN1}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, +% \xfile{mtcmess.sty} +% et \emph{tous}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} +% les fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} et \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} constituent le +% paquetage lui-même\,\footnote{Le grand nombre de fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} est (en partie) +% une conséquence du fait que certaines +% langues ont des alias (ou dialectes) et donc un fichier \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque nom (un fichier +% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} peut en charger un autre) et, si nécessaire, un fichier \suffix{.mlo}; +% les langues \emph{english} et \emph{french} sont des exemples évidents. +% Pour certaines langues, la multiplicité des fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} correspond à~une multiplicité de fontes +% et/ou de codages (chinois, grec, japonais, coréen, malayalam, polonais, russe, serbe), ou même à~des +% réformes de l'orthographe (allemand, grec, norvégien). \emph{Notez que la présence du fichier +% \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire.}. Depuis la version~\#50, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} signale les +% fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} manquants et en donne une liste dans un message d'avertissement.}. +% +% Le tableau~\vref{t+languages} liste les langues disponibles; pour chacune de ces langues, un fichier +% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} est disponible; les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue +% principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de cette langue principale. +% +% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} est une correction temporaire pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}. +% +% Les fichiers de cette classe doivent être \emph{tous} installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve +% les fichiers \suffix{.sty}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN2}Informative text files: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \xfile{INSTALL} is a file describing the installation of the package. +% You are (almost) reading it (but it is shorter). +% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contains the list of all files of the \upack{minitoc} distribution. See +% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \item \xfile{README} is a file describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package, +% plus some useful infos. +% \item \xfile{TODO} lists some suggested developments of the package, not yet implemented. +% Comments and suggestions are welcome. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \label{IN2}Fichiers informatifs textuels: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \xfile{INSTALL} est un fichier décrivant l'installation du paquetage. À~part la langue, +% vous êtes (presque) en train de le lire (mais il est plus court). +% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contient la liste de tous les fichiers de la distribution de +% \upack{minitoc}. Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \item \xfile{README} est un fichier décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% plus quelques informations utiles. +% \item \xfile{TODO} liste quelques propositions de développement du paquetage, pas encore réalisées. +% Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN3}Examples of documents: +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}, +% are example files, to play with. +% The associated \suffix{.pdf} files are provided. +% Another (\emph{short}) examples are welcome. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN3}Exemples de documents: +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}, +% sont des exemples de fichiers, avec lesquels vous pouvez jouer. +% Les fichiers \suffix{.pdf} associés sont fournis. +% D'autres exemples (\emph{courts}) sont les bienvenus. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum} +% are plain text documentation: list of problems (faq, see chapter~\vref{FAQ}) and summary of commands +% (see chapter~\vref{c+memento}). +% \or\relax +% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum} +% sont de la documentation en texte pur: liste des problèmes (questions fréquemment posées, voir le +% chapitre~\vref{FAQ}) et sommaire des commandes (voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}). +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, and +% \xfile{minitoc.bib} are the source of the documentation in (non perfect) english. +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} is the common preamble code for the documentation. +% \else\relax +% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et +% \xfile{minitoc.bib} forment le code source de la documentation en anglais (ou presque). +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} est le code de préambule commun pour la documentation. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN6} +% {\rmfamily\slshape The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}; +% they are images to include.} +% \or\relax +% \label{IN6} +% {\rmfamily\slshape La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}; +% ce sont des images à~inclure.} +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, +% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} are the source +% (and tools) of the documentation in french\,\footnote{This seems rather strange. In fact, the english and +% french documentations are both contained in the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file. \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sets +% a flag then +% loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; hence the file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is much smaller than \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. +% Thus, \xfile{minitoc.ins} contains also some utilitary files which are automatically created (some +% \suffix{.sty} files, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}). +% The english and french versions are not word-by-word translations, but they are in parallel in the +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file, and this helps the maintenance.}. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, +% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} sont les codes sources +% (et les outils) pour la documentation en français\,\footnote{Ceci peut sembler assez étrange. En fait, les +% documentations en anglais et en français sont toutes deux contenues dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} établit un indicateur puis charge \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; en conséquence, le fichier +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est bien plus petit que \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Donc, \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% contient aussi certains fichiers utilitaires qui sont créés automatiquement (quelques fichiers +% \suffix{.sty}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}). +% Les versions anglaise et française ne sont pas des traductions mot-à-mot, mais elles sont en +% parallèle dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, et ceci aide pour la maintenance.}. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf}, +% is the documentation in (non perfect) english, in PDF format. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf} +% forme la documentation en anglais (ou presque), en format PDF. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} +% is the documentation in french, in PDF format. The french documentation and its source +% files must not be left out. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} +% forme la documentation en français, en format PDF. La documentation en français +% et ses fichiers sources ne doivent pas être omis. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} is a shell script\,\footnote{You can sip a big cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} +% while this script is running! Be patient.} +% to prepare the package and its documentation; +% the \scrp{pmk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} +% and \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} directories to not waste disk space under your home directory; +% there are also six partial scripts\footnote{In fact, \scrp{pmk} assembles the scripts +% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk}, and \scrp{tmk} (but \emph{not} \scrp{cmk}).} +% and a supplementary one, \scrp{cmk} (all to be adapted): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \scrp{imk}, which prepares the package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running +% \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}; it creates also some \suffix{.sty} files necessary to prepare +% the documentation but that are to be installed with it; +% the \scrp{imk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} directory to not waste disk space +% under your home directory; +% \item \scrp{emk}, which prepares the english documentation from +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{fmk}, which prepares the french documentation from +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{xmk}, which typesets the example files (in PDF format); +% \item \scrp{rmk}, which sorts the files into classes (one directory for each class); +% \item \scrp{tmk}, which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} +% (to be tailored to your system); see table~\vref{t+TDS}; this hierarchy is saved +% in \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}; +% \item \scrp{cmk}, which converts the PDF documentation files into PostScript files. +% \end{itemize} +% These scripts are currently written in C-shell, but they are very simple, and should be easy to +% convert in another classic shell. The documentation in PostScript format is no more distributed on +% the CTAN archives, but the \scrp{cmk} script can prepare it from the documentation in PDF format +% (recto-verso printing). +% \or\relax +% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} est un script \emph{shell}\,\footnote{Vous avez le temps de déguster un +% grand cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} pendant que ce script s'exécute! Soyez patients.} pour préparer le paquetage +% et sa documentation; +% le script \scrp{pmk} utilise les répertoires \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} +% et \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour ne pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% il y~a aussi six scripts partiels\,\footnote{En fait, \scrp{pmk} regroupe les scripts +% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (mais \emph{pas} +% \scrp{cmk}).} et un supplémentaire, \scrp{cmk} (tous à~adapter): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \scrp{imk}, qui prépare le paquetage en partant de +% \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}; +% il crée aussi quelques fichiers \suffix{.sty} nécessaires pour préparer la documentation et +% ils doivent être installés avec elle; +% le script \scrp{imk} utilise le répertoire \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} pour ne pas gâcher +% de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% \item \scrp{emk}, qui prépare la documentation anglaise en partant de +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{fmk}, qui prépare la documentation française en partant de +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{xmk}, qui compose les fichiers d'exemples (en format PDF); +% \item \scrp{rmk}, qui trie les fichiers en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe); +% \item \scrp{tmk}, qui crée une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{ftds,tds} +% (à~adapter pour votre système); voir le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}; cette hiérarchie est sauvegardée +% dans \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}; +% \item \scrp{cmk}, qui convertit les fichiers PDF de la documentation en fichiers PostScript. +% \end{itemize} +% Ces scripts sont actuellement écrits en C-\emph{shell}, mais ils sont très simples et devraient être +% faciles à~convertir dans tout autre \emph{shell} classique. La documentation en format PostScript +% n'est plus distribuée sur les archives CTAN, mais le script \scrp{cmk} peut la préparer à~partir de +% celle en format PDF (impression recto-verso). +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} is a ZIP-archive file containing a +% \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy with all the files of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} est un fichier archive ZIP contenant une +% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS avec tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{enumerate} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some remarks about the \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} and \scrp{pmk} scripts (which you should tailor to your needs): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{with \scrp{rmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item the hierarchy is \emph{not} \index{TDS}TDS-compliant; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN0}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.dtx} +% and \suffix{.ins} files; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN1}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.sty} files; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) and~(\ref{IN10}) +% must be installed in a separate directory, but must not be left out; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN8}) and~(\ref{IN9}) must be installed as on-line documentation; +% \item the directories created by the \scrp{rmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} to not waste disk space +% under your home directory. +% \end{enumerate} +% \item \textbf{with \scrp{tmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item the hierarchy is \index{TDS}TDS-compliant; +% \item each file appears only once in the hierarchy; +% \item the installation is much easier: you only need a \suffix{.zip} or a \suffix{.tar} (or \suffix{.tgz}) +% dump file\footnote{The \scrp{tmk} script creates the \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} file.} of the hierarchy +% to be deployed into the installed \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy; you should examine \emph{very carefully}\Virage{} (by +% comparison with your \index{TDS}TDS installation) and tailor the \scrp{tmk} script before using it; +% \item the directories created by the \scrp{tmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space +% under your home directory; +% \item the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) should not be installed; it is just a method to help making +% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant installation. +% \end{enumerate} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \item \textbf{with \scrp{pmk}:} +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item the \scrp{pmk} script performs the actions of \scrp{imk} (preparation of the basic files), \scrp{emk} and +% \scrp{fmk} (preparation of the english and french documentation), \scrp{xmk} (preparation of the +% examples of documents), \scrp{rmk} and \scrp{tmk} (repartition of files into classes and in +% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy);\par +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% \item the directories created by the \scrp{pmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and +% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory; +% ^^A \item the \scrp{pmk} script creates its directories under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and +% ^^A \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory. +% \par\end{RaggedRight} +% \item the \emph{same precautions}\Virage{} as for \scrp{tmk} are needed. +% \end{enumerate} +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Quelques remarques sur les scripts \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} et \scrp{pmk} (que vous devriez adapter à~vos besoins): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{rmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item la hiérarchie \emph{n'est pas} conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN0}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} +% et \suffix{.ins}; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN1}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les +% fichiers \suffix{.sty}; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) et~(\ref{IN10}) +% doivent être installés dans un répertoire distinct, mais ne doivent pas être omis; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN8}) et~(\ref{IN9}) doivent être installés comme documentation en ligne; +% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{rmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} pour de pas gâcher de +% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base. +% \end{enumerate} +% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{tmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item la hiérarchie est conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS; +% \item chaque fichier n'apparaît qu'une seule fois dans la hiérarchie; +% \item l'installation est plus facile: il vous suffit d'un fichier de sauvegarde \suffix{.zip} ou \suffix{.tar} +% (ou \suffix{.tgz}) de la hiérarchie\,\footnote{Le script \scrp{tmk} crée le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.} +% pour le déployer dans la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS installée; +% vous devriez examiner \emph{très soigneusement}\Virage{} (par +% comparaison avec votre installation de la \index{TDS}TDS) et adapter le script \scrp{tmk} avant de l'utiliser; +% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{tmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de +% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% \item le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) ne devrait pas être installé; c'est juste une méthode +% pour aider à~faire une installation conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS. +% \end{enumerate} +% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{pmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% ^^A \begin{RaggedRight} +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item le script \scrp{pmk} effectue les actions de \scrp{imk} (préparation des fichiers de base), \scrp{emk} et +% \scrp{fmk} (préparation de la documentation en anglais et en français), \scrp{xmk} (préparation des +% exemples de documents), \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (répartition des fichiers en classes et dans une +% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS); +% \item le script \scrp{pmk} crée ses répertoires sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} et +% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% \item les \emph{mêmes précautions}\Virage{} que pour \scrp{tmk} sont nécessaires. +% \end{enumerate} +% ^^A \end{RaggedRight} +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \def\TDSPH{\vphantom{\'TDSj}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption{A TDS-compliant hierarchy for the \upack{minitoc} files}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS} +% \def\tdstitle{TDS~Root~Directory\TDSPH} +% \or\relax +% \caption{Une hiérarchie conforme à~la TDS pour les fichiers de \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS} +% \def\tdstitle{Répertoire~racine~TDS\TDSPH} +% \fi +% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{\large\textbf{\tdstitle}}\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c|}{\texttt{bibtex/}}&\texttt{doc/}&\texttt{makeindex/}&\texttt{scripts/}&\texttt{source/}&\texttt{tex/}\\ +% \cmidrule(r){1-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7} +% \texttt{bib/}&\texttt{bst/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{latex/}\\ +% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7} +% \texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\textbf{(D)}&\textbf{(E)}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}\\ +% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}% +% \textbf{(A)}&\textbf{(B)}&\textbf{(C)}&\multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(F)}&\textbf{(G)}\\ +% ^^A \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}% +% \cmidrule{3-4}% +% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\texttt{examples/}&\texttt{images/}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\ +% \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}% +% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(H)}&\textbf{(I)}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\ +% \morecmidrules\cmidrule[\heavyrulewidth]{1-7} +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{% +% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize +% \raggedright +% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt} +% \begin{multicols}{2} %^^A \raggedcolumns\setcounter{unbalance}{5} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=2em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt +% \begin{description} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=1em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\textbf{(H)}} +% \parindent=0pt +% \def\sepitem{\vspace*{-1.5\baselineskip}\item[]\null\hspace*{-2em}\hrulefill\pagebreak[1]} +% \item[(A)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, \xfile{minitoc.bib}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(B)\hfill\null]~\unskip\isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(C)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{INSTALL}, +% \xfile{README}, +% \xfile{TODO}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}, +% \xfile{minitoc.bug}, +% \xfile{minitoc.l}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, +% \xfile{minitoc.pdf}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \xfile{minitoc.sum}, +% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, +% \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, +% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(D)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(E)\hfill\null]~\unskip\scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, +% \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(F)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.ins}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(G)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty}, +% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld}, \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(H)\hfill\null]~\unskip\exam{mtc-2c.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(I)\hfill\null] +% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax +% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \or\relax +% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \fi} +% \end{description} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \smash{% +% \ixfile{acadian.mld}% +% \ixfile{acadien.mld}% +% \ixfile{afrikaan.mld}% +% \ixfile{afrikaans.mld}% +% \ixfile{albanian.mld}% +% \ixfile{american.mld}% +% \ixfile{arabic.mld}% +% \ixfile{arabi.mld}% +% \ixfile{arab.mld}% +% \ixfile{arab2.mld}% +% \ixfile{armenian.mld}% +% \ixfile{australian.mld}% +% \ixfile{austrian.mld}% +% \ixfile{bahasai.mld}% +% \ixfile{bahasa.mld}% +% \ixfile{bahasam.mld}% +% \ixfile{bangla.mld}% +% \ixfile{basque.mld}% +% \ixfile{bengali.mld}% +% \ixfile{bicig.mld}% +% \ixfile{bicig2.mld}% +% \ixfile{bicig3.mld}% +% \ixfile{bithe.mld}% +% \ixfile{brazilian.mld}% +% \ixfile{brazil.mld}% +% \ixfile{breton.mld}% +% \ixfile{british.mld}% +% \ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}% +% \ixfile{bulgarian.mld}% +% \ixfile{buryat.mld}% +% \ixfile{buryat2.mld}% +% \ixfile{canadian.mld}% +% \ixfile{canadien.mld}% +% \ixfile{castillan.mld}% +% \ixfile{castillian.mld}% +% \ixfile{catalan.mld}% +% \ixmldo{chinese1}% +% \ixmldo{chinese2}% +% \ixfile{croatian.mld}% +% \ixfile{czech.mld}% +% \ixfile{danish.mld}% +% \ixfile{devanagari.mld}% +% \ixfile{dutch.mld}% +% \ixfile{english.mld}% +% \ixfile{english1.mld}% +% \ixfile{english2.mld}% +% \ixfile{esperant.mld}% +% \ixfile{esperanto.mld}% +% \ixfile{estonian.mld}% +% \ixfile{ethiopia.mld}% +% \ixfile{ethiopian.mld}% +% \ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}% +% \ixmldo{farsi1}% +% \ixmldo{farsi2}% +% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}% +% \ixfile{finnish.mld}% +% \ixfile{finnish2.mld}% +% \ixfile{francais.mld}% +% \ixfile{french.mld}% +% \ixfile{french1.mld}% +% \ixfile{french2.mld}% +% \ixfile{frenchb.mld}% +% \ixfile{frenchle.mld}% +% \ixfile{frenchpro.mld}% +% \ixfile{galician.mld}% +% \ixfile{german.mld}% +% \ixfile{germanb.mld}% +% \ixfile{germanb2.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek-mono.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}% +% \ixfile{guarani.mld}% +% \ixmldo{hangul1}% +% \ixmldo{hangul2}% +% \ixmldo{hangul3}% +% \ixmldo{hangul4}% +% \ixmldo{hangul-u8}% +% \ixmldo{hanja1}% +% \ixmldo{hanja2}% +% \ixmldo{hanja-u8}% +% \ixfile{hebrew.mld}% +% \ixfile{hebrew2.mld}% +% \ixfile{hindi.mld}% +% \ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}% +% \ixfile{hungarian.mld}% +% \ixfile{icelandic.mld}% +% \ixfile{indonesian.mld}% +% \ixfile{indon.mld}% +% \ixfile{interlingua.mld}% +% \ixfile{irish.mld}% +% \ixfile{italian.mld}% +% \ixfile{italian2.mld}% +% \ixmldo{japanese}% +% \ixmldo{japanese2}% +% \ixmldo{japanese3}% +% \ixmldo{japanese4}% +% \ixmldo{japanese5}% +% \ixmldo{japanese6}% +% \ixfile{kannada.mld}% +% \ixfile{khalkha.mld}% +% \ixfile{latin.mld}% +% \ixfile{latin2.mld}% +% \ixfile{latinc.mld}% +% \ixfile{latinc2.mld}% +% \ixfile{latvian.mld}% +% \ixfile{latvian2.mld}% +% \ixfile{letton.mld}% +% \ixfile{letton2.mld}% +% \ixfile{lithuanian.mld}% +% \ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}% +% \ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{lsorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{magyar.mld}% +% \ixfile{magyar2.mld}% +% \ixfile{magyar3.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}% +% \ixmldo{malayalam-omega}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}% +% \ixfile{malay.mld}% +% \ixfile{manju.mld}% +% \ixfile{mexican.mld}% +% \ixfile{meyalu.mld}% +% \ixfile{mongol.mld}% +% \ixfile{mongolb.mld}% +% \ixfile{mongolian.mld}% +% \ixfile{naustrian.mld}% +% \ixfile{newzealand.mld}% +% \ixfile{ngermanb.mld}% +% \ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}% +% \ixfile{ngerman.mld}% +% \ixfile{norsk.mld}% +% \ixfile{norsk2.mld}% +% \ixfile{nynorsk.mld}% +% \ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}% +% \ixfile{occitan.mld}% +% \ixfile{occitan2.mld}% +% \ixfile{polish.mld}% +% \ixfile{polish2.mld}% +% \ixfile{polski.mld}% +% \ixfile{portuges.mld}% +% \ixfile{portuguese.mld}% +% \ixfile{romanian.mld}% +% \ixfile{romanian2.mld}% +% \ixfile{romanian3.mld}% +% \ixfile{russian.mld}% +% \ixfile{russian2m.mld}% +% \ixfile{russian2o.mld}% +% \ixfile{russianb.mld}% +% \ixmldo{russian-cca1}% +% \ixmldo{russian-cca}% +% \ixfile{russianc.mld}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lh}% +% \ixfile{samin.mld}% +% \ixfile{scottish.mld}% +% \ixfile{serbianc.mld}% +% \ixfile{serbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{slovak.mld}% +% \ixfile{slovene.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish2.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish3.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish4.mld}% +% \ixfile{swahili.mld}% +% \ixfile{swedish.mld}% +% \ixfile{swedish2.mld}% +% \ixmldo{thai}% +% \ixfile{turkish.mld}% +% \ixfile{uighur.mld}% +% \ixfile{uighur2.mld}% +% \ixfile{uighur3.mld}% +% \ixfile{UKenglish.mld}% +% \ixfile{ukraineb.mld}% +% \ixfile{ukrainian.mld}% +% \ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{USenglish.mld}% +% \ixfile{usorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{vietnamese.mld}% +% \ixfile{vietnam.mld}% +% \ixfile{welsh.mld}% +% \ixfile{xalx.mld}% +% \ixfile{xalx2.mld}% +% \ixfile{xalx3.mld}% +% }% +% \end{table} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contains a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of the +% \upack{minitoc} package. It has been prepared by the \scrp{pmk} or \scrp{tmk} scripts. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contient une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS de tous les +% fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il a été préparé par l'un des scripts \scrp{pmk} ou \scrp{tmk}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and hence \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} are (not so trivial) examples of using \upack{minitoc} +% with \pack{hyperref}. They show how the combinaison of these two packages may be useful. +% \or\relax +% Notez que \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et donc \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sont des exemples (non triviaux) de l'utilisation de +% \upack{minitoc} avec \pack{hyperref}. Ils montrent combien la combinaison de ces deux paquetages peut être +% utile. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt +% \minitoc +% \egroup +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter summarizes the evolution of the \upack{minitoc} package, year by year. A more detailed history is +% available in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. Many minor changes are skipped here. +% +% In fact, this chapter is for the average user of the package, who wants to have an overview ot its evolution; +% the chapter ``Changes History'' is more oriented towards peoples interested in the code of the package and the +% problems encountered during its development. +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre résume l'évolution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, année par année. Un historique plus détaillé est +% disponible dans «~Historique des modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. De nombreuses modifications mineures ne +% sont pas citées ici. +% +% En fait, le présent chapitre s'adresse à~l'utilisateur normal du paquetage, qui voudrait avoir une idée générale +% de son évolution; le chapitre «~Historique des modifications~» s'adresse par contre aux personnes qui seraient +% intéressées par le code du paquetage et les problèmes rencontrés lors de son développement. +% \fi +% +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The origins} +% The \upack{minitoc} package was initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} in~1990 and~1991, with major contributions +% by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. But \upack{minitoc} suffered of a major weakness: when the number of chapters +% exceeded~9 or~10, you got a rather mysterious error message: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|No room for a new \write.| +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les origines} +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fut initialement écrit par \name{Nigel}{Ward}, en~1990 et~1991, avec des contributions +% majeures de \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. Mais \upack{minitoc} souffrait d'une faiblesse majeure: lorsque le nombre de chapitres +% dépassait~9 ou~10, vous obteniez un message d'erreur assez mystérieux: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|No room for a new \write.| +% \end{quote} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As I needed the basic fonctionnality of this package (printing mini-tables of contents for each chapter), I looked further +% in its code and finally found the culprit: \upack{minitoc} used a \com{newwrite} command to create a new file for the +% contents table of each chapter, allocating a new file descriptor each time. But the number of file descriptors for +% writing is limited to~16 under \LaTeX\ (in fact, by the underlying \TeX\ program itself). As some descriptors are already +% used by \LaTeX, writing more than 9~or~10~chapters was too much. Such errors are difficult to find when testing on +% too small documents: with few chapters, everything goes fine. But on a real document, with many chapters, the mysterious +% error happens. +% \or\relax +% Comme j'avais besoin de la fonctionnalité basique de ce paquetage (imprimer une mini-table des matières pour chaque +% chapitre), j'ai regardé de plus près son code et finalement trouvé le maillon faible: \upack{minitoc} utilisait +% une commande \com{newwrite} pour créer un nouveau fichier pour la table de manières de chaque chapitre, +% en allouant un nouveau +% descripteur de fichier chaque fois. Mais le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers en écriture est limité à~16 sous +% \LaTeX\ (en fait, par le programme \TeX\ sous-jacent lui-même). Comme quelques descripteurs sont déjà utilisés par +% \LaTeX, écrire plus de 9~ou~10~chapitres allait trop loin. De telles erreurs sont difficiles à~trouver lors de tests +% sur de trop petits documents: avec peu de chapitres, tout se passe bien. Mais sur un document réel, avec de nombreux +% chapitres, l'erreur mystérieuse survient. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{New design in~1993} +% So I~decided (June~1993, when I took the maintenance of the package) to change the allocation method to always +% use the same file descriptor for all the +% mini-table of contents files. Some major improvements happened in 1993: the addition of the \pack{mtcoff} +% (\pack{minitocoff} at this time) +% package and a rewrite of \upack{minitoc} to extract the data from the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file, with a +% selection mechanism. +% Then a first solution for the short extension problem was added (still manual). An elementary system for the fonts +% in the mini-tables was added. In December 1993, the minilofs and minilots were added. +% \or\relax +% \section{Nouvelle conception en~1993} +% Donc je décidai (en juin~1993, lorsque je repris le support du paquetage) de changer la méthode d'allocation +% pour toujours utiliser le même descripteur de fichier pour tous les fichiers des mini-tables des matières. +% Quelques améliorations majeures furent faites en 1993: l'addition du paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (\pack{minitocoff} +% à~cette époque) et une ré-écriture +% de \upack{minitoc} pour extraire les données depuis le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, avec un mécanisme de +% sélection. Puis une première solution +% pour le problème des suffixes courts fut ajoutée (encore manuelle). Un système élémentaire pour les fontes dans +% les mini-tables fut ajouté. En décembre~1993, les minilofs et minilots furent ajoutées. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1994} +% The first improvements in 1994 were about the formating of the mini-tables: spacing was improved and the position +% of the title became ajustable (with the optional parameter of \com{minitoc} or \com{dominitoc}). But a major +% addition was done: part-level mini-tables (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) and, for articles, section-level +% mini-tables (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots). +% +% With the emergence of \LaTeXe, replacing the ageing \LaTeX2.09, some work was necessary to support the +% compatibility with this new version. This was not easy, but \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} and \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} gave +% me many helpful hints. +% +% Another major addition is the language option feature, with the concept of the \emph{minitoc language definition +% file} (or \suffix{.mld} file), coming from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, +% by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}. +% But at this time, these files were still named as \suffix{.sty} files. +% +% An important simplification is introduced by the notion of ``absolute numbering'', with avoids many problems when the +% chapters are not numbered the standard way (consecutively, starting from~1, with arabic digits). +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1994} +% Les premières améliorations en 1994 concernaient la mise en forme des mini-tables: l'espacement fut ajusté et la +% position du titre devient adaptable (avec le paramètre optionnel de \com{minitoc} ou \com{dominitoc}). Mais +% une addition majeure fut faite: les mini-tables au niveau partie (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) et, pour les articles, +% les mini-tables au niveau section (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots). +% +% Avec l'émergence de \LaTeXe, remplaçant \LaTeX2.09 vieillissant, un certain travail était nécessaire pour +% supporter la compatibilité avec la nouvelle version. Ce ne fut pas facile, mais \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} et +% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} m'apportèrent bien des conseils utiles. +% +% Une autre addition majeure est le système des options de langue, avec le concept de fichier minitoc de définition de +% langue (\emph{minitoc language definition file} ou fichier \suffix{.mld}), provenant du paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}. +% Mais à~cette époque, ces fichiers étaient encore nommés comme des fichiers \suffix{.sty}. +% +% Une simplification importante est introduite par la notion de «~numérotation absolue~», qui évite de nombreux +% problèmes lorsque les chapitres ne sont pas numérotés de manière standard (consécutivement, en commençant à~1, avec +% des chiffres arabes). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{No developments in~1995} +% Sorry, I was busy with an other project. +% \or\relax +% \section{Pas de développements en~1995} +% Désolé, j'étais très occupé par un autre projet. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1996} +% The very annoying problem with the starred sectionning commands received some (rather primitive) solutions, but it +% is very complex, so manual interventions are often required. +% +% The names of the minitoc language definition files take now the extension \suffix{.mld}, more specific, and english +% is the default language. Some new languages are added. +% +% The work on the starred sectionning commands continues. +% +% The \pack{minitocoff} companion package is renamed \pack{mtcoff} to keep its name short. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1996} +% Le très gênant problème avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées a reçu quelques solutions (assez primitives), +% mais il est très complexe, donc des interventions manuelles sont souvent nécessaires. +% +% Les noms des fichiers minitoc de définition de langue prennent maintenant le suffixe \suffix{.mld}, +% plus spécifique, et l'anglais (\loptd{english}) est la langue par défaut. Quelques nouvelles langues sont +% ajoutées (ceci continue autant que possible). +% +% Le travail sur les commandes de sectionnement étoilées continue. +% +% Le paquetage compagnon \pack{minitocoff} est renommé \pack{mtcoff} pour que son nom reste court. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1997} +% The problem of short extensions for files names under some operating systems is addressed via the +% new \opt{shortext} package option and by the new autoconfiguration feature. +% +% For the starred sectionning commands, the \com{addstarredchapter} command is added (with analog commands for starred +% parts and sections). +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1997} +% Le problème des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers sous certains systèmes d'exploitation est résolu via la +% nouvelle option de paquetage \opt{shortext} et le nouveau système d'autoconfiguration. +% +% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées, la commande \com{addstarredchapter} est ajoutée (avec des +% commandes analogues pour les parties et sections étoilées). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1998} +% The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are added to improve the line spacing in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1998} +% Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont ajoutées pour changer l'interlignage dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1999} +% The \optd{dotted} and \opt{undotted} package options are added to add or suppress some lines of dots +% (leaders) in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1999} +% Les options de paquetage \optd{dotted} et \opt{undotted} sont ajoutées pour activer ou inhiber certaines lignes de +% points (points de conduite) dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2000} +% A major addition is the compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}, and I~ought to thank +% loudly \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}. +% +% Some corrections about the starred sectionning commands are added by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}. +% +% The mini-tables features (\com{beforeparttoc} and co.) commands are added. +% +% Some adjustment commands, like \com{mtcaddchapter}, are added, again about the problem with the starred +% sectionning commands. +% +% The\imess{I0046} compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} is documented. +% +% Aliases for some languages are added. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2000} +% Un ajout majeur est la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, et je dois +% remercier chaleureusement \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et +% \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}. +% +% Quelques corrections concernant les commandes de sectionnement étoilées ont été apportées par \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}. +% +% Les commandes relatives aux dispositifs pour les (\com{beforeparttoc} et co.) ont été ajoutées. +% +% Quelques commandes d'adjustement, telles que \com{mtcaddchapter}, sont ajoutées, encore pour le problème des +% commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% +% La\imess{I0046} compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} est documentée. +% +% Des alias pour certaines langues sont ajoutés. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2001} +% Added the \optd{checkfiles} and \opt{nocheckfiles} package options, to avoid the insertion of (ugly) empty +% mini-tables. +% +% Added the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command to change more easily the language of the mini-tables titles. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2001} +% Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} et \opt{nocheckfiles}, pour éviter d'insérer des minitables +% vides (et laides). +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage} pour changer plus facilement la langue des titres des mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2002} +% Correction of an interaction between \com{tableofcontents} (creating a hidden \com{chapter*} or +% \com{section*} command) and the numbering of the mini-table files. +% +% Added the \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount} commands. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Développements en~2002} +% Correction d'une interaction entre \com{tableofcontents} (qui crée une commande \com{chapter*} ou +% \com{section*} cachée) et la numérotation des fichiers mini-tables. +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2003} +% Added the \opt{insection} package option (which was temporarily done by the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} +% package options) +% to deal with floats drifting out of their section. The \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} (by +% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) is used. +% +% The font commands are made compatible with the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Added compatibility with the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2003} +% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{insection} (qui était temporairement réalisée par les options +% de paquetage \opt{flsection} +% et \opt{flsectionb}) pour traiter les éléments flottants dérivant hors de leur section. Le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) est utilisé. +% +% Les commandes de fontes sont rendues compatibles avec la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2004} +% Added comments in the \suffix{.mld} files needing special fonts. Better documentation about languages. +% +% Added an explanation about making a local table of contents for an appendix, eventually masking it in the main +% table of contents. Compatibility\imess{I0042} with the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}. +% +% A major addition is the \optd{hints} package option, to detect some programming and compatibility problems. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2004} +% Amélioration de la documentation sur les langues. +% +% Ajout d'une explication sur la manière de faire une table des matières locale pour un appendice, éventuellement en +% la masquant dans la table des matières principale. Compatibilité\imess{I0042} avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}. +% +% Un ajout majeur est l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}, pour détecter certains problèmes de programmation et de +% compatibilité. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Developments in~2005} +% All messages are now written via the standard interface commands (\com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, and +% \com{PackageError}), so the \upack{minitoc} package is less verbose on the terminal. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Added the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands (from a suggestion by \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) to +% replace many font commands by only one command with a better user interface. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Comments about the \AmS\ classes (some ones are incompatible with \upack{minitoc}). +% +% Added the \com{mtcsetformat} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands, again to have a simpler user interface. +% +% Added various hints (\opt{insection} package option, order of minitoc basic commands, short extensions). +% +% Added the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} commands, again to have a simpler user interface. +% +% Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, to hide a group of entries in the main table of contents; added +% also the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% +% Added the \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands. +% +% Added the description of the installation of the package (a new chapter and the file \xfile{INSTALL}). +% +% Improved and added hints about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. +% +% Added the \com{mtcsetfeature} command (very complex). +% +% Added a hint about the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}. +% +% The \upack{minitoc} package is now written using the \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins} system. +% Some cleanup is done in the code. +% +% Added the \com{mtcfixglossary} command, like \com{mtcfixindex}. +% +% Some improvements are made to print the documentation. +% +% Some new hints are added (\pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package~\cite{sectsty}, empty mini-tables, obsolete commands). +% +% Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. Added the \com{mtcsetdepth} command. +% +% The \optd{hints} package option is now the default. +% +% Added a method for making a bilingual documentation in one file (the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file). This method could be used +% for more languages. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Added or improved some adjustement commands (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, \com{decrementptc}, etc.). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options, for the \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} document classes. +% +% Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files. +% +% Added the \com{mtcloadmlo} command to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. The +% extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}; such files contains characters not easily +% manipulated in a \suffix{.dtx} file. +% +% The history of changes is now displayed in a much simpler way (using a glossary was too cumbersome). +% +% Added the \optd{listfiles} package option, to create a list of the minitoc auxiliary files, which can be removed after +% the \LaTeX\ compilation of the document. It is the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. +% +% Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred +% sectionning commands. +% +% Added hints about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages +% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% +% A ``Jargon'' chapter is added. It will grow slowly. +% +% Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir} used together. +% +% Some bugs in the \verb|\mtcset...| commands are fixed. +% +% Added a hint about the \pack{varsects}\imess{W0038} package~\cite{varsects}. +% +% Added a hint on the number of mini-tables when short extensions are used. +% +% Added a chapter with all the (explained) messages. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Développements en~2005} +% Tous les messages sont désormais écrits via les commandes de l'interface standard (\com{PackageInfo}, +% \com{PackageWarning} et \com{PackageError}), donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est moins bavard sur le terminal. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} (d'après une suggestion de \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) +% pour remplacer de nombreuses commandes de fontes par une seule commande avec une meilleure interface avec +% l'utilisateur. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Commentaires sur les classes de l'\AmS\ (certaines sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}). +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetformat} et \com{mtcsettitle}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface avec +% l'utilisateur. +% +% Ajout de divers \emph{hints} (option de paquetage \opt{insection}, ordre des commandes minitoc basiques, suffixes +% courts). +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface +% avec l'utilisateur. +% +% Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, pour masquer un groupe d'entrées dans la table des matières +% principale; ajout aussi des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcsettitle}. +% +% Ajout d'une description de l'installation du paquetage (un nouveau chapitre et le fichier \xfile{INSTALL}). +% +% \emph{Hints} améliorés et ajoutés sur la cohérence des commandes \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature} (très complexe). +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}. +% +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est maintenant écrit en utilisant le système \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins}. Un peu de +% nettoyage a été fait dans le code. +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, analoque à~\com{mtcfixindex}. +% +% Quelques améliorations sont faites pour l'impression de la documentation. +% +% Ajout de quelques nouveaux \emph{hints} (paquetage\imess{I0043} \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, mini-tables vides, commandes +% obsolètes). +% +% Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-tables des figures/tableaux. Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}. +% +% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} est maintenant le choix par défaut. +% +% Ajout d'une méthode pour faire une documentation bilingue en un seul fichier (le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}). +% Cette méthode pourrait être utilisée pour plusieurs langues. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Ajout ou amélioration de quelques commandes d'ajustement (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, etc.). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}, pour les classes de document +% \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Ajout d'une correction (\emph{patch}) pour une version récente de la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Utilisation de \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} +% «~secondaires~». +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger un fichier +% \suffix{.mlo}. Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langage minitoc); de +% tels fichiers contiennent des caractères qui ne sont pas faciles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}. +% +% L'historique des modifications est maintenant imprimé d'une manière bien plus simple (utiliser un glossaire était +% trop pénible). +% +% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}, pour créer une liste des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc, qui +% peuvent être éliminés après la compilation \LaTeX\ du document. C'est le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% +% Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (et dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}) +% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% +% Ajout de \emph{hints} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et \pack{mcaption} +% (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% +% Un chapitre «~Jargon~» est ajouté. Il grossira lentement. +% +% Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir} utilisés ensemble. +% +% Quelques erreurs dans les commandes \verb|\mtcset...| sont corrigées. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le nombre de mini-tables lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. +% +% Ajout d'un chapitre avec tous les messages (expliqués). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Developments in~2006} +% Added the ``\texttt{*}'' keyword as first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} +% command, to get an action on all kinds of mini-tables. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Corrections in the \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary}, and \com{mtcfixindex} commands. +% +% In the PDF documentation, the panel of bookmarks shows initialy only the bookmarks for parts and chapters, but you +% can open them to show deeper entries. +% +% Added a comment about the initialization of fonts in the FAQ (point~34). It is still an open domain and I am +% working on it. +% +% Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter +% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% +% Added the ``Postface'' chapter. +% +% Added the \com{mtcprepare} command. +% +% Added an~\texttt{URL} field in the bibliography (the styles are modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst}). +% +% Added the \pack{mtcmess} package to add unique identifiers to the messages. +% +% Suppressed the PostScript documentation files from the distribution (no more accepted on CTAN archives), but the +% scripts still creates them. +% +% Corrections in the \opt{insection} package option. +% +% Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I). +% +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2006} +% Ajout du mot-clé «~\texttt{*}~» comme premier argument des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, +% pour avoir une action sur toutes les sortes de mini-tables. +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Corrections dans les commandes \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary} et \com{mtcfixindex}. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% Dans la documentation en PDF, le panneau des signets (panneau de gauche) ne montre initialement que les signets +% pour les parties et les chapitres, mais vous pouvez les ouvrir pour accéder aux entrées plus profondes. +% +% Ajout d'un commentaire sur l'initialisation des fontes dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (point~34). +% C'est encore un sujet ouvert et je travaille dessus. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, et d'une note dans le chapitre des questions +% fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% +% Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~». +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcprepare}. +% +% Ajout d'un champ \texttt{URL} dans la bibliographie (les styles ont été modifiés à~l'aide de l'outil +% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}). +% +% Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess} pour ajouter des identificateurs uniques aux messages. +% +% Suppression des fichiers de documentation en format PostScript dans la distribution (ils ne sont plus acceptés +% sur les archives CTAN), mais les scripts les créent encore. +% +% Corrections dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. +% +% Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2007} +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2007} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Removed the preparation of documentation in PostScript format. +% +% Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format to PostScript format. +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{raggedright} +% Added hints about the\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} +% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}, +% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}, +% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}, +% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}, +% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}, +% and +% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} packages. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Added FAQ~44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} formatting commands. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% Added the chapter~\ref{c+exdocs}, ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}. +% +% Added FAQ~45 and the \com{kernafterparttoc} and co. commands for the vertical space between a minitable and +% its bottom rule. +% +% Increased the text width and adjusted the format of the entries in the TOC in the documentation. +% +% Correction of the preamble in the generated files (spurious lines have been eliminated, at least). +% +% Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% +% The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% +% All example documents are renamed with names beginning with ``\uexam{mtc-}''. +% +% The ``\optd{listfiles}'' package option is active by default. +% +% Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands. +% +% Added \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% +% Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}. +% +% Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with +% \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. +% +% Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant structure for \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% +% Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of +% the package) to the distribution. +% +% Improving the index (entries for: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, option, +% language options). +% +% The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin. +% +% Indexing the environments and the files. +% +% Indexing the counters and depth counters. +% +% The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy. +% +% Indexing referenced commands (begin). +% +% Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% +% Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new T2 and X2 cyrillic encodings in \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example file. +% +% Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} (loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Improved the layout of the index. +% +% Indexing the names of authors. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-fko.tex} example file. +% +% Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index. +% +% Features in the index. +% +% Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file. +% +% Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file. +% +% Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin. +% +% Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin. +% +% Added internal hyperlinks for messages. +% +% Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table. +% +% Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file. +% +% Added flagging of macros in example files. +% +% Added a clickable table of all messages. +% +% Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% +% Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% +% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} +% package (incompatible). +% +% Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. +% +% Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions. +% +% Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class. +% +% Changed the color of hyperlinks. +% +% Revised the format of headers. +% +% Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Added \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% +% Added stuff (files) for maps of areas of some languages. +% +% Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}. +% +% Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% +% Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid +% erasing (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file). +% +% Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% +% The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part. +% +% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package. +% +% Complete indexing of the messages. +% +% Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to make increase the width of the pages of the bibliography. +% +% Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% +% Updated \xfile{czech.mld}. +% +% Removed \ucom{l@xsection}. +% +% Graphic files are indexed separately. +% +% Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy. +% +% Updated \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% +% Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld}, +% and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% +% Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% +% Suppressed parasite entries from the index. +% +% Added \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% +% Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% +% \or\relax +% Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript. +% +% Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript. +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Ajout de \emph{hints}\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} sur les paquetages +% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}, +% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}, +% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}, +% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}, +% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} +% et +% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes de mise en page \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} +% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% Ajout du chapitre~\ref{c+exdocs}, «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}. +% +% Ajout du point~45 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{kernafterparttoc} et analogues pour l'espacement vertical +% entre une minitable et son filet inférieur. +% +% Augmentation de la largeur du texte et ajustement du format des entrées dans la table des matières pour la +% documentation. +% +% Correction du préambule des fichiers engendrés (les lignes superflues ont été enfin éliminées). +% +% Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% +% Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% +% Tous les exemples de documents sont renommés avec des noms commençant par «~\uexam{mtc-}~». +% +% L'option de paquetage «~\optd{listfiles}~» est active par défaut. +% +% Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{japanese6.mld} et \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}. +% +% Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de +% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}. +% +% Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». +% +% Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et contenant tous +% les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution. +% +% Amélioration de l'index (entrées pour: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options, +% options de langue). +% +% Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge. +% +% Indexation des environnements et fichiers. +% +% Indexation des compteurs et compteurs de profondeur. +% +% Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée). +% +% Indexation des commandes référencées (début). +% +% Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% +% Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. +% +% Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} (charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Indexation des noms des auteurs. +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. +% +% Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index. +% +% Dispositifs dans l'index. +% +% Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~». +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% +% Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~». +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}. +% +% Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique. +% +% Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages. +% +% Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table. +% +% Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table. +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% +% Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples. +% +% Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages. +% +% Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le +% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible). +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. +% +% Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement. +% +% Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}. +% +% Changement de la couleur des hyperliens. +% +% Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer correctement \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Changement du format des en-têtes. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% +% Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) de régions où certaines langues sont parlées. +% +% Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}. +% +% Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% +% Remplacement du suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter +% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}). +% +% Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% +% Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~». +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} +% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}. +% +% Indexation complète des messages. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie. +% +% Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}. +% +% Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}. +% +% Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément. +% +% Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et +% \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% +% Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2008} +% Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}. +% +% Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% Added many maps about languages and dialects, etc. +% +% Better captions for maps. +% +% Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon. +% +% Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% +% The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% +% Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% Corrected an error of message number. +% +% Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16. +% +% Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references. +% +% Added flags for many countries. +% +% Added a figure about lusophonia. +% +% Added a figure about germanophonia. +% +% Added a figure about hispanophonia. +% +% Added a figure about italophonia. +% +% Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult (not trivial). +% +% Added figures about francophones countries. +% +% Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries. +% +% Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries. +% +% Added a figure about russian-speaking countries. +% +% Added a figure about english-speaking countries. +% +% Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}. +% +% Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% +% Added commands for polymorphic entries: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof}, and \com{mtcpolymlot}. +% +% Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries. +% +% Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts. +% +% Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% +% Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file +% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but +% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} +% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% +% Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options. +% +% ^^A MAJ-E +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2008} +% Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}. +% +% Ajout de nombreuses cartes pour les langues et les dialectes, etc. +% +% Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% Amélioration des légendes des cartes. +% +% Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon. +% +% Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% +% Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% +% Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message. +% +% Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16. +% +% Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes. +% +% Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation (pas trivial). +% +% Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais. +% +% Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}. +% +% Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% +% Ajout de commandes pour les entrées polymorphes: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof} et \com{mtcpolymlot}. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais. +% +% Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts. +% +% Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% +% Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux) +% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick} +% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier); +% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% +% Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}. +% +% ^^A MAJ-F +% \fi +% \par\end{RaggedRight} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \part{Implementation}\label{p+ID} +% \or\relax +% \part{Implantation}\label{p+ID} +% \fi +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% \let\macro\svmacro +% \let\endmacro\svendmacro +% \let\environment\svenvironment +% \let\endenvironment\svendenvironment +% \makeatletter +% \def\macro{\begingroup +% \catcode`\\12 +% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iftrue} +% \def\environment{\begingroup +% \catcode`\\12 +% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse} +% \let\endmacro \endtrivlist +% \let\endenvironment\endmacro +% \makeatother +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% \parttoc +% ^^A \partlof +% ^^A \partlot +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% \lneed{4} +% \minilof +% \mtcskip +% +% \lneed{6} +% \section{Introduction}\label{s+code+intro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This very long chapter presents the code of the \upack{minitoc} package and attempts to explain it. +% Some comments of the original source file\,\footnote{The source file of version~\#42. Version~\#43 includes the +% conversion of the package to \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx-.ins} format. +% Version~\#42 has not been distributed because of that.} +% are skipped, like the history, because they do not need further examination (they will be put in the change history). +% +% The code is split in sections to make the reading easier, and the sections are sometimes reordered to make the reading +% easier. +% +% Most of the \upack{minitoc} external commands have \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}, or one of the +% mini-table names (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) in their names. +% Most of the \upack{minitoc} internal commands +% have \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc}, or \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot@} in their names, or +% a similar convention. The few exceptions should be explicit enough to not conflict with other packages. +% \or\relax +% Ce très long chapitre présente le code du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et tente de l'expliquer. +% Certains commentaires du fichier source original\,\footnote{C'est-à-dire, celui de la version~\#42. La +% version~\#43 inclut la conversion du paquetage au format \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx/.ins}. +% La version~\#42 n'a pas été distribuée pour cette raison.} sont sautés, +% comme l'historique, car ils n'ont pas besoin d'être examinés davantage (ils seront mis dans l'historique des +% modifications). +% +% Le code est éclaté en sections pour faciliter la lecture, et ces sections sont parfois réordonnées, dans ce même +% but. +% +% La plupart des commandes externes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc} +% ou le nom de l'un des types de mini-tables (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) dans leurs noms. La plupart +% des commandes internes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc} ou \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, +% \texttt{sectlot@} dans leurs noms, ou suivent une convention similaire. Les quelques exceptions devraient être +% assez explicites pour ne pas entrer en conflit avec d'autres paquetages. +% \fi +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Identification code}\label{s+code+ident} +% \or\relax +% \section{Code d'identification}\label{s+code+ident} +% \fi +% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.375mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The code +% of \xfile{minitoc.sty} starts here: +% \or\relax +% Le code +% de \xfile{minitoc.sty} commence ici: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*minitoc> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat} +% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} +% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} code section identifies the package with its name, version number and date. +% A trace is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. This package will not work with \LaTeX2.09. +% \or\relax +% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} section de code identifie le paquetage par son nom, son numéro de version +% et sa date. Une trace est écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Ce paquetage ne fonctionnera pas avec \LaTeX2.09. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/02]% +\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}% + [2015/07/13 v61 Package minitoc] % message I0000 +\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +\mtcPackageInfo[I0001]{minitoc}% + {*** minitoc package, version 61 ***\@gobble} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{A file descriptor to write}\label{s+code+fd-write} +% \or\relax +% \section{Un descripteur de fichier pour écrire}\label{s+code+fd-write} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\newwrite} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A file descriptor is needed to write the files containing the mini-tables, it is \com{tf@mtc}. +% The \upack{minitoc} package uses only one file descriptor for writing. See section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}. +% \or\relax +% Un descripteur de fichier est nécessaire pour écrire les fichiers contenant les mini-tables, c'est \com{tf@mtc}. +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise un seul descripteur de fichier en écriture. Voir la +% section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newwrite\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Indentation and skip}\label{s+code+indent.skip} +% \or\relax +% \section{Indentation et saut}\label{s+code+indent.skip} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\addvspace} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the indentation \com{mtcindent} (both sides) of the mini-tables and the +% command \com{mtcskip} to make a vertical skip before a mini-table, its value is \com{mtcskipamount} +% (default: \com{bigskipamount}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons l'indentation \com{mtcindent} (des deux côtés) des mini-tables et la commande +% \com{mtcskip} pour faire un saut vertical avant une mini-table, sa valeur est \com{mtcskipamount} +% (défaut: \com{bigskipamount}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\mtcindent +\newskip\mtcskipamount +\setlength{\mtcskipamount}{\bigskipamount} +\def\mtcskip{{\parskip=\z@\addvspace{\mtcskipamount}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that \com{mtcskip} uses a local group to avoid the influence of \com{parskip}. +% \or\relax +% Notez que \com{mtcskip} utilise un groupe local pour éviter l'influence de \com{parskip}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the default values for the vertical gaps before and after titles part level mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les valeurs par défaut pour les sauts verticaux avant et après les titres des mini-tables au +% niveau partie. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@} +\def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule. +% The names of these macros is rather explicit. The values are empirical and can be changed via \com{renewcommand}. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets horizontaux inférieurs. +% Les noms de ces macros sont assez explicites. Les valeurs sont empiriques et peuvent être changées +% via \com{renewcommand}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\kernafterparttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\kernaftersecttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterminilof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}% + \def\kernafterminilot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\pfloffset} +% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sfloffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We defines horizontal offets by which the margins in the mini-tables are corrected (added to the right margin and +% substracted from the left margin). These are \emph{commands}, \emph{not} lengths\,\footnote{We avoid to +% allocate a precious length register.}, to be redefined by \com{renewcommand}. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les décalages horizontaux servant à~corriger les marges dans les mini-tables (ajout à~la marge +% gauche et retrait à~la marge droite). Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \emph{pas} des longueurs\,\footnote{Nous +% évitons d'allouer un précieux registre de longueur.}, à~redéfinir via \com{renewcommand}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\ptcoffset{0pt}% + \def\plfoffset{0pt}% + \def\pltoffset{0pt}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\stcoffset{0pt}% + \def\slfoffset{0pt}% + \def\sltoffset{0pt}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\mtcoffset{0pt}% + \def\mlfoffset{0pt}% + \def\mltoffset{0pt}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We defines flags which will be true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui seront vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux +% à~l'extérieur. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse% +\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse% +\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse% +\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse% +\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse% +\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse% +\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse% +\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse% +\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Tests and flags}\label{s+code+test-flags} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tests et indicateurs}\label{s+code+test-flags} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We need to declare some flags\,\footnote{Not so many years ago, some authors had a preference for using counters +% rather than flags, +% because a flag costs 3~control sequences (\ucom{iffoo}, \ucom{foofalse} and \ucom{footrue}), +% which use memory. But the number of count registers is limited to 256 in the native \TeX\ engine (much more with +% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, but still limited in number), while memory has become rather cheap today. +% And a code programmed with flags (\texttt{\ucom{iffoo} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) is easier to structure +% and debug than a code programmed with counters, \textsc{imho}.} (via \com{newif}) to detect +% the loading of some packages or classes and the availability of some commands (this will be used by the +% \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) or to allow the definition of some \upack{minitoc} commands). +% \or\relax +% Nous avons besoin de déclarer quelques indicateurs\,\footnote{Il n'y a pas tant d'années, certains auteurs +% préféraient utiliser des compteurs plutôt que des indicateurs, car un indicateur coûte 3~séquences de contrôle +% (\ucom{iftoto}, \ucom{totofalse} et \ucom{tototrue}), qui consomment de la mémoire. Mais le +% nombre de registres compteurs est limité à~256 dans le moteur \TeX\ natif (bien plus avec +% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, mais encore en nombre limité), tandis que le coût de la mémoire a beaucoup baissé +% aujourd'hui. Et un code programmé avec des indicateurs (\texttt{\ucom{iftoto} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) est +% plus facile à~structurer et à~mettre au point qu'un code programmé à~l'aide de compteurs, à~mon humble avis.} +% (via \com{newif}) pour détecter le chargement de certains paquetages ou classes et la disponibilité de certaines +% commandes (ceci sera utilisé par l'option \optd{hints} (voir la section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) ou +% pour autoriser la définition de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Flags for the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Indicateurs pour l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@giben@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But first, we define some flags for the \optd{hints} option: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@} is true if the \optd{hints} option is required (default). +% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} is set true if we detect that some sectionning commands have been +% altered since the loading of the document class. +% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} is set true if the \optd{hints} option detects something curious +% and writes messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. It will be used at the end of the document to signal that +% you should look for hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Mais tout d'abord, nous définissons quelques indicateurs pour l'option \optd{hints}: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@} est vrai si l'option \optd{hints} est demandée (défaut). +% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} est forcé à~vrai si nous détectons que certaines commandes de +% sectionnement ont été altérées depuis le chargement de la classe de document. +% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} est forcé à~vrai si l'option \optd{hints} détecte quelque +% chose de curieux et écrit des messages dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Il sera utilisé en fin de document +% pour signaler que vous devriez chercher des \emph{hints} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@hints@ \@mtc@hints@true +\newif\if@mtc@hints@w@ \@mtc@hints@w@false +\newif\if@mtc@hints@given@ \@mtc@hints@given@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Use of section-level mini-lists of floats} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Utilisation de mini-listes d'éléments flottants, au niveau \texorpdfstring{\mbox{section}}{section}} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will check if the commands \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} are used: +% \or\relax +% Nous testerons si les commandes \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} ont été utilisées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@sect@floats@ \@mtc@sect@floats@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} %% ^^A 25 +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Presence of some packages and classes} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Présence de certains paquetages et classes} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will check if the \pack{placeins} package is loaded, then if the \class{memoir} +% is loaded (and if it is a recent enough version), then if the \pack{sectsty} package is loaded +% (before or after \upack{minitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Nous testerons si le paquetage \pack{placeins} est chargé, puis si la classe +% \class{memoir} est chargée (et si c'est une version suffisamment récente), puis si le +% paquetage \pack{sectsty} est chargé (avant ou après \upack{minitoc}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ \@mtc@memoirLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@memoirnew@ \@mtc@memoirnew@false +\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We do the same for some caption-related packages: +% \else\relax +% Nous faisons de même pour quelques paquetages relatifs aux captions: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the \pack{varsects} package and other packages altering the sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Et pour le paquetage \pack{varsects} et +% d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And yet other packages altering the sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Et encore d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Flags for packages dealing with floats} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Indicateurs pour des paquetages traitant des flottants} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must warn about a limitation with the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons signaler une limitation avec les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@floatLoaded@ \@mtc@floatLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@ \@mtc@floatrowLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Insertion of empty mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Insertion de mini-tables vides} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will check if you have attempted to insert some empty mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous testerons si vous avez tenté d'insérer des mini-tables vides: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ \@mtc@empty@parttoc@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ \@mtc@empty@partlof@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ \@mtc@empty@partlot@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ \@mtc@empty@minitoc@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ \@mtc@empty@minilof@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ \@mtc@empty@minilot@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ \@mtc@empty@secttoc@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ \@mtc@empty@sectlof@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ \@mtc@empty@sectlot@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Presence or absence of some sectionning commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Présence ou absence de certaines commandes de sectionnement} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define and set flags about the presence of the sectionning commands (in fact, the counters associated with +% these commands). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant la présence des commandes de sectionnement (en fait, +% celle des compteurs associés à~ces commandes). +% +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{part} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{part}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@part@def@ \@mtc@part@def@false + \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@def@false}{\@mtc@part@def@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{chapter} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@chapter@def@ \@mtc@chapter@def@false + \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@def@false}{\@mtc@chapter@def@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{section} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{section}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@section@def@ \@mtc@section@def@false + \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@def@false}{\@mtc@section@def@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define and set flags about the absence of the sectionning commands. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant l'absence des commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@undef@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{part} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{part}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@part@undef@ \@mtc@part@undef@true + \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@undef@true}{\@mtc@part@undef@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{chapter} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \@mtc@chapter@undef@true + \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@true}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@undef@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{section} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{section}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@section@undef@ \@mtc@section@undef@true + \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@undef@true}{\@mtc@section@undef@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Flags to check if some commands are used} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Indicateurs pour tester si certaines commandes ont été utilisées} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a pair of flags for each mini-table type: one for the command itself and one for the preparation +% command (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). These flags will be used by the \optd{hints} package option +% (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons une paire d'indicateurs pour chaque type de mini-table: un pour la commande elle-même et un +% pour la commande de préparation (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). Ces indicateurs seront utilisés par l'option de +% paquetage \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the part level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@parttoc@used@ \global\@parttoc@used@false +\newif\if@partlof@used@ \global\@partlof@used@false +\newif\if@partlot@used@ \global\@partlot@used@false +\newif\if@doparttoc@used@ \global\@doparttoc@used@false +\newif\if@dopartlof@used@ \global\@dopartlof@used@false +\newif\if@dopartlot@used@ \global\@dopartlot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the chapter level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@minitoc@used@ \global\@minitoc@used@false +\newif\if@minilof@used@ \global\@minilof@used@false +\newif\if@minilot@used@ \global\@minilot@used@false +\newif\if@dominitoc@used@ \global\@dominitoc@used@false +\newif\if@dominilof@used@ \global\@dominilof@used@false +\newif\if@dominilot@used@ \global\@dominilot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the section level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@secttoc@used@ \global\@secttoc@used@false +\newif\if@sectlof@used@ \global\@sectlof@used@false +\newif\if@sectlot@used@ \global\@sectlot@used@false +\newif\if@dosecttoc@used@ \global\@dosecttoc@used@false +\newif\if@dosectlof@used@ \global\@dosectlof@used@false +\newif\if@dosectlot@used@ \global\@dosectlot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We also detect the use of some obsolete commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous détectons aussi l'utilisation de certaines commandes obsolètes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@firstpartis@used@ \global\@firstpartis@used@false +\newif\if@firstchapteris@used@ \global\@firstchapteris@used@false +\newif\if@firstsectionis@used@ \global\@firstsectionis@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the document has exactly 2~parts}\label{ss+2parts} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le document a exactement 2~parties}\label{ss+2parts} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In french, the ordinal adjective is ``deuxième'' if the second object is not the last object, but ``second'' +% (masculine) or ``seconde'' (feminine) when it is also the last one (see~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). So we define a specific flag: +% \or\relax +% En français, l'adjectif ordinal est \og deuxième \fg si le deuxième objet n'est pas le dernier objet, mais +% \og second \fg (masculin) ou \og seconde \fg (féminin) si c'est le dernier (voir~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). +% Donc nous définissons un indicateur +% spécifique: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% At the beginning of the document, we test this flag and make it global: +% \or\relax +% Au début du document, nous testons cet indicateur et le rendons global: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifmtcsecondpart + \global\mtcsecondparttrue + \else + \global\mtcsecondpartfalse + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \begin{macro}{\@mainaux} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% At the end of the document, we set and memorize the value of the flag in the \suffix{.aux} file: +% \or\relax +% À~la fin du document, nous établissons et mémorisons la valeur de l'indicateur dans le fichier \suffix{.aux}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{% +\ifnum\value{part}=2\relax + \mtcsecondparttrue +\else + \mtcsecondpartfalse +\fi +\if@filesw + \ifmtcsecondpart + \immediate\write\@mainaux + {\string\global\string\mtcsecondparttrue}% + \else + \immediate\write\@mainaux + {\string\global\string\mtcsecondpartfalse}% + \fi +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we need two \LaTeX\ runs to get a correct result. The \xfile{french2.mld} language definition file +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) uses this trick to form the titles of part level mini-tables. +% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \or\relax +% Il nous faut donc deux exécutions de \LaTeX\ pour obtenir un résultat correct. Le fichier de définition de +% langue \xfile{french2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) utilise cette astuce pour former les titres +% des mini-tables au niveau partie. +% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \section{Préparation pour l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We declare a flag for the presence of this option and the new internal ``hook'' command +% (redefinable command) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}, +% used by this option (this has been requested by \name{Donald}{Arseneau} for his \pack{notoccite} +% package~\cite{notoccite}). See section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons un indicateur pour la présence de cette option et la nouvelle commande interne «~\emph{hook}~» +% (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} utilisée par cette option +% (ceci a été demandé par \name{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage +% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}). Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@notoccite@ \@mtc@notoccite@false +\@ifundefined{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}% + {\let\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile\relax}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{tight} and \uopt{k-tight} options}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight} +% \or\relax +% \section{Préparation pour les options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{k-tight}}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We just declare a flag for each of these options; they are set false by default (\optd{loose} and +% \optd{k-loose} options): +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons simplement un indicateur pour chacune de ces options; ils sont faux par défaut (options \optd{loose} +% et \optd{k-loose}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse +\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Preparation to work with \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref} +% \or\relax +% \section{Préparation pour travailler avec \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{I0005} code prepares the interface with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}. +% A flag is defined, then this preparation is performed in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block if this package is loaded. +% This action defines some commands for the \pack{hyperref} package. +% \or\relax +% Ce\imess{I0005} code prépare l'interface avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}. +% Un indicateur est défini, puis cette préparation est effectuée dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} si ce +% paquetage est chargé. Cette action définit quelques commandes pour le paquetage \pack{hyperref}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcPackageInfo[I0005]{minitoc}{compatible with hyperref\@gobble} +\newif\if@mtc@hyper@used@ \global\@mtc@hyper@used@false +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% + \global\@mtc@hyper@used@true + \def\toclevel@xpart{1000}% + \def\toclevel@xchapter{1000}% + \def\toclevel@xsect{1000}% + \let\toclevel@starpart\toclevel@part + \let\toclevel@starchapter\toclevel@chapter + \let\toclevel@starsection\toclevel@section + \let\toclevel@starsubsection\toclevel@subsection + \let\toclevel@starsubsubsection\toclevel@subsubsection + \let\toclevel@starparagraph\toclevel@paragraph + \let\toclevel@starsubparagraph\toclevel@subparagraph + }{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{8} +% \section{Checking the presence of some packages} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tester la présence de certains paquetages} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sectsty} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sectsty} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{varsects} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{varsects} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{varsects}%{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@true}{} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{varsects}{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{fncychap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{fncychap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{hangcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{hangcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{quotchap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{quotchap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{romannum} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{romannum} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sfheaders} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sfheaders} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{alnumsec} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{alnumsec} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{captcont} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{captcont} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h2}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption2} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption2} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{ccaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{ccaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{mcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{mcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{mcaption} package~\cite{mcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{float} package is loaded}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{float} est chargé}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+float.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{float}{\@mtc@floatLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{floatrow} package is loaded}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{floatrow} est chargé}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{floatrow}{\@mtc@floatrowLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{trivfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{trivfloat} est chargé}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{trivfloat}{\@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{rotfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{rotfloat} est chargé}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{rotfloat}{\@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Is the \uclass{memoir} class loaded?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir} +% \or\relax +% \section{La classe \uclass{memoir} est-elle chargée?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} +% test if the \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} class is loaded. +% This class needs some compatibility adjustments or may be \emph{incompatible} if too recent. +% In the later case, a patch +% is inserted (see chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}). This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version +% of \xfile{memoir.cls}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} testons si la +% classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée. +% Cette classe nécessite certains ajustements pour la compatibilité ou peut être \emph{incompatible} si +% elle est trop récente. +% Dans ce dernier cas, une correction est insérée (voir le chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}). Cette correction n'est +% plus nécessaire après la version de \xfile{memoir.cls} datée 2005/09/25. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ \@mtcpatchmemoir@false +\@ifclassloaded{memoir}{\@mtc@memoirLoaded@true\relax% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0030]{minitoc}% + {the memoir class is loaded: + \MessageBreak + compatibility attempted\@gobble}}% + {\@mtc@memoirLoaded@false} +\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ + \@ifundefined{@m@mchapter}% + {\@mtc@memoirnew@false\mtcPackageInfo[I0020]{minitoc}% + {old version of the memoir class\@gobble}} + {\@mtc@memoirnew@true\mtcPackageInfo[I0027]{minitoc}% + {recent version of the memoir class\@gobble} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0032]{minitoc}% + {This version of the memoir class uses + \MessageBreak + a version of \string\chapter\space which is + \MessageBreak + incompatible with the minitoc package. + \MessageBreak + We try to patch\@gobble}% + \@mtcpatchmemoir@true} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\imess{E0028} now the patch: +% \or\relax +% Et\imess{E0028} voici cette correction: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ +\IfFileExists{mtcpatchmem.sty}{% + \@ifclasslater{memoir}{2005/09/25}{}{\RequirePackage{mtcpatchmem}}}{% + \mtcPackageError[E0028]{minitoc}% + {Unable to patch the memoir class}% + {So it remains incompatible. Sorry.}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Testing the emptiness of a file}\label{s+code+emptiness} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tester la vacuité d'un fichier}\label{s+code+emptiness} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@xifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhilePreCondition} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileCondition} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileBody} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileNext} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some macros for testing if an argument of a macro is empty (taken from the package +% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} and +% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, and from \uxfile{while.tip}, +% by \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). The group is necessary to keep local the catcode +% change of ``Q'', hence a \com{gdef} is needed for \com{mtc@ifmtarg}. +% \or\relax +% Quelques macros pour tester si un argument d'une macro est vide (elles sont tirées du paquetage +% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} et +% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, et de \uxfile{while.tip}, +% de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). Le groupe est nécessaire pour garder local le +% changement de «~\emph{catcode}~» de «~Q~», il faut donc utiliser un \com{gdef} pour définir \com{mtc@ifmtarg}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup +\catcode`\Q=3 +\long\gdef\mtc@ifmtarg#1{% +\mtc@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} +\long\gdef\mtc@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} +\endgroup +\let\mtc@EndWhile = \fi +\def\mtc@While #1#2#3\mtc@EndWhile{% + \def\mtc@WhilePreCondition{#1}% + \def\mtc@WhileCondition{#2}% + \def\mtc@WhileBody{#3}% + \mtc@@While +} +\def\mtc@@While{% + \mtc@WhilePreCondition + \mtc@WhileCondition + \def\mtc@WhileNext{% + \mtc@WhileBody + \mtc@@While + }% + \else + \def\mtc@WhileNext{}% + \fi + \mtc@WhileNext +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@LI} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Body} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Rline} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some macros to test if a file is empty or not: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{file}\verb|}| returns \com{@mtc@FEtrue} if the file +% is empty, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} if the is file not empty. An inexistent file is empty. A file full of white +% space (space, tabulation, newline) is empty. Comments are empty. +% \or\relax +% Quelques macros pour tester si un fichier est vide ou non: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{fichier}\verb|}| +% rend \com{@mtc@FEtrue} si le fichier est vide, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} si le fichier n'est pas vide. +% Un fichier inexistant est vide. Un +% fichier rempli d'espace blanc (espace, tabulation, saut de ligne) est vide. Les commentaires sont vides. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note:} on a big empty file, the \com{mtc@While} loop may be +% time consuming, but not an eternity (33\,s for +% $10^6$~lines on my computer), and the first non-empty line stops the loop. +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is used as scratch file. Its contents is erased after use. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note:} sur un gros fichier vide, la boucle \com{mtc@While} peut prendre du temps, mais pas une +% éternité (33\,s pour $10^6$~lignes avec mon ordinateur), et la première ligne non vide arrête la boucle. +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est utilisé comme fichier de travail. Son contenu est effacé après usage. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@LI\@mtc@LItrue +\newif\if@mtc@FE\@mtc@FEtrue +\newif\if@mtc@checkfiles\@mtc@checkfilestrue +\def\mtc@Body{\immediate\read\@inputcheck to \mtc@Rline\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\@mtc@LIfalse\fi + \expandafter\ifx\mtc@Rline\par\relax + \def\mtc@Rline{} + \else + \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\global\@mtc@LIfalse\fi + \mtc@ifmtarg{\mtc@Rline}{\relax}{\@mtc@FEfalse\@mtc@LIfalse} + \fi} +\def\mtc@CkFile#1{% + \@mtc@LItrue\@mtc@FEtrue + \if@mtc@checkfiles + \IfFileExists{#1}{% + \immediate\openin\@inputcheck #1\relax + \mtc@While{}{\if@mtc@LI\relax}{\mtc@Body}\mtc@EndWhile}% + {\@mtc@FEtrue}% + \else + \@mtc@FEfalse% + \fi} +\closein\@inputcheck\relax +\def\mtc@CkStr#1{% + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc + \immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}% + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.mtc}% + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Internal macros to decrement \upack{minitoc} counters}\label{s+code+d.count} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros internes pour décrémenter les compteurs de \upack{minitoc}}\label{s+code+d.count} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackpart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksection} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is sometimes necessary to decrement a \upack{minitoc} counter (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} or \cnt{stc}) by one. +% These macros are: +% \or\relax +% Il est parfois nécessaire de décrémenter un compteur de \upack{minitoc} (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} ou \cnt{stc}) +% de un. Ces macros sont: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@onebackpart{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}} +\def\mtc@onebackchap{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}} +\def\mtc@onebacksect{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svspart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the \com{part} command is not defined (by the document class, usually), +% we cannot patch it and a warning is +% displayed\,\footnote{Document classes with sectionning commands but no \com{part} command are likely non +% standard, hence the warning displayed on the terminal.}. Else, we patch its two branches, +% \com{@part} (for the unstarred version) or +% \com{@spart} (for the starred version, \com{part*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| to increment the parttoc +% counter \cnt{ptc}. See also section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}. +% +% \lneed{5} +% The code\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} of the next section (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) is also skipped if \com{part} is not defined. +% \or\relax +% Si la commande \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas la +% modifier et un avertissement est émis\,\footnote{Une classe de document ayant des commandes de sectionnement mais +% pas de commande \com{part} est probablement non standard, d'où l'avertissement affiché sur le terminal.}. +% Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@part} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@spart} (pour la +% version étoilée, \com{part*}): nous ajoutons \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de parttocs +% \cnt{ptc}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Le\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} code de la section suivante (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) est aussi sauté si \com{part} n'est pas +% définie. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0018]{minitoc}% + {part level macros NOT available} +}{%% else undefined part (\part defined) + \mtcPackageInfo[I0023]{minitoc}% + {part level macros available\@gobble} + \let\mtc@svspart\@spart + \def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svspart} + \let\mtc@svpart\@part + \def\@part{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svpart} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred part}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@part} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred part, we need the \com{mtcaddpart} macro, +% which has an optional +% argument, the title of the part as if should appear in the TOC. +% +% By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty +% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) +% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the +% \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the +% \cnt{ptc} counter, via \com{adjustptc} +% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}). +% Using \texttt{xpart} as first argument of +% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xpart} will be invoked in place of +% \com{l@part} to print the entry in +% the TOC, but \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed +% (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une partie étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro +% \com{mtcaddpart}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la partie tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la table +% des matières. +% +% Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (le test est fait par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou omis, nous ajoutons +% une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une +% ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous +% incrémentons le compteur \cnt{ptc}, via \com{adjustptc} (définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}). +% Utiliser \texttt{xpart} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xpart} sera invoquée +% au lieu de \com{l@part} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xpart} utilise une très +% grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc celle-ci ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{% + \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{}}% + {\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{}% + \adjustptc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code terminates (temporarily) the part level commands. +% \or\relax +% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau partie. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Section level macros}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros au niveau section}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}} +% section level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined, i.e.,~in +% document classes like \class{article}, but not in document classes +% like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we +% test if \com{chapter} is defined and if \com{section} is defined, with adequate warnings. If neither are +% defined, you are in big trouble to use the \upack{minitoc} package with the class of your document. +% \or\relax +% Les\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}} +% macros au niveau section sont définies si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais \com{section} est définie, +% c'est-à-dire dans les classes de document telles que \class{article}, mais pas dans les classes de +% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter} +% est définie et si \com{section} est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Si aucune de ces deux commandes +% n'est définie, vous avez un sérieux problème pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de votre +% document. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0004]{minitoc}% + {chapter level macros NOT available\@gobble}% + \@ifundefined{section}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0029]{minitoc}% + {section level macros NOT available\@gobble}% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0017]{minitoc}% + {no section or chapter level macros available + \MessageBreak + PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS}}% + {\mtcPackageInfo[I0028]{minitoc}% + {section level macros available\@gobble}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Corrections for numbering}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections} +% \or\relax +% \section{Corrections pour la numérotation}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksect} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the TOC, the LOF and the LOT are considered as (starred) sections, we must decrement the secttoc counter +% (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} when the corresponding commands are executed. Hence we patch these +% commands. +% \or\relax +% Comme la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux sont considérées comme des sections +% (étoilées), il nous faut décrémenter le compteur de secttocs (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} +% lorsque les commandes correspondantes sont exécutées. Donc nous modifions ces commandes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\mtcsv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents + \let\mtcsv@listoffigures\listoffigures + \let\mtcsv@listoftables\listoftables + \def\tableofcontents{\mtcsv@tableofcontents\mtc@onebacksect} + \def\listoffigures{\mtcsv@listoffigures\mtc@onebacksect} + \def\listoftables{\mtcsv@listoftables\mtc@onebacksect} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modification de la commande \ucom{section}}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svsection} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svss} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the \com{section} command is not defined (by the document class, usually), +% we cannot patch it and a warning is displayed. +% Else, we patch its two branches, \com{@sect} (for the unstarred version) +% or \com{@ssect} (for the starred version, \com{section*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| to increment +% the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}, +% only in the unstarred case\footnote{Version \#25 has removed a spurious decrementation of this counter.}. +% \or\relax +% Si la commande \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas +% la modifier et un avertissement est affiché. Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@sect} (pour la version +% non étoilée) ou \com{@ssect} (pour la version étoilée, \com{section*}): nous ajoutons +% \com{stepcounter}\verb}|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}, seulement dans le cas non +% étoilé\,\footnote{La version~\#25 a éliminé une décrémentation superflue de ce compteur.}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\mtc@svsection\section + \def\section{\stepcounter{stc}\mtc@svsection} + \let\mtc@svss\@ssect +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred section}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une section étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\l@section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred section, we need the \com{mtcaddsection} macro, which has an optional +% argument, the title of the section as it should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty +% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) +% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| +% line in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. +% Then we increment the +% \cnt{stc} counter, via \com{adjuststc} (this command is defined in section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}). +% Using \texttt{xsect} as first argument of +% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xsect} will be invoked +% in place of \com{l@section} to print the entry in +% the TOC, but \com{l@xsect} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed +% (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une section étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro +% \com{mtcaddsection}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la section tel qu'il doit apparaître dans la +% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou +% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|xsect}{}...| dans le fichier +% \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| +% dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| dans les +% fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{stc}, +% via \com{adjuststc} (cette commande est définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}). +% Le fait d'utiliser +% \texttt{xsect} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xsect} sera invoquée au +% lieu de \com{l@section} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xsect} utilise une +% très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc elle ne sera jamais réellement imprimée (sauf si vous +% trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{% + \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xsect}{}}% + {\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{}% + \adjuststc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code terminates (temporarily) the section level commands, and we continue with chapter level macros. +% \or\relax +% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau section et nous continuons avec les commandes au niveau chapitre. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + }}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Chapter level macros}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0003} chapter level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is defined, i.e.,~in +% document classes like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we +% test if \com{chapter} is defined, with adequate warnings. The test is already done above, we are in the +% ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}. +% \or\relax +% Les\imess{I0003} macros au niveau chapitre sont définies si \com{chapter} est définie, c'est-à-dire, dans les classes de +% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter} +% est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Ce test a déjà été fait plus haut, nous sommes dans la branche +% «~sinon~» de \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0003]{minitoc}{chapter level macros available\@gobble} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} command is defined (by the document class, usually). +% We patch its two branches, \com{@chapter} (for the unstarred version) or \com{@schapter} (for the +% starred version, \com{chapter*}): we add call to \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| to increment the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}. +% Only the unstarred branch (\com{@chapter}) is patched here. +% The other branch is patched later (section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{chapter} est définie (par la classe de document, habituellement). Nous modifions ses deux +% branches, \com{@chapter} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@schapter} (pour la version étoilée, +% \com{chapter*}): nous ajoutons un appel à~\com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}. +% Seule la branche non étoilée est modifiée ici. L'autre branche sera modifiée plus loin (voir la +% section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@svchapter\@chapter \def\@chapter{\stepcounter{mtc}\mtc@svchapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour un chapitre étoilé}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter, we need the \com{mtcaddchapter} macro, which has an optional +% argument, the title of the chapter as if should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty +% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) +% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line +% in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the +% \cnt{mtc} counter, via \com{adjustmtc} +% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). +% Using \texttt{xchapter} as first argument of +% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xchapter} will be invoked in place of +% \com{l@chapter} to print the entry in +% the TOC, but \com{l@xchapter} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed +% (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour un chapitre étoilé, nous avons besoin de la macro +% \com{mtcaddchapter}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre du chapitre tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la +% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou +% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et +% \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, via \com{adjustmtc} (définie dans la +% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). Le fait d'utiliser \texttt{xchapter} comme premier argument +% de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xchapter} sera invoquée au lieu de \com{l@chapter} pour imprimer +% l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xchapter} utilise une très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette +% entrée, et donc elle ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{% + \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}}% + {\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}% + \adjustmtc}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code terminates (temporarily) the chapter level commands, +% i.e.,~terminates the \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| at the beginning of +% section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}. +% \or\relax +% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau chapitre, c'est-à-dire termine la construction +% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| du début de la section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Miscellaneous declarations}\label{s+code+misc.decls} +% \or\relax +% \section{Déclarations diverses}\label{s+code+misc.decls} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\newread} +% \begin{macro}{\newtoks} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strutbox} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrut} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrutbox} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{newread} command must be redeclared as being \com{outer} (as \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} told me). +% We need a token register (\com{mtc@toks}), a temporary string (\com{mtc@string}), struts (two kinds, each +% one using a box containing an invisible vertical rule), a rule with all +% dimensions equal to zero (\com{mtc@zrule}) and a command discouraging page breaks (\com{mtc@BBR}, for ``bad +% break''). For the struts, which are boxes containing an invisible vertical rule, we use ``\texttt{ex}''~units, +% to follow the current font. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{newread} doit étre redéclarée comme étant \com{outer} (comme me l'a conseillé +% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% Nous avons besoin d'un registre \emph{token} (\com{mtc@toks}), d'une chaîne temporaire (\com{mtc@string}), +% d'étais ou \emph{struts} (de deux sortes, dont chacune utilise une boîte contenant un filet vertical invisible) +% un filet dont toutes les dimensions sont à~zéro (\com{mtc@zrule}) et d'une commande pour décourager les +% coupures de page (\com{mtc@BBR}, pour «~\emph{bad break}~»). Pour les étais, qui sont des boîtes contenant un +% filet vertical invisible, nous utilisons des unités «~\texttt{ex}~», pour suivre la fonte courante. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n} +\newtoks\mtc@toks +\def\mtc@string{\relax} +\newbox\mtc@strutbox +\setbox\mtc@strutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.8ex]{\z@}{2.5ex}} +\def\mtc@strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@strutbox + \else\unhcopy\mtc@strutbox\fi} +\newbox\mtc@hstrutbox +\setbox\mtc@hstrutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.ex]{\z@}{1.ex}} +\def\mtc@hstrut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@hstrutbox + \else\unhcopy\mtc@hstrutbox\fi} +\def\mtc@v{\leavevmode\mtc@strut} +\def\mtc@zrule{\rule[\z@]{\z@}{\z@}} +\def\mtc@BBR{\unpenalty\nopagebreak[4]} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Autoconfiguration of extensions}\label{s+code+autoconf} +% \or\relax +% \section{Autoconfiguration des suffixes}\label{s+code+autoconf} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code is a trick to determine if the operating system is able or unable to use long extensions (${}>3$~characters) +% in file names. We define a file descriptor (\com{tf@mtc}) to write files\footnote{\samepage It is +% the \emph{only} new +% file descriptor created by the \upack{minitoc} package. All files written by \upack{minitoc} use this +% descriptor, or one of the standard descriptors, e.g., for the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% In fact, \upack{minitoc} writes also in the +% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files, but via file descriptors already used by standard commands +% like \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} and \com{listoftables}. We can conclude that +% \upack{minitoc} itself uses only one file descriptor (or write stream). Some other attempts to make per chapter +% TOCs have failed by quickly leading to exhaustion of file descriptors (\TeX\ offers only 16~file descriptors for writing), +% because they called the standard internal \com{@starttoc} macro, which invokes \com{newwrite}, +% for each mini-table. As \upack{minitoc} writes into only one file at a~time (and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% file, and in the standard contents files, +% of course), we can reuse the same file descriptor and avoid this serious problem (which was present in the +% original version of the package). +% The \upack{minitoc} package writes in the contents files when it encounters a major sectionning command +% (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, or \com{section}), if necessary. It writes into the mini-table +% auxiliary files only via the mini-table preparing commands (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, +% \com{dosectlot}), once at a time. +% You do not need a new hammer for each nail.}. +% This code is verbose if long extensions cannot +% be used, else the messages are only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% The sequencing of these operations is vital. The table~\vref{t+code+8.3} shows this sequence. +% A~star~($*$) denotes which file is read in phase~3. +% \end{macro} +% \begin{table}[t] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Trick to detect the limitation to short extensions}\label{t+code+8.3} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (time runs from left to right):}}&1&2&3\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{OS with long extensions}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&TRUE&TRUE&$*$\\ +% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FALSE&\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{OS with short extensions}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&TRUE&FALSE&$*$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% Ce code est une astuce pour déterminer si le système d'exploitation est capable ou non d'utiliser des suffixes +% longs (${}>3$~caractères) dans les noms de fichiers. Nous définissons un descripteur de fichier (\com{tf@mtc}) +% pour écrire des fichiers\,\footnote{C'est le \emph{seul} nouveau descripteur de fichier créé par +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tous les +% fichiers écrits par \upack{minitoc} utilisent ce descripteur, ou l'un des descripteurs standard, comme pour le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. En fait, \upack{minitoc} écrit aussi dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} +% et \suffix{.lot}, +% mais via des descripteurs de fichiers déjà utilisés par des commandes standard telles que \com{tableofcontents}, +% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}. Nous pouvons en conclure que \upack{minitoc} lui-même +% utilise un seul descripteur de fichier (ou flux d'écriture). Certaines autres tentatives pour faire des tables des +% matières par chapitre ont échoué en conduisant rapidement à~un épuisement des descripteurs de fichiers (\TeX\ +% offre seulement 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture), parce qu'elles appelaient la macro interne standard +% \com{@starttoc}, qui invoque \com{newwrite}, pour chaque mini-table. Puisque \upack{minitoc} écrit +% dans seulement un seul fichier à~la fois (et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, +% et dans les fichiers standard de +% contenus, bien sûr), nous pouvons réutiliser le même descripteur de fichier et éviter ce sérieux problème (qui +% était présent dans la version originale du paquetage). +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} écrit dans les fichiers de contenus lorsqu'il rencontre une commande de +% sectionnement majeure (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, ou \com{section}), si nécessaire. Il écrit +% dans les fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables seulement via les commandes de préparation des mini-tables +% (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, \com{dosectlot}), un à~la fois. Vous n'avez pas besoin d'un nouveau +% marteau pour chaque clou.}. Ce code est bavard si les suffixes longs ne peuvent pas être utilisés, sinon les +% messages sont écrits seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Le séquencement de ces opérations est vital. +% Le tableau~\vref{t+code+8.3} montre ce séquencement. Un astérisque~($*$) indique quel fichier est lu lors de la phase~3. +% \end{macro} +% \begin{table}[t] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Astuce pour détecter la limitation à~des suffixes courts}\label{t+code+8.3} +% {\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (le temps s'écoule de gauche à~droite):}}&1&2&3\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes longs}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&VRAI&VRAI&$*$\\ +% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FAUX&\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes courts}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&VRAI&FAUX&$*$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\newif} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\immediate} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\write} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\input} +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \begin{enumerate}[(1)] +% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, a message and a new flag:\imess{I0002} +% \or\relax +% D'abord, un message et un nouvel indicateur:\imess{I0002} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcPackageInfo[I0002]{minitoc}% + {Autoconfiguration of extensions\@gobble} +\newif\if@mtc@longext@\@mtc@longext@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@true}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the +% real name of the file will be truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@true}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système +% d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0 +\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@true} +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@false}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@false}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc +\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@false} +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We read \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the real name of the file will be +% truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du +% fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\input{\jobname.mtc0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Hence,\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} the flag is true if we read really +% from \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, but false if we read from +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. The text and the severity of the messages are different. +% \or\relax +% En\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} conséquence, +% l'indicateur est vrai si nous lisons effectivement depuis le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, mais faux +% si nous lisons depuis \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. Le texte et la sévérité des messages sont différents. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0012]{minitoc}% + {Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used\@gobble} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0031]{minitoc}% + {==> this version is configured for UNIX-like + \MessageBreak + \space\space\space\space(long extensions) file names\@gobble}% +\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0019]{minitoc}% + {Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used + \MessageBreak + ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like + \MessageBreak + \space\space\space\space(8+3) file names} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We erase the contents of the two files (because \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is also used later as a~scratch file, +% see section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}). +% \or\relax +% Nous effaçons le contenu des deux fichiers (car \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi utilisé comme fichier de +% travail plus tard, voir la section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0 +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{enumerate} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Detecting obsolete versions of \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Détection des versions obsolètes de \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\reset@font} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code detects old versions of the \LaTeX\ kernel that are no more supported and +% with which the \upack{minitoc}% package can hardly work. The trick is to detect the absence of some +% internal \LaTeX\ commands, \com{@inputcheck} and \com{reset@font}. +% If you get one of these messages, your are in bad luck and should \emph{urgently} update your +% \LaTeX\ installation, which is just rusting since\ldots\ a~lot of years! +% \or\relax +% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code détecte les vieilles versions du noyau \LaTeX\ qui ne sont plus maintenues +% et avec lesquelles le paquetage \upack{minitoc} aura beaucoup de mal à~fonctionner. +% L'astuce est de détecter l'absence de certaines commandes +% internes de \LaTeX, \com{@inputcheck} et \com{reset@font}. Si vous recevez l'un de ces messages, vous êtes +% dans une mauvaise situation et devriez, \emph{dans l'urgence,} mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX, +% qui rouille depuis\ldots\ pas mal d'années! +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{@inputcheck}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0021]{minitoc}% + {Your version of latex.tex is obsolete. + \MessageBreak + Trying to continue..}\newread\@inputcheck\relax}{} +\@ifundefined{reset@font}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0022]{minitoc}% + {Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete. + \MessageBreak + Trying to continue... crossing fingers}% + \let\reset@font\relax}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding a TOC entry without leaders nor page numbers}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajouter une entrée dans la TdM sans points de conduite ni numéro de page}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\undottedmtcfalse} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The (internal) macro \com{@undottedtocline} is a modified version of the standard command \com{@dottedtocline}. +% It will be used in customization macros. +% \or\relax +% La macro (interne) \com{@undottedtocline} est une version modifiée de la commande standard \com{@dottedtocline}. +% Elle sera utilisée dans les macros de personnalisation. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifundottedmtc\undottedmtcfalse +\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else + \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@ + {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip + \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue + \interlinepenalty\@M + \leavevmode + \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \hbox{}% + \hskip -\leftskip + #4\nobreak\hfill \nobreak + \null\par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Default values for the page-number customizations}\label{s+code+custom.defaults} +% \or\relax +% \section{Valeurs par défaut pour les personnalisations des numéros de page}\label{s+code+custom.defaults} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This section defines some customization macros for the presence or +% absence of page numbers in the mini-tables. But if the \class{memoir} +% class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded, +% it does the job. So, we test first \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% to use the commands of \class{memoir} when they are available. +% \or\relax +% Cette section définit quelques macros de personnalisation concernant la présence ou l'absence des numéros de +% pages dans les mini-tables. Mais si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée, elle +% sait faire ce travail. Donc, nous testons d'abord \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} pour utiliser les commandes de +% \class{memoir} lorsqu'elles sont disponibles. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les minitocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumberson{section} + \cftpagenumberson{subsection} + \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} + \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} +\def\nomtcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumbersoff{section} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in secttocs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les secttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumberson{subsection} + \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} + \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} +\def\nostcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in parttocs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les parttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ptcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumberson{chapter} + \cftpagenumberson{section} + \cftpagenumberson{subsection} + \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} + \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} +\def\noptcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumbersoff{chapter} + \cftpagenumbersoff{section} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in minilofs, sectlofs, and partlofs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} + \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} + \def\slfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} + \def\noslfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} + \def\plfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} + \def\noplfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in minilots, sectlots, and partlots: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les minilots, sectlots et partlots: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} + \def\nomltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} + \def\sltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} + \def\nosltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} + \def\pltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} + \def\nopltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Else, \upack{minitoc} will use its own commands. +% \or\relax +% Sinon, \upack{minitoc} utilisera ses propres commandes. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, for minitocs, secttocs and parttocs: +% \or\relax +% D'abord, pour les minitocs, secttocs et parttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\null} + \def\nomtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\relax} + \def\stcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\null} + \def\nostcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\relax} + \def\ptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\null} + \def\noptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, for minilofs, sectlofs and partlofs: +% \or\relax +% Puis, pour les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\null} + \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\relax} + \def\slfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\null} + \def\noslfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\relax} + \def\plfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\null} + \def\noplfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, for minilots, sectlots and partlots: +% \or\relax +% Puis, pour les minilots, sectlots et partlots: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\null} + \def\nomltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\relax} + \def\sltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\null} + \def\nosltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\relax} + \def\pltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\null} + \def\nopltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\relax} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the default values are set; page numbers are present: +% \or\relax +% Et enfin, les valeurs par défaut sont établies; les numéros de pages sont présents: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\ptcpagenumbers +\plfpagenumbers +\pltpagenumbers +\mtcpagenumbers +\mlfpagenumbers +\mltpagenumbers +\stcpagenumbers +\slfpagenumbers +\sltpagenumbers +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A \need{.85\textheight} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Features'' for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+features} +% \or\relax +% \section{<<~Dispositifs~>> pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+features} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each kind of mini-table has five ``features'': a ``\feat{before}'' feature, an ``\feat{after}'' feature, +% an ``\feat{open}'' feature, an ``\feat{close}'' feature, +% and a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature. +% +% A ``\feat{before}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{beforeparttoc} which contains code to be executed +% before any mini-table of a given type: \com{beforeparttoc} is executed before each parttoc. Usually such features +% contain only trivial commands like \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, or \com{empty}. +% +% An ``\feat{after}'' feature is analog but its code is executed after each mini-table of a given type. +% +% An ``\feat{open}'' feature contains code to be executed just before the insertion of the file containing the +% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either prepare some basic formatting (like multi-column). +% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules. +% +% An ``\feat{close}'' feature contains code to be executed just after the insertion of the file containing the +% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either finish some basic formatting (like multi-column). +% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules. +% +% A ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{thispageparttocstyle} which contains code to define the page +% style implied by mini-tables of a given type: the command \com{thispageparttocstyle} can be defined as +% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Usually, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is only defined for part-level mini-tables, +% which use page breaks in their \feat{before} and \feat{after} features. For chapter- and section-level +% mini-tables, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is usually defined as \com{empty}. +% +% We set the default values for the part-level features depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command, as +% \class{article}-like documents are different from the \class{book}- or \class{report}-like documents for the +% layout of part-level mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% À~chaque type de mini-table sont associés cinq «~dispositifs~» (\emph{features}): un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» +% (avant), un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (après), +% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (ouverture), un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (fermeture), +% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (style de cette page). +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» est défini par une macro telle que \com{beforeparttoc} qui contient du code à~exécuter +% avant toute mini-table d'un type donné: \com{beforeparttoc} est exécutée avant chaque parttoc. Habituellement, +% de tels dispositifs ne contiennent que des commandes triviales telles que \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| ou \com{empty}. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» est analogue mais son code est exécuté après chaque mini-table d'un type donné. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste avant l'insertion du fichier contenant la +% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit préparent une mise en forme basique +% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste après l'insertion du fichier contenant la +% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit achèvent une mise en forme basique +% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est défini par une macro comme \com{thispageparttocstyle} qui contient du +% code pour définir le style de page impliqué par les mini-tables d'un type donné: la commande \com{thispageparttocstyle} +% peut être définie comme étant \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Habituellement, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» n'est +% défini que pour les mini-tables au niveau partie, qui utilisent des sauts de page dans leurs dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» +% et «~\feat{after}~». Pour les mini-tables aux niveaux chapitre et section, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est +% habituellement défini comme étant \com{empty}. +% +% Nous établissons les valeurs par défaut pour les dispositifs au niveau partie selon la présence de la commande +% \com{chapter}, car les documents du genre \class{article} sont différents des documents du genre \class{book} +% ou \class{report} pour la mise en page des mini-tables au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (par défaut): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \let\beforeparttoc\empty + \let\beforepartlof\empty + \let\beforepartlot\empty}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{before}'' feature: +% \or\relax +% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{before}~» par défaut +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + {\let\beforeparttoc\cleardoublepage + \let\beforepartlof\cleardoublepage + \let\beforepartlot\cleardoublepage} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforeminitoc\empty +\let\beforeminilof\empty +\let\beforeminilot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforesecttoc\empty +\let\beforesectlof\empty +\let\beforesectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (par défaut): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \let\afterparttoc\empty + \let\afterpartlof\empty + \let\afterpartlot\empty}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{after}'' feature: +% \or\relax +% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{after}~» par défaut +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + {\let\afterparttoc\cleardoublepage + \let\afterpartlof\cleardoublepage + \let\afterpartlot\cleardoublepage} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\afterminitoc\empty +\let\afterminilof\empty +\let\afterminilot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\aftersecttoc\empty +\let\aftersectlof\empty +\let\aftersectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, the ``\feat{open}'' features do nothing: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{open}'' ne font rien: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\openparttoc\empty +\let\openpartlof\empty +\let\openpartlot\empty +\let\openminitoc\empty +\let\openminilof\empty +\let\openminilot\empty +\let\opensecttoc\empty +\let\opensectlof\empty +\let\opensectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, ``\feat{close}'' features do nothing: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{close}'' ne font rien: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\closeparttoc\empty +\let\closepartlof\empty +\let\closepartlot\empty +\let\closeminitoc\empty +\let\closeminilof\empty +\let\closeminilot\empty +\let\closesecttoc\empty +\let\closesectlof\empty +\let\closesectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, all the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features (at part level) use the \texttt{empty} page style. +% It affects only the first page of the mini-table. If \com{chapter} is not defined, there is no default +% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features at the part level. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, tous les dispositifs «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (au niveau partie) utilisent le style de page \texttt{empty}. +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, il n'y a pas de dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» au niveau partie. +% Ceci affecte seulement la première page de la mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \def\thispageparttocstyle{\empty} + \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\empty} + \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\empty}}% +{\def\thispageparttocstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}} + \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}} + \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}} +\def\thispageminitocstyle{\empty} +\def\thispageminilofstyle{\empty} +\def\thispageminilotstyle{\empty} +\def\thispagesecttocstyle{\empty} +\def\thispagesectlofstyle{\empty} +\def\thispagesectlotstyle{\empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, we will define the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro which is +% a~much easier user interface to set the mini-tables ``features''. +% \or\relax +% Dans la section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, nous définirons la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} qui est une +% interface utilisateur bien plus facile pour mettre en place les «~dispositifs~» des mini-tables. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fake tables of contents}\label{s+code+fake} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tables des matières invisibles}\label{s+code+fake} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\fake@starttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw} +% \begin{macro}{\newwrite} +% \begin{macro}{\immediate} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you don't want a table of contents, but want minitocs, +% you need to create the \suffix{.toc} file, without inserting it +% into your document. This \com{faketableofcontents} command is a stripped off version +% of the standard command \com{tableofcontents}. +% We define in the same way the analog commands \com{fakelistoffigures} and \com{fakelistoftables}, +% using in fact just a stripped version \com{fake@starttoc} of \com{@starttoc}. But it is nice to reset to zero the +% \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc}, and \cnt{stc} counters now, if they are defined\,\footnote{Remember the infamous +% ``\texttt{stc0}'' bug.}. +% \or\relax +% Si vous souhaitez ne pas avoir de table des matières, mais avoir quand même des minitocs, il vous faut créer le +% fichier \suffix{.toc}, sans l'insérer dans votre document. Cette commande +% \com{faketableofcontents} est une version restreinte de la commande \com{tableofcontents} standard. Nous +% définissons de la même manière les deux autres commandes analogues \com{fakelistoffigures} et \com{fakelistoftables}, +% en utilisant en fait simplement une version restreinte \com{fake@starttoc} de \com{@starttoc}. +% Mais il est bon de remettre à~zéro +% maintenant les compteurs \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} et \cnt{stc}, s'ils sont définis\,\footnote{Souvenez-vous +% de l'infâme erreur <<~\texttt{stc0}~>>.}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\faketableofcontents{\fake@starttoc{toc}% + \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% + \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}% + \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}% + } +\def\fakelistoffigures{\fake@starttoc{lof}} +\def\fakelistoftables{\fake@starttoc{lot}} +\def\fake@starttoc#1{\begingroup \makeatletter + \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname + \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname + \jobname.#1\relax \fi + \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code uses the same file descriptors (for writing) than the original commands. +% \or\relax +% Ce code utilise les mêmes descripteurs de fichier (en écriture) que les commandes d'origine. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Depth counters for minilofs and minilots} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les minilofs et les minilots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, +% we create the necessary new counters: +% \dcnt{minilofdepth} and \dcnt{minilofdepth}. +% These counters are initialized to~2. +% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons +% les nouveaux compteurs nécessaires: +% \dcnt{minilofdepth} et \dcnt{minilofdepth}. +% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. +% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{minilofdepth}\setcounter{minilofdepth}{2}}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{minilotdepth}\setcounter{minilotdepth}{2}}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Chapter level commands}\label{s+code+chapter.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+chapter.level} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% From here, we define the chapter-level commands. +% \or\relax +% À~partir d'ici, nous définissons les commandes au niveau chapitre. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we memorize the marks (not used today, but\ldots): +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous mémorisons les marques (ceci n'est pas encore utilisé, mais\ldots): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth +\global\let\@mkboth\markboth +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Starred parts, chapters or sections}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections} +% \or\relax +% \section{Parties, chapitres et section étoilés}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@stc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define commands to manage the starred sectionning commands: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} and \com{section*}. +% The section-level is different depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command. +% Eventually, a counter is incremented. +% A~contents line is added in the \suffix{.toc} file, with the right depth to print it (see \verb|\l@star...| later, +% in section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons des commandes pour traiter les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} +% et \com{section*}. Le niveau section est différent selon que \com{chapter} est définie ou non. Éventuellement, +% un compteur est incrémenté. Une ligne de contenu est ajoutée dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, avec la bonne +% profondeur pour l'imprimer (voir \verb|\l@star...| plus loin, dans la section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addst@rred#1#2{% + \addcontentsline{toc}{star#1}{#2}% + \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax + \stepcounter{ptc}% + \fi + }% + \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix\relax + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \fi + }% + \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax +%% \@ifundefined{chapter}{\stepcounter{stc}}{}% + \stepcounter{stc}% + \fi + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is not defined, we just define \com{addstarredsection}: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, nous définissons simplement \com{addstarredsection}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% +\gdef\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Else we begin to define the stuff for chapter-level commands (the ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|): +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Sinon, nous commençons à~définir le matériel pour les commandes au niveau chapitre (branche «~sinon~» de +% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +{% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\The@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0003} define now: the internal format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{The@mtc}), the obsolete command +% \com{firstchapteris} (it just emits a harmless warning), the \cnt{mtc} counter (initialized to~0), +% the \com{adjustmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter, by~1 by default), +% the \com{decrementmtc} command (decrements the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1), +% the \com{incrementmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1), +% the format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{themtc}), +% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialized to~2, for the depth of a minitoc +% (analog to the standard \dcnt{tocdepth} counter). +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0003} définissons ensuite: le format interne du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{The@mtc}), la commande +% obsolète \com{firstchapteris} (elle ne fait qu'émettre un avertissement bénin), le compteur \cnt{mtc} (initialisé +% à~0), la commande \com{adjustmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc}, de~1 par défaut), +% la commande \com{decrementmtc} (décrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1), +% la commande \com{incrementmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1), +% le format du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{themtc}), +% le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialisé à~2, pour la profondeur d'une minitoc (analogue +% au compteur standard \dcnt{tocdepth}). +% \fi +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\The@mtc{\arabic{mtc}} +\def\firstchapteris#1% + {\mtcPackageWarning[W0003]{minitoc}% + {\string\firstchapteris \space is an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command}% + \@firstchapteris@used@true} +\newcounter{mtc} +\setcounter{mtc}{0} +\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{mtc}{#1}} +\def\decrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}} +\def\incrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{+1}} +\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}} +\newcounter{minitocdepth} +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the horizontal rules to draw before and after minitocs (\com{mtc@rule}), and we copy +% that definition into analog macros for other kinds of mini-tables. We also set the default value (24pt) of +% \com{mtcindent}, the indentation for minitocs (both sides). The rules are 0.4pt thick. They are defined via +% \com{hrule} to stay in vertical mode for the final \com{kern}. +% \or\relax % +% Nous définissons les filets horizontaux à~tracer avant et après les minitocs +% (\com{mtc@rule}), puis nous copions cette définition dans des macros analogues pour les autres sortes de +% mini-tables. Nous établissons aussi la valeur par défaut (24pt) de \com{mtcindent}, l'indentation pour les minitocs (des +% deux côtés). Les filets sont épais de 0.4pt. Ils sont définis via \com{hrule} pour rester en mode vertical +% pour le \com{kern} final. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width\columnwidth \kern2.6\p@} +\let\mlf@rule\mtc@rule +\let\mlt@rule\mtc@rule +\let\plf@rule\mtc@rule +\let\plt@rule\mtc@rule +\let\slf@rule\mtc@rule +\let\slt@rule\mtc@rule +\mtcindent=24\p@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{14} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Font commands for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes de fontes pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define these commands with full NFSS~\cite{fontsel} descriptions. These definitions are effective if \com{chapter} is +% defined. +% The fonts for titles are also defined here. See also the \com{mtcsetfont} macro +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) and the \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro later +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons ces commandes avec des descriptions NFSS~\cite{fontsel} complètes. Ces définitions sont effectives +% si \com{chapter} +% est définie. Les fontes pour les titres sont aussi définies ici. Voir aussi la macro \com{mtcsetfont} +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) et la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} plus loin +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} +\def\mtcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\let\mtcSSfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSSSfont\mtcfont +\let\mtcPfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSPfont\mtcfont +\let\mlffont\mtcfont \let\mlfSfont\mtcfont +\let\mltfont\mtcfont \let\mltSfont\mtcfont +\def\mtifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And \com{coffeefont} is used for ``coffee breaks{\myCoffeecup}'' in the \pack{minutes} +% package~\cite{minutes}. +% \or\relax +% Et \com{coffeefont} est utilisée pour les «~pauses café{\myCoffeecup}~» dans le +% paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\coffeefont{\small\rmfamily\slshape\mdseries} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Internal commands to position the mini-table titles}\label{s+code+position.title.mini} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes internes pour positionner les titres des mini-tables}\label{s+code+position.title.mini} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands \verb|\miniXXX| and \verb|\dominiXXX| accept an optional argument to left justify, center, +% right justify or omit the title of the chapter-level mini-tables. By default, these titles are left justified. +% The choice made in a \verb|\dominiXXX| command is global and memorized in \com{df@mtitc}, \com{df@mtilf} or +% \com{df@mtilt}; the choice made in a \verb|\miniXXX| command is local and stored in \com{do@mtitc}, +% \com{do@mtilf} or \com{do@mtilt}. See the \com{minitoc@} macro later +% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). An empty title needs a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \or\relax +% Les commandes \verb|\miniXXX| et \verb|\dominiXXX| acceptent un argument optionnel pour justifier à~gauche, +% centrer, justifier à~droite ou omettre le titre des mini-tables au niveau chapitre. Par défaut, ces titres sont +% justifiés à~gauche. Le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\dominiXXX| est global et mémorisé dans \com{df@mtitc}, +% \com{df@mtilf} ou \com{df@mtilt}; le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\miniXXX| est local et rangé dans +% \com{do@mtitc}, \com{do@mtilf} ou \com{do@mtilt}. Voir la macro \com{minitoc@} plus loin +% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). Un titre vide nécessite une correction verticale +% (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles: +% \or\relax +% Titres centrés, justifiés à~gauche, justifiés à~droite ou vides: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\c@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} +\def\l@mti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} +\def\r@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} +\def\e@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +\def\n@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Default: titles on left: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont justifiés à~gauche: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\do@mtitc\l@mti +\let\df@mtitc\l@mti +\let\do@mtilf\l@mti +\let\df@mtilf\l@mti +\let\do@mtilt\l@mti +\let\df@mtilt\l@mti +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{mtc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\list} +% \begin{macro}{\itemsep} +% \begin{macro}{\itemindent} +% \begin{macro}{\listparindent} +% \begin{macro}{\topsep} +% \begin{macro}{\parsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each minitoc is placed inside a \env{mtc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the +% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{mtc@verse} and \com{endmtc@verse}. +% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way) \verb|\\|, then call \com{list}\verb|{}| and set some +% dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} is set to zero if the \opt{tight} option is active (to reduce the spacing of the lines). +% \com{parskip} is set to zero if the \opt{k-tight} option is active +% (to reduce the spacing of the lines). +% Both margins are set to \com{mtcindent}. \com{endmtc@verse} terminates the list and discourages a page break. +% The \env{mtc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{mtcoffset}). +% \or\relax +% Chaque minitoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{mtc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue +% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et donc il est défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: \com{mtc@verse} et +% \com{endmtc@verse}. Comme c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord (de manière locale) \verb|\\|, +% puis nous appelons \com{list}\verb|{}| et établissons quelques dimensions telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, +% \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{tight} est active +% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes). +% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{k-tight} est active +% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes). +% Les deux marges sont établies à~\com{mtcindent}. +% L'environnement \env{mtc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{mtcoffset}). +% \com{endmtc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{% + \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \partopsep=\z@ + \listparindent=\itemindent \topsep=1ex + \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi + \leftmargin=\mtcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}% + \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}% + }% + \item[]} +\def\endmtc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof}, and \ucom{minilot} commands}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot} +% These three commands are very similar, with only cosmetic differences. +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof} et \ucom{minilot}}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot} +% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires, avec seulement des différences de détail. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{minitoc} command}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minitoc}}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minitoc} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minitoc (no automatic minitoc). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minitoc} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minitoc (il n'y a pas de +% minitoc automatique). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a +% \com{dominitoc} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. +% \com{dominitoc} has itself an +% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. The default value of +% the optional argument of the \com{dominitoc} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: +% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of +% \com{dominitoc}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par +% une commande \com{dominitoc}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominitoc} a elle-même +% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. La valeur par +% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominitoc} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais +% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via +% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominitoc}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we define \com{minitoc} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in +% the \com{minitoc@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a +% left bracket for the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous définissons \com{minitoc} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis +% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minitoc@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce +% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\minitoc@}{\minitoc@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The real code of \com{minitoc} is in \com{minitoc@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) +% specifying the position of the title. +% \or\relax +% Le véritable code de \com{minitoc} est dans \com{minitoc@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les +% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we set the global flag \com{@minitoc@used@true} to note that \com{minitoc} has been called (this will be +% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \or\relax +% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minitoc@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minitoc} a été +% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minitoc@[#1]{% +\global\@minitoc@used@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The name of the file containing the minitoc is constructed from \com{jobname} and a +% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mtc} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.M} (short extensions) +% followed by the absolute number of the minitoc. +% \or\relax +% Le nom du fichier contenant la minitoc est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, +% qui est \suffix{.mtc} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.M} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu +% de la minitoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@ + \def\@tocfile{mtc\The@mtc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{M\The@mtc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. +% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minitoc has been +% requested). +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le +% fichier est % vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minitoc vide +% a été demandée). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@minitoc@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{thispageminitocstyle} to set the page style +% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minitoc). +% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minitoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{thispageminitocstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par +% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, +% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispageminitocstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{beforeminitoc}, +% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minitoc) +% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the +% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), +% then the top rule of the minitoc (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page +% break between the title and the top rule). +% The font is set to \com{mtcfont}. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{beforeminitoc}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de +% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minitoc) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est +% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut +% de la minitoc (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une +% coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mtcfont}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeminitoc + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@mtitc\e@mti + \else\if #1n\let\do@mtitc\n@mti + \else\if #1c\let\do@mtitc\c@mti + \else\if #1l\let\do@mtitc\l@mti + \else\if #1r\let\do@mtitc\r@mti + \else\if #1d\let\do@mtitc\df@mtitc + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\mtctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtitc\e@mti\relax\fi + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\mtcfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent %% + \ifx\mtc@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin +% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: +% \or\relax +% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres +% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% + \begin{mtc@verse}{\mtcoffset}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minitocdepth}), +% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth} +% has been forced to \dcnt{minitocdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, +% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée +% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où +% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minitocdepth}, pour n'imprimer que +% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire +% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minitoc by inputing the minitoc file. +% But before reading the minitoc file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his +% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro +% \com{mtc@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via +% some \com{mtcsetformat} commands). +% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minitoc en insérant le +% fichier de minitoc. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minitoc, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) +% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mtc@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page +% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). +% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{mtc@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \mtc@setform% + \openminitoc \global\inminitoctrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inminitocfalse\closeminitoc + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the +% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminitoc}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), +% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminitoc}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) +% est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \end{mtc@verse}% + \kernafterminitoc + \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@bottom@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminitoc\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we define the bottom rule for a minitoc, with some space under the minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Et nous définissons le filet inférieur pour une minitoc, avec un peu d'espace en dessous de la minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@bottom@rule{% + \ifx\mtc@rule\relax\relax\else + \vskip -2.5ex + \rule[2.4\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{minilof} command}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilof}}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilof} command is very similar to the \com{minitoc} command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilof} est très similaire à~la commande \com{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilof} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilof (no automatic minilof). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilof} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilof (il n'y a pas de +% minilof automatique). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a +% \com{dominilof} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. +% \com{dominilof} has itself an +% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilof}. The default value of +% the optional argument of the \com{dominilof} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: +% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of +% \com{dominilof}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilof}. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par +% une commande \com{dominilof}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilof} a elle-même +% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. La valeur par +% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilof} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais +% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via +% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilof}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we define \com{minilof} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in +% the \com{minilof@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a +% left bracket for the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous définissons \com{minilof} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis +% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilof@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce +% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\minilof@}{\minilof@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The real code of \com{minilof} is in \com{minilof@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) +% specifying the position of the title. +% \or\relax +% Le véritable code de \com{minilof} est dans \com{minilof@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les +% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilof@used@true} to note that \com{minilof} has been called (this will be +% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \or\relax +% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilof@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilof} a été +% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilof@[#1]{% +\global\@minilof@used@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The name of the file containing the minilof is constructed from \com{jobname} and a +% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlf} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.F} (short extensions) +% followed by the absolute number of the minilof. +% \or\relax +% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilof est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, +% qui est \suffix{.mlf} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.F} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu +% de la minilof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{mlf\The@mtc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{F\The@mtc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. +% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilof has been +% requested). +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis +% si le fichier est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilof +% vide a été demandée). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@minilof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{thispageminilofstyle} to set the page style +% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilof). +% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilof. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilofstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par +% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, +% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispageminilofstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{beforeminilof}, +% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilof) +% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the +% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), +% then the top rule of the minilof (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit +% a page break between the title and the top rule). +% The font is set to \com{mlffont}. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilof}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de +% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilof) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est +% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut +% de la minilof (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mlffont}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeminilof + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@mtilf\e@mti + \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilf\n@mti + \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilf\c@mti + \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilf\l@mti + \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilf\r@mti + \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilf\df@mtilf + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\mlftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilf\e@mti\relax\fi + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@ + \reset@font\mlffont + \parindent=\z@ + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\mlf@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin +% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: +% \or\relax +% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres +% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% + \begin{mtc@verse}{\mlfoffset}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minilofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilofdepth}), +% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth} +% has been forced to \dcnt{minilofdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, +% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée +% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où +% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilofdepth}, pour n'imprimer que +% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire +% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\c@lofdepth=\c@minilofdepth + \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilof by inputing the minilof file. +% But before reading the minilof file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his +% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro +% \com{mlf@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some +% \com{mtcsetformat} commands). +% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilof en insérant le +% fichier de minilof. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilof, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) +% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlf@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page +% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). +% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{mlf@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \mlf@setform + \global\openminilof\inminiloftrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inminiloffalse\closeminilof + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the +% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), +% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) +% est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \end{mtc@verse}% + \kernafterminilof + \nopagebreak[4]\mlf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilof\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{minilot} command}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilot}}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilot} command is absolutely similar to the \com{minilof} command: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilot} est absolument similaire à~la commande \com{minilof}: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilot} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilot (no automatic minilot). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilot} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilot (il n'y a pas de +% minilot automatique). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a +% \com{dominilot} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. +% \com{dominilot} has itself an +% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilot}. The default value of +% the optional argument of the \com{dominilot} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: +% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of +% \com{dominilot}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilot}. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par +% une commande \com{dominilot}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilot} a elle-même +% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. La valeur par +% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilot} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais +% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via +% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilot}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we define \com{minilot} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in +% the \com{minilot@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a +% left bracket for the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous définissons \com{minilot} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis +% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilot@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce +% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\minilot@}{\minilot@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The real code of \com{minilot} is in \com{minilot@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) +% specifying the position of the title. +% \or\relax +% Le véritable code de \com{minilot} est dans \com{minilot@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les +% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilot@used@true} to note that \com{minilot} has been called (this will be +% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \or\relax +% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilot@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilot} a été +% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilot@[#1]{% +\global\@minilot@used@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The name of the file containing the minilot is constructed from \com{jobname} and a +% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlt} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.T} (short extensions) +% followed by the absolute number of the minilot. +% \or\relax +% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilot est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, +% qui est \suffix{.mlt} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.T} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu +% de la minilot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{mlt\The@mtc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{T\The@mtc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. +% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilot has been +% requested). +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le fichier +% est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilot vide a été demandée). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@minilot@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{thispageminilotstyle} to set the page style +% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilot). +% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilot. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilotstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par +% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, +% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispageminilotstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{beforeminilot}, +% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilot) +% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the +% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), +% then the top rule of the minilot (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment +% (to inhibit a page break between the title and the top rule). +% The font is set to \com{mltfont}. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilot}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de +% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilot) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est +% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut +% de la minilot (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} +% (pour empêcher une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mltfont}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeminilot + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@mtilt\e@mti + \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilt\n@mti + \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilt\c@mti + \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilt\l@mti + \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilt\r@mti + \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilt\df@mtilt + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\mlttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilt\e@mti\relax\fi + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\mltfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\mlt@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin +% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: +% \or\relax +% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres +% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% + \begin{mtc@verse}{\mltoffset}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minilotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilotdepth}), +% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{lotdepth} +% has been forced to \dcnt{minilotdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, +% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée +% (\com{c@minilotdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où +% \dcnt{lotdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilotdepth}, pour n'imprimer que +% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire +% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\c@lotdepth=\c@minilotdepth + \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilot by inputing the minilot file. +% But before reading the minilot file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his +% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro +% \com{mlt@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some +% \com{mtcsetformat} commands). +% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilot en insérant le +% fichier de minilot. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilot, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) +% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlt@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page +% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). +% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{mlt@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \mlt@setform + \global\openminilot\inminilottrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inminilotfalse\closeminilot + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the +% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), +% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) +% est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \end{mtc@verse}% + \kernafterminilot + \nopagebreak[4]\mlt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilot\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{continued}}{continued}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{suite}}{suite}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}% +% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}% +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we define \com{l@xchapter} which is like \com{l@chapter}, but with a huge depth, to inhibit its +% printing (except if you cheat): +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous définissons \com{l@xchapter} qui est semblable à~\com{l@chapter}, mais avec une profondeur +% très grande, pour inhiber son impression (sauf si vous trichez): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@xchapter{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}} +\def\xchapter{xchapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}% +% \begin{macro}{\sv@chapter}% +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\ignorespaces} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we patch \com{@chapter} (the non-starred branch of \com{chapter}) +% to add pseudo-chapter entries in the LOF and the LOT (these entries will be used by +% the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to split the LOF and the LOT into slices). +% \or\relax +% Puis nous modifions \com{@chapter} (la branche non étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des entrées de +% pseudo-chapitres dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux (ces entrées seront utilisées par les +% commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| pour découper en tranches la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\sv@chapter\@chapter +\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\sv@chapter[{#1}]{#2}\relax% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{#1}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{#1}% + \ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We also patch \com{@schapter} (the starred branch of \com{chapter}) +% to add marks in the TOC to delimit +% chapters; these marks will be used by the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to take slices from the LOF and the LOT; as +% they are defined as \com{relax}, they should not perturbate other packages. +% \or\relax +% Nous modifions aussi \com{@schapter} (la branche étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des marques dans la +% table des matières afin de délimiter les chapitres; ces marques seront utilisées par les commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| +% pour prélever des tranches dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux; comme elles sont définies comme +% étant \com{relax}, elles ne devraient pas perturber d'autres paquetages. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@schapter\@schapter +\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterend}\mtc@schapter} +\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{@@@}{\protect\chapterbegin}\mtc@schapter} +\let\chapterbegin\relax +\let\chapterend\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the command \com{chapter} is undefined, we define the command \com{addstarredsection} +% (only if \com{section} is defined). If the command \com{chapter} is defined, we define the command +% \com{addstarredchapter}. If the command \com{part} is defined, we define the command \com{addstarredpart}. +% We use the utility command \com{addst@rred} defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}. +% \or\relax +% Si la commande \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, alors nous devons définir la commande \com{addstarredsection} (mais +% seulement si \com{section} est définie). Si la commande \com{chapter} est définie, nous définissons la +% commande \com{addstarredchapter}. Si la commande \com{part} est définie, nous définissons la commande +% \com{addstarredpart}. Nous utilisons la commande utilitaire \com{addst@rred} définie dans la +% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\@ifundefined{section}% + {}{\def\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}}}% + {\def\addstarredchapter#1{\addst@rred{chapter}{#1}}} +\@ifundefined{part}% + {}{\def\addstarredpart#1{\addst@rred{part}{#1}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{TOC entries without leaders}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders} +% \or\relax +% \section{Entrées de TdM sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define two internal macros to format TOC entries without leaders. The macro +% \com{@Undottedtocline} prints no page number, but \com{@Undottedtoclinep} prints~it. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons deux macros internes pour mettre en forme des entrées de table des matières sans points de +% conduite. La macro \com{@Undottedtocline} n'imprime pas de numéro de page, mais \com{@Undottedtoclinep} +% l'imprime. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else + \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ + {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip + \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue + \interlinepenalty\@M + \leavevmode + \@tempdima #3\relax + \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip + {\coffeefont #4}\nobreak \nobreak\null + \par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The same but with the page number: +% \or\relax +% La même chose, mais avec le numéro de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else + \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ + {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip + \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue + \interlinepenalty\@M + \leavevmode + \@tempdima #3\relax + \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip + {#4}\nobreak \hfill \nobreak\null + \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}% + \par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-tables with or without leaders}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-tables avec ou sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code sets the flag to false, then patches each mini-table command (its internal part). +% We alter the commands \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., to test the flag \com{ifundottedmtc} and, +% if true, replace locally \com{@dottedtocline} by its dotless version \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. Of course, +% we must also test the availability of the \com{chapter}, \com{part} and \com{section} commands, to avoid to +% define many unnecessary commands. +% \or\relax +% Ce code force l'indicateur à~faux, puis modifie chaque commande de mini-table (en fait, sa partie interne). Nous modifions +% les commandes \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., pour tester l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc} et, s'il +% est vrai, remplacer localement \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version sans points de conduite \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. +% Bien sûr, nous devons aussi tester la disponibilité des commandes \com{chapter}, \com{part} et \com{section}, +% pour éviter de définir de nombreuses commandes non nécessaires. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% + \let\sv@minitoc@\minitoc@ + \def\minitoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@minitoc@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@minilof@\minilof@ + \def\minilof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@minilof@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@minilot@\minilot@ + \def\minilot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@minilot@[#1]}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the part level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \let\sv@parttoc@\parttoc@ + \def\parttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@parttoc@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@partlof@\partlof@ + \def\partlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@partlof@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@partlot@\partlot@ + \def\partlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@partlot@[#1]}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the section level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}{% + \let\sv@secttoc@\secttoc@ + \def\secttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@secttoc@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@sectlof@\sectlof@ + \def\sectlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@sectlof@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@sectlot@\sectlot@ + \def\sectlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@sectlot@[#1]}}}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{dominitoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{dominitoc} et ses analogues}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\chapbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The three commands \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} are, of course, very similar. +% They take the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} file (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot} files) +% produced by the previous \LaTeX\ run and +% cut it in slices (one slice per chapter or starred chapter) into the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files +% (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), using specific +% lines in the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (resp. \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) file. These lines are +% essentially chapter-level entry commands (like \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|, +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) delimiting chapters in the TOC (or in the LOF or the +% LOT). Analog part-level lines delimit parts, hence also chapters. +% \or\relax +% Les trois commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} sont, bien sûr, très similaires. +% Elles prennent le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (respectivement les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) +% produit par l'exécution précédente de \LaTeX\ et l'éclatent en tranches (une tranche par chapitre ou chapitre +% étoilé) vers les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (respectivement, les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), en utilisant des lignes spécifiques dans le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} +% (respectivement, \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}). Ces lignes sont essentiellement des commandes pour +% des entrées au niveau chapitre (telles que \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|, +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) délimitant les chapitres dans la table des matières (ou +% dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des tableaux). Des lignes analogues au niveau partie délimitent les +% parties, donc aussi les chapitres. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As \com{dominitoc} has an optional argument, whose default value is~``\texttt{l}'' (left), it calls \com{dominitoc@} +% with a argument delimited by brackets. +% +% The macros are \com{dominitoc} (user interface), which calls \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (or with the optional argument +% of \com{dominitoc}). +% Then \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| processes its argument and calls \com{@@dominitoc}. +% \com{@@dominitoc} calls \com{@dominitoc} (passing \com{jobname} as argument) then close the minitoc file +% written. \com{@dominitoc} reset to zero the counter of mini-tables, calls \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (where +% \verb|#1| is the value of \com{jobname}), then reset again to zero the counter of mini-tables. Each call to +% \com{dominitoc@} (i.e.,~to \com{dominitoc}) sets the flag \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. This will be used later +% for a hint (which detects that you have correctly called \com{minitoc} \emph{after} \com{dominitoc} and that both +% or neither have been called). See section~\vref{ss+final.coh}. +% The code is similar for \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque \com{dominitoc} a un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut est~«~\texttt{l}~» (gauche), elle +% appelle \com{dominitoc@} avec un argument délimité par des crochets. +% +% Les macros sont \com{dominitoc} (interface utilisateur), qui appelle \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (ou avec l'argument +% optionnel de \com{dominitoc}). Puis \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| traite son argument et appelle \com{@@dominitoc}. +% \com{@@dominitoc} appelle \com{@dominitoc} (en passant \com{jobname} comme argument) puis ferme le fichier +% minitoc écrit. \com{@dominitoc} remet à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables, appelle \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (où +% \verb|#1| est la valeur de \com{jobname}), puis remet encore à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables. Chaque appel +% à~\com{dominitoc@} (c'est-à-dire, à~\com{dominitoc}) établit l'indicateur \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. Ceci +% sera utilisé plus tard pour une indication (\emph{hint}) (qui détecte si vous avez appelé correctement \com{minitoc} +% \emph{après} \com{dominitoc} et que les deux ont été appelées). Voir la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}. +% Le code est similaire pour \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dominitoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and create the minitocs files, with the +% adequate extension. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dominitoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers minitocs, +% avec le suffixe adéquat. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dominitoc#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{mtc}{0} + \MTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dominitoc@}{\dominitoc@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\@dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dominilof} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lof} file and create the minilofs files, with the +% adequate extension. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dominilof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers minilofs, +% avec le suffixe adéquat. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dominilof#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{mtc}{0} + \MLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilof@}{\dominilof@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\@dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dominilot} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lot} file and create the minilots files, with the +% adequate extension. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dominilot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers minilots, +% avec le suffixe adéquat. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dominilot#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{mtc}{0} + \MLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilot@}{\dominilot@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minitoc title; +% a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minitoc; +% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominitoc@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dominitoc@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dominitoc \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dominitoc@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@mtitc\e@mti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@mtitc\n@mti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@mtitc\c@mti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@mtitc\l@mti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@mtitc\r@mti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dominitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilof title; +% a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilof; +% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominilof@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dominilof@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dominilof \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dominilof@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@mtilf\e@mti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilf\n@mti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilf\c@mti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilf\l@mti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilf\r@mti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dominilof} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilot title; +% a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilot; +% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominilot@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dominilot@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dominilot \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dominilot@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@mtilt\e@mti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilt\n@mti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilt\c@mti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilt\l@mti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilt\r@mti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dominilot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros invoke the \verb|\@domini...| macros to create the mini-table file, then close the file +% descriptor. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros invoquent les macros \verb|\@domini...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le +% descripteur de fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@@dominitoc{\@dominitoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dominilof{\@dominilof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dominilot{\@dominilot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the TOC file}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier TdM}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros\,\footnote{This code is derived from the +% \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission. +% Some modifications were made by \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% \xname{Didier}{Verna}, and \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} for the support of \pack{hyperref}, essentially by adding an +% argument to some macros, to use the hyperlink argument in the contents lines.}: +% \or\relax +% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes\,\footnote{Ce code est dérivé du paquetage +% \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission. +% Des modifications ont été faites par +% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} pour le support de \pack{hyperref}, +% essentiellement en ajoutant un argument à~certaines macros, pour utiliser l'argument hyperlien dans les lignes de +% contenu.}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\MTC@list{#2}% + \MTC@loop{#1}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Teste si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@toc{% + \ifx\MTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MTC@explist\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{chapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter (which simulates the chapter counter, but is absolute) +% is incremented and a new minitoc file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues depuis le fichier table des matières et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{chapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} (qui simule le compteur de +% chapitre, mais est absolu) est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier minitoc est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it (after +% closing the file descriptor): +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} regardons si des suffixes longs ou courts ont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis l'ouvrir (après avoir fermé le descripteur de fichier): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} need a similar code to detect TOC entries for appendices in the \class{memoir} class\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} +% has signaled the problem; thanks!}: +% \or\relax +% Il\imess{I0033} nous faut un code similaire pour détecter les entrées dans la TdM pour les appendices dans +% la classe \class{memoir}\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} a signalé le problème; merci!}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines, the token register \com{mtc@toks} is used as a verbatim memory. +% \or\relax +% Maintenant, nous filtrons les lignes de contenu utiles, le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} étant utilisé +% comme mémoire \emph{verbatim}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each interesting contents line is copied, with a font command added before it. We begin with the standard +% sectionning commands, below \com{chapter}: +% \or\relax +% Chaque ligne de contenu intéressante est copiée, avec une commande de fonte ajoutée devant +% elle. Nous commençons par les commandes de sectionnement standard, en dessous de \com{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A coffee break contents line{\myCoffeecup} is written for \com{coffee}: +% \or\relax +% Une ligne de contenu de pause-café{\myCoffeecup} est écrite pour \com{coffee}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee + \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{I0033} it is \com{starchapter} (for a starred chapter), we increment the \cnt{mtc} counter, +% build a new minitoc file name, close the file descriptor and open it with this new file. +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{I0033} c'est \com{starchapter} (pour un chapitre étoilé), nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, +% construisons un nouveau nom de fichier minitoc, fermons le descripteur de fichier puis le ré-ouvrons avec ce +% nouveau fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \if@mtc@longext@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For starred sectionning commands lower than \com{chapter}, a contents line is written into the minitoc file, +% with a font command added: +% \or\relax +% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées plus basses que \com{chapter}, une ligne de contenu est écrite +% dans le fichier minitoc, en lui ajoutant une commande de fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; it expands the list of entries and call \com{MTC@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle +% \com{MTC@next} pour traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@explist{\expandafter\MTC@next\MTC@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\openin} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en cherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, on traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0010]{minitoc}% + {No file #1. + \MessageBreak + MINITOCS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\MTC@toc + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0024]{minitoc}{PREPARING MINITOCS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\MTC@read + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\read} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\MTC@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MTC@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\MTC@test\MTC@line.....\MTC@% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to +% delimit chapters\footnote{The macro \com{MTC@test} has been patched to call \com{MTC@contentsline} with +% four parameters~instead of three (thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and +% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). The same remark applies to similar macros.}: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, +% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres\,\footnote{La macro \com{MTC@test} a été modifiée pour +% appeler \com{MTC@contentsline} avec quatre paramètres ~au lieu de trois +% (merci à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). +% La même remarque s'applique aux macros similaires.}: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. +% Finally process the next file in the list. +% ^^A Thanks to \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. +% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si +% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% ^^A Merci à~\name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\MTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MTC@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \MTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\MTC@list{\MTC@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\chapterend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin + \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \expandafter\MTC@toc + \else + \expandafter\MTC@read + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-lists of figures}\label{s+code+mlf} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-listes des figures}\label{s+code+mlf} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize. +% \or\relax +% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of figures file} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des figures} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros: +% \or\relax +% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes: +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\MLF@list{#2}% + \MLF@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Checks if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Teste si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@lof{% + \ifx\MLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLF@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{xchapter} is found, the counter \cnt{mtc} is incremented and a new minilof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des figures et détecte les mots-clés +% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et +% un nouveau fichier minilof est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfname} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilof file is built from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension: +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilof est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mlf\themtc\@gobble} + \def\mlfname{\jobname.mlf\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.F\themtc\@gobble} + \def\mlfname{\jobname.F\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mlfname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\figure} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% If we found a \com{figure} entry, we copy it into the minilof file: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{figure} ou \com{subfigure}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilof: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlf}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlfS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the LOF file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLF@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle +% \com{MLF@next} pour traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@explist{\expandafter\MLF@next\MLF@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\openin} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lof} file: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lof}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0008]{minitoc}% + {No file #1. + \MessageBreak + MINILOFS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\MLF@lof + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0034]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING MINILOFS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\MLF@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\read} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lof} file: +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\MLF@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@line} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLF@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\MLF@test\MLF@line.....\MLF@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to +% delimit chapters. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, +% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. +% Finally process the next file in the list. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. +% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si +% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\MLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLF@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \MLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\MLF@list{\MLF@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\chapterend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin + \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLF@lof + \else\expandafter\MLF@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-lists of tables}\label{s+code+mlt} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-listes des tableaux}\label{s+code+mlt} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize. +% \or\relax +% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of tables file} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des tableaux} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros: +% \or\relax +% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes: +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\MLT@list{#2}% + \MLT@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Checks if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Teste si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@lot{% + \ifx\MLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLT@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{xchapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter is incremented and a new minilot file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les mots-clés +% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et +% un nouveau fichier minilot est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mltname} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilot file it build from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension: +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilot est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mlt\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mltname{\jobname.mlt\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.T\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mltname{\jobname.T\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mltname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\table} +% \begin{macro}{\subtable} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% If we found a \com{table} entry, we copy it into the minilot file: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{table}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilot: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlt}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mltS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the LOT file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLT@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle +% \com{MLT@next} pour traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@explist{\expandafter\MLT@next\MLT@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\openin} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lot} file: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lot}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0009]{minitoc}% + {No file #1. + \MessageBreak + MINILOTS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\MLT@lot + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0037]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING MINILOTS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\MLT@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\read} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lot} file: +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\MLT@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@line} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLT@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\MLT@test\MLT@line.....\MLT@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to +% delimit chapters. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, +% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{13} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. +% Finally process the next file in the list. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. +% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si +% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\MLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLT@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \MLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\MLT@list{\MLT@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\chapterend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin + \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLT@lot + \else\expandafter\MLT@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that we terminate with a closing brace to end the chapter-level macros (end of the \emph{else} branch of a +% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| alternative). +% \or\relax +% Notez que nous terminons par une accolade fermante pour achever les macros du niveau chapitre (fin de la +% branche \emph{sinon} d'une alternative \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Macro to write a contents line}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macro pour écrire une ligne de contenu}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@dot} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@param} +% \begin{macro}{\write} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} macro makes the definition of \com{MTC@contentsline} shorter. An extra \com{edef} +% level is removed (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} rend la définition de \com{MTC@contentsline} plus courte. Un niveau +% supplémentaire de \com{edef} est retiré (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}): +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The arguments of \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} are: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] font shorthand $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname}; +% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] the \texttt{\#4} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlink). +% \end{itemize} +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% \or\relax +% Les arguments de \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} sont: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] un raccourci pour la fonte $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname}; +% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] l'argument \texttt{\#4} de \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlien). +% \end{itemize} +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@dot{.} +\def\MTC@WriteContentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \def\mtc@param{#4}% + \immediate\write\tf@mtc{% + {\string\reset@font + \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname + \string\mtc@string + \string\contentsline{#1}% + {\the\mtc@toks}% + {\string\reset@font + \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname + \space #3% + }% + \ifx\mtc@dot\mtc@param + \else + {#4}% + \fi + }% + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\write} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the same for a ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} line. The arguments of the macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} are: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}. +% \end{itemize} +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% \or\relax +% Et la même chose pour une ligne de «~pause café~»{\myCoffeecup}. Les arguments de +% la macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} sont: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@WriteCoffeeline#1#2#3{% + \immediate\write\tf@mtc{% + {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \string\mtc@string + {\the\mtc@toks}% + {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \space #3% + }% + }% + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Depth counters for partlofs and partlots} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les partlofs et les partlots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create the corresponding new counters: +% \dcnt{partlofdepth} and \dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% These counters are initialized to~2. +% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons les nouveaux compteurs +% correspondants: \dcnt{partlofdepth} et \dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. +% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{partlofdepth}\setcounter{partlofdepth}{2}}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{partlotdepth}\setcounter{partlotdepth}{2}}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Part level commands}\label{s+code+part.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{s+code+part.level} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{W0004} \com{part} is defined, we define some utility commands, a counter (\cnt{ptc}) +% for the parttocs and related commands (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, \com{decrementptc}, +% \com{incrementptc}), the +% obsolete command \com{firstpartis}, and the depth counter \dcnt{parttocdepth}. +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{W0004} \com{part} est définie, nous définissons quelques commandes utilitaires, un compteur (\cnt{ptc}) +% pour les parttocs et les commandes associées (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{incrementptc}), la commande +% obsolète \com{firstpartis} et le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{parttocdepth}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}% +{% +\def\xpart{xpart} +\def\Thepart{\arabic{ptc}} +\def\firstpartis#1% + {\mtcPackageWarning[W0004]{minitoc}% + {\string\firstpartis \space is an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command}% + \@firstpartis@used@true} +\newcounter{ptc} +\setcounter{ptc}{0} +\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{ptc}{#1}} +\def\decrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}} +\def\incrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{+1}} +\def\theptc{\arabic{ptc}} +\newcounter{parttocdepth} +\setcounter{parttocdepth}{2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But, sometimes, we need to make a difference between book/report and article classes (is \com{chapter} defined?), to +% have a different layout: the definition of \com{ptc@rule} is empty except if \com{chapter} is undefined. +% By default, there is no rule before/after parttocs, partlofs, and partlots for books. You should redeclare +% \com{ptc@rule} if you want these rules. +% \or\relax +% Mais, parfois, nous voulons faire une différence entre les classes \class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report} et \class{article} +% (\com{chapter} est-elle définie?), pour avoir une présentation différente: +% la définition de la macro \com{ptc@rule} est +% vide sauf si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie. Par défaut, il n'y~a pas de filets avant et après les parttocs, +% partlofs et partlots pour les livres. Vous devriez redéclarer \com{ptc@rule} si vous voulez ces filets. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}}% + {\let\ptc@rule\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we declare the default indentation (both sides) of the parttocs: +% \or\relax +% Et nous déclarons l'indentation (des deux côtés) par défaut des parttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\ptcindent +\@ifundefined{chapter}{\ptcindent=24\p@}{\ptcindent=\z@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fonts for the parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Fontes pour les parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the fonts for the parttocs. Note that they are larger if \com{chapter} is defined +% (\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}-like +% document classes) than when it is not (\class{article}-like document classes): +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les fontes pour les parttocs. Notez qu'elles sont plus grandes si \com{chapter} est définie +% (classes de document analogues à~\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}) que lorsqu'elle ne l'est pas (classes de +% document analogues à~\class{article}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \def\ptcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc + \def\ptcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (sections) + \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections) + \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections) + \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs) + \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs) + \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures) + \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures) + \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables) + \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables) + \def\ptifont{\Large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, the fonts are larger and \com{ptcCfont} must be defined: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, les fontes sont plus grandes et \com{ptcCfont} doit être définie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +{% + \def\ptcfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc + \def\ptcCfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (chapters) + \def\ptcSfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% (sections) + \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections) + \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections) + \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs) + \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs) + \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures) + \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures) + \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables) + \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables) + \def\ptifont{\LARGE\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Default titles for part-level mini-tables}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Titres par défaut pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the default position, the fonts and the layout for titles of the part-level mini-tables (\com{parttoc}, +% \com{partlof} and \com{partlot}). This formating is different if \com{chapter} is defined or undefined. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la position par défaut, les fontes et la mise en page pour les titres des mini-tables du niveau +% partie (\com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot}). Cette mise en page est différente selon que +% \com{chapter} est définie ou non. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is undefined, the definitions are very simple, for +% centered, flushleft, flushright or empty titles. +% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les définitions sont très simples, pour des titres centrés, cadrés +% à~gauche, cadrés à~droite, ou vides. +% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \def\c@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} + \def\l@pti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} + \def\r@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} + \def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} + \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But, if \com{chapter} is defined, we must simulate the formatting of a chapter head, which is more complex. +% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \or\relax +% Mais, si \com{chapter} est définie, nous devons simuler la mise en page d'une tête de chapitre, qui est plus +% complexe. +% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +{% +\def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} +% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} +% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a title on the left, we must test if the main text is on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Pour un titre cadré à~gauche, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@l{#1}]% + \else \@makephead@l{#1}\@afterheading \fi} +\def\@makephead@l#1{% + \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \ptifont #1\par \nobreak + \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} + }} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} +% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} +% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@r} +% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a title on the right, we must also test if the main text is on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Pour un titre cadré à~droite, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\r@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@r{#1}] + \else \@makephead@r{#1}\@afterheading \fi} +\def\@makephead@r#1{% + \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \ptifont #1\par \nobreak + \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} + }} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} +% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} +% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@c} +% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a centered title, we must also test if the main text is on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Pour un titre centré, nous devons aussi tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\c@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@c{#1}]% + \else \@makephead@c{#1}\@afterheading \fi} +\def\@makephead@c#1{% + \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% + {\parindent \z@ \centering \ptifont #1\par \nobreak + \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} + }}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on left: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont à~gauche: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\do@ptitc\l@pti \let\df@ptitc\l@pti +\let\do@ptilf\l@pti \let\df@ptilf\l@pti +\let\do@ptilt\l@pti \let\df@ptilt\l@pti +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{15} ^^A many macros +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{ptc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse}}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\endptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\@centercr} +% \begin{macro}{\list} +% \begin{macro}{\itemsep} +% \begin{macro}{\itemindent} +% \begin{macro}{\listparindent} +% \begin{macro}{\topsep} +% \begin{macro}{\parsep} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\partopsep} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each parttoc is placed inside a \env{ptc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the +% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{ptc@verse} and +% \com{endptc@verse}. +% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, then call \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} and +% set some dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, +% \com{itemindent}, \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} is set to zero if +% the \opt{tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines). +% \com{parskip} is set to zero if +% the \opt{k-tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines). +% Both margins are set to \com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} terminates the list and discourages +% a page break. +% The \env{ptc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{ptcoffset}). +% \or\relax +% Chaque parttoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{ptc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue +% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et est donc défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: +% \com{ptc@verse} et \com{endptc@verse}. Puisque c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord +% (de manière locale)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, puis appelons \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} et établissons quelques dimensions +% telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{itemindent}, +% \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si +% l'option \opt{tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes). +% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si +% l'option \opt{k-tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes). +% Les deux marges sont +% forcées à~\com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page. +% L'environnement \env{ptc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{ptcoffset}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ptc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{% + \topsep=1ex \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ + \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@ + \leftmargin=\ptcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin + \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi + \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1} + \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1} + }% + \item[]} +\def\endptc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{raggedright} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The part level mini-tables: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof}, and \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les mini-tables au niveau partie: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof} et \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot} +% \fi +% \end{raggedright} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands are essentially similar to the \com{minitoc} command, except that they should be placed after a +% \com{part} command to produce a parttoc, a partlof or a partlot, and the formatting is different and depends on +% the availability of the +% \com{chapter} command (for the fonts and the horizontal rules). The code is very similar. The \com{partlof} +% and \com{partlot} commands are siblings of the \com{parttoc} command. +% Note that \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} use page styles, because \verb|\beforepart...| and +% \verb|\afterpart...| commands imply usually a \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| command, and hence +% \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| must be called. +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes sont essentiellement similaires à~la commande \com{minitoc}, sauf qu'elles devraient être placées +% après une commande \com{part} pour produire une parttoc, une partlof ou une partlot, et que la mise en page est +% différente et dépend de la disponibilité de la commande \com{chapter} (pour les fontes et les filets +% horizontaux). Le code est très similaire. Les commandes \com{partlof} et \com{partlof} sont les cousines +% de la commande \com{parttoc}. Notez que \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} utilisent des styles +% de page, car les commandes \verb|\beforepart...| et \verb|\afterpart...| impliquent habituellement une commande +% \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, et donc \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| doit être appelée. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{parttoc} command}\icom{parttoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{parttoc}}\icom{parttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a parttoc (no automatic parttoc). +% First, \com{parttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{parttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une parttoc (pas de parttoc +% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{parttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur +% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{parttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme +% argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\parttoc@}{\parttoc@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{parttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@parttoc@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the parttoc file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{parttoc@} fait le véritable travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@parttoc@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire +% le nom du fichier parttoc): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\parttoc@[#1]{% +\global\@parttoc@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{ptc\Thepart}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{P\Thepart}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the parttoc file and give a warning if it is not here: +% \or\relax +% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier parttoc et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: +% \fi +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@parttoc@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the parttoc file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforeparttoc}, of course: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; +% d'abord, \com{beforeparttoc}, bien sûr: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeparttoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the parttoc title and set the page style: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la parttoc dans les marques de page et +% établissons le style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% + \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth \global\let\@mkboth\markboth + \thispageparttocstyle + \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of +% the parttoc title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la +% position du titre de la parttoc. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@ptitc\e@pti + \else\if #1n\let\do@ptitc\n@pti + \else\if #1c\let\do@ptitc\c@pti + \else\if #1l\let\do@ptitc\l@pti + \else\if #1r\let\do@ptitc\r@pti + \else\if #1d\let\do@ptitc\df@ptitc + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\ptctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptitc\e@pti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la parttoc, +% puis établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright \reset@font\ptcfont \parskip=\z@ \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]\kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the parttoc. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la parttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure +% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la parttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\ptc@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position close the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent + \itemindent=\z@ \labelwidth=\z@ \labelsep=\z@ \listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{parttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is +% necessary to avoid a negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la parttoc. La profondeur de table +% des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{parttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est +% nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une indentation négative. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{ptc@verse}{\ptcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth% + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% For chapter-level entries, we must invoke \com{l@chapter} ignoring the page number argument. +% A hook (redefinissable command) is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated +% via \com{ptc@setform}. +% Then the parttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa +% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en +% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et +% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{ptc@setform}. Puis le fichier parttoc est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}% + {\let\l@chapter@SVPN\l@chapter% + \def\l@chapter##1##2{\l@chapter@SVPN{##1}{\hbox{}}}}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \ptc@setform + \openparttoc\global\inparttoctrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inparttocfalse\closeparttoc + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{ptc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is +% not defined), and \com{afterparttoc}. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page +% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterparttoc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernafterparttoc + \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% + \afterparttoc\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{partlof} command}\icom{partlof} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlof}}\icom{partlof} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlof (no automatic partlof). +% First, \com{partlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{partlof@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlof (pas de partlof +% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur +% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme +% argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\partlof@}{\partlof@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{partlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlof@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlof file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{partlof@} fait le véritable travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlof@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire +% le nom du fichier partlof): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\partlof@[#1]{% +\global\@partlof@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{plf\Thepart}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{G\Thepart}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlof file and give a warning if it is not here: +% \or\relax +% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlof et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@partlof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the partlof file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforepartlof}, of course: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; +% d'abord, \com{beforepartlof}, bien sûr: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforepartlof +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlof title and set the page style: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlof dans les marques de page et +% établissons le style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% + {\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth + \global\let\@mkboth\markboth + \thispagepartlofstyle + \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of +% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la +% position du titre de la partlof. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@ptilf\e@pti + \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilf\n@pti + \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilf\c@pti + \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilf\l@pti + \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilf\r@pti + \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilf\df@ptilf + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\plftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilf\e@pti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlof, +% puis établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\plffont% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between the +% title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlof. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la partlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure +% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\plf@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\\hline + \mtc@hstrut\\ + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the partlof. +% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlofdepth}. +% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is necessary to avoid a negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlof. +% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlofdepth}. +% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une +% indentation négative. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{ptc@verse}{\plfoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\c@lofdepth=\c@partlofdepth + \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plf@setform}. +% Then the partlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa +% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en +% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et +% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plf@setform}. Puis le fichier partlof est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{plf@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \plf@setform + \openpartlof\global\inpartloftrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inpartloffalse\closepartlof + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{ptc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is +% not defined), and \com{afterpartlof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page +% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernafterpartlof + \nopagebreak[4]\plf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% + \afterpartlof\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{partlot} command}\icom{partlot} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlot}}\icom{partlot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlot (no automatic partlot). +% First, \com{partlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{partlot@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlot (pas de partlot +% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur +% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme +% argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\partlot@}{\partlot@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{partlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlot@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlot file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{partlot@} fait le véritable travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlot@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire +% le nom du fichier partlot): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +% +\def\partlot@[#1]{% +\global\@partlot@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{plt\Thepart}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{U\Thepart}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlot file and give a warning if it is not here: +% \or\relax +% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlot et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@partlof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the partlot file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforepartlot}, of course: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; +% d'abord, \com{beforepartlot}, bien sûr: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforepartlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlot title and set the page style: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlot dans les marques de page et +% établissons le style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% + \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth + \global\let\@mkboth\markboth + \thispagepartlotstyle + \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of +% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la +% position du titre de la partlot. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@ptilt\e@pti + \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilt\n@pti + \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilt\c@pti + \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilt\l@pti + \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilt\r@pti + \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilt\df@ptilt + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\plttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilt\e@pti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the partlot, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlot, +% puis établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\pltfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The partlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlot. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la partlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\plt@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\\hline + \mtc@hstrut\\ + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. +% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlot. +% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une +% indentation négative. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{ptc@verse}{\pltoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\c@lotdepth=\c@partlotdepth + \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plt@setform}. +% Then the partlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa +% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en +% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et +% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plt@setform}. Puis le fichier partlot est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{plt@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \plt@setform + \openpartlot\global\inpartlottrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inpartlotfalse\closepartlot + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{ptc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is +% not defined), and \com{afterpartlot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page +% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernafterpartlot + \nopagebreak[4]\plt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% + \afterpartlot\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Auxiliary commands for printing parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes auxiliaires pour l'impression des parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@psect} +% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\psect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following auxiliary commands are used in the printing of parttocs. Note that \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth +% to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). These commands are similar to +% \com{l@subsection}, only the arguments have been altered: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes auxiliaires suivantes sont utilisées dans l'impression des parttocs. Notez que \com{l@xpart} +% utilise une profondeur énorme pour inhiber l'impression de sa ligne de contenu (sauf si vous trichez). Ces +% commandes sont similaires à~\com{l@subsection}, seuls les arguments ont été altérés: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@xpart{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@pchapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@psect{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\pchapter{pchapter} +\def\psect{psect} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command, continued}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}, suite}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\sv@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We patch both branches of the \com{part} command: \com{@part} (unstarred \com{part}) and \com{@spart} +% (\com{part*}). We add the incrementation of the \cnt{ptc} counter to both branches. +% In the unstarred branch, +% we add \texttt{xpart} entries in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. In the starred branch, we add a \com{partbegin} +% line in the TOC. This command is just a marker and does nothing real (\com{relax}). +% \or\relax +% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{part}: \com{@part} (\com{part} non étoilée) et \com{@spart} +% (\com{part*}). Nous ajoutons l'incrémentation du compteur \cnt{ptc} dans les deux branches. Dans +% la branche non étoilée, nous ajoutons des entrées +% \texttt{xpart} dans les fichiers table des matières, liste des figures et liste des tableaux. Dans la branche +% étoilée, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{partbegin} dans le fichier table des matières. Cette commande est juste un +% marqueur et ne fait rien de concret (\com{relax}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\sv@part\mtc@svpart +\def\@part[#1]#2{\sv@part[{#1}]{#2}\relax +\addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{#1}% +\addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{#1}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{#1}% +\stepcounter{ptc}} +\let\sv@spart\@spart +\def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\sv@spart} +\let\ptc@spart\@spart +\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partend}\ptc@spart} +\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}\ptc@spart} +\let\partend\relax +\let\partbegin\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{doparttoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{doparttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{doparttoc} command works like the \com{dominitoc} command, \com{dopartlof} like \com{dominilof} +% and \com{dopartlot} like \com{dominilot}. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{doparttoc} fonctionne comme la commande \com{dominitoc}, \com{dopartlof} comme \com{dominilof} +% et \com{dopartlot} comme \com{dominilot}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{doparttoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and creates the +% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.ptc} becomes \suffix{.P} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{doparttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.ptc} devient \suffix{.P} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@doparttoc#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{ptc}{0}% + \PTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dopartlof} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plf} becomes \suffix{.G} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dopartlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plf} devient \suffix{.G} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dopartlof#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{ptc}{0}% + \PLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dopartlot} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plt} becomes \suffix{.U} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dopartlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plt} devient \suffix{.U} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dopartlot#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{ptc}{0}% + \PLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user macros, who detect the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les macros pour l'utilisateur, qui détectent l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\doparttoc@}{\doparttoc@[l]}} +\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlof@}{\dopartlof@[l]}} +\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlot@}{\dopartlot@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{doparttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of parttocs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{doparttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les +% titres des parttocs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@doparttoc@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\doparttoc \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@doparttoc@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@ptitc\e@pti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@ptitc\n@pti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@ptitc\c@pti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@ptitc\l@pti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@ptitc\r@pti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@doparttoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs) +% and flag this macro as used, a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les +% titres des partlofs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dopartlof@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dopartlof@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dopartlof \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dopartlof@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@ptilf\e@pti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilf\n@pti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilf\c@pti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilf\l@pti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilf\r@pti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dopartlof} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres +% des partlots) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dopartlot@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dopartlot@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dopartlot \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dopartlot@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@ptilt\e@pti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilt\n@pti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilt\c@pti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilt\l@pti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilt\r@pti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dopartlot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\@@doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros invoke the \verb|@dopart...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file +% descriptor. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros invoquent les \verb|\@dopart...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le descripteur de +% fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@@doparttoc{\@doparttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dopartlof{\@dopartlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dopartlot{\@dopartlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing macros for the parttocs} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les parttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste puis la retirons de la tête de liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\PTC@list{#2}% + \PTC@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@toc{% + \ifx\PTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PTC@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier parttoc +% est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part + \stepcounter{ptc}% + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc\@gobble}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc\@gobble}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starpart\relax + \stepcounter{ptc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines; this code extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc.: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées; ce code extrait et écrit les informations pour les +% chapitres, sections, etc.: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\pchapter + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee + \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And for the starred sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Et pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PTC@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PTC@next} pour +% traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@explist{\expandafter\PTC@next\PTC@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0013]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\PTC@toc + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0025]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\PTC@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\PTC@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PTC@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\PTC@test\PTC@line.....\PTC@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{PTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to +% delimit parts: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, +% principalement pour délimiter les parties: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the +% list. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si +% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la +% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\PTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PTC@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \PTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\PTC@list{\PTC@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\partend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\partbegin + \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PTC@toc + \else\expandafter\PTC@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlofs} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlofs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\PLF@list{#2}% + \PLF@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@lof{% + \ifx\PLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLF@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\plfname} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlof +% est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart + \stepcounter{ptc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\plfname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.plf\theptc}% + \def\plfname{\jobname.plf\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.G\theptc}% + \def\plfname{\jobname.G\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\plfname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\figure} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plf}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plfS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLF@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLF@next} pour +% traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@explist{\expandafter\PLF@next\PLF@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0011]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\PLF@lof + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0035]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\PLF@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\PLF@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLF@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\PLF@test\PLF@line.....\PLF@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{PLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to +% delimit parts: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, +% principalement pour délimiter les parties: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the +% list. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si +% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la +% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\PLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLF@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \PLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\PLF@list{\PLF@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\partend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\partbegin + \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLF@lof + \else\expandafter\PLF@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlots} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\PLT@list{#2}% + \PLT@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@lot{% + \ifx\PLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLT@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\pltname} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlot file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlot +% est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart + \stepcounter{ptc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\pltname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.plt\theptc}% + \def\pltname{\jobname.plt\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.U\theptc}% + \def\pltname{\jobname.U\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\pltname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\table} +% \begin{macro}{\subtable} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plt}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{pltS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLT@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLT@next} pour +% traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@explist{\expandafter\PLT@next\PLT@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0012]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\PLT@lot + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0038]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\PLT@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\PLT@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLT@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\PLT@test\PLT@line.....\PLT@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{PLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to +% delimit parts: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, +% principalement pour délimiter les parties: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the +% list. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si +% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la +% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\PLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLT@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \PLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\PLT@list{\PLT@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\partend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\partbegin + \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLT@lot + \else\expandafter\PLT@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% End of the part level stuff (begun in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}): +% \or\relax +% Fin du code pour le niveau partie (débuté dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Depth counters for sectlofs and sectlots} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les sectlofs et les sectlots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create new counters for the depths of +% the corresponding mini-tables: +% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% These counters are initialized to~2. +% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons de nouveaux compteurs pour les +% profondeurs des mini-tables correspondantes: +% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. +% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{sectlofdepth}\setcounter{sectlofdepth}{2}}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{sectlotdepth}\setcounter{sectlotdepth}{2}}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Section-level commands}\label{s+code+section.level.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes au niveau section}\label{s+code+section.level.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The section-level commands are defined only if \com{chapter} is \emph{not} defined, hence in article-like +% document classes, and only if \com{section} is defined: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes au niveau section sont définies seulement si \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} définie, donc dans +% les classes de document du genre article, et seulement si \com{section} est définie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \if@mtc@section@def@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0005} define the obsolete command \com{firstsectionis} (with its harmless warning), the counter \cnt{stc} +% of secttocs, the \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} and \com{incrementstc} commands, +% the depth counter \dcnt{secttocdepth} and its default +% value~2 (to include at least the subsections), the horizontal rule \com{stc@rule} (rule before/after +% secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), the indentation (both sides) \com{stcindent} for the secttocs (with its default +% values). +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0005} définissons la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis} (avec son avertissement bénin), +% le compteur \cnt{stc} de secttocs, les commandes \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} +% et \com{incrementstc}, +% le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{secttocdepth} et sa valeur par défaut~2 (pour inclure au moins +% les sous-sections), le filet horizontal \com{stc@rule} (filet avant/après la secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), l'indentation +% (des deux côtés) \com{stcindent} pour les secttocs (avec leurs valeurs par défaut). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\firstsectionis#1{\mtcPackageWarning[W0005]{minitoc}% + {\string\firstsectionis \space is an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command}% + \@firstsectionis@used@true} +\newcounter{stc}\setcounter{stc}{0}% +\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{stc}{#1}}% +\def\decrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}% +\def\incrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{+1}}% +\newcounter{secttocdepth}\setcounter{secttocdepth}{2}% +\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}% +\newlength\stcindent \stcindent=24\p@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fonts commands for secttocs and co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commands de fontes pour les secttocs et co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the fonts commands for the secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots and their titles: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les commandes de fontes pour les secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots et pour leurs titres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % secttoc +\def\stcSSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % (subsections) +\let\stcSSSfont\stcfont % (subsubsections) +\let\stcPfont\stcfont % (paragraphs) +\let\stcSPfont\stcfont % (subparagraphs) +\let\slffont\stcfont % sectlof (figures) +\let\slfSfont\stcfont % sectlof (subfigures) +\let\sltfont\stcfont % sectlot (tables) +\let\sltSfont\stcfont % sectlot (subtables) +\def\stifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % titles +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Internal macros for title positionning}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros internes pour le positionnement du titre}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some internal macros for title positionning, from the optional arguments of \com{dosecttoc} and \com{secttoc} +% commands (and siblings). +% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles (with a vertical correction for empty titles, +% from \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}): +% \or\relax +% Voici quelques macros internes pour le positionnement du titre, selon les arguments optionnels des +% commandes \com{dosecttoc} et \com{secttoc} (et leurs cousines). +% Titres centrés, cadrés à~gauche, cadrés à~droite ou vides (avec un correction verticale pour les titres vides, +% d'après \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\c@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} +\def\l@sti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} +\def\r@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} +\def\e@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +\def\n@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are flushleft. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sur cadrés à~gauche. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\do@stitc\l@sti +\let\df@stitc\l@sti +\let\do@stilf\l@sti +\let\df@stilf\l@sti +\let\do@stilt\l@sti +\let\df@stilt\l@sti +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{stc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+stc@verse} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{stc@verse}}\label{s+code+stc@verse} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \env{stc@verse} environment is a very simple list environment, analog to the standard \env{verse} environment. +% Some formatting parameters are adjusted. The \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} +% and \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} package options +% are honored. +% The \env{stc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{stcoffset}). +% \or\relax +% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} est un environnement de liste très simple, analogue à~l'environnement +% standard \env{verse}. Certains paramètres de mise en page sont ajustés. Les options de paquetage +% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} et \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} sont honorées. +% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{stcoffset}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{% + \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \topsep=1ex + \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@ + \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi + \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi + \leftmargin=\stcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}% + \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}% + }% + \item[]}% +\def\endstc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof}, and \ucom{sectlot} commands}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% These three commands are very similar. +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof} et \ucom{sectlot}}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{secttoc} command}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{secttoc}}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{secttoc} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a secttoc (no automatic secttoc). +% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minitoc} (but simpler). +% First, \com{secttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{secttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{secttoc} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une secttoc (pas de secttoc +% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minitoc} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, +% \com{secttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il +% est omis. Puis, \com{secttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\secttoc@}{\secttoc@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{secttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@secttoc@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the secttoc file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{secttoc@} effectue le vrai travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@secttoc@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour +% construire le nom du fichier secttoc): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\secttoc@[#1]{% +\global\@secttoc@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{stc\thestc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{S\thestc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the secttoc file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier secttoc, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou +% est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@secttoc@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the secttoc file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforesecttoc}, of course, and the page style feature: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier secttoc est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du +% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesecttoc}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforesecttoc + \thispagesecttocstyle +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we +% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est +% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}% + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@stitc\e@sti + \else\if #1n\let\do@stitc\n@sti + \else\if #1c\let\do@stitc\c@sti + \else\if #1l\let\do@stitc\l@sti + \else\if #1r\let\do@stitc\r@sti + \else\if #1d\let\do@stitc\df@stitc + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\stctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stitc\e@sti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the secttoc, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la secttoc, puis nous +% établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\stcfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The secttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the secttoc. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la secttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la secttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \nopagebreak[4]% + \ifx\stc@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the secttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{secttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la secttoc. La profondeur de table des +% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{secttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire +% pour ajuster le positionnement. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{stc@verse}{\stcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth% + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{stc@setform}. +% Then the secttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version +% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix +% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{stc@setform}. Puis le fichier secttoc est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \stc@setform% + \@ifundefined{stc@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \stc@setform% + \opensecttoc\global\insecttoctrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\insecttocfalse\closesecttoc + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{stc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersecttoc}. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersecttoc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernaftersecttoc + \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersecttoc\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlof} command}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlof}}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlof} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlof (no automatic sectlof). +% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilof} (but simpler). +% First, \com{sectlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlof@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{sectlof} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlof (pas de sectlof +% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilof} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, +% \com{sectlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il +% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlof@}{\sectlof@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlof@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlof file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{sectlof@} effectue le vrai travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlof@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour +% construire le nom du fichier sectlof): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlof@[#1]{% +\global\@sectlof@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{slf\thestc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{H\thestc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlof file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlof, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou +% est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@sectlof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the sectlof file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforesectlof}, of course, and the page style feature: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier sectlof est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du +% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlof}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispagesectlofstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}% + \beforesectlof +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we +% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est +% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@stilf\e@sti + \else\if #1n\let\do@stilf\n@sti + \else\if #1c\let\do@stilf\c@sti + \else\if #1l\let\do@stilf\l@sti + \else\if #1r\let\do@stilf\r@sti + \else\if #1d\let\do@stilf\df@stilf + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\slftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilf\e@sti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlof, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlof, puis nous +% établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\slffont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectlof title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlof. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la sectlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\slf@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \mtc@hstrut + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlof. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{sectlofdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlof. La profondeur de table des +% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlofdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire +% pour ajuster le positionnement. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{stc@verse}{\slfoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\c@lofdepth=\c@sectlofdepth + \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slf@setform}. +% Then the sectlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version +% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix +% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slf@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlof est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{slf@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \slf@setform% + \opensectlof\global\insectloftrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\insectloffalse\closesectlof + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{stc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlof}. +% The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlof}. +% La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernaftersectlof + \nopagebreak[4]\slf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlof\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlot} command}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlot}}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlot} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlot (no automatic sectlot). +% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilot} (but simpler). +% First, \com{sectlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlot@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{sectlot} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlot (pas de sectlot +% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilot} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, +% \com{sectlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il +% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlot@}{\sectlot@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlot@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlot file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{sectlot@} effectue le vrai travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlot@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour +% construire le nom du fichier sectlot): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlot@[#1]{% +\global\@sectlot@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{slt\thestc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{I\thestc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlot file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlot, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou +% est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@sectlot@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the sectlot file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforesectlot}, of course, and the page style feature: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier sectlot est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du +% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlot}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispagesectlotstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}% + \beforesectlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we +% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est +% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@stilt\e@sti + \else\if #1n\let\do@stilt\n@sti + \else\if #1c\let\do@stilt\c@sti + \else\if #1l\let\do@stilt\l@sti + \else\if #1r\let\do@stilt\r@sti + \else\if #1d\let\do@stilt\df@stilt + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\slttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilt\e@sti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlot, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlot, puis nous +% établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\sltfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break +% between the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlot. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la sectlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\slt@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \mtc@hstrut + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlot. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlot. La profondeur de table des +% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlotdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire +% pour ajuster le positionnement. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{stc@verse}{\sltoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\c@lotdepth=\c@sectlotdepth + \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slt@setform}. +% Then the sectlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version +% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix +% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slt@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlot est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{slt@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \slt@setform% + \opensectlot\global\insectlottrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\insectlotfalse\closesectlot + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{stc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlot}. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlot}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernaftersectlof + \nopagebreak[4]\slt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlot\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Auxiliary internal commands, section level}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes internes auxiliaires, niveau section}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\l@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\schapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define auxiliary commands, used for the mini-tables and as delimiters in the TOC file (and LOF and LOT files). +% The depth of \texttt{xsect} is huge to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques commandes auxiliaires, utilisées pour les mini-tables et comme délimiteurs dans le +% fichier table des matières (et les fichiers liste des figures et liste des tableaux). +% La profondeur de \texttt{xsect} est énorme pour inhiber l'impression de ses lignes de contenu (sauf si vous +% trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@xsect{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@xsection{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@schapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\xsect{xsect} \def\schapter{schapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command (continued)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{section} (suite)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We patch the both branches of the \com{section} command: \com{@sect} for the unstarred version and +% \com{@ssect} for the starred version. First, for the unstarred version (\com{@sect}), we add a +% \texttt{xsect} contents line in the LOF and in the LOT. The test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restricts the action to the +% section level macros (because \com{@sect} is also used by \com{subsection} and below, which have no +% mini-tables). +% \or\relax +% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{section}: \com{@sect} pour la version non étoilée et +% \com{@ssect} pour la version étoilée. Tout d'abord, pour la version non étoilée (\com{@sect}), nous ajoutons +% une ligne de contenu \texttt{xsect} dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux. +% Le test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restreint l'action aux macros de niveau section (parce que \com{@sect} est +% aussi utilisée par \com{subsection} et en dessous, qui n'ont pas de mini-tables). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\sv@sect\@sect +\gdef\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% +\ifnum #2=1\relax + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% +\fi +\sv@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If it is a section (unstarred or starred via \com{starsection}), we add a \texttt{xsect} entry +% in the LOF and in the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Si c'est une section (non étoilée ou étoilée via \com{starsection}), nous ajoutons une entrée \texttt{xsect} +% dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{ +\expandafter +\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% +\fi +\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@svsec} +% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipa} +% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\numberline} +% \begin{macro}{\@svsechd} +% \begin{macro}{\@xsect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the remainder of the section header formatting: +% \or\relax +% Et le reste de la mise en page d'un en-tête de section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax + \let\@svsec\@empty +\else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + \edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip 1em}% +\fi +\@tempskipa #5\relax +\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup #6\relax + \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% + {\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}% + \endgroup + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline + {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax + \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}% +\else + \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax + \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname + {#7}\addcontentsline + {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax + \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname} + \fi + #7}}% +\fi +\@xsect{#5}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we patch the unstarred branch (\com{@sect}). We define also the delimiting commands \com{sectbegin} and +% \com{sectend} commands. We do not add \com{sectbegin} if it is a subsection or deeper. +% \or\relax +% Puis nous modifions la branche non étoilée (\com{@sect}). Nous définissons aussi les commandes de délimitation +% \com{sectbegin} et \com{sectend}. Nous n'ajoutons pas \com{sectbegin} si c'est une sous-section ou plus +% profond. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\stc@sect\@sect +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2<1 \relax + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectbegin} + \fi + \stc@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}} +\let\sectend\relax +\let\sectbegin\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{dosecttoc} command and siblings}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{dosecttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosecttoc} command is very similar to \com{dominitoc}. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosecttoc} est très similaire à~\com{dominitoc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosecttoc} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.toc} file and creates the \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.stc} becomes \suffix{.S} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosecttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.stc} devient \suffix{.S} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dosecttoc#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{stc}{0} + \STC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosectlof} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slf} becomes \suffix{.H} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosectlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slf} devient \suffix{.H} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dosectlof#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{stc}{0} + \SLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosectlot} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slt} becomes \suffix{.V} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosectlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slt} devient \suffix{.V} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dosectlot#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{stc}{0} + \SLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user-level macros, who detect the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les commandes pour l'utilisateur, commandes qui détectent l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dosecttoc@}{\dosecttoc@[l]}} +\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlof@}{\dosectlof@[l]}} +\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlot@}{\dosectlot@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosecttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of secttocs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosecttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des secttocs) +% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dosecttoc@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dosecttoc \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dosecttoc@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@stitc\e@sti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@stitc\n@sti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@stitc\c@sti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@stitc\l@sti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@stitc\r@sti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dosecttoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlofs) +% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosectlof@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dosectlof@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dosectlof \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dosectlof@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@stilf\e@sti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@stilf\n@sti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@stilf\c@sti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@stilf\l@sti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@stilf\r@sti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dosectlof} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlots) +% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosectlot@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dosectlot@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dosectlot \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dosectlot@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@stilt\e@sti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@stilt\n@sti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@stilt\c@sti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@stilt\l@sti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@stilt\r@sti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dosectlot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros invoke the \verb|\@dosect...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file +% descriptor. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros invoquent les commandes \verb|\@dosect...| pour créer le fichier mini-table, puis ferment le +% descripteur de fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@@dosecttoc{\@dosecttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dosectlof{\@dosectlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dosectlot{\@dosectlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\STC@list{#2}% + \STC@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@toc{% + \ifx\STC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\STC@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\stcname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file. +% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new secttoc file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières. +% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier secttoc est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section + \stepcounter{stc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\stcname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis +% nous l'ouvrons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} or \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline} ou +% \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee + \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\stcname} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A\imess{I0033} starred section terminates the current section and creates a new secttoc file: +% \or\relax +% Une\imess{I0033} section étoilée termine la section courante et crée un nouveau fichier secttoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection + \stepcounter{stc}% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We process the entries for starred sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons les entrées pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{STC@next} to process the +% first one. +% \or\relax +% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier table des matières; nous expansons la liste des entrées et +% appelons \com{STC@next} pour traiter la première. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@explist{\expandafter\STC@next\STC@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les +% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0016]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\STC@toc + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0026]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\STC@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\STC@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{STC@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{STC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\STC@test\STC@line.....\STC@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{STC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to delimit sections; +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{STC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, +% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\STC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\STC@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \STC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\STC@list{\STC@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\sectend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\sectbegin + \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\STC@toc + \else\expandafter\STC@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\SLF@list{#2}% + \SLF@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@lof{% + \ifx\SLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLF@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\slfname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file. +% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures. +% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlof est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect + \stepcounter{stc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\slfname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis +% nous l'ouvrons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.slf\thestc}% + \def\slfname{\jobname.slf\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.H\thestc}% + \def\slfname{\jobname.H\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\slfname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\figure} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slf}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slfS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLF@next} to process the +% first one. +% \or\relax +% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des figures; nous expansons la liste des entrées et +% appelons \com{SLF@next} pour traiter la première. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@explist{\expandafter\SLF@next\SLF@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les +% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0014]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\SLF@lof + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0036]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\SLF@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLF@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\SLF@line + \expandafter\SLF@test\SLF@line.....\SLF@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{SLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to delimit sections; +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, +% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\SLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLF@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \SLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\SLF@list{\SLF@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\sectend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\sectbegin + \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLF@lof + \else\expandafter\SLF@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\SLT@list{#2}% + \SLT@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@lot{% + \ifx\SLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLT@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\sltname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file. +% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlot file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux. +% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlot est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect + \stepcounter{stc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\sltname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis +% nous l'ouvrons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.slt\thestc}% + \def\sltname{\jobname.slt\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.V\thestc}% + \def\sltname{\jobname.V\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\sltname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\table} +% \begin{macro}{\subtable} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slt}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{sltS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLT@next} to process the +% first one. +% \or\relax +% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des tableaux; nous expansons la liste des entrées et +% appelons \com{SLT@next} pour traiter la première. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@explist{\expandafter\SLT@next\SLT@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les +% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0015]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\SLT@lot + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0039]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\SLT@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLT@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\SLT@line + \expandafter\SLT@test\SLT@line.....\SLT@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{SLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to delimit sections; +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, +% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\SLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLT@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \SLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\SLT@list{\SLT@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\sectend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\sectbegin + \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLT@lot + \else\expandafter\SLT@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{End of section-level commands}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Fin des commandes du niveau section}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We terminate the \emph{else} branch of the test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, the \emph{true} branch of the +% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| and add an empty \emph{else} branch to that test: +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Nous terminons la branche \emph{sinon} du test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, la branche \emph{vraie} du +% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| et ajoutons une branche \emph{sinon} vide à~ce test: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi% end of \if@mtc@section@def@ +\fi% end of \if@mtc@chapter@undef@ +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{16} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcprepare} command}\icom{mtcprepare} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcprepare}}\icom{mtcprepare} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{I0048} command tests the availability of the \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} minitoc preparation commands and +% of the contents files, then calls as much as possible of these preparation commands. A hint is given. +% \or\relax +% Cette\imess{I0048} commande teste la disponibilité des commandes minitoc de préparation \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} et des +% fichiers de contenu, puis appelle autant de ces commandes de préparation que possible. Un \emph{hint} est +% émis. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\mtcprepare@}{\mtcprepare@[l]}}% +\def\mtcprepare@[#1]{% +\@ifundefined{part}{}{% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\doparttoc[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dopartlof[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dopartlot[#1]}{}% +}% +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dosecttoc[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dosectlof[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dosectlot[#1]}{}% + }% +}{% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dominitoc[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dominilof[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dominilot[#1]}{}% +}% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0048]{minitoc(hints)}% + {Using \string\mtcprepare\space may induce some + \MessageBreak + hints about the preparation commands, + \MessageBreak + because it invokes ALL the preparation + \MessageBreak + commands allowed by the document class, + \MessageBreak + without any previous check\@gobble}% +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\nofiles} +% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In case the document uses the \com{nofiles} command (in its preamble), the auxiliary files for the mini-tables +% should not be overwritten by the preparation commands, so these ones must be just faked; as these commands may +% have an optional argument, they will be faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get +% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. Problem signaled by \name{Andreas}{Deininger}. +% \or\relax +% Dans le cas où le document utilise la commande \com{nofiles} (dans son préambule), les fichiers auxiliaires pour +% les mini-tables ne doivent pas être ré-écrits par les commandes de préparation, donc celles-ci doivent seulement être +% simulées; comme ces commandes peuvent avoir un argument optionnel, elles seront simulées en utilisant la +% macro interne de \LaTeX\ \com{@ifnextchar} (pour obtenir l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande +% utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. Problème signalé par \name{Andreas}{Deininger}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A test is placed in a \com{AtBeginDocument} and gives a warning if \com{nofiles} is used: +% \or\relax +% Un test est placé dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et donne un avertissement si \com{nofiles} est utilisée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{\if@filesw\relax\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0098]{minitoc}% + {--- You have used the \string\nofiles\space command + \MessageBreak + in your preamble; all preparation commands + \MessageBreak + in the body of the document will be ignored} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since \com{nofiles} has been used, we must disable all the +% preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Puisque \com{nofiles} a été utilisée, nous devons inhiber +% toutes les commandes de préparation: +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Command \com{mtcprepare}: +% \or\relax +% Commande \com{mtcprepare}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% End of the inhibition of the preparation commands and of the \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Fin de l'inhibition des commandes de préparation et du bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Necessary \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+necessary.l@} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} nécessaires}\label{s+code+necessary.l@} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@listof} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \verb|\l@...| commands (analog to \com{l@section} or \com{l@paragraph}) are required to format some +% entries in the mini-tables, for starred sectionning commands essentially: +% \or\relax +% Quelques commandes \verb|\l@...| (analogues à~\com{l@section} ou \com{l@paragraph}) sont requises pour +% mettre en page certaines entrées dans les mini-tables, essentiellement pour les commandes de sectionnement +% étoilées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@listof\l@section} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@listof\l@chapter} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section} +\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection} +\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection} +\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph} +\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The horizontal rules and their default values}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les filets horizontaux et leurs valeurs par défaut}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\stcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define here the various commands to activate ou inhibit the horizontal rules in the various kinds of +% mini-tables. Each such command is an indirect definition of the corresponding horizontal rule. The rules are +% .4\,pt high horizontal rules. We begin with rules for mini-tables of contents. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons ici les diverses commandes pour activer ou inhiber les filets horizontaux dans les diverses +% sortes de mini-tables. Chacune de ces commandes est une définition indirecte du filet horizontal correspondant. +% Les filets sont des filets horizontaux épais de 0.4\,pt. Nous commençons par les filets pour les mini-tables des matières. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\noptcrule{\let\ptc@rule\relax} +\def\nomtcrule{\let\mtc@rule\relax} +\def\nostcrule{\let\stc@rule\relax} +\def\ptcrule{\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\mtcrule{\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\stcrule{\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\mtc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\slfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, the rules for mini-lists of figures: +% \or\relax +% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\noplfrule{\let\plf@rule\relax} +\def\nomlfrule{\let\mlf@rule\relax} +\def\noslfrule{\let\slf@rule\relax} +\def\plfrule{\def\plf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\mlfrule{\def\mlf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\slfrule{\def\slf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\plf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\mlf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\slf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\pltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\sltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, the rules for mini-lists of tables: +% \or\relax +% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de tableaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\nopltrule{\let\plt@rule\relax} +\def\nomltrule{\let\mlt@rule\relax} +\def\nosltrule{\let\slt@rule\relax} +\def\pltrule{\def\plt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\mltrule{\def\mlt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\sltrule{\def\slt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\plt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\mlt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\slt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands\,\footnote{The general concept of the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands was proposed +% by \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} have been introduced to build a nicer user interface, and each of them replaces +% numerous user commands, offering a rather unified and logical syntax. +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes\,\footnote{Le concept général des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} a été proposé par +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} ont été introduites pour construire une meilleure interface utilisateur, et chacune +% d'elles remplace de nombreuses commandes utilisateur, offrant une syntaxe assez unifiée et logique. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Keywords for the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mots-clés pour les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some common keywords for the \verb|\mtcset...| commands. A keyword is created via +% the \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} mechanism the following way: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{family}\verb|@|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{abbreviation}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{family} is the name of a group of keywords relative to one or several \verb|\mtcset...| macros, +% \emph{name} is the keyword that the user gives as argument to the \verb|\mtcset...| macro, and +% \emph{abbreviation} is a string used to build the name of the macro effectively used. As some \verb|\mtcset...| +% macros have several keyword parameters, this method can reduce the number of macros at the user level, at the cost +% of few keyword families. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques mots-clés communs pour les commandes \verb|\mtcset...|. Un mot-clé est créé via le +% mécanisme \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} de la manière suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{famille}\verb|@|\emph{nom}\verb|}{|\emph{abréviation}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{famille} est le nom d'un groupe de mots-clés concernent une ou plusieurs macros \verb|\mtcset...|, +% \emph{nom} est le mot-clé que l'utilisateur donne comme argument à~la macro \verb|\mtcset...|, et +% \emph{abréviation} est une chaîne utilisée pour construire le nom de la macro effectivement utilisée. Comme +% certaines macros \verb|\mtcset...| ont plusieurs paramètres mots-clés, cette méthode peut réduire le nombre de +% macros au niveau de l'utilisateur, au prix de quelques familles de mots-clés. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a family (\texttt{typetable}) of keywords for the types of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{typetable}) de mots-clés pour les types de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@parttoc}{ptc}\def\mtc@typetable@parttoc{ptc} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlof}{plf}\def\mtc@typetable@partlof{plf} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlot}{plt}\def\mtc@typetable@partlot{plt} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minitoc}{mtc}\def\mtc@typetable@minitoc{mtc} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilof}{mlf}\def\mtc@typetable@minilof{mlf} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilot}{mlt}\def\mtc@typetable@minilot{mlt} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@secttoc}{stc}\def\mtc@typetable@secttoc{stc} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlof}{slf}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlof{slf} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlot}{slt}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlot{slt} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then another family (\texttt{typetitle}) for the titles of the mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Puis une autre famille (\texttt{typetitle}) pour les titres des mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@parttoc}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@parttoc{pti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlof}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlof{pti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlot}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlot{pti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minitoc}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minitoc{mti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilof}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilof{mti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilot}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilot{mti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@secttoc}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@secttoc{sti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlof}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlof{sti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlot}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlot{sti} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a family (\texttt{YN}) of keywords to recognize the keywords ``\texttt{off}'' and ``\texttt{on}'', with their +% many synonyms\,\footnote{This (deliberately extreme) case shows the easyness for creating synonyms of frequently +% used keywords. Note also that when a keyword contains a non-letter character, we must use a hack with +% \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} \com{endcsname}.} +% and meaning false or true\FZ: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{YN}) de mots-clés pour reconnaître les mots-clés «~\texttt{off}~» et +% «~\texttt{on}~», avec leurs nombreux synonymes\,\footnote{Ce cas (délibérément extrême) montre la facilité de création de +% synonymes pour des mots-clés fréquemment utilisés. Notez aussi que lorsqu'un mot-clé contient un caractère qui +% n'est pas une lettre, nous devons ruser en utilisant \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} +% \com{endcsname}.} et signifiant faux ou vrai\,\FZ: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@off}{no}\def\mtc@YN@off{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@OFF}{no}\def\mtc@YN@OFF{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@no}{no}\def\mtc@YN@no{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@NO}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NO{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@n}{no}\def\mtc@YN@n{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@N}{no}\def\mtc@YN@N{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@false}{no}\def\mtc@YN@false{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@FALSE}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FALSE{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@faux}{no}\def\mtc@YN@faux{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@FAUX}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FAUX{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@f}{no}\def\mtc@YN@f{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@F}{no}\def\mtc@YN@F{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@NON}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NON{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@non}{no}\def\mtc@YN@non{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@0}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@0\endcsname{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@-}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@-\endcsname{no} +% +\@namedef{mtc@YN@on}{}\def\mtc@YN@on{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@ON}{}\def\mtc@YN@ON{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@yes}{}\def\mtc@YN@yes{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@YES}{}\def\mtc@YN@YES{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@y}{}\def\mtc@YN@y{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@Y}{}\def\mtc@YN@Y{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@true}{}\def\mtc@YN@true{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@TRUE}{}\def\mtc@YN@TRUE{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@t}{}\def\mtc@YN@t{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@T}{}\def\mtc@YN@T{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@vrai}{}\def\mtc@YN@vrai{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@VRAI}{}\def\mtc@YN@VRAI{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@v}{}\def\mtc@YN@v{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@V}{}\def\mtc@YN@V{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@OUI}{}\def\mtc@YN@OUI{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@oui}{}\def\mtc@YN@oui{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@O}{}\def\mtc@YN@O{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@o}{}\def\mtc@YN@o{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@1}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@1\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@+}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@+\endcsname{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfont}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the sectionning level keywords (note that \texttt{part} is not a member of this family (\texttt{sectlevel}), +% because no contents line for a +% part can appear in a mini-table, part being the highest sectionning level); ``\texttt{*}''~represents ``any level'', +% and is used to set the global default font for a given kind of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les mots-clés pour les niveaux de sectionnement (notez que \texttt{part} n'est pas membre de +% cette famille (\texttt{sectlevel}), car aucune ligne de contenu pour une partie ne peut apparaître dans une +% mini-table, la partie étant le plus haut niveau de sectionnement); <<~\texttt{*}~>>~représente <<~tout +% niveau~>>, et est utilisée pour établir la fonte globale par défaut pour un genre donné de mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@chapter}{C}\def\mtc@sectlevel@chapter{C} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@section}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@section{S} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsection}{SS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsection{SS} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection}{SSS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection{SSS} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@paragraph}{P}\def\mtc@sectlevel@paragraph{P} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph}{SP}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph{SP} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@*}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@sectlevel@*\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@figure}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@figure{} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@table}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@table{} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subfigure}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subfigure{S} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subtable}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subtable{S} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfont} command has the following syntax: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{level-name}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} a la syntaxe suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-niveau}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|, the \emph{level-name} is a sectionning level like +% \verb|subsection| (no backslash). The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic +% commands usually. +% \or\relax +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|, le \emph{nom-niveau} est un niveau de +% sectionnement tel que \verb|subsection| (sans contre-oblique). Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une spécification +% de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setfont@\@mtc@setfont@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we begin the command, which has three arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous commençons la commande, qui a trois arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetfont}[3]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{E0013} two first arguments of this command are keywords. They must be translated into the effective strings. +% We process the first argument, a keyword from the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc|, we get \cnt{mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Les\imess{E0013} deux premiers arguments sont des mots-clés. Ils doivent être traduits en chaînes effectives. +% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé dans +% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc|, nous obtenons \cnt{mtc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setfont@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfont@false + \def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0013]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mta@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{E0014} second argument, a keyword from the family \texttt{sectlevel}, is processed the same way and +% the result is stored into a macro \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. +% Example: if \verb|#2| is the \verb|subparagraph| keyword, we get~\verb|SP|. +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{E0014} deuxième argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{sectlevel}, est traité de la même manière +% et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#2| est le mot-clé \verb|subparagraph|, +% nous obtenons~\verb|SP|. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@level@abbrev{X} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@sectlevel@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfont@false + \def\mtc@level@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0014]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2). + \MessageBreak + It should be a sectionning level + \MessageBreak + (part...subparagraph) or * }% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@level@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@sectlevel@#2}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we construct the effective macro to be applied: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous construisons la macro effective qui sera appliquée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc| and \verb|#2| is \verb|subsection|, we get \verb|mtcSSfont|, which is the +% name of the command for the font of a subsection entry in a minitoc (the backslash is missing, but we will use +% a \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pair to apply the constructed command). +% \or\relax +% Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc| et \verb|#2| est \verb|subsection|, nous obtenons \verb|mtcSSfont|, qui +% est le nom de la commande pour la fonte d'une entrée de sous-section dans une minitoc (il manque la +% contre-oblique, mais nous utiliserons une paire \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pour appliquer la +% commande construite). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But all combinaisons are not legal (the level of the entry must be lower than the level of the mini-table, and +% the kind\,\footnote{``Kind'' being sectionning, (sub-)figure, or (sub-)table.} of the entry must be consistent +% with that of the mini-table), +% so we must test. Special care must be taken for testing via internal defined commands (\emph{quarks}) +% with \texttt{@mtcqk} at the end of their names). +% \or\relax +% Mais toutes les combinaisons ne sont pas légales (le niveau de l'entrée doit être plus bas que celui de la +% mini-table et le genre\,\footnote{Le <<~genre~>> étant sectionnement, (sous-)figure ou (sous)-table.} de +% l'entrée doit être cohérent avec celui de la mini-table),), donc nous devons tester. +% Un soin particulier doit être pris pour tester en utilisant +% des commandes internes définies (\emph{quarks} avec \texttt{@mtcqk} à~la fin de leurs noms). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\parttoc@mtcqk{parttoc@mtcqk} +\def\minitoc@mtcqk{minitoc@mtcqk} +\def\secttoc@mtcqk{secttoc@mtcqk} +\def\partlof@mtcqk{partlof@mtcqk} +\def\minilof@mtcqk{minilof@mtcqk} +\def\sectlof@mtcqk{sectlof@mtcqk} +\def\partlot@mtcqk{partlot@mtcqk} +\def\minilot@mtcqk{minilot@mtcqk} +\def\sectlot@mtcqk{sectlot@mtcqk} +\def\part@mtcqk{part@mtcqk} +\def\chapter@mtcqk{chapter@mtcqk} +\def\appendix@mtcqk{appendix@mtcqk} +\def\section@mtcqk{section@mtcqk} +\def\subsection@mtcqk{subsection@mtcqk} +\def\subsubsection@mtcqk{subsubsection@mtcqk} +\def\paragraph@mtcqk{paragraph@mtcqk} +\def\subparagraph@mtcqk{subparagraph@mtcqk} +\def\figure@mtcqk{figure@mtcqk} +\def\table@mtcqk{table@mtcqk} +\def\subfigure@mtcqk{subfigure@mtcqk} +\def\subtable@mtcqk{subtable@mtcqk} +\@mtc@setfont@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\parttoc@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlof@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlot@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minitoc@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilof@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilot@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\secttoc@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlof@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlot@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} the combinaison is legal, +% we apply it, i.e.,~we redefine the meaning of the constructed macro with the sequence +% of commands given as third argument of \com{mtcsetfont} and we log that event (we store the third argument in a +% token register to can print it \emph{verbatim}); +% if the combinaison is not legal, an error message is displayed. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} la combinaison est légale, +% nous l'appliquons, c'est-à-dire que nous redéfinissons la signification de la +% macro construite comme étant la séquence de commandes donnée en troisième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} et nous +% notons cet événement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} (nous rangeons le troisième argument dans un registre +% \emph{token} pour pouvoir l'écrire \emph{verbatim}); +% si la combinaison n'est pas légale, un message d'erreur est affiché. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setfont@ + \def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font} + \mtc@toks{#3} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0015]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfont\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmp@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmp@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0024]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsetfont\space has incompatible + \MessageBreak + first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitlefont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitlefont}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsetfont} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsetfont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using +% NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic commands usually. The difference is the absence of the second keyword argument, because +% the \emph{font commands} will be applied to the title of each mini-table of the given kind. +% +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une +% spécification de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. La différence est +% l'absence du deuxième argument mot-clé, car les \emph{commandes de fonte} seront appliquées au titre de chaque +% mini-table du genre donné. +% +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@settitlefont@\@mtc@settitlefont@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we begin the definition of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command, which has two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Et nous commençons la définition de la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}, qui a deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsettitlefont}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0022} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetitle} family, then the result is stored into +% \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0022} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetitle}, puis le résultat est +% rangé dans \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@settitlefont@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetitle@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@settitlefont@false + \def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0022]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitlefont \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetitle@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmptf@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} we build the name of the effective command and apply this command: +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} nous construisons le nom de la commande effective et appliquons cette commande: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@settitlefont@ + \def\mtc@tmptf@name{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev font} + \mtc@toks{#2}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0018]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitlefont\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmptf@name" as + \MessageBreak + "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmptf@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0034]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\\mtcsettitlefont\space uses + \MessageBreak + an illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitle} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitle}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{texte}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{text} is the text for a mini-table title. +% \or\relax +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Le \emph{texte} est le texte pour un titre +% de mini-table. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@settitle@\@mtc@settitle@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we define the \com{mtcsettitle} command, which has two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsettitle}, qui a deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsettitle}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0021} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0021} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé +% dans \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@settitle@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@settitle@false + \def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0021]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitle \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtati@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpti@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} we construct the name of the effective macro and apply it: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} nous construisons le nom de la macro effective et nous l'appliquons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@settitle@ + \def\mtc@tmpti@name{\mtc@mtati@abbrev title}% + \mtc@toks{#2}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0017]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitle\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmpti@name" as + \MessageBreak + "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpti@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0033]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsettitle\space uses + \MessageBreak + an illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetformat} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetformat}}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define first the keywords (family \texttt{formatparam}) for the three formatting parameters that this command +% can alter: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons d'abord les mots-clés (famille \texttt{formatparam}) pour les trois paramètres de mise en page +% que cette commande peut altérer: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@dotinterval}{dotsep}% +\def\mtc@arg@dotinterval{dotsep} +\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@tocrightmargin}{tocrmarg}% +\def\mtc@arg@tocrightmargin{tocrightmargin} +\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@pagenumwidth}{pnumwidth}% +\def\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth{\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth} +%% \@namedef{mtc@arg@numwidth}{numwidth} %not yet available +%% \def\mtc@arg@numwidth{\mtc@arg@numwidth} %not yet available +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetformat} command needs an initialization to be done at the beginning of the document, to set the +% defaults values of the formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetformat} a besoin qu'une initialisation soit faite en début de document pour établir les +% valeurs par défaut des paramètes de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpnumwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@pnumwith} for each type of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@pnumwith} pour chaque type de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{ptcpnumwidth}{\let\ptcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{stcpnumwidth}{\let\stcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{mtcpnumwidth}{\let\mtcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{plfpnumwidth}{\let\plfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlfpnumwidth}{\let\mlfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{slfpnumwidth}{\let\slfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{pltpnumwidth}{\let\pltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{mltpnumwidth}{\let\mltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{sltpnumwidth}{\let\sltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mtclofrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\stclotrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\plftocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mlflofrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\slflotrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\plttocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mltlofrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\sltlotrmarg} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@tocrmarg} for each type of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@tocrmarg} pour chaque type de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{ptctocrmarg}{\let\ptctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{mtctocrmarg}{\let\mtctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{stctocrmarg}{\let\stctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{plftocrmarg}{\let\plftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlftocrmarg}{\let\mlftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{slftocrmarg}{\let\slftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{plttocrmarg}{\let\plttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlttocrmarg}{\let\mlttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{slttocrmarg}{\let\slttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\stcdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\plfdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\slfdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\pltdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mltdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\sltdotsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@dotsep} for each type of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@dotsep} pour chaque type de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{ptcdotsep}{\let\ptcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{mtcdotsep}{\let\mtcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{stcdotsep}{\let\stcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{plfdotsep}{\let\plfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlfdotsep}{\let\mlfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{slfdotsep}{\let\slfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{pltdotsep}{\let\pltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{mltdotsep}{\let\mltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{sltdotsep}{\let\sltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we terminate the \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Et nous terminons le bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The executive part is done via the following macros, which are invoked in the \env{mtc@verse}-like +% environments for each kind of mini-table. These commands activate the values recorded by \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \or\relax +% La partie exécutive est effectuée via les macros suivantes, qui sont invoquées dans les environnements analogues +% à~\env{mtc@verse} pour chaque genre de mini-table. Ces commandes activent les valeurs enregistrées par +% \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{ptc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{ptc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ptc@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\ptcpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\ptctocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\ptcdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\mtcpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\mtctocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\mtcdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{stc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{stc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stc@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\stcpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\stctocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\stcdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{plf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{plf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\plf@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mlf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mlf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mlf@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\mlfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\mlftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\mlfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{slf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{slf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\slf@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\slfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\slftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\slfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{plt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{plt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\plt@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\pltpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plttocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\pltdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mlt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mlt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mlt@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{slt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{slt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\slt@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We now define a flag and the \com{mtcsetformat} command, with has the following syntax: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter-name}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, \emph{parameter-name} is a keyword of +% the \texttt{formatparam} family and \emph{value}, the value of this parameter for the given kind of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetformat}, avec syntaxe suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, \emph{nom-paramètre} est un mot-clé de la +% famille \texttt{formatparam} et \emph{valeur}, la valeur de ce paramètre pour le genre de mini-table donné. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setformat@\@mtc@setformat@true +\newcommand{\mtcsetformat}[3]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0021} now process the first argument and store the result in \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0021} nous traitons le premier argument et rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X} +\def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setformat@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setformat@false + \def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0015]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else \edef\mtc@mtf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0016} we process the second argument and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0016} le deuxième argument est traité et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@formatparam@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setformat@false + \def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0016]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2). + \MessageBreak + It should be a formatting param choosen from: + \MessageBreak + pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}% +\else + \edef\mtc@fparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@formatparam@#2}}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfm@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} name of the storage macro is built and it receives the third parameter +% as value (\emph{via}~\com{edef} because it can contain some complex code): +% \or\relax +% Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} nom de la macro de stockage est construit et elle reçoit le troisième paramètre +% comme valeur (\emph{via}~\com{edef} car il peut contenir du code complexe): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setformat@ + \mtc@toks{#3}% + \def\mtc@tmpfm@name{\mtc@mtf@abbrev\mtc@fparam@abbrev}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0016]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetformat\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmpfm@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"} + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfm@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0025]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsetformat\space has incompatible + \MessageBreak + first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}% +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers}}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command activates of inhibits page numbers in the mini-tables of a given kind. Its syntax is the following: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}), +% or \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the page numbers. \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} have many synonyms. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables du genre donné. Sa syntaxe est la +% suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}) +% et \texttt{on} ou \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les numéros de +% pages. \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some flags: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@ \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false +\newif\if@mtc@spn@ok@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once, +% for the specified type of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro +% interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro +% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié. +% +% \lneed{5} +% \fi % +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers}[2]{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax + \@ifundefined{part}{}% + {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{parttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlof}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% + {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{minitoc}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilof}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{secttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlof}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlot}{#2}} + \else + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{#1}{#2}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumber@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} internal macro, with two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@}, avec deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers@}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0017} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, and store the result in +% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0017} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, et rangeons le résultat dans +% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setpagenumbers@true +\def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false + \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0017]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong first + \MessageBreak + argument (#1)}% + {It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, +% and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}. +% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed. +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN}, +% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}. +% Le nom de la macro effective est construit puis la macro exécutée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@spn@ok@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@spn@ok@false + \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} + \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false + \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0018]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong second + \MessageBreak + argument (#2)}% + {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}} + \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrevX{X} + \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX} + \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev\mtc@mttpn@abbrev pagenumbers} + \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@pnsw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX + \mtcPackageInfo[I0022]{minitoc}% + {Page numbers are inhibited + \MessageBreak + for the #1s} + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0021]{minitoc}% + {Page numbers are activated + \MessageBreak for the #1s} + \fi + \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetrules} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetrules}}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is very similar to \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and its syntax is the same: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}), +% or \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the horizontal rules. \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} have many synonyms. +% +% Hence the code is similar. +% \or\relax +% Cette macro ressemble beaucoup à~\com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et sa syntaxe est la même: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}) +% et \texttt{on} ou +% \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les filets horizontaux. \texttt{on} et +% \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes. +% +% Donc le code est similaire. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some flags: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setrules@ \@mtc@setrules@false +\newif\if@mtc@sru@ok@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro +% \com{mtcsetrules@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once, +% for the specified type of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro +% interne \com{mtcsetrules@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro +% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié. +% \fi % +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetrules}[2]{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax + \@ifundefined{part}{}% + {\mtcsetrules@{parttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{partlof}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{partlot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% + {\mtcsetrules@{minitoc}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{minilof}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{minilot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {\mtcsetrules@{secttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{sectlof}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{sectlot}{#2}} + \else + \mtcsetrules@{#1}{#2}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the \com{mtcsetrules@} internal macro, which has two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetrules@}, qui a deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetrules@}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0019} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family and store the result in a macro +% \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0019} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable} puis rangeons le résultat +% dans \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setrules@true +\def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setrules@false + \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0019]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1)}% + {It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mttru@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{if@setrules@false} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@noX} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, +% and store the result in a macro \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}. +% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed. +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN}, +% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}. +% Le nom de la macro effective est construit et cette macro est exécutée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@sru@ok@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@sru@ok@false + \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} + \@mtc@setrules@false + \mtcPackageError[E0020]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2)}% + {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@rusw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}} + \def\mtc@rusw@abbrevX{X} + \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX} + \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@rusw@abbrev\mtc@mttru@abbrev rule} + \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@rusw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX + \mtcPackageInfo[I0008]{minitoc}% + {Horizontal rules are inhibited + \MessageBreak + for the #1s} + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0007]{minitoc}% + {Horizontal rules are activated + \MessageBreak + for the #1s} + \fi + \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfeature} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfeature}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For this command, we must define three families of keywords, but the third is just used to add the word +% ``\texttt{style}'' for the ``\texttt{pagestyle}'' when ``\feat{pagestyle}'' is used. +% +% \or\relax +% Pour cette commande, nous devons définir trois familles de mots-clés, mais la troisième ne sert qu'à~ajouter le mot +% <<~\texttt{style}~>> pour le <<~\texttt{pagestyle}~>> lorsque <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>> est utilisé. +% +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A family (\texttt{ltypetable}) for the long names of the types of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Une famille (\texttt{ltypetable}) pour les noms longs des types de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@parttoc}{parttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@parttoc{parttoc} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlof}{partlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlof{partlof} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlot}{partlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlot{partlot} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minitoc}{minitoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minitoc{minitoc} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilof}{minilof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilof{minilof} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilot}{minilot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilot{minilot} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@secttoc}{secttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@secttoc{secttoc} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlof}{sectlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlof{sectlof} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlot}{sectlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlot{sectlot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A family (\texttt{featureparam}) for the type of feature: +% \or\relax +% Une famille (\texttt{featureparam}) pour le type de dispositif: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@before}{before}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@before{before} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@after}{after}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@after{after} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@open}{open}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@open{open} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@close}{close}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@close{close} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@pagestyle}{thispage}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@pagestyle{thispage} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And a family (\texttt{ft3}) to add ``style'' if it is a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature: +% \or\relax +% Et une famille (\texttt{ft3}) pour ajouter <<~style~>> si c'est un dispositif <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>>: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@before}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@before\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@after}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@after\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@open}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@open\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@close}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@close\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@pagestyle}{style}% + \expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@pagestyle\endcsname{style} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfeature} command has the following syntax: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{feature-name}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{feature-name} is a keyword of +% the \texttt{featureparam} family (but also of the \texttt{ft3} family), and \emph{commands} are the commands which +% constitute the selected feature. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetfeature} a la syntaxe suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-dispositif}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est une mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{nom-dispositif} est un mot-clé +% de la famille \texttt{featureparam} (mais aussi de la famille \texttt{ft3}), et \emph{commandes} sont les +% commandes qui constituent le dispositif choisi. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a flag and the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, with three arguments: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, qui a trois arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setfeature@\@mtc@setfeature@true +\newcommand{\mtcsetfeature}[3]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0011} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, and store +% the result in \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0011} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}, et rangeons le résultat +% dans \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X} +\def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setfeature@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfeature@false + \def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0011]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{E0012} second argument is a keyword of the \texttt{featureparam} family, the result is stored in +% \com{mtc@featparam@}; and the complement is computed from the first argument, interpreted as a keyword of the +% \texttt{ft3} family and whose result is stored in \com{mtc@featparam@third}. +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{E0012} deuxième argument est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{featureparam}, le résultat est rangé dans +% \com{mtc@featparam@}; et le complément est calculé d'après le premier argument, interprété comme un mot-clé de +% la famille \texttt{ft3} et dont le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@featparam@third}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@featureparam@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfeature@false + \def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@featparam@third{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0012]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2). + \MessageBreak + It should be a feature param + \MessageBreak + (before, after, open, close, pagestyle)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@featparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@featureparam@#2}} + \edef\mtc@featparam@third{\@nameuse{mtc@ft3@#2}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfeat@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} name of the effective macro is built by concatenating these three +% pieces (named \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev},\space +% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev},\space and \com{mtc@featparam@third}\space respectively), then this macro is executed: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Le\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} nom de la macro effective est construit en concaténant ces trois +% morceaux (nommés \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev}, +% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} et \com{mtc@featparam@third} respectivement), puis cette macro est exécutée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setfeature@ + \def\mtc@tmpfeat@name% + {\mtc@featparam@abbrev\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev\mtc@featparam@third}% + \mtc@toks{#3}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0014]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfeature\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\csname mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname" as + \MessageBreak + "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0023]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsetfeature\space has incompatible + \MessageBreak + first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetdepth} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetdepth}}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{depth} is the depth for a mini-table. +% If it is a mini-table for a list of figures or tables, the corresponding depth counter \virage\emph{must be +% available}, i.e.,~must have been created (often by an adequate package, like the \pack{subfig} +% package~\cite{subfig}). +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{profondeur} est la profondeur +% pour une mini-table. Si c'est une mini-table pour une liste de figures ou de tableaux, le compteur profondeur +% correspondant \virage\emph{doit être disponible}, c'est-à-dire qu'il doit avoir été créé (souvent par un paquetage +% adéquat, tel que le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setdepth@\@mtc@setdepth@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we define the \com{mtcsetdepth} command, with two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}, avec deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetdepth}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0009} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0009} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}. Le résultat est rangé +% dans \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setdepth@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setdepth@false + \def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0009]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtade@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpde@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} we construct the name of the effective counter +% and gave it the value: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} nous construisons le nom du compteur effectif +% et lui donnons la valeur: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setdepth@ + \def\mtc@tmpde@name{\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth} + \expandafter\noexpand\@ifundefined{c@\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0008]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth \space attempts to use + \MessageBreak + an undefined counter (#1depth).}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{% + \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the. + \mtcPackageInfo[I0013]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth\space redefines the counter + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmpde@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\csname c@\mtc@tmpde@name\endcsname=#2}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0010]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}% +\fi}% end of \mtcsetdepth +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetoffset} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetoffset}}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{value} is the offset value for a mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{valeur} est celle du déplacement +% latéral pour une mini-table. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setoffset@\@mtc@setoffset@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we define the \com{mtcsetoffset} command, with two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetoffset}, avec deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetoffset}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0042} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0042} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé +% dans \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setoffset@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setoffset@false + \def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0042]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpof@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} we construct the name of the effective offset and gave it the value: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} nous construisons le nom du déplacement effectif +% et lui donnons la valeur: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setoffset@ + \def\mtc@tmpof@name{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset.} + \expandafter\noexpand\@ifundefined{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0041]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset \space attempts to use + \MessageBreak + an undefined offset (\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset).}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{% + \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the. + \mtcPackageInfo[I0052]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset\space redefines + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\def\csname \mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset\endcsname{#2}}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0043]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}% +\fi}% end of \mtcsetoffset +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Polymorphic entries}\label{s+code+polym} +% \or\relax +% \section{Entrées polymorphes}\label{s+code+polym} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A toc entry should be able to have variants when it appears in the normal text (like the mandatory argument of +% a sectionning command), in a page header or in the main TOC (like the optionnal argument of a sectionning +% command), in a minitable (parttoc, minitoc or secttoc). Similar behaviour should be available for entries in th +% LOF or the LOT. So we define three commands to be used inside the optionnal argument of a sectionning command or +% of \com{caption} for a figure or a table. These commands must be robust (because used in optionnal arguments) +% and have 4~arguments: (1)~the variant to appear in a parttoc (or partlof or partlof), +% (2)~the variant to appear in a minitoc (or minilof or minilof), +% (3)~the variant to appear in a secttoc (or sectlof or sectlof). +% (4)~the variant to appear in the main TOC (or LOF or LOT). +% The variant to appear locally as title of the sectionning unit or as local caption of the figure or table is +% the mandatory argument of the sectionning command or of the caption command (see section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% We use the \verb|\ifin...| flags. +% \or\relax +% Une entrée de table des matières devrait disposer de variantes selon qu'elle apparaît dans le texte normal +% (comme l'argument obligatoire d'une commande de sectionnement), dans un en-tête de page ou dans la table des +% matières principale (comme l'argument optionnel d'une commande de sectionnement), dans une minitable (parttoc, minitoc +% ou secttoc). Un comportement similaire devrait être possible pour les entrées de la liste des figures ou des +% tableaux. Donc nous définissons trois commandes à~utiliser à~l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel d'une commande +% de sectionnement ou de celui de \com{caption} pour une figure ou un tableau. Ces commandes doivent être robustes +% (car utilisées à~l'intérieur d'un argument optionnel) et ont 4~arguments: (1)~la variante apparaissant dans une +% parttoc (ou partlof ou partlof), +% (2)~la variante apparaissant dans une a minitoc (ou minilof ou minilof), +% (3)~la variante apparaissant dans une secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlof). +% (4)~la variante apparaissant la la table des matières (ou liste des figures ou liste des tableaux) principale. +% La variante apparaissant localement comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement ou comme légende locale de la figure +% ou du tableau est l'argument obligatoire de la commande de sectionnement ou de la commande de caption (voir la +% section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% Nous utilisons les indicateurs \verb|\ifin...|. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{% + \ifinparttoc\relax{#1}% + \else\ifinminitoc\relax{#2}% + \else\ifinsecttoc\relax{#3}% + \else\relax{#4} + \fi + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries of the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées le la liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{% + \ifinpartlof\relax{#1}% + \else\ifinminilof\relax{#2}% + \else\ifinsectlof\relax{#3}% + \else\relax{#4} + \fi + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries of the list of tables: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées le la liste des tableaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{% + \ifinpartlot\relax{#1}% + \else\ifinminilot\relax{#2}% + \else\ifinsectlot\relax{#3}% + \else\relax{#4} + \fi + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment and siblings}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} et ses comparses}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The flag \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} is used to detect an incorrect imbrication of this environment: +% \or\relax +% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} est utilisé pour détecter une imbrication incorrecte de cet environnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@Himtoc@ \@mtc@Himtoc@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} define a macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} to save the current value +% of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}. +% Then we define this environment, which inserts into the TOC file this command and commands of the +% form \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. Note that \com{xdef} is necessary! +% It also save and restore the value of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}, as the optional argument is the hiding depth of +% the entries in the main TOC. +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} définissons une macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} pour sauvegarder la valeur +% courante du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}. +% Notez que \com{xdef} est nécessaire! +% Puis nous définissons cet environnement, qui écrit dans le fichier table des matières cette commande et +% des commandes de la +% forme \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. +% Il sauvegarde et restaure aussi la valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}, car +% l'argument optionnel est la profondeur de masquage des entrées dans la table des matières principale. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtc@savetocdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}}% +\newcommand{\mtc@restoretocdepth}{\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}}% +\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]% +{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\mtcPackageError[E0005]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments}% + {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himtoc@true + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% +{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\else\mtcPackageError[E0031]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment}% + {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himtoc@false + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlof@} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svf@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are similar, but we must verify the +% presence of the associated depth counter, so we have two versions of each of these environments. +% This must be done \emph{after} the loading of the packages. +% +% First, for the list of figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}} +% \or\relax +% Les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont similaires, mais nous devons +% véfifier la présence du compteur de profondeur associé, donc nous avons deux versions de ces environnements. +% Ceci doit être fait \emph{après} le chargement des paquetages. +% +% D'abord, pour la liste des figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@Himlof@ \@mtc@Himlof@false +\AtBeginDocument{% +\@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{% + \providecommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\empty} + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@true + \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \def\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@false + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}% +}}% +{% + \newcommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{lofdepth}}}% + \newcommand{\mtc@restorelofdepth}{\setcounter{lofdepth}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}}% + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@true + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savelofdepth}% + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@false + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlot@} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svt@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then for the list of tables:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}} +% \or\relax +% Puis pour la liste des tableaux:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@Himlot@ \@mtc@Himlot@false +\AtBeginDocument{% +\@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{% + \providecommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\empty} + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@true + \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \def\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@false + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}% +}}% +{% + \newcommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{lotdepth}}}% + \newcommand{\mtc@restorelotdepth}{\setcounter{lotdepth}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}}% + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@true + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savelotdepth}% + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@false + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fixing the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary} +% \or\relax +% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: +% \or\relax +% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@glofix@level} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} on the document class, +% the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred +% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then +% stored in the macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning +% message: +% \or\relax +% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} la classe du document, +% l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé +% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La +% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui +% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0001]{minitoc}% + {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% + \MessageBreak + Cannot use \string\mtcfixglossary \space without + \MessageBreak + optional argument [part]}% + \@ifundefined{part}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0001]{minitoc}% + {But \string\part\space is undefined}% + {\string\mtcfixglossary\space not usable}}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0006]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcfixglossary\space can only be used + \MessageBreak + with the [part] optional argument, + \MessageBreak + which becomes the default}% + \def\mtc@glofix@level{part}% + }}% + {\def\mtc@glofix@level{section}}}% +{\def\mtc@glofix@level{chapter}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixglossary@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0026} we define a flag (\com{if@mtcfixglossary@}) and the command \com{mtcfixglossary}, which adds +% the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0026} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, qui ajoute les lignes +% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcfixglossary@ \@mtcfixglossary@false +\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][\mtc@glofix@level]{% + \@mtcfixglossary@false + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi + \if@mtcfixglossary@ + \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}% + \csname mtcadd\mtc@glofix@level\endcsname\relax + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0026]{minitoc}% + {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixglossary + \MessageBreak + is wrong}% + {It must be omitted (\mtc@glofix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fixing the ``Index'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: +% \or\relax +% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ixfix@level} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} on the document class, +% the ``Index'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred +% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then +% stored in the macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message: +% \or\relax +% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} la classe du document, +% l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé +% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La +% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui +% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0002]{minitoc}% + {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% + \MessageBreak + Cannot use \string\mtcfixindex \space without + \MessageBreak + optional argument [part]}% + \@ifundefined{part}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0002]{minitoc}% + {But \string\part\space is undefined}% + {\string\mtcfixindex\space not usable}}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0007]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcfixindex\space can only be used with + \MessageBreak + the [part] optional argument, + \MessageBreak + which becomes the default}% + \def\mtc@ixfix@level{part}% + }}% + {\def\mtc@ixfix@level{section}}}% +{\def\mtc@ixfix@level{chapter}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixindex@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0027} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixindex}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF +% and the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0027} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixindex}, qui ajoute les lignes nécessaires dans +% la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcfixindex@ \@mtcfixindex@false +\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][\mtc@ixfix@level]{% + \@mtcfixindex@false + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi + \if@mtcfixindex@ + \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}% + \csname mtcadd\mtc@ixfix@level\endcsname\relax + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0027]{minitoc}% + {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixindex + \MessageBreak + is wrong}% + {It must be omitted (\mtc@ixfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fixing the ``Nomenclature'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+ature} +% \or\relax +% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+ature} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: +% \or\relax +% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@nomenclfix@level} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} on the document class, +% the ``Nomenclature'' entry\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or +% \pack{nomentbl} package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} calls \pack{nomentbl}).} +% in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred +% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then +% stored in the macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. +% This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message: +% \or\relax +% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} la classe du document, +% l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>>\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le +% paquetage \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} appelle \pack{nomentbl}).} +% dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé +% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La +% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui +% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0095]{minitoc}% + {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% + \MessageBreak + Cannot use \string\mtcfixnomenclature \space without + \MessageBreak + optional argument [part]}% + \@ifundefined{part}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0039]{minitoc}% + {But \string\part\space is undefined}% + {\string\mtcfixnomclature\space not usable}}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0096]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcfixnomenclature\space can only be used with + \MessageBreak + the [part] optional argument, + \MessageBreak + which becomes the default}% + \def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{part}% + }}% + {\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{section}}}% +{\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{chapter}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixnomclature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0040} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, +% the LOF and the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0040} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixnomclature}, qui ajoute les lignes +% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcfixnomenclature@ \@mtcfixnomenclature@false +\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][\mtc@nomenclfix@level]{% + \@mtcfixnomenclature@false + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi + \if@mtcfixnomenclature@ + \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}% + \csname mtcadd\mtc@nomenclfix@level\endcsname\relax + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0040]{minitoc}% + {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixnomenclature + \MessageBreak + is wrong}% + {It must be omitted (\mtc@nomenclfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} command}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcselectlanguage}}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} command loads a minitoc language definition +% file \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to set the language-dependent +% titles for the mini-tables. +% But first, we verify that this file exists. +% The flag \com{if@mtc@insellang@} is true while we are in this macro. +% \or\relax +% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} commande charge un fichier minitoc de définition +% de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour établir les +% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables. +% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier existe. +% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@} est vrai tant que nous sommes dans cette macro. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@insellang@ \@mtc@insellang@false +\def\mtcselectlanguage#1{% + \@mtc@insellang@true + \InputIfFileExists{#1.mld}% + {\mtcPackageInfo[I0010]{minitoc}{The #1 language is selected.% + \MessageBreak + }}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0006]{minitoc}% + {#1 is not a known language, + \MessageBreak + #1.mld not found. + \MessageBreak + Command ignored}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Correct the source using a valid language name. + \MessageBreak + Press RETURN}}% + \@mtc@insellang@false +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcloadmlo} internal command}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande interne \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command loads a minitoc language object file \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} to set the language-dependent +% titles for the mini-tables when exotic characters are needed. +% This command is used only in some \suffix{.mld} files when the title strings can not be generated by the normal +% processing of \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. The \suffix{.mlo} files are generated by \env{filecontents} environments in the +% \xfile{minitoc.ins} file. +% But first, we verify that this \suffix{.mlo} file exists. +% +% \emph{This command}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}} +% \emph{should not be invoked directly by the user. This is verified via the flag +% \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.} +% \or\relax +% Cette commande charge un fichier minitoc objet de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} pour établir les +% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables lorsque des caractères exotiques sont nécessaires. +% Cette commande n'est utilisée que dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld}, lorsque les chaînes de titres ne peuvent +% pas être produites par le traitement normal de \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} sont produits +% par des environments \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier \suffix{.mlo} existe. +% +% \emph{Cette commande}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}} +% \emph{ne devrait pas être invoquée directement par l'utilisateur. Ceci est vérifié grâce +% à~l'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcloadmlo#1{% + \if@mtc@insellang@ + \InputIfFileExists{#1.mlo}% + {\mtcPackageInfo[I0011]{minitoc}% + {#1 minitoc language object selected. + \MessageBreak}}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0007]{minitoc}% + {#1 is not a known minitoc + \MessageBreak + language object file (.mlo), + \MessageBreak + #1.mlo not found. + \MessageBreak + Command ignored}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Correct the source using a valid language name. + \MessageBreak + Press RETURN}}% + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0032]{minitoc}% + {You are using the \string\mtcloadmlo\space command + \MessageBreak + outside of a .mld file}% + {It will be ignored} + \@mtc@insellang@false + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The ``coffee breaks''}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les <<~pauses café~>>}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\l@coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}), we need some commands to insert special +% entries, undotted, in the +% TOC to mark ``coffee breaks''{\myCoffeecup} in a conference. +% Hence we define \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} and +% \com{l@coffee}, and internal commands analog to the standard internal commands to format the TOC. +% \or\relax +% Pour le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}), nous avons besoin de quelques +% commandes pour insérer des entrées spéciales, sans points de conduite, dans la table des matières pour marquer les +% <<~pauses café~>>{\myCoffeecup} dans une conférence. Donc nous définissons \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} et +% \com{l@coffee}, et des commandes internes analogues aux commandes internes standard pour mettre en forme la +% table des matières. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{% + \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\coffeeline{#2}{#3}{\null}}} +\def\coffeeline#1{\csname l@#1\endcsname} +\newcommand*\l@coffee{\@Undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Initialization of counters}\label{s+verse+init.counters} +% \or\relax +% \section{Initialisation des compteurs}\label{s+verse+init.counters} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% At the beginning of the document, we initialize the absolute counters for parts, chapters and sections, if they +% are defined. +% \or\relax +% Au début du document, nous initialisons les compteurs absolus pour les parties, chapitres et sections, s'ils +% sont définis. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}} +\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Declarations for simple options}\label{s+code+simple.options} +% \or\relax +% \section{Déclarations pour les options simples}\label{s+code+simple.options} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options are just setting a flag. +% \or\relax +% Ces options ne font que positionner un indicateur. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} and \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} and \uopt{k-loose}}% +% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} et \uopt{k-loose}}% +% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options influence the interline separation in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Ces options influencent l'interlignage dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{tight}{\tightmtctrue} +\DeclareOption{loose}{\tightmtcfalse} % default +\DeclareOption{k-tight}{\ktightmtctrue} +\DeclareOption{k-loose}{\ktightmtcfalse} % default +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} and \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} et \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options activate or inhibit the checking for empty mini-table files. +% \or\relax +% Ces options activent ou inhibent les tests de vacuité sur les fichiers des mini-tables. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{checkfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilestrue} % default +\DeclareOption{nocheckfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilesfalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} and \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} et \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options activate or inhibit the leaders (lines of dots) in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Ces options activent ou inhibent les points de conduite dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{undotted}{\undottedmtctrue} +\DeclareOption{dotted}{\undottedmtcfalse} % default +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This option will later load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}. +% \or\relax +% Cette option chargera plus loin le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{notoccite}{\@mtc@notoccite@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{W0020} option forces the use of short extensions. +% \or\relax +% Cette\imess{W0020} option force l'utilisation de suffixes courts. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{shortext}{% + \@mtc@longext@false + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0020]{minitoc}% + {You have forced the use of short extensions}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{insection} option}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{insection}}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{E0035} option is available only if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined. +% It is to be revised when chapter/section level commands will ever be allowed together, sometime in the far away future, +% with a lot of luck (and work)\footnote{Please, do not dream too much!}. +% \or\relax +% Cette\imess{E0035} option n'est disponible que si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie et \com{section} est définie. +% Il faudra la revoir si un jour les commandes aux niveaux chapitre et section sont éventuellement permises +% ensemble, peut-être dans un avenir lointain, avec beaucoup de chance (et de travail)\,\footnote{Ne révez pas trop +% quand même!}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@ss@insection@ \@mtc@ss@insection@false +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{\DeclareOption{insection}{% + \mtcPackageError[E0035]{minitoc}% + {You have used the `insection' option in + \MessageBreak + a document where chapters are defined. + \MessageBreak + This is not compatible: option ignored.}% + {Remove this option. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} + }}% + {% + \DeclareOption{insection}% + {\@mtc@ss@insection@true}% + }% +}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{listfiles} option creates a file containing a list of the auxiliary files created +% by the \upack{minitoc} package. This is the default. +% This file is named \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% The \opt{nolistfiles} option inhibits this listing. +% \or\relax +% L'option \optd{listfiles} crée un fichier contenant une liste des fichiers auxiliaires créés par +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est le choix par défaut. +% Ce fichier est nommé \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% L'option \opt{nolistfiles} inhibe ce listage. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@listfiles@ \@mtc@listfiles@true +\DeclareOption{listfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@true} +\DeclareOption{nolistfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Language options}\label{s+section+language.options} +% \or\relax +% \section{Options pour les langues}\label{s+section+language.options} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@LML} +% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we define an utility macro (\com{@gobblethree}), a list of the missing files +% (accumulated in the \com{mtc@listmisslanguages} macro), +% and a macro (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}) to add a file name to the list: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous définissons une macro utilitaire (\com{@gobblethree}), une liste des fichiers manquants +% (accumulée dans la macro \com{mtc@listmisslanguages}), et une macro pour ajouter un nom de fichier à~la liste +% (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{\empty} +\def\mtc@listmisslanguages{} +\def\mtc@addmisslanguage#1{% + \let\mtc@LML\mtc@listmisslanguages + \edef\mtc@listmisslanguages{\mtc@LML \MessageBreak #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Before\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} defining a language option, +% we must verify that the corresponding \suffix{.mld} file exists, and, if +% necessary, that the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file exists. +% Hence, we must first define a flag \com{if@mtc@misslang} and +% two macros to test the presence of these files; if the files are available, we define the language option. +% \or\relax +% Avant\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} de définir une option de langue, +% nous devons vérifier si le fichier \suffix{.mld} existe, et, si +% nécessaire, que le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant existe. Donc, nous devons d'abord définir un indicateur +% \com{if@mtc@misslang} et deux macros pour tester la présence de ces fichiers; si les fichiers sont +% disponibles, nous définissons l'option de langue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@misslang\@mtc@misslangfalse +\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopt}[1]{% + \IfFileExists{#1.mld}% + {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}% + {The required "#1.mld" file is missing. + \MessageBreak + The "#1" language option will not be available. + \MessageBreak + Please install it from a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}}% +}% +\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopto}[1]{% + \IfFileExists{#1.mlo}% + {\mtc@setlangopt{#1}}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mlo} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0051]{minitoc}% + {The required "#1.mlo" file is missing. + \MessageBreak + The "#1" language option will not be available. + \MessageBreak + Please install it from a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}% + \IfFileExists{#1.mld}{}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue + \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}% + {The required "#1.mld" file is missing. + \MessageBreak + The "#1" language option will not be available. + \MessageBreak + Please install it from a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}% + }% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} \suffix{.mld} files are mandatory (\xfile{english.mld} because english is the default language), +% so their absence is a serious error: +% \or\relax +% Certains\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} fichiers \suffix{.mld} sont obligatoires (\xfile{english.mld} car l'anglais est la langue +% par défaut), donc leur absence est une erreur sévère): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtc@setlangoptm}[1]{% + \IfFileExists{#1.mld}% + {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue + \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} + \mtcPackageError[E0038]{minitoc}% + {Your minitoc installation is incomplete. + \MessageBreak + A mandatory minitoc language object file, + \MessageBreak + #1.mld, is not found. + \MessageBreak + We will try to continue with + \MessageBreak + current/default values}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Please fix your minitoc installation. + \MessageBreak + Press <return> to continue}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must define the default titles (english): +% \or\relax +% Nous devons définir les titres par défaut (anglais): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}% + \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}% + \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}% + \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}% + \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}% +}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages} +% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, +% we signal that at the end of the document, with also the full list of the missing language files: +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} est manquant, +% nous le signalons en fin de document, avec aussi liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{% + \if@mtc@misslang + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0093]{minitoc}% + {Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing + \MessageBreak + in your installation. + \MessageBreak + Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages + \MessageBreak + in the \string\jobname.log file. + \MessageBreak + The full list of the missing language files + \MessageBreak + is given in the W0094 warning message. + \MessageBreak + Please install the missing files from + \MessageBreak + a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives}% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0094]{minitoc}% + {Missing minitoc language file(s)\string: + \MessageBreak + \mtc@listmisslanguages\@gobblethree}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each language option reads the corresponding \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file via +% the specialized macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}, after verification by \com{mtc@setlangopt} or +% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (when a \suffix{.mlo} file is required), by \com{mtc@setlangoptm} when the language is +% mandatory. If the file +% does not exist, a standard error message is displayed. The language options are (should be) in alphabetical order +% (to make maintenance easier). +% Several options could load the same file, but, by convention, there should be a \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file for +% each language option, given that this file may load another one (as \xfile{american.mld} loads \xfile{english.mld}). +% \or\relax +% Chaque option de langue lit le fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} correspondant via +% la macro spécialisée \com{mtcselectlanguage}, après vérification par \com{mtc@setlangopt} ou +% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (lorsqu'un fichier \suffix{.mlo} est requis), par \com{mtc@setlangoptm} lorsque la +% langue est obligatoire. Si le fichier +% n'existe pas, un message d'erreur standard est affiché. Les options de langue sont (devraient) être par ordre +% alphabétique (pour faciliter la maintenance). Plusieurs options pourraient charger le même fichier, mais, +% par convention, il devrait y~avoir un +% fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque option de langue, étant donné que ce fichier peut en charger un autre +% (ainsi \xfile{francais.mld} charge-t-il \xfile{french.mld}). +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtc@setlangopt{acadian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{acadien}% +\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaan}% +\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaans}% +\mtc@setlangopt{albanian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{american}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arab}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arab2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arabi}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arabic}% +\mtc@setlangopt{armenian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{australian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{austrian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bahasa}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bahasai}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bahasam}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bangla}% +\mtc@setlangopt{basque}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bengali}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bicig}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bicig2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bicig3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bithe}% +\mtc@setlangopt{brazil}% +\mtc@setlangopt{brazilian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{breton}% +\mtc@setlangopt{british}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarianb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{buryat}% +\mtc@setlangopt{buryat2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{canadian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{canadien}% +\mtc@setlangopt{castillan}% +\mtc@setlangopt{castillian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{catalan}% +\mtc@setlangopto{chinese1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{chinese2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{croatian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{czech}% +\mtc@setlangopt{danish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{devanagari}% +\mtc@setlangopt{dutch}% +\mtc@setlangoptm{english}% +\mtc@setlangopt{english1}% +\mtc@setlangopt{english2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{esperant}% +\mtc@setlangopt{esperanto}% +\mtc@setlangopt{estonian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopia}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{farsi1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{farsi2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{farsi3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{finnish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{finnish2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{francais}% +\mtc@setlangopt{french}% +\mtc@setlangopt{french1}% +\mtc@setlangopt{french2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{frenchb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{frenchle}% +\mtc@setlangopt{frenchpro}% +\mtc@setlangopt{galician}% +\mtc@setlangopt{german}% +\mtc@setlangopt{germanb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{germanb2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek-mono}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polydemo}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polykatha}% +\mtc@setlangopt{guarani}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul3}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul4}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul-u8}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hanja1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hanja2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hanja-u8}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hindi}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hindi-modern}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hungarian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{icelandic}% +\mtc@setlangopt{indon}% +\mtc@setlangopt{indonesian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{interlingua}% +\mtc@setlangopt{irish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{italian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{italian2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese3}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese4}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese5}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese6}% +\mtc@setlangopt{kannada}% +\mtc@setlangopt{khalkha}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latin}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latin2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latinc}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latinc2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latvian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latvian2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{letton}% +\mtc@setlangopt{letton2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lowersorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lsorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{magyar}% +\mtc@setlangopt{magyar2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{magyar3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malay}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-b}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-mr}% +\mtc@setlangopto{malayalam-omega}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{manju}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mexican}% +\mtc@setlangopt{meyalu}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mongol}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mongolb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mongolian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{naustrian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ngerman}% +\mtc@setlangopt{newzealand}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{norsk}% +\mtc@setlangopt{norsk2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk}% +\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{occitan}% +\mtc@setlangopt{occitan2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{polish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{polish2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{polski}% +\mtc@setlangopt{portuges}% +\mtc@setlangopt{portuguese}% +\mtc@setlangopt{romanian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{romanian2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{romanian3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russianb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russianc}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russian2m}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russian2o}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lh}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyralt}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrwin}% +\mtc@setlangopt{samin}% +\mtc@setlangopt{scottish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{serbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{serbianc}% +\mtc@setlangopt{slovak}% +\mtc@setlangopt{slovene}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish4}% +\mtc@setlangopt{swahili}% +\mtc@setlangopt{swedish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{swedish2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{thai}% +\mtc@setlangopt{turkish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uighur}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uighur2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uighur3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{UKenglish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ukraineb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ukrainian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uppersorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{USenglish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{usorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{vietnam}% +\mtc@setlangopt{vietnamese}% +\mtc@setlangopt{welsh}% +\mtc@setlangopt{xalx}% +\mtc@setlangopt{xalx2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{xalx3}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We declare the \optd{hints} (default) and \opt{nohints} options: +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons les options \optd{hints} (défaut) et \opt{nohints}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{hints}{\@mtc@hints@true} +\DeclareOption{nohints}{\@mtc@hints@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{hints} option is made of three parts: the first, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, is executed via +% \com{AtBeginDocument} and looks if some packages or classes are loaded, then gives warnings about their compatibility +% with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% L'option \optd{hints} est constituée de trois parties: la première, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, est exécutée +% via \com{AtBeginDocument} et regarde si certains paquetages ou classes sont chargés, puis donne des +% avertissements à~propos de leur compatibilité avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second part is made of tiny pieces of code inserted in the \upack{minitoc} code, to verify that some macros +% are called in the right order. +% \or\relax +% La deuxième partie est faite de petits fragments de code insérés dans le code de \upack{minitoc}, pour vérifier +% que certaines macros sont appelées dans le bon ordre. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The third and last part, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, is executed via \com{AtEndDocument} and examines the flags set +% by the first and the second parts. Then, if necessary, it writes some infos in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% file and/or warnings on the screen and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% The \optd{hints} option \virage\emph{does not signal errors}, only infos +% and warnings, so it does not stop the \LaTeX\ run. +% \or\relax +% La troisième et dernière partie, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument} et examine +% les indicateurs positionnés par les première et deuxième parties. Puis, si nécessaire, elle écrit quelques +% informations dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et/ou des avertissements sur l'écran +% et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% L'option \optd{hints} \virage\emph{ne signale pas d'erreurs}, seulement des informations et des avertissements, et +% donc n'interrompt pas l'exécution de \LaTeX. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{First part: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Première partie: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0049} declare some flags and the first part of the \optd{hints} option (for an \com{AtBeginDocument} block): +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0049} déclarons quelques indicateurs et la première partie de l'option \optd{hints} +% (pour un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@ \@mtc@abstract@loaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@toc@used@ \global\@mtc@toc@used@false +\newif\if@mtc@lof@used@ \global\@mtc@lof@used@false +\newif\if@mtc@lot@used@ \global\@mtc@lot@used@false +\def\mtc@hints@begindoc{% +\mtcPackageInfo[I0049]{minitoc(hints)}% + {==> You requested the hints option. + \MessageBreak + Some hints are eventually given below\@gobble}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{alphanum} package}\ipack{alphanum} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}\ipack{alphanum} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} test the presence of the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}), +% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la +% classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} +% avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{alphanum}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0025]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The alphanum package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0042} test the presence of the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0042} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{appendix}{% +\@mtc@hints@given@true +\mtcPackageInfo[I0042]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The appendix package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocbibind} package}\ipack{tocbibind} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocbibind}}\ipack{tocbibind} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0046} test the presence of the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0046} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{tocbibind}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0046]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The tocbibind package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \KOMAScript{} classes} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \KOMAScript} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0043} test the presence of each \upack{minitoc}-compatible \KOMAScript{} +% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0043} testons la présence de chaque classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible +% avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{scrbook}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The KOMAScript scrbook class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +\@ifclassloaded{scrreprt}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The KOMAScript scrreprt class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +\@ifclassloaded{scrartcl}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The KOMAScript scrartcl class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0047} test the presence of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0047} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0047]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The tocloft package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titlesec} package}\ipack{titlesec} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titlesec}}\ipack{titlesec} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} test the presence of the \pack{titlesec} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning, +% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}, +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{titlesec}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0099]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The titlesec package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titletoc} package}\ipack{titletoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titletoc}}\ipack{titletoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} test the presence of the \pack{titletoc} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning, +% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titletoc}~\cite{titletoc}, +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{titletoc}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0040]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The titletoc package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{placeins} package}\ipack{placeins} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{placeins}}\ipack{placeins} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} test if the \pack{placeins} +% package~\cite{placeins} is loaded and, if yes, we check if the selected options are correct (see section~\vref{rem+FB}): +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} testons si le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} est chargé et, si oui, nous regardons si les options choisies +% sont correctes (voir la section~\vref{rem+FB}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{placeins}% + {\if@mtc@ss@insection@ + \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{section}{}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0031]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package is loaded + \MessageBreak + without the section option, + \MessageBreak + but minitoc used the insection option + \MessageBreak + which implies it. Try to inverse the + \MessageBreak + loading order and use consistent options. + \MessageBreak + You may have got a message + \MessageBreak + ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins}% + }% + \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{above}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0084]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package is loaded + \MessageBreak + with the above option, + \MessageBreak + but minitoc used the insection option + \MessageBreak + which is incompatible with it. + \MessageBreak + Try to remove the above option + \MessageBreak + and use consistent options}% + }{}% + \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{below}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0085]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package is loaded + \MessageBreak + with the below option, + \MessageBreak + but minitoc used the insection option + \MessageBreak + which is incompatible with it. + \MessageBreak + Try to remove the below option + \MessageBreak + and use consistent options}% + }{}% + \fi + \@ifpackagelater{placeins}{2005/04/18}{}{% + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0032]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package loaded is + \MessageBreak + too old. You should use a version + \MessageBreak + dated of 2005/04/18 at least}% + }% + }{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0044} test if the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0044} testons si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{memoir}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0044]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The memoir class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}{}% + }{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsart} and \uclass{amsproc} classes}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \uclass{amsart} et \uclass{amsproc}}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} test if the \class{amsart} or \class{amsproc} class is loaded and emit a warning, +% because these classes are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} regardons si l'une des classes \class{amsart} ou \class{amsproc} a été chargée +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ces classes sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{amsart}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0026]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The amsart class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +\@ifclassloaded{amsproc}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0027]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The amsproc class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsbook} class}\iclass{amsbook} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{amsbook}}\iclass{amsbook} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0041} test if the \class{amsbook} class is loaded: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0041} testons si la classe \class{amsbook} est chargée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{amsbook}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0041]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The amsbook class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}{}% + }{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{abstract} package}\ipack{abstract} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\ipack{abstract} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0040} test the presence of the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}, then its options: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0040} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}, puis ses options: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{abstract}% + {\@mtc@abstract@loaded@true% + \@ifpackagewith{abstract}{addtotoc}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0040]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The ``abstract'' package has been + \MessageBreak + loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option. + \MessageBreak + You need to look at the + \MessageBreak + documentation to adjust. + \MessageBreak} + }}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{jura} class}\iclass{jura} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{jura}}\iclass{jura} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} test if the \class{jura} class is loaded and emit a warning, because this class is +% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} regardons si la classe \class{jura} a été chargée et émettons un +% avertissement, puisque cette classe est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{jura}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0029]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The jura class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{flowfram} package}\ipack{flowfram} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}\ipack{flowfram} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} test the presence of the \pack{flowfram} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, +% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{flowfram}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0097]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The flowfram package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the alteration of the sectionning commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur l'altération des commandes de sectionnement} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To check if the sectionning commands \com{part}, \com{chapter} or \com{section} have been altered by some +% package or in the preamble, we compare them (when executing an \com{AtBeginDocument} block) with their saved +% versions (saved by the +% \upack{minitoc} package when it is loaded) \com{mtc@hints@part}, \com{mtc@hints@chapter} and +% \com{mtc@hints@section}. For each sectionning command, we must perform the comparaison for the command itself, +% its unstarred branch and its starred branch. But the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} may interfere, +% hence the formal precautions in the messages. +% \or\relax +% Pour vérifier si les commandes de sectionnement \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ont été altérées +% par un paquetage ou dans le préambule, nous les comparons (lors de l'exécution d'un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}) +% avec leurs versions sauvegardées (par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lors de son chargement) \com{mtc@hints@part}, +% \com{mtc@hints@chapter} et \com{mtc@hints@section}. Pour chacune de ces commandes de sectionnement, nous +% devons effectuer la comparaison pour la commande elle-même, sa branche non étoilée et sa branche étoilée. Mais le +% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} peut interférer, d'où les précautions formelles dans les messages. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{part}}\icom{part} +% \or\relax +% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{part}}\icom{part} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart} ont été altérées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@hints@w@false +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\part\mtc@hints@part\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@part\mtc@hints@@part\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@spart\mtc@hints@@spart\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0030]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The \string\part\space command is altered + \MessageBreak + after minitoc} + \if@mtc@hyper@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- It may be the consequence + \MessageBreak + of loading the ``hyperref'' package} + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter} +% \or\relax +% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter} ont été altérées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@hints@w@false +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\chapter\mtc@hints@chapter\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@chapter\mtc@hints@@chapter\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@schapter\mtc@hints@@schapter\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% +\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0028]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The \string\chapter\space command is altered + \MessageBreak + after minitoc} + \if@mtc@hyper@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- It may be the consequence + \MessageBreak + of loading the ``hyperref'' package} + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{section}}\icom{section} +% \or\relax +% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{section}}\icom{section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect} ont été altérées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@hints@w@false +\@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\section\mtc@hints@section\relax\else + \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} + \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@sect\mtc@hints@@sect\relax\else + \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} + \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@ssect\mtc@hints@@ssect\relax\else + \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0039]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The \string\section\space command is altered + \MessageBreak + after minitoc} + \if@mtc@hyper@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- It may be the consequence + \MessageBreak + of loading the ``hyperref'' package} + \fi + \relax\else\fi}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the consistency of the calling sequences of the commands} +% And finally, we prepare the consistency tests about the calling sequences of triplets of associated commands +% like \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} and \fkcom{tableofcontents}, and similar: to be able to use +% \com{parttoc}, a table of contents file must have been +% created via \fkcom{tableofcontents} and splitted into parttoc files via \com{doparttoc}. +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la cohérence des séquences d'appel des commandes} +% Et enfin, nous préparons les tests de cohérence sur les séquences d'appel de triplets de commandes associées +% telles que \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} et \fkcom{tableofcontents}, et similaires: pour pouvoir +% utiliser \com{parttoc}, un fichier table des matières doit avoir été créé via \fkcom{tableofcontents} et +% éclaté en fichiers parttocs via \com{doparttoc}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Hence we initialize some flags: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous initialisons quelques indicateurs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@hints@ +\global\@mtc@toc@used@false +\global\@mtc@lof@used@false +\global\@mtc@lot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we patch the involved commands to set the corresponding flag when they are used. First, the commands for +% the main summaries: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous modifions les commandes concernées pour positionner l'indicateur correspondant lorsqu'elles sont +% utilisées. Nous commençons par les commandes des sommaires principaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@sv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents +\def\tableofcontents% + {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@tableofcontents} +\let\mtc@sv@listoffigures\listoffigures +\def\listoffigures% + {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@listoffigures} +\let\mtc@sv@listoftables\listoftables +\def\listoftables% + {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@listoftables} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, their ``fake'' siblings: +% \or\relax +% Puis, leurs cousines <<~fake~>>: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents\faketableofcontents +\def\faketableofcontents% + {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents} +\let\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures\fakelistoffigures +\def\fakelistoffigures% + {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures} +\let\mtc@sv@fklistoftables\fakelistoftables +\def\fakelistoftables% + {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoftables} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} definition is finished (it begins in +% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}): +% \or\relax +% Et la définition de \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} est terminée (elle avait commencé à~la +% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Final part: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Partie finale: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part of the \optd{hints} option is executed via \com{AtEndDocument}. Its code is in the +% \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro. It is a sequence of tests on the packages or classes loaded and the flags set +% during the first and the second parts of this option. First, we declare the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro: +% \or\relax +% La partie finale de l'option \optd{hints} est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument}. Son code est dans la +% macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}. C'est une séquence de tests sur les paquetages et classes chargés et sur les +% indicateurs positionnés durant les première et deuxième parties de cette option. Tout d'abord, nous déclarons +% la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@hints@enddoc{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} and the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} et l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We look if some section-level lists of figures or tables have been requested. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons si des listes de figures ou de tableaux ont été demandées au niveau section. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@dosectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@dosectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@sectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@sectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@mtc@section@def@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{W0056} yes, we verify that the +% \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} has been loaded with the correct options or that the \opt{insection} +% option of the \upack{minitoc} package has been invoked. +% If not, a warning is given. +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{W0056} oui, nous +% vérifions que le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} a été chargé avec les options correctes ou que +% l'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été invoquée. +% Sinon, un avertissement est émis. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \else + \if@mtc@sect@floats@% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0056]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You are using \string\dosectlof\space and/or + \MessageBreak + \string\dosectlot, \string\sectlof\space and/or \string\sectlot, + \MessageBreak + hence the ``insection'' package + \MessageBreak + option is recommended}% + \@mtc@hints@w@true \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the consistency tests}\label{ss+final.coh} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale des tests de cohérence}\label{ss+final.coh} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test if \com{parttoc} has been used without \com{doparttoc}, etc., for each pair +% of preparation/insertion commands. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si \com{parttoc} a été utilisée \com{doparttoc}, etc., pour chaque paire de commandes +% préparation/insertion. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} the part level commands: +% \or\relax +% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} les commandes au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@part@def@ + \if@parttoc@used@ + \if@doparttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0062]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\parttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\doparttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlof@used@ + \if@dopartlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0060]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dopartlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlot@used@ + \if@dopartlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0061]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dopartlot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} the chapter level commands: +% \or\relax +% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} les commandes au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \if@minitoc@used@ + \if@dominitoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0059]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minitoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dominitoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilof@used@ + \if@dominilof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0057]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dominilof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilot@used@ + \if@dominilot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0058]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dominilot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} the section level commands: +% \or\relax +% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} les commandes au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@section@def@ + \if@secttoc@used@ + \if@dosecttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0065]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\secttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dosecttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlof@used@ + \if@dosectlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0063]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dosectlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlot@used@ + \if@dosectlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0064]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dosectlot} + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (first part)} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (première partie)?} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Now, we test if a \com{doparttoc} macro has been called but without any matching \com{parttoc}, hence it is a +% vain call. We do the same for each analog command. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons maintenant si une macro \com{doparttoc} a été appelée sans aucune commande \com{parttoc} +% correspondante, car sinon cet appel est vain. Nous faisons de même pour chaque commande analogue. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@part@def@ + \if@doparttoc@used@ + \if@parttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0075]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\doparttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\parttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dopartlof@used@ + \if@partlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0076]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dopartlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\partlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dopartlot@used@ + \if@partlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0077]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dopartlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\partlot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \if@dominitoc@used@ + \if@minitoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0078]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dominitoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\minitoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dominilof@used@ + \if@minilof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0079]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dominilof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\minilof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dominilot@used@ + \if@minilot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0080]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dominilot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\minilot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@section@def@ + \if@dosecttoc@used@ + \if@secttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0081]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dosecttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\secttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dosectlof@used@ + \if@sectlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0082]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dosectlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\sectlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dosectlot@used@ + \if@sectlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0083]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dosectlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\sectlot} + \fi + \fi +\fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (second part)} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (seconde partie)?} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Another consistency test verifies that if the macro \com{parttoc} has been called, +% then the macro \com{tableofcontents} or \com{faketableofcontents} has also been called +% (to create the necessary contents file); similar tests are made +% for the other mini-table commands. +% \or\relax +% Un autre test de cohérence vérifie que si la macro \com{parttoc} a été appelée, +% alors la macro \com{tableofcontents} ou +% \com{faketableofcontents} a aussi été appelée (créant le fichier de contenu nécessaire); des tests +% analogues sont faits pour les autres commandes de mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@part@def@ + \if@parttoc@used@ + \if@mtc@toc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0071]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\parttoc\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\tableofcontents + \MessageBreak + nor \string\faketableofcontents} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlof@used@ + \if@mtc@lof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0069]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlof\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoffigures + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoffigures} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlot@used@ + \if@mtc@lot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0070]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlot\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoftables + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoftables} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \if@minitoc@used@ + \if@mtc@toc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0068]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minitoc\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\tableofcontents + \MessageBreak + nor \string\faketableofcontents} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilof@used@ + \if@mtc@lof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0066]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilof\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoffigures + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoffigures} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilot@used@ + \if@mtc@lot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0067]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilot\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoftables + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoftables} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@section@def@ + \if@secttoc@used@ + \if@mtc@toc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0074]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\secttoc\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\tableofcontents + \MessageBreak + nor \string\faketableofcontents} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlof@used@ + \if@mtc@lof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0072]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlof\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoffigures + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoffigures} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlot@used@ + \if@mtc@lot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0073]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlot\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoftables + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoftables} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check the number of mini-tables, in case of short extensions} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester le nombre de mini-tables, dans le cas de suffixes courts} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@checklongext} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} short extensions are used, +% you can use only 99~mini-tables of each kind. If more are created, the auxiliary +% files can be overwritten: the hundredth minitoc file \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| has its name truncated to +% \com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, which is already the tenth minitoc file. Thus, we need a hint to signal this situation. The +% code is rather simple, but the remedy is bitter and costly: either use a better operating system\,\footnote{On +% the long term, a good investment.}, either redesign the document. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} les suffixes courts sont utilisés, +% vous ne pouvez utiliser que 99~mini-tables de chaque genre. Si davantage de +% mini-tables sont créées, les fichiers auxiliaires seront écrasés; le centième fichier minitoc \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| +% a son nom tronqué à\com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, qui est déjà le dixième fichier minitoc. Donc nous avons besoin d'une +% indication (\emph{hint}) pour signaler cette situation. Le code est assez simple, mais le remède est amer et +% coûteux: soit utiliser un meilleur système d'exploitation\,\footnote{Dans le long terme, un bon investissement.}, +% soit revoir la conception du document. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@hints@checklongext{% +\if@mtc@longext@ +\else + \if@mtc@part@def@ + \ifnum 99 < \value{ptc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0054]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used short extensions + \MessageBreak + and more than 99 parts (\arabic{ptc})} + \fi + \fi + \if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \ifnum 99 < \value{mtc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used short extensions + \MessageBreak + and more than 99 chapters (\arabic{mtc})} + \fi + \else + \if@mtc@section@def@ + \ifnum 99 < \value{stc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0055]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used short extensions + \MessageBreak + and more than 99 sections (\arabic{stc})} + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi} +\mtc@hints@checklongext +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0037} test if \pack{sectsty} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0037} testons si \pack{sectsty} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0037]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The sectsty package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{varsects} package}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0038} test if \pack{varsects} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0038} testons si \pack{varsects} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0038]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The varsects package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0086} test if \pack{fncychap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0086} testons si \pack{fncychap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0086]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The fncychap package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0092} test if \pack{hangcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0092} testons si \pack{hangcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0092]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The hangcaption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0087} test if \pack{quotchap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0087} testons si \pack{quotchap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0087]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The quotchap package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{romannum} package}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0088} test if \pack{romannum} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0088} testons si \pack{romannum} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0088]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The romannum package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0089} test if \pack{sfheaders} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0089} testons si \pack{sfheaders} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0089]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The sfheaders package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0090} test if \pack{alnumsec} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0090} testons si \pack{alnumsec} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0090]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The alnumsec package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{captcont} package}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0091} test if \pack{captcont} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0091} testons si \pack{captcont} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0091]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The captcont package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption} package}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption}}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0033} test if \pack{caption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+caption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0033} testons si \pack{caption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@captionLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0033]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The caption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption2} package}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption2}}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0034} test if \pack{caption2} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0034} testons si \pack{caption2} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@\else + \if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0034]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The caption2 package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{ccaption} package}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{ccaption}}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0035} test if \pack{ccaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0035} testons si \pack{ccaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0035]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The ccaption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{mcaption} package}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{mcaption}}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0036} test if \pack{mcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0036} testons si \pack{mcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0036]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The mcaption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{float} package}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{float}}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{float} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+float.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{float} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@floatLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the float package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the float package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{floatrow} package}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{floatrow}}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{floatrow} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{floatrow} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the floatrow package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the floatrow package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{trivfloat} package}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{trivfloat}}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{trivfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{trivfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the trivfloat package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the trivfloat package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{rotfloat} package}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{rotfloat}}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{rotfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{rotfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the rotfloat package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the rotfloat package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if empty mini-tables have been detected} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester si des mini-tables vides ont été détectées} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test for each kind of mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons pour chaque sorte de mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For parttocs:\imess{W0046} +% \or\relax +% Pour les parttocs:\imess{W0046} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0046]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty parttocs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For partlofs:\imess{W0044} +% \or\relax +% Pour les partlofs:\imess{W0044} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0044]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty partlofs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For partlots:\imess{W0045} +% \or\relax +% Pour les partlots:\imess{W0045} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty partlots} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For minitocs:\imess{W0043} +% \or\relax +% Pour les minitocs:\imess{W0043} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty minitocs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For minilofs:\imess{W0041} +% \or\relax +% Pour les minilofs:\imess{W0041} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0041]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty minilofs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For minilots:\imess{W0042} +% \or\relax +% Pour les minilots:\imess{W0042} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0042]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty minilots} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For secttocs:\imess{W0049} +% \or\relax +% Pour les secttocs:\imess{W0049} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0049]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty secttocs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For sectlofs:\imess{W0047} +% \or\relax +% Pour les sectlofs:\imess{W0047} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0047]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty sectlofs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For sectlots:\imess{W0048} +% \or\relax +% Pour les sectlots:\imess{W0048} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0048]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty sectlots} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG +% \subsubsection{Check if obsolete commands have been used} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester si des commandes obsolètes ont été utilisées} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG +% This hint is just a reminder if you have used obsolete commands, which are also signalled +% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% \or\relax +% Ce \emph{hint} est juste un rappel dans le cas où vous auriez utilisé des commandes obsolètes, qui sont aussi +% signalées dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Obsolete macro \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051} +% \or\relax +% Macro obsolète \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@firstpartis@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0051]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command: \string\firstpartis} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Obsolete macro \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050} +% \or\relax +% Macro obsolète \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@firstchapteris@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0050]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command: \string\firstchapteris} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Obsolete macro \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052} +% \or\relax +% Macro obsolète \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@firstsectionis@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0052]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command: \string\firstsectionis} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if some hints have been written} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester si des \emph{hints} ont été écrits} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} come at the end of the third part of the \optd{hints} option: +% if problems have been detected, a warning is displayed; +% the warning is not displayed but only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file if no problems have been detected. +% And we terminate the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro by a closing brace. +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} arrivons à~la fin de la troisième partie de l'option \optd{hints}: +% si des problèmes ont été détectés, un +% avertissement est affiché; cet avertissement n'est pas affiché mais seulement écrit dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} si aucun problème n'a été détecté. Et nous terminons la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} +% par une accolade fermante. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@hints@given@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0024]{minitoc(hints)}% + {Some hints have been written + \MessageBreak + in the \jobname.log file} +\else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0019]{minitoc(hints)}% + {No hints have been written + \MessageBreak + in the \jobname.log file.\@gobble} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Processing of options}\label{s+code+processing.options} +% \or\relax +% \section{Traitement des options}\label{s+code+processing.options} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteOptions} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, if possible, we apply the default language option, \loptd{english}: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, si possible, nous exécutons l'option de langue par défaut, \loptd{english}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \InputIfFileExists{english.mld}% + {\ExecuteOptions{english}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Else,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} we signal a severe error and provide the missing default titles: +% \else\relax +% Sinon,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} nous signalons une erreur sévère et fournissons les titres par défaut manquants: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + {\mtcPackageError[E0036]{minitoc}% + {Your minitoc installation is incomplete. + \MessageBreak + The minitoc language object file (.mld), + \MessageBreak + english.mld is not found. + \MessageBreak + We will try to continue with default values}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Please fix your minitoc installation. + \MessageBreak + Press <return> to continue}% + \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}% + \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}% + \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}% + \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}% + \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions*} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we execute all requested options: for most options, it is just setting a flag, or loading a file for the +% language options. +% \or\relax +% Puis nous exécutons toutes les options demandées; pour la plupart des options, ceci consiste seulement +% à~positionner un indicateur, ou à~charger un fichier pour les options de langue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProcessOptions* +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We now examine the flags for some options and execute the necessary actions. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons maintenant les indicateurs pour certaines options et exécutons les actions nécessaires. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} +% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \opt{insection} option, we load the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its options +% \optp{verbose}{placeins} and \optp{section}{placeins}, after the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput} +% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); the correct loading is verified: +% \or\relax +% Pour l'option \opt{insection}, nous chargeons +% le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options +% \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}, après le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} +% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}); le chargement correct est vérifié: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@ss@insection@ + \RequirePackage{flafter}[2000/07/23]% + \RequirePackage[section,verbose]{placeins}[2005/04/18]% + \@ifpackageloaded{placeins}% + {\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@true}{\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{notoccite} option}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} +% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \opt{notoccite} option, we just load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}: +% \or\relax +% Pour l'option \opt{notoccite}, nous chargeons simplement le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@notoccite@ + \RequirePackage{notoccite}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{listfiles} option}\ioptd{listfiles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{listfiles}}\ioptd{listfiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@long} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@short} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addtomaf} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0009} define the \com{mtc@maf} macro which closes \com{tf@mtc} +% and reopens it to write into the file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% It calls \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} (long or short extensions), then +% closes \com{tf@mtc}. \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} writes the names of the existing auxiliary +% files using decrementing loops on the associated counters, and includes \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} in the list +% (but \emph{not} the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Some users could made a cleanup using this file as a list of +% files to delete, so it must not be in the list.} file). +% We must also check the existence of \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} if long extensions are used. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0009} définissons la macro \com{mtc@maf} qui ferme \com{tf@mtc} +% puis le ré-ouvre pour écrire dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% Elle appelle \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} (suffixes longs ou courts), puis ferme \com{tf@mtc}. +% \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} écrit les noms des fichiers auxiliaires existants en utilisant des boucles +% par ordre décroissant sur les compteurs associés, et inclut \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} dans la liste +% (mais \emph{pas} le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Certains utilisateurs pourraient faire un nettoyage +% en utilisant ce fichier comme liste des fichiers à~détruire, donc il ne doit pas être dans la liste.}). +% Nous devons aussi tester l'existence de \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} si les suffixes longs sont utilisés. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@maf{% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0009]{minitoc}% + {Listing minitoc auxiliary files. + \MessageBreak + Creating the \jobname.maf file\@gobble} + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.maf + \if@mtc@longext@\mtc@maf@long\else\mtc@maf@short\fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\mtc@addtomaf#1{% + \IfFileExists{#1}{\immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}}{}} +\def\mtc@maf@long{% + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc0} +\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.ptc\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plf\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plt\arabic{ptc}} + \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{% + \loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlf\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlt\arabic{mtc}} + \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.stc\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slf\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slt\arabic{stc}} + \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}} +\def\mtc@maf@short{% + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc} +\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.P\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.G\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.U\arabic{ptc}} + \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.M\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.F\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.T\arabic{mtc}} + \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.S\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.H\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.V\arabic{stc}} + \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If this option is active, we call \com{mtc@maf} in an \com{AtEndDocument} block. +% \or\relax +% Si cette option est active, nous appellons \com{mtc@maf} dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@listfiles@{\AtEndDocument{\mtc@maf}}\else\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \optd{hints} option, we set its first part in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block and its third (last) part +% in an \com{AtEndDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Pour l'option \optd{hints}, nous plaçons sa première partie dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et sa +% troisième (dernière) partie dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@hints@ + \AtBeginDocument{\mtc@hints@begindoc}% + \AtEndDocument{\mtc@hints@enddoc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Saving the sectionning commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Sauvegarde des commandes de sectionnement} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And, at least, we save the definitions of sectionning commands (and of their unstarred and starred branches), +% for comparaisons (this is a part of the \optd{hints} option executed in the preamble): +% \or\relax +% Et, enfin, nous sauvegardons les définitions des commandes de sectionnement (avec leurs branches non étoilées et +% étoilées), pour des comparaisons (ceci est une partie de l'option \optd{hints} exécutée dans le préambule). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \com{part} command: +% \or\relax +% Pour la commande \com{part}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\mtc@hints@part\part + \let\mtc@hints@@part\@part + \let\mtc@hints@@spart\@spart} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \vspace{3\baselineskip} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \com{chapter} command: +% \or\relax +% Pour la commande \com{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\mtc@hints@chapter\chapter + \let\mtc@hints@@chapter\@chapter + \let\mtc@hints@@schapter\@schapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \vspace{3\baselineskip} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \com{section} command: +% \or\relax +% Pour la commande \com{section}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\mtc@hints@section\section + \let\mtc@hints@@sect\@sect + \let\mtc@hints@@ssect\@ssect} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Trapping the undefined preparation and insertion commands}\label{s+undef+trap} +% \or\relax +% \section{Interception des commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies}\label{s+undef+trap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@classck} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It\imess{E0037} may happen that you use a preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}) or an insertion command +% (like \com{dominitoc}) in a document using a class where that command is not available (like +% \class{article}). To get a better diagnostic for such errors, we intercept such commands by providing a default +% definition which just emits an error message. These default definitions are made in an \com{AtBeginDocument} +% block. +% \or\relax +% Il\imess{E0037} peut arriver que vous utilisiez une commande de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc}) ou une commande +% d'insertion (comme \com{dominitoc}) dans un document utilisant une classe pour laquelle cette commande n'est pas +% disponible (comme \class{article}). Pour obtenir un meilleur diagnostic pour ce type d'erreurs, nous interceptons de +% telles commandes en fournissant une définition par défaut qui émet simplement un message d'erreur. Ces définitions +% par défaut sont faites dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@classck#1{% + \mtcPackageError[E0037]{minitoc}% + {The \csname #1\endcsname\space command is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the document class}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% An \com{AtBeginDocument} bloc: +% \or\relax +% Un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part-level preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes de préparation au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\doparttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{doparttoc}}% + \providecommand{\dopartlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlof}}% + \providecommand{\dopartlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter-level preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes de préparation au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\dominitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominitoc}}% + \providecommand{\dominilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilof}}% + \providecommand{\dominilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section-level preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes de préparation au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\dosecttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosecttoc}}% + \providecommand{\dosectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlof}}% + \providecommand{\dosectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part-level insertion commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes d'insertion au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\parttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{parttoc}}% + \providecommand{\partlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlof}}% + \providecommand{\partlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter-level insertion commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes d'insertion au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\minitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minitoc}}% + \providecommand{\minilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilof}}% + \providecommand{\minilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section-level insertion commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes d'insertion au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\secttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{secttoc}}% + \providecommand{\sectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlof}}% + \providecommand{\sectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlot}}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A \vspace{3\baselineskip} +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{19.45525292mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.727626459mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And +% the package is terminated. +% \or\relax +% Et +% le paquetage est terminé. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +%</minitoc> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} file}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le fichier \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \begin{macro}{\input} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This short file is necessary to create the french documentation. Its rôle is to +% set \com{jobname} to \texttt{minitoc-fr} in place of \texttt{minitoc}. As \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% generates the \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} and \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} files which set a language number \com{LANG}, +% and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} reads then the \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan} file, the documentation can be in several languages +% (english and french here) in +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, the language being selected by \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} +% \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. The \com{relax} primitives are necessary to avoid bad surprises. +% \or\relax +% Ce court fichier est nécessaire pour créer la documentation en français. Son rôle est de forcer \com{jobname} +% à~\texttt{minitoc-fr} au lieu de \texttt{minitoc}. Comme \xfile{minitoc.ins} engendre les fichiers +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} et \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} qui établissent un numéro de langue \com{LANG}, et comme +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} lit alors le fichier \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan}, la documentation peut être en plusieurs langues +% (anglais et français ici) dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, la langue étant choisie par des constructions +% \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{fi}. Les primitives +% \com{relax} sont nécessaires pour éviter de mauvaises surprises. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*minitoc-fr> +\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}% + [2015/07/13 minitoc v61 french documentation start file] +\input{minitoc.dtx} +%</minitoc-fr> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Why \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \section{Pourquoi \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requires that the user inserts many commands in the source +% code of her/his document, and not only into the preamble of the document. Hence the concept of a replacement +% package, \pack{mtcoff} (means ``minitoc off''), which substitutes to all commands and environments of the +% \upack{minitoc} package some alternative commands and environments with the same names and syntaxes, but doing nothing +% (except emitting some harmless warnings, for special cases). This way, to turn off easily the \upack{minitoc} package, +% you just have to write, in the preamble of your document, something like: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requiert que l'utilisateur insère de nombreuses commandes +% dans le code source de son document, mais pas seulement dans le préambule du document. D'où le concept d'un +% paquetage de remplacement, \pack{mtcoff} (c'est-à-dire, «~\emph{minitoc off}~»), qui substitue à~toutes les +% commandes et à~tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc} d'autres commandes et environnements ayant +% les mêmes noms et syntaxes, mais ne faisant rien (sauf émettre quelques avertissements bénins, dans des cas +% spéciaux). De cette manière, pour inhiber facilement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il vous suffit d'écrire, +% dans le préambule de votre document, quelque chose comme ceci: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}|\\ +% \verb|%\usepackage{mtcoff}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% then the \upack{minitoc} package is activated with the specified options. If you modify this two lines this way: +% \or\relax +% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est activé avec les options spécifiées. Si vous modifiez ces deux lignes de +% la manière suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|%\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|\\ +% \com{usepackage}\verb|{mtcoff}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% then the \upack{minitoc} package is desactivated and all its commands and environments are ignored. This is much +% easier, faster and safer than commenting out all the commands and environments of \upack{minitoc}. Moreover, +% this operation is reversible. +% \or\relax +% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est désactivé et toutes ses commandes et environnements sont ignorés. Ceci +% est beaucoup plus facile, rapide et sûr que de mettre en commentaire toutes les commandes et environnements +% de \upack{minitoc}. De plus, cette opération est réversible. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Identification of the package}\label{s+mtcoff+ident} +% \or\relax +% \section{Identification du paquetage}\label{s+mtcoff+ident} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat} +% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we identify the package and check the version of \LaTeX\,\footnote{This checking is not really useful for +% the \pack{mtcoff} package itself, but it is good to check that your version of \LaTeX\ is not too old to +% support \upack{minitoc}.}; we need the \pack{mtcmess} package to write messages with unique identifiers. +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous identifions le paquetage et vérifions la version de \LaTeX\,\footnote{Cette vérification +% n'est pas vraiment utile pour le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} lui-même, mais il est bon de vérifier que votre +% version de \LaTeX\ n'est pas trop ancienne pour supporter \upack{minitoc}.}; nous avons besoin du paquetage +% \pack{mtcmess} pour écrire des messages avec des identificateurs uniques. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtcoff> +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% +\ProvidesPackage{mtcoff}[2015/07/13 v61 The mtcoff package] +\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking counters and dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simuler compteurs et dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\count@} +% \begin{macro}{\dimen@} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% As \upack{minitoc} declares some counters and dimensions registers, we fake them using \com{count@} or +% \com{dimen@}. For \com{mtcskipamount}, we must use its default definition, \com{bigskipamount}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Puisque \upack{minitoc} déclare quelques registres compteurs et dimensions, nous les simulons en utilisant +% \com{count@} ou \com{dimen@}. Pour \com{mtcskipamount}, nous utilisons sa définition par défaut, +% \com{bigskipamount}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\c@minitocdepth\count@ +\let\mtcindent\dimen@ +\let\mtcskipamount\bigskipamount +\let\c@parttocdepth\count@ +\let\ptcindent\dimen@ +\let\c@secttocdepth\count@ +\let\stcindent\dimen@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@stc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The basic mini-table counters are provided by \com{count@}: +% \or\relax +% Les compteurs de mini-tables basiques sont fournis par \com{count@}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\c@mtc\count@ \let\c@ptc\count@ \let\c@stc\count@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The gaps before and after parttoc heads receive their default values: +% \or\relax +% Les intervalles avant et après les têtes de parttocs reçoivent leurs valeurs par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@} \def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{F0008} must define the macros for the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule. +% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{F0008} devons définir les macros pour les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets +% horizontaux inférieurs. Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Nous devons émettre un avertissement si l'une de ces +% macros est utilisée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\kernafterparttoc{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterparttoc + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlof{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterpartlof + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlot{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterpartlot + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\kernaftersecttoc{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernaftersecttoc + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlof{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernaftersectlof + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlot{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernaftersectlot + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\kernafterminitoc{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterminitoc + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterminilof{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterminilof + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}% + \def\kernafterminilot{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterminilot + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{F0009} must define the macros for the horizontal offsets of the mini-tables. +% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{F0009} devons définir les macros pour les corrections horizontales des mini-tables. +% Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Un avertissement sera émis si l'une de ces macros est utilisée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\ptcoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\ptcoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\plfoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\plfoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\pltoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\pltoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\stcoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\stcoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\slfoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\slfoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\sltoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\sltoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\mtcoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\mtcoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\slfoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\slfoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\mltoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\mltoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking simple commands}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simuler les commandes simples}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some user commands are easy to fake: +% \or\relax +% Certaines commandes utilisateur sont faciles à~simuler: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\faketableofcontents\relax +\let\fakelistoffigures\relax +\let\fakelistoftables\relax +\let\mtcskip\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Basic adjustment commands are also easy: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes d'ajustement de base sont aussi faciles: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\relax} +\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\relax} +\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\relax} +\let\decrementptc\relax \let\incrementptc\relax +\let\decrementmtc\relax \let\incrementmtc\relax +\let\decrementstc\relax \let\incrementstc\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following commands are not directly called by the user, in normal circumstances, but must be faked: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes suivantes ne sont pas appelées directement par l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales, +% mais il faut les simuler: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\partend\relax \let\partbegin\relax +\let\chapterend\relax \let\chapterbegin\relax +\let\sectend\relax \let\sectbegin\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking commands with one optional argument}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simulation des commandes ayant un \texorpdfstring{\mbox{argument}}{argument} optionnel}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The user commands with an optional argument are faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get +% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes utilisateur ayant un argument optionnel sont simulées en utilisant la macro interne \LaTeX{} +% \com{@ifnextchar} (pour prendre l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Command \com{mtcprepare}: +% \or\relax +% Commande \com{mtcprepare}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking flags}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simulation d'indicateurs}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We defines flags which were true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui étaient vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux +% à~l'extérieur. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse% +\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse% +\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse% +\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse% +\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse% +\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse% +\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse% +\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse% +\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the internal commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\appendixmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\psect} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\xsect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We need also to disable some \upack{minitoc} commands, with \com{relax} (macros with no argument) or +% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros with two arguments): +% \or\relax +% Il nous faut aussi inhiber quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc}, avec \com{relax} (macros sans argument) ou +% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros avec arguments): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\tf@mtc\count@ +\let\mtc@string\relax +\let\appendixmtc\relax +\let\l@xchapter\@gobbletwo +\let\xchapter\relax +\let\pchapter\relax +\let\psect\relax +\let\l@xpart\@gobbletwo +\let\xpart\relax +\let\l@xsect\@gobbletwo +\let\xsect\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the font commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Désactivation des commandes de fonte}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We disable the \upack{minitoc} font commands (like \com{mtcSSfont}) with \com{empty}, because some users +% might have used: +% \or\relax +% Nous désactivons commandes de fonte de \upack{minitoc} (telles que \com{mtcSSfont}) avec \com{empty}, car +% certains utilisateurs pourraient avoir utilisé: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{mtcSSfont}\verb|}{...}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. +% \or\relax +% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Fonts for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ptcfont\empty +\let\ptcCfont\empty +\let\ptcSfont\empty +\let\ptcSSfont\empty +\let\ptcSSSfont\empty +\let\ptcPfont\empty +\let\ptcSPfont\empty +\let\plffont\empty +\let\plfSfont\empty +\let\pltfont\empty +\let\pltSfont\empty +\let\ptifont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Fonts for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcfont\empty +\let\mtcSfont\empty +\let\mtcSSfont\empty +\let\mtcSSSfont\empty +\let\mtcPfont\empty +\let\mtcSPfont\empty +\let\mlffont\empty +\let\mlfSfont\empty +\let\mltfont\empty +\let\mltSfont\empty +\let\mtifont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Fonts for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\stcfont\empty +\let\stcSSfont\empty +\let\stcSSSfont\empty +\let\stcPfont\empty +\let\stcSPfont\empty +\let\slffont\empty +\let\slfSfont\empty +\let\sltfont\empty +\let\sltSfont\empty +\let\stifont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Font for ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} lines: +% \or\relax +% Fonte pour les lignes de «~pause-café~»{\myCoffeecup}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\coffeefont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands use two or three mandatory arguments: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes utilisent deux ou trois arguments obligatoires: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcsetdepth\@gobbletwo +\let\mtcsetoffset\@gobbletwo +\def\mtcsetfont#1#2#3{\empty} +\let\mtcsettitlefont\@gobbletwo +\let\mtcsettitle\@gobbletwo +\def\mtcsetformat#1#2#3{\empty} +\def\mtcsetfeature#1#2#3{\empty} +\let\mtcsetpagenumbers\@gobbletwo +\let\mtcsetrules\@gobbletwo +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcpolymXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetpolym.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We simulate these commands by keeping only the fourth argument; they must still be robust. +% \or\relax +% Nous simulons ces commandes en ne gardant que le quatrième argument; elles doivent encore être robustes. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{{#4}} +% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{{#4}} +% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{{#4}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the new \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des nouvelles commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package defines the \verb|\l@starXXX| commands to format TOC entries for starred sectionning +% commands. We reset to the unstarred version, when necessary: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} définit les commandes \verb|\l@starXXX| pour la mise en forme d'entrées de la +% table des matières pour des commandes de sectionnement étoilées. Nous revenons à~la version non étoilée, lorsque +% cela est nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section} +\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection} +\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection} +\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph} +\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Ignore the obsolete commands}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ignorer les commandes obsolètes}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We just ignore the obsolete commands (with one mandatory argument): +% \or\relax +% Nous ignorons simplement les commandes obsolètes (qui ont un seul argument, obligatoire): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\firstpartis\@gobble \let\firstchapteris\@gobble \let\firstsectionis\@gobble +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} and \ucom{mtcloadmlo} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} et \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These command have one mandatory argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes ont un seul argument, obligatoire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcselectlanguage\@gobble \let\mtcloadmlo\@gobble +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{16} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the commands for the horizontal rules}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\stcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\slfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\pltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\sltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule} +% % \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands have no argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ptcrule\relax +\let\noptcrule\relax +\let\mtcrule\relax +\let\nomtcrule\relax +\let\stcrule\relax +\let\nostcrule\relax +\let\plfrule\relax +\let\noplfrule\relax +\let\mlfrule\relax +\let\nomlfrule\relax +\let\slfrule\relax +\let\noslfrule\relax +\let\pltrule\relax +\let\nopltrule\relax +\let\mltrule\relax +\let\nomltrule\relax +\let\sltrule\relax +\let\nosltrule\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the commands for the page numbers}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les numéros de page}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands have no argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcpagenumbers\relax +\let\nomtcpagenumbers\relax +\let\stcpagenumbers\relax +\let\nostcpagenumbers\relax +\let\ptcpagenumbers\relax +\let\noptcpagenumbers\relax +\let\mlfpagenumbers\relax +\let\nomlfpagenumbers\relax +\let\slfpagenumbers\relax +\let\noslfpagenumbers\relax +\let\plfpagenumbers\relax +\let\noplfpagenumbers\relax +\let\mltpagenumbers\relax +\let\nomltpagenumbers\relax +\let\sltpagenumbers\relax +\let\nosltpagenumbers\relax +\let\pltpagenumbers\relax +\let\nopltpagenumbers\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the mini-table features commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We disable the commands for features (like \com{beforeparttoc}) with \com{empty}, because some users may have +% used: +% \or\relax +% Nous inhibons les commandes pour les dispositifs (telles que \com{beforeparttoc}) avec \com{empty}, car +% certains utilisateurs ont pu avoir fait: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{beforeparttoc}\verb|}{...}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. These commands have no argument, +% \or\relax +% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument, +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforeparttoc\empty +\let\beforepartlof\empty +\let\beforepartlot\empty +\let\afterparttoc\empty +\let\afterpartlof\empty +\let\afterpartlot\empty +\let\openparttoc\empty +\let\openpartlof\empty +\let\openpartlot\empty +\let\closeparttoc\empty +\let\closepartlof\empty +\let\closepartlot\empty +\let\thispageparttocstyle\empty +\let\thispagepartlofstyle\empty +\let\thispagepartlotstyle\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforeminitoc\empty +\let\beforeminilof\empty +\let\beforeminilot\empty +\let\afterminitoc\empty +\let\afterminilof\empty +\let\afterminilot\empty +\let\openminitoc\empty +\let\openminilof\empty +\let\openminilot\empty +\let\closeminitoc\empty +\let\closeminilof\empty +\let\closeminilot\empty +\let\thispageminitocstyle\empty +\let\thispageminilofstyle\empty +\let\thispageminilotstyle\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforesecttoc\empty +\let\beforesectlof\empty +\let\beforesectlot\empty +\let\aftersecttoc\empty +\let\aftersectlof\empty +\let\aftersectlot\empty +\let\opensecttoc\empty +\let\opensectlof\empty +\let\opensectlot\empty +\let\closesecttoc\empty +\let\closesectlof\empty +\let\closesectlot\empty +\let\thispagesecttocstyle\empty +\let\thispagesectlofstyle\empty +\let\thispagesectlotstyle\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling miscellaneous flags and commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de divers indicateurs et commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@listof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are some flags and commands that it is wise to declare: +% \or\relax +% Il y~a quelques indicateurs et commandes qu'il est bon de déclarer: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@longext@ \@mtc@longext@true +\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse +\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse +\newif\ifundottedmtc \undottedmtcfalse +\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse +\let\l@listof\chapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Caution for some commands}\label{s+mtcoff+caution} +% \or\relax +% \section{Précaution pour certaines commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+caution} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} \upack{minitoc} commands should eventually be replaced if you decide to \emph{definitely} +% stop using the \upack{minitoc} package with your document. So we declare a flag and an \com{AtEndDocument} block to signal +% that you have used these commands: +% \or\relax +% Certaines\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} commandes de \upack{minitoc} devraient éventuellement être remplacées si vous décidez +% d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec votre document. Donc nous déclarons un +% indicateur et un bloc \com{AtEndDocument} pour signaler que vous avez utilisé ces commandes: +% \fi +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifmtcoffwarn@ \mtcoffwarn@false +\AtEndDocument{\ifmtcoffwarn@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[F0007]{mtcoff}% + {You should scan (backwards) your .log + \MessageBreak + file to find some commands needing + \MessageBreak + to be replaced if you decide to + \MessageBreak + DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this + \MessageBreak + document. It is more wise to keep the + \MessageBreak + \string\usepackage\space lines for minitoc and mtcoff + \MessageBreak + and to comment out only one of them} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ck} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} these commands are disabled +% and they set the flag and give a warning (useful to get the line number): +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} ces commandes sont inhibées +% de manière qu'elles positionnent l'indicateur et donnent un avertissement (ce +% qui est utile pour avoir le numéro de ligne): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0004]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced + \MessageBreak + by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...} + \MessageBreak} +\def\mtc@ck{#1} +\ifx\mtc@ck\empty +\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% +\fi} +\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0006]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced + \MessageBreak + by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...} + \MessageBreak} +\def\mtc@ck{#1} +\ifx\mtc@ck\empty +\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% +\fi} +\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0005]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced + \MessageBreak + by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...} + \MessageBreak} +\def\mtc@ck{#1} +\ifx\mtc@ck\empty +\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling commands for ``coffee''}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les <<~pauses-café~>>}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We disable the commands relative to ``coffee'' lines, and the specific version of contents lines without leaders +% of dots: +% \or\relax +% Nous inhibons les commandes concernant les lignes de contenu pour les «~pauses-café~», ainsi que la version +% spécifique de ligne de contenu sans points de conduite: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{\relax} +\let\coffeeline\@gobble +\let\l@coffee\relax +\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\relax} +\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.} environments}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs} +% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs} +% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These environments accept one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces environnements acceptent un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} +\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} +\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} and \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth} internal commands} +% \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth} internal commands} +% \or\relax +% ^^A \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} et \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth}} +% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth}} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelotdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must inhibit these commands, inserted in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files by the +% hiding commands. So we will not have to delete these files when switching from the \upack{minitoc} package to +% the \pack{mtcoff} package. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons inhiber ces commandes, insérées dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} par +% les commandes de masquage. Ainsi nous n'aurons pas à~détruire ces fichiers lors du passage du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} au paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@savetocdepth\empty +\let\mtc@savelofdepth\empty +\let\mtc@savelotdepth\empty +\let\mtc@restoretocdepth\empty +\let\mtc@restorelofdepth\empty +\let\mtc@restorelotdepth\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixglossary} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixglossary}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixindex} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixindex}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commands should be replaced by standard commands, +% but \pack{mtcoff} simulates and gives a warning, which will be reminded at the end of document: +% \or\relax +% Ces\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commandes devraient être remplacées par des commandes standard, +% mais \pack{mtcoff} les simule et donne un avertissement, qui sera rappelé en fin de document: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addstarredpart#1{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0002]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\addstarredpart{...} should be replaced by + \MessageBreak + \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...} + \MessageBreak} + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}} +\def\addstarredchapter#1{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0001]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced by + \MessageBreak + \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...} + \MessageBreak} + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}} +\def\addstarredsection#1{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0003]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\addstarredsection{...} should be replaced by + \MessageBreak + \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...} + \MessageBreak} + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the \pack{mtcoff} package is terminated. +% \or\relax +% Et le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} est terminé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%</mtcoff> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcmess} package}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcmess}}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfo} +% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarning} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarning} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarningNoLine} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageError} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To make easier the search of a message in the documentation\footnote{For instance, using the search facility of some PDF +% reader utility.}, we will assign an unique identifier to each +% message of the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} packages. As the standard commands for such messages do not +% include this feature, we make extended versions, with the same syntax, plus a first optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Pour faciliter la recherche d'un message dans la documentation\,\footnote{Par exemple, en utilisant le système de +% recherche d'un utilitaire de lecture de fichier PDF.}, nous attribuerons un identificateur unique à~chaque +% message des paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}. Puisque les commandes standard pour de tels messages +% n'offrent pas ce dispositif, nous en faisons des versions étendues, avec la même syntaxe, plus un premier argument +% optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtcmess> +\ProvidesPackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]% +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageInfo}[3][]% + {\PackageInfo{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarning}[3][]% + {\PackageWarning{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}[3][]% + {\PackageWarningNoLine{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageError}[4][]% + {\PackageError{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}{#4}}% +%</mtcmess> +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Hence the first line of the message will contain the package name and the unique identifier of the message. +% \or\relax +% Donc la première ligne du message contiendra le nom du paquetage et l'identificateur unique du message. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros are defined in a separate package because they are used by at least two packages +% (\upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff}) and because they could be useful for other packages. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros sont définies dans un paquetage distinct car elles sont utilisées par au moins deux paquetages +% (\upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}) et parce qu'elles pourraient être utiles pour d'autres paquetages. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Patch for the \uclass{memoir} class}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code must be loaded to fix an \emph{incompatibility} of the \upack{minitoc} package +% with some recent versions of the \class{memoir} class. +% This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version of \class{memoir}. +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Correction pour la classe \uclass{memoir}}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code doit être chargé pour corriger une \emph{incompatibilité} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% avec certaines versions récentes de la classe \class{memoir}. +% Cette correction n'est plus nécessaire après la version datée 2005/09/25 de \class{memoir}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtcpatchmem> +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]% +\ProvidesPackage{mtcpatchmem}% + [2015/07/13 v61 package mtcpatchmem] +\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +\mtcPackageInfo[M0001]{mtcpatchmem}% + {mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class\@gobble} +\renewcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{% + \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg + \@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}% +} +\def\@chapter[#1]#2{% +% if |\ch@pt@c| is empty, no [ was found at all. Use |#2| as +% entry for all fields. + \ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty + \def\f@rtoc{#2}% + \def\f@rhdr{#2}% + \else +% otherwise at least one [ was found. If |#1| is empty then only +% one was found. + \let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c + \else + \def\f@rhdr{#1}% + \fi + \fi + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax + \if@mainmatter + \refstepcounter{chapter}% + \fi + \fi + \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}% + \ifartopt + \@makechapterhead{#2}% + \@afterheading + \else + \insertchapterspace + \if@twocolumn + \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% + \else + \@makechapterhead{#2}% + \fi + \@afterheading + \fi + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax + \if@mainmatter + \ifanappendix + \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{% + \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}% + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{% + \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}% + \fi + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}% + \fi + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}% + \fi + \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi +} +%</mtcpatchmem> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Language definition (\usuffix{.mld}) and object (\usuffix{.mlo}) files}\label{c+code+mld.files}% +% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Fichiers de définition (\usuffix{.mld}) et objets (\usuffix{.mlo}) de langue}\label{c+code+mld.files}% +% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% \lneed{7} +% ^^A MINILOF BLOCK WAS HERE +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \mtcindent=0pt +% \minilof +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\empty} +% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}% +% \raggedcolumns +% \mtcskip + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + + + +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Overview} +% This chapter shows the code of each \suffix{.mld} file. A \suffix{.mld} file is a \emph{minitoc language +% definition} file, which defines the titles of the mini-tables for a given language. It contains often some +% comments about its origin, if you need further details. +% +% \lneed{6} +% For some languages, I~have added a map (and a flag) of the country or area where the language is spoken, if it is not +% trivial. The origin of each map is given by an URL to the graphic file or to the WEB page where I~found it. +% Note that the~\cite{tlfq} and~\cite{LMP} Web sites are useful sources. Maps from~\cite{LMP} are under the +% Creative Commons License, see~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.en_GB}. +% The site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} allows to look at the maps of many countries (but not of France!). +% The Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection~\cite{texasmaps} (The University of Texas at Austin, +% \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contains countless maps. +% +% \reversemarginpar +% Many +% free maps were also found by a search in the vast Wikipedia +% (i.e. \url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org}, +% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.). +% If you are curious and brave, you can also find many +% maps and documents about Eastern Europa and about Asia at \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; that site give many +% historical informations. +% +% \lneed{8} +% \normalmarginpar +% A \suffix{.mld} file is loaded either via a +% package option in the \com{usepackage} command +% for the \upack{minitoc} package (or a global option for the document), either via the command: +% \or\relax +% \section{Généralités} +% Ce chapitre montre le code de chaque fichier \suffix{.mld}. Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est un fichier +% de définition de langue pour minitoc (\emph{minitoc language definition file}), qui définit les titres des +% mini-tables pour une langue donnée. Il contient souvent quelques informations sur son origine, si vous avez +% besoin de plus de détails. +% +% \lneed{6} +% \reversemarginpar +% Pour certaines langues, j'ai ajouté une carte (et un drapeau) du pays ou des zones où la langue est parlée, si ce n'est pas trivial. +% L'origine de chaque carte est donnée par un URL vers le fichier graphique ou vers la page où je l'ai trouvée. +% Notez que les sites Web~\cite{tlfq} et~\cite{LMP} sont des sources utiles. Les cartes de~\cite{LMP} sont sous la +% \emph{Creative Commons License}, voir~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.fr}. +% +% Le site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} permet de regarder les cartes de nombreux +% pays (mais pas de la France!). La \emph{Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection}~\cite{texasmaps} (Université du Texas +% à~Austin, \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contient d'innombrables cartes. +% +% \lneed{7} +% De +% nombreuses cartes publiques proviennent aussi de la Wikipédia ({\froff\url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org}, +% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.}). +% Si vous êtes curieux et courageux, vous pourrez aussi trouver de nombreux documents et cartes concernant l'Europe de +% l'Est et l'Asie sur le site \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; il donne de nombreuses informations historiques. +% +% \lneed{8} +% \normalmarginpar +% Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est chargé soit via une option du paquetage +% dans la commande \com{usepackage} pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% (ou une option globale pour le document), +% soit via la commande: +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{language} +% \or\relax +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{langue} +% \fi +% \end{verse} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each \suffix{.mld} file must define the nine following commands (for the mini-tables of contents, +% mini-lists of figures and mini-lists of tables, at the part, chapter and section levels): +% \or\relax +% Chaque fichier \suffix{.mld} doit définir les neuf commandes suivantes (pour les mini-tables des +% matières, les mini-listes des figures et les mini-listes des tableaux, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section): +% \fi +% \begin{multicols}{3} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{ptctitle} +% \item \com{plftitle} +% \item \com{plttitle}\columnbreak +% \item \com{mtctitle} +% \item \com{mlftitle} +% \item \com{mlttitle}\columnbreak +% \item \com{stctitle} +% \item \com{slftitle} +% \item \com{slttitle} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Many \suffix{.mld} files require special fonts adequate for the corresponding language; as this is a +% language-dependent issue, the user must set up the correct language and font context for each language, like using +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, the +% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}, the \pack{Antomega} +% system~\cite{antomega}, the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex}, +% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, +% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, +% or \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} packages. +% Note that it is often the \virage\emph{english} name of the language which is used to name the corresponding +% \suffix{.mld} file. +% \or\relax +% De nombreux fichiers \suffix{.mld} ont besoin de fontes spéciales adéquates pour la langue +% correspondante; comme ceci est une question concernant la langue, l'utilisateur doit mettre en place un contexte +% linguistique et typographique correct pour la langue correspondante, en utilisant par exemple le paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, le système +% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}, le système \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}, +% les paquetages \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex}, +% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} +% et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} ou \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}. +% Notez que c'est souvent le nom en \virage\emph{anglais} de la langue qui est utilisé pour nommer le fichier \suffix{.mld} +% correspondant. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{filecontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi (iranian), hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese, +% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai, and russian variants.}, the source of the titles +% use some \virage\emph{exotic encodings}, difficult to manipulate +% in a \suffix{.dtx} file, the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper loading +% a \suffix{.mlo} file\,\footnote{The extension +% \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the +% \suffix{.dtx} files in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package. +% To go around this limitation, the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file uses +% \env{filecontents} environments to generate the \suffix{.mlo} files. +% The adequate input encoding must be set up +% by the user \emph{before}\virage{} loading the \suffix{.mld} file via the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command. +% \or\relax +% Mais pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour les variantes du chinois, du farsi +% (iranien), du coréen (hangûl et hanja), du japonais, du \lopt{malayalam-omega}, du thaï et du russe.}, le code source des +% titres utilise quelques \virage\emph{codages exotiques}, +% difficiles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors une simple enveloppe qui charge +% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object}, +% objet minitoc de langue.}, qui n'est pas engendré par les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Pour contourner cette limitation, le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins} utilise simplement des +% environnements \env{filecontents} pour engendrer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. +% Le codage d'entrée adéquat doit être mis en place par l'utilisateur \emph{avant}\virage{} le +% chargement du fichier \suffix{.mld} via la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{4} +% {\bfseries +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} version~\#49, +% the \upack{minitoc} package checks the presence of the +% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file +% (and of the \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} file if necessary) for each language option of the package, +% before validating the option. If a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, the corresponding language option +% is not enabled and a warning message is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. But the presence of +% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language. +% If some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files are missing, +% the list of this files is given in the \suffix{.log} file. You should find these files on CTAN. +% \or\relax +% À~partir\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} de la version~\#49, +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc} vérifie la présence du fichier +% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (et du fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} si nécessaire) pour +% chaque option de langue du paquetage, avant de valider l'option. Si un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} +% est manquant, l'option de langue correspondante n'est pas validée et un message d'avertissement est écrit dans +% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Mais la présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car +% l'anglais est la langue par défaut. +% Si certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} sont manquants, +% la liste de ces fichiers est écrite dans le fichier \suffix{.log}. Vous devriez pouvoir les trouver sur CTAN. +% \fi +% \par} ^^A %BF> +% ^^A \clearpage ^^A %% BEGIN OF LANGUAGE SECTIONS +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Acadian'' language: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~acadian~>>: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld} +% \fi + +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% \lopt{acadian} language\,\FAC{} +% is just french, so we load the \xfile{french.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue \lopt{acadian} (acadien)\,\FAC{} est simplement du français, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*acadian> +\ProvidesFile{acadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +%</acadian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Acadien'' language: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~acadien~>>: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{acadien}'' language\,\FAC{} +% is just french (``\texttt{acadien}'' is the french term for ``\texttt{acadian}''), so we load the \xfile{french.mld} +% file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La +% <<~\lopt{acadien}~>>\,\FAC{} +% est simplement du français (<<~\texttt{acadien}~>> est le terme français pour <<~\texttt{acadian}~>>, en anglais), +% donc nous chargons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*acadien> +\ProvidesFile{acadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +%</acadien> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Afrikaan'' language: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~afrikaan~>>: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld} +% \fi + +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{33.33333333mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{afrikaan}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in South Africa and Namibia, it has dutch origins; compare with +% section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}. +% See also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}. } +% come from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée en Afrique du Sud et en Namibie, elle a des origines +% néerlandaises; comparez avec la section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}. +% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*afrikaan> +\ProvidesFile{afrikaan.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Afrikaan(s) titles from dutch.dtx (babel) by Braams, Johannes~L. +\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% +\def\plftitle{Lys van figure}% +\def\plttitle{Lys van tabelle}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% +\def\mlftitle{Lys van figure}% +\def\mlttitle{Lys van tabelle}% +\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% +\def\slftitle{Lys van figure}% +\def\slttitle{Lys van tabelle}% +%</afrikaan> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Afrikaans'' language: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~afrikaans~>>: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The term ``\lopt{afrikaans}'' is a synonym of ``\lopt{afrikaan}'', so we just load \xfile{afrikaan.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}): +% \or\relax +% Le terme <<~\lopt{afrikaans}~>> est un synonyme de <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{afrikaan.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*afrikaans> +\ProvidesFile{afrikaans.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaan}% +%</afrikaans> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.25352113mm} +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Albanian'' language: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~albanian~>>: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% albanian language (\emph{shqip}) is spoken in Albania and some regions of Macedonia, Montenegro, Serbia and Kosovo. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{albanian}'' language are taken from the \xfile{albanian.dtx} file +% (with a contribution of \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}: +% \or\relax +% La +% langue albanaise (\emph{shqip}) est parlée en Albanie et quelques régions de Macédoine, du Montenegro, +% de Serbie et du Kosovo. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{albanian}~>> (albanais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{albanian.dtx} +% (avec une contribution de \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}: +% \fi + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*albanian> +\ProvidesFile{albanian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Albanian titles from albabian.dtx (babel). +%% Adi Zaimi (zami1st at yahoo.com / adizaimi at yahoo.com). +\def\ptctitle{P\"ermbajta}% +\def\plftitle{Figurat}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelat}% +\def\mtctitle{P\"ermbajta}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurat}% +\def\mltitle{Tabelat}% +\def\stctitle{P\"ermbajta}% +\def\slftitle{Figurat}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelat}% +%</albanian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``American'' language: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~american~>>: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{american}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' +% (the languages themselves have some differences, +% like the hyphenation rules, some spellings and phonetics), +% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{american}~>> (américain) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> +% (les langues elles-mêmes ont quelques différences, +% par exemple les règles de coupure des mots, l'orthographe et la prononciation), +% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} (voir +% la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*american> +\ProvidesFile{american.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +%</american> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arab'' language: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arab~>>: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} + +% ^^A (ARAB +% ^^A ARAB) +% \par\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{arab}'' language (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) are taken +% from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} +% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab}~>> (arabe) (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) sont tirés +% du paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} +% (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The arabic language is spoken in: +% Algeria, Bahrain, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Libya, Mauritania, Morocco, Oman, Palestinian territories, +% Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Western Sahara, Yemen by a majority; it is also +% the liturgical language of Islam. +% \or\relax +% La langue arabe est parlée dans les pays suivants: +% Algérie, Bahrain, Égypte, Irak, Jordanie, Koweït, Liban, Libye, Mauritanie, Maroc, Oman, Territoires Palestiniens, +% Qatar, Arabie Saoudite, Soudan, Syrie, Tunisie, Émirats Arabes Unis, Sahara Occidental, Yémen par une +% majorité de la population; c'est aussi la langue liturgique de l'Islam +%.\looseness=-1 +% \fi +% \par\normalmarginpar +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arab> +\ProvidesFile{arab.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Arabic titles. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex) +\def\ptctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% +\def\plftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% +\def\plttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% +\def\mtctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% +\def\mlftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% +\def\mlttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% +\def\stctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% +\def\slftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% +\def\slttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% +%</arab> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arab2'' language: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arab2~>>: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcArabTok} +% \begin{macro}{\tcArabTok} +% \begin{macro}{\a@tok} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{arab2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} +% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts. +% It is a variant of the ``\lopt{arab}'' language. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> (arabe, variante) sont tirés du +% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), +% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arab2> +\ProvidesFile{arab2.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Arabic titles. Variant. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex) +{\makeatletter\global\let\mtcArabTok\a@tok}% +\def\ptctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% +\def\plftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% +\def\plttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% +\def\mtctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% +\def\mlftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% +\def\mlttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% +\def\stctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% +\def\slftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% +\def\slttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% +%</arab2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arabi'' language: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arabi~>>: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\R} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{arabi}'' language are taken from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi} +% (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), +% which should be used, with the associated fonts. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} +% (par \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arabi> +\ProvidesFile{arabi.mld}[2006/07/27]% +%% Arabic titles (strings taken from arabi.ldf; to be used with arabi) +%% Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of the Arabi package, by Youssef Jabri) +\def\ptctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% +\def\plftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\plttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\mtctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% +\def\mlftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\mlttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\stctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% +\def\slftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\slttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +%</arabi> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arabic'' language: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arabic~>>: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{arabic}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{arab}'', so we just load \xfile{arab.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+arab}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{arabic}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{arab}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{arab.mld} +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+arab}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arabic> +\ProvidesFile{arabic.mld}[2005/02/10]\mtcselectlanguage{arab}% +%</arabic> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Armenian'' language: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~armenian~>>: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{6.213285133mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{armenian}'' language (\emph{hayeren}) are taken from the \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} package~\cite{armtex} +% (by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), which should be +% used, with the associated fonts. +% The armenian language is spoken in Armenia, in a part of Azerbaidjan and in the armenian diaspora. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{armenian}~>> (arménien, \emph{hayeren}) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} +% (de \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), +% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% La langue arménienne est parlée en Arménie, dans une partie de l'Azerbaïdjan et dans la diaspora arménienne. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*armenian> +\ProvidesFile{armenian.mld}[1999/06/28]% +%% Armenian titles from ArmTeX. Sergueï Dachian (Serguei.Dachian@univ-lemans.fr), +%% Arnak Dalalyan & Vartan Akopian +\def\ptctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% +\def\plftitle{Patkerneri cank}% +\def\plttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% +\def\mtctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% +\def\mlftitle{Patkerneri cank}% +\def\mlttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% +\def\stctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% +\def\slftitle{Patkerneri cank}% +\def\slttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% +%</armenian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Australian'' language: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~australian~>>: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{australian}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{australian}~>> (australien) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*australian> +\ProvidesFile{australian.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +%</australian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Austrian'' language: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~austrian~>>: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For +% the mini-table titles, the ``\lopt{austrian}'' language is like the ``\lopt{german}'' language, so we load +% \xfile{german.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+german}): +% \or\relax +% Pour +% les titres des mini-tables, la langue <<~\lopt{austrian}~>> (autrichien) est comme la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> +% (allemand), donc nous chargeons \xfile{german.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+german}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*austrian> +\ProvidesFile{austrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{german}% +%</austrian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bahasa'' language: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bahasa~>>: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{bahasa}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{bahasa}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bahasa> +\ProvidesFile{bahasa.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% +%</bahasa> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bahasai'' language: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bahasai~>>: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.321112516\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.678887484\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasai}'' language\,\footnote{Bahasa is spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, +% with different pronunciations and titles but the same writing. Bahasai is the indonesian variant. See +% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}.} (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) are +% taken from the file \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen} and \name{Terry}{Mart}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}. +% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. The word ``bahasa'' means ``language'' in bahasa. +% For other names for this language, see sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} and \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>\,\footnote{Le bahasa est parlé en Indonésie et en Malaisie, +% avec des prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasai est la variante indonésienne. +% Voir \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.} +% (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen} +% et \name{Terry}{Mart}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}. +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. Le mot «~bahasa~» signifie +% «~langage~» en bahasa. Pour d'autres noms pour cette langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} et +% \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bahasai> +\ProvidesFile{bahasai.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Bahasa Indonesia titles from bahasa.dtx in the babel package. +%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry +\def\ptctitle{Daftar Isi}% +\def\plftitle{Daftar Gambar}% +\def\plttitle{Daftar Tabel}% +\def\mtctitle{Daftar Isi}% +\def\mlftitle{Daftar Gambar}% +\def\mlttitle{Daftar Tabel}% +\def\stctitle{Daftar Isi}% +\def\slftitle{Daftar Gambar}% +\def\slttitle{Daftar Tabel}% +%</bahasai> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{18} +% \section{``Bahasam'' language: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld} +% \or\relax +% \lneed{20} +% \section{Langue <<~bahasam~>>: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.293413174\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.706586826\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasam}'' language (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, with +% different pronunciations and titles +% but the same writing. Bahasam is the malaysian variant.} are taken from the file \xfile{bahasam.dtx} +% (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} and \name{Bob}{Margolis}) +% in the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}. +% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. For other names for this language, see +% sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} and~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>> (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Parlée en Indonésie et en Malaisie, avec des +% prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasam est la variante malaisienne.} sont +% tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasam.dtx} +% (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} et \name{Bob}{Margolis}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}. +% Des +% fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. Pour d'autres noms pour cette +% langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} et~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bahasam> +\ProvidesFile{bahasam.mld}[2006/12/19]% +%% Bahasa Malaysia titles from bahasam.dtx in the babel package +%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry & Margolis, Bob +\def\ptctitle{Kandungan}% +\def\plftitle{Senarai Gambar}% +\def\plttitle{Senarai Jadual}% +\def\mtctitle{Kandungan}% +\def\mlftitle{Senarai Gambar}% +\def\mlttitle{Senarai Jadual}% +\def\stctitle{Kandungan}% +\def\slftitle{Senarai Gambar}% +\def\slttitle{Senarai Jadual}% +%</bahasam> +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bangla'' language: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld} +% \suppressfloats +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bangla~>>: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}% +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}% +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}% +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}% + +% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0pt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \noindent\begin{samepage} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' (\lopt{bengali}) language\,\footnote{Spoken in Bangladesh and some parts of India, +% like Occidental Bengal~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) and Tripura~(16).} are taken from +% the \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} package~\cite{bangtex} (by \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); they need specific fonts +% (the bengali alphabet is derived from sanskrit). +% \par\end{samepage} +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Bangladesh et dans certaines parties de +% l'Inde, comme le Bengale Occidental~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) et Tripura~(16).} (\lopt{bengali}) sont simplement tirés +% du paquetage \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex} (de \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); +% ils ont besoin de fontes spécifiques (l'alphabet bengalî est dérivé du sanskrit). +% \fi +% \par\normalmarginpar +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bangla> +\ProvidesFile{bangla.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Bangla titles from BangTeX. Needs specific fonts. +\def\ptctitle{suu\*c*ipotRo}% <----- +\def\plftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% +\def\plttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% +\def\mtctitle{suu\*c*i}% +\def\mlftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% +\def\mlttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% +\def\stctitle{suu\*c*i}% +\def\slftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% +\def\slttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% +%</bangla> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Basque'' language: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~basque~>>: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{14mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{basque}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in the basque country, in the north of Spain and +% south-west of France.} (\emph{euskara}) are taken from the \xfile{basque.dtx} file +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, by \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} +% and \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, with help from \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}. +% It seems that 8~bits fonts are preferable. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{basque}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Pays Basque, qui est situé dans le nord de l'Espagne +% et le sud-ouest de la France.} (\emph{euskara}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{basque.dtx} dans le paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, par \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} et \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, avec +% l'aide de \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}. +% Il semble que des fontes 8-bits soient préférables. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*basque> +\ProvidesFile{basque.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Basque titles from basque.dtx (babel). +%% Aguirregabiria, Juan M. <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es> WWW: http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma.html +%% & Sanchez, Julio <jsanchez at gmv.es>, +%% and help from Izaola Azkona, Zunbeltz <wmbizazz at lg dot ehu> +%% Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% +\def\plftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% +\def\plttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% +\def\mtctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% +\def\mlftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% +\def\mlttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% +\def\stctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% +\def\slftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% +\def\slttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% +%</basque> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bengali'' language: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bengali~>>: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{bengali}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' language, so we load +% the file \xfile{bangla.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{bengali}~>> (bengalî) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>> (bânglâ), +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{bangla.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bengali> +\ProvidesFile{bengali.mld}[2007/07/23]\mtcselectlanguage{bangla}% +%</bengali> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bicig'' language: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bicig~>>: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\bcg} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig} is a written form of the mongolian language. +% It is also known as Uighur or Bichig. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> est une forme écrite de la langue mongole. +% Il est aussi connu sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{uighur} en anglais) ou bichig. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bicig> +\ProvidesFile{bicig.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Mongol (Bicig) titles needs mongol fonts +\def\ptctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% +\def\plftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% +\def\mlftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% +\def\slftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +%</bicig> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bicig2'' language: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig2}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, +% \lopt{bicig2} is a variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also +% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, and~\vref{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bicig2~>>: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole, +% \lopt{bicig2} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} sont +% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, \vref{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bicig2> +\ProvidesFile{bicig2.mld}[2005/11/16]% +%% Mongol (Bicig2) titles (needs mongol fonts) +\def\ptctitle{garcag}% +\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\mtctitle{garcag}% +\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\stctitle{garcag}% +\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +%</bicig2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bicig3'' language: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig3}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, \lopt{bicig3} is a +% variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur3}.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~bicig3~>>: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole, +% \lopt{bicig3} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont +% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bicig3> +\ProvidesFile{bicig3.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Mongol (Bicig3) titles (needs mongol fonts) +\def\ptctitle{aguulag=a}% +\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\mtctitle{aguulag=a}% +\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\stctitle{aguulag=a}% +\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +%</bicig3> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{41.11842105mm} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bithe'' language: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{bithe}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bithe} is a written form of the \lopt{manju} variant of the mongolian language.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% The Manju writing, or \emph{bithe} system is a close relative +% of the Mongolian system; the basical letter shapes are the +% same. Yet for Manju, a set of diacritics (\emph{dots and circles}) +% was designed to eliminate all the ambiguities of Mongolian. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bithe~>>: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bithe}~>> est une forme écrite de la +% variante <<~\lopt{manju}~>> de la langue mongole.} sont +% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% L'écriture Manju (Manchou), ou le système \emph{bithe}, est une proche +% parente du système Mongol; les formes de base des lettres sont les mêmes. Mais pour le Manju, un +% ensemble de signes diacritiques (\emph{points et cercles}) a +% été conçu pour éliminer toutes les ambiguïtés du Mongol. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.386473430\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.613526570\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bithe> +\ProvidesFile{bithe.mld}[2005/11/16]% +%% Manju (bithe) titles (needs mongol fonts) +\def\ptctitle{garcag}% +\def\plftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% +\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% +\def\mtctitle{garcag}% +\def\mlftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% +\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% +\def\stctitle{garcag}% +\def\slftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% +\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% +%</bithe> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Brazil'' language: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~brazil~>>: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{brazil}'' language (\emph{português brasileiro} or +% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{It is the main portuguese dialect spoken in Brazil. Note that these titles are +% \emph{different} in Brazil and in Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} contributed to brazilian translations. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file (for portugese titles by +% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) in the \pack{babel} +% package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{brazil}~>> (brésilien, \emph{português brasileiro} ou +% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{C'est le dialecte portugais principal parlé au Brésil. +% Notez que ces +% titres sont \emph{différents} au Brésil et au Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} a contribué aux +% traductions brésiliennes. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx} +% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete} pour les titres portugais) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*brazil> +\ProvidesFile{brazil.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Portugues (brazil) titles, from portuges.dtx (babel) +%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro & "de Lima", Arnaldo Viegas +\def\ptctitle{Sum\'ario}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\mtctitle{Sum\'ario}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\stctitle{Sum\'ario}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +%</brazil> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Brazilian'' language: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~brazilian~>>: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{brazilian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{brazil}'', so we just load \xfile{brazil.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{brazilian}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{brazil}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{brazil.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*brazilian> +\ProvidesFile{brazilian.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{brazil}% +%</brazilian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Breton'' language: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~breton~>>: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld} +% \fi + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{breton}'' language (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Spoken as a local celtic dialect in french Brittany. +% See also \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} and +% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} are taken from the +% \xfile{breton.dtx} file (by \name{Christian}{Rolland}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}: +% \or\relax +% \lneed{2} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{breton}~>> (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Parlée comme dialecte celtique local en Bretagne (France). Voir aussi \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, +% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} et +% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{breton.dtx} (de \name{Christian}{Rolland}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*breton> +\ProvidesFile{breton.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Breton titles from breton.dtx (babel) by Rolland, Christian +\def\ptctitle{Taolenn}% +\def\plftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% +\def\plttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% +\def\mtctitle{Taolenn}% +\def\mlftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% +\def\mlttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% +\def\stctitle{Taolenn}% +\def\slftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% +\def\slttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% +%</breton> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``British'' language: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~british~>>: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{british}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{british}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*british> +\ProvidesFile{british.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +%</british> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bulgarian'' language: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bulgarian~>>: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.317738791\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.682261209\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{bulgarian}'' language (\emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) are taken from the \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} +% (adapted from russian by \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) file in the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; they require +% specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarian}~>> (bulgare, \emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} (adapté du russe par \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) dans le +% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; ils ont +% besoin de fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bulgarian> +\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.mld}[2007/03/08]% +%% Bulgarian titles from bulgarian.dtx (babel) (needs special cyrillic fonts) +%% by Boshnakov, Georgi N. <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk> +\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\mtctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\stctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +%</bulgarian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bulgarianb'' language: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bulgarianb~>>: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bulgarianb}'' (upper bulgarian) language are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}; +% they require specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarianb}~>> (haut bulgare) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} +% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}; +% ils requièrent des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bulgarianb> +\ProvidesFile{bulgarianb.mld}[2006/03/06]% +%% Upper bulgarian titles from russianb.dtx. Needs cyrillic fonts for upper bulgarian. +\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\plftitle{% Figuri + {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% +\def\plttitle{% Tablici + {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% +\def\mtctitle{% Sydyrzhanie + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\mlftitle{% Figurite + {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% +\def\mlttitle{% Tablici + {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% +\def\stctitle{% Sydyrzhanie + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\slftitle{% Figuri + {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% +\def\slttitle{% Tablici + {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% +%</bulgarianb> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Buryat'' language: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~buryat~>>: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \begin{macro}{\sh} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in some regions of Mongolia and in the Buryatia republic, near +% Lake Baikal. } are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. +% This language requires specific fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée dans certaines régions de la Mongolie et dans la république +% de Buryatie, près du lac Baïkal. } (bouriate) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*buryat> +\ProvidesFile{buryat.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Buryat titles. Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +%</buryat> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Buryat2'' language: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~buryat2~>>: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{buryat2}'' language (a variant for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language, see section~\vref{s+mld+buryat}) +% are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat2}~>> (une variante du langage «~\lopt{buryat}~», voir la section~\vref{s+mld+buryat}) +% sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue +% requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*buryat2> +\ProvidesFile{buryat2.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Buryat2 titles. Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +%</buryat2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Canadian'' language: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~canadian~>>: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + +% \afterpage{\clearpage} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{canadian}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{a}n'')} is just the \loptd{english} language spoken +% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{canadian}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{a}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{anglaise} +% (\loptd{english}) parlée au Canada. +% Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*canadian> +\ProvidesFile{canadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +%</canadian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Canadien'' language: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~canadien~>>: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{canadien}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{e}n'')} is just the \lopt{french} language spoken +% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{canadien}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{e}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{française} +% (\lopt{french}) parlée au Canada. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la +% section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*canadien> +\ProvidesFile{canadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +%</canadien> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{19.14587332mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Castillan'' language: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~castillan~>>: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{castillan}'' language is better known as ``\lopt{spanish}'', +% but is spoken mainly in Castile, +% a part of central Spain. We +% just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> est mieux connue sous le nom de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> +% (espagnol), +% mais est parlée principalement +% en Castille, une partie du centre de l'Espagne. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*castillan> +\ProvidesFile{castillan.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}% +%</castillan> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Castillian'' language: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~castillian~>>: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ``Castillian'' is just the english name for ``castillan'', so +% we just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \or\relax +% <<~Castillian~>> est juste le nom anglais du castillan, donc +% nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*castillian> +\ProvidesFile{castillian.mld}[2005/07/01]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}% +%</castillian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Catalan'' language: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~catalan~>>: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.502354788\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.497645212\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{3} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{catalan}'' language (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Spoken in Catalunya, the eastern part of Spain, +% around Barcelona, and in Roussillon, in France. } +% are taken from the \xfile{catalan.dtx} file (adapted from spanish by \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Parlée en Catalogne, +% la partie orientale de l'Espagne, autour +% de Barcelone, et dans le Roussillon, en France. } sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{catalan.dtx} (adapté de l'espagnol par \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} +% et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*catalan> +\ProvidesFile{catalan.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Catalan titles from catalan.dtx (babel) (Badenes, Gonçal) +\def\ptctitle{\'Index}% +\def\plftitle{\'Index de figures}% +\def\plttitle{\'Index de taules}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\'Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Taules}% +\def\stctitle{\'Index}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Taules}% +%</catalan> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Chinese1'' language: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~chinese1~>>: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1} +% \fi + + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.25mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There +% are several variants for the chinese language. +% The ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cap} file +% in the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}. +% See~\cite{china-h} about the history of China and the chinese language. +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}% +% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{chinese1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a +% plusieurs variantes pour la langue chinoise. +% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> (chinois première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cap} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}. +% Voir~\cite{china-h} sur l'histoire de la Chine et de la langue chinoise. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*chinese1> +\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese1}% +%% From file Bg5.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e +%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5 +%</chinese1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Chinese2'' language: \uxmldo{chinese2}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~chinese2~>>: \uxmldo{chinese2.mld}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cpx} file in the \pack{CJK} +% system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{chinese2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> (chinois seconde variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cpx} dans +% le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la +% section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*chinese2> +\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese2}% +%% From file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e +%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5, preprocessed +%</chinese2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Croatian'' language: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~\lopt{croatian}~>>: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.556818182\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.443181818\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{25mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{croatian}'' language (\emph{hrvatski}) are taken from the file \xfile{croatian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~croatian~>> (croate, \emph{hrvatski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{croatian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*croatian> +\ProvidesFile{croatian.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Croatian titles from croatian.dtx (babel). Pai\'{c}, Alan. +\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\plftitle{Popis slika}% +\def\plttitle{Popis tablica}% +\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\mlftitle{Popis slika}% +\def\mlttitle{Popis tablica}% +\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\slftitle{Slike}% +\def\slttitle{Tablice}% +%</croatian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Czech'' language: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~czech~>>: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{czech}'' language (\emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the file \xfile{czech.dtx} +% (contributions by \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{czech}~>> (tchèque, \emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{czech.dtx} +% (contributions de \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*czech> +\ProvidesFile{czech.mld}[2007/12/04]% +%% Czech titles from czech.dtx (babel). Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek, Milo\v{s} V. +\def\ptctitle{Obsah}% +\def\plftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% +\def\plttitle{Seznam tabulek}% +\def\mtctitle{Obsah}% +\def\mlftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% +\def\mlttitle{Seznam tabulek}% +\def\stctitle{Obsah}% +\def\slftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% +\def\slttitle{Seznam tabulek}% +%</czech> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Danish'' language: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~danish~>>: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.362204724\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.637795276\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.9189892mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{danish}'' language\,\footnote{The danish (\emph{dansk}) language is spoken in Denmark, in the Faeroe +% Islands and in Greenland.} are taken from the \xfile{danish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Henning}{Larsen}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{danish}~>> (danois\,\footnote{Le danois (\emph{dansk}) est parlé au Danemark, dans les Îles +% Féroé et au Groenland.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{danish.dtx} +% (de \name{Henning}{Larsen}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*danish> +\ProvidesFile{danish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Danish titles from danish.dtx (babel). Larsen, Henning (larsen@cernvm.cern.ch) +\def\ptctitle{Indhold}% +\def\plftitle{Figurer}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\mtctitle{Indhold}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\stctitle{Indhold}% +\def\slftitle{Figurer}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% +%</danish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Devanagari'' language: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~devanagari~>>: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.845238095mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{devanagari}'' language are taken from the \xfile{devanagari.sty} and \xfile{captions.dn} files +% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% in the Devan\=agar\={\i} +% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>> (hindi) sont tirés des fichiers \xfile{devanagari.sty} et \xfile{captions.dn} +% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dn} +% \begin{macro}{\qva} +% \begin{macro}{\re} +% \begin{macro}{\rs} +% \begin{macro}{\8} +% \begin{macro}{\2} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Specific fonts are required. +% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. See also~\cite{hindi99} about the hindi language. +% \or\relax +% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. +% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}. +% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*devanagari> +\ProvidesFile{devanagari.mld}[2006/08/25]% +%% Devanagari (hindi) titles from devanagari.sty by +%% Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k & +%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik +\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +%</devanagari> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Dutch'' language: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~dutch~>>: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld} +% \fi +% ^^A (DU +% ^^A DU) +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.381017882) +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.618982118) + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{dutch}'' language\,\footnote{The dutch language (\emph{nederlands}) is spoken in +% the Netherlands and a part of Belgium.} are taken from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{dutch}~>> (néerlandais, \emph{nederlands})\,\footnote{La langue néerlandaise +% est parlée aux Pays-Bas et dans une partie de la Belgique.} sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) dans le +% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*dutch> +\ProvidesFile{dutch.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Dutch titles from dutch.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.) +\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% +\def\plftitle{L"yst van figuren}% +\def\plttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% +\def\mlftitle{L"yst van figuren}% +\def\mlttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% +\def\slftitle{L"yst van figuren}% +\def\slttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% +%</dutch> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \normalmarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``English'' language: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~english~>>: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\loptd{english}'' language are taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}. +% \emph{The\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language.} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% See +% also sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK +% \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish},\ABK +% and~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\loptd{english}~>> (anglais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}. +% \emph{Notez que la\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car l'anglais est la langue par défaut.} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% Voir +% aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK +% \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish}\ABK et~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*english> +\ProvidesFile{english.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.) +\def\ptctitle{Table of Contents}% +\def\plftitle{List of Figures}% +\def\plttitle{List of Tables}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Contents}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tables}% +\def\stctitle{Contents}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tables}% +%</english> +% \end{macrocode} + +% ^^A (ENG +% ^^A ENG) +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``English1'' language: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~english1~>>: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{english1}'' language come from the \xfile{english.dtx} file +% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} +% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres +% au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*english1> +\ProvidesFile{english1.mld}[2006/03/30]% +%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L. +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Table of Contents of the First Part\relax + \else Table of Contents of Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + List of Figures in the First Part\relax + \else List of Figures in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + List of Tables in the First Part\relax + \else List of Tables in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Contents}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tables}% +\def\stctitle{Contents}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tables}% +%</english1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``English2'' language: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~english2~>>: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcEnglishIIpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifcase} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{english2}'' language are again taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file +% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with adaptations at the part level. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} +% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec adaptations au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*english2> +\ProvidesFile{english2.mld}[2006/03/30]% +%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L. +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\mtcEnglishIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}% +\or the First Part\or the Second Part\or the Third Part +\or the Fourth Part\or the Fifth Part\or the Sixth Part +\or the Seventh Part\or the Eighth Part\or the Ninth Part +\or the Tenth Part\or the Eleventh Part\or the Twelfth Part +\or the Thirteenth Part\or the Fourteenth Part \or the Fifteenth Part +\or the Sixteenth Part \or the Seventeenth Part \or the Eighteenth Part +\or the Nineteenth Part\or the Twentieth Part \else Part~\Roman{part}\fi} +\def\ptctitle{Contents of \mtcEnglishIIpart} +\def\plftitle{List of Figures in \mtcEnglishIIpart} +\def\plttitle{List of Tables in \mtcEnglishIIpart} +%% +\def\mtctitle{Contents}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tables}% +\def\stctitle{Contents}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tables}% +%</english2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Esperant'' language: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{esperant}'' (espéranto) language are taken from the \xfile{esperanto.dtx} file +% (by \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}. +% The esperanto artificial language was created in the 1877--1885 years +% by Doctor~\namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\footnote{See +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/L.L._Zamenhof}, +% \url{http://uea.org/} and \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} for more information; his first names are +% sometimes spelled ``Ludvic Lazarus'' or ``Louis-Lazare'', with small variations.} (1859--1917) of Warsaw, Poland. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~esperant~>>: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> (espéranto) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{esperanto.dtx} +% (de \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}. +% La langue artificielle esperanto a été créée dans les années 1877--1885 par le docteur +% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\,{\froff\footnote{Voir +% \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zamenhof}, +% \url{http://uea.org/} et \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} pour plus d'informations. Ses prénoms sont +% parfois écrits \og~Ludvic Lazarus~\fg{} ou \og~Louis-Lazare~\fg, avec quelques variantes.}} (1859--1917) de +% Varsovie en Pologne. +% \fi +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*esperant> +\ProvidesFile{esperant.mld}[2006/12/19]% +%% Esperanto titles from esperanto.dtx (babel) Ruiz-Altaba, Marti & Knappen, Jörg +\def\ptctitle{Enhavo}% +\def\plftitle{Listo de figuroj}% +\def\plttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% +\def\mtctitle{Enhavo}% +\def\mlftitle{Listo de figuroj}% +\def\mlttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% +\def\stctitle{Enhavo}% +\def\slftitle{Listo de figuroj}% +\def\slttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% +%</esperant> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Esperanto'' language: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~esperanto~>>: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{esperanto}'' and ``\lopt{esperant}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{esperant.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues <<~\lopt{esperanto}~>> et <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{esperant.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*esperanto> +\ProvidesFile{esperanto.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{esperant}% +%</esperanto> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Estonian'' language: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~estonian~>>: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{estonian}'' language\,\footnote{Estonian (\emph{eesti keel}) is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a +% language from the uralian family.} are taken from the \xfile{estonian.dtx} file +% (by \name{Enn}{Saar}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{estonian}~>> (estonien\,\footnote{L'estonien (\emph{eesti keel}) \emph{n'est pas} une langue +% balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{estonian.dtx} +% (de \name{Enn}{Saar}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}: +% \fi + +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*estonian> +\ProvidesFile{estonian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Estonian titles from estonian.dtx (babel) Saar, Enn +\def\ptctitle{Sisukord}% +\def\plftitle{Joonised}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelid}% +\def\mtctitle{Sisukord}% +\def\mlftitle{Joonised}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabelid}% +\def\stctitle{Sisukord}% +\def\slftitle{Joonised}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelid}% +%</estonian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ethiopia'' language: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ethiopia~>>: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.447761194\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.552238806\iwidth} + +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.642441860mm} +% \begin{macro}{\eth@doaltchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language (amharic, \emph{\=amari\"{n}\"{n}a}) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop} +% (written by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). Specific +% fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. for the repartition of +% the various ethiopian dialects. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>> (éthiopien, amarique, \emph{amaregna}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop} +% (écrit par \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. +% pour la répartition des divers dialectes éthiopiens. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ethiopia> +\ProvidesFile{ethiopia.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Ethopian titles. Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{yezate}% +\def\plftitle{% + ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\plttitle{% + yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\mtctitle{yezate}% +\def\mlftitle{% + ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\mlttitle{% + yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\stctitle{yezate}% +\def\slftitle{% + ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\slttitle{% + yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +%</ethiopia> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ethiopian'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{ethiopian}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language, so we just load the +% \xfile{ethiopia.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}). +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian}~>> (éthiopien) est un simple synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{ethiopia.mld} +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ethiopian> +\ProvidesFile{ethiopian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopia}% +%</ethiopian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ethiopian2'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{ethiopian2}'' language (for Omega) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop} +% (by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). +% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian2~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian2}~>> (éthiopien pour Omega) sont tirés +% du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop} +% (de \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ethiopian2> +\ProvidesFile{ethiopian2.mld}[2006/01/30]% +%% Ethopian titles with Omega. Needs special fonts +\def\ptctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% +\def\plftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\plttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 + ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\mtctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% +\def\mlftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\mlttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 + ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\stctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% +\def\slftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\slttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 + ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +%</ethiopian2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Farsi1'' language: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% There are +% several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan. +% The ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} system{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, +% \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, +% \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{farsi1.mlo}. + +% +% \or\relax +% \lneed{8} +% \section{Langue <<~farsi1~>>: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1} + +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm} +% Il y~a +% plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan. +% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> (farsi première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du +% système +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, +% par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% +% \normalmarginpar +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi1.mlo}. +% \fi + +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*farsi1> +\ProvidesFile{farsi1.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi1}% +%% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, +%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others. +%% http://www.farsitex.org +%</farsi1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Farsi2'' language: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2} +% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan. +% The ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}} +% system~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, +% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~farsi2~>>: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2} +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan. +% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> (farsi deuxième variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du +% système \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, développé par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, +% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, +% hence we load \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*farsi2> +\ProvidesFile{farsi2.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi2}% +%% From farsi.sty (FarsiTeX project: http://www.farsitex.org). Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, +%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others. +%</farsi2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Farsi3'' language: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}% +% \ixfile{farsi3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~farsi3~>>: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}% +% \ixfile{farsi3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\FR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan. +% The ``\lopt{farsi3}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.ldf} file in the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system\cite{arabi}, +% by \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. Special fonts are needed, of course. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan. +% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.ldf} du +% système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, par \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*farsi3> +\ProvidesFile{farsi3.mld}[2006/07/27]% +%% From farsi.ldf of the Arabi system by Youssef Jabri. +\def\ptctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% +\def\plftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\plttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\mtctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% +\def\mlftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\mlttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\stctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% +\def\slftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\slttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +%</farsi3> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Finnish'' language: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~finnish~>>: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.437269373\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.562730627\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.505\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.495\iwidth} + + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15.28125mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{finnish}'' language (\emph{suomi}) are taken from the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish}~>> (finnois, \emph{suomi}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx} +% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*finnish> +\ProvidesFile{finnish.mld}[2006/03/20]% +%% Finnish titles from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen +\def\ptctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% +\def\plftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\plttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\mtctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% +\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\stctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% +\def\slftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\slttitle{Taulukot}% +%</finnish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Finnish2'' language: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{finnish2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed by the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~finnish2~>>: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish2}~>> (finnois seconde variante) sont tirés d'une variante proposée +% par le fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx} +% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*finnish2> +\ProvidesFile{finnish2.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Finnish titles (variant) from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen +\def\ptctitle{Sis\"allys}% +\def\plftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\plttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\mtctitle{Sis\"allys}% +\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\stctitle{Sis\"allys}% +\def\slftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\slttitle{Taulukot}% +%</finnish2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Francais'' language: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~francais~>>: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{francais}'' (\emph{français}) +% language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see +% section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{francais}~>> (\emph{français}) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*francais> +\ProvidesFile{francais.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +%</francais> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``French'' language: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~french~>>: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld} +% \fi + + +% ^^A (FRANCO-EU +% ^^A FRANCO-EU) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AM +% ^^A FRANCO-AM) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AFN +% ^^A FRANCO-AFN) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AFW +% ^^A FRANCO-AFW) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AC +% ^^A FRANCO-AC) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AEOI +% ^^A FRANCO-AEOI) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AS +% ^^A FRANCO-AS) +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{4} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{french}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. See also +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien}, \vref{s+mld+canadien}, \vref{s+mld+francais}, +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}. +% \or\relax +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>> (c'est-à-dire le français) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. Voir aussi +% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+francais},\ABK +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*french> +\ProvidesFile{french.mld}[2006/03/21]% +%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel +\def\ptctitle{Table des mati\`eres}% +\def\plftitle{Liste des figures}% +\def\plttitle{Liste des tableaux}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% +\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% +%</french> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``French1'' language: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~french1~>>: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{french1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres +% au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*french1> +\ProvidesFile{french1.mld}[2006/03/29]% +%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Sommaire de la premi\`ere partie\relax + \else Sommaire de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Liste des figures de la premi\`ere partie\relax + \else Liste des figures de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Liste des tableaux de la premi\`ere partie\relax + \else Liste des tableaux de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% +\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% +%</french1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``French2'' language: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~french2~>>: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcFrenchIIpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{french2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles\footnote{This +% is an example of a \suffix{.mld} file needing some support from code in the \upack{minitoc} package.}. +% See also section~\vref{ss+2parts}, for the subtle distinction between ``deuxième'' and ``seconde''. +% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres +% au niveau partie\,\footnote{C'est un exemple de fichier \suffix{.mld} ayant besoin de code de support dans le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{ss+2parts}, pour la subtile nuance entre «~deuxième~» et «~seconde~». +% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*french2> +\ProvidesFile{french2.mld}[2006/07/07]% +%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\mtcFrenchIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}% +\or premi\`ere partie\or +{\ifmtcsecondpart seconde\else deuxi\`eme\fi} partie\or +troisi\`eme partie\or quatri\`eme partie\or cinqui\`eme partie\or +sixi\`eme partie\or septi\`eme partie\or huiti\`eme partie\or +neuvi\`eme partie\or dixi\`eme partie\or onzi\`eme partie\or +douzi\`eme partie\or treizi\`eme partie\or quatorzi\`eme partie\or +quinzi\`eme partie\or seizi\`eme partie\or dix-septi\`eme partie\or +dix-huiti\`eme partie\or dix-neuvi\`eme partie\or +vingti\`eme partie\else partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax + Sommaire \else Sommaire de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}% +\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax + Liste des figures\else + Liste des figures de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}% +\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax + Liste des tableaux\else + Liste des tableaux de la \mtcFrenchIIpart}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% +\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% +%</french2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Frenchb'' language: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~frenchb~>>: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{frenchb}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the +% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchb}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier +% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*frenchb> +\ProvidesFile{frenchb.mld}[2003/02/11]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +%</frenchb> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Frenchle'' language: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~frenchle~>>: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{frenchle}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the +% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchle}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchle}~» est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier +% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchle}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*frenchle> +\ProvidesFile{frenchle.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +%</frenchle> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Frenchpro'' language: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~frenchpro~>>: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{frenchpro}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the +% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchpro}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier +% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*frenchpro> +\ProvidesFile{frenchpro.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +%</frenchpro> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Galician'' language: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~galician~>>: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld} +% \fi + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{galician}'' language (\emph{galego})\,\footnote{Spoken in Galice, in the north-west part +% of Spain, around Santiago de Compostela.} are taken from the \xfile{galician.dtx} file, +% (by \name{Manuel}{Carriba} and \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}) derived from the +% \xfile{spanish.dtx} file (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien, \emph{galego})\,\footnote{Parlée en Galice, +% dans la partie nord-ouest de l'Espagne, autour de Saint-Jacques de Compostelle.} +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{galician.dtx} (de \name{Manuel}{Carriba} et +% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}), dérivé du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}), +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*galician> +\ProvidesFile{galician.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Galician titles from galician.dtx (babel). +%% Carriba, Manuel (mcarriba@eunetcom.net) +%% Javier A. Múgica de Rivera (jmugica@digi21.net) +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\mtctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\stctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% +%</galician> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``German'' language: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~german~>>: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + + + + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{german}'' language (\emph{deutsch}) are taken from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% See also the section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> (allemand, \emph{deutsch}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*german> +\ProvidesFile{german.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% German titles +\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% +\def\plftitle{Figuren}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% +\def\mlftitle{Figuren}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% +\def\slftitle{Figuren}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +%</german> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Germanb'' language: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld} +% The ``\lopt{germanb}'' language is a variant for the ``german'' language. The titles come from +% \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}: +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~germanb~>>: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld} +% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>. Les titres sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*germanb> +\ProvidesFile{germanb.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% German titles (variant) from germanb.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Raichle, Bernd +\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% +\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +%% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +%</germanb> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Germanb2'' language: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld} +% The ``\lopt{germanb2}'' language is a variant for the ``\lopt{german}'' language, with short titles. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}. +% The titles are taken from the file \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}: +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~germanb2~>>: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld} +% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb2}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>, avec des titres courts. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}. +% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*germanb2> +\ProvidesFile{germanb2.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% German titles (variant) +\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +%</germanb2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek'' language: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek~>>: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.6273522572\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.372647428\iwidth} + +% +% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount} +% + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{greek}'' language (modern greek, +% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) are taken from the \xfile{greek.dtx} file +% (by \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) in the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}. +% Greek fonts are required. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek}~>> (grec moderne, +% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{greek.dtx} +% (de \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}. +% Des fontes grecques sont requises. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek> +\ProvidesFile{greek.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Greek titles from greek.dtx (babel) by Syropoulos, Apostolos. Needs greek fonts. +\def\ptctitle{Perieq'omena}% +\def\plftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% +\def\plttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% +\def\mtctitle{Perieq'omena}% +\def\mlftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% +\def\mlttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% +\def\stctitle{Perieq'omena}% +\def\slftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% +\def\slttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% +%</greek> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek-mono'' language: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek-mono~>>: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-mono}'' language\,\footnote{Monotonic greek, from a recent (1982) but strongly +% contested -- and contestable -- reform of the greek language.} are taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-mono}~>> (grec dit monotonique\,\footnote{Le grec monotonique, selon une récente +% (1982) mais fortement contestée -- et contestable -- réforme de la langue grecque.}) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek-mono> +\ProvidesFile{greek-mono.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. +%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\mlftitle%{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\stctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +%</greek-mono> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek-polydemo'' language: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek-polydemo~>>: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polydemo}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic demotic (popular) greek, for classical greek.} +% are taken from the file \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polydemo}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique <<~démotique~>> (populaire), +% pour le grec classique.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek-polydemo> +\ProvidesFile{greek-polydemo.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. +%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\plttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\stctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\slttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +%</greek-polydemo> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek-polykatha'' language: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek-polykatha~>>: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polykatha}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic greek, <<~kathaverousa~>> (purified) style, +% a form of the Greek language created during the early \textsc{xix}-th century by \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, +% to purify the language from the Byzantine and non-greek vocabulary. +% It has now been obsoleted by the demotic (popular) greek, but it +% has left a very noticeable trace in the modern Greek language.} are +% taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polykatha}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique, en style <<~kathaverousa~>> (purifié), +% une forme de la langue grecque créée au début du \textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle par \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, pour purifier +% la langue du vocabulaire byzantin ou non grec. Il a maintenant été démodé par le grec démotique (populaire), +% mais a laissé d'importantes traces dans la langue grecque moderne.} +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek-polykatha> +\ProvidesFile{greek-polykatha.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. +%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\plttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\stctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\slttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +%</greek-polykatha> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Guarani'' language: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~guarani~>>: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{guarani}'' (guaraní) language is the main language spoken in Paraguay. +% Very often, a mixture of Guaraní and Spanish, known as Jopará or Yopará, is spoken. +% The titles are taken from the \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} file by \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}. +% A special input encoding (\xfile{win-gn.def}) is needed. +% These files are available on the CTAN archives. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue «~\lopt{guarani}~» (guaraní) est la langue principale parlée au Paraguay. +% Très souvent, un mélange de guaraní et d'espagnol, appelé «~jopará~» ou «~yopará~», est utilisé. +% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} de \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}. +% Un codage d'entrée spécial (\xfile{win-gn.def}) est nécessaire. +% Ces fichiers sont disponibles sur les archives CTAN. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*guarani> +\ProvidesFile{guarani.mld}[2005/08/26]% +%% Guaraní titles from guarani.ldf by Javier Bezos. Input encoding win-gn.def needed. +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +%</guarani> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul1'' language: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1} +% \else\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul1~>>: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.426693630\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.573306370\iwidth} + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.677187948\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.322812052\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% Korean language was originally written using the Chinese characters; it is now mainly written in Hangûl, the +% Korean writing system, optionally incorporating Hanja to write Sino-Korean words~\cite{venkatesan}. +% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. +% +% +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language (korean in hangûl script, first variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% +% \lneed{2} +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% La +% langue coréenne était originellement écrite en caractères chinois; elle est actuellement principalement +% écrite en caractères hangûl, en incorporant éventuellement des caractères hanja pour écrire des mots +% sino-coréens~\cite{venkatesan}. Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}. +% +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl première variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% +% \lneed{2} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul1> +\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul1}% +%% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +%</hangul1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul2'' language: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul2~>>: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language (korean in hangûl script, second variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% +% \lneed{3} +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Voir aussi les variantes dans les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul2> +\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul2}% +%% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003), Hangul captions +%% char. set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed +%</hangul2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul3'' language: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixmldo{hangul3} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul3~>>: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixfile{hangul3} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language (korean in hangûl script, third variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul2.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul2.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul3.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul3.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul3> +\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul3}% +%% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2 +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +%</hangul3> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul4'' language: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul4~>>: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language (korean in hangûl script, fourth variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul4.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul4.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul4> +\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul4}% +%% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2, +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), +%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed +%</hangul4> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{9} +% \section{``Hangul-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8} +% \or\relax +% \lneed{8} +% \section{Langue <<~hangul-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language (korean in hangûl script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken +% from the file \xfile{u8hangul.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. Input encoding is UTF-8. +% +% \lneed{3} +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{u8hangul.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8. +% +% \lneed{4} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul-u8> +\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hangul-u8}% +%% Hangul captions for Lambda. From the file u8hangul.tex +%% of the HLaTeX package by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) +%</hangul-u8> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hanja1'' language: \uxmldo{hanja1.mld}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hanja1~>>: \uxmldo{hanja1}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language (korean in the old script hanja, first variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hanja.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, première variante) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{hanja.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi +% +% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hanja1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hanja1> +\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja1}% +%% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>, Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), +%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed +%</hanja1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hanja2'' language: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hanja2~>>: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language (Korean in the old script hanja, second variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hanja.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, seconde variante) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{hanja.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi +% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hanja2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hanja2> +\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja2}% +%% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at>. +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), +%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung). Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997) +%</hanja2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hanja-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hanja-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language (korean in hanja script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken from the file +% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% Input encoding is UTF-8. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}. +% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. +% +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hanja, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hanja-u8> +\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hanja-u8}% +%% Hanja captions for Lambda. From the file hanja-u8.tex of the HLaTeX package +%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) +%</hanja-u8> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hebrew'' language: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hebrew~>>: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{hebrew}'' language (\emph{ivrit}) are taken from +% the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), +% with the associated fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}. +% See the hebrew alphabet (\emph{alefbet}): \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew}~>> (hébreu, \emph{ivrit}) sont tirés du +% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), +% avec les fontes associées. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}. +% Voir l'alphabet (\emph{alefbet}) hébreu: \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hebrew> +\ProvidesFile{hebrew.mld}[2001/02/28]% +%% Hebrew titles. Need hebrew fonts (see arabtex documentation) +\def\ptctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% +\def\plftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% +\def\plttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% +\def\mtctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% +\def\mlftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% +\def\mlttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% +\def\stctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% +\def\slftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% +\def\slttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% +%</hebrew> +% \end{macrocode} + +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hebrew2'' language: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hebrew2~>>: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@R} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hebrew2}'' language are taken from the file \xfile{hebrew.dtx} +% (by \xname{Boris}{Lavva} and \name{Rama}{Porrat}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, which should be +% used, with the associated fonts and encodings. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew2}~>> (hébreu, une variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{hebrew.dtx} +% (de \name{Boris}{Lavva} et \name{Rama}{Porrat}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, qui +% devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes et codages associés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hebrew2> +\ProvidesFile{hebrew2.mld}[2006/01/11]% +%% From hebrew.dtx in the Babel package. Boris Lavva (lavva@tx.technion.ac.il) +%% Need hebrew fonts. +\def\ptctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % + \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\plftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % + \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\plttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ + \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% +\def\mtctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % + \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\mlftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % + \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\mlttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ + \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% +\def\stctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % + \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\slftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % + \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\slttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ + \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% +%</hebrew2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hindi'' language: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hindi~>>: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{hindi}'' language is just like ``\lopt{devanagari}'', +% so we just load \xfile{devanagari.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{hindi}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>>, donc nous +% chargeons \xfile{devanagari.mld} simplement (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hindi> +\ProvidesFile{hindi.mld}[2006/08/24]\mtcselectlanguage{devanagari}% +%</hindi> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hindi-modern'' language: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hindi-modern~>>: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.417475728\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.582524272\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \lneed{6} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{hindi-modern}'' language are taken from the \xfile{captions.dn} file +% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% in the Devan\=agar\={\i} +% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) after conversion. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. Specific fonts are required. +% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hindi-modern}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{captions.dn} +% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}), après conversion. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. +% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. +% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dn} +% \begin{macro}{\qva} +% \begin{macro}{\re} +% \begin{macro}{\rs} +% \begin{macro}{\2} +% \begin{macro}{\8} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hindi-modern> +\ProvidesFile{hindi-modern.mld}[2006/08/29]% +%% Hindi modern titles from captions.dn in ``Devanagari for TeX'' +%% by Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k & +%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik +\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +%</hindi-modern> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hungarian'' language: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hungarian~>>: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{hungarian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language, +% so we load \xfile{magyar.mld}. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>>, donc nous chargeons +% \xfile{magyar.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hungarian> +\ProvidesFile{hungarian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{magyar}% +%</hungarian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Icelandic'' language: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~icelandic~>>: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{icelandic}'' language (\emph{íslenska}) are taken from the \xfile{icelandic.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. See also~\cite{icelandic2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{icelandic}~>> (islandais, \emph{íslenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{icelandic.dtx} +% (par \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. Voir aussi~\cite{icelandic2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*icelandic> +\ProvidesFile{icelandic.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% From icelandic.dtx (babel). Needs inputenc with 8-bits encoding. Árnason, Einar +\def\ptctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% +\def\plftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% +\def\plttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% +\def\mtctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% +\def\mlftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% +\def\mlttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% +\def\stctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% +\def\slftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% +\def\slttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% +%</icelandic> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Indon'' language: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~indon~>>: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{indon}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{indon}~>> (indon) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*indon> +\ProvidesFile{indon.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% +%</indon> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Indonesian'' language: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~indonesian~>>: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{indonesian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{indonesian}~>> (indonésien) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*indonesian> +\ProvidesFile{indonesian.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% +%</indonesian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Interlingua'' language: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{interlingua}'' language are taken from the \xfile{interlingua.dtx} file +% (by \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}. +% Interlingua is an auxiliary language, built from the common +% vocabulary of Spanish/Portuguese, English, Italian and French, +% with some normalisation of spelling. The grammar is very easy, +% more similar to English's than to neolatin languages\footnote{The site +% \url{http://www.interlingua.com} is mostly written in interlingua +% (as is \url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}), in case you want to read some sample of it.}. +% See also: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, +% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/} +% \item interlingua-english dictionnary: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/} +% \item interlingua grammar (in french): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html} +% \item somes sites in interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua} +% \item other sites about interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm} +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~interlingua~>>: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{interlingua}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{interlingua.dtx} +% (de \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}. +% Interlingua est une langue auxiliaire, construite à~partir du vocabulaire commun de l'espagnol/portugais, de +% l'anglais de l'italien et du français, avec une certaine normalisation de l'orthographe. La grammaire est très +% facile, plus similaire à~celle de l'anglais qu'à celles des langues néo-latines\,\footnote{Le site +% {\froff\url{http://www.interlingua.com}} est écrit principalement en interlingua +% (comme l'est {\froff\url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}}), au cas où vous souhaiteriez en lire un exemple.}. +% Voir aussi: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, +% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/} +% \item dictionnaire interlingua-anglais: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/} +% \item grammaire de l'interlingua (en français): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html} +% \item quelques sites en interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua} +% \item d'autres sites sur interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm} +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*interlingua> +\ProvidesFile{interlingua.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Interlingua titles from interlingua.dtx (babel). Kleiweg, Peter +\def\ptctitle{Contento}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de tabellas}% +\def\mtctitle{Contento}% +\def\mlftitle{Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellas}% +\def\stctitle{Contento}% +\def\slftitle{Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellas}% +%</interlingua> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Irish'' language: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~irish~>>: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{irish}'' language (\emph{gaeilge}) come from the \xfile{irish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} and \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}: +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{irish}~>> (irlandais, \emph{gaeilge}) viennent du fichier \xfile{irish.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} et \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*irish> +\ProvidesFile{irish.mld}[2006/02/28]% +%% From irish.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Gunn, Marion & Grant, Fraser +\def\ptctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% +\def\plftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% +\def\mtctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% +\def\mlftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% +\def\stctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% +\def\slftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% +%</irish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Italian'' language: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~italian~>>: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.55\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.45\iwidth} + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language (\emph{italiano}) come from the file \xfile{italian.dtx} +% (by \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} and \name{Claudio}{Beccari}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian}~>> (italien, \emph{italiano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{italian.dtx} +% (de \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} et \name{Claudio}{Beccari}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*italian> +\ProvidesFile{italian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Italian titles from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors. +%% Maurizio Codogno (mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it) & Claudio Beccari (beccari@polito.it) +\def\ptctitle{Indice}% +\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\mtctitle{Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\stctitle{Indice}% +\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +%</italian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Italian2'' language: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{italian2}'' language are the same as for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language, except at the part +% level (``Contenuto''). See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~italian2~>>: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian2}~>> (italien, variante) sont les mêmes que pour la langue «~\lopt{italian}~», +% sauf au niveau partie («~Contenuto~»). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*italian2> +\ProvidesFile{italian2.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Italian titles. Variant, from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors. +\def\ptctitle{Contenuto}% +\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\mtctitle{Contenuto}% +\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\stctitle{Contenuto}% +\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +%</italian2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{7} +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese'' language: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese~>>: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.516379310\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.483620690\iwidth} + +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There +% are several variants for the japanese titles. +% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language have been found (by a Google search) on +% the Web site of +% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}. +% +% \normalmarginpar +% But see also other variants in sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a +% plusieurs variantes pour les titres en japonais. +% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> (japonais) ont été trouvés +% (par une recherche avec Google) sur le site Web du Professeur +% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}. +% +% Mais il faut aussi regarder les autres variantes dans les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese> +\ProvidesFile{japanese.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese}% +%% Japanese titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. +%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp> +%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html +%</japanese> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese2'' language: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language (japanese, second variant) are taken from file +% \xfile{JIS.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese2~>>: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> (japonais, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cap} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese2> +\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese2}% +%% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package +%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC +%</japanese2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese3'' language: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language (japanese, third variant) are taken from +% file \xfile{JIS.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% +% \lneed{3} +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese3~>>: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> (japonais, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cpx} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont bien sûr nécessaires. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Notez que les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas +% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese3> +\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese3}% +%% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package +%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC, preprocessed +%</japanese3> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese4'' language: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language (japanese, fourth version) are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cap} of the +% \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese4~>>: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> (japonais, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cap} +% du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese4.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese4.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese4> +\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese4}% +%% From SJIS.cap in CJK package for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) +%% with LaTeX2e. Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28/03/2003). +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS +%</japanese4> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese5'' language: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' (japanese, fifth variant) language are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cpx} of +% the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~japanese5~>>: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> (japonais, cinquième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cpx} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Regardez aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4} +% et~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese5> +\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese5}% +%% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package +%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS, preprocessed +%</japanese5> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese6'' language: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' (japanese, sixth variant) language have been found (by a Google search) +% on the Web site of +% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}. +% ^^A \lneed{4} +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese6~>>: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6} +% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{japanese6}~» (japonais, sixième variante) ont été trouvés (par une recherche avec +% Google) sur le site Web du Professeur +% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}. +% ^^A \lneed{4} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese6}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese6> +\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mld}[2006/10/31]\mtcloadmlo{japanese6}% +%% Japanese6 titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. +%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp> +%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html +%</japanese6> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Kannada'' language: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixfile{kannada.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue «~kannada~»: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixgrf{kannada.mld} +% \fi + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{7.180851064mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% Kannada (``\lopt{kannada}'') (or Kannara) language is a dravidian language spoken in the Karnataka state +% (main town: Bangalore) of India. +% Titles are taken in the \xfile{kanlel.sty} package file from the +% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX} project~\cite{kannadatex}\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}} by \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} and \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}. +% Specific fonts are required. See the alphabet here: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}. +% \or\relax +% Le +% «~\lopt{kannada}~» (ou kannara) est une langue dravidienne parlée dans l'état Karnataka (capitale Bangalore) de l'Inde. Les textes pour les +% titres sont tirées du fichier paquetage \xfile{kanlel.sty} du projet +% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}~\cite{kannadatex}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}}} de \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} et \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}. +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir l'alphabet ici: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kannada> +\ProvidesFile{kannada.mld}[2007/02/22]% +%% From kanlel.sty of Kannadatex +%% (C. S. Yogananda yoga@math.iisc.ernet.in yogacs@users.sarovar.org) +%% (K. K. Subramaniam subbukk@users.sarovar.org) +\def\ptctitle{pariviDi}% +\def\plftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% +\def\plftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% +\def\mtctitle{pariviDi}% +\def\mlftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% +\def\mlftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% +\def\stctitle{pariviDi}% +\def\slftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% +\def\slftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% +%</kannada> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Khalkha'' language: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~khalkha~>>: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ``\lopt{khalkha}'' is a synomym for ``\lopt{xalx}'', +% so we just load \xfile{xalx.mld} (see sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}): +% \or\relax +% Le <<~\lopt{khalkha}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{xalx}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{xalx.mld} +% (voir les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*khalkha> +\ProvidesFile{khalkha.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{xalx}% +%</khalkha> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latin'' language: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin}'' language (medieval) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}. +% The latin +% language is still used by the Catholic Church and the Vatican for archives and some texts. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latin~>>: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin}~>> (médiéval) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}. +% La langue latine +% est encore utilisée par l'Église Catholique et le Vatican pour des archives et certains textes. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latin> +\ProvidesFile{latin.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Latin (medieval) titles from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\mlttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\slttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +%</latin> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latin2'' language: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latin2~>>: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ae} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin2}'' language (latin, medieval, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin2}~>> (latin, médiéval, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latin2> +\ProvidesFile{latin2.mld}[2007/04/06]% +%% Latin (medieval) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\mlttitle{{Tabul\ae}}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\slttitle{{Tabul\ae}}% +%</latin2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latinc'' language: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc}'' language (classical latin) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latinc~>>: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc}~>> (latin classique) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latinc> +\ProvidesFile{latinc.mld}[2007/04/13]% +%% Latin (classical) titles from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\mlttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\slttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +%</latinc> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latinc2'' language: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc2}'' language (classical latin, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latinc2~>>: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc2}~>> (latin classique, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latinc2> +\ProvidesFile{latinc2.mld}[2007/04/06]% +%% Latin (classical) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabvlae}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\slttitle{Tabvlae}% +%</latinc2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Latvian'' language: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latvian~>>: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.3649022507\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.635097493\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language\,\footnote{Note that ``\lopt{latvian}'' is the original name for +% ``\lopt{letton}''.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+letton}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>\,\footnote{Notez que <<~\lopt{latvian}~>> (latvien) est +% l'autre nom du <<~\lopt{letton}~>>.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+letton}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latvian> +\ProvidesFile{latvian.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% From latvian.ldf (Antomega project). +%% Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% +\def\plftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% +\def\plttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% +\def\mtctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% +\def\mlftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% +\def\mlttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% +\def\stctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% +\def\slftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% +\def\slttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% +%</latvian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Latvian2'' language: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file +% (by \name{Andris}{Lasis} and \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}) +% at~\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~latvian2~>>: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>> viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf} +% (de \name{Andris}{Lasis} et \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}) +% à~{\froff\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latvian2> +\ProvidesFile{latvian2.mld}[2007/06/05]% +% Andris Lasis (andris_lisis@simms.lv) Ivars Drikis (drikis@lanet.lv) +% http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf +\def\ptctitle{Saturs}% +\def\plftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\plttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\mtctitle{Saturs}% +\def\mlftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\stctitle{Saturs}% +\def\slftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\slttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +%</latvian2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Letton'' language: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~letton~>>: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{letton}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language, so we just load +% \xfile{latvian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{letton}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{latvian.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*letton> +\ProvidesFile{letton.mld}[2005/02/08]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian}% +%</letton> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Letton2'' language: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~letton2~>>: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{letton2}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language, so we just load +% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{letton2}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*letton2> +\ProvidesFile{letton2.mld}[2007/06/05]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian2}% +%</letton2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lithuanian'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.442069741\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.557930259\iwidth} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{lithuanian}'' language (\emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf} +% file\footnote{Found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}.} +% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian}~>> (lituanien, \emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) sont simplement tirés du fichier +% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}\,\footnote{Trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}}}.} +% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lithuanian> +\ProvidesFile{lithuanian.mld}[2007/12/04]% +%% Lithuanian titles from lithuanian.ldf +%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip +%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt) +\def\ptctitle{Turinys}% +\def\plftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% +\def\plttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% +\def\mtctitle{Turinys}% +\def\mlftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% +\def\mlttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% +\def\stctitle{Turinys}% +\def\slftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% +\def\slttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% +%</lithuanian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lithuanian2'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{lithuanian2}'' language (variant) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf} +% file, found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}, +% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}. +% The L7x encoding and the Latin Modern fonts are needed. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian2~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian2}~>> (lituanien, variante) sont simplement tirés du fichier +% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}, trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}}}, +% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}. +% Le codage L7x et les fontes Latin Modern sont nécessaires. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lithuanian2> +\ProvidesFile{lithuanian2.mld}[2007/12/04]% +%% Lithuanian titles (variant) from lithuanian.ldf +%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20060928.tar.gz +%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt) +\def\ptctitle{Turinys}% +\def\plftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% +\def\plttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% +\def\mtctitle{Turinys}% +\def\mlftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% +\def\mlttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% +\def\stctitle{Turinys}% +\def\slftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% +\def\slttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% +%</lithuanian2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \par +% +% \lneed{9} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lowersorbian'' language: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lowersorbian~>>: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Lower sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, +% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Lower Lusatia in the german +% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes +% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during +% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century). +% } (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) are taken from the \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% A shorter language name is \lopt{lsorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}). +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>> (bas sorabe)\,\footnote{% +% ^^A \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000\interlinepenalty=10000\relax +% Le bas sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, +% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Basse-Lusace dans les \emph{länder} +% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves +% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale +% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle). } +% (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} +% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{lsorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar + + + +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lowersorbian> +\ProvidesFile{lowersorbian.mld}[2006/02/28]% +%% Lower sorbian titles from lsorbian.dtx (babel) by Werner, Eduard +\def\ptctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% +\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\mtctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% +\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\stctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% +\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +%</lowersorbian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lsorbian'' language: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lsorbian~>>: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{lsorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'', so we just need to load \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{lsorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lsorbian> +\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{lowersorbian}% +%</lsorbian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Magyar'' language: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~magyar~>>: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.588235294\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.411764706\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language are taken from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} +% (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} and \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, with help from \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. A synonym of ``\lopt{magyar}'' is +% ``\lopt{hungarian}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} for variants. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} +% (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} et \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, avec l'aide de \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. Un synonyme de <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> +% est <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} pour des variantes. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*magyar> +\ProvidesFile{magyar.mld}[2006/03/08]% +%% Magyar titles from magyar.dtx (babel). Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József +\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% +\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% +\def\stctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% +%</magyar> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Magyar2'' language: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed +% in the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, +% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} and~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~magyar2~>>: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar2}~>> sont tirés d'une variante proposée +% dans le fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, +% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} et~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*magyar2> +\ProvidesFile{magyar2.mld}[2008/04/03]% +%% Magyar2 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel). +%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József +\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% +\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% +\def\stctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% +%</magyar2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Magyar3'' language: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar3}'' language (third variant of magyar) are taken +% from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{The situation of the magyar language in +% the \pack{babel} package is not clear; some experimental versions exist.}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~magyar3~>>: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar3}~>> (troisième variante de la langue magyar) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{La situation de la langue magyar dans +% le paquetage \pack{babel} n'est pas claire; il existe des versions expérimentales.}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*magyar3> +\ProvidesFile{magyar3.mld}[2006/03/08]% +%% Magyar3 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel). +%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József +\def\ptctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% +\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% +\def\mtctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% +\def\stctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% +\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% +%</magyar3> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malay'' language: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malay~>>: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{malay}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{malay}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malay> +\ProvidesFile{malay.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}% +%</malay> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-b'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-b~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.528700906\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.471299094\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-b}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% The Malayalam language is spoken from the western coast of +% Malabar to the extreme southern India, mainly in the Kerala state. It is one of the dravidian languages strongly +% bound to the Tamil language. +% The +% alphabet and the script are dated from the 8th or 9th centuries. +% This language option requires specific fonts (depending on the +% option of the \pack{malayalam} package). +% It should be used with the following options of the +% \pack{malayalam} package\,\footnote{There is a great variety of fonts for malayalam; hence I have attempted to limit +% the number of \suffix{.mld} files.}: +% \optp{aathira}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ambili}{malayalam}, +% \optp{anahka}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam}, +% \optp{chippi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gauri}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gopika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{jaya}{malayalam}, +% \optp{karthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam}, +% \optp{makam}{malayalam}, +% \optp{malavika}, +% \optp{mridula}{malayalam}, +% \optp{payippad}{malayalam}, +% \optp{periyar}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam}, +% \optp{revathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sabari}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sarada}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam}, and +% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-b}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% La langue Malayalam est +% parlée de la côte occidentale de Malabar jusqu'à l'extrême sud de l'Inde, principalement dans l'état de Kerala. +% C'est l'une des langues dravidiennes fortement liées au Tamoul. L'alphabet% +% +% et l'écriture datent du \textsc{viii}\fup{e} ou +% \textsc{ix}\fup{e}~siècle. +% Cette option de langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (selon l'option +% du paquetage \pack{malayalam}). +% Elle devrait être utilisée avec les options suivantes du paquetage +% \pack{malayalam}\,\footnote{Il y~a une grande variété de fontes pour le malayalam; j'ai donc essayé de limiter +% le nombre de fichiers \suffix{.mld}.}: +% \optp{aathira}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ambili}{malayalam}, +% \optp{anahka}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam}, +% \optp{chippi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gauri}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gopika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{jaya}{malayalam}, +% \optp{karthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam}, +% \optp{makam}{malayalam}, +% \optp{malavika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{mridula}{malayalam}, +% \optp{payippad}{malayalam}, +% \optp{periyar}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam}, +% \optp{revathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sabari}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sarada}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam} et +% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-b> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-b.mld}[2007/12/04]% +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +%</malayalam-b> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +%% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-keli'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli}'' language, +% with the ``Keli'' fonts, are taken from the \pack{malayalam} +% package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} and \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli}~>> (malayalam, écriture \emph{keli}), avec les fontes <<~Keli~>>, +% sont tirés du paquetage +% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} et \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-keli> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Malayalam: Keli fonts +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +%</malayalam-keli> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-keli2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli2}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts (keli second variant). +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli2}~>> sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (keli seconde variante).\ABK +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-keli2> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli2.mld}[2007/12/04]% +% Keli fonts (mkl) +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +%</malayalam-keli2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-mr'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-mr~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-mr}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts (traditional rachana). +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-mr}~>> sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana traditionnel).\ABK +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-mr> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-mr.mld}[2007/12/04]% +% mr fonts (rachana: mr1,...,mr6) +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} +%</malayalam-mr> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-omega'' language: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue «~malayalam-omega~»: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is the Malayalam language implementation ``\lopt{malayalam-omega}'' +% based on \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (the version of \LaTeX\ for +% Omega) via the \pack{omal} package~\cite{malayalam-o} (by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}) of the Malayalam-Omega +% project\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}. As the titles contain characters in a special encoding, +% we must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. A lot of fonts are available via options of the \pack{omal} package. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% C'est l'implantation «~\lopt{malayalam-omega}~» de la langue malayalam lorsque vous utilisez +% \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (la version de \LaTeX\ pour +% Omega) via le paquetage \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o} (de \name{A.J.}{Alex}) du projet +% Malayalam-Omega\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}}. Comme les titres contiennent des +% caractères dans un codage spécial, nous devons charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. De nombreuses fontes sont disponibles +% via des options du paquetage \pack{omal}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-omega> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcloadmlo{malayalam-omega}% +%% from omal.sty (Alex A.J. indicTeX@gmail.com) +%</malayalam-omega> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-rachana'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\C} +% \begin{macro}{\F} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana}'' language, +% with the traditionnal ``Rachana'' fonts (old lipi), are taken from +% the \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana}~>>, +% avec les fontes traditionnelles <<~Rachana~>> (ancien \emph{lipi}), +% sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-rachana> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana.mld}[2005/06/07]% +%% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, traditionnal. +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +%</malayalam-rachana> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-rachana2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}'' language, +% with the reformed ``Rachana'' fonts (new lipi), are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}~>>, +% avec les fontes <<~Rachana~>> réformées (nouveau \emph{lipi}), sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-rachana2> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}[2006/01/13]% %% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, reformed. +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +%</malayalam-rachana2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-rachana3'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana3~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \begin{macro}{\C} +% \begin{macro}{\F} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts (rachana). +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}~>> sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana). +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-rachana3> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}[2007/12/04]% % Rachana fonts (mr2,...,mr6) +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +%</malayalam-rachana3> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Manju'' language: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~manju~>>: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{manju}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{bithe}'', +% so we just load \xfile{bithe.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{manju}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>, donc nous chargeons +% simplement \xfile{bithe.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*manju> +\ProvidesFile{manju.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{bithe}% +%</manju> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{14.28125mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mexican'' language: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{mexican}'' language (\emph{español mexicano}) are taken from the \xfile{mexican.ldf} file +% (by \name{Luis}{Rivera}) in \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. +% Mexican is a spanish (castillan) dialect. +% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}. +% +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mexican~>>: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mexican}~>> (mexicain, \emph{español mexicano}) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{mexican.ldf} (de \name{Luis}{Rivera}) +% dans \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. Le mexicain est un dialecte de l'espagnol +% (castillan). +% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}. +% +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \def\LBAS{Less than 20\,000 speakers.} +% \def\LMED{From 20\,000 to 100\,000 speakers.} +% \def\LHAUT{More than 100\,000 speakers.} +% \else\relax +% \def\LBAS{Moins de 20\,000 locuteurs.} +% \def\LMED{De 20\,000 à~100\,000 locuteurs.} +% \def\LHAUT{Plus de 100\,000 locuteurs.} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mexican> +\ProvidesFile{mexican.mld}[2008/04/03]% +%% Spanish titles (from mexican.ldf) Rivera, Luis (jlrn77@gmail.com) +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi % <---- +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +%</mexican> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Meyalu'' language: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~meyalu~>>: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{meyalu}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{meyalu}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*meyalu> +\ProvidesFile{meyalu.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}% +%</meyalu> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mongol'' language: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mongol~>>: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + + +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{22.8125mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{mongol}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% This language requires specific fonts. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, +% \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2}, and \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% ^^A \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongol}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2} et +% \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% ^^A \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mongol> +\ProvidesFile{mongol.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Mongol (xalx) titles. Needs mongol fonts +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +%</mongol> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mongolb'' language: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld} +% This +% is an other variant for the mongolian titles, +% taken from the \xfile{mongolian.dtx} file~\cite{mongolian} (by \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}) +% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (hence the final ``\texttt{b}'' in ``\texttt{mongolb}''). +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mongolb~>>: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld} +% Ceci +% est une autre variante pour les titres en mongol. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongolb}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{mongolian.dtx}~\cite{mongolian} +% (de \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}) +% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (d'où le «~\texttt{b}~» final dans «~\texttt{mongolb}~»). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{mongolb}'' language use cyrillic characters and the X2 and T2 encodings and are derived +% from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{mongolb}~» utilisent des caractères cyrilliques et les codages X2 et T2 +% sont dérivés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et +% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mongolb> +\ProvidesFile{mongolb.mld}[2007/01/29]% +%% Mongolian titles from mongolian.dtx for the babel package +%% Dorjgotov Batmunkh (batmunkh@num.edu.mn) +%% Needs some cyrillic fonts and special cyrillic encoding T2 and X2. +%% Vladimir Volovich (TeX@vvv.vsu.ru) & Werner Lemberg (wl@gnu.org) +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax + \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% +\else\relax + \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% +\fi +\def\plftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax + \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% +\else\relax + \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% +\fi +\def\mlftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax + \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% +\else\relax + \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% +\fi +\def\slftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +%</mongolb> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mongolian'' language: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mongolian~>>: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is an other name for the ``mongolb'' language, because +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} uses the name ``\lopt{mongolian}''. +% We just load \xfile{mongolb.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}. +% \or\relax +% C'est un autre nom pour la langue «~mongolb~», car le paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} utilise le nom «~\lopt{mongolian}~» +% Nous chargeons simplement \xfile{mongolb.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mongolian> +\ProvidesFile{mongolian.mld}[2007/02/05]\mtcselectlanguage{mongolb}% +%</mongolian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Naustrian'' language: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~naustrian~>>: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{naustrian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language +% (a revised version of the \texttt{germanb} variant of the german language), +% so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{naustrian}~>> (néo-autrichien) est un synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>> (néo-allemand) (une +% version réformée de la variante \texttt{germanb} de la langue allemande), donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*naustrian> +\ProvidesFile{naustrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}% +%</naustrian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Newzealand'' language: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~newzealand~>>: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{newzealand}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', +% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} +% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{newzealand}~>> (néo-zélandais) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*newzealand> +\ProvidesFile{newzealand.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +%</newzealand> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ngerman'' language: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ngerman~>>: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{ngerman}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A revised version of the +% \lopt{germanb} variant of the german language.}, so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{ngerman}~>> (néo-allemand) est un synonyme de la langue +% <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une version réformée +% de la variante \lopt{germanb} de la langue allemande.}, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ngerman> +\ProvidesFile{ngerman.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}% +%</ngerman> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ngermanb'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A variant of the german language, with revised spelling.} are +% taken from the file \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}, and~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une variante pour la langue allemande, avec une orthographe +% réformée.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian} +% et~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ngermanb> +\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% New german (B) titles from ngermanb.dtx (babel). Raichle, Bernd & Schmidt, Walter +\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt % <----- +\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +%</ngermanb> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ngermanb2'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb2}'' language (revised spelling and +% short titles) are taken from the \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, and abbreviated. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb2~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb2}~>> (orthographe réformée et titres courts) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, et abrégés. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ngermanb2> +\ProvidesFile{ngermanb2.mld}[2005/09/27]% +%% New german (B) short (2) titles +\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +%</ngermanb2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Norsk'' language: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~norsk~>>: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.591188475\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.408811475\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.1875mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{norsk}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the +% \xfile{norsk.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help +% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, +% avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \fi + +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*norsk> +\ProvidesFile{norsk.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Norsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard +%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset +%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\ptctitle{Innhold}% +\def\plftitle{Figurer}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\mtctitle{Innhold}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\stctitle{Innhold}% +\def\slftitle{Figurer}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% +%</norsk> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Norsk2'' language: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{norsk2}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help +% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, and abbreviated. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~norsk2~>>: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk2}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés +% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, et abrégés. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*norsk2> +\ProvidesFile{norsk2.mld}[2005/09/27]% +%% Short norsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\ptctitle{Innhold}% +\def\plftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\mtctitle{Innhold}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\stctitle{Innhold}% +\def\slftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}% +%</norsk2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Nynorsk'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language\,\footnote{Created around 1800 +% by \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} to make a real +% independent and national norvegian language, in reaction to danish, from the various dialects spoken in the +% country. But nynorsk has never gained much popularity outside rural regions.} are taken +% from the \xfile{norsk.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help from +% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>> +% (néo-norvégien)\,\footnote{Créée vers 1800 par \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} +% pour construire une vraie langue norvégienne indépendante et nationale, en réaction au danois, à~partir des +% divers dialectes parlés dans le pays. Mais le néo-norvégien n'a jamais beaucoup gagné en popularité en dehors des régions +% rurales.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx} +% (par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de +% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*nynorsk> +\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Nynorsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard +%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset +%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\mtctitle{Innhald}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurar}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellar}% +\def\ptctitle{Innhald}% +\def\plftitle{Figurar}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellar}% +\def\stctitle{Innhald}% +\def\slftitle{Figurar}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellar}% +%</nynorsk> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Nynorsk2'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk2}'' language are variants of the titles of the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk2~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk2}~>> sont des variantes des titres de la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>>. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*nynorsk2> +\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Nynorsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\mtctitle{Innhald}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\ptctitle{Innhald}% +\def\plftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\stctitle{Innhald}% +\def\slftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}% +%</nynorsk2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Occitan'' language: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~occitan~>>: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{1.\bigskipamount} +% + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% \lopt{occitan} language\,\footnote{I~used the site {\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} +% for the translations.} is still spoken in the south of France, +% from Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) and Toulouse +% (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) to Marseille (Marselha) and Nice (Niça), with many local variants. +% This bilingual street sign in Toulouse (Tolosa), like many +% such signs found in historical parts of the city, is maintained +% primarily for its antique charm; it is typical of what little +% remains of the ``lenga d'oc'' in southern French cities. +% See also~\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}. +% See also~\cite{occi}. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue occitane (\lopt{occitan} ou langue d'oc)\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le site +% {\froff\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} pour les traductions.} +% est encore parlée dans le sud de la France, +% de Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) et Toulouse (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) +% à~Marseille (Marselha) et Nice (Niça), avec de nombreuses variantes locales. +% Ces plaques de rue en deux langues dans Toulouse (Tolosa), +% comme de nombreux signes analogues dans les parties +% historiques de la cité, sont conservées essentiellement pour +% leur charme ancien; ceci est typique de ce qui subsiste de la +% <<~lenga d'oc~>> dans les cités du Midi de la France. +% Voir aussi {\froff\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}}. +% Voir aussi~\cite{occi}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*occitan> +\ProvidesFile{occitan.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Occitan titles (translations using http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx) +\def\ptctitle{Ensenhador}% +\def\plftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% +\def\plttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% +\def\mtctitle{Ensenhador}% +\def\mlftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% +\def\mlttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% +\def\stctitle{Ensenhador}% +\def\slftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% +\def\slttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% +%</occitan> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Occitan2'' language: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~occitan2~>>: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \lopt{occitan2} language provides an example of variants for the occitan titles. +% \or\relax +% La langue \lopt{occitan2} donne un exemple de variantes des titres occitans. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*occitan2> +\ProvidesFile{occitan2.mld}[2008/04/03]% +% Occitan titles (variants) +\def\ptctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de las figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% +\def\mtctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de las figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% +\def\stctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de las figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% +%</occitan2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Polish'' language: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~polish~>>: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld} +% \fi + + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{polish}'' language (\emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) are taken from the \xfile{polish.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} and \name{Michael}{Janich}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish}~>> (polonais, \emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polish.dtx} +% (de \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} et \name{Michael}{Janich}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*polish> +\ProvidesFile{polish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Polish titles from polish.dtx (babel). Schalück, Elmar & Janich, Michael +\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\plttitle{Spis tablic}% +\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\mlttitle{Spis tablic}% +\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\slttitle{Spis tablic}% +%</polish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Polish2'' language: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~polish2~>>: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localpolish} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{polish2}'' language\,\footnote{``Polish2'' is a variant of ``\lopt{polish}''.} are taken from +% the \xfile{omega-polish.ldf} +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} and~\vref{s+mld+polski}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish2}~>> (polonais, seconde variante) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{omega-polish.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} et~\vref{s+mld+polski}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*polish2> +\ProvidesFile{polish2.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-polish.ldf (Antomega). Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov, Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% +\def\plftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% +\def\plttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% +\def\stctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% +\def\slftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% +\def\slttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% +%</polish2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Polski'' language: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{polski}'' language (variant for polish) are taken from the \xfile{polski.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mariusz}{Olko} and \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}) +% in the \pack{polski} package~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~polski~>>: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polski}~>> (autre nom du polonais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polski.dtx} +% (de \name{Mariusz}{Olko} et \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*polski> +\ProvidesFile{polski.mld}[2008/01/15]% +%% Polski titles from polski.dtx. Olko, Mariusz & Woli\'nski, Marcin. +\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\plttitle{Spis tabel}% +\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\mlttitle{Spis tabel}% +\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\slttitle{Spis tabel}% +%</polski> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Portuges'' language: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~portuges~>>: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The name ``\lopt{portuges}'' is another spelling for ``\lopt{portuguese}'' +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), so we just load \xfile{portuguese.mld}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Le nom «~\lopt{portuges}~» est une autre orthographe pour <<~portuguese~>> +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{portuguese.mld}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*portuges> +\ProvidesFile{portuges.mld}[2005/06/07]\mtcselectlanguage{portuguese}% +%</portuges> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Portuguese'' language: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~portuguese~>>: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% ^^A \def\ctextbf#1{\null\hfill\textbf{#1}\hfill\null} +% ^^A \let\ctextbf\textbf +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.35\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.65\iwidth} +% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} +% \reversemarginpar +% ^^A http://www.gastronomias.com/lusofonia/ +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{portuguese}'' language (\emph{português}) are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file +% (by \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}. +% The portuguese language is spoken in Portugal (with the islands of Azores and Madeira) , in Brazil, and in +% former portuguese colonies like Angola, Guinea-Bissau, Mozambique, Cape Verde Islands, Sa\~o~Tomé and Príncipe Islands, +% East Timor, and some old trading posts like Macao and Goa. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, because the titles are different in Brazil, even if the language is also portuguese. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{portuguese}~>> (portugais, \emph{português}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx} +% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}. +% Le portugais est parlé au Portugal (avec les Îles des Açores et Madère) , au Brésil, et dans les anciennes +% colonies telles que l'Angola, la Guinée-Bissau, le Mozambique, les Îles du Cap-Vert, les Îles de Sa\~o~Tomé-et-Príncipe, +% le Timor Oriental et quelques anciens comptoirs comme Macao et Goa. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, parce que les titres sont différents au Brésil, +% même si l'on y parle aussi le portugais. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*portuguese> +\ProvidesFile{portuguese.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Portuguese titles from portuges.dtx (babel). +%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro +\def\ptctitle{Conte\'udo}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\mtctitle{Conte\'udo}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\stctitle{Conte\'udo}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +%</portuguese> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Romanian'' language: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~romanian~>>: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld} +% \fi + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{romanian}'' language (\emph{român\u{a}}) come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file +% (by \name{Umstatter}{Horst} and \name{Robert}{Juhasz}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian}~>> (roumain, \emph{român\u{a}}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} +% (de \name{Umstatter}{Horst} et \name{Robert}{Juhasz}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*romanian> +\ProvidesFile{romanian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Romanian titles from romanian.dtx (babel). +%% Horst, Umstatter & Juhasz, Robert +\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\plftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% +\def\plttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\mlftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% +\def\mlttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\slftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% +\def\slttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% +%</romanian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{9} +% \section{``Romanian2'' language: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian2}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} and~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}. +% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~romanian2>>: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian2}~>> (roumain, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} +% et~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}. +% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*romanian2> +\ProvidesFile{romanian2.mld}[2006/08/03]% +%% Titles in RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx). Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl), +%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de) +\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de figuri}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de figuri}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista de tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de figuri}% +\def\slttitle{Lista de tabele}% +%</romanian2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Romanian3'' language: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian3}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian2}. +% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~romanian3>>: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian3}~>> (roumain, autre variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian3}. +% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*romanian3> +\ProvidesFile{romanian3.mld}[2006/08/03]% +%% Romanian titles from RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx) variant. +%% Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl) +%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de) +\def\ptctitle{Tabla de materii}% +\def\plttitle{Indice de figuri}% +\def\plttitle{Tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Tabla de materii}% +\def\mlttitle{Indice de figuri}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Tabla de materii}% +\def\slttitle{Indice de figuri}% +\def\slttitle{Tabele}% +%</romanian3> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian'' language: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian~>>: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% \or\relax + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount} +% + +% ^^A (RUSS +% ^^A RUSS) + + +% +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\cz} +% \begin{macro}{\mz} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% +% for the ``\lopt{russian}'' language (\emph{russkiy yazyk}) are taken from +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian}~>> (russe, \emph{russkiy yazyk}) sont tirés +% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian> +\ProvidesFile{russian.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Russian titles +\def\ptctitle{Oglavlenie}% +\def\plftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% +\def\plttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% +\def\mtctitle{Oglavlenie}% +\def\mlftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% +\def\mlttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% +\def\stctitle{Oglavlenie}% +\def\slftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% +\def\slttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% +%</russian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian2m'' language: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian2m~>>: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localrussian} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2m}'' language (``\lopt{russian2m}'' is a modern variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') +% are taken from the \xfile{russian2m.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. +% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2m}~>> (une variante moderne de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{russian2m.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian2m> +\ProvidesFile{russian2m.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from russian2m.ldf (Antomega project, russian modern) +%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% +\def\plftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% + ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% +\def\plttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% + ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% + ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% + ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% +\def\stctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% +\def\slftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% + ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% +\def\slttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% + ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% +%</russian2m> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian2o'' language: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian2o~>>: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localrussian} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2o}'' language (``\lopt{russian2o}'' is an old variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') +% are taken from the \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> (<<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> est une ancienne variante +% de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian2o> +\ProvidesFile{russian2o.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from russian2o.mld (Antomega project - russian old) +%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% +\def\plftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% + ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% +\def\plttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% + ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% + ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% + ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% +\def\stctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% +\def\slftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% + ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% +\def\slttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% + ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% +%</russian2o> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russianb'' language: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russianb~>>: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianb}'' language (``\lopt{russianb}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') +% are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}. +% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. The parttoc title varies depending +% on the presence of chapters defined or not by the document class. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianb}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianb}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} +% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. Le titre des +% parttocs dépend de l'existence de chapitres dans la classe de document. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russianb> +\ProvidesFile{russianb.mld}[2006/02/15]% +%% Russian (russianb) titles from russianb.dtx (babel) +%% Lapko, Olga & Volovitch, Vladimir & Lemberg, Werner +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\else\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% +\fi +\def\plftitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% +\def\plttitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% +\def\mtctitle{% + {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% +\def\mlftitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% +\def\mlttitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% +\def\stctitle{% + {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% +\def\slftitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% +\def\slttitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% +%</russianb> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russianc'' language: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russianc~>>: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\xalx} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianc}'' language (``\lopt{russianc}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'', +% used in the part of Mongolia under russian influence) are taken from the file \xfile{russian.def} in the +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est une variante du russe <<~\lopt{russian}~>>, +% utilisée dans la partie de la Mongolie sous influence russe) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.def} dans le paquetage +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la +% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russianc> +\ProvidesFile{russianc.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Russian titles (Mongolia). Needs cyrillic fonts. +\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Oglawlenie}}% +\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +%</russianc> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-cca'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts. +% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} +% (by \name{Victor}{Boyko} and \name{Vadim}{Maslov}) +% file in the \pack{cmcyralt} package~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt. +% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty} +% (de \name{Victor}{Boyko} de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-cca> +\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca}% +%% Russian-cca titles. From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package +%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu) +%% Needs cmcyralt fonts and special input encoding. +%</russian-cca> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-cca1'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca1~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} file +% (by \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} and \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) +% in the \pack{cmcyralt} package\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} +% (de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} et \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-cca1> +\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca1}% +%% Russian-cca1 titles. From cmcyralt.sty in the cmcyralt package +%% with cmcyr fonts in alt encoding. +%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Alexander Harin (harin@lourie.und.ac.za) +%% & Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@phy.ncu.edu.tw) +%</russian-cca1> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lh'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lh~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LH fonts (``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language) are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} file +% (by \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}) +% in the \pack{LH} package~\cite{LH/russian.sty}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LH (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty} +% (de \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{LH}~\cite{LH/russian.sty}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lh> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lh}% +%% Russian-lh titles from russian.sty in the LH package +%% LH fonts in special encoding. By Sergei O. Naumov (serge@astro.unc.edu) +%</russian-lh> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lhcyralt'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyralt~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LHCYRALT fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language) are taken +% from the \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRALT (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>>) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. The input encoding is ALT (code page CP866). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être +% générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est ALT (page de code CP866). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lhcyralt> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}[2006/03/10]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyralt}% +%% Russian-lhcyralt titles from lhcyralt.sty in the LHCYR package +%% LHCYRALT fonts in special encoding ALT (CP866). +%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +%</russian-lhcyralt> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lhcyrkoi'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrkoi~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LHCYRKOI fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language) are taken +% from the \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRKOI (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>>) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. The input encoding is KOI-8. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est KOI-8. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lhcyrkoi> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +%% Russian-lhcyrkoi titles from lhcyrkoi.sty in the LHCYR package +%% LHCYRKOI fonts in special encoding KOI-8. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +%</russian-lhcyrkoi> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lhcyrwin'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrwin~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LHCYRWIN fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language) are taken +% from the \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRWIN (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>>) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. The input encoding is CP1251. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas +% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. +% Le codage en entrée est CP1251. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lhcyrwin> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrwin}% +%% Russian titles from lhcyrwin.sty in the LHCYR package +%% LHCYRWIN fonts in encoding CP1251. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +%</russian-lhcyrwin> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Samin'' language: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~samin~>>: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{samin}'' language come from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Specific fonts are required. +% ^^A +% ^^A \lneed{3} +% Note that several Sámi dialects/languages are spoken in Finland, Norway, Sweden, +% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there will eventually be a need for more \suffix{.dtx} +% files for, e.g., Lule and South Sámi. +% Hence the (artificial) name \xfile{samin.dtx} (and not \uxfile{sami.dtx} or the like) in the North Sámi +% case\,\footnote{Adapted from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file.}. These dialects and languages are part of +% the Finnic group. See also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{samin}~>> (Sámi (ou Sâme) du Nord) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{samin.dtx} +% (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. +% ^^A +% ^^A \lneed{3} +% Notez que plusieurs dialectes ou langues Sámi/Sâme sont parlés en Finlande, Norvège, Suède et dans la péninsule +% de Kola (Russie). Les alphabets sont différents, donc il y~aurait éventuellement besoin de plusieurs +% fichiers \suffix{.dtx} pour, par exemple, le Lule et le Sámi (ou Sâme) du Sud. +% D'où le nom (artificiel) \xfile{samin.dtx} (et non pas \uxfile{sami.dtx} ou analogue) dans le cas du +% Sámi (Sâme) du Nord\,\footnote{D'après le fichier \xfile{samin.dtx}.}. Ces dialectes et langues font partie +% du groupe finnois. Voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*samin> +\ProvidesFile{samin.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% North Sámi (samin) titles from samin.dtx (babel). Jernsletten, Regnor +\def\ptctitle{Sisdoallu}% +\def\plftitle{Govvosat}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeallat}% +\def\mtctitle{Sisdoallu}% +\def\mlftitle{Govvosat}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeallat}% +\def\stctitle{Sisdoallu}% +\def\slftitle{Govvosat}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeallat}% +%</samin> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Scottish'' language: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~scottish~>>: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.275526742\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.358184765\iwidth} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{.366288493\iwidth} + +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{5.508474576mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{scottish}'' language (gaelic scottish, \emph{gàidhlig}) come from the \xfile{scottish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% in the \pack{babel} language~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{scottish}~>> (gaélique écossais, \emph{gàidhlig}) sont tirés du fichier \uxfile{scottish.dtx} +% (de \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*scottish> +\ProvidesFile{scottish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Scottish titles from scottish.dtx (babel). Grant, Fraser +\def\ptctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% +\def\plftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% +\def\plttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% +\def\mtctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% +\def\mlftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% +\def\mlttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% +\def\stctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% +\def\slftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% +\def\slttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% +%</scottish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Serbian'' language: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~serbian~>>: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.500713267\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.499286733\iwidth} + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{serbian}'' (serbocroatian) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) language are taken from the \xfile{serbian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} and \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}. +% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet +% (a variant). +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc} . +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbian}~>> (serbocroate) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{serbian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} et \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}. +% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores +% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*serbian> +\ProvidesFile{serbian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Serbian titles in serbian.dtx (babel). Muhamedagi\'{c}, Dejan & Slobodan, Jankovic +\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\plftitle{Slike}% +\def\plttitle{Tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\mlftitle{Slike}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\slftitle{Slike}% +\def\slttitle{Tabele}% +%</serbian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Serbianc'' language: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~serbianc~>>: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language\,\footnote{The ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language is written +% with cyrillic characters.} have been gently provided by \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} and \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. +% Cyrillic fonts are required. +% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet +% (a variant). +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> (serbe cyrillique)\,\footnote{La langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> est +% écrite en caractères cyrilliques.} ont été aimablement fournis par \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} et +% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises. +% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores +% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}. +% \fi +% ^^A %% Abt. Biophysikalische Chemie | Küster +% \lneed{14} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*serbianc> +\ProvidesFile{serbianc.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Serbian cyrillic titles. Marko Èehaja Internut@Thetaworld.Org +%% Frank Küster, Biozentrum der Univ. Basel, frank@kuesterei.ch +\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% +\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% +\def\plttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% +\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% +\def\mlttitle{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% +\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% +\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% +\def\slttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% +%</serbianc> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Slovak'' language: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~slovak~>>: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld} +% \fi + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{slovak}'' language (\emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the \xfile{slovak.dtx} file +% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} and \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovak}~>> (slovaque, \emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovak.dtx} +% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} et \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3}% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*slovak> +\ProvidesFile{slovak.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Slovak titles from slovak.dtx (babel). Chlebîková, Jana & Schlemmer, Tobias. T1 encoding. +\def\ptctitle{Obsah}% +\def\plftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% +\def\plttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% +\def\mtctitle{Obsah}% +\def\mlftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% +\def\mlttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% +\def\stctitle{Obsah}% +\def\slftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% +\def\slttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% +%</slovak> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Slovene'' language: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~slovene~>>: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% slovene language (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) is spoken in Slovenia, but somewhat also in Italy (Frioul), in Austria (Carinthia and Styria), in +% Hungary (Szlovénviék and Porabje), in West Germany and Sweden. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue slovène (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) est parlée en Slovénie, mais un peu aussi en Italie (Frioul), en Autriche (Carinthie et Styrie), en +% Hongrie (Szlovénviék et Porabje), en Allemagne de l'Ouest et en Suède. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{slovene}'' language come from the \xfile{slovene.dtx} file +% (by \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} and \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovene}~>> (slovène) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovene.dtx} +% (de \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} et \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*slovene> +\ProvidesFile{slovene.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Slovene titles from slovene.dtx (babel). Zavrtanik, Danilo & \v{Z}lajpah, Leon +\def\ptctitle{Kazalo}% +\def\plftitle{Slike}% +\def\plttitle{Tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Kazalo}% +\def\mlftitle{Slike}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Kazalo}% +\def\slftitle{Slike}% +\def\slttitle{Tabele}% +%</slovene> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish'' language: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish~>>: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld} +% \fi + + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{spanish}'' (\emph{español, castellano}) language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialy by \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}. +% Note that the ``\lopt{spanish}'' language is in +% fact ``\lopt{castillan}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). But note also that other languages are spoken in Spain: ``basque'' +% (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), ``\lopt{catalan}'' (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), and ``\lopt{galician}'' +% (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}). Note that ``\lopt{spanish2}'' is a version of ``\lopt{spanish}'' +% with shorter titles (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}). +% And ``\lopt{spanish3}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) is a version for +% the \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} project; some titles are +% differents. +% And ``\lopt{spanish4}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{spanish}'' where \com{ptctitle} is shorter for +% articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) (\emph{español, castellano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} +% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialement par \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}. +% Notez que le <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) est en fait le <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). +% Mais notez aussi que d'autres langues sont parlées en Espagne: <<~\lopt{basque}~>> (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> +% (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), et <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien) (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}). +% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> avec des titres plus courts +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}). +% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) est une variante pour le +% projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}; certains titres sont différents. +% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> où \com{ptctitle} est plus court +% pour les articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}). +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish> +\ProvidesFile{spanish.mld}[2008/04/03]% +%% Spanish titles from spanish.dtx (babel) by Bezos, Javier & CervanTeX +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}\fi +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +%</spanish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish2'' language: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file in +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}, +% but made shorter for chapter and section levels. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish2~>>: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> (espagnol deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}, +% mais abrégés pour les niveaux chapitre et section. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish2> +\ProvidesFile{spanish2.mld}[2008/04/03]% +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\mtctitle{Contenido}% +\def\mlftitle{Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Tablas}% +\def\stctitle{Contenido}% +\def\slftitle{Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Tablas}% +%</spanish2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish3'' language: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish3~>>: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localspanish} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish3}'' language are taken from the \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) +% of the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (espagnol troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) du projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish3> +\ProvidesFile{spanish3.mld}[2005/09/06]% +%% Spanish titles from omega-spanish.ldf of the Antomega project. +\def\ptctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% +\def\plftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% +\def\plttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% +\def\stctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% +\def\slftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% +\def\slttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% +%</spanish3> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish4'' language: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish4}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) +% from the \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} package~\cite{spanish4}. +% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish4~>>: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} +% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}) +% du paquetage \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}~\cite{spanish4}. +% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish4> +\ProvidesFile{spanish4.mld}[2006/01/19]% +%% Spanish titles (from spanish.dtx in CervanTeX) Bezos, Javier +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +%</spanish4> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Swahili'' language: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~swahili~>>: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld} +% \fi + +% ^^A (SWA +% ^^A SWA) +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{swahili}'' language (\emph{kiswahili}) are taken from the \emph{obsolete} +% \xfile{swahili.tex} file\,\footnote{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}}, +% with adaptations and corrections given on the +% \texttt{comp.text.tex} news group (messages 57662, 57713, and 57717) by \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} +% and \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swahili}~>> (\emph{kiswahili}) sont tirés +% du fichier \emph{obsolète} \xfile{swahili.tex}\,\footnote{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}\,.}, +% avec des adaptations et des corrections données sur le groupe de discussion \texttt{comp.text.tex} (messages +% 57662, 57713 et 57717) par \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} et \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Swahili is the main Bantu language and is spoken in East Africa: Tanzania, Kenya, +% Uganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar and in the area of the Great Lakes in the Democratic Republic of Congo (Congo-Kinshasa, +% formerly Zaire) and in the Republic of Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), in +% the north of Mozambique and the south of Somalia\,\footnote{\RaggedRight See +% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/monde/swahili.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}, +% \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html}, and +% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}\,.}. See~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990} . +% \or\relax +% Le swahili (ou «~souaéli~») est la plus importante langue bantoue et est parlée dans l'Afrique de l'Est: Tanzanie, Kenya, +% Ouganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar et la région des grands lacs dans la République Démocratique du Congo (Congo-Kinshasa, +% ex-Zaïre) et dans la République du Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), au +% nord du Mozambique et dans le sud de la Somalie\,\footnote{\RaggedRight Voir +% \url{http://si.unm.edu/linguistics/swahili/swahili}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} +% dans~\cite{tlfq}, \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html} et +% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}}. Voir~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*swahili> +\ProvidesFile{swahili.mld}[2007/07/02]% +%% Swahili titles from swahili.tex in articles: 57662,57713,57717 +%% in comp.text.tex by Giancarlo Bassi <g.bassi@iperbole.bologna.it> +%% & Enrico Gregorio <gregorio@math.unipd.it> +\def\ptctitle{Yaliyomo}% +\def\plftitle{Picha zilizomo}% +\def\plttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% +\def\mtctitle{Yaliyomo}% +\def\mlftitle{Picha zilizomo}% +\def\mlttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% +\def\stctitle{Yaliyomo}% +\def\slftitle{Picha zilizomo}% +\def\slttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% +%</swahili> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Swedish'' language: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~swedish~>>: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.450276243\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.549723757\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.42\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.58\iwidth} +% \setlength{\cwidth}{.323437500\iwidth} +% \setlength{\dwidth}{.676562500\iwidth} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{swedish}'' (\emph{svenska}) language come from the \xfile{swedish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Sten}{Hellman} and \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, with a correction by \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}. +% The swedish language is spoken in Sweden and in some regions of Finland like +% the \r{A}land Islands. See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish}~>> (suédois, \emph{svenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{swedish.dtx} +% (de \name{Sten}{Hellman} et \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, avec une correction de \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}. +% ^^A +% La langue suédoise est parlée en Suède et dans certaines régions de Finlande, +% dont les Îles \r{A}land. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*swedish> +\ProvidesFile{swedish.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Swedish titles from swedish.dtx (babel). Hellman, Sten & Östhols, Erik +\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\plftitle{Figurer}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\slftitle{Figurer}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% +%</swedish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Swedish2'' language: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{swedish2}'' language (variant for swedish) are taken +% from the \xfile{rapport.doc} file (by \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) in the \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} package~\cite{slatex}. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~swedish2~>>: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish2}~>> (suédois, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{rapport.doc} +% (de \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) +% dans le paquetage \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*swedish2> +\ProvidesFile{swedish2.mld}[2006/04/04]% +%% Swedish2 titles from rapport.doc (slatex). Mattisson, Sven (sven@tde.lu.se) +\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\plftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% +\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% +\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\slftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% +%</swedish2> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Thai'' language: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~thai~>>: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai} +% \fi + +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language come from the \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} file +% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% and use fonts +% of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, +% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) provides the same titles in its \xfile{thai.ldf} file. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> (thaï) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} +% (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% et utilisent des fontes du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex}% (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, +% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) fournit les mêmes titres dans son +% fichier \xfile{thai.ldf}. Voir aussi~\cite{thaistd}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \normalmarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{thai.mlo}. See also~\cite{thaistd}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, donc +% nous chargeons \xfile{thai.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*thai> +\ProvidesFile{thai.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{thai}% +%% From thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system +%% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +%</thai> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Turkish'' language: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~turkish~>>: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld} +% \fi +% \newcommand{\TUL}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}} + + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% The +% turkish language (\emph{türkçe}) is spoken mainly in Turkey and in Cyprus. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{turkish}'' language are taken from the \xfile{turkish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} and \name{Turgut}{Uyar}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue turque (\emph{türkçe}) est parlée principalement en Turquie et à~Chypre. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{turkish}~>> (turc) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{turkish.dtx} +% (de \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} et \name{Turgut}{Uyar}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*turkish> +\ProvidesFile{turkish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Turkish titles from turkish.dtx (babel). Burc, Mustafa +\def\ptctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% +\def\plftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% +\def\plttitle{Tablo Listesi}% +\def\mtctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% +\def\mlftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% +\def\mlttitle{Tablo Listesi}% +\def\stctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% +\def\slftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% +\def\slttitle{Tablo Listesi}% +%</turkish> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{7} +% \section{``Uighur'' language: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~uighur~>>: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld} +% \fi + +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.308755760\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.691244240\iwidth} + +% \lneed{3} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{20mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{uighur}'' and ``\lopt{bicig}'' languages +% are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{bicig.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues +% <<~\lopt{uighur}~>> (ouïghour) et <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{bicig.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uighur> +\ProvidesFile{uighur.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig}% +%</uighur> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Uighur2'' language: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~uighur2~>>: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{uighur2}'' and ``\lopt{bicig2}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{bicig2.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur2}~>> (ouïghour deuxième variante) +% et <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{bicig2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uighur2> +\ProvidesFile{uighur2.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig2}% +%</uighur2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Uighur3'' language: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~uighur3~>>: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{uighur3}'' and ``\lopt{bicig3}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{bicig3.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur3}~>> (ouïghour troisième variante) +% et <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{bicig3.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uighur3> +\ProvidesFile{uighur3.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig3}% +%</uighur3> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``UKenglish'' language: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~UKenglish~>>: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{UKenglish}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' (``UK'' is for ``United Kingdom''), so we just +% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{UKenglish}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> («~UK~» signifie \emph{United Kingdom}, +% le «~Royaume Uni~»), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} +% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3}\normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*UKenglish> +\ProvidesFile{UKenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +%</UKenglish> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ukraineb'' language: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ukraineb~>>: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{ukraineb}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{ukrainian}'', so we just load \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{ukraineb}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ukraineb> +\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{ukrainian}% +%</ukraineb> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ukrainian'' language: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ukrainian~>>: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + +% +% \setlength{\wkdim}{6mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{ukrainian}'' language (\emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) come from the \xfile{ukraineb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Cyrillic fonts are required. +% Another language name is \lopt{ukraineb} (see section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>> (ukrainien, \emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ukrainian.dtx} +% (de \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises. +% Un autre nom pour cette langue est \lopt{ukraineb} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ukrainian> +\ProvidesFile{ukrainian.mld}[2006/01/33]% +%% Ukrainian titles from ukraineb.dtx (babel). Shvaika, Andrij & Lapko, Olga +%% Needs cyrillic fonts +\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% +\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% +\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% +\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% +\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% +%</ukrainian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Uppersorbian'' language: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Upper sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, +% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Upper Lusatia in the german +% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes +% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during +% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) +% are taken from the \xfile{usorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% A shorter language name is \lopt{usorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}). +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~uppersorbian~>>: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>> (haut sorabe)\,\footnote{Le haut sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, +% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Haute-Lusace dans les \emph{länder} +% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves +% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale +% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{usorbian.dtx} +% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{usorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uppersorbian> +\ProvidesFile{uppersorbian.mld}[2006/02/38]% +%% Upper sorbian titles from usorbian.dtx (babel). Needs cyrillic fonts. Werner, Eduard +\def\ptctitle{Wobsah}% +\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\mtctitle{Wobsah}% +\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\stctitle{Wobsah}% +\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +%</uppersorbian> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``USenglish'' language: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~USenglish~>>: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{USenglish}'' language (``US'' is for ``United States (of America))'' is just like +% ``\loptd{english}''\footnote{It should be true for the mini-table titles; the +% languages themselves have some differences, like the hyphenation rules, +% see~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, so we just +% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{USenglish}~>> (américain, «~US~» signifiant «~\emph{United States (of America)}~») est +% comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>\footnote{Ceci devrait être vrai pour les titres des mini-tables; les langues elles-mêmes +% ont quelques différences, dont les règles de coupure des mots, +% voir~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*USenglish> +\ProvidesFile{USenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +%</USenglish> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Usorbian'' language: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~usorbian~>>: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{usorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'', so we just have +% to load \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{usorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*usorbian> +\ProvidesFile{usorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{uppersorbian}% +%</usorbian> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Vietnam'' language: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~vietnam~>>: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld} +% \fi + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language (\emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) are taken from the \pack{vietnam} package~\cite{vietnam} +% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}). +% Vietnamese fonts are required; see~\cite{han2003,han2008}. The vietnamese language is spoken in Vietnam +% and in the vietnamese diaspora. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien, \emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}). +% Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises; voir~\cite{han2003,han2008}. Le vietnamien est parlé au Vietnam +% et dans la diaspora vietnamienne. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar + +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*vietnam> +\ProvidesFile{vietnam.mld}[1999/03/16]% Vietnamese titles +\def\ptctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% +\def\plftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% +\def\plttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% +\def\mtctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% +\def\mlftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% +\def\mlttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% +\def\stctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% +\def\slftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% +\def\slttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% +%</vietnam> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Vietnamese'' language: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~vietnamese~>>: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{vietnamese}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language. +% So we just load \xfile{vietnam.mld}. +% Vietnamese fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{vietnamese}~>> est simplement un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien). Donc nous +% chargeons simplement \xfile{vietnam.mld}. Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises, Voir aussi +% la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*vietnamese> +\ProvidesFile{vietnamese.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{vietnam}% +%</vietnamese> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Welsh'' language: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~welsh~>>: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.346020761\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.653979239\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{welsh}'' language (\emph{cymraeg}) come from the \xfile{welsh.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{welsh}~>> (gallois, \emph{cymraeg}) proviennent du fichier \xfile{welsh.dtx} +% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*welsh> +\ProvidesFile{welsh.mld}[1999/12/06]% +%% Welsh titles from welsh.dtx (babel), by Braams, Johannes~L. +\def\ptctitle{Cynnwys}% +\def\plftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% +\def\plttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% +\def\mtctitle{Cynnwys}% +\def\mlftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% +\def\mlttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% +\def\stctitle{Cynnwys}% +\def\slftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% +\def\slttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% +%</welsh> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Xalx'' language: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~xalx~>>: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% Xalx (Khalkha) is the name of the Mongolian nationality residing in Mongolia proper. +% +% Their dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with +% Cyrillic letters. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% Xalx (Khalkha) est le nom de la nationalité Mongole qui +% vit en Mongolie proprement dite. +% Son dialecte forme la base du Mongol écrit en lettres cyrilliques. +% Voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*xalx> +\ProvidesFile{xalx.mld}[2005/11/16]% +%% Mongol (xalx) titles +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +%</xalx> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Xalx2'' language: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~xalx2~>>: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% This is a variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx2}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% C'est une variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*xalx2> +\ProvidesFile{xalx2.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Mongol (xalx2) titles +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +%</xalx2> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Xalx3'' language: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~xalx3~>>: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\xalx} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx3}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% This is an other variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx3}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% C'est une autre variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*xalx3> +\ProvidesFile{xalx3.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Mongol (xalx3) titles +\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +%</xalx3> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \cleardoublepage +% ^^A \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin} +% \let\NC\relax +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \part{Complements}\label{p+complements} +% \or\relax +% \part{Compléments}\label{p+complements} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \parttoc +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty} +% +% ^^A \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \backrefenglish +% ^^A \or\relax +% ^^A \backreffrench +% ^^A \fi +% +% \nocite* +% \def\noopsort#1{\relax} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \FTRfalse +% \bibliographystyle{en-mtc} +% \begin{raggedright} +% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS +% \let\name\oname +% \let\iname\oiname +% \let\inameA\oinameA +% \let\inameB\oinameB +% \let\xname\oxname +% \let\vname\ovname +% \bibliography{minitoc} +% +% \end{raggedright} +% \or\relax +% \FTRtrue +% \bibliographystyle{fr-mtc} +% \begin{raggedright} +% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS +% \let\name\oname +% \let\iname\oiname +% \let\inameA\oinameA +% \let\inameB\oinameB +% \let\xname\oxname +% \let\vname\ovname +% \bibliography{minitoc-fr} +% +% \end{raggedright} +% \fi +% \adjustmtc +% ^^A NEW HISTORY BEGIN +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter*{Changes history\markboth{Changes history}{Changes history}}\label{c+history} +% \markboth{Changes history}{Changes history} +% \mtcaddchapter[Changes history] +% \or\relax +% \chapter*{Historique des modifications\markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications}}\label{c+history} +% \markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications} +% \mtcaddchapter[Historique des modifications] +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \bgroup +% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}} +% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet} +% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet} +% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered} +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% % +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{00} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1990/10/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Original version, by \xname{Nigel}{Ward}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1991/11/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Revised to reuse \com{chapter}, \com{section}, +% \com{subsection} commands transparently, generate toc-file-name automatically, +% assorted other cleanup (by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{01} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item New design, to avoid allocating a newwrite, or file descriptor, +% for each chapter (a deadly sin!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}). +% \item Added \com{chapterend} to terminate the scope of a minitoc. +% (\emph{If you forgot putting} \com{chapterend} at the end +% of \emph{each} chapter, an entry for the next chapter +% will appear in each minitoc.) (Thanks to \xname{Yufan}{Hu}). +% \item Replaced the \env{minipage} environment by a \env{verse} +% environment, to allow a minitoc being split across pages. +% \item All the layout of the minitoc is in the +% command, so if someboby wants +% to redefine that layout, he has just to rewrite it (and only it). +% \item You can inhibit the minitoc for the next chapter +% by preceding it with \ucom{minitocno}. (\ucom{minitocyes} +% is useless for the user, because it is implicit \emph{after} +% the \com{chapter*} pseudo-chapters). +% \item Problems: you \emph{must} have \com{chapterend} to terminate each +% chapter with a minitoc. How about avoiding this constraint? +% \item The depth of the minitoc is user-adjustable with +% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similar to \dcnt{tocdepth} for the table of contents). +% \item At least three passes (3) of \LaTeX{} are necessary to +% get correct minitocs (the first pass creates the +% \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X} files, the second uses them (but they may +% contain wrong page numbers) and recreates them, +% the third should be ok). +% \item Works with \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} and floating bodies. +% Works with two columns (but the minitoc is composed in +% one column; how to make it to spread over the two columns?). +% \item Some mods added to work with \pack{xr} (external +% references). \upack{xr} version~5 is much more tolerant. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{02} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added compatibility with \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (the package +% \pack{hangcaption} (if present) must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package). +% \emph{Beware} to options modifying \com{@caption}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version 3 not released (buggy). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{04} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \ucom{if@realch} to avoid contents lines from pseudo-chapters to go into the toc. +% \item The package \pack{mtcoff} allows you to use a \LaTeX\ document +% with minitoc commands and to make them transparent: just replace the \upack{minitoc} package by +% \pack{mtcoff}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{05} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a selection mechanism to not write spurious things in the minitocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{06} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed problems about chapters in the toc, removed obsolete \com{caption} stuff +% (filters are much better) added compatibility with \pack{toch} +% (\pack{toch} makes a table of chapters; +% if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}; in fact, it is the ancestor of +% the \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} package). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{07} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item (\emph{major differences}) Completely rewritten, using tricks from \pack{xr} (the version~5, by +% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). The info for minitocs is directly stolen from the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \com{chapterend} and \ucom{minitocno} are suppressed, \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} +% and \com{faketableofcontents} added. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{08} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Spacing adjustements. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{09} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added mods for MS-DOS (search for MS-DOS, uncomment; search for UNIX, comment out). MS-DOS allows +% only 3 characters for extensions in file names (what a pity!). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{10} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Works now with appendices. Detects now the obsolete versions of \xfile{latex.tex} +% (\com{@inputcheck} or \com{reset@font} not defined). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{11} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcSfont}, font for section entries, \com{mtcSSfont} for subsection entries, +% \com{mtcSSSfont} for subsubsection entries, \com{mtcPfont} for paragraph entries, +% \com{mtcSPfont} for subparagraph entries. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{12} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use \com{kern} in place of \com{vspace*}, and added penalties (\com{nopagebreak}) +% to avoid a page break just before last \com{mtc@rule}. +% \item Also added a \env{samepage} environnement. +% \item Removed old commented out lines from previous versions. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{13} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{minilof} and \com{minilot} stuff. For MS-DOS, uncomment the definition of \com{SHORTEXT}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{14} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected space under \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} and added a \com{raggedright} +% setting to avoid ``underfull'' warnings. +% \item Corrected some spacing problems (avoiding~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s). +% \com{mtifont} is changed from \ucom{normalsize\bs bf} to \ucom{large\bs bf}. +% \item Some modifications suggested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (thanks): +% \ucom{@newread} becomes \com{newread}, not outer version of \com{newread}; +% \com{empty} replaced by \com{relax} in the spare definition of \com{reset@font}. +% \item Removed the setting of \com{clubpenalty} and \com{widowpenalty} +% to \texttt{10\,000} (done by \com{samepage}), and \com{noindent}. +% \item Simplified processing of optional argument in \com{minitoc}, +% \com{minilof} and \com{minilot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{15} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, \com{secttoc}, +% \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, with some commands and parameters parallel to those +% for mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, +% with some commands and parameters parallel to those for mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{16} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Bug fixes (typos). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{17} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item `\texttt{n}' (null) synonym of `\texttt{e}' (empty) in the optional argument of \com{minitoc}, +% \com{dominitoc}, and siblings. +% \item Compatibility with ``\LaTeXe''. Thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (who found the problem) and +% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (who gave the hints to solve). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{18} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Make \upack{minitoc} really compatible with \LaTeXe. +% \item Introduce the language files as options. Many thanks to \xname{Michel}{Goossens} +% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) who was inspired by the code of the \pack{babel} package +% (by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{19} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added stuff for numbering of chapters (parts, sections) not starting at 1. \com{firstchapteris} etc. +% commands added. +% \item \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule} etc. commands added. +% \item Corrected a bug in \com{c@mti}. +% \item Corrected \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}). +% \item Corrected appendix in articles. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{20} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected spacing before and after minitocs and siblings. +% \item Added the \com{mtcpagenumbers} and \com{nomtcpagenumbers} commands +% (and siblings) to make minitocs with/without page numbers. Default: with page numbers. +% \item Corrected (difficult bug) appendix in articles. +% \item Corrected vertical spacing. +% \item Corrected a problem with chapters numbered with uppercase roman numbers. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{21} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc} and \xfile{minitoc.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{22} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/10/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{23} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a missing line in \com{sectlof}. +% \item Works with document classes resetting chapter (or section) number at each part +% (thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}). +% \item Added the notion of ``absolute numbering'' for the mini-tables. +% \item Removed stuff for \com{firstchapteris} and co. These commands are obsolete. +% \item Removed appendix stuff. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{24} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The \com{protect} commands have been removed from +% the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} and \suffix{.lot} files, so some internal macros have been +% corrected to be compatible with the \LaTeXe\ release of December 1994. Thanks to +% \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} who did the work. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{25} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} and added \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} on a suggestion from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{26} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Language specific files are now named \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} (replacing names of the form +% \texttt{mtc}\emph{language}\suffix{.sty}) because they are not packages and it makes shorter names. +% \item Added breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower and upper sorbian; renamed +% ``esperanto'' by ``esperant'' like in the \pack{babel} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{27} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections for starred sectionning commands. +% \item \xfile{english.mld} loaded as default language. +% \item Added \xfile{vietnam.mld} and \xfile{arab.mld}. +% \item Renamed \pack{minitocoff} into \pack{mtcoff} to keep the name short. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{28} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1997/10/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the afrikaan(s), brazil, and ethiopia(n) languages. +% \item Added autoconfiguration of extensions. +% \item Added the \opt{shortext} package option. +% \item Added \emph{coffee} stuff. +% \item Added \com{addstarred} stuff (for starred chapter stuff). +% \item Fixed bug in parttocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1998/06/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item A typo corrected by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}: +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% should probably be +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% (a backslash was missing after \com{let}). Thanks to him. +% \item Added the bahasa language. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1998/12/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{29} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the bicig, buryat, mongol and russianc languages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/06/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the armenian language (from \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} package options (default: \optd{dotted}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb, and welsh languages. +% \item Corrected a bug in \com{sltname} definition (\texttt{mlt} should be \texttt{slt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{31} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package, thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% who has also simplified some code and fixed the infamous \com{chapter*} bug. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{32} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/08/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added very (too) numerous new commands for the mini-table features: +% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK +% \com{afterparttoc},\ABK \com{afterpartlof},\ABK \com{afterpartlot},\ABK +% \com{thispageparttocstyle},\goodbreak \com{thispagepartlofstyle},\ABK and \com{thispagepartlotstyle}. +% \item Documentation improved by \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}. +% \item \com{nomtcrule} corrected. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{33} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added new adjustment commands: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, +% and \com{mtcaddpart}. +% These commands add stuff in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files for the +% \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} and \com{part*}) problem. From a suggestion by +% \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a feature in \com{mtcaddchapter} and~co. with a blank optional argument. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{34} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added\imess{I0046} in the documentation a section for use with the \pack{tocbibind} package. +% \item Added \suffix{.mld} files for alternate names of languages: so, \xfile{american.mld} just loads +% \xfile{english.mld}, which contains the real definitions. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{35} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2001/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added macros to test if a file is ``empty'' (i.e.,~empty, blank or +% inexistent) or ``non empty'' (i.e.,~useful). I used some code from \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}. +% \item Added the \optd{checkfiles}/\opt{nocheckfiles} package options. +% \item Replaced \ucom{The@chapter} by \com{The@mtc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/02/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld}, and +% \xfile{samin.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcselectlanguage}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed the \lopt{estonian} package option (missing). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the interlingua language. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{36} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected an interaction with \com{tableofcontents} which creates a \com{chapter*} or +% a \com{section*}, perturbing \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} counters (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a spacing problem with empty titles (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \item Workaround for the \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*} problem. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed test for empty files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \lopt{bangla} language. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Reduced depth of \com{mtc@strutbox}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~\#37 dropped. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{38} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{pt} becomes \ucom{@pt} and \texttt{0pt} becomes \ucom{z@}. +% \item \ucom{hrule} and \ucom{vrule} replaced by \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX). +% \item Added \com{mtc@zrule} for zero-dims rules. +% \item Added the frenchb language (synonym of french). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changed the test for empty titles. +% \item Added the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} package options. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are applied to +% \com{parttoc} (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Package options \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} removed and +% replaced by the \opt{insection} package option (like \opt{flsectionb}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected numbering of SLF, SLT. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \lopt{frenchle} and \lopt{frenchpro} language options (synonyms of \lopt{french}). +% \item Corrected secttocs, at least. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected some vertical spacings and struts +% (I added some mods by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, many thanks to him.). +% A lot of cleaning remains to do, but the release seems to be needed now. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{39} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/04/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Modern font commands for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class. +% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} and \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{@fileswfalse} and \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% for the \pack{notoccite} package (requested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); added the +% \opt{notoccite} package option (loads the \pack{notoccite} package). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added language options and \suffix{.mld} files for dialects: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), \lopt{acadian}, +% \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}). +% \item Added comments in \suffix{.mld} files using special fonts. +% \item Documentation: added a paragraph about making a TOC for +% appendices, eventually not listed in the main TOC. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation; corrections about rules. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{40} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the japanese and castillan languages. +% \item Removed the test on the presence of the \pack{multicol} package in +% \xfile{minitoc.tex}, because \pack{multicol} is a required package. +% \item Added a figure in \xfile{minitoc.tex} about the need of three compilations. +% \item Added some infos in \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Added\imess{I0042} a paragraph about a problem with the \pack{appendix} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} and \xfile{minitoc.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \optd{hints} package option. This option is still experimental; your advice is welcome. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (french documentation in PDF format). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{41} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in documentation. +% \item Message added if some sectionning commands are not available. +% \item Replaced \ucom{typeout} commands in \upack{minitoc} +% by the \com{PackageInfo} or \com{PackageWarning} commands; with the line number when useful +% (\com{@gobble} if no line number). Hence, the package is less verbose +% (\com{PackageInfo} writes only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, not on the terminal). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands, +% with a much simpler syntax. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \AmS\ classes: \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are incompatible with +% \upack{minitoc}, \class{amsbook} needs precautions. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item Added a hint for recommending the \opt{insection} package option. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about the presence of \com{dominitoc} and co. +% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. +% \item Improved documentation about hints. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about using short extensions with more that 99~parts or 99~chapters or 99~sections. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} becomes \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added many new language files: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, +% \xfile{chinese2.mld}, \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, +% \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, +% \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetrules}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, +% \com{nomlfrule}, \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, +% \com{nopltrule}, \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, +% \com{nosltrule}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, and \xfile{russian2o.mld} +% as new language files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added tests on the \uenv{mtchideinmain*}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~42 not released. +% \item Replaced ``language'' by ``langue'' in the french documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed a minor typo. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Upgraded \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}, forgotten to be inserted in v41. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{43} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~43: consolidation of v40, v41 and v42. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed a big bug in \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{mtcoff.sty} about \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed the \ucom{mtcset}\texttt{.{}.{}.}\ macros. +% \item Moved history to the end of package code. +% \item Added the \xfile{INSTALL} file and a chapter about installation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed a typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}). +% \item Completed the hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{minitoc} and \com{tableofcontents}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added comments about fonts. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (upper bulgarian). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} after the \texttt{\bs\bs} after the top rule of each part level mini-table. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the arguments of \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed \com{markboth} for minitocs (\ldots) and secttocs (\ldots). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{spanish2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint for the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the \env{stc@verse} environment. +% \item Added \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed \xfile{portuges.mld} as \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in \com{mtcskip}. +% \item First version in \suffix{.dtx} format. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, and stuff; unused. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a typo in \com{@dosectlot}. +% \item Added \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Print the documentation with ``\optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{many classes}}'' to have all marginal notes on left. +% Added the (extended to 54 floats) code of \pack{morefloats} (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) to allow more marginpars +% and floats. +% \item Added \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the index correctly. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed rules in parttocs, partlofs and partlots. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed chapter-level entries in parttocs, when page numbers must be removed. +% \item Added a hint about the \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about attempts to insert empty mini-tables. +% \item Added a hint about the use of obsolete commands. +% \item The mini-lists of figures or tables should not be printed empty even if \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. +% \item Added \com{mtcsetdepth}. +% \item The \optd{hints} option is the default and no more considered as experimental. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added an error message in \com{mtcsetdepth} if the counter is not available. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{portuges.mld}, which loads \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added three variants for the malayalam language: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}, +% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}, and \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added method for bilingual documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format correctly the index in french. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changed ``Liste des Tables'' by ``Liste des Tableaux'' in \xfile{french.mld}, and in the french documentation, +% to stick to the choices of the \pack{babel} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is now generated by \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added ``OUI'', ``NON'', ``oui'', ``non'', ``O'', and ``o'' as true/false keywords. +% \item Compacted the code about detection of short/long extensions. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added ``VRAI'', ``FAUX'', ``vrai'', ``faux'', ``V'', and ``v'' as true/false keywords. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correctly set the \com{ifFTR} flag to have the names of months in the right language in the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Set the flag \com{mtcoffwarn@true} in \pack{mtcoff} if a command \ucom{mtcadd...} is found. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{castillian.mld}. +% \item Renamed \xfile{portugues.mld} as \xfile{portuguese.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld}, and \xfile{USenglish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppressed ``General:'' in the changes history. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Replaced some \com{PackageWarning} commands by \com{PackageInfo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Restoring the correspondence of each language option with a \suffix{.mld} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removing unused some flags \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} and \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}. +% \item Added the \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, and \com{decrementstc} commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Improved some messages in \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Added a test on the version of the \pack{placeins} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a note about \com{FloatBarrier}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a note about an alignment problem in the minitocs. Updated \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Made two versions of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments, +% depending on the presence of the corresponding depth counter. +% \item The \class{memoir} class is incompatible if too recent. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a comment about the position of the \ucom{do.{}.{}.} preparation commands. +% \item Corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{guarani.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}. +% \item Added an optional argument to \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, and \com{adjuststc}. +% \item Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcloadmlo} to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a test to forbid direct calls of \com{mtcloadmlo} by the user. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld}, and \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \item Added a note about the \tool{rubber} tool. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the glossary. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed the page numbers in the glossary. Done in the \texttt{*mk} scripts. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{44} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changes history (glossary) typeset in \texttt{RaggedRight}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld}, and \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item New method for history: embedded lists on 3~levels. +% \item Removed \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Cleaned the \texttt{*mk} scripts. +% \item Added the \optd{listfiles} package option. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected typos. +% \item Added the name of the \suffix{.maf} file in the message of the \optd{listfiles} package option. +% \item Improved the cleaning in the \texttt{*mk} scripts, using a~\suffix{.maf} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Load the patch for the \class{memoir} class only if necessary; do not load it if \class{memoir} +% is dated after 2005/09/25. +% \item Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred +% sectionning commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \opt{nolistfiles} package option. +% \item Added a hint about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages +% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Fixed some marginal notes in the commented code. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \item Use the \tool{xargs} Unix command in the \texttt{*mk} scripts to remove the auxiliary files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added a short intro to the ``Frequently Asked Questions'' chapter and to \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Begin adding the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the french \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Adding \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} in \xfile{minitoc.l}. +% \item Adding a note about the need of running \scrp{imk} before \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir}. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class. +% \item Added \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont}, +% \com{slfSfont}, and \com{sltSfont} for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed a bug about fonts for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables. +% \item Added \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld}, and +% \xfile{khalkha.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Added testing via internal \emph{quarks} commands in \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Changed ``table'' into ``tableau'' in the french doc, where necessary. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Fixed typos in the bibliography. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Avoid some warnings ``Token not allowed'' from \texttt{pdftex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Reordering a long sequence of citations. +% \item Added \og{} {\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} in the mailing URLs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Correcting an hyperlink in the bibliography (for the \pack{xr} package). +% \item Attempting to avoid broken URLs, using \env{quote}, footnotes and \com{par}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \item Corrections of layout (some headers, a table). +% \item In the warning message of the hint about a number of mini-tables greater than~99 (if short extensions), +% give the effective number. +% \item Reduce the width of some info, warning or error messages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections of layout (some headers). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections of french quotes. +% \item Added some PDF options. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Corrected an URL to the \AmS\ in the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Made some messages shorter (mainly by removing stars). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction of typos. +% \item Added some labels. +% \item Added a chapter with the (explained) messages. Not yet sorted. +% \item The documentation needs 4~\LaTeX\ runs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Made some messages shorter. +% \item Corrections in the list of messages. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the placement of floats on pages of floats: to the top. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation (thanks to \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Added \oexam{addsec.tex} +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the flag \com{ifundottedmtc}. +% \item Correction to make \oexam{addsec.tex} work. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added ``\texttt{*}'' as keyword for the first argument of \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and +% \com{mtcsetrules} (asked by \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Removed ``\com{MessageBreak}'' from the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Corrected the bibliography entry about \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Used the \pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage} in the documentation to fix a float positionning problem. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Fixing a float positionning problem. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added the bahasam language. +% \item Added the albanian language. +% \item Added the hebrew2 language. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the documentation for the albanian, bahasa, bahasam, and hebrew2 languages. +% \item Updated \xfile{french.mld} (removing abusive uppercase letters). +% \item Corrected the \xfile{italian.mld} file. Added the italian2 language. +% \item Added the australian and newzealand languages (english). +% \item Renamed the bahasa language as bahasai; bahasa is synonym of bahasai. +% \item Added the malay and meyalu languages, synonyms of bahasam. +% \item Added the indon and indonesian languages, synonyms of bahasai. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the acknowledgements. +% \item Added references to the new bibliographic entries. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed an instability in page breaks in the documentation of \xfile{japanese3.mld}. +% \item Added comments in some \suffix{.mld} files. +% \item Added \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in \com{mtcaddsection}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Limitation of the initial depth of displayed bookmarks. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added some comments in point~34 of the FAQ (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about the initialization of fonts. +% \item Added \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Load some packages before \pack{hyperref}. +% \item Added \xfile{spanish4.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the table about default titles. +% \item Corrected the keywords for \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item Added \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated documentation for \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter +% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added a note in documentation of \xfile{serbian.mld} and \xfile{serbianc.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (for Omega). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Simplifications in the ``Messages'' chapter. +% \item Corrections in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added the ``Postface'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the ``Postface'' chapter. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added package \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} for the ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' entry in the bibliography. +% Its author's first name needs a double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; je l'ai aussi +% utilisé pour composer d'autres mots vietnamiens. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} and \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in \xfile{russianb.mld} and \xfile{spanish.mld}. +% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. +% \item Place \com{mtcfixglossary} before \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the acknowlegments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld}, and \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed languages \texttt{u8hangul} and \texttt{u8hanja} into \xmldo{hangul-u8} and \xmldo{hanja-u8}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about repeated preparation commands. +% \item Moved up the declaration of some flags relative to the \optd{hints} option. +% \item Added \com{mtcprepare}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} to class~6. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Corrected the position of tables in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Corrected \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Hints about the \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} class and the \pack{alphanum} package, +% incompatible with \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use bibliographic styles with an~\texttt{URL} field, built with the help of \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, with their +% \suffix{.mlo} files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, with their +% \suffix{.mlo} files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \pack{mtcmess} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The messages are now numbered. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added FAQ~37 about \suffix{.mld} files and \pack{babel}. +% \item Added \xfile{french1.mld} and \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{english1.mld} and \xfile{english2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{45} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression of the PostScript versions of the documentation. +% \item Added \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld}, and \xfile{xalx3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{swedish2.mld}. +% \item The \opt{insection} package option loads also the \pack{flafter} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \uxgrf{lamed.eps} and \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} as images for the \emph{Lamed} logo (built from \uxfile{lamed.tex}). +% \item Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use \pack{sectsty} to better format section titles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \com{ifmtcsecondpart} to check if the document has exactly 2~parts. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item In the \opt{insection} package option, load the \pack{flafter} package \emph{before} the +% \pack{placeins} package. +% \item Added a figure about the float barriers. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added notes in FAQ~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package. +% \item Added comments about the \opt{insection} option. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Begin correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added notes in \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package. +% \item End correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. +% \item Analogous corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added notes about the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \item Added \oexam{hide1.tex} and \oexam{hide2.tex}. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hide.tex} to \oexam{hide1.tex}. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Use \com{MakeUpperCase} in \com{markboth} for page styles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added a hint about the \pack{captcont} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld}, and \xfile{uighur3.mld} (as synonyms for the bicig variants). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added description of \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} in the jargon. +% \item Added a comment about the \scrp{imk} script in \xfile{INSTALL} and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \item Added an entry about ``package'' in the jargon. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file. +% \item Added FAQ 44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added the \oexam{gaps.tex} example file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Spacing correction in \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{46} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Comment about the \pack{thailatex} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Generate some example files with \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item Added chapter ``Example files''. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed chapter ``Example files'' as ``Examples of documents''. +% \item Use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} in some of the examples of documents. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the examples of documents. +% \item Added the \oexam{second.tex} example file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{amem.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} and \oexam{mem1.tex} example files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} and \oexam{scr.tex} example files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{subf.tex} example file. +% \item Corrections about the depth of minilofs, minilots and siblings. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{tsfc.tex} and \oexam{tbi.tex} example files. +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections of typos. +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Added the \oexam{2c.tex} and \exam{mtc-bo.tex} example files. +% \item Correction in \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in minilots and minilofs (and siblings) about depth. +% \item Added the \oexam{hop.tex} and \oexam{cri.tex} example files. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} and \oexam{mu.tex} example files. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item The not released versions are flagged by~\textbf{\textreferencemark} in place of~\ensuremath{\star}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The ``About this document'' section becomes a starred first chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{hir.tex} and \oexam{hia.tex} example files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Corrections in \oexam{add.tex} and \oexam{addsec.tex} for the index. +% \item Added the \scrp{xmk} script to typeset the examples into PDF documents. +% \item Updated the scripts to treat the examples. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Do not forget \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} in the list of files. +% \item In the scripts, the backup directory (\xfile{OLD}) is now \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}. +% \item In the scripts, the repartition directories (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) are +% now \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{47} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} (from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system~\cite{arabi}). +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed \com{l@xsection}. +% \item Fixed some spacings in mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a \verb|\kernafter...| vertical kern between each minitable and its bottom rule. +% \item Added point~45 of the FAQ. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor correction in warning message \texttt{F0008}. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \item Shortened the result of some example documents by using the \class{report} class in place of the +% \class{book} class (hence using one side printing). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{48} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item No preamble in \oexam{add.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the TOC formatting. +% \item Increasing \com{textwidth}. +% \item Correction of the preamble problem in \oexam{add.bib} and all generated files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Remove comments about spurious lines in preamble of generated files. +% \item Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \item Corrected the \com{name} macro (for the documentation). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Correction (conversion) in \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added error \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} if \xfile{english.mld} is not found to set the default titles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Modified the \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} to have family names of authors and editors in small caps and years in +% old style digits. Titles are in emphasis. The \xfile{frplain1.bst} style is also updated. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Renamed \oexam{add.bib} to \exam{mtc-add.bib}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{add.tex} to \exam{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{addsec.tex} to \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{2c.tex} to \exam{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item The \optd{listfiles} package option is now active by default. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed \oexam{app-mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{apx.tex} to \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{bo.tex} to \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{ch0.tex} to \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{cri.tex} to \exam{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{fo1.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{fo2.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{gaps.tex} to \exam{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hia.tex} to \exam{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hir.tex} to \exam{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hide1.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hide2.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hop.tex} to \exam{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{livre.tex} to \exam{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mem1.tex} to \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mini-art.tex} to \exam{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} to \exam{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mu.tex} to \exam{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{scr.tex} to \exam{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{second.tex} to \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{subf.tex} to \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{tbi.tex} to \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{tlc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{tsfc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography (added the Pentaglot). +% \item Corrected the format of two tables about NFSS. +% \item Example documents in alphabetical order in their chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a figure about systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-syn.tex} example document file. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{49} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Slightly modified the layout of the list of files (``Installation'' chapter). +% \item Simplifications in the scripts. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added point~46 in the FAQ and example file \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Corrections in the bibliography and the bibliographic styles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added ``\textbf{+}'' and ``\texttt{-}'' as synonyms for ``\texttt{on}'' and ``\texttt{off}'', respectively. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Fixed typos. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added a table of some encodings. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppressed the ``Summary'' entry in the summary, but added it in the Table of Contents. +% \item Improving some tables. +% \item Added the \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo} files. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Corrections in formatting a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Combine four figures in one (with sub-figures). +% \item Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Completed the list of the standard classes. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. +% \item Added\imess{E0036} notes about the mandatory presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The validation of the language options writes only informative messages in the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and, if necessary, gives only one warning message. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{50} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed old examples of documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex}, +% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex}, and \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS structure for \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Added an item about the \index{TDS}TDS in the jargon. +% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the warning message \texttt{W0094} with the list of the missing minitoc languages files (\suffix{.mld} +% and \suffix{.mlo}). +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \item Changed the names of the scratch directories in some scripts. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of +% the package) to the distribution. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{51} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the index: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, options, +% language options. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the index: names. +% \item Updated some \suffix{.mld} files with names of the authors of titles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Miscellaneous corrections. +% \item The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin. +% \item Added a \com{ProvidesFile} command to the example files. +% \item Indexing the environments (not perfect). +% \item Indexing the files. +% \item Renamed the file ``\texttt{catalog}'' into ``\xfile{CATALOG}''. +% \item Indexing the counters and depth counters. +% \item The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{52} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction of index ordering. +% \item Default option in boldface in the index. +% \item Adding some informations about authors for language specific titles. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added fake sections in the ``Examples of documents'' chapter. +% \item Removed the preparation of the documentation in PostScript format. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format into PostScript format. +% \item Removed \xfile{duplex2v.pro}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexing the referenced commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the name \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (first name before last name, the english way). +% \item Corrected some other names. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% \item Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new cyrillic encodings T2 and X2 in \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item Trying to use a recent version of the \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} package (2003/11/04, 4.01) to allow +% sorting, but still clashes with \pack{hyperref}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Balancing the columns in the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction of the indexing of the environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the index layout. +% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} which loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexing the names of authors. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the acknowledgements. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{53} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item Corrected \com{kernafterminitoc} and siblings. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a header to the index, to explain notations. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Changed the style of page and line numbers in the index. +% \item Updated \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Dangerous bend symbols are now in the right margin. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improved the presentation of example files. +% \item Using the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to sort the sequences of citations. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in table~\vref{t+TDS}. +% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} into \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use the \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} option of the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to compress the +% sequences of citations; the \pack{hypernat} package must also be loaded (after \pack{natbib} and +% \pack{hyperref}). +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added changing the title of the parttoc for appendices in \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{54} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features. +% \item Indexing the features. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}. +% \item Some mini-tables are set on two columns in the manual. +% \item Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin. +% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added internal hyperlinks for messages. +% \item Load the \pack{hypcap} package for hyperlinks in the documentation. +% ^^A \item Modification of \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, and \scrp{pmk} to remove \verb*|\ | from the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table. +% \item Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file. +% \item Added flagging of macros in example files. +% \item The 2007 section in the ``Postface'' chapter was garbled. +% \item More internal links in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added a clickable table of all messages. +% \item Improved column breaks in the index. +% \item Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% \item Grouped \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} pairs in tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{55} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} package (incompatible). +% \item Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions. +% \item Improve page breaks in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changed the color of hyperlinks. +% \item Revised the format of the headers. +% \item Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{56} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/07/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Page headers modified in documentation. +% \item Added stuff (files) for figures (maps) for many language areas. +% \item Removed the \suffix{.eps} files. +% \item Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}. +% \item Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Many minor typo fixes. +% \item Darker colors for hyperlinks. +% \item Updated and corrected the bibliography. +% \item Corrected a typo in the \env{ptc@verse} environment (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Corrections of typos in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments +% (thanks to \name{Andrew}{Bowden}). +% \item Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid +% erasing the (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file). +% \item Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% \item The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part. +% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package. +% \item Complete indexing of the messages. +% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to increase the width of the pages of the bibliography. +% \item Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% \item Updated \xfile{czech.mld}. +% \item Removed \ucom{l@xsection}. +% \item Graphic files are indexed separately. +% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \item Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy. +% \item Updated \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld},\ABK and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% \item Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Suppressed parasite entries from the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{57} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in examples of documents. +% \item Added \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% \item Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% \item Added maps of Manchuria. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Better captions for maps. +% Added maps for Italy, Karnataka, Germany, Mongols and China. +% \item Added \xfile{occitan2.mld} and \xfile{mexican.mld}. +% \item Added a map of czech dialects. +% \item Added maps of danish dialects. +% \item Added a map of the dutch language. +% \item Added a map of french dialects. +% \item Added a map of galician dialects. +% \item Added maps of german dialects. +% \item Added maps of hindi dialects. +% \item Added maps of portugese dialects. +% \item Added a map of the turkish language. +% \item Added a map of the vietnamese language. +% \item Added a map of the armenian diaspora. +% \item Added a map of the sami dialects. +% \item Added a map of the nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia. +% \item Added a map of countries where spanish is an official language. +% \item Added a map of the sorbian area. +% \item Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon. +% \item Added a map of the minorities in Poland. +% \item Added a map of the bengali diaspora. +% \item Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% \item Added maps of the basque dialects. +% \item Added maps of the latvian dialects. +% \item Added a map for the swahili language. +% \item Added the turkish alphabet. +% \item The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% \item Added maps of the languages in Europe. +% \item Added maps of Kosovo. +% \item Added a map of the languages in Africa. +% \item Corrected an error of message number. +% \item Added maps for Russia. +% \item Added a map of the districts of Slovakia. +% \item Added maps about Islam. +% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters. +% \item Added a figure about chinese characters usage in the world. +% \item Added a figure about chinese dialects. +% \item Added maps about writing systems. +% \item Added a map of the regions where Finnish is spoken. +% \item Shortened the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \item Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16. +% \item Files \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} and \uxfile{lamed.tex} replaced by \xgrf{lamed3.png}. +% \item Added maps of the indigenous languages of México. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{58} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} into \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. +% \item Added a simplified linguistic map of Europe. +% \item Added a map of polish dialects. +% \item Added a figure about the russian alphabet. +% \item Added a map about the russian alphabet. +% \item Added a figure about the serbian alphabets. +% \item Added a map of the provinces of Vietnam. +% \item Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references. +% \item Added a map of albanian dialects. +% \item Added a map of Norway. +% \item Added flags for many countries. Added a light gray frame around the flags. +% \item Added a figure about lusophonia. +% \item Added a figure about germanophonia. +% \item Added a figure about hispanophonia. +% \item Added a figure about italophonia. +% \item Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult. +% \item Added figures about francophones countries. +% \item Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries. +% \item Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries. +% \item Added a figure about russian-speaking countries. +% \item Added a figure about english-speaking countries. +% \item Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}. +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}. +% \item Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \item Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries. +% \item Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~corrupted PDF files. +% +% \item \textbf{60} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/07/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor correction in figure. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% \item Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file +% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but +% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} +% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% \item Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item \textbf{61} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2015/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert passed away in 2009. So this package +% is now looking for a maintainer. +% \item Reduce size of documentation, by eliminating flags and other +% images, from 25+mb to less than 2mb. +% \item Remove the \texttt{CATALOG} file, as it was redundant and stale. +% \item Use \url{mirror.ctan.org} for CTAN references. +% \item Done by Nils Ole Tippenhauer (\verb|nils_tippenhauer| at +% \verb|sutd.edu.sg|) and Karl Berry (\verb|karl| at +% \verb|freefriends.org|). They are not prospective future maintainers. +% \item No functional changes. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \end{itemize} +% \end{RaggedRight} +% \egroup +% ^^A MAJ-E +% \or\relax +% ^^A FRENCH +% \bgroup +% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}} +% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet} +% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet} +% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered} +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% % +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{00} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1990/10/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version originale, par \xname{Nigel}{Ward}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1991/11/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Révision pour réutiliser de manière transparente les commandes +% \com{chapter}, \com{section}, \com{subsection}, et engendrer automatiquement +% le nom du fichier minitoc, avec en plus d'autres nettoyages (par \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{01} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nouvelle conception, pour éviter d'allouer un newwrite, ou descripteur de fichier, pour chaque chapitre +% (un péché mortel!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}). +% \item Ajout de \com{chapterend} pour terminer la portée d'une minitoc. (\emph{Si vous oubliez de +% mettre} \com{chapterend} à~la fin de \emph{chaque} chapitre, une entrée pour le chapitre suivant +% apparaîtra dans chaque minitoc.) (Merci à~\xname{Yufan}{Hu}). +% \item Remplacement de l'environnement \env{minipage} par un environnement \env{verse}, pour qu'une +% minitoc puisse se répartir sur plusieurs pages. +% \item Toute la mise en page de la minitoc est dans la commande, donc si quelqu'un souhaite redéfinir cette +% mise en page, il a juste à~la réécrire (et seulement elle). +% \item Vous pouvez inhiber la minitoc pour le chapitre suivant en le faisant précéder par \ucom{minitocno}. +% (\ucom{minitocyes} est sans objet pour l'utilisateur: elle est implicite \emph{après} +% les pseudo-chapitres \com{chapter*}). +% \item Problèmes: vous \emph{devez} avoir mis \com{chapterend} pour terminer chaque chapitre ayant une +% minitoc. Comment éviter cette contrainte? +% \item La profondeur de la minitoc est ajustable par l'utilisateur avec le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similaire +% à~\dcnt{tocdepth} pour la table des matières.). +% \item Au moins trois passes~(3) de \LaTeX{} sont nécessaires pour obtenir des minitocs correctes (la première +% passe crée les fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X}, la deuxième les utilise (mais ils peuvent contenir des +% numéros de pages faux) et les recrée, la troisième devrait être bonne). +% \item Fonctionne avec \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} et les éléments flottants. Fonctionne en mode deux +% colonnes (mais la minitoc est composée sur une colonne; comment faire pour qu'elle s'étende sur les deux +% colonnes?). +% \item Ajout de quelques modifications pour fonctionner avec \pack{xr} (références externes). +% \upack{xr} version~5 est bien plus tolérant. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{02} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} (s'il est présent) +% doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}). \emph{Attention} aux options modifiant +% \com{@caption}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~3 non distribuée (erronée). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{04} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \ucom{if@realch} pour éviter que des lignes de contenu provenant de pseudo-chapitres +% aillent dans la table des matières. +% \item Le fichier paquetage \pack{mtcoff} vous permet d'utiliser un document \LaTeX\ contenant des +% commandes minitoc et de les rendre transparentes: il suffit de remplacer le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% par \upack{mtcoff}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{05} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un mécanisme de sélection pour ne pas écrire des choses superflues dans les minitocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{06} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de problèmes sur les chapitres dans la table des matières, retrait de code obsolète pour +% \com{caption} (les filtres sont bien meilleurs), ajout de la compatibilité +% avec \pack{toch} +% (\pack{toch} crée une table des chapitres; si utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}; +% en fait, c'est l'ancêtre du paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{07} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item (\emph{différences majeures}) Réécriture complète, en utilisant des astuces de \pack{xr} +% (la version~5, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). Les informations pour les minitocs sont directement prélevées dans +% le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Suppression de \com{chapterend} et \ucom{minitocno}, ajout de +% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} et \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{08} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajustements d'espacement. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{09} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de modifications pour MS-DOS (rechercher MS-DOS, et décommenter; rechercher UNIX, mettre en commentaire). +% MS-DOS permet seulement 3~caractères pour les suffixes dans les noms de fichiers (pitoyable\ldots). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{10} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fonctionne avec les appendices. Détecte maintenant les versions obsolètes de \xfile{latex.tex}: +% (\com{@inputcheck} ou \com{reset@font} non définies). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{11} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcSfont}, fonte pour les entrées de section, \com{mtcSSfont} pour les entrées +% de sous-section, \com{mtcSSSfont} pour les entrées de sous-sous-section, \com{mtcPfont} pour +% les entrées de paragraphe, \com{mtcSPfont} pour les entrées de sous-paragraphe. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{12} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de \com{kern} au lieu de \com{vspace*} et ajout de pénalités +% (\com{nopagebreak}) pour éviter une coupure de page juste avant la dernière \com{mtc@rule}. +% \item Ajout aussi d'un environnement \env{samepage}. +% \item Retrait de vieilles lignes mises en commentaire dans des versions précédentes. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{13} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de code pour \com{minilof} et \com{minilot}. Pour MS-DOS, décommenter la définition +% de \com{SHORTEXT}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{14} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'espacement en dessous d'une \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} et ajout de \com{raggedright} +% pour éviter des avertissements \og{} underfull \fg. +% \item Correction de quelques problèmes d'espacement (en évitant des~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s). +% \com{mtifont} est changée de \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs bf} en \texttt{\bs large\bs bf}. +% \item Quelques modifications suggérées par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (merci): \ucom{@newread} devient +% \com{newread}, une version \emph{not outer} de \com{newread}; \com{empty} remplacée +% par \com{relax} dans la définition par défaut de \com{reset@font}. +% \item Retrait du forçage de \com{clubpenalty} et \com{widowpenalty} à~\texttt{10\,000} (fait +% par \com{samepage}) et \com{noindent}. +% \item Traitement simplifié de l'argument optionnel dans les commandes \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof} +% et \com{minilot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{15} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} pour la classe \class{book}, +% de \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} et \com{sectlot} pour les articles, avec des commandes +% et paramètres en parallèle avec ceux pour les mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{16} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections d'erreurs (typos). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{17} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \og{} \texttt{n} \fg{} (nul) synonyme de \og{} \texttt{e} \fg{} (\emph{empty}, vide) dans l'argument optionnel +% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc}, et analogues. +% \item Compatibilité avec \og{} \LaTeXe \fg. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (qui a trouvé le problème) +% et \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (qui a donné les indications pour le résoudre). +% \item Ajout de la notion de \og{} numérotation absolue\fg{} pour les the mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{18} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Rendu \upack{minitoc} vraiment compatible avec \LaTeXe. +% \item Introduction des fichiers de langue comme options. Grand merci à~\xname{Michel}{Goossens} +% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) qui a été inspiré par le code du paquetage \pack{babel} +% (de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{19} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de code pour numéroter les chapitres (parties, sections) sans commencer à~1. +% Ajout des commandes \com{firstchapteris}, etc. +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule}, etc. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \com{c@mti}. +% \item Correction dans \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}). +% \item Correction de l'appendice dans les articles. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{20} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'espacement avant et après les minitocs et analogues. +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcpagenumbers} et \com{nomtcpagenumbers} (et analogues) pour faire +% des minitocs avec ou sans numéros de pages. Défaut: avec numéros de pages. +% \item Correction du problème (difficile) de l'appendice dans les articles. +% \item Correction de l'espacement vertical. +% \item Correction d'un problème avec des chapitres numérotés avec des chiffres romains majuscules. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{21} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc} et \xfile{minitoc.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{22} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/10/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{23} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une ligne manquante dans \com{sectlof}. +% \item Fonctionne avec les classes de document réinitialisant le numéro de chapitre (ou de section) +% à~chaque partie (merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}). +% \item Retrait du code pour \com{firstchapteris} et compagnie. Ces commandes sont obsolètes. +% \item Retrait du code pour l'appendice. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{24} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les commandes \com{protect} ont été retirées des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} et +% \suffix{.lot}, donc certaines commandes internes on t été corrigées pour être compatibles avec la version +% de \LaTeXe\ de décembre 1994. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} qui a fait le travail. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{25} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} et ajout de \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} sur une suggestion +% de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{26} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les fichiers spécifiques des langues sont maintenant nommés \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (remplaçant les +% noms de la forme \texttt{mtc}\emph{langue}\suffix{.sty}) parce que ne sont pas des paquetages +% et que cela fait des noms plus courts. +% \item Ajout des langues breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower- et upper-sorbian; +% renommage de \og{} esperanto \fg{} en \og{} esperant \fg{} comme dans le paquetage \pack{babel}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{27} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% \item \xfile{english.mld} chargé comme langue par défaut. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{vietnam.mld} et \xfile{arab.mld}. +% \item Renommage de \pack{minitocoff} en \pack{mtcoff} pour que le nom reste court. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{28} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1997/10/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues afrikaan(s), brazil et ethiopia(n). +% \item Ajout de l'autoconfiguration des suffixes. +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}. +% \item Ajout du code \emph{coffee} (pauses café). +% \item Ajout du code de \com{addstarred} (pour ce qui concerne un chapitre étoilé). +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans les parttocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Un typo corrigé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}: +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% devrait probablement être +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% (une contre-oblique manquait après \com{let}). Merci à~lui. +% \item Ajout de la langue bahasa. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1998/12/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{29} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues bicig, buryat, mongol et russianc. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/06/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la langue armenian (d'après \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} (défaut: \optd{dotted}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb et welsh. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans la définition de \com{sltname} (\texttt{mlt} devrait être \texttt{slt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{31} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, merci à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% qui a aussi simplifié certains morceaux de code et corrigé l'infâme erreur sur \com{chapter*}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{32} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/08/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de très (trop) nombreuses nouvelles commandes pour les dispositifs associés aux mini-tables: +% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK \com{afterparttoc},\ABK +% \com{afterpartlof},\goodbreak \com{afterpartlot},\ABK \com{thispageparttocstyle},\ABK +% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}\ABK et \com{thispagepartlotstyle}. +% \item Documentation améliorée par \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}. +% \item Correction de \com{nomtcrule}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{33} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de nouvelles commandes d'ajustement: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection} et +% \com{mtcaddpart}. Ces commandes ajoutent des choses dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} +% et \suffix{.lot} pour le problème de \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} et \com{part*}). +% D'après une suggestion de \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un problème dans \com{mtcaddchapter} et~co. avec un argument optionnel blanc. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{34} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout\imess{I0046} dans la documentation d'une section sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. +% \item Ajout de fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les noms alternatifs de langues: ainsi, \xfile{american.mld} ne fait +% que charger \xfile{english.mld}, qui contient les vraies définitions. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{35} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2001/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de macros pour tester si un fichier est \og{} vide\fg{} (c'est-à-dire vide, blanc ou inexistant) +% ou \og{} non vide \fg{} (c'est-à-dire utile). J'ai utilisé du code de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}. +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}\\opt{nocheckfiles}. +% \item Remplacement de \ucom{The@chapter} par \com{The@mtc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/02/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld} et +% \xfile{samin.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcselectlanguage}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'option de paquetage \lopt{estonian} (manquante). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la langue interlingua. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{36} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une interaction avec \com{tableofcontents} qui crée un \com{chapter*} ou +% une \com{section*}, en perturbant les compteurs \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} (problème signalé par +% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un problème d'espacement avec des titres vides (problème signalé par \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \item Contournement du problème \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction du test sur les fichiers vides. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bangla}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Réduction de la profondeur de \com{mtc@strutbox}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~\#37 sautée. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{38} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{pt} devient \ucom{@pt} et \texttt{0pt} devient \ucom{z@}. +% \item \ucom{hrule} et \ucom{vrule} remplacées par \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX). +% \item Ajout de \com{mtc@zrule} pour les filets de dimensions nulles. +% \item Ajout de la langue frenchb (synonyme de french). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changement du test pour les titres vides. +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont appliquées à~\com{parttoc} +% (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb} retirées et remplacées par l'option +% de paquetage \opt{insection} (comme \opt{flsectionb}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de la numérotation des SLF, SLT. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues frenchle et frenchpro (synonymes de french). +% \item Correction des secttocs, enfin. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de certains espacements verticaux et d'étais (j'ai ajouté quelques modifications +% de \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, grand merci à~lui.). Il reste pas mal de nettoyage à~faire, mais il semble +% nécessaire de publier la distribution maintenant. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{39} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/04/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Commandes de fontes modernes pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}. +% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} et la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{@fileswfalse} et \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} pour le paquetage +% \pack{notoccite} (demandé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); ajout de l'option de paquetage +% \opt{notoccite} (charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des options de langue et des fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les dialectes: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), +% \lopt{acadian}, \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}). +% \item Ajout de commentaires dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} utilisant des fontes spéciales. +% \item Corrections dans la documentation: ajout d'un paragraphe sur comment faire une table des matières pour +% les appendices, éventuellement non listés dans la table des matières principale. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation; corrections sur les filets. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{40} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues japanese et castillan. +% \item Retrait du test sur la présence du paquetage \pack{multicol} dans \xfile{minitoc.tex}, +% puisque \pack{multicol} est un paquetage obligatoire (\emph{required}). +% \item Ajout d'une figure dans \xfile{minitoc.tex} sur la nécessité de trois compilations. +% \item Ajout de quelques informations dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} d'un paragraphe sur un problème avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} et \xfile{minitoc.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}. Cette option est encore expérimentale; votre avis est le bienvenu. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (documentation en français en format PDF). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{41} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Message ajouté si certaines commandes de sectionnement ne sont pas disponibles. +% \item Remplacement des commandes \ucom{typeout} dans \upack{minitoc} par les commandes +% \com{PackageInfo} ou \com{PackageWarning}; avec le numéro de ligne lorsqu'il est utile +% (\com{@gobble} si pas de numéro de ligne). En conséquence, le paquetage est moins bavard +% (\com{PackageInfo} écrit seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, pas sur le terminal). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) et \com{mtcsettitlefont}, +% avec une syntaxe beaucoup plus simple. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Classes \AmS: \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}, +% \class{amsbook} demande des précautions. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour recommander l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la présence de \com{dominitoc} et co. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. +% \item Amélioration de la documentation sur les \emph{hints}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation des suffixes courts avec plus de 99~parties ou 99~chapitres +% ou 99~sections. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} devient \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de nombreux fichiers de langues: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, \xfile{chinese2.mld}, +% \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, +% \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, +% \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetrules}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, \com{nomlfrule}, +% \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, \com{nopltrule}, +% \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, \com{nosltrule}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de nouvelles langues: \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, +% \xfile{russian2o.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de tests sur les environnements \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\env{mtchideinmain*}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~42 non distribuée. +% \item Remplacement de \og{} language \fg{} par \og{} langue \fg{} dans la documentation française. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un typo mineur. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}, oubliée dans v41. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{43} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~43: consolidation de v40, v41 et v42. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une grosse erreur dans \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} à~propos de \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction des macros \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} +% \item Déplacement de l'historique vers la fin du code du paquetage. +% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et d'un chapitre sur l'installation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}). +% \item Compléter le \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence entre \com{minitoc} et \com{tableofcontents}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de commentaires sur les fontes. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (haut bulgare). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} après le \texttt{\bs\bs} après le filet supérieur de chaque +% mini-table au niveau partie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans les arguments de \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait de \com{markboth} pour les minitocs (\ldots) et secttocs (\ldots). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'environnement \env{stc@verse}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld} et \xfile{magyar2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommage de \xfile{portuges.mld} en \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans \com{mtcskip}. +% \item Première version en format \suffix{.dtx}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait de \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, etc., inutilisées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un typo dans \com{@dosectlot}. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Impression de la documentation avec \og{} \optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{nombreuses classes}} \fg{} pour +% avoir toutes les notes marginales +% sur la gauche. Ajout du code (étendu à~54 éléments flottants) de \pack{morefloats} +% (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) pour permettre +% davantage de notes marginales et d'éléments flottants. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en page l'index correctement. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction des filets dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction des entrées de niveau chapitre dans les parttocs, lorsque les numéros de pages doivent être omis. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les tentatives d'insertion de mini-tables vides. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation de commandes obsolètes. +% \item Les mini-listes de figures ou de tableaux ne doivent pas être imprimées vides même si \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-listes de figures/tableaux. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetdepth}. +% \item L'option \optd{hints} est le choix par défaut et elle n'est plus considérée comme expérimentale. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un message d'erreur dans \com{mtcsetdepth} si le compteur n'est pas disponible. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{portuges.mld}, qui charge \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de trois variantes pour la langue malayalam: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}, +% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une méthode pour documentation bilingue. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en forme correctement l'index en français. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changement de \og{} Liste des Tables \fg{} en \og{} Liste des Tableaux \fg{} dans \xfile{french.mld} et +% dans la documentation française, pour suivre les choix du paquetage \pack{babel}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est maintenant engendré par \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{O} et~\texttt{o} +% pour vrai/faux. +% \item Condensation du code de détection des suffixes courts ou longs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{V} et~\texttt{v} +% pour vrai/faux. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Établir correctement l'indicateur \com{ifFTR} pour avoir les noms des mois dans la langue correcte dans +% la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Établir l'indicateur \com{mtcoffwarn@true} par \pack{mtcoff} si une commande +% \texttt{\bs mtcadd...} est trouvée. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{castillian.mld}. +% \item Renommage de \xfile{portugues.mld} en \xfile{portuguese.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld} et \xfile{USenglish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression de \og{} Général: \fg{} dans l'historique des modifications. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Remplacement de quelques commandes \com{PackageWarning} par \com{PackageInfo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Restauration de la correspondance de chaque option de langue avec un fichier \suffix{.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait de deux indicateurs inutiles: \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} et +% \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}. +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc} et \com{decrementstc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une bourde dans \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Amélioration de quelques messages dans \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Ajout d'un test sur la version du paquetage \pack{placeins}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une note sur \com{FloatBarrier}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème d'alignement dans les minitocs. Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Fait deux versions des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}, +% selon la présence du compteur de profondeur correspondant. +% \item La classe \class{memoir} est incompatible si elle est trop récente. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur la position des commandes \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.} de préparation. +% \item Corrections dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{guarani.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}. +% \item Ajout d'un argument optionnel à~\com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc} et \com{adjuststc}. +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un patch pour la version récente de la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utiliser \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers +% \suffix{.mld} \og{} secondaires\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger +% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un test pour interdire les appels directs de \com{mtcloadmlo} par l'utilisateur. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld} et \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \item Ajout d'une note sur l'outil \tool{rubber}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour formater le glossaire. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait des numéros de pages dans le glossaire. Fait par les scripts \texttt{*mk}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{44} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Historique (glossaire) composé en \texttt{RaggedRight}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld} et \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nouvelle méthode pour l'historique: listes imbriquées sur 3~niveaux. +% \item Retrait de \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nettoyage des scripts \texttt{*mk}. +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos. +% \item Ajout du nom du fichier \suffix{.maf} dans le message de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. +% \item Amélioration du nettoyage dans les scripts \texttt{*mk}, en utilisant un fichier \suffix{.maf}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Charger la correction pour la classe \class{memoir} seulement si nécessaire; ne pas la charger si +% \class{memoir} est datée après 2005/09/25. +% \item Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre \og{} Questions Fréquemment Posées\fg{} (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}) +% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{nolistfiles}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et +% \pack{mcaption} (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Correction de quelques notes marginales dans le code commenté. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \item Utiliser la commande Unix \tool{xargs} dans les scripts \texttt{*mk} pour détruire les fichiers +% auxiliaires. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout d'une courte introduction dans le chapitre \og{} Questions fréquemment posées\fg{} et +% dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Début de l'ajout du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la version française du \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} dans \xfile{minitoc.l}. +% \item Ajout d'une note sur la nécessité d'exécuter \scrp{imk} avant \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir}. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}. +% \item Ajout de \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont}, +% \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans +% les mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction d'une erreur sur les fontes pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans les +% mini-tables. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld} et +% \xfile{khalkha.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Ajout de vérifications par des commandes \emph{quarks} internes dans \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Changement de \og{} table\fg{} en \og{} tableau\fg{} dans la documentation en français, là où c'est nécessaire. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Correction de typos dans la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Éviter quelques avertissements \og{} Token not allowed\fg{} émis par \texttt{pdftex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Réordonné une longue séquence de citations. +% \item Ajout de \og{} {\froff\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} pour les URLs de courrier. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction d'un hyperlien dans la bibliographie (pour le paquetage \pack{xr}). +% \item Tentative pour éviter des URLs cassés, en utilisant \env{quote}, des notes infrapaginales et \com{par}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes, un tableau). +% \item Dans le message d'avertissement du \emph{hint} concernant un nombre de mini-tables dépassant~99 (idans +% le cas de suffixes courts), imprimer le nombre effectif. +% \item Réduction de la largeur de certains messages d'information, d'avertissement ou d'erreur. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections sur les guillemets français. +% \item Ajout de quelques options pour PDF. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction d'un URL vers l'\AmS\ dans la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages (essentiellement en enlevant des étoiles). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos. +% \item Ajout de quelques labels. +% \item Ajout d'un chapitre avec les messages (expliqués). Pas encore triés. +% \item La documentation a besoin de 4~compilations par \LaTeX. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages. +% \item Corrections dans la liste des messages. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de la position des flottants dans les pages de flottants: en haut. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation (merci à~\name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Ajout de \oexam{addsec.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc}. +% \item Correction pour faire marcher \oexam{addsec.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \og \texttt{*}\fg comme mot-clé pour le premier argument de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et +% \com{mtcsetrules} (demandé par \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Retrait de \og \com{MessageBreak}\fg de l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de l'entrée bibliographique sur \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} dans la documentation pour résoudre +% un problème de placement de flottants. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Résoudre un problème de placement de flottants. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de la langue bahasam. +% \item Ajout de la langue albanian. +% \item Ajout de la langue hebrew2. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour les langues albanian, bahasa, bahasam et hebrew2. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{french.mld} (retrait de majuscules abusives). +% \item Correction du fichier \xfile{italian.mld} language. Ajout de la langue italian2. +% \item Ajout des langues australian et newzealand (english). +% \item La langue bahasa est renommée en bahasai; bahasa est synonyme de bahasai. +% \item Ajout des langues malay et meyalu, synonymes de bahasam. +% \item Ajout des langues indon et indonesian, synonymes de bahasai. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. +% \item Ajout de références aux nouvelles entrées bibliographiques. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une instabilité dans les coupures de page dans la documentation de \xfile{japanese3.mld}. +% \item Ajout de commentaires dans quelques fichiers \suffix{.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans \com{mtcaddsection}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Limitation de la profondeur initiale d'affichage des signets. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de quelques commentaires dans le point~34 des questions fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}) +% à~propos de l'initialisation des fontes. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Chargement de certains paquetages avant \pack{hyperref}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish4.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction du tableau sur les titres par défaut. +% \item Correction dans les mots-clés de \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} et +% d'un point dans les questions fréquemment posées (et dans in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'une note dans la documentation de \xfile{serbian.mld} et \xfile{serbianc.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (pour Omega). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Simplifications dans le chapitre «~Messages~». +% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Jargon~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Postface~». +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du pacquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour l'entrée «~The pdf\TeX\ Program~» dans la bibliographie. +% Le prénom de son auteur a besoin d'un double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans \xfile{russianb.mld} et \xfile{spanish.mld}. +% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. +% \item Mettre \com{mtcfixglossary} avant \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld} et \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les langues \texttt{u8hangul} et \texttt{u8hanja} sont renommées \xmldo{hangul-u8} et \xmldo{hanja-u8}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour des commandes de préparation répétées. +% \item Déplacement vers le haut de la déclaration de certains indicateurs concernant l'option \optd{hints}. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcprepare}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} à~la classe~6. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Correction de la position des tableaux dans le chapitre «~Jargon~». +% \item Correction de \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \emph{Hints} sur la classe \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} et le paquetage \pack{alphanum}, +% incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de styles bibliographiques avec un champ \texttt{URL}, construits à~l'aide de +% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld} et \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld} et \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, avec leurs +% fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld} et \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, avec +% leurs fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Désormais, les messages sont numérotés. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la question~37 sur les fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \pack{babel}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{french1.mld} et \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{english1.mld} et \xfile{english2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{45} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression des versions PostScript de la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld} et \xfile{xalx3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{swedish2.mld}. +% \item L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \uxgrf{lamed.eps} et \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} comme images pour le logo de \emph{Lamed} (construit depuis +% \uxfile{lamed.tex}). +% \item Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de \pack{sectsty} pour mieux mettre en forme les titres des sections. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \com{ifmtcsecondpart} pour tester si le document a exactement 2~parties. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}, charger le paquetage \pack{flafter} \emph{avant} le +% paquetage \pack{placeins}. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les barrières de flottants. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans la question~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. +% \item Ajout de commentaires pour l'option \opt{insection}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Début de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. +% \item Fin de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. +% \item Corrections analogues dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de notes à~propos des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \item Ajout de \oexam{hide1.tex} et \oexam{hide2.tex}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Renommé \oexam{hide.tex} en \oexam{hide1.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Utilisation de \com{MakeUpperCase} dans \com{markboth} pour les styles de page. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{captcont} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld} et \xfile{uighur3.mld} (comme synonymes pour les +% variantes de la langue bicig). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout d'une description de \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} dans le jargon. +% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur le script \scrp{imk} dans \xfile{INSTALL} et le chapitre «~Installation~». +% \item Ajout d'une entrée «~paquetage~» dans le jargon. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et \com{mtcgapafterheads}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \oexam{gaps.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item Correction d'espacement dans \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{46} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Commentaire sur le paquetage \pack{thailatex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Engendrer certains fichiers d'exemples avec \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommé le chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~» en «~Exemples de documents~». +% \item Utiliser le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} dans certains des exemples de documents. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour des exemples de documents. +% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{second.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} et \oexam{mem1.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} et \oexam{scr.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{subf.tex}. +% \item Corrections sur la profondeur des minilofs, minilots et similaires. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{tsfc.tex} et \oexam{tbi.tex}. +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections de typos. +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{2c.tex} et \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item Correction dans \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans les minilots et minilofs (et analogues) sur la profondeur. +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hop.tex} et \oexam{cri.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} et \oexam{mu.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Les versions non distribuées sont marquées par~\textbf{\textreferencemark} au lieu de~\ensuremath{\star}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item La section «~À~propos de ce document~» devient un premier chapitre étoilé. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hir.tex} et \oexam{hia.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections dans \oexam{add.tex} et \oexam{addsec.tex} pour l'index. +% \item Ajout du script \scrp{xmk} pour composer les exemples en documents PDF. +% \item Mise à~jour des scripts pour traiter les exemples. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ne pas oublier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} dans la liste des fichiers. +% \item Dans les scripts, le répertoire de \emph{backup} (\ixfile{OLD}) est +% désormais \ixfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}. +% \item Dans les scripts, les répertoires de répartition (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) sont +% désormais \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{47} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} (d'après le système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}). +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de \com{l@xsection}. +% \item Correction d'espacements dans les mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un crênage vertical \verb|\kernafter...| entre chaque minitable et son filet inférieur. +% \item Ajout du point~45 des questions fréquemment posées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction mineure dans le message d'avertissement \texttt{F0008}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \item Raccourcissement du résultat de certains exemples de documents en utilisant la classe \class{report} +% au lieu de la classe \class{book} (d'où une impression en recto seul). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{48} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Pas de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans le format de la table des matières. +% \item Augmentation de \com{textwidth}. +% \item Correction du problème de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib} et tous les fichiers générés. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait des commentaires sur les lignes superflues dans le préambule des fichiers générés. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \item Correction de la macro \com{name} (pour la documentation). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Correction (conversion) dans \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'erreur \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} si \xfile{english.mld} n'est pas trouvé pour établir les titres par défaut. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Modification du style bibliographique \xfile{plainurl.bst}\isuffix{.bst} pour avoir les noms de famille des auteurs +% et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) en petites capitales et les années en chiffres de style ancien. Les +% titres sont mis en emphase. Le style \xfile{frplain1.bst} est aussi mis à~jour. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.bib} en \exam{mtc-add.bib}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.tex} en \exam{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{addsec.tex} en \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{2c.tex} en \exam{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est désormais active par défaut. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommage de \oexam{app-mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{apx.tex} en \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{bo.tex} en \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{ch0.tex} en \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{cri.tex} en \exam{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo1.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo2.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{gaps.tex} en \exam{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hia.tex} en \exam{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hir.tex} en \exam{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide1.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide2.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hop.tex} en \exam{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{livre.tex} en \exam{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem1.tex} en \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mini-art.tex} en \exam{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} en \exam{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mu.tex} en \exam{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{scr.tex} en \exam{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{second.tex} en \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{subf.tex} en \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{tbi.tex} en \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{tlc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{tsfc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie (ajout du Pentaglot). +% \item Correction du format de deux tableaux sur NFSS. +% \item Exemples de documents par ordre alphabétique dans leur chapitre. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple de document \exam{mtc-syn.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{49} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Légère modification de la mise en forme de la liste des fichiers (chapitre «~Installation~»). +% \item Simplifications dans les scripts. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du point~46 dans les questions fréquemment posées et du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie et les styles bibliographiques. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de «~\textbf{+}~» et «~\texttt{-}~» comme synonymes pour «~\texttt{on}~» et «~\texttt{off}~», +% respectivement. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections de typos. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'un tableau de quelques codages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression de l'entrée «~Sommaire~» dans le sommaire, mais elle est ajoutée dans la table des matières. +% \item Amélioration de quelques tableaux. +% \item Ajout des fichiers \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections dans la mise en page d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Combinaison de quatre figures en une (avec des sous-figures). +% \item Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de +% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Complété la liste des classes standard. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}. +% \item Ajout\imess{E0036} de notes sur la présence obligatoire du fichier \xfile{english.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item La validation des options de langue n'écrit que des messages informatifs dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et, si nécessaire, donne un seul message d'avertissement. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{50} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression des anciens exemples de documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex}, +% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex} et \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Ajout d'un item sur la \index{TDS}TDS dans le jargon. +% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du message d'avertissement \texttt{W0094} avec la liste des fichiers minitoc de langue manquants +% (\suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}). +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». +% \item Changement des noms des répertoires \emph{scratch} dans certains scripts. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et +% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{51} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de l'index: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options, +% options de langue. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de l'index: noms. +% \item Mise à~jour de certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} avec les noms des auteurs des titres. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections diverses. +% \item Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge. +% \item Ajout d'une commande \com{ProvidesFile} aux fichiers exemples. +% \item Indexation des environnements (pas parfaite). +% \item Indexation des fichiers. +% \item Renommage du fichier «~\texttt{catalog}~» en «~\xfile{CATALOG}~». +% \item Indexation des compteurs et des compteurs de profondeur. +% \item Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{52} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'ordre dans l'index. +% \item Options par défaut en gras dans l'index. +% \item Ajout d'informations sur les auteurs pour les titres spécifiques aux langues. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de sections bidons dans le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~». +% \item Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript. +% \item Retrait de \xfile{duplex2v.pro}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexation des commandes référencées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction du nom \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (le prénom avant le nom de famille, à~la française). +% \item Correction de quelques autres noms. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% \item Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item Essai d'utilisation d'une version récente du paquetage \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} (2003/11/04, 4.01) pour permettre le tri, +% mais reste en conflit avec \pack{hyperref}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Équilibrage des colonnes de l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'indexation des environnements. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} qui charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexation des noms des auteurs. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{53} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item Correction de \com{kernafterminitoc} et consorts. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un en-tête à~l'index, pour expliquer les notations. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Changement du style des numéros de pages et de lignes dans l'index. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Les symboles de virages dangereux sont maintenant dans la marge de droite. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de la présentation des exemples de fichiers. +% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour trier les séquences de citations. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}. +% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} en \uxfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de l'option \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour +% compresser les séquences de citations; le paquetage \pack{hypernat} doit aussi être chargé (après \pack{natbib} et +% \pack{hyperref}). +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du changement de titre de la parttoc des appendices dans \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{54} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~». +% \item Indexation des dispositifs. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~». +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}. +% \item Certaines mini-tables sont composées sur deux colonnes dans le manuel. +% \item Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages. +% \item Charger le paquetage \pack{hypcap} pour les hyperliens dans la documentation. +% ^^A \item Modification de \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk} et \scrp{pmk} pour retirer \verb*|\ | de l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% \item Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples. +% \item La section 2007 du chapitre «~Postface~» était en pagaille. +% \item Plus de liens internes dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages. +% \item Amélioration des coupures de colonnes dans l'index. +% \item Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% \item Groupement des paires \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{55} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le +% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement. +% \item Amélioration des coupures de page dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changement de la couleur des hyperliens. +% \item Changement du format des en-têtes. +% \item Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer +% correctement \com{mtc@toks}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{56} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/07/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item En-têtes de pages modifiés dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) des régions où sont parlées diverses langues. +% \item Retrait des fichiers \suffix{.eps}. +% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}. +% \item Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nombreuses corrections typographiques mineures. +% \item Couleurs plus sombres pour les hyper-liens. +% \item Mise à~jour et correction de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction d'un typo dans l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} (\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Corrections de typos dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} (merci +% à~\name{Andrew}{Bowden}). +% \item Remplacer le suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter +% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}). +% \item Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% \item Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~». +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} +% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}. +% \item Indexation complète des messages. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie. +% \item Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}. +% \item Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}. +% \item Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \item Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et\ABK \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{57} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans les exemples de documents. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% \item Ajout de cartes de la Mandchourie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration des légendes des cartes. +% Ajout de cartes pour l'Italie , le Karnataka, l'Allemagne, les Mongols et la Chine. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan2.mld} et \xfile{mexican.mld}. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes tchèques. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes danois. +% \item Ajout d'une carte du néerlandais. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes français. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes galiciens. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes allemands. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes hindi. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes portugais. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue turque. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue vietnamienne. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora arménienne. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes sâmes. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des pays où l'espagnol est une langue officielle. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la région sorabe. +% \item Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des minorités en Pologne. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora bengalî. +% \item Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes basques. +% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes lettons. +% \item Ajout d'une carte pour la langue swahilie. +% \item Ajout de l'alphabet turc. +% \item Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (merci à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% \item Ajout de cartes des langues d'Europe. +% \item Ajout de cartes du Kosovo. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des langues d'Afrique. +% \item Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message. +% \item Ajout de cartes pour la Russie. +% \item Ajout d'une carte du Kosovo. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des districts de Slovaquie. +% \item Ajout de cartes sur l'Islam. +% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'utilisation des caractères chinois dans le monde. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les dialectes chinois. +% \item Ajout de cartes sur les systèmes d'écriture. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des régions où le finnois est parlé. +% \item Raccourcissement du chapitre «~Installation~». +% \item Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16. +% \item Remplacement des fichiers \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} et \uxfile{lamed.tex} par \xgrf{lamed3.png}. +% \item Ajout de cartes de langues indigènes du Mexique. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{58} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} en \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. +% \item Ajout d'une carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes polonais. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'alphabet russe. +% \item Ajout d'une carte sur l'alphabet russe. +% \item Ajout d'une carte sur les alphabets serbes. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des provinces du Viêtnam. +% \item Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes albanais. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la Norvège. +% \item Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. Ajout d'un cadre gris clair autour des drapeaux. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation. +% \item Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais. +% \item Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}. +% \item Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais. +% \item Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~fichiers PDF corrompus. +% \item \textbf{60} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/07/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction mineure dans la figure. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% \item Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux) +% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick} +% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier); +% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% \item Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item \textbf{61} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2015/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Voir l'anglais (d\'esol\'e). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \end{itemize} +% \end{RaggedRight} +% \egroup +% \fi +% ^^A MAJ-F +% +% ^^A ACK +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter*{Acknowledgments\markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}} +% \markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}% +% ^^A \enlargethispage*{1.5\baselineskip} +% \mtcaddchapter[Acknowledgments]% +% \noindent +% I ought to thank the following peoples\,\footnote{And I apologize to all whose I forgot.}, for their help, their +% questions, their interventions in the news groups\,\footnote{Mainly, \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (in french) and +% \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english), but also \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (in german, but I do not read it well: +% send me also a mail in french or in english).}, +% and/or for their packages, classes, documents, and tools:\hfill\mbox{} +% \or\relax +% \chapter*{Remerciements\markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}} +% \markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}% +% \mtcaddchapter[Remerciements]% +% \noindent +% Il me faut remercier les personnes suivantes\,\footnote{Et que toutes celles que j'ai oubliées me pardonnent.}, pour +% leur aide, leurs questions, leurs interventions dans les groupes de discussion\,\footnote{Essentiellement, +% \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français) et \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais), mais aussi +% \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (en allemand, mais je le lis très mal: envoyez-moi aussi un courrier en français ou en anglais).} +% et/ou leurs paquetages, classes, documents et outils:\hfill\mbox{} +% \fi +% +% \begin{raggedright}\noindent +% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, +% \name{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}, +% \namea{Nabil}{Abu~El-Ata}{Abu~El-Ata}, +% \name{Tommaso}{Addabbo}, +% \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}, +% \name{Stéphane}{Aicardi}, +% \name{Vartan}{Akopian}, +% \name{A.J.}{Alex}, +% \namea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}, +% \name{Mark}{Alford}, +% \name{Viviane}{Alleton}, +% \namea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}, +% \name{Jérôme}{Andrieux}, +% \name{Ralf}{Angeli}, +% \name{Walter}{Appel}, +% \name{Achod~André}{Aradian}, +% \name{Patrick}{Andries}, +% \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}, +% \name{Tim}{Arnold}, +% \name{Jouko}{Arponen}, +% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, +% \name{Helmer}{Aslasken}, +% \name{David}{Aspinall}, +% \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen}, +% \name{Philipp}{Bachmann}, +% \name{Gonçal}{Badenes}, +% \name{Guillaume}{Balavoine}, +% \name{Jason}{Baldridge}, +% \name{Marin}{Balgarensky}, +% \name{Leonor}{Barroca}, +% \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi}, +% \name{Pierre}{Basso}, +% \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}, +% \name{Jean-Yves}{Baudais}, +% \name{David}{Bausum}, +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, +% \name{Thierry}{Bayet}, +% \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, +% \name{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}, +% \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara}, +% \name{Benoît}{Belet}, +% \name{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}, +% \namea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}, +% \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, +% \name{Alexander}{Berdnikov}, +% \name{Jens}{Berger}, +% \name{Tobias}{Berndt}, +% \name{Karl}{Berry}, +% \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, +% \name{Javier}{Bezos}, +% \name{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}, +% \name{Olivier}{Binisti}, +% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, +% \name{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}, +% \namea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}, +% \name{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}, +% \name{Laurent}{Bloch}, +% \namea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}, +% \name{Patrick}{Boman}, +% \name{Onofre}{Bonvila}, +% \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}, +% \name{Patrice}{Bougette}, +% \name{Daniel}{Bourbonnais}, +% \name{Andrew}{Bowden}, +% \name{Victor}{Boyko}, +% \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, +% \name{Felix}{Braun}, +% \name{Jim}{Breen}, +% \name{Peter}{Breitenlohner}, +% \name{Roland}{Breton}, +% \name{Catherine}{Bricout}, +% \name{William}{Bright}, +% \namea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}, +% \name{Mimi}{Burbank}, +% \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, +% \name{Patrick}{Burgel}, +% \name{Alexey}{Burykin}, +% \name{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}, +% \namea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}, +% \name{Olivier}{Cardi}, +% \name{Samuele}{Carcagno}, +% \name{David}{Carella}, +% \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, +% \name{Manuel}{Carriba}, +% \name{Régis}{Caspar}, +% \name{Waldemar}{Celes}, +% \name{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, +% \name{Winston}{Chang}, +% \name{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}, +% \name{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}, +% \name{Pehong}{Chen}, +% \name{Céline}{Chevalier}, +% \namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}, +% \name{Otfried}{Cheong}, +% \name{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}, +% \name{Pai~H.}{Chou}, +% \name{Pierre}{Chuvin}, +% \name{Yves}{Citoleux}, +% \name{Marian}{Clegg}, +% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, +% \name{Maurizio}{Codogno}, +% \name{Bernard}{Comrie}, +% \name{David~B.}{Cook}, +% \name{Emmanuel}{Cornet}, +% \name{Oliver}{Corff}, +% \name{Prakash}{Countcham}, +% \namea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}, +% \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, +% \name{Adrian}{Daerr}, +% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan}, +% \name{Patrick~W.}{Daly}, +% \name{Peter~T.}{Daniels}, +% \name{Holger}{Danielsson}, +% \name{Alice}{Davison}, +% \namea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}, +% \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Demoustier}, +% \name{Andreas}{Deininger}, +% \name{Éric}{Depardieu}, +% \namea{Ben}{De~Rydt}{DeRydt}, +% \name{Bernard}{Desgraupes}, +% \name{Cécile}{Desprairies}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Desreux}, +% \name{Christine}{Detig}, +% \name{Antoni~R.}{Diller}, +% \name{Gérard}{Dorel}, +% \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}, +% \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}, +% \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer}, +% \name{Denys}{Duchier}, +% \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}, +% \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja}, +% \name{Ta~Quang}{Dung}, +% \name{Patrick}{Egan}, +% \namea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}, +% \name{Brian}{Elmegaard}, +% \name{Danie}{Els}, ^^A booktabs +% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, +% \name{Thomas}{Esser}, +% \name{Gilhooly}{Etienne}, +% \name{Karl~F.}{Everitt}, +% \name{Mike}{Fabian}, +% \name{Robin}{Fairbairns}, +% \name{Christian}{Faulhammer}, +% \name{Simon}{Fear}, ^^A booktabs +% \name{Jürgen}{Fenn}, ^^A l2tabu +% \name{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}, +% \name{Jeff}{Fessler}, +% \name{Ulrike}{Fischer}, +% \name{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}, +% \name{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}, +% \name{Daniel}{Flipo}, +% \name{Peter~L.}{Flom}, +% \name{Peter}{Flynn}, +% \name{Jim}{Fox}, ^^A dpfloat +% \namea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}, +% \namea{Danny~M.}{Fürniß}{Furniss}, +% \name{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}, +% \name{Federico}{Garcia}, +% \namea{Diego}{García~Morate}{Garcia~Morate}, +% \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, ^^A pict2e +% \namea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}, +% \name{Maarten}{Gelderman}, +% \name{Chuck}{Genschte}, +% \name{Jacques}{Gernet}, +% \name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, +% \name{Helen}{Gilhooly}, +% \name{Henri}{Giordan}% +% \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis}, +% \name{François}{Giron}, +% \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}, +% \name{Josiane}{Gonthier}, +% \name{Vitali}{Gontsharuk}, +% \name{Michel}{Goossens}, +% \namea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}, +% \name{Mathieu}{Goutelle}, +% \name{Bruce~K.}{Grant}, +% \name{Fraser}{Grant}, +% \namea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}, +% \name{Norman}{Gray}, +% \name{George~D.}{Greenwade}, +% \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}, +% \name{Loïc}{Grenon}, +% \name{Charles}{Grether}, +% \name{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}, +% \name{Olga~A.}{Grineva}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Grot}, +% \name{Micael}{Guignard}, +% \name{Marion}{Gunn}, +% \name{Guntermann}{Klaus}, +% \name{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}, +% \name{Thomas}{Hafner}, +% \name{Hans}{Hagen}, +% \name{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}, +% \name{Boumediene}{Hamzi}, +% \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}, +% \name{Thorsten}{Hansen}, +% \name{Patrick}{Happel}, +% \name{Yannis}{Haralambous}, +% \name{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}, +% \name{Alexander}{Harin}, +% \name{Russel~L.}{Harris}, +% \name{Michael~A.}{Harrison}, +% \name{Stephen}{Hartke}, +% \name{Danny}{Heap}, +% \name{Jim}{Hefferon}, +% \name{André}{Heider}, +% \name{Thorsten}{Hein}, +% \name{Sten}{Hellman}, +% \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, +% \name{Yvon}{Henel}, ^^A l2tabu +% \name{Hartmut}{Henkel}, +% \name{Thomas}{Henlich}, ^^A marvosym% +% \name{Stephan}{Hennig}, +% \name{Florence}{Henry}, +% \name{Stephen}{Herborn}, +% \name{Jörg}{Hesoll}, +% \name{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}, +% \name{David}{Hoadley}, +% \name{Taco}{Hoekwater}, +% \name{Alan}{Hoenig}, +% \name{Joe}{Hogg}, +% \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}, +% \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, +% \namea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}, +% \name{Umstatter}{Horst}, +% \name{Don}{Hosek}, +% \name{Yufan}{Hu}, +% \name{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}, +% \name{Dave~W.}{Huseby}, +% \name{Helene}{Hyna}, +% \name{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}, +% \name{Hiroya}{Ikeda}, +% \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}, +% \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Victor}{Ivrii}, +% \name{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}, +% \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}, +% \name{Youssef}{Jabri}, ^^A Arabi +% \name{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}, ^^A pearls +% \name{Roland}{Jacques}, +% \name{Christophe}{Jacquet}, +% \name{Bernd}{Jaehne}, +% \name{Radwan}{Jalam}, +% \name{Michael}{Janich}, +% \name{Frank}{Jensen}, +% \name{Alan}{Jeffrey}, +% \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}, +% \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}, +% \name{Loïc}{Joly}, +% \name{David~M.}{Jones}, +% \name{Christophe}{Jorssen}, +% \name{Robert}{Juhasz}, +% \name{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}, +% \name{Stefan}{Junge}, +% \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, +% \name{Akira}{Kakuto}, +% \name{Mikko}{Kanerva}, +% \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, +% \name{David}{Kastrup}, +% \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, +% \name{Jonathan}{Kew}, ^^A xetex +% \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, +% \name{Ki-Joo}{Kim}, +% \name{Bil}{Kleb}, +% \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}, +% \name{Rune}{Kleveland}, +% \namea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}, +% \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, +% \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}, +% \name{Markus}{Kohm}, +% \name{Helmut}{Kopka}, +% \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}, +% \name{Adamantios}{Korais}, +% \name{Vincent}{Krakoviack}, +% \name{Kai}{Kratt}, +% \name{Thankmar}{Kronzucker}, +% \name{Siep}{Kroonenberg}, +% \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}, +% \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, +% \name{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}, +% \name{Florian}{Kulzer}, +% \name{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}, +% \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, +% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}, +% \name{Stéphane}{Laborde}, +% \name{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}, +% \name{Klaus}{Lagally}, +% \name{Leslie}{Lamport}, +% \name{Fabio}{Lanari}, +% \name{Robert}{Lange}, +% \name{Dag}{Langmyhr}, +% \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, +% \name{Henning}{Larsen}, +% \name{Jean-Marc}{Lasgouttes}, +% \name{Andris}{Lasis}, +% \name{Christian}{Laucou}, +% \name{Jean-Philippe}{Lauffenburger}, +% \name{Arnaud}{Launay}, +% \name{Claire}{Lauvernet}, +% \name{Boris}{Lavva}, +% \name{André}{Lebacq}, +% \name{Olivier}{Lecarme}, +% \name{Jacques}{Leclerc}, +% \name{Iksop}{Lee}, +% \namea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}, +% \name{Jeanne}{Legrand}, +% \name{Philipp}{Lehman}, +% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, +% \name{Thomas}{Leonhardt}, +% \namea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}, +% \name{Stéphane}{Lepolozec}, +% \namea{Julien}{Le~Thuaut}{LeThuaut}, +% \namea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}, +% \name{Adam}{Lewenberg}, +% \name{Knut}{Lickert}, +% \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}, +% \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}, +% \name{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}, +% \name{Pierre}{Lobel}, +% \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}, +% \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}, +% \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}, +% \name{Tristan}{Lorino}, +% \name{Tim}{Love}, +% \name{Vincent}{Lozano}, +% \name{Daniel~H.}{Luecking}, +% \name{Ken}{Lunde}, +% \name{Anders}{Lyhne}, +% \namea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}, +% \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}, +% \name{Lars}{Madsen}, +% \name{Richard}{Mahoney}, +% \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}, +% \name{Pierre}{Malecki}, +% \name{Pascal}{Marchand}, +% \name{Bob}{Margolis}, +% \name{Cécile}{Marin}, +% \name{Nicolas}{Markey}, +% \name{Marcus}{Marr}, +% \name{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}, +% \name{Alan}{Marshall}, +% \name{Terry}{Mart}, +% \name{Éric}{Martini}, +% \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, +% \name{Henri}{Massias}, +% \name{Stephen}{Matthews}, +% \name{Andreas}{Matthias}, +% \name{Sven}{Mattisson}, +% \name{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}, +% \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}, +% \name{Ben}{McKay}, +% \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Mengin}, +% \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}, +% \name{Yanick}{Michou}, +% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, +% \name{Young~Joon}{Moon}, +% \name{Ross}{Moore}, +% \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}, +% \name{Florence}{Morgiensztern}, +% \name{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}, +% \name{Michael~A.}{Morrison}, +% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}, +% \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}, +% \name{Andrei}{Nacu}, +% \name{}{National Geographic Society}, +% \name{}{National Institute of the Korean}, +% \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}, +% \name{Lee}{Netherton}, +% \name{Frank}{Neukam}, +% \name{Cuong}{Nguyen}, +% \name{Julien}{Nicolas}, +% \name{Elke}{Niedermair}, +% \name{Michael}{Niedermair}, +% \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk}, ^^A pict2e +% \name{Josselin}{Noirel}, +% \name{Tim}{Null}, +% \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% \name{Tobias}{Oetiker}, +% \name{Haruhito}{Okamura}, +% \name{Mariusz}{Olko}, +% \name{Tanguy}{Ortolo}, +% \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, +% \name{Jörg}{Ott}, +% \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}, +% \name{Scott}{Pakin}, +% \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}, +% \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, +% \name{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}, +% \name{Hubert}{Partl}, +% \name{Oren}{Patashnik}, +% \name{Jonathan}{Pechta}, +% \name{Kasper}{Peeters}, +% \namea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}, +% \name{Matthias}{Pelger}, +% \name{Philippe}{Pelletier}, +% \namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}, +% \name{Paul}{Pichaureau}, +% \name{Éric}{Picheral}, +% \name{Bruno}{Piguet}, +% \namea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}, +% \name{John}{Plaice}, +% \name{Yves}{Plassereau}, +% \name{Ariane}{Poissonnier}, +% \name{Maria}{Polinsky}, +% \name{Philippe}{Pons}, +% \name{Monique}{Pontault}, +% \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}, +% \name{Fabrice}{Popineau}, +% \name{Nico}{Poppelier}, +% \name{Rama}{Porrat}, +% \namea{Camille-Aimé}{Possamaï}{Possamai}, +% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, +% \namea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}, +% \name{Glanville}{Price}, +% \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, +% \name{Sebastian}{Rahtz}, +% \name{Bernd}{Raichle}, +% \name{Claude}{Raimond}, +% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}, +% \name{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}, +% \name{Paul}{Rascoe}, +% \name{Keranen}{Reino}, +% \name{Arthur}{Reutenauer}, +% \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}, +% \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}, +% \name{François}{Richaudeau}, +% \name{Luis}{Rivera}, +% \name{Yuri}{Robbers}, +% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}, +% \name{Will}{Robertson}, +% \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel}, +% \name{Christian}{Rolland}, +% \name{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}, +% \name{Chris~A.}{Rowley}, +% \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}, +% \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}, +% \name{Young}{Ryu}, ^^A txfonts +% \name{Enn}{Saar}, +% \name{David}{Samsoen}, +% \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, +% \name{Larry}{Sanger}, +% \name{Morgan}{Sangeux}, +% \name{Thierry}{Sanjuan}, +% \name{Eddie}{Saudrais}, +% \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}, +% \name{Bernd}{Schandl}, +% \name{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}, +% \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}, +% \name{Walter}{Schmidt}, +% \name{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}, +% \name{Uwe}{Schneider}, +% \namea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}, +% \name{Joachim}{Schrod}, +% \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}, ^^A everysel, ragged2e, multitoc +% \name{Ulrich}{Schwartz}, +% \name{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}, +% \name{Michael}{Shell}, +% \vname{Shin}{Jungshik}, +% \namea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}, +% \name{Ali}{Shoukat}, +% \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, +% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}, +% \name{Sindhu}{Singh}, +% \name{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}, +% \name{Petra}{Schlager}, +% \name{Kristian}{Slimak}, +% \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}, +% \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Robin~S.}{Socha}, +% \name{Nick}{Sofroniou}, +% \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}, +% \name{Lianyi}{Song}, +% \name{Yves}{Soulet}, +% \name{Gérard}{Sournia}, +% \name{Pierre-François}{Souyri}, +% \name{Arjen}{Steiner}, +% \name{D.~P.}{Story}, +% \name{Éric}{Streit}, +% \name{Ralf}{Stubner}, +% \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}, +% \name{Cyrille}{Suss}, +% \name{Robert~S.}{Sutor}, +% \name{Chris}{Swoyer}, +% \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}, +% \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, +% \name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}, +% \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}, +% \name{Philip}{Taylor}, +% \namea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}, +% \name{Yves}{Ternon}, +% \name{Manfred}{Thibud}, +% \name{Christina}{Thiele}, +% \name{Harold}{Thimbleby}, +% \name{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}, +% \name{Aurélien}{Thureau}, +% \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}, +% \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, ^^A pict2e +% \namea{Ton}{'t~Lam}{tLam}, +% \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}, +% \name{Cezare}{Tomczak}, +% \name{Laurent}{Tordella}, +% \name{Mark}{Trettin}, ^^A l2tabu +% \name{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}, +% \name{Ahto}{Truu}, +% \name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, +% \name{Hideo}{Umeki}, +% \name{Un}{Koaunghi}, +% \name{Turgut}{Uyar}, +% \name{Jari}{Vaario}, +% \name{Christian}{Valantin}, +% \name{Piet}{van~Oostrum}, +% \namea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}, +% \name{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}, +% \name{Vincent}{Vaquin}, +% \name{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}, +% \name{Didier}{Verna}, +% \name{Sylvain}{Vesco}, +% \name{Boris}{Veytsman}, +% \name{Alexandre}{Vial}, +% \name{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}, +% \name{Florence M.}{Voegelin}, +% \name{Martin}{Vogel}, +% \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, +% \name{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}, +% \namea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}, +% \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, +% \name{David}{Walden}, +% \name{Jimmy}{Wales}, +% \name{Nigel}{Ward}, +% \name{John}{Warnock}, +% \name{Douglas}{Waud}% +% \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}, +% \name{Stephan~B.}{Webanck}, +% \name{Eduard}{Werner}, +% \name{Daphne}{West}, +% \name{Ferenc}{Wettl}, +% \name{Graham}{Williams}, +% \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, +% \namea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}, +% \name{Alexandre}{Wolf},% +% \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}, +% \name{Élisabeth}{Wolkowski}, +% \name{Mark}{Wooding}, +% \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}, +% \name{Tim}{Wright}, +% \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}, +% \name{Damien}{Wyart}, +% \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda}, +% \name{Adi}{Zaimi}, +% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}, +% \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}, +% \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}, +% \name{Charlie~S.}{Zender}, +% \name{Federico}{Zenith}, +% \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}, +% \name{Uwe}{Ziegenhagen}\ifcase\LANG\relax, and\ \or\relax\ et\ \fi +% \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}.\par +% \end{raggedright} +% ^^A NEW HISTORY END +% ^^A SEE.. +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \index{Suffixes|see{Extensions}} +% \or\relax +% \index{Extensions|see{Suffixes}} +% \fi +% \iftrue % ^^A to index authors from the bibliography (citations replace the page number) +% \bname{}{National Institute of the Korean}{korean-beg}% +% \bname{Iksop}{Lee}{kor-lan}% +% \bname{Bruce~K.}{Grant}{korean-chars}% +% \bname{Philippe}{Pelletier}{pelletier2003,pelletier2004,pelletier2007}% +% \bname{Philippe}{Pons}{pons2007}% +% \bname{Pierre-François}{Souyri}{pons2007,souyri1999}% +% \bnamea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}{japon-dc}% +% \bname{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}{chineco}% +% \bname{Yves}{Citoleux}{chineco}% +% \bnamea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}{chineco}% +% \bname{Jacques}{Gernet}{gernet1,gernet2,gernet3}% +% \bname{Viviane}{Alleton}{alleton2008}% +% \bnamea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}{mace2008}% +% \bname{Gérard}{Dorel}{atlasmi-us}% +% \bnamea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}{atlas-in}% +% \bname{Guillaume}{Balavoine}{atlas-in}% +% \bname{Pascal}{Marchand}{atlas-ru}% +% \bname{Cyrille}{Suss}{atlas-ru}% +% \bnamea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}{atlas-amla}% +% \bnamea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}{atlas-amla}% +% \bname{Yves}{Plassereau}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Henri}{Giordan}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Yves}{Ternon}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Cécile}{Marin}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Thierry}{Sanjuan}{sanjuan,chineco}% +% \bnamea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}{sanjuan}% +% \bname{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}{bisanwa}% +% \bnamea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}{bisanwa}% +% \bname{Victor}{Ivrii}{ivrii2007a,ivrii2007b}% +% \bname{Roland}{Breton}{breton2003,atlasmi-mo}% +% \bname{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}{breton2003}% +% \bname{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}{breton2003}% +% \bname{Stephen}{Matthews}{comrie2004}% +% \bname{Maria}{Polinsky}{comrie2004}% +% \bname{Catherine}{Bricout}{comrie2004}% +% \bname{Petra}{Schlager}{schlager2007}% +% \bname{Manfred}{Thibud}{schlager2007}% +% \bname{Monique}{Pontault}{OIF}% +% \bname{Alexandre}{Wolf}{OIF}% +% \bname{Christian}{Valantin}{OIF,OIF2003}% +% \bname{Florence}{Morgiensztern}{OIF,OIF2003}% +% \bname{Josiane}{Gonthier}{OIF}% +% \bname{Ariane}{Poissonnier}{AF}% +% \bname{Gérard}{Sournia}{AF}% +% \bnamea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}{AF}% +% \bname{Glanville}{Price}{LOE}% +% \bname{Peter~T.}{Daniels}{WWS}% +% \bname{William}{Bright}{WWS}% +% \bname{Bernard}{Comrie}{comrie1990,comrie2004}% +% \bname{Tristan}{Lorino}{lorino2006}% +% \bname{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}{ramsey1989,kor-lan}% +% \bname{Pierre}{Chuvin}{chuvin2008}% +% \bnamea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}{chuvin2008}% +% \bname{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}{chuvin2008}% +% \bnamea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}% +% \bname{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}{lua2005,lua2006}% +% \bnamea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}{lua2006}% +% \bname{Waldemar}{Celes}{lua2006}% +% \bnamea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}{ppvl}% +% \bname{Alan}{Marshall}{marshall1991}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Andries}{andries2008}% +% \bname{Roland}{Jacques}{ppvl}% +% \bname{Tobias}{Berndt}{berndt2007}% +% \bname{Joachim}{Schrod}{ilatex,guntermann1986,detig1994}% +% \bname{Guntermann}{Klaus}{guntermann1986}% +% \bname{Christine}{Detig}{detig1994}% +% \bname{Éric}{Martini}{martini2008}% +% \bname{Olivier}{Binisti}{rich2005}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Boman}{boman2005}% +% \bname{Christian}{Laucou}{boman2005}% +% \bname{François}{Richaudeau}{rich2005}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Burgel}{pluriels}% +% \bname{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}{cjkomega}% +% \bname{Haruhito}{Okamura}{cjkomega}% +% \bname{}{National Geographic Society}{atlas-china}% +% \bname{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}{beebe}% +% \bname{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{occi}% +% \bname{Elke}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}% +% \bname{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}{lipkin}% +% \bname{Michael}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}% +% \bname{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}{fnul,fgram,conju}% +% \bname{Claude}{Raimond}{enul}% +% \bname{Paul}{Rascoe}{texasmaps}% +% \bname{Christophe}{Jacquet}{mlatex}% +% \bname{Alice}{Davison}{hindi99}% +% \bname{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}{basque}% +% \bname{Jonathan}{Kew}{xetex}% +% \bname{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}{lowlands}% +% \bname{François}{Giron}{surlatex}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Egan}{nomentbl}% +% \bname{Brian}{Elmegaard}{nomentbl}% +% \bname{Ferenc}{Wettl}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}% +% \bname{Stéphane}{Aicardi}{aicardi}% +% \bname{Jouko}{Arponen}{practical}% +% \bname{Jason}{Baldridge}{jason}% +% \bname{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}{fancybox}% +% \bname{Frank}{Jensen}{calc}% +% \bname{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}{calc}% +% \bname{Akira}{Kakuto}{kakuto}% +% \bname{Lee}{Netherton}{nomencl}% +% \bname{Bernd}{Schandl}{nomencl}% +% \bname{Vartan}{Akopian}{armtex}% +% \bname{A.J.}{Alex}{malayalam,malayalam-o}% +% \bnamea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}{china-h}% +% \bnamea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}{icelandic}% +% \bnamea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}% +% \bnamea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}{ethno}% +% \bname{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}{ethno}% +% \bnamea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}{ingo}% +% \bname{Donald}{Arseneau}{notoccite,placeins,cite,overcite,wrapfig,chapterbib,url,ifmtarg}% +% \bname{Gonçal}{Badenes}{catalan}% +% \bname{Pierre}{Basso}{bibtopic}% +% \bname{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}{mongolian}% +% \bname{David}{Bausum}{trm-b,trm}% +% \bname{Benjamin}{Bayart}{JMPL1,texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Thierry}{Bayet}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Claudio}{Beccari}{beccari1998,latin,italian,beccari-pj-2007-1}% +% \bname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}{rubber}% +% \bnamea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}{magyar}% +% \bname{Jens}{Berger}{hypernat}% +% \bname{Alexander}{Berdnikov}{maccents,X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}% +% \bname{Karl}{Berry}{impatient,fr-impatient,berry1990,berry2003}% +% \bname{Berhanu}{Beyene}{ethiop}% +% \bname{Javier}{Bezos}{spanish4,spanish,guarani,titletoc}% +% \bname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}{aleph}% +% \bnamea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}{magyar}% +% \bnamea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}{latex-synthex}% +% \bname{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}{bulgarian}% +% \bname{Victor}{Boyko}{cmcyralt/russian.sty}% +% \bname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,dutch,english,irish,norsk,welsh,basque,% +% icelandic,catalan,latin,magyar,bulgarian,turkish,LaTeXbase,galician,galician2,slovak,italian,BEP,% +% frenchb,scottish,swedish,romanian,samin,finnish,interlingua,bahasa,bahasam,russianb1,danish,hebrew2,% +% czech,serbian,croatian,germanb,ngermanb,portuges,breton,esperanto,estonian,polish,ukraineb,greek,% +% lsorbian,usorbian,albanian,slovene,i-ntg,ntg,proc,classes,letter,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F}% +% \bname{Felix}{Braun}{jura}% +% \bname{Jim}{Breen}{breen}% +% \bname{Mustafa}{Burc}{turkish}% +% \bname{Alexey}{Burykin}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}% +% \bname{David}{Carella}{carella}% +% \bname{David~P.}{Carlisle}{LaTeXbase,xr,afterpage,ltxdoc,xr-hyper,color,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,ltclass,ifthen,backref,textcase}% +% \bname{Manuel}{Carriba}{galician,galician2}% +% \bname{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}{latex-synthex,ftb,TLC2F,jcc2008,ftds}% +% \bname{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}{kanji}% +% \bname{Pehong}{Chen}{chen1988}% +% \bnamea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}{slovak}% +% \bname{Bernard}{Desgraupes}{meta-des,desgraupes,unicode-des}% +% \bname{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}{subfigure,captcont,subfig}% +% \bname{Maurizio}{Codogno}{italian}% +% \bname{Oliver}{Corff}{mlsquick,pentaglot,mongol-web,montex}% +% \bname{Prakash}{Countcham}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Sergueï}{Dachian}{armtex}% +% \bname{Arnak}{Dalalyan}{armtex}% +% \bname{Patrick~W.}{Daly}{fullpage,dnatbib,natnotes,kopka,daly1998}% +% \bnamea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}{portuges}% +% \bname{Éric}{Depardieu}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}{montex}% +% \bname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}{texfaq-fr,shorttoc,minitoc-fr,minitoc}% +% \bnamea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}{BEP,TBT,comment,i-ntg,ntg}% +% \bname{Behdad}{Esfahbod}{farsi}% +% \bname{Mike}{Fabian}{cjk-suse}% +% \bname{Robin}{Fairbairns}{texfaq-en}% +% \bname{Jürgen}{Fenn}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen,Fenn-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{Daniel}{Flipo}{frenchb,CIL2E}% +% \bname{Peter}{Flynn}{flynn,veryshort,Flynn-pj-2005-3,Flynn-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}{farsi}% +% \bname{Michel}{Goossens}{latex-web,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,TLGC}% +% \bname{Mathieu}{Goutelle}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Fraser}{Grant}{irish,scottish}% +% \bnamea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}{gr-mil,gr-mmil,gr-fsl}% +% \bname{Norman}{Gray}{urlbst}% +% \bname{George~D.}{Greenwade}{greenwade}% +% \bname{Enrico}{Gregorio}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,gregorio2007}% +% \bname{Olga~A.}{Grineva}{maccents}% +% \bname{Marion}{Gunn}{irish}% +% \bname{Hans}{Hagen}{aleph-hagen,style-hagen,pdftex,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,luatex}% +% \bname{Hartmut}{Henkel}{luatex}% +% \bname{Taco}{Hoekwater}{luatex,luatex2007}% +% \bnamea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}{han,han2000,pdftex,vietnam,han2003,han2008,han2008a}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Happel}{lipsum}% +% \bname{Yannis}{Haralambous}{yannis1990,YH2004,YH2007,yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998,yannis2004,yannis+a}% +% \bname{Alexander}{Harin}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}% +% \bname{Michael~A.}{Harrison}{chen1988}% +% \bname{Sten}{Hellman}{swedish}% +% \bname{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}{norsk}% +% \bname{Yvon}{Henel}{texfaq-fr,l2tabufr}% +% \bname{Thomas}{Henlich}{marvosym}% +% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}% +% \bname{Florence}{Henry}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{David}{Hoadley}{btxfaq}% +% \bname{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}{norsk}% +% \bname{Umstatter}{Horst}{romanian}% +% \bname{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}{norsk}% +% \bname{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}{basque}% +% \bname{Youssef}{Jabri}{arabi}% +% \bname{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}{pearls}% +% \bname{Michael}{Janich}{polish}% +% \bname{Regnor}{Jernsletten}{samin}% +% \bname{Zhuhan}{Jiang}{vruler}% +% \bname{Loïc}{Joly}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{David~M.}{Jones}{hangcaption}% +% \bname{Christophe}{Jorssen}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Robert}{Juhasz}{romanian}% +% \bname{Mikko}{Kanerva}{finnish}% +% \bname{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}{thailatex,thaistd}% +% \bname{Axel}{Kielhorn}{koma,komab}% +% \bname{Ki-Joo}{Kim}{bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim,latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim}% +% \bname{Peter}{Kleiweg}{interlingua}% +% \bname{Rune}{Kleveland}{norsk}% +% \bname{Jörg}{Knappen}{bahasa,bahasam,esperanto,knappen2004}% +% \bname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}{cmt,texbook,metabook,ftb}% +% \bname{Markus}{Kohm}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Yuri}{Robbers}{robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}{robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Helmut}{Kopka}{kopka,kopka-bd1,kopka-bd2,kopka-bd3}% +% \bname{Attila}{Koppanyi}{magyar}% +% \bname{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}{antomega}% +% \bname{Dmitry}{Ivanov}{antomega}% +% \bname{Manfred}{Kudlek}{ethiop}% +% \bname{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}{effective}% +% \bname{Olaf}{Kummer}{ethiop}% +% \bnamea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}{alnumsec}% +% \bname{Klaus}{Lagally}{arabtex2,arabtex}% +% \bname{Leslie}{Lamport}{LaTeXbase,lamport-mkx,latex-manual,ntg,proc,classes,letter}% +% \bname{Olga~G.}{Lapko}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC,russianb1,FULLCYR,floatrow,russianb,ukraineb}% +% \bname{Henning}{Larsen}{danish}% +% \bname{Boris}{Lavva}{hebrew2}% +% \bname{Olivier}{Lecarme}{lecarme}% +% \bname{Jacques}{Leclerc}{tlfq}% +% \bname{Philipp}{Lehman}{TFIG}% +% \bname{Werner}{Lemberg}{russianb1,cjk,cjk2,vietnam,dblaccnt,cyrguide,ukraineb}% +% \bnamea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Knut}{Lickert}{minutes}% +% \bname{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}{fncychap}% +% \bname{Anselm}{Lingnau}{float}% +% \bnamea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}{czech}% +% \bname{Maurizio}{Loreti}{sfheaders}% +% \bname{Tim}{Love}{timlove1994,timlove}% +% \bname{Vincent}{Lozano}{lozano}% +% \bname{Ken}{Lunde}{lunde1993,lunde,lunde1999}% +% \bname{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}{turkish}% +% \bname{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}{russianb}% +% \bname{Bob}{Margolis}{bahasam}% +% \bname{Nicolas}{Markey}{texfaq-fr,splitbib,ttb}% +% \bname{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Terry}{Mart}{bahasa,bahasam}% +% \bname{Sven}{Mattisson}{slatex}% +% \bname{Rowland}{McDonnell}{sectsty}% +% \bname{Surapant}{Meknavin}{thailatex}% +% \bname{Sébastien}{Mengin}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Jochen}{Metzinger}{ethiop}% +% \bname{Frank}{Mittelbach}{LaTeXbase,classes,letter,FMI1990,FMI1992,slides,multicol,varioref,doc,dblaccnt,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,enc-inter,TLGC}% +% \bname{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}{komab,koma}% +% \bname{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,Mori1-pj-2007-1,Mori2-pj-2007-1}% +% \bnamea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}{galician,galician2}% +% \bnamea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}{serbian}% +% \bname{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}{LH/russian.sty}% +% \bname{Frank}{Neukam}{koma,komab}% +% \bname{Rolf}{Niepraschk}{pict2e,texfaq-de}% +% \bname{Josef}{Tkadlec}{pict2e}% +% \bname{Josselin}{Noirel}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hypcap,ifpdf,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,makerobust}% +% \bname{Mariusz}{Olko}{polski}% +% \bnamea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}{swedish}% +% \bnamea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}{croatian}% +% \bname{Scott}{Pakin}{dtxtut,symbols,newcommand}% +% \bname{Palash~Baran}{Pal}{bangtex}% +% \bname{Anshuman}{Pandey}{pandey1999,devanagari}% +% \bname{John}{Smith}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Harold}{Thimbleby}{seealso,seealso1}% +% \bname{Dominik}{Wujastyk}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Kevin}{Carmody}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Oren}{Patashnik}{btxdoc,btxhak}% +% \bname{Kasper}{Peeters}{hypertex}% +% \bname{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}{norsk}% +% \bname{Bruno}{Piguet}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{John}{Plaice}{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}% +% \bname{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}{thailatex,thai-how}% +% \bname{Nico}{Poppelier}{BEP}% +% \bname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}{farsi}% +% \bname{Sebastian}{Rahtz}{latex-web,pdftex,hyperref.web,hyperref,TLGC,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,backref,nameref,rotating}% +% \bname{Leonor}{Barroca}{rotating}% +% \bname{Bernd}{Raichle}{germanb,ngermanb,texfaq-de,romaniantex}% +% \bname{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}{portuges}% +% \bname{Keranen}{Reino}{finnish}% +% \bname{Arthur}{Reutenauer}{reutenauer2008}% +% \bnamea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}{romaniantex}% +% \bname{Christian}{Rolland}{breton,rolland1999}% +% \bname{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}{esperanto}% +% \bname{Young}{Ryu}{txfonts}% +% \bname{Enn}{Saar}{estonian}% +% \bnamea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}{basque}% +% \bname{Eddie}{Saudrais}{saudrais2001,saudrais2005}% +% \bnamea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}{polish}% +% \bname{Tobias}{Schlemmer}{slovak}% +% \bname{Walter}{Schmidt}{ngermanb,Schmidt-pj-2006-1,psnfss,fftex}% +% \bnamea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}{multitoc,pdftex,msch2007}% +% \bname{Michael}{Shell}{btxfaq}% +% \bname{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}{ukraineb}% +% \bname{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}{thailatex}% +% \bname{Jankovic}{Slobodan}{serbian}% +% \bname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}{caption2,cap-anleitung,caption,caption-eng,rotfloat}% +% \bname{Joseph~A.}{Wright}{trivfloat}% +% \bname{D.~P.}{Story}{dpstory}% +% \bname{Éric}{Streit}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}{beccari1998,greek,syro2002,greek-ba}% +% \bnamea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}{varsects}% +% \bnamea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}{frenchle,frenchpro,frenchperso}% +% \bname{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}{quotchap}% +% \bname{Mark}{Trettin}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen}% +% \bname{Stefan}{Ulrich}{bibtopic}% +% \bname{Un}{Koaunghi}{HLATEX}% +% \bname{Turgut}{Uyar}{turkish}% +% \bname{Piet}{van~Oostrum}{teximpl}% +% \bnamea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}{texfaq-fr,thomasvo}% +% \bname{Vladimir}{Volovich}{russianb1,cyrguide,ukraineb}% +% \bname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}{Bechtolsheim+TB11-3-409,tex-bech}% +% \bname{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}{platex-pl}% +% \bname{Eduard}{Werner}{lsorbian,usorbian}% +% \bname{Graham}{Williams}{tcat}% +% \bname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}{stdclsdv,needspace,tocloft,abstract,appendix,tocbibind,tocvsec2,ccaption,docmfp,memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3,romannum,ifmtarg,ledmac,ledpar,ledarab,chngpage}% +% \bnamea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}{docstrip-prog,polski}% +% \bname{Damien}{Wyart}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Adi}{Zaimi}{albanian}% +% \bname{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}{slovene}% +% \bnamea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}{latin}% +% \bname{Charlie~S.}{Zender}{latex-cheat}% +% \bname{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,lhcyr}% +% \bnamea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}{slovene}% +% \bname{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}{impatient,fr-impatient}% +% \bname{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}{impatient,fr-impatient}% +% \bname{Mark}{Alford}{alford}% +% \bname{Walter}{Appel}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Céline}{Chevalier}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Emmanuel}{Cornet}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Sébastien}{Desreux}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Paul}{Pichaureau}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Helmer}{Aslasken}{aslaksen,aslaksen2}% +% \bname{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}{arabe}% +% \bname{Cécile}{Desprairies}{arabe,japo,chinois,russe}% +% \bname{Antoni~R.}{Diller}{diller}% +% \bname{Fabrice}{Popineau}{ftds}% +% \bname{Alan}{Jeffrey}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,ltnews,ltclass}% +% \bname{Chris~A.}{Rowley}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,rowley1999,calc}% +% \bnamea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}{LaTeXbase,letter}% +% \bname{Peter}{Breitenlohner}{etex}% +% \bname{Otfried}{Cheong}{cheong}% +% \bname{Pai~H.}{Chou}{chou}% +% \bname{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}{fergu90}% +% \bname{Maarten}{Gelderman}{gelderman}% +% \bname{Chuck}{Genschte}{pdfspec}% +% \bname{John}{Warnock}{pdfspec}% +% \bname{Helen}{Gilhooly}{japo}% +% \bname{Gilhooly}{Etienne}{japo}% +% \bname{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}{latex-web}% +% \bname{Ross}{Moore}{latex-web}% +% \bname{Robert~S.}{Sutor}{latex-web}% +% \bname{Thorsten}{Hansen}{multibib,bibunits}% +% \bname{Éric}{Picheral}{yannis1995}% +% \bname{Alan}{Hoenig}{unbound}% +% \bname{Hiroya}{Ikeda}{platex-jp}% +% \bname{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}{styleuse}% +% \bname{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}{styleuse}% +% \bname{Siep}{Kroonenberg}{MAPS22-13}% +% \bname{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}{lachand}% +% \bname{Denys}{Duchier}{docstrip-prog}% +% \bname{Mark}{Wooding}{docstrip-prog}% +% \bname{Young~Joon}{Moon}{young-mm}% +% \bname{Tobias}{Oetiker}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Hubert}{Partl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Helene}{Hyna}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Tanguy}{Ortolo}{ortolo}% +% \bname{Jeanne}{Legrand}{ortolo}% +% \bnamea{}{{\LaTeX3}~{Project}~{Team}}{latex3}{ltnews,proc,docstrip,ltoutput,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,encguide,cyrguide} +% \bname{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}{park2003}% +% \bname{Jonathan}{Pechta}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bname{Federico}{Zenith}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bname{Holger}{Danielsson}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bnamea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bnamea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}{piska}% +% \bname{Mimi}{Burbank}{piska}% +% \bname{Christina}{Thiele}{piska,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% +% \bname{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}{venkatesan}% +% \bname{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}{voeg}% +% \bname{Florence M.}{Voegelin}{voeg}% +% \bname{Daphne}{West}{russe}% +% \bname{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}{russe}% +% \bname{Thomas}{Hafner}{texfaq-de}% +% \bname{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}{chinois}% +% \bname{Lianyi}{Song}{chinois}% +% \bname{Charles}{Grether}{chinois}% +% \bname{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}{syro2002}% +% \bname{Nick}{Sofroniou}{syro2002}% +% \bname{}{TWS-TDS}{ftds,tds}% +% \bname{Hideo}{Umeki}{geometry}% +% \bname{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}{TLC2F,hufflen}% +% \bname{Benoît}{Belet}{TLC2F}% +% \bname{Yves}{Soulet}{TLC2F}% +% \bnamea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}{TLC2F,jcc2008,yannis+a}% +% \bname{Samuele}{Carcagno}{carcagno}% +% \bname{Simon}{Fear}{booktabs}% +% \bname{Danie}{Els}{booktabs}% +% \bname{Martin}{Vogel}{marvosym}% +% \bname{Don}{Hosek}{morefloats}% +% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}% +% \bnamea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}{pict2e}% +% \bname{Winston}{Chang}{latexsheet}% +% \bname{Didier}{Verna}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bname{Bernd}{Jaehne}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bname{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}{ltx-primer,nomencl}% +% \bname{C.~S.}{Yogananda}{kannadatex}% +% \bname{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}{kannadatex}% +% \bname{Vadim}{Maslov}{cmcyralt/russian.sty,cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}% +% \bname{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}{Schmitz-pj-2007-1}% +% \bname{Federico}{Garcia}{Garcia-pj-2006-4,garcia2007}% +% \bname{Boris}{Veytsman}{Veytsman-pj-2006-4-design,nomencl}% +% \bname{Sindhu}{Singh}{Singh-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{Will}{Robertson}{Robertson-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Stephen}{Hartke}{Hartke-pj-2006-1}% +% \bname{Jim}{Hefferon}{Hefferon-pj-2005-4,Hefferon-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{David}{Walden}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% +% \bname{Philip}{Taylor}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,taylor1996}% +% \bname{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,talbot2004,novices,flowfram,ffuserguide,talbot-admin,talbot-phd,talbot-thesis,talbot-mini}% +% \bname{Joe}{Hogg}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% +% \bnamea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}{Hoeppner-pj-2005-3}% +% \bname{Peter~L.}{Flom}{Flom-pj-2005-2,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,Flom-pj-2005-4}% +% \bname{Douglas}{Waud}{Waud-pj-2005-1}% +% \bname{Tim}{Null}{Waud-pj-2005-1,Null-pj-2005-2-bh02,Null-pj-2005-3-bh03}% +% \bname{Michael~A.}{Morrison}{morrison}% +% \bname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}{TLGC}% +% \bnamea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}{TLGC,voss2006}% +% \bname{Christian}{Faulhammer}{preusse}% +% \bname{Ulrich}{Schwartz}{preusse}% +% \bnamea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}{preusse}% +% \bname{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}{LMP}% +% \bname{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}{LMP}% +% \bpack{xargs}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}% +% \bpack{chngpage}{chngpage}% +% \bpack{ledmac}{ledmac}% +% \bpack{ledpar}{ledpar}% +% \bpack{ledarab}{ledarab}% +% \bpack{afoot}{ledarab}% +% \bpack{frenchle}{frenchle}% +% \bpack{frenchpro}{frenchpro,frenchperso}% +% \bpack{flowfram}{flowfram,ffuserguide}% +% \bpack{nomentbl}{nomentbl}% +% \bpack{minitoc}{minitoc-fr,minitoc}% +% \bpack{Aleph}{aleph,aleph-hagen}% +% \bpack{dblaccnt}{dblaccnt}% +% \bpack{nomencl}{nomencl}% +% \bpack{hypernat}{hypernat}% +% \bpack{fancybox}{fancybox}% +% \bpack{shorttoc}{shorttoc}% +% \bpack{appendix}{appendix}% +% \bpack{babel}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}% +% \bpack{hyperref}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}% +% \bpack{backref}{backref}% +% \bpack{nameref}{nameref}% +% \bpack{rotating}{rotating}% +% \bpack{hypcap}{hypcap}% +% \bpack{ifpdf}{ifpdf}% +% \bpack{notoccite}{notoccite}% +% \bpack{placeins}{placeins}% +% \bpack{tocbibind}{tocbibind}% +% \bpack{tocloft}{tocloft}% +% \bpack{titletoc}{titletoc}% +% \bpack{titlesec}{titletoc}% +% \bpacka{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}{arabtex2,arabtex}% +% \bpacka{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}{xetex}% +% \bpack{minutes}{minutes}% +% \bpack{needspace}{needspace}% +% \bpack{txfonts}{txfonts}% +% \bpack{ifmtarg}{ifmtarg}% +% \bpack{abstract}{abstract}% +% \bpack{xr}{xr}% +% \bpack{textcase}{textcase}% +% \bpack{ethiop}{ethiop}% +% \bpack{sectsty}{sectsty}% +% \bpack{subfig}{subfig}% +% \bpack{comment}{comment}% +% \bpack{ccaption}{ccaption}% +% \bpack{caption}{caption,caption-eng}% +% \bpack{caption2}{caption2,cap-anleitung}% +% \bpack{bibtopic}{bibtopic}% +% \bpack{bibunits}{bibunits}% +% \bpack{chapterbib}{chapterbib}% +% \bpack{multibib}{multibib}% +% \bpack{hangcaption}{hangcaption}% +% \bpack{varsects}{varsects}% +% \bpack{xr-hyper}{xr-hyper}% +% \bpack{stdclsdv}{stdclsdv}% +% \bpack{CJK}{aslaksen,aslaksen2,chou,cjk-suse,cjk,cjk2,kile-cjk}% +% \bpack{docstrip}{docstrip,docstrip-prog}% +% \btool{urlbst}{urlbst}% +% \btool{rubber}{rubber}% +% \btool{newcommand}{newcommand}% +% \bpack{float}{float}% +% \bpack{floatrow}{floatrow}% +% \bpack{trivfloat}{trivfloat}% +% \bpack{rotfloat}{rotfloat}% +% \bpack{fncychap}{fncychap}% +% \bpack{quotchap}{quotchap}% +% \bpack{romannum}{romannum}% +% \bpack{sfheaders}{sfheaders}% +% \bpack{alnumsec}{alnumsec}% +% \bpack{captcont}{captcont}% +% \bpack{vruler}{vruler}% +% \bpack{doc}{doc}% +% \bpack{shortverb}{doc}% +% \bpack{tocvsec2}{tocvsec2}% +% \bpack{thailatex}{thailatex}% +% \bpack{lipsum}{lipsum}% +% \bpack{subfigure}{subfigure}% +% \bpack{multicol}{multicol}% +% \bpack{geometry}{geometry}% +% \bpack{wrapfig}{wrapfig}% +% \bpacka{\eTeX}{etex}{etex,FMI1990}% +% \bpacka{\Arabi}{arabi}{arabi}% +% \bpack{color}{color}% +% \bpack{docmfp}{docmfp}% +% \bpack{splitbib}{splitbib}% +% \bpack{afterpage}{afterpage}% +% \bpack{multitoc}{multitoc}% +% \bpack{cite}{cite}% +% \bpack{booktabs}{booktabs}% +% \bpack{url}{url}% +% \bpack{varioref}{varioref}% +% \bpack{fullpage}{fullpage}% +% \bpack{marvosym}{marvosym}% +% \bpack{guarani}{guarani}% +% \bpacka{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}{mlsquick,montex}% +% \bpacka{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}{armtex}% +% \bpack{Antomega}{antomega}% +% \bpacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}{bangtex}% +% \bpacka{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}{spanish4}% +% \bpacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}{devanagari}% +% \bpack{malayalam}{malayalam}% +% \bpack{omal}{malayalam-o}% +% \bpacka{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}{platex-jp,kakuto}% +% ^^A \bpacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX}{polski,platex-pl}% +% \bpack{polski}{polski,platex-pl}% +% \bpacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}{slatex}% +% \bpacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}{farsi}% +% \bpacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}{HLATEX}% +% \bpack{LH}{LH/russian.sty}% +% \bpack{lhcyr}{lhcyr}% +% \bpack{cmcyralt}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,cmcyralt/russian.sty}% +% \bpacka{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}{romaniantex}% +% \bpack{flafter}{ltoutput,TLC2}% +% \bpack{alphanum}{jura}% +% \bpack{morefloats}{morefloats}% +% \bpack{natbib}{dnatbib,natnotes}% +% \bpack{overcite}{overcite}% +% \bpack{pict2e}{pict2e}% +% \bpacka{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}{kannadatex}% +% \bpacka{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}{hypertex}% +% \bpacka{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}{luatex,luatex2007}% +% \bpack{mcaption}{mcaption}% +% \bpack{minitoc-hyper}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bpack{vietnam}{vietnam}% +% \bpack{calc}{calc}% +% \bpack{makerobust}{makerobust}% +% \bclass{memoir}{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{jura}{jura}% +% \bclass{amsart}{amslatex}% +% \bclass{amsproc}{amslatex}% +% \bclass{amsbook}{amslatex}% +% \bclass{scrbook}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrartcl}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrreprt}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrlettr}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrlttr2}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{article}{classes}% +% \bclass{report}{classes}% +% \bclass{book}{classes}% +% \bclass{letter}{letter}% +% \bclass{slides}{slides}% +% \bclass{ltxdoc}{ltxdoc}% +% \bclass{ltnews}{ltnews}% +% \bclass{proc}{proc}% +% \fi +% \Finale +% \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d00b6372bd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins @@ -0,0 +1,2179 @@ +\begin{filecontents}{./dblaccnt.sty} +% Copyright 2000 Frank Mittelbach <frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org>. +% License: LPPL, version 1.3a or newer, according to +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +% +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. +% +% +% This is the file dblaccnt.tex which implements support for multiple +% accents. +% +% +% The code below handles only the case of +% +% \acc1 \acc2 ... glyph +% +% with or without nesting braces. +% +% \acc1 {\acc2 a} +% +% etc. will be handled correctly by removing the brace group during +% the scanning process. This means in particular that conceptually +% any accent command can only handle single token arguments! +% +% It should also work for combinations generated from inputenc, i.e., +% are presented as 8bit tokens or, after passing through something like +% an .aux file, as \IeC{\acc1} \IeC{\acc2} ... +% +% If you use OT1 encoding you have to explicitly reload it (with +% \usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}). +% +% +% History +% +% 1.0 2000/01/27 +% +% Initial release. +% +% 1.1 2005/04/21 +% +% Make it work with LaTeX release 2003/12/01. +% Add copyright message and history. +% + +\ProvidesPackage{dblaccnt}[2005/04/21 v1.1 double accent support] + +\endlinechar \m@ne + + +% We must redefine two internal LaTeX commands to provide hooks for +% assembling accents. + +% Here we test whether #1 (the command to be executed) is \chardef or +% #3 (the encoding) is `?'. If both are false, \assemble@accent@cmds +% will be used. +% +% The first case catches \DeclareTextSymbol, the second catches +% \ProvideTextCommandDefault. Both checks are ugly hacks which hopefully +% disappear in the near future. +% +\def\@dec@text@cmd#1#2#3{ + \ifx#1\chardef + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \else + \ifx#1\chardef@text@cmd + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \else + \if#3? + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \else + \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ + % start looking for acc tokens + \expandafter\assemble@accent@cmds + \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter#2 + \csname#3\string#2\endcsname + } + \fi + \fi + \fi + \let\@ifdefinable\@rc@ifdefinable + \expandafter#1\csname#3\string#2\endcsname +} + + +% The redefined \@tabacckludge macro below assures that the top-level +% definition of the accents (which contains \assemble@accent@cmds) +% will be called. +% +\def\@make@tabacc#1#2{ + \expandafter\def\csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname{#2} +} + +\@make@tabacc{'}{\@acci} +\@make@tabacc{`}{\@accii} +\@make@tabacc{=}{\@acciii} + + +% Here the redefinition of second internal LaTeX macro. +% +\def\@tabacckludge#1{ + \csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname +} + + +% We only look ahead for further accents if we are to typeset. +% +\def\assemble@accent@cmds{ + \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect + \expandafter\assemble@tokensinit + \fi +} + + +% The init is special as we have to parse over some of the expansion +% of the encoding specific command; for example, \^ might expand to +% +% \assemble@accent@cmds \OT1-cmd \^ \OT1\^ +% ^^^^^^ one token +% +% We start \assemble@tokens with the number of hits so far (\@empty), +% zero the actual code for the current, e.g., \OT1\^ in the above +% example (resp. the corresponding macro in the current font +% encoding), and as a third argument we will pick up the next token +% or group in the input stream for testing. +% +\def\assemble@tokensinit#1#2#3{ + % the usual test for availability in the current encoding + % similar to the test in \@changed@cmd + \@inmathwarn#2 + \expandafter\ifx\csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname ?\string#2\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\def\csname ?\string#2\endcsname{ + \TextSymbolUnavailable#2 + } + \fi + \global\expandafter\let + \csname\cf@encoding \string#2\expandafter\endcsname + \csname ?\string#2\endcsname + \fi + + % here we substitute the current encoding + \expandafter\assemble@tokens@\expandafter\@empty + \csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname +} + + +% The next commands should be considered only as a proof of concept +% -- they can most certainly be streamlined. Here is roughly what +% they do: +% +% \assemble@tokens: If the picked up token is \IeC then get rid of it +% and parse the next token (or group) which is expected to be the +% argument of \IeC. This is done by restarting the whole process. +% Otherwise we have to figure out if the current token (#3) is an +% 8-bit from inputenc, i.e., expanding to \IeC{...}. This is +% handled by calling \assemble@tokensz passing an expansion of #3 +% as well as #3 (or more exactly, its first token since the braces +% get removed in this process) itself. +% +% \assemble@tokensz: Test if the expansion start with \IeC in which +% case it is assumed that it comes from an inputenc 8bit; the next +% token will be considered as its argument and used for further +% processing in \assemble@tokensx. Otherwise the unexpanded #3 +% from above is used. +% +% \assemble@tokensx: If this cmd is called its third argument should +% contain a normalized token from the input stream, i.e. +% +% {..} -> .. +% \IeC{..} -> .. +% ^^xx (expanding to) \IeC{..} -> .. +% +% Now all :-) that remains is testing whether the expansion of this +% token starts with \assemble@accent@cmds, since in this case we have +% found another accent cmd. +% +% #1 is the number of hits, #2 is the real definition in that +% encoding, and #3 is the next token (or group). +% +% The macros \assemble@tokens@ and \assemble@tokens@@ are +% intermediate steps to test whether #3 is empty; if yes, we simply +% expand #2. +% +\def\assemble@tokens@#1#2#3{ + \assemble@tokens@@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#3\@empty} +} + +\def\assemble@tokens@@#1#2#3#4{ + \ifx#4\@empty + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi + {#2{}} + {\assemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}} +} + +\def\assemble@tokens#1#2#3{ + \ifx\IeC#3 + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi + % try again but pick up argument of \IeC + {\assemble@tokens@{#1}{#2}} + % this will get rid of a group argument -- nasty :-) + {\expandafter\assemble@tokensz#3\relax\assemble@tokensz{#1}{#2}#3} +} + +\def\assemble@tokensz#1#2\assemble@tokensz#3#4#5{ + \ifx#1\IeC + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi + {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#2} + {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#5} +} + +% \assemble@tokensx: This passes an expanded and unexpanded version +% of #3 to \ifassemble@tokens to do the actual processing. +% +% \ifassemble@tokens: If we have found another accent command then +% keep its name and record that we had another hit and restart the +% scanning via \assemble@tokens, i.e., we append an `x' to the +% ``hit'' argument that we carry around for no good reason, and we +% append the official name of the accent command (which was picked +% up as part of the expansion of the input token) to the argument, +% storing the list of accents found so far. Note that we do use +% the official name, e.g. `\"', not `\OT1\"' -- the latter is only +% used for the very first accent! +% +% If it turns out that we don't have an accent command here it is +% time to stop the scanning and do some processing. Now finally the +% ``hit'' argument and the list of collected accents comes into play: +% We construct a command which name consists of the string +% ``handle@accent'', followed by a number of `x's each for each hit +% earlier on. Thus in a situation like \"\^a we would execute +% \handle@accentx and in case of \"a \handle@accent. This command +% gets as its arguments the collected accents followed by the token +% which stopped the scanning proccess, e.g. +% +% \handle@accentx \OT1\" \^ {a} +% +% and its purpose is to determine how to produce a glyph from it +% (e.g. as a composite or as a part composite or ...) +% +\def\assemble@tokensx#1#2#3{ + \expandafter + \ifassemble@tokens#3\@empty\@empty\@empty\ifassemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}} + +\def\ifassemble@tokens#1#2#3#4\ifassemble@tokens#5#6#7{ + % next token was defined via \DeclareText... + \ifx#1\assemble@accent@cmds + % thus #3 is its official name + \expandafter\assemble@tokens@ + \else + % execute what has been assembled and exit + \csname handle@accent#5\endcsname#6{#7} + \expandafter\@gobbletwo + \fi + % first two args to \assemble@tokens on next pass + {#5x}{#6#3} +} + + +% Depending on the number of accents found, \handle@accent[x[x]] will +% be called. + +% ONLY ONE: We check whether \#1-#2 is a known command (a composite) +% and execute it, otherwise try to execute #1{#2} as an accent +% command. +% +\def\handle@accent#1#2{ + \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname\relax + #1{#2} + \else + \csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname + \fi +} + +% TWO IN A ROW: We check for \#1-#2-#3. If undefined, we apply #1 to +% whatever is the result of #2{#3}. One could think of a more +% complex algorithm here, e.g., if #1-#2 is known as a composite +% modifier (whatever that is) apply that before trying the above but +% this is probably not necessary. +% +\def\handle@accentx#1#2#3{ + \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname\relax + #1{#2{#3}} + \else + \csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname + \fi +} + +% MORE THAN TWO: (Not handled so far.) If there are more than three, +% then the parsing will die at some point when \handle@accentxx... +% will turn out to be \relax, and then one accent will become an +% argument of another -- too bad. +% +\def\handle@accentxx#1#2#3#4{ + % catch more than two accents in a row + \errmessage{Too many accents, dropping first} + #2#3#4 +} + + +% This is simpler now. +% +\def\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4{ + \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname + #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3\endcsname{#4} +} + +% This is new. +% +\def\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4#5{ + \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname + #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3-\string#4\endcsname{#5} +} + +% This also. +% +\catcode\z@=11\relax +\def\DeclareTextDoubleComposite#1#2#3#4#5{ + \def\reserved@a{\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1{#2}{#3}{#4}} + \bgroup + \lccode\z@#5 + \lowercase{ + \egroup + \reserved@a ^^@} +} +\catcode\z@=15\relax + + +% Now we reinitialize the \@acc... macros to use our new definitions. +% +\AtBeginDocument{ + \let\@acci \' + \let\@accii \` + \let\@acciii \= +} + + +\endlinechar `\^^M + +\endinput + +% end of dblaccnt.tex +\end{filecontents} +\bgroup +\catcode`\^^?=11 +\begin{filecontents}{./chinese1.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file file Bg5.cap of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Chinese captions +% +% character set: Big 5 +% encoding: Big 5 +% +\def\ptctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}% +\def\plftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}% +\def\plttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}% +% +\def\mtctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}% +\def\mlftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}% +\def\mlttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}% +% +\def\stctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}% +\def\slftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}% +\def\slttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./chinese2.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Chinese captions +% +% character set: Big 5 +% encoding: Big 5 +% +% preprocessed +% +\def\ptctitle{¥216~~¿253} +\def\plftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253} +\def\plttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253} +% +\def\mtctitle{¥216~~¿253} +\def\mlftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253} +\def\mlttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253} +% +\def\stctitle{¥216~~¿253} +\def\slftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253} +\def\slttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253} +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./farsi1.mlo} +\ProvidesFiles{farsi1.mlo}[2005/09/13] +% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project +% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, +% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), +% Hassan Abolhassani, and others. +% http://www.farsitex.org +\def\ptctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–} +\def\plftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ} +\def\plttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ} +% +\def\mtctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–} +\def\mlftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ} +\def\mlttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ} +% +\def\stctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–} +\def\slftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ} +\def\slttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ} +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./farsi2.mlo} +\ProvidesFiles{farsi2.mlo}[2005/09/13] +% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project +% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, +% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), +% Hassan Abolhassani, and others. +% http://www.farsitex.org +\def\ptctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê} +\def\plftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó} +\def\plttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó} +% +\def\mtctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê} +\def\mlftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó} +\def\mlttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó} +% +\def\stctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê} +\def\slftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó} +\def\slttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó} +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hangul1.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Hangul captions +% +% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) +% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +\def\ptctitle{¸ñÂ÷}% +\def\plftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}% +\def\plttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}% +% +\def\mtctitle{¸ñÂ÷}% +\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}% +\def\mlttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}% +% +\def\stctitle{¸ñÂ÷}% +\def\slftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}% +\def\slttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hangul2.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Hangul captions +% +% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) +% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +% preprocessed +% +\def\ptctitle{¸241Â247}% +\def\plftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}% +\def\plttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}% +% +\def\mtctitle{¸241Â247}% +\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}% +\def\mlttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}% +% +\def\stctitle{¸241Â247}% +\def\slftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}% +\def\slttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hangul3.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Hangul captions set 2 +% +% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) +% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +\def\ptctitle{Â÷·Ê}% +\def\plftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}% +\def\plttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}% +% +\def\mtctitle{Â÷·Ê}% +\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}% +\def\mlttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}% +% +\def\stctitle{Â÷·Ê}% +\def\slftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}% +\def\slttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hangul4.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Hangul captions set 2 +% +% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) +% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +% preprocessed +% +\def\ptctitle{Â247·202}% +\def\plftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}% +\def\plttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}% +% +\def\mtctitle{Â247·202}% +\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}% +\def\mlttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}% +% +\def\stctitle{Â247·202}% +\def\slftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}% +\def\slttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hanja1.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Hanja captions +% +% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) +% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +% preprocessed +% +\def\ptctitle{Ù205ó173}% +\def\plftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}% +\def\plttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}% +% +\def\mtctitle{Ù205ó173}% +\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}% +\def\mlttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}% +% +\def\stctitle{Ù205ó173}% +\def\slftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}% +\def\slttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hanja2.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at> +% +% Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997) +% +% Hanja captions +% +% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) +% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +\def\ptctitle{ÙÍó}$ +\def\plftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó}$ +\def\plttitle{øú~ÙÍó}$ +% +\def\mtctitle{ÙÍó}$ +\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó}$ +\def\mlttitle{øú~ÙÍó}$ +% +\def\stctitle{ÙÍó}$ +\def\slftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó}$ +\def\slttitle{øú~ÙÍó}$ +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./japanese.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{japanese.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Japanese captions +% +% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) +% encoding: SJIS +% +\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ} +\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} +\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} +% +\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ} +\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} +\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} +% +\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ} +\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} +\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./japanese2.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Japanese captions +% +% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) +% encoding: EUC +% +\def\plttitle{Ìܼ¡}% +\def\plftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}% +\def\plttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}% +% +\def\mlttitle{Ìܼ¡}% +\def\mlftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}% +\def\mlttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}% +% +\def\slttitle{Ìܼ¡}% +\def\slftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}% +\def\slttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./japanese3.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Japanese captions +% +% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) +% encoding: EUC +% +% preprocessed +% +\def\ptctitle{Ì220¼161}% +\def\plftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}% +\def\plttitle{É189Ì220¼161}% +% +\def\mtctitle{Ì220¼161}% +\def\mlftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}% +\def\mlttitle{É189Ì220¼161}% +% +\def\stctitle{Ì220¼161}% +\def\slftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}% +\def\slttitle{É189Ì220¼161}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./japanese4.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Japanese captions +% +% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) +% encoding: SJIS +% +\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ} +\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} +\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} +% +\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ} +\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} +\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} +% +\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ} +\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} +\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./japanese5.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mlo}[[2005/01/28] +% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package +% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e +% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +% +% Japanese captions +% +% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) +% encoding: SJIS +% +% preprocessed +% +\def\ptctitle{–218Ž159} +\def\plftitle{125–218Ž159} +\def\plttitle{•92–218Ž159} +% +\def\mtctitle{–218Ž159} +\def\mlftitle{125–218Ž159} +\def\mlttitle{•92–218Ž159} +% +\def\stctitle{–218Ž159} +\def\slftitle{125–218Ž159} +\def\slttitle{•92–218Ž159} +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./japanese6.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mlo}[2006/10/31] +% +% Japanese captions +% +%% Japanese titles for minitoc.sty +%% Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. +%% From Kumazawa Toshiki +%% kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp +%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html +% +\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mlo}[2006/10/31]% +% Japanese titles for minitoc.sty% +\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ}% +\def\plftitle{}ˆê——}% +\def\plttitle{•\ˆê——}% +% +\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ}% +\def\mlftitle{}}% +\def\mlttitle{•\}% +% +\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ}% +\def\slftitle{}}% +\def\slttitle{•\}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./malayalam-omega.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mlo}[2007/11/21] +% From omal.sty +% by Alex A.J. <indicTeX@gmail.com> +% +\def\ptctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}% +\def\plftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}% +\def\plttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}% +% +\def\mtctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}% +\def\mlftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}% +\def\mlttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}% +% +\def\stctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}% +\def\slftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}% +\def\slttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}% +% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./russian-cca.mlo} +%% This package redefines several LaTeX defaults for printing Russian +%% documents in alternative encoding. Uses packages cmcyr and +%% indentfirst. By Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu). 01/18/95. +\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mlo}[2006/03/07] +%% From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package +%% Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu) +\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} +\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} +\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} +%% +\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} +\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} +\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} +%% +\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} +\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} +\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} +%% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./russian-cca1.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mlo}[2006/02/07] +%% Titles for minitoc.sty +%% using cmcyr fonts in alt encoding +%% From the cmcyralt package +%% (A.Harin and V.Zhytnikov)] +%% +\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% +\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% +\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% +\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% +\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% +%% +\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% +\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% +\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% +%% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lh.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mlo}[2006/03/07] +%% Russian (russian-lh) titles for minitoc.sty +%% from russian.sty in the LH package +%% Sergei O. Naoumov (serge@astro.unc.edu) +%% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +%% for books -- +\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} +\else +%% for articles etc.-- +\def\ptctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ¨¥} +\fi +\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} +\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} +%% +\def\mtctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ¨¥} +\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} +\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} +%% +\def\stctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ¨¥} +\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} +\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} +%% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyralt.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}[2006/03/10] +%% From lhcyralt.sty in the lhcyr package +%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% +\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% +\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% +\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% +\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% +%% +\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% +\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% +\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% +%% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}[2006/03/10] +%% From lhcyrkoi.sty in the lhcyr package +%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +\def\ptctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}% +\def\plftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}% +\def\plttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}% +\def\mlftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}% +\def\mlttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}% +%% +\def\stctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}% +\def\slftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}% +\def\slttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}% +%% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyrwin.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}[2006/03/10] +%% From lhcyrwin.sty in the lhcyr package +%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +\def\ptctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}% +\def\plftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}% +\def\plttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}% +\def\mlftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}% +\def\mlttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}% +%% +\def\stctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}% +\def\slftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}% +\def\slttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}% +%% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./thai.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{thai.mlo}[2005/01/28] +% from thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system +% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> +% +\def\ptctitle{ÊÒúÑ}% +\def\plftitle{ÊÒúÑÃÙ»}% +\def\plttitle{ÊÒúѵÒÃÒ§}% +% +\def\mtctitle{ÊÒúÑ}% +\def\mlftitle{ÊÒúÑÃÙ»}% +\def\mlttitle{ÊÒúѵÒÃÒ§}% +% +\def\stctitle{ÊÒúÑ}% +\def\slftitle{ÊÒúÑÃÙ»}% +\def\slttitle{ÊÒúѵÒÃÒ§}% +% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hangul-u8.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mlo}[2006/02/21] +%% From the file u8hangul.tex in the HLaTeX package +%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) +%% +%% Hangul captions for Lambda +%% +\ksnamedef{ptctitle}{목~ì°¨} +\ksnamedef{plftitle}{그림~목차} +\ksnamedef{plttitle}{í‘œ~목차} +%% +\ksnamedef{mtctitle}{목~ì°¨} +\ksnamedef{mlftitle}{그림~목차} +\ksnamedef{mlttitle}{í‘œ~목차} +%% +\ksnamedef{stctitle}{목~ì°¨} +\ksnamedef{slftitle}{그림~목차} +\ksnamedef{slttitle}{í‘œ~목차} +%% +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./hanja-u8.mlo} +\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mlo}[2006/02/21] +%% From the file u8hangul.tex in the HLaTeX package +%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) +%% +%% Hanja captions for Lambda +%% +\ksnamedef{ptctitle}{ç›®~次} +\ksnamedef{plftitle}{그림~目次} +\ksnamedef{plttitle}{表~目次} +%% +\ksnamedef{mtctitle}{ç›®~次} +\ksnamedef{mlftitle}{그림~目次} +\ksnamedef{mlttitle}{表~目次} +%% +\ksnamedef{stctitle}{ç›®~次} +\ksnamedef{slftitle}{그림~目次} +\ksnamedef{slttitle}{表~目次} +%% +\end{filecontents} +\egroup +\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc-fr.ist} +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 +%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 +%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert +%% +%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system. +%% -------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2003/12/01 or later. +%% +%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package is +%% given in the file `minitoc.l'. +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +actual '=' +quote '!' +level '>' +encap '|' +preamble +"\\begin{theindex}\\flushcolumns\\parindent=0pt \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n" +postamble +"\n\\end{theindex}\n" +item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem " +item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem " +delim_0 "\\dotfill " +delim_1 "\\dotfill " +delim_2 "\\dotfill " +% The next lines will produce some warnings when +% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different +% versions of the program: +lethead_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" +lethead_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" +lethead_flag 1 +heading_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" +heading_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" +headings_flag 1 +%% +% Added for french. +symhead_positive "Symboles" +symhead_negative "symboles" +numhead_positive "Nombres" +numhead_negative "nombres" +%% +%% End of file `minitoc-fr.ist'. +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.ist} +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 +%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 +%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert +%% +%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license +%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this +%% license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. +%% +%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package +%% given in the file `minitoc.l'. +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +actual '=' +quote '!' +level '>' +encap '|' +preamble +"\\begin{theindex}\\flushcolumns\\parindent=0pt \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n" +postamble +"\n\\end{theindex}\n" +item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem " +item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem " +delim_0 "\\dotfill " +delim_1 "\\dotfill " +delim_2 "\\dotfill " +% The next lines will produce some warnings when +% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different +% versions of the program: +lethead_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" +lethead_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" +lethead_flag 1 +heading_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" +heading_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" +headings_flag 1 +%% +%% +%% End of file `minitoc.ist'. +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.lan} +\def\LANG{0} +\endinput +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc-fr.lan} +\def\LANG{1} +\endinput +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.pre} +% chaptermark: do not uppercase the headers +% \def\HLS{\hspace*{-\leftmargin}} % Header Left Shift +\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% + \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} +% \markboth{\chaptername~\thechapter~---~#1}{\chaptername~.\thechapter~---~#1}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% do not uppercase the headers in TOC, LOF, LOT, BIB +\makeatletter +\let\RELAX\relax +% We replace \MakeUppercase by \RELAX +% TOC +\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else + \@restonecolfalse + \fi + \chapter*{\contentsname + \@mkboth{% + \RELAX\contentsname}{\RELAX\contentsname}}% + \@starttoc{toc}% + \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi + } +% LOF +\renewcommand\listoffigures{% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else + \@restonecolfalse + \fi + \chapter*{\listfigurename + \@mkboth{\RELAX\listfigurename}{\RELAX\listfigurename}}% + \@starttoc{lof}% + \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi + } +% LOT +\renewcommand\listoftables{% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else + \@restonecolfalse + \fi + \chapter*{\listtablename + \@mkboth{% + \RELAX\listtablename}{\RELAX\listtablename}}% + \@starttoc{lot}% + \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi + } +% BIB +\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1] + {\chapter*{\bibname + \@mkboth{\RELAX\bibname}{\RELAX\bibname}}% + \mtcaddchapter[\bibname]% + \bibpreamble + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% + \leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep + \@openbib@code + \usecounter{enumiv}% + \let\p@enumiv\@empty + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + \sloppy + \clubpenalty4000 + \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty + \widowpenalty4000% + \sfcode`\.\@m} + {\def\@noitemerr + {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}% + \endlist} +% Do nor slant text in headers +\if@twoside + \def\ps@headings{% + \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty + \def\@evenhead{\bfseries\large\thepage\hfil\upshape\leftmark}% + \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% + \let\@mkboth\markboth + \def\chaptermark##1{% + \markboth {\RELAX{% + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne + \if@mainmatter +% \@chapapp~\thechapter~---~% + [\thechapter]~---~% + \fi + \fi + ##1}}{}}% + \def\sectionmark##1{% + \markright {\RELAX{% + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ + \thesection. \ % + \fi + ##1}}}} +\else + \def\ps@headings{% + \let\@oddfoot\@empty + \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% + \let\@mkboth\markboth + \def\chaptermark##1{% + \markright {\RELAX{% + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne + \if@mainmatter +% \@chapapp~\thechapter~---~% + [\thechapter]~---~% + \fi + \fi + ##1}}}} +\fi +\def\ps@myheadings{% + \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty + \def\@evenhead{\bfseries\large\thepage\hfil\upshape\leftmark}% + \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% + \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo + \let\chaptermark\@gobble + \let\sectionmark\@gobble + } +\makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% PB HYPERREF % \usepackage[position=top,farskip=3ex,captionskip=2ex]{subfig} +\usepackage{tocbibind} +% Do not uppercase +\makeatletter +\renewcommand{\tocetcmark}[1]{% + \@mkboth{\RELAX{#1}}{\RELAX{#1}}} +\makeatother +\RequirePackage{fixltx2e} +\usepackage{xspace} +\usepackage{calc} +\usepackage{afterpage} +\usepackage{comment} +\usepackage{enumerate} +%<ADDITIONS +\usepackage{ragged2e} +\usepackage{array} +% colonne de type `p', mais raggedright... +\newcolumntype{R}[1]{>{\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}p{#1}} +\newcolumntype{L}[1]{>{\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}p{#1}} +\newcolumntype{C}[1]{>{\Centering\arraybackslash}p{#1}} +% La somme des coeffs doit être égale au nombre de colonnes Z, P et X. +\newcolumntype{Z}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}X} +\newcolumntype{Y}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}X} +\newcolumntype{O}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\Centering\arraybackslash}X} +% La somme des coeffs doit être égale au nombre de colonnes Z, O, P et X. +\newcolumntype{P}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\arraybackslash}X} +%ADDITIONS> +\usepackage{textcomp} +\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbackslash}{TS1}{92} +\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbackslash}{TS1} +\usepackage{amsfonts} +\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{\usepackage{txfonts}}{\relax} +\IfFileExists{mflogo.sty}{\usepackage{mflogo}}% +{\def\MF{\textbf{\texttt{METAFONT}}} + \def\MP{\textbf{\texttt{METAPOST}}}} +\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript} +\newif\ifDP\DPfalse +\IfFileExists{dpfloat.sty}{\usepackage{dpfloat}\DPtrue}{\DPfalse} +\newif\ifFLP\FLPfalse +\IfFileExists{floatpag.sty}{\usepackage{floatpag}\FLPtrue}{\FLPfalse} +\usepackage{nameref} +\input{\jobname.lan} +\newif\ifFTR +\makeatletter % ESSAI pour tromper varioref +\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue % ESSAI pour tromper varioref +\makeatother % ESSAI pour tromper varioref +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\lefthyphenmin=3 +\righthyphenmin=3 +\hyphenation{Mittelbach} +\hyphenation{Jackowski} +\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy} +\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy} +\hyphenation{Impatient} +\hyphenation{make-index} +\hyphenation{hyper-link} +\FTRfalse +\usepackage[english]{varioref} +\or\relax +\lefthyphenmin=3 +\righthyphenmin=3 +\hyphenation{Mittelbach} +\hyphenation{Jackowski} +\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy} +\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy} +\hyphenation{Impatient} +\hyphenation{make-index} +\hyphenation{hyper-link} +\FTRtrue +\usepackage[french]{varioref} +\fi +\usepackage{frbib} +\makeatletter % ESSAI pour tromper varioref +\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse% ESSAI pour tromper varioref +\makeatother % ESSAI pour tromper varioref +\usepackage{multicol}% v40 +\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage{fixfoot} +\usepackage[bottom,hang,multiple]{footmisc} +% \def\footnotelayout{\color[rgb]{0.37254903,0.37254903,0.37254903}} +\renewcommand{\multfootsep}{,} +\setlength{\footnotemargin}{.7em} %1.8em by default, much too wide. +% Check if booktabs package is available +\newif\ifBT \BTfalse +\IfFileExists{booktabs.sty}{\BTtrue\usepackage{booktabs}}{\BTfalse} +\usepackage{ifpdf} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\def\gpdftitle{The minitoc package} +\or\relax +\def\gpdftitle{Le paquetage minitoc} +\fi +\ifpdf + \usepackage[pdftex]{color} +% \definecolor{OliveGreen}{cmyk}{0.64,0,0.95,0.40} +% \definecolor{Green}{cmyk}{1.,0.,1.,0.} +% \definecolor{RedOrange}{cmyk}{0.,0.77,0.87,0.} +% \definecolor{Cyan}{cmyk}{1.,0.,0.,0.} +% \definecolor{light}{cmyk}{0.,0.,0.,0.05} +% \definecolor{NavyBlue}{rgb}{0.,0,0.5} +% basic color % \definecolor{blue}{rgb}{0.,0.,1.} +% \definecolor{DarkGreen}{rgb}{0.,.35,0.} +% basic color % \definecolor{green}{rgb}{0.,1.,0.} +% \definecolor{FireBrick}{rgb}{.55,.1,.1} +% basic color % \definecolor{red}{rgb}{1.,0.,0.} + \usepackage[pdftex,pstarrows]{pict2e} + \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + \usepackage[pdftex, colorlinks,% + pdfpagelayout={SinglePage},% +% pdfpagetransition=Dissolve,% slow +% pdfpagetransition={Split /H /O},% + pdfview={Fit},% + pdfstartview={Fit},% + pdftitle={\gpdftitle},% + pdfsubject={minitoc},% + pdfauthor={Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert},% + pdfcreator={pdfLaTeX with hyperref package},% + pdfproducer={pdflatex},% +% pdfpagemode={UseOutlines},% + pdfkeywords={latex,toc,table-of-contents,part,chapter,section},% +% pdfpagescrop={53 486 389 754},% +% pdfpagescrop={0 72 595 772},% % A4 cropped +% pdfcompresslevel=9,% + pagebackref=true,% + pdfnewwindow=true,% +%% pdffitwindow=true,% +%% pdfcenterwindow=false,% + pdftoolbar=true,% + pdfmenubar=true,% +%% pdfwindowui=false,% + bookmarks=true,% + unicode=true,% + a4paper=true,% +% plainpages=false,% +% pageanchor=false,% +% hyperindex=true,% + breaklinks=true,% + bookmarksopenlevel=0,% + bookmarksopen,% +% DEFAULTS % COLORS +% DEFAULTS linkbordercolor={blue},% +% DEFAULTS linkcolor={blue},% +% DEFAULTS menubordercolor={blue},% +% DEFAULTS % menucolor={FireBrick},% +% DEFAULTS % basic color % menucolor={red},% +% DEFAULTS pagecolor={blue},% +% DEFAULTS % citecolor={DarkGreen},% +% DEFAULTS citecolor={green},% +% DEFAULTS % urlcolor={FireBrick},% +% DEFAULTS urlcolor={red},% +% DEFAULTS filecolor={blue},% +% DEFAULTS % COLORS + bookmarksnumbered=true]% + {hyperref}% + \IfFileExists{hypcap.sty}{\usepackage[all]{hypcap}}{}% +\else + \usepackage[dvips]{color}% +% \definecolor{OliveGreen}{cmyk}{0.64,0,0.95,0.40} +% \definecolor{Green}{cmyk}{1.,0.,1.,0.} +% \definecolor{RedOrange}{cmyk}{0.,0.77,0.87,0.} +% \definecolor{Cyan}{cmyk}{1.,0.,0.,0.} +% \definecolor{light}{cmyk}{0.,0.,0.,0.05} +% \definecolor{NavyBlue}{rgb}{0.,0.,.5} +% basic color % \definecolor{blue}{rgb}{0.,0.,1.} + %\definecolor{DarkGreen}{rgb}{0.,.35,0.} +% basic color % \definecolor{green}{rgb}{0.,1.,0.} +% \definecolor{FireBrick}{rgb}{.55,.1,.1} +% basic color % \definecolor{red}{rgb}{1.,0.,0.} + \usepackage[dvips,pstarrows]{pict2e}% + \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}% + \usepackage{hyperref}% + \IfFileExists{hypcap.sty}{\usepackage[all]{hypcap}}{}% +% \usepackage{breakurl} % DOES NOT WORK +\fi +\makeatletter % to include some useful commands +%avoid warnings +\providecommand*{\toclevel@xpart}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@xchapter}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@xsect}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@starpart}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@starchapter}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@starsection}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@ppart}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@pchapter}{0} +\providecommand*{\toclevel@psect}{0} +\makeatother +\usepackage{tabularx} +\def\UrlFont{\sffamily} +% Check if url package is available +% \IfFileExists{url.sty}{\usepackage{url}}{\let\url\texttt} +\def\eLaTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\LaTeX} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\usepackage[french,english]{babel} +\or\relax +\usepackage[french,english]{babel} +\usepackage{franc,frnew} +% prepare a box for phonetics... +\newsavebox{\latexbox} +\catcode`\:=12 +\savebox{\latexbox}{\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}} +\catcode`\:=\active +\fi +%\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc} +%\def\ij{i\kern-.1ex j} +\DeclareTextSymbol{\ij}{T1}{188} +\DeclareTextSymbol{\IJ}{T1}{156} +\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\or\relax +\IfFileExists{mypatches.sty}{\usepackage{mypatches}}{\relax} +\fi +%\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% gray rules for tables/figures +\definecolor{figrulecolor}{gray}{.82} +%\definecolor{figrulecolor}{cmyk}{.7,.1,.1,.1} % ESSAIS +\providecommand{\topfigrule}{\relax} +\providecommand{\botfigrule}{\relax} +\providecommand{\medfigrule}{\relax} +\iffalse % NO figrules... sight +\renewcommand{\topfigrule}{% + \vspace*{3pt}% + \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}% + \vspace*{-5pt}} +\renewcommand{\botfigrule}{% + \vspace*{-3pt}% + \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}% + \vspace*{1pt}} +\renewcommand{\medfigrule}{% + \vspace*{-3pt}% + \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}% + \vspace*{-2pt}} +\fi % NO figrules... sight +% +% +\makeatletter % to include some useful commands +\providecommand{\WEB}{\textsc{WEB}} +\providecommand{\BibTeX}{{\rmfamily B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} +\providecommand{\SLaTeX}{{\rmfamily S\LaTeX}} +\renewcommand{\SLaTeX}{{\sffamily S\LaTeX}} % \sffamily to be coherent with other package names +%\renewcommand{\BibTeX}{{\rm B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em +% T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} +\renewcommand{\BibTeX}{{\upshape B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} +\let\BiBTeX\BibTeX +\def\NTS{\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\kern-0.2emS$}} +\providecommand*{\pdfTeX}{pdf\TeX} +%\def\eTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX} +\providecommand*{\eTeX}{$\csname m@th\endcsname\varepsilon$-\TeX} +%\newcommand{\Arabi}{\L{\sffamily A\kern-.2ex\lower.25ex\hbox{r}\kern-.25exa% \L not used here +% \kern-.22exb\kern-.15exi}} %Logo +\newcommand{\Arabi}{\mbox{\sffamily A\kern-.2ex\lower.25ex\hbox{r}\kern-.25exa% + \kern-.22exb\kern-.15exi}} %Logo +\newcommand{\devnag}{Devan\=agar{\=\i}} +\def\XeTeX{\leavevmode + \setbox0=\hbox{X\lower.5ex\hbox{\kern-.15em\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.1667em \TeX}% + \dp0=0pt\ht0=0pt\box0} +\def\XeLaTeX{\leavevmode + \setbox0=\hbox{X\lower.5ex\hbox{\kern-.15em\reflectbox{E}}\LaTeX}% + \dp0=0pt\ht0=0pt\box0} +% IF YOU NOT HAVE THE manfnt FONT, the dangerous bends will not be printed... +\IfFileExists{manfnt.sty}{% does not work with .tfm +%\typeout{manfnt.tfm FOUND} +\def\DBEND{% +\ifcase\LANG\relax +{} like the one shown in the margin\virage\relax +\or\relax +{} comme celui montré dans la marge\virage\relax +\fi}% +\newfont{\manfnt}{manfnt} +\newcommand\virage{\reversemarginpar\marginpar[\raggedleft + {{\manfnt\symbol{'177}}~~}]{\raggedright {~~\manfnt\symbol{'177}}}\normalmarginpar} +\def\@Vir{\hbox to12mm{\hbox{}\leaders% + \hbox{{\manfnt\char127}\kern2pt}\hfil\hbox{}}} +\newcommand\Virage{\reversemarginpar\marginpar[\hfill{\@Vir~~}]{{~~\@Vir}\hfill}\normalmarginpar}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +}%ELSE +{\let\Virage\relax \let\virage\relax \let\DBEND\relax} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% END OF REPLACE +\def\smooth{\spaceskip=0.3em plus .8em minus .1em +\xspaceskip=0.6em plus 1em minus .2em +\pretolerance=10 \tolerance=10000 \looseness=-10000 +\parfillskip=0pt plus10fill\relax}% +%%% \newenvironment{SCBOX}[1]{\mbox{\scshape #1}}{} +\newenvironment{SMOOTH}{\bgroup\smooth}{\par\egroup} +% +\let\oendquote\endquote +\def\nendquote{\oendquote\penalty-1\relax} +% +\newenvironment{xmessage}[1][XXXXX]{% + \expandafter\label{mess+#1}% + \begin{samepage}% + \let\endquote\nendquote\relax\smooth\lneed{5}\strut\hrule\relax\jmess{#1}\penalty10000}% +{\par\end{samepage}} +% +\def\Cat#1{\hbox{$\langle$\emph{#1}$\rangle$}} +\def\<#1>{\Cat{#1}} +%%% +%%%% Some useful commands from Stefan Ulrich +\newcommand\changeskips{% + \@tempdima\abovecaptionskip + \abovecaptionskip\belowcaptionskip + \belowcaptionskip\@tempdima +} +\newcommand\thickline{% + \noalign{\hrule\@height1pt\vskip.8ex\relax}% +} +\newcommand\V[1]{\texttt{\string#1}} +\newcommand\Chap{$^*$} +\newcommand\Sec{$^{**}$} +\newcommand\Lang{$^\dag$} +\newcommand\Strut{\rule[2.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}} +\newcommand\Strutt{\rule[3.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}} +\newcommand\FontDefault[2]{% + \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + #1\\ + \hspace*{2em}#2 + \end{tabular}% +} +\newcommand\FontChapSec[3]{% + \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + #1\\ + \hspace*{2em}#2\Chap\\ + \hspace*{2em}#3\Sec + \end{tabular}% +} +%\makeatother +%\makeatletter +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% +\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage + \if@twoside + \ifodd\c@page\else + \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage + \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi + \fi + \fi + }% +\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\makeatother +%old% +\def\oname#1#2{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\oinameA{#1}{#2}\oinameB{#1}{#2}} +\def\oiname#1#2{\oinameA{#1}{#2}\oinameB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\name}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\inameA{#1}{#2}\inameB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\iname}[2]{\inameA{#1}{#2}\inameB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\uname}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}} +\newcommand{\namea}[3]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\inameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\inameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\newcommand{\inamea}[3]{\inameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\inameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +%\def\xname#1#2{\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}} +\let\oxname\oname +\let\xname\name +% vietnamese name: last-first +%old% +\def\ovname#1#2{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\oinameA{#2}{#1}\oinameB{#2}{#1}} +\newcommand{\vname}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\inameA{#2}{#1}\inameB{#2}{#1}} +\newcommand{\ivname}[2]{\inameA{#2}{#1}\inameB{#2}{#1}} +\newcommand{\vnamea}[3]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\inameaA{#2}{#1}{#3}\inameaB{#2}{#1}{#3}} +\newcommand{\ivnamea}[3]{\inameaA{#2}{#1}{#3}\inameaB{#2}{#1}{#3}} +\parskip=12pt +%\def\bs{{\ttfamily\char'134}} +\def\bs{\textbackslash} %ESSAI +\setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +\setcounter{parttocdepth}{0} % only chapters +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{6} +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6} +\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.0} +\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.9999} +\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.9999} +\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.9999} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{10} +\setcounter{topnumber}{10} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{10} +\makeatletter +\setlength{\@fptop}{0pt}% to push floats to top on float pages +\makeatother +\clubpenalty=10000 +\widowpenalty=10000 +\let\mysize\small +\author{\name{Jean-Pierre F.}{Drucbert}\\% +ONERA~/~Centre de Toulouse~/~SRI\\% +} +\date{\today} +\title{The \texttt{minitoc} package\\(version~\#44)} +\parindent=0pt +\lefthyphenmin=3 +\righthyphenmin=3 +\hyphenation{Mittelbach} +\hyphenation{Jackowski} +\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy} +\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy} +\hyphenation{Impatient} +\hyphenation{make-index} +\hyphenation{hyper-link} +\makeatletter +\let\o@tocrmarg\@tocrmarg +\def\@tocrmarg{\o@tocrmarg plus 1fil} +% macros for needed vertical space +\def\need#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i + \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi + \kern-\dimen@i + \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left + \ifdim #1>\dimen@ + \vfill\eject\PackageInfo{'need' macro}{WARNING- EJECT BY NEED} + \fi + \kern\dimen@i + \endgroup} +\def\lneed#1{\need{#1\baselineskip}} +\def\sneed#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i + \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi + \kern-\dimen@i + \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left + \ifdim #1>\dimen@ + \vfill\null\newpage\PackageInfo{'sneed' macro}{WARNING- SOFT EJECT BY NEED} + \fi + \kern\dimen@i + \endgroup} +\def\lsneed#1{\sneed{#1\baselineskip}} +% to avoid a page break just after +% a part/chapter/section title in a table of contents. +\let\old@l@part\l@part +\def\l@part{\lneed{6}\old@l@part} +\let\old@l@chapter\l@chapter +\def\l@chapter{\lneed{2.5}\old@l@chapter} +% +% %Donald Arseneau asnd@reg.triumf.ca +% % bottomfnote.sty % replaced by footmisc.sty +% \let\bf@makecolold=\@makecol +% \def\@makecol{\advance\skip\footins\fill \bf@makecolold} +% % end of bottomfnote.sty +% indentations multiples of 1.5em. +% enlarge section numbers (numwidth) in tocs. +\def\l@section{\lneed{1.5}\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{3.0em}} +\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.0em}{3.2em}} +\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{4.5em}{4.1em}} +\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.0em}{5.0em}} +\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{7.5em}{6.0em}} +% +% \renewcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0.0em}{2.3em}} +\renewcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0.0em}{3.0em}} +\let\l@table\l@figure +\makeatother +\providecommand{\AmS}{$\mathcal{A}$\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\mathcal{M}$}% + \kern-.125em$\mathcal{S}$}% +%%% +\providecommand{\BAR}{\texttt{\textbar}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%% wdesc &co +\def\wdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1} +\def\wdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{#1}\leftmargin\labelwidth +\advance\leftmargin\labelsep +\let\makelabel\wdesclabel}} +\let\endwdesc\endlist +\def\wit[#1]{\item[{{#1}\hfill}]} +% bulleted labels +\def\buwdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \hbox{$\bullet$~~\bf #1}} +\def\buwdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{{$\bullet$~~#1}}\leftmargin\labelwidth +\advance\leftmargin\labelsep +\let\makelabel\buwdesclabel}} +\let\endbuwdesc\endlist +% boxed labels +\def\bxdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \fbox{\bf #1}} +\def\bxdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{#1}\leftmargin\labelwidth +\advance\leftmargin\labelsep +\let\makelabel\bxdesclabel}} +\let\endbxdesc\endlist +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\RequirePackage{boldsc} +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./mypatches.sty} +% LOCAL PATCH +% encoding T1 for \" (francais) +\def\fileversion{v02} +\def\filedate{2006/06/01} +\ProvidesPackage{mypatches}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space + Package mypatches] +% dieresis accent; special case for i +\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{T1}[1]{{\accent"4\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{OT1}[1]{{\accent"7F\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}} +% encoding T1 for \w (czech) +\gdef\czech@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1) +\gdef\croatian@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1) +\global\let\w\czech@w +% \q for czech +\gdef\czech@q#1{#1\kern-2pt\char'47}% +\global\let\q\czech@q +% backslash character (Barre Oblique Inversée: \boi) +\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{T1}{{\tt\char '20}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{OT1}{{\tt\char '134}} +%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{T1}{{\char '6}} +%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{OT1}{{\char '27}} +\let\degre\undefined +\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{'6} +\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{'27} +% +\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}} +\global\let\w\czech@w +% +\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}} +\global\let\q\czech@q +% Pb with \No (Nobelium) in chemsym.sty +\let\Noo\No +\let\No\undefined +% \textcent, \textcurrentcy, \textyen, \textbrokenbar +\ProvideTextCommand{\textcent}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char162}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\textcurrency}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char164}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\textyen}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char165}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\textbrokenbar}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char166}} +\RequirePackage{cmsd} +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./boldsc.sty} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +\ProvidesPackage{boldsc}[1996/11/12] +\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}{% + <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>% + <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>genb*ecxc% +}{} +\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{b}{sc}{<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{} +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./franc.sty} +\ProvidesPackage{franc}[1994/12/16] +\def\figurename{Figure} +\def\tablename{Table} +\def\contentsname{Table des Mati\`eres} +\def\listfigurename{Liste des Figures} +\def\listtablename{Liste des Tableaux} +\def\bibname{Bibliographie} +\def\indexname{Index} +\def\chaptername{Chapitre} +\def\appendixname{Appendice} +\def\partname{Partie} +\def\abstractname{R\'esum\'e} +\def\seename{voir} +\def\alsoseename{voir aussi} +\def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm er}$\else\number\day\fi \space\ifcase\month\or +janvier\or f\'evrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or juin\or +juillet\or ao\^ut\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or d\'ecembre\fi +\space\number\year} +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./frbib.sty} +% +% Pour la bibliographie: +% +% En fonction du style french, par de'faut en anglais : +% Si on ne fait pas de traduction de mots en franc,ais ou que cette notion +% n'existe pas, on fait tout en anglais : + +%%% Correction --bg 2001/08/03 +%%%\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\let\ifFTR\iffalse\fi +\def\@tempa{\let\ifFTR\iffalse} +\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\expandafter\@tempa\fi + +\newcommand{\andname}{\ifFTR et\else and\fi} +\newcommand{\editorname}{\ifFTR \'editeur\else editor\fi} +\newcommand{\editornames}{\ifFTR \'editeurs\else editors\fi} +\newcommand{\volumename}{\ifFTR volume\else volume\fi} +\newcommand{\Volumename}{\ifFTR Volume\else volumes\fi} +\newcommand{\ofname}{\ifFTR de\else of\fi} +\newcommand{\numbername}{\ifFTR num\'ero\else number\fi} +\newcommand{\Numbername}{\ifFTR Num\'ero\else Number\fi} +\newcommand{\inname}{\ifFTR dans\else in\fi} +\newcommand{\Inname}{\ifFTR Dans\else In\fi} +\newcommand{\editionname}{\ifFTR \'edition\else edition\fi} +%\def\pagename{\ifFTR page\else page \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty. +\newcommand{\pagesname}{\ifFTR pages\else pages\fi} +%\newcommand{\chaptername}{\ifFTR chapitre\else \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty. +\newcommand{\technicalreportname}{\ifFTR Rapport Technique\else Technical + Report\fi} +\newcommand{\revisionname}{\ifFTR R\'evision\else Revision\fi} +\newcommand{\janname}{\ifFTR janvier\else January\fi} +\newcommand{\febname}{\ifFTR f\'evrier\else February\fi} +\newcommand{\marname}{\ifFTR mars\else March \fi} +\newcommand{\aprname}{\ifFTR avril\else April\fi} +\newcommand{\mayname}{\ifFTR mai\else May\fi} +\newcommand{\junname}{\ifFTR juin\else June\fi} +\newcommand{\julname}{\ifFTR juillet\else July\fi} +\newcommand{\augname}{\ifFTR ao\^ut\else August\fi} +\newcommand{\sepname}{\ifFTR septembre\else September\fi} +\newcommand{\octname}{\ifFTR octobre\else October\fi} +\newcommand{\novname}{\ifFTR novembre\else November\fi} +\newcommand{\decname}{\ifFTR d\'ecembre\else December\fi} +\end{filecontents} +\begin{filecontents}{./frnew.sty} +%permet dans la frappe de retrouver les habitudes de +%la dactylographie francaise qui conseille de mettre +%un espace avant les signes de ponctuation ; : ! ? +%et d'empecher pourtant une coupure de ligne a cet +%endroit dans le traitement +\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% + \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~\do\!\do\?\do\:\do\;} +\catcode`\@=11 +\catcode`\;=\active +\catcode`\:=\active +\catcode`\!=\active +\catcode`\?=\active +\def;{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string;} +\def:{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\penalty\@M\ \fi\string:} +\def!{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string!} +\def?{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ + \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string?} +\let\old@C\^ +\let\old@T\" +%\uccode"10=`I +%\uccode"11=`J +\uccode`\i=`I +\uccode`\j=`J +%\def\^#1{\ifx#1i{\old@C\i}\else{\old@C #1}\fi} +%\def\"#1{\ifx#1i{\old@T\i}\else{\old@T #1}\fi} +\def\og{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}} +\def\fg{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\,\rangle\!\rangle$}} +\def\guill#1{\og\relax #1\relax\fg} +\frenchspacing +\def\fron{\catcode`\;=\active +\catcode`\:=\active +\catcode`\!=\active +\catcode`\?=\active +\frenchspacing} +\def\froff{\catcode`\;=12 +\catcode`\:=12 +\catcode`\!=12 +\catcode`\?=12 +\nonfrenchspacing} +\def\@tochtitle{Table des Chapitres} +\def\@utochtitle{TABLE DES CHAPITRES} +\def\@Hint{Indications} +%%% Espace apres le : +\fron +\end{filecontents} +%% +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 +%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 +%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert +%% +%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license +%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this +%% license is in: +%% +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. +%% +%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package +%% given in the file `minitoc.l'. +%% +\input docstrip.tex +\keepsilent + +%\usedir{tex/latex/minitoc} +\usedir{.} + +\preamble +This is a generated file. + +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 +%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 +%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert + +This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license +or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this +license is in: + + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version +2003/12/01 or later. + +This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". + +The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. + +This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' +distributed with it. +\endpreamble + +\Msg{****************} +\Msg{*** PACKAGES ***} +\Msg{****************} +\generate{\file{minitoc.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{minitoc}}} +\generate{\file{minitoc-fr.dtx}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{minitoc-fr}}} +\generate{\file{mtcoff.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcoff}}} +\generate{\file{mtcmess.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcmess}}} +\generate{\file{mtcpatchmem.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcpatchmem}}} +\Msg{*****************************} +\Msg{*** EXAMPLES OF DOCUMENTS ***} +\Msg{*****************************} +\generate{\file{mtc-2c.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-2c}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-2nd.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-2nd}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-3co.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-3co}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-add.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-add}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-ads.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ads}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-amm.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-amm}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-apx.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-apx}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-art.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-art}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-bk.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-bk}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-bo.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-bo}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-ch0.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ch0}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-cri.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-cri}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-fko.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fko}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-fo1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fo1}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-fo2.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fo2}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-gap.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-gap}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-hi1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hi1}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-hi2.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hi2}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-hia.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hia}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-hir.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hir}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-hop.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hop}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-liv.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-liv}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-mem.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mem}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-mm1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mm1}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-mu.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mu}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-nom.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-nom}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-ocf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ocf}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-ofs.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ofs}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-sbf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-sbf}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-scr.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-scr}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-syn.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-syn}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-tbi.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tbi}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-tlc.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tlc}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-tlo.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tlo}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-tsf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tsf}}} +\generate{\file{mtc-vti.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-vti}}} +\Msg{*****************} +\Msg{*** MLD FILES ***} +\Msg{*****************} +\generate{\file{acadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadian}}} +\generate{\file{acadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadien}}} +\generate{\file{afrikaan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaan}}} +\generate{\file{afrikaans.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaans}}} +\generate{\file{albanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{albanian}}} +\generate{\file{american.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{american}}} +\generate{\file{arab.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arab}}} +\generate{\file{arab2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arab2}}} +\generate{\file{arabi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arabi}}} +\generate{\file{arabic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arabic}}} +\generate{\file{armenian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{armenian}}} +\generate{\file{australian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{australian}}} +\generate{\file{austrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{austrian}}} +\generate{\file{bahasa.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasa}}} +\generate{\file{bahasai.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasai}}} +\generate{\file{bahasam.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasam}}} +\generate{\file{bangla.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bangla}}} +\generate{\file{basque.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{basque}}} +\generate{\file{bengali.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bengali}}} +\generate{\file{bicig.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig}}} +\generate{\file{bicig2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig2}}} +\generate{\file{bicig3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig3}}} +\generate{\file{bithe.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bithe}}} +\generate{\file{brazil.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazil}}} +\generate{\file{brazilian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazilian}}} +\generate{\file{breton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{breton}}} +\generate{\file{british.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{british}}} +\generate{\file{bulgarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarian}}} +\generate{\file{bulgarianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarianb}}} +\generate{\file{buryat.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{buryat}}} +\generate{\file{buryat2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{buryat2}}} +\generate{\file{canadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadian}}} +\generate{\file{canadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadien}}} +\generate{\file{castillan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillan}}} +\generate{\file{castillian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillian}}} +\generate{\file{catalan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{catalan}}} +\generate{\file{chinese1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese1}}} +\generate{\file{chinese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese2}}} +\generate{\file{croatian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{croatian}}} +\generate{\file{czech.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{czech}}} +\generate{\file{danish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{danish}}} +\generate{\file{devanagari.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{devanagari}}} +\generate{\file{dutch.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{dutch}}} +\generate{\file{english.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english}}} +\generate{\file{english1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english1}}} +\generate{\file{english2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english2}}} +\generate{\file{esperant.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperant}}} +\generate{\file{esperanto.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperanto}}} +\generate{\file{estonian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{estonian}}} +\generate{\file{ethiopia.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopia}}} +\generate{\file{ethiopian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopian}}} +\generate{\file{ethiopian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopian2}}} +\generate{\file{farsi1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi1}}} +\generate{\file{farsi2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi2}}} +\generate{\file{farsi3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi3}}} +\generate{\file{finnish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish}}} +\generate{\file{finnish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish2}}} +\generate{\file{francais.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{francais}}} +\generate{\file{french.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french}}} +\generate{\file{french1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french1}}} +\generate{\file{french2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french2}}} +\generate{\file{frenchb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchb}}} +\generate{\file{frenchle.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchle}}} +\generate{\file{frenchpro.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchpro}}} +\generate{\file{galician.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{galician}}} +\generate{\file{german.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{german}}} +\generate{\file{germanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{germanb}}} +\generate{\file{germanb2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{germanb2}}} +\generate{\file{greek.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek}}} +\generate{\file{greek-mono.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-mono}}} +\generate{\file{greek-polydemo.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polydemo}}} +\generate{\file{greek-polykatha.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polykatha}}} +\generate{\file{guarani.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{guarani}}} +\generate{\file{hangul1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul1}}} +\generate{\file{hangul2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul2}}} +\generate{\file{hangul3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul3}}} +\generate{\file{hangul4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul4}}} +\generate{\file{hangul-u8.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul-u8}}} +\generate{\file{hanja1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja1}}} +\generate{\file{hanja2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja2}}} +\generate{\file{hanja-u8.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja-u8}}} +\generate{\file{hebrew.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hebrew}}} +\generate{\file{hebrew2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hebrew2}}} +\generate{\file{hindi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hindi}}} +\generate{\file{hindi-modern.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hindi-modern}}} +\generate{\file{hungarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hungarian}}} +\generate{\file{icelandic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{icelandic}}} +\generate{\file{indon.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{indon}}} +\generate{\file{indonesian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{indonesian}}} +\generate{\file{interlingua.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{interlingua}}} +\generate{\file{irish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{irish}}} +\generate{\file{italian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{italian}}} +\generate{\file{italian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{italian2}}} +\generate{\file{japanese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese}}} +\generate{\file{japanese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese2}}} +\generate{\file{japanese3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese3}}} +\generate{\file{japanese4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese4}}} +\generate{\file{japanese5.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese5}}} +\generate{\file{japanese6.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese6}}} +\generate{\file{kannada.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{kannada}}} +\generate{\file{khalkha.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{khalkha}}} +\generate{\file{latin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin}}} +\generate{\file{latin2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin2}}} +\generate{\file{latinc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latinc}}} +\generate{\file{latinc2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latinc2}}} +\generate{\file{latvian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latvian}}} +\generate{\file{latvian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latvian2}}} +\generate{\file{letton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{letton}}} +\generate{\file{letton2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{letton2}}} +\generate{\file{lithuanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lithuanian}}} +\generate{\file{lithuanian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lithuanian2}}} +\generate{\file{lowersorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lowersorbian}}} +\generate{\file{lsorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lsorbian}}} +\generate{\file{magyar.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar}}} +\generate{\file{magyar2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar2}}} +\generate{\file{magyar3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar3}}} +\generate{\file{malay.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malay}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-b.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-b}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-keli.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-keli}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-keli2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-keli2}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-mr.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-mr}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-omega.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-omega}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana2}}} +\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana3}}} +\generate{\file{manju.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{manju}}} +\generate{\file{mexican.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mexican}}} +\generate{\file{meyalu.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{meyalu}}} +\generate{\file{mongol.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongol}}} +\generate{\file{mongolb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongolb}}} +\generate{\file{mongolian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongolian}}} +\generate{\file{naustrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{naustrian}}} +\generate{\file{newzealand.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{newzealand}}} +\generate{\file{ngerman.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngerman}}} +\generate{\file{ngermanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngermanb}}} +\generate{\file{ngermanb2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngermanb2}}} +\generate{\file{norsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{norsk}}} +\generate{\file{norsk2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{norsk2}}} +\generate{\file{nynorsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{nynorsk}}} +\generate{\file{nynorsk2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{nynorsk2}}} +\generate{\file{occitan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{occitan}}} +\generate{\file{occitan2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{occitan2}}} +\generate{\file{polish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish}}} +\generate{\file{polish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish2}}} +\generate{\file{polski.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polski}}} +\generate{\file{portuges.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuges}}} +\generate{\file{portuguese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuguese}}} +\generate{\file{romanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian}}} +\generate{\file{romanian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian2}}} +\generate{\file{romanian3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian3}}} +\generate{\file{russian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian}}} +\generate{\file{russian2m.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2m}}} +\generate{\file{russian2o.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2o}}} +\generate{\file{russianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianb}}} +\generate{\file{russianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianc}}} +\generate{\file{russian-cca.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-cca}}} +\generate{\file{russian-cca1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-cca1}}} +\generate{\file{russian-lh.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lh}}} +\generate{\file{russian-lhcyralt.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyralt}}} +\generate{\file{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyrkoi}}} +\generate{\file{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyrwin}}} +\generate{\file{samin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{samin}}} +\generate{\file{scottish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{scottish}}} +\generate{\file{serbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbian}}} +\generate{\file{serbianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbianc}}} +\generate{\file{slovak.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovak}}} +\generate{\file{slovene.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovene}}} +\generate{\file{spanish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish}}} +\generate{\file{spanish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish2}}} +\generate{\file{spanish3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish3}}} +\generate{\file{spanish4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish4}}} +\generate{\file{swahili.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swahili}}} +\generate{\file{swedish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swedish}}} +\generate{\file{swedish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swedish2}}} +\generate{\file{thai.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{thai}}} +\generate{\file{turkish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{turkish}}} +\generate{\file{uighur.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur}}} +\generate{\file{uighur2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur2}}} +\generate{\file{uighur3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur3}}} +\generate{\file{UKenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{UKenglish}}} +\generate{\file{ukraineb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ukraineb}}} +\generate{\file{ukrainian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ukrainian}}} +\generate{\file{uppersorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uppersorbian}}} +\generate{\file{USenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{USenglish}}} +\generate{\file{usorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{usorbian}}} +\generate{\file{vietnam.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnam}}} +\generate{\file{vietnamese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnamese}}} +\generate{\file{welsh.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{welsh}}} +\generate{\file{xalx.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx}}} +\generate{\file{xalx2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx2}}} +\generate{\file{xalx3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx3}}} +% +% NO preamble/postamble for mtc-add.bib +\nopreamble +\nopostamble +\Msg{******************} +\Msg{*** A BIB FILE ***} +\Msg{******************} +\generate{\file{mtc-add.bib}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-addbib}}}% +\obeyspaces +\Msg{*************************************************************} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to read the *} +\Msg{* Installation chapter in minitoc.pdf (or minitoc-fr.pdf) *} +\Msg{* or the INSTALL file. *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file minitoc.dtx *} +\Msg{* (or minitoc-fr.dtx) through PdfLaTeX. *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{* Happy TeXing! *} +\Msg{* *} +\Msg{*************************************************************} + +\endbatchfile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ist index cf6a6fc6dfd..4c421e15ddc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ist +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ist @@ -1,11 +1,10 @@ %% LaTeX2e file `./minitoc.ist' %% generated by the `filecontents' environment -%% from source `minitoc' on 2008/07/16. +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. %% %% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 %% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 %% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> %% %% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of %% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license @@ -17,12 +16,12 @@ %% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version %% 2003/12/01 or later. %% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained". %% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is <none>. %% -%% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' -%% distributed with it. +%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package +%% given in the file `minitoc.l'. %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z %% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.l b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.l index 402b94d8975..c8eaca39c35 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.l +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.l @@ -1,7 +1,6 @@ minitoc.l minitoc.sum minitoc.bug -CATALOG README INSTALL cmk @@ -29,471 +28,7 @@ minitoc.bib minitoc-fr.bib en-mtc.bst fr-mtc.bst -aaland-f.png -acadian-m.pdf -acadie-f.png -acadien-m.pdf -afghan-f.png -africa-lf.png -africa-lo.pdf -afrsud-l.pdf -afrsud-p.pdf -albania.pdf -alb2.png -alba-eth.pdf -albania-f.png -algeria-f.png -allemand.jpg -alsace-f.png -andorra-f.png -anglo1.pdf -argentina-f.png -angola-f.png -arab-l.jpg -arabw.png -armenia-f.png -armeniad.pdf -armenian-l.png -armeniar.jpg -aruba-f.png -australia-f.png -austria-f.png -azerbaijan-f.png -bahamas-f.png -bahrain-f.png -baltes.jpg -bangla.png -bangla1.png -bangla2.png -bangladesh-f.png -barbados-f.png -basque-de.png -basque-df.png -basque1.pdf -basque2.pdf -be-dg-f.png -belarus-f.png -belgique.pdf -belgium-f.png -belize-f.png -bengali-m.jpg -benin-f.png -bolivia-f.png -bolzano-f.png -bosnia.pdf -bosnia-hz-f.png -bozen-f.png -brazil.pdf -brazil-f.png -brazilp.pdf -bretagne.pdf -brussels-f.png -bulgaria-f.png -bulgariar.jpg -bulgarski.png -bulgmap.png -bur-f.png -burkina-f.png -burundi-f.png -buryatia.pdf -buryatia-l.pdf -california-f.png -cambodia-f.png -cameroon-f.png -canada.pdf -canada-f.png -canada-l.pdf -canada-pe.png -canada-pf.pdf -canada1.pdf -cap-verde-f.png -castille-f.png -catalan-d.pdf -catalan-p.pdf -catalonia-f.png -caucasus.pdf -central-africa-f.png -chad-f.png -chile-f.png -china-ae.png -china-af.png -china-ch.png -china-f.png -china-l.pdf -china-w.png -chine1.pdf -chine2.pdf -cis-f.png -colombia-f.png -comoros-f.png -congo-f.png -corsica-f.jpg -costa-rica-f.jpg -cplp-0.png -cplpmap.png -croatia-f.png -croatia-un.png -croatie2.png -cuba-f.png -cyprus-f.png -cyr-alf.png -cz1.pdf -cz3.png -czech-f.png -czechd.pdf -dane-f.png -danemark.jpg -danishd.pdf -danishg.pdf -devanagari.png -djibouti-f.png -dominica-f.png -dominican-f.png -dutchw.pdf -east-timor-f.png -ecosse1.pdf -ecosse2.pdf -ecosse3.pdf -ecuador-f.jpg -egypt-f.png -el-salvador-f.png -england-f.jpg -equa-guinea-f.png -eritrea-f.png -espa-l.pdf -espa-o.png -esperanto-f.png -estonia-a.pdf -estonia-b.pdf -estonia-f.png -eth2.png -ethiolang.png -ethiopia.pdf -ethiopia-f.png -ethiopia-p.pdf -euro-lan.png -euro-lan1.png -euro-lan2.png -eusk-f.png -euskara.png -faroe-f.png -farsi.pdf -farsi-logo.png -feroe.jpg -fiji-f.png -finland-f.png -finlande1.png -finlande2.pdf -finnishd.pdf -finnishl.pdf -flanders-f.png -france-f.png -france-lr.png -franco.png -francophonie-f.png -fswahili.pdf -gabon-f.png -gael-ft.pdf -gaid.jpg -galicia-f.png -galicia-m.pdf -galicia-mp.pdf -galician-l.png -galles1.pdf -galles2.pdf -georgia-f.png -germ-w.png -german-c.pdf -german-d.pdf -german-m.pdf -germany-f.jpg -ghana-f.png -gibraltar-f.png -grece1.pdf -grece2.pdf -greece-f.png -greeka.png -greekm.jpg -greenland-f.png -guatemala-f.jpg -guinea-bissau-f.png -guinea-f.png -gwenn-f.png -haiti-f.jpg -hangul.png -hanja.png -hanzi.png -hin.png -hindi-b.png -hindi-p.png -hispano.png -honduras-f.png -hrv.png -hun1.png -hun2.jpg -hungary-f.png -iceland-f.png -imongolia-f.png -inde1.pdf -inde2.jpg -india-f.png -indonesia-f.png -indonesia1.pdf -indonesia2.pdf -iran-f.png -iranian.jpg -iraq-f.png -ireland-f.png -irish.png -irlande.pdf -islam-pbc.png -islam-sw.pdf -islande.png -islandep.jpg -isr1.pdf -isr2.pdf -israel-f.png -italian.pdf -italy-f.png -italo1.png -italysm.png -ivory-f.png -ivrit.png -jamaica-f.png -japan-f.png -japon1.pdf -japon2.jpg -jordan-f.png -jutland-f.png -kannada-n.png -karnad1.jpg -karnataka.jpg -karnataka-f.jpg -kazakhstan-f.png -kenya-f.png -kerala.jpg -kerala-f.jpg -khalkha.pdf -kiribati-f.png -korea-n-f.png -korea-s-f.png -korean1.png -korean2.jpg -kos-alb.png -kos-ml.png -kosovo-f.png -kuwait-f.png -kyrgyzstan-f.png lamed3.png -lang-g.png -laos-f.png -latvia-f.png -latvian-d.png -latvian-r1.png -lebanon-f.png -lettonie.jpg -leur.png -liberia-f.png -libya-f.jpg -liech-f.png -lithuania-f.jpg -lituanie.png -lorraine-f.jpg -louisiana-f.png -ls-f.png -luso1.pdf -luso2.pdf -lux-f.png -macau-f.png -macedonia-f.png -madagascar-f.png -maine-f.jpg -malawi-f.png -malayalam.pdf -malayalam.png -malaysia-f.png -malaysia1.pdf -malaysia2.pdf -mali-f.png -malta1-f.png -manchu.jpg -manchuria.jpg -manjuc.jpg -manjui.png -mauritania-f.png -mauritius-f.png -mex1.pdf -mex2.pdf -mex3.pdf -mexico-f.jpg -mexip.pdf -meyalu.png -moldova-f.png -monaco-f.png -mondep.png -mongasie.pdf -mongolcy.png -mongolia-f.png -mongolian.pdf -mongols.png -mongoltr.png -montenegro-f.jpg -morocco-f.png -mozambique-f.png -namibia-f.png -nbrunswick-f.png -ncyprus-f.png -neder.pdf -netherlands-antilles-f.png -netherlands-f.png -new-york-f.png -newzealand-f.png -nicaragua-f.png -nice-f.png -niger-f.png -nigeria-f.png -nihongo.png -norvege-c.pdf -norvege-t.pdf -norway-f.png -norway-p.pdf -occ-f.png -occdial1.jpg -occdial2.png -occitanie.png -occtaur.jpg -oman-f.png -opole-f.png -pakistan-f.png -palestine-f.png -panama-f.png -paraguay.png -paraguay-f.png -paraguayp.pdf -peru-f.png -philippines-f.png -poland-f.png -polish-d.jpg -polmin.jpg -pologne.pdf -polski-f.png -portu-a.png -portu-b.png -portu-p.jpg -portu-r.jpg -portugal.pdf -portugal-f.png -puerto-rico-f.png -qatar-f.png -quebec-f.png -rdcongo-f.png -romania-f.png -romanian.pdf -rus-cyr.png -rus-re.png -rus-su.pdf -russia-f.png -russian.png -russian-e.pdf -russian-n.png -russian-w.png -rwanda-f.png -saint-lucia-f.png -same.png -same-f.png -sami-f.png -samoa-f.png -san-marino-f.png -sao-f.png -saudi-arabia-f.png -scotland-f.png -senegal-f.png -serb-a.pdf -serbia-f.png -serbia-f2.png -serbia1.pdf -seychelles-f.png -singapore-f.png -slovak-ok.png -slovakia.pdf -slovakia-f.png -slovenia-f.png -slovenian.png -slovenie.pdf -solomon-islands-f.png -somalia-f.png -sorabe-1.jpg -sorabe-2.jpg -sorben.jpg -sorbian.jpg -south-africa-f.png -spain.png -spain-f.png -spilhennig.png -start.jpg -stop.png -sudan-f.png -suede-a.pdf -suede-fin.pdf -suisse-f.png -suriname-f.png -svenska.png -swahili.pdf -swahili-m.png -sweden.pdf -sweden-f.png -syria-f.png -taiwan-f.png -tajikistan-f.png -tanzania-f.png -thai.pdf -thai.png -thailand-f.png -togo-f.png -tonga-f.png -tunisia-f.png -turkey-f.png -turkish.png -turkmenistan-f.png -turquie.pdf -tuvalu-f.png -uae-f.png -uganda-f.png -uighur-f.png -uighur.pdf -uk-f.png -ukra.png -ukraine.jpg -ukraine-f.png -ukrainep.pdf -uruguay-f.png -usa-f.png -us-f.png -uzbekistan-f.png -vanuatu-f.png -vatican-f.jpg -venezuela-f.png -vermont-f.png -viet2.pdf -viet3.pdf -viet4.pdf -viet-w.pdf -vietnam-f.png -vojvodina-f.png -wales-f.png -wallonia-f.png -wallonie.pdf -wiki.png -wikif.png -wrs-a.png -wrs-c.png -xinjiang.png -xinjiangc.png -xyugo.png -yemen-f.png -zambia-f.png -zanzibar-f.png -zimbabwe-f.png mtc-2c.tex mtc-2nd.tex mtc-3co.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.lan b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.lan index bfe8a97fbc7..a1441398474 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.lan +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.lan @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ %% LaTeX2e file `./minitoc.lan' %% generated by the `filecontents' environment -%% from source `minitoc' on 2008/07/16. +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. %% \def\LANG{0} \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pdf Binary files differindex 8d57462e65d..78f5a268f88 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pre b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pre index 9db7bcf21db..03e45c7e702 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pre +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.pre @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ %% LaTeX2e file `./minitoc.pre' %% generated by the `filecontents' environment -%% from source `minitoc' on 2008/07/16. +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. %% % chaptermark: do not uppercase the headers % \def\HLS{\hspace*{-\leftmargin}} % Header Left Shift @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ \let\mysize\small \author{\name{Jean-Pierre F.}{Drucbert}\\% ONERA~/~Centre de Toulouse~/~SRI\\% -\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}} +} \date{\today} \title{The \texttt{minitoc} package\\(version~\#44)} \parindent=0pt diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.sum b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.sum index 9249598fa66..847fcdf0447 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.sum +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/minitoc.sum @@ -1,5 +1,4 @@ -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% minitoc.sum summary of user commands (2008/07/16) -% minitoc.sum (#60) +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% minitoc.sum - summary of user commands % \mtcindent left/right indentation of minitoc (24pt) % \mtcsetdepth{mini-table}{depth} % to change the depth of some mini-tables. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/moldova-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/moldova-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0055e65090a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/moldova-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/monaco-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/monaco-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3e19cf1783e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/monaco-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mondep.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mondep.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ce1602f6d9b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mondep.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongasie.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongasie.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e17382cfca3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongasie.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolcy.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolcy.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 611af6f48c5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolcy.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a1e07427619..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolian.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolian.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4043f38aa22..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongolian.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongols.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongols.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 15650b98535..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongols.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongoltr.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongoltr.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 54f2d5ea639..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mongoltr.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/montenegro-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/montenegro-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 51b31143edc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/montenegro-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/morocco-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/morocco-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 49c32fb66ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/morocco-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mozambique-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mozambique-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 971f0bee827..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mozambique-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2c.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2c.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 64a4c885817..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2c.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2nd.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2nd.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dd203df7491..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-2nd.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-3co.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-3co.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b435615ebc2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-3co.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.bib deleted file mode 100644 index 54e5e65e05c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.bib +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 -%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 -%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -@MISC{minitoc, - TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package", - AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}", - NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf}}", - MONTH=jul, - YEAR=2008} - -@MISC{minitoc-fr, - TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}", - AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}", - NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf}}", - MONTH=jul, - YEAR=2008} - -@MISC{shorttoc, - TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package", - AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}", - NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf}}", - MONTH=aug, - YEAR=2002} - -@BOOK{dark, - TITLE="{Against a Dark Background}", - AUTHOR="Banks, Iain Menzies", - PUBLISHER="Bantam Books", - ISBN="0553292240 (pb)", - YEAR=1993} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5b68de93393..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-add.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ads.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ads.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 61105cf9b2e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ads.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-amm.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-amm.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4f5082d41ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-amm.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-apx.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-apx.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 563f621f458..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-apx.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-art.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-art.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 80b0fb2b171..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-art.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bk.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bk.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a90ff100f3e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bk.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bo.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 448f1f7ceb3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-bo.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ch0.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ch0.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3bb7010fc42..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ch0.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-cri.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-cri.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cc3feade30b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-cri.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fko.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fko.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5d57fd1ef3b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fko.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e1d64b506d3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 858536c25c9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-fo2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-gap.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-gap.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6935b88caf3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-gap.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e24adcd6484..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5c871dad31b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hi2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hia.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hia.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 54051cbf2cd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hia.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hir.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hir.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5827dfd210b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hir.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hop.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hop.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d46feb9fccd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-hop.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-liv.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-liv.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8db353531fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-liv.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mem.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mem.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 65bbaaad872..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mem.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mm1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mm1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 69e4372d7ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mm1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mu.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mu.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fe195aab05c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-mu.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-nom.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-nom.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a82ee633d4f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-nom.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ocf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ocf.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d9708bf7a5b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ocf.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ofs.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ofs.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7c3f80a2f75..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-ofs.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-sbf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-sbf.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 16f7426084a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-sbf.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-scr.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-scr.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6a28b906480..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-scr.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-syn.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-syn.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 208f4875bf4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-syn.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tbi.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tbi.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c52f06a4504..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tbi.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlc.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 948fdf56bda..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlc.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlo.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6720ebc5533..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tlo.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tsf.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tsf.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fddd2d785d0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-tsf.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-vti.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-vti.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 42b6a756d3e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mtc-vti.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mypatches.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mypatches.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e50884c1d26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/mypatches.sty @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +%% LaTeX2e file `./mypatches.sty' +%% generated by the `filecontents' environment +%% from source `minitoc' on 2015/07/13. +%% +% LOCAL PATCH +% encoding T1 for \" (francais) +\def\fileversion{v02} +\def\filedate{2006/06/01} +\ProvidesPackage{mypatches}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space + Package mypatches] +% dieresis accent; special case for i +\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{T1}[1]{{\accent"4\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{OT1}[1]{{\accent"7F\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}} +% encoding T1 for \w (czech) +\gdef\czech@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1) +\gdef\croatian@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1) +\global\let\w\czech@w +% \q for czech +\gdef\czech@q#1{#1\kern-2pt\char'47}% +\global\let\q\czech@q +% backslash character (Barre Oblique Inversée: \boi) +\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{T1}{{\tt\char '20}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{OT1}{{\tt\char '134}} +%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{T1}{{\char '6}} +%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{OT1}{{\char '27}} +\let\degre\undefined +\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{'6} +\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{'27} +% +\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}} +\global\let\w\czech@w +% +\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}} +\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}} +\global\let\q\czech@q +% Pb with \No (Nobelium) in chemsym.sty +\let\Noo\No +\let\No\undefined +% \textcent, \textcurrentcy, \textyen, \textbrokenbar +\ProvideTextCommand{\textcent}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char162}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\textcurrency}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char164}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\textyen}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char165}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\textbrokenbar}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char166}} +\RequirePackage{cmsd} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/namibia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/namibia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0a12f1c289d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/namibia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nbrunswick-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nbrunswick-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cebadfc8a48..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nbrunswick-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ncyprus-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ncyprus-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7ddbbb3e5f4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ncyprus-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/neder.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/neder.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0862f5fb20f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/neder.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/netherlands-antilles-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/netherlands-antilles-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d22ba4651c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/netherlands-antilles-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/netherlands-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/netherlands-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0ee03bda0e2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/netherlands-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/new-york-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/new-york-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e501bbdae5c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/new-york-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/newzealand-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/newzealand-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index eb09460012b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/newzealand-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nicaragua-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nicaragua-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e2f83f803a7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nicaragua-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nice-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nice-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 59aa90aa73f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nice-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/niger-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/niger-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 38b301ee9e3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/niger-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nigeria-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nigeria-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index eed4c1b08f4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nigeria-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nihongo.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nihongo.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dfcfb2a1e4a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/nihongo.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norvege-c.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norvege-c.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f1eeca96417..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norvege-c.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norvege-t.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norvege-t.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c67198a59ec..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norvege-t.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norway-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norway-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0601059e126..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norway-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norway-p.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norway-p.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7871ed7abc0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/norway-p.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occ-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occ-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2ada84c0990..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occ-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occdial1.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occdial1.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 004290f0ce8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occdial1.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occdial2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occdial2.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 39d4d8fc88c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occdial2.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occitanie.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occitanie.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 29d1f958974..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occitanie.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occtaur.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occtaur.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0daf68efec3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/occtaur.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/oman-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/oman-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5a82da1e6a9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/oman-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/opole-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/opole-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 40d73224712..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/opole-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pakistan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pakistan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b1af834c882..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pakistan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/palestine-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/palestine-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 75510351b28..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/palestine-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/panama-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/panama-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b262353adf6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/panama-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguay-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguay-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2bfac68182b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguay-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguay.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguay.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bd4d3ccb905..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguay.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguayp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguayp.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 84c520852d2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/paraguayp.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/peru-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/peru-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5bc651090d4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/peru-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/philippines-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/philippines-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 847106d8c78..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/philippines-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pmk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pmk index eefea8a338c..714e2ac19e2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pmk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pmk @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/csh -f # set verbose # create a backup directory set w=`whoami`.pmk @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ cp *.mld *.mlo ${WCL}1 chmod 644 ${WCL}1/* # class 2 echo 'Class 2' -cp INSTALL minitoc.l README CATALOG TODO ${WCL}2 +cp INSTALL minitoc.l README TODO ${WCL}2 chmod 644 ${WCL}2/* # class 3 echo 'Class 3' @@ -181,406 +181,7 @@ cp minitoc.dtx minitoc.ins minitoc.bib minitoc.ist minitoc.lan en-mtc.bst ${WCL} chmod 644 ${WCL}5/* # class 6 echo 'Class 6' -cp aaland-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp acadian-m.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp acadie-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp acadien-m.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp afghan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp africa-lf.png africa-lo.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp afrsud-l.pdf afrsud-p.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp albania.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp alb2.png ${WCL}6 -cp alba-eth.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp albania-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp algeria-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp allemand.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp alsace-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp andorra-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp argentina-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp anglo1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp angola-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp arab-l.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp arabw.png ${WCL}6 -cp armenia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp armeniad.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp armenian-l.png ${WCL}6 -cp armeniar.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp aruba-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp australia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp austria-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp azerbaijan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bahamas-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bahrain-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp baltes.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp bangla.png ${WCL}6 -cp bangla1.png ${WCL}6 -cp bangla2.png ${WCL}6 -cp bangladesh-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp barbados-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp basque-de.png ${WCL}6 -cp basque-df.png ${WCL}6 -cp basque1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp basque2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp be-dg-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp belarus-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp belgique.pdf belgium-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp belize-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bengali-m.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp benin-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bolivia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bolzano-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bosnia.pdf bosnia-hz-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bozen-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp brazil.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp brazil-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp brazilp.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp bretagne.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp brussels-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bulgaria-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp bulgariar.jpg bulgarski.png bulgmap.png ${WCL}6 -cp bur-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp burkina-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp burundi-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp buryatia.pdf buryatia-l.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp california-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp cambodia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp cameroon-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp canada.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp canada-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp canada-l.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp canada-pe.png ${WCL}6 -cp canada-pf.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp canada1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp cap-verde-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp castille-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp catalan-d.pdf catalan-p.pdf catalonia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp caucasus.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp central-africa-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp chad-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp chile-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp china-ae.png china-af.png china-ch.png china-f.png china-l.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp china-w.png ${WCL}6 -cp chine1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp chine2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp cis-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp colombia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp comoros-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp congo-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp corsica-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp costa-rica-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp cplp-0.png cplpmap.png ${WCL}6 -cp croatia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp croatia-un.png ${WCL}6 -cp croatie2.png ${WCL}6 -cp cuba-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp cyprus-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp cyr-alf.png ${WCL}6 -cp cz1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp cz3.png ${WCL}6 -cp czech-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp czechd.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp dane-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp danemark.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp danishd.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp danishg.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp devanagari.png ${WCL}6 -cp djibouti-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp dominica-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp dominican-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp dutchw.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp east-timor-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp ecosse1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp ecosse2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp ecosse3.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp ecuador-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp egypt-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp el-salvador-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp england-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp equa-guinea-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp eritrea-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp espa-l.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp espa-o.png ${WCL}6 -cp esperanto-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp estonia-a.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp estonia-b.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp estonia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp eth2.png ${WCL}6 -cp ethiolang.png ${WCL}6 -cp ethiopia.pdf ethiopia-f.png ethiopia-p.pdf $(WCL}6 -cp euro-lan.png ${WCL}6 -cp euro-lan1.png ${WCL}6 -cp euro-lan2.png ${WCL}6 -cp eusk-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp euskara.png ${WCL}6 -cp faroe-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp farsi.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp farsi-logo.png ${WCL}6 -cp feroe.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp fiji-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp finland-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp finlande1.png ${WCL}6 -cp finlande2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp finnishd.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp finnishl.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp flanders-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp france-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp france-lr.png ${WCL}6 -cp franco.png francophonie-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp gabon-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp gael-ft.pdf gaid.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp galicia-f.png galicia-m.pdf galicia-mp.pdf galician-l.png ${WCL}6 -cp galles1.pdf galles2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp georgia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp germ-w.png ${WCL}6 -cp german-c.pdf german-d.pdf german-m.pdf germany-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp ghana-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp gibraltar-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp grece1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp grece2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp greece-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp greeka.png ${WCL}6 -cp greekm.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp greenland-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp guatemala-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp guinea-bissau-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp guinea-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp gwenn-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp haiti-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp hangul.png ${WCL}6 -cp hanja.png ${WCL}6 -cp hanzi.png ${WCL}6 -cp hin.png ${WCL}6 -cp hindi-b.png ${WCL}6 -cp hindi-p.png ${WCL}6 -cp hispano.png ${WCL}6 -cp honduras-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp hrv.png ${WCL}6 -cp hun1.png ${WCL}6 -cp hun2.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp hungary-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp iceland-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp imongolia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp inde1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp inde2.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp india-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp indonesia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp indonesia1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp indonesia2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp iran-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp iranian.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp iraq-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp ireland-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp irish.png ${WCL}6 -cp irlande.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp islam-pbc.png islam-sw.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp islande.png ${WCL}6 -cp islandep.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp isr1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp isr2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp israel-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp italian.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp italy-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp italo1.png ${WCL}6 -cp italysm.png ${WCL}6 -cp ivory-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp ivrit.png ${WCL}6 -cp jamaica-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp japan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp japon1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp japon2.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp jordan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp jutland-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp kannada-n.png ${WCL}6 -cp karnad1.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp karnataka.jpg karnataka-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp kazakhstan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp kenya-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp kerala.jpg kerala-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp khalkha.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp kiribati-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp korea-n-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp korea-s-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp korean1.png ${WCL}6 -cp korean2.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp kos-alb.png ${WCL}6 -cp kos-ml.png ${WCL}6 -cp kosovo-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp kuwait-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp kyrgyzstan-f.png ${WCL}6 cp lamed3.png ${WCL}6 -cp lang-g.png ${WCL}6 -cp laos-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp latvia-f.png latvian-d.png latvian-r1.png ${WCL}6 -cp lebanon-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp lettonie.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp leur.png ${WCL}6 -cp liberia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp libya-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp liech-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp lithuania-f.jpg lituanie.png ${WCL}6 -cp lorraine-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp louisiana-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp ls-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp luso1.pdf luso2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp lux-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp macau-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp macedonia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp madagascar-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp maine-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp malawi-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp malayalam.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp malayalam.png ${WCL}6 -cp malaysia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp malaysia1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp malaysia2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp mali-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp malta1-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp manchu.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp manchuria.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp manjuc.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp manjui.png ${WCL}6 -cp mauritania-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp mauritius-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp mex1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp mex2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp mex3.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp mexico-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp mexip.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp meyalu.png ${WCL}6 -cp moldova-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp monaco-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp mondep.png ${WCL}6 -cp mongasie.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp mongolcy.png ${WCL}6 -cp mongolia-f.png mongolian.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp mongols.png ${WCL}6 -cp mongoltr.png ${WCL}6 -cp montenegro-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp morocco-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp mozambique-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp namibia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp nbrunswick-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp ncyprus-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp neder.pdf netherlands-antilles-f.png netherlands-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp new-york-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp newzealand-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp nicaragua-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp nice-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp niger-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp nigeria-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp nihongo.png ${WCL}6 -cp norvege-c.pdf norvege-t.pdf norway-f.png norway-p.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp occ-f.png occdial1.jpg occdial2.png occitanie.png occtaur.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp oman-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp opole-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp pakistan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp palestine-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp panama-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp paraguay.png paraguay-f.png paraguayp.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp peru-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp philippines-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp poland-f.png polish-d.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp polmin.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp pologne.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp polski-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp portu-a.png ${WCL}6 -cp portu-b.png ${WCL}6 -cp portu-p.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp portu-r.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp portugal.pdf portugal-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp puerto-rico-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp qatar-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp quebec-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp rdcongo-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp romania-f.png romanian.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp rus-cyr.png ${WCL}6 -cp rus-re.png ${WCL}6 -cp rus-su.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp russia-f.png russian.png ${WCL}6 -cp russian-e.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp russian-n.png ${WCL}6 -cp russian-w.png ${WCL}6 -cp rwanda-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp saint-lucia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp same.png ${WCL}6 -cp same-f.png sami-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp samoa-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp san-marino-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp sao-f.png${WCL}6 -cp saudi-arabia-f.png${WCL}6 -cp scotland-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp senegal-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp serb-a.pdf serbia-f.png serbia-f2.png ${WCL}6 -cp serbia1.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp seychelles-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp singapore-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp slovak-ok.png ${WCL}6 -cp slovakia.pdf slovakia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp slovenia-f.png slovenian.png slovenie.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp solomon-islands-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp somalia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp sorabe-1.png ${WCL}6 -cp sorabe-2.png ${WCL}6 -cp sorben.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp sorbian.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp south-africa-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp spain.png spain-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp spilhennig.png ${WCL}6 -cp start.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp stop.png ${WCL}6 -cp sudan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp suede-a.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp suede-fin.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp suisse-f.png.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp suriname-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp svenska.png ${WCL}6 -cp swahili.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp swahili-m.png ${WCL}6 -cp fswahili.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp sweden.pdf sweden-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp syria-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp taiwan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp tajikistan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp tanzania-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp thai.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp thai.png thailand-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp togo-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp tonga-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp tunisia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp turkey-f.png turkish.png turquie.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp turkmenistan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp tuvalu-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp uae-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp uganda-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp uighur-f.png uighur.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp uk-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp ukra.png ${WCL}6 -cp ukraine.jpg ukraine-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp ukrainep.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp uruguay-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp us-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp usa-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp uzbekistan-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp vanuatu-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp vatican-f.jpg ${WCL}6 -cp venezuela-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp vermont-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp viet2.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp viet3.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp viet4.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp viet-w.pdf vietnam-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp vojvodina-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp wales-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp wallonia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp wallonie.pdf ${WCL}6 -cp wiki.png wikif.png ${WCL}6 -cp wrs-a.png wrs-a.png ${WCL}6 -cp xinjiang.png xinjiangc.png ${WCL}6 -cp xyugo.png ${WCL}6 -cp yemen-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp zambia-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp zanzibar-f.png ${WCL}6 -cp zimbabwe-f.png ${WCL}6 chmod 644 ${WCL}6/* # class 7 echo 'Class 7' @@ -610,942 +211,5 @@ if ( -f minitoc-fr.maf ) then cat minitoc-fr.maf | xargs -i -t \rm {} endif # -set UN=`whoami`.tmk -set RD=/tmp/$UN -if ( -d $RD ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $RD -endif -set TDSDIR=tds -set TDS=$RD/$TDSDIR -echo "BIB files" -if ( -d $TDS ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS -endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bib ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bib -endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc -foreach i ( minitoc-fr.bib minitoc.bib ) - cp $i $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "BST files" -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bst ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bst -endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc -foreach i ( en-mtc.bst fr-mtc.bst) - cp $i $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "SCRIPT files" -if ( -d $TDS/scripts ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/scripts -endif -if ( -d $TDS/scripts/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/scripts/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/scripts/minitoc -foreach i ( emk fmk imk pmk rmk tmk xmk cmk ) - cp $i $TDS/scripts/minitoc - chmod 755 $TDS/scripts/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "DVIPS files" -if ( -d $TDS/dvips ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/dvips -endif -if ( -d $TDS/dvips/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/dvips/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/dvips/minitoc -# -echo "INDEXING files" -if ( -d $TDS/makeindex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/makeindex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/makeindex/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/makeindex/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/makeindex/minitoc -foreach i ( minitoc-fr.ist minitoc.ist ) - cp $i $TDS/makeindex/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/makeindex/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "LATEX files" -if ( -d $TDS/tex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/tex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/tex/latex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/tex/latex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/tex/latex/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/tex/latex/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/tex/latex/minitoc -foreach i ( \ -UKenglish.mld \ -USenglish.mld \ -acadien.mld \ -afrikaans.mld \ -albanian.mld \ -american.mld \ -arab.mld \ -arab2.mld \ -arabi.mld \ -arabic.mld \ -armenian.mld \ -australian.mld \ -austrian.mld \ -bahasa.mld \ -bahasai.mld \ -bahasam.mld \ -bangla.mld \ -basque.mld \ -bengali.mld \ -bicig.mld \ -bicig2.mld \ -bicig3.mld \ -bithe.mld \ -brazil.mld \ -brazilian.mld \ -breton.mld \ -british.mld \ -bulgarian.mld \ -bulgarianb.mld \ -buryat.mld \ -buryat2.mld \ -canadian.mld \ -canadien.mld \ -castillan.mld \ -castillian.mld \ -catalan.mld \ -chinese1.mld \ -chinese1.mlo \ -chinese2.mld \ -chinese2.mlo \ -croatian.mld \ -czech.mld \ -danish.mld \ -devanagari.mld \ -dutch.mld \ -english.mld \ -english1.mld \ -english2.mld \ -esperant.mld \ -esperanto.mld \ -estonian.mld \ -ethiopia.mld \ -ethiopian.mld \ -ethiopian2.mld \ -farsi1.mld \ -farsi1.mlo \ -farsi2.mld \ -farsi2.mlo \ -farsi3.mld \ -finnish.mld \ -finnish2.mld \ -francais.mld \ -french.mld \ -french1.mld \ -french2.mld \ -frenchb.mld \ -frenchle.mld \ -frenchpro.mld \ -galician.mld \ -german.mld \ -germanb.mld \ -germanb2.mld \ -greek-mono.mld \ -greek-polydemo.mld \ -greek-polykatha.mld \ -greek.mld \ -guarani.mld \ -hangul-u8.mld \ -hangul-u8.mlo \ -hangul1.mld \ -hangul1.mlo \ -hangul2.mld \ -hangul2.mlo \ -hangul3.mld \ -hangul3.mlo \ -hangul4.mld \ -hangul4.mlo \ -hanja-u8.mld \ -hanja-u8.mlo \ -hanja1.mld \ -hanja1.mlo \ -hanja2.mld \ -hanja2.mlo \ -hebrew.mld \ -hebrew2.mld \ -hindi-modern.mld \ -hindi.mld \ -hungarian.mld \ -icelandic.mld \ -indon.mld \ -indonesian.mld \ -interlingua.mld \ -irish.mld \ -italian.mld \ -italian2.mld \ -japanese.mld \ -japanese.mlo \ -japanese2.mld \ -japanese2.mlo \ -japanese3.mld \ -japanese3.mlo \ -japanese4.mld \ -japanese4.mlo \ -japanese5.mld \ -japanese5.mlo \ -japanese6.mld \ -japanese6.mlo \ -kannada.mld \ -khalkha.mld \ -latin.mld \ -latin2.mld \ -latinc.mld \ -latinc2.mld \ -latvian.mld \ -latvian2.mld \ -letton.mld \ -letton2.mld \ -lithuanian.mld \ -lithuanian2.mld \ -lowersorbian.mld \ -lsorbian.mld \ -magyar.mld \ -magyar2.mld \ -magyar3.mld \ -malay.mld \ -malayalam-b.mld \ -malayalam-keli.mld \ -malayalam-keli2.mld \ -malayalam-mr.mld \ -malayalam-omega.mld \ -malayalam-omega.mlo \ -malayalam-rachana.mld \ -malayalam-rachana2.mld \ -malayalam-rachana3.mld \ -manju.mld \ -mexican.mld \ -meyalu.mld \ -minitoc.sty \ -mongol.mld \ -mongolb.mld \ -mongolian.mld \ -mtcmess.sty \ -mtcoff.sty \ -mtcpatchmem.sty \ -naustrian.mld \ -newzealand.mld \ -ngerman.mld \ -ngermanb.mld \ -ngermanb2.mld \ -norsk.mld \ -norsk2.mld \ -nynorsk.mld \ -nynorsk2.mld \ -occitan.mld \ -occitan2.mld \ -polish.mld \ -polish2.mld \ -polski.mld \ -portuges.mld \ -portuguese.mld \ -romanian.mld \ -romanian2.mld \ -romanian3.mld \ -russian-cca.mld \ -russian-cca.mlo \ -russian-cca1.mld \ -russian-cca1.mlo \ -russian-lh.mld \ -russian-lh.mlo \ -russian-lhcyralt.mld \ -russian-lhcyralt.mlo \ -russian-lhcyrkoi.mld \ -russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo \ -russian-lhcyrwin.mld \ -russian-lhcyrwin.mlo \ -russian.mld \ -russian2m.mld \ -russian2o.mld \ -russianb.mld \ -russianc.mld \ -samin.mld \ -scottish.mld \ -serbian.mld \ -serbianc.mld \ -slovak.mld \ -slovene.mld \ -spanish.mld \ -spanish2.mld \ -spanish3.mld \ -spanish4.mld \ -swahili.mld \ -swedish.mld \ -swedish2.mld \ -thai.mld \ -thai.mlo \ -turkish.mld \ -uighur.mld \ -uighur2.mld \ -uighur3.mld \ -ukraineb.mld \ -ukrainian.mld \ -uppersorbian.mld \ -usorbian.mld \ -vietnam.mld \ -vietnamese.mld \ -welsh.mld \ -xalx.mld \ -xalx2.mld \ -xalx3.mld \ -) - cp $i $TDS/tex/latex/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/tex/latex/minitoc/$i -end -# -## echo "TPM file" -## if ( -d $TDS/tpm ) then -## else -## mkdir -m 755 $TDS/tpm -## endif -## cp minitoc.tpm $TDS/tpm/minitoc.tpm -## chmod 744 $TDS/tpm/minitoc.tpm -# -echo "DOCUMENTATION files" -if ( -d $TDS/doc ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/doc -endif -if ( -d $TDS/doc/latex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/doc/latex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc -foreach i ( \ -INSTALL \ -README \ -TODO \ -CATALOG \ -minitoc-fr.lan \ -minitoc-fr.pdf \ -minitoc.bug \ -minitoc.l \ -minitoc.lan \ -minitoc.pdf \ -minitoc.pre \ -minitoc.sum \ -franc.sty \ -frbib.sty \ -frnew.sty \ -) - cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc -end -echo "EXAMPLE files" -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc/examples -foreach i ( \ -mtc-2c.pdf \ -mtc-2c.tex \ -mtc-2nd.pdf \ -mtc-2nd.tex \ -mtc-3co.pdf \ -mtc-3co.tex \ -mtc-add.pdf \ -mtc-add.tex \ -mtc-add.bib \ -mtc-ads.pdf \ -mtc-ads.tex \ -mtc-amm.pdf \ -mtc-amm.tex \ -mtc-apx.pdf \ -mtc-apx.tex \ -mtc-art.pdf \ -mtc-art.tex \ -mtc-bk.pdf \ -mtc-bk.tex \ -mtc-bo.pdf \ -mtc-bo.tex \ -mtc-ch0.pdf \ -mtc-ch0.tex \ -mtc-cri.pdf \ -mtc-cri.tex \ -mtc-fko.pdf \ -mtc-fko.tex \ -mtc-fo1.pdf \ -mtc-fo1.tex \ -mtc-fo2.pdf \ -mtc-fo2.tex \ -mtc-gap.pdf \ -mtc-gap.tex \ -mtc-hi1.pdf \ -mtc-hi1.tex \ -mtc-hi2.pdf \ -mtc-hi2.tex \ -mtc-hia.pdf \ -mtc-hia.tex \ -mtc-hir.pdf \ -mtc-hir.tex \ -mtc-hop.pdf \ -mtc-hop.tex \ -mtc-liv.pdf \ -mtc-liv.tex \ -mtc-mem.pdf \ -mtc-mem.tex \ -mtc-mm1.pdf \ -mtc-mm1.tex \ -mtc-mu.pdf \ -mtc-mu.tex \ -mtc-nom.pdf \ -mtc-nom.tex \ -mtc-ocf.pdf \ -mtc-ocf.tex \ -mtc-ofs.pdf \ -mtc-ofs.tex \ -mtc-sbf.pdf \ -mtc-sbf.tex \ -mtc-scr.pdf \ -mtc-scr.tex \ -mtc-syn.pdf \ -mtc-syn.tex \ -mtc-tbi.pdf \ -mtc-tbi.tex \ -mtc-tlc.pdf \ -mtc-tlc.tex \ -mtc-tsf.pdf \ -mtc-tsf.tex \ -mtc-vti.pdf \ -mtc-vti.tex \ -) - cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/examples -end -echo "IMAGE files" -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc/images -foreach i ( \ -aaland-f.png \ -acadian-m.pdf \ -acadie-f.png \ -acadien-m.pdf \ -afghan-f.png \ -africa-lf.png \ -africa-lo.pdf \ -afrsud-l.pdf \ -afrsud-p.pdf \ -albania.pdf \ -alb2.png \ -alba-eth.pdf \ -albania-f.png \ -algeria-f.png \ -allemand.jpg \ -alsace-f.png \ -andorra-f.png \ -argentina-f.png \ -anglo1.pdf \ -angola-f.png \ -arab-l.jpg \ -arabw.png \ -armenia-f.png \ -armeniad.pdf \ -armenian-l.png \ -armeniar.jpg \ -aruba-f.png \ -australia-f.png \ -austria-f.png \ -azerbaijan-f.png \ -bahamas-f.png \ -bahrain-f.png \ -baltes.jpg \ -bangla.png \ -bangla1.png \ -bangla2.png \ -bangladesh-f.png \ -barbados-f.png \ -basque-de.png \ -basque-df.png \ -basque1.pdf \ -basque2.pdf \ -be-dg-f.png \ -belarus-f.png \ -belgique.pdf \ -belgium-f.png \ -belize-f.png \ -bengali-m.jpg \ -benin-f.png \ -bolivia-f.png \ -bolzano-f.png \ -bosnia.pdf \ -bosnia-hz-f.png \ -bozen-f.png \ -brazil.pdf \ -brazil-f.png \ -brazilp.pdf \ -bretagne.pdf \ -brussels-f.png \ -bulgaria-f.png \ -bulgariar.jpg \ -bulgarski.png \ -bulgmap.png \ -bur-f.png \ -burkina-f.png \ -burundi-f.png \ -buryatia.pdf \ -buryatia-l.pdf \ -california-f.png \ -cambodia-f.png \ -cameroon-f.png \ -canada.pdf \ -canada-f.png \ -canada-l.pdf \ -canada-pe.png \ -canada-pf.pdf \ -canada1.pdf \ -cap-verde-f.png \ -castille-f.png \ -catalan-d.pdf \ -catalan-p.pdf \ -catalonia-f.png \ -caucasus.pdf \ -central-africa-f.png \ -chad-f.png \ -chile-f.png \ -china-ae.png \ -china-af.png \ -china-ch.png \ -china-f.png \ -china-l.pdf \ -china-w.png \ -chine1.pdf \ -chine2.pdf \ -cis-f.png \ -colombia-f.png \ -comoros-f.png \ -congo-f.png \ -corsica-f.jpg \ -costa-rica-f.jpg \ -cplp-0.png \ -cplpmap.png \ -croatia-f.png \ -croatia-un.png \ -croatie2.png \ -cuba-f.png \ -cyprus-f.png \ -cyr-alf.png \ -cz1.pdf \ -cz3.png \ -czech-f.png \ -czechd.pdf \ -dane-f.png \ -danemark.jpg \ -danishd.pdf \ -danishg.pdf \ -devanagari.png \ -djibouti-f.png \ -dominica-f.png \ -dominican-f.png \ -dutchw.pdf \ -east-timor-f.png \ -ecosse1.pdf \ -ecosse2.pdf \ -ecosse3.pdf \ -ecuador-f.jpg \ -egypt-f.png \ -el-salvador-f.png \ -england-f.jpg \ -equa-guinea-f.png \ -eritrea-f.png \ -espa-l.pdf \ -espa-o.png \ -esperanto-f.png \ -estonia-a.pdf \ -estonia-b.pdf \ -estonia-f.png \ -eth2.png \ -ethiolang.png \ -ethiopia.pdf \ -ethiopia-f.png \ -ethiopia-p.pdf \ -euro-lan.png \ -euro-lan1.png \ -euro-lan2.png \ -eusk-f.png \ -euskara.png \ -faroe-f.png\ -farsi.pdf \ -farsi-logo.png \ -feroe.jpg \ -fiji-f.png \ -finland-f.png \ -finlande1.png \ -finlande2.pdf \ -finnishd.pdf \ -finnishl.pdf \ -flanders-f.png \ -france-f.png \ -france-lr.png \ -franco.png \ -francophonie-f.png \ -gabon-f.png \ -gael-ft.pdf \ -gaid.jpg \ -galicia-f.png \ -galicia-m.pdf \ -galicia-mp.pdf \ -galician-l.png \ -galles1.pdf \ -galles2.pdf \ -georgia-f.png \ -germ-w.png \ -german-c.pdf \ -german-d.pdf \ -german-m.pdf \ -germany-f.jpg \ -ghana-f.png \ -gibraltar-f.png \ -grece1.pdf \ -grece2.pdf \ -greece-f.png \ -greeka.png \ -greekm.jpg \ -greenland-f.png \ -guatemala-f.jpg \ -guinea-bissau-f.png \ -guinea-f.png \ -gwenn-f.png \ -haiti-f.jpg \ -hangul.png \ -hanja.png \ -hanzi.png \ -hin.png \ -hindi-b.png \ -hindi-p.png \ -hispano.png \ -honduras-f.png \ -hrv.png \ -hun1.png \ -hun2.jpg \ -hungary-f.png \ -iceland-f.png \ -imongolia-f.png \ -inde1.pdf \ -inde2.jpg \ -india-f.png \ -indonesia-f.png \ -indonesia1.pdf \ -indonesia2.pdf \ -iran-f.png \ -iranian.jpg \ -iraq-f.png \ -ireland-f.png \ -irish.png \ -irlande.pdf \ -islam-pbc.png \ -islam-sw.pdf \ -islande.png \ -islandep.jpg \ -isr1.pdf \ -isr2.pdf \ -israel-f.png \ -italian.pdf \ -italy-f.png \ -italo1.png \ -italysm.png \ -ivory-f.png \ -ivrit.png \ -jamaica-f.png \ -japan-f.png \ -japon1.pdf \ -japon2.jpg \ -jordan-f.png \ -jutland-f.png \ -kannada-n.png \ -karnad1.jpg \ -karnataka.jpg \ -karnataka-f.jpg \ -kazakhstan-f.png \ -kenya-f.png \ -kerala.jpg \ -kerala-f.jpg \ -khalkha.pdf \ -kiribati-f.png \ -korea-n-f.png \ -korea-s-f.png \ -korean1.png \ -korean2.jpg \ -kos-alb.png \ -kos-ml.png \ -kosovo-f.png \ -kuwait-f.png \ -kyrgyzstan-f.png \ -lamed3.png \ -lang-g.png \ -laos-f.png \ -latvia-f.png \ -latvian-d.png \ -latvian-r1.png \ -lebanon-f.png \ -lettonie.jpg \ -leur.png \ -liberia-f.png \ -libya-f.jpg \ -liech-f.png \ -lithuania-f.jpg \ -lituanie.png \ -lorraine-f.jpg \ -louisiana-f.png \ -ls-f.png \ -luso1.pdf \ -luso2.pdf \ -lux-f.png \ -macau-f.png \ -macedonia-f.png \ -madagascar-f.png \ -maine-f.jpg \ -malawi-f.png \ -malayalam.pdf \ -malayalam.png \ -malaysia-f.png \ -malaysia1.pdf \ -malaysia2.pdf \ -mali-f.png \ -malta1-f.png \ -manchu.jpg \ -manchuria.jpg \ -manjuc.jpg \ -manjui.png \ -mauritania-f.png \ -mauritius-f.png \ -mex1.pdf \ -mex2.pdf \ -mex3.pdf \ -mexico-f.jpg \ -mexip.pdf \ -meyalu.png \ -moldova-f.png \ -monaco-f.png \ -mondep.png \ -mongasie.pdf \ -mongolcy.png \ -mongolia-f.png \ -mongolian.pdf \ -mongols.png \ -mongoltr.png \ -montenegro-f.jpg \ -morocco-f.png \ -mozambique-f.png \ -namibia-f.png \ -nbrunswick-f.png \ -ncyprus-f.png \ -neder.pdf \ -netherlands-antilles-f.png \ -netherlands-f.png \ -new-york-f.png \ -newzealand-f.png \ -nicaragua-f.png \ -nice-f.png \ -niger-f.png \ -nigeria-f.png \ -nihongo.png \ -norvege-c.pdf \ -norvege-t.pdf \ -norway-f.png \ -norway-p.pdf \ -occ-f.png \ -occdial1.jpg \ -occdial2.png \ -occitanie.png \ -occtaur.jpg \ -oman-f.png \ -opole-f.png \ -pakistan-f.png \ -palestine-f.png \ -panama-f.png \ -paraguay.png \ -paraguay-f.png \ -paraguayp.pdf \ -peru-f.png \ -philippines-f.png \ -poland-f.png \ -polish-d.jpg \ -polmin.jpg \ -pologne.pdf \ -polski-f.png \ -portu-a.png \ -portu-b.png \ -portu-p.jpg \ -portu-r.jpg \ -portugal.pdf \ -portugal-f.png \ -puerto-rico-f.png \ -qatar-f.png \ -quebec-f.png \ -rdcongo-f.png \ -romania-f.png \ -romanian.pdf \ -rus-cyr.png \ -rus-re.png \ -rus-su.pdf \ -russia-f.png \ -russian.png \ -russian-e.pdf \ -russian-n.png \ -russian-w.png \ -rwanda-f.png \ -saint-lucia-f.png \ -same.png \ -same-f.png \ -sami-f.png \ -samoa-f.png \ -san-marino-f.png \ -sao-f.png \ -saudi-arabia-f.png \ -scotland-f.png \ -senegal-f.png \ -serb-a.pdf \ -serbia-f.png \ -serbia-f2.png \ -serbia1.pdf \ -seychelles-f.png \ -singapore-f.png \ -slovak-ok.png \ -slovakia.pdf \ -slovakia-f.png \ -slovenia-f.png \ -slovenian.png \ -slovenie.pdf \ -solomon-islands-f.png \ -somalia-f.png \ -sorabe-1.jpg \ -sorabe-2.jpg \ -sorben.jpg \ -sorbian.jpg \ -south-africa-f.png \ -spain.png \ -spain-f.png \ -spilhennig.png \ -start.jpg \ -stop.png \ -sudan-f.png \ -suede-a.pdf \ -suede-fin.pdf \ -suisse-f.png \ -suriname-f.png \ -svenska.png \ -swahili.pdf \ -swahili-m.png \ -fswahili.pdf \ -sweden.pdf \ -sweden-f.png \ -syria-f.png \ -taiwan-f.png \ -tajikistan-f.png \ -tanzania-f.png \ -thai.pdf \ -thai.png \ -thailand-f.png \ -togo-f.png \ -tonga-f.png \ -tunisia-f.png \ -turkey-f.png \ -turkish.png \ -turkmenistan-f.png \ -turquie.pdf \ -tuvalu-f.png \ -uae-f.png \ -uganda-f.png \ -uighur-f.png \ -uighur.pdf \ -uk-f.png \ -ukra.png \ -ukraine.jpg \ -ukraine-f.png \ -ukrainep.pdf \ -uruguay-f.png \ -us-f.png \ -usa-f.png \ -uzbekistan-f.png \ -vanuatu-f.png \ -vatican-f.jpg \ -venezuela-f.png \ -vermont-f.png \ -viet2.pdf \ -viet3.pdf \ -viet4.pdf \ -viet-w.pdf \ -vietnam-f.png \ -vojvodina-f.png \ -wales-f.png \ -wallonia-f.png \ -wallonie.pdf \ -wiki.png \ -wikif.png \ -wrs-a.png \ -wrs-c.png \ -xinjiang.png \ -xinjiangc.png \ -xyugo.png \ -yemen-f.png \ -zambia-f.png \ -zanzibar-f.png \ -zimbabwe-f.png \ -) - cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images - chmod 644 $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images/$i -end -# -echo "SOURCE files" -if ( -d $TDS/source ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/source -endif -if ( -d $TDS/source/latex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/source/latex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/source/latex/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/source/latex/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/source/latex/minitoc -foreach i ( minitoc-fr.dtx minitoc.dtx minitoc.ins ) - cp $i $TDS/source/latex/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/source/latex/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "MINITOC-TDS.ZIP" -set WD=`pwd` -cd $RD/$TDSDIR -\rm -f minitoc-tds.zip -\rm -f minitoc.tds.zip -zip -r minitoc.tds.zip * -i \* -cd $WD -# it's all! -echo "It's all, folks..." -exit - +echo "Running ./tmk to make .tds.zip ..." +csh -f ./tmk diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/poland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/poland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 52378c6617c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/poland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polish-d.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polish-d.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 974e6a9cb37..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polish-d.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polmin.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polmin.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 02d63152840..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polmin.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pologne.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pologne.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 46e65cdeb5a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/pologne.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polski-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polski-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 691bab431d7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/polski-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-a.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-a.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d9f9f0d323a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-a.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-b.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-b.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9c722cef7df..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-b.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-p.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-p.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e73b4773fbf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-p.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-r.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-r.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 14ad8399bd9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portu-r.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portugal-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portugal-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bdca04d4587..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portugal-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portugal.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portugal.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8cb72bd9bc3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/portugal.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/puerto-rico-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/puerto-rico-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 51d567d1bb5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/puerto-rico-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/qatar-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/qatar-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b4e4649b2c5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/qatar-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/quebec-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/quebec-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6ef8173a201..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/quebec-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rdcongo-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rdcongo-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9e82c63f603..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rdcongo-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rmk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rmk index a908af87940..e7fa21d507c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rmk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rmk @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/csh -f # repartition set w=`whoami`.rmk set OLD=/tmp/$w/OLD @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ cp minitoc.sty mtcoff.sty mtcmess.sty mtcpatchmem.sty ${WCL}1 cp *.mld *.mlo ${WCL}1 # class 2 echo 'Class 2' -cp INSTALL minitoc.l README CATALOG TODO ${WCL}2 +cp INSTALL minitoc.l README TODO ${WCL}2 # class 3 echo 'Class 3' cp mtc-add.bib ${WCL}3 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/romania-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/romania-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ecd1502aa23..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/romania-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/romanian.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/romanian.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 40656d12d31..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/romanian.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-cyr.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-cyr.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 015d3f9e368..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-cyr.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-re.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-re.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5e3293f4a54..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-re.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-su.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-su.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 71d6088ab23..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rus-su.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7251cd22e01..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-e.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-e.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 79fed8a0d11..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-e.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-n.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-n.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 36324ed51c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-n.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-w.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-w.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 851f3751b2d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian-w.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b4798471b03..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/russian.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rwanda-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rwanda-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1a11e9e0302..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/rwanda-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/saint-lucia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/saint-lucia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 629652333c8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/saint-lucia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/same-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/same-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b1a23e3d253..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/same-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/same.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/same.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 07ddebe43c6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/same.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sami-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sami-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d89207abaa3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sami-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/samoa-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/samoa-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4d483dd69c0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/samoa-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/san-marino-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/san-marino-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7d8bd922691..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/san-marino-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sao-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sao-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f833a11ce3a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sao-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/saudi-arabia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/saudi-arabia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7967f2b7f96..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/saudi-arabia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/scotland-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/scotland-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fe7cc55d7cd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/scotland-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/senegal-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/senegal-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 119bdd02f4a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/senegal-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serb-a.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serb-a.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c294a479e35..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serb-a.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ee9f785817c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia-f2.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia-f2.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1e147a2aaf3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia-f2.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2a550f1ccb5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/serbia1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/seychelles-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/seychelles-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2352dcb9f25..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/seychelles-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/singapore-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/singapore-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b6d8fdf19d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/singapore-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovak-ok.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovak-ok.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index af89aa1fd37..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovak-ok.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovakia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovakia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 91784e23f82..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovakia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovakia.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovakia.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7eca9bd10b1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovakia.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7392025dd56..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenian.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenian.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 380d7e1c6fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenian.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenie.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenie.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 862c29dd00a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/slovenie.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/solomon-islands-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/solomon-islands-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e79a5f53a6e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/solomon-islands-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/somalia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/somalia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 489ee91d570..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/somalia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorabe-1.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorabe-1.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 70cbed3bcab..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorabe-1.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorabe-2.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorabe-2.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 376a4bf6001..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorabe-2.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorben.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorben.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 28242858598..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorben.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorbian.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorbian.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bbbe38515fb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sorbian.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/south-africa-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/south-africa-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1a91621b431..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/south-africa-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spain-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spain-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0393f055d63..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spain-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spain.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spain.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index adcb3808abf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spain.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spilhennig.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spilhennig.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 40f21dab7b6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/spilhennig.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/start.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/start.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 14ce660da76..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/start.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/stop.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/stop.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8b32f403977..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/stop.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sudan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sudan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c80b38dbd99..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sudan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suede-a.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suede-a.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 23e882ddc01..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suede-a.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suede-fin.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suede-fin.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 92739103c64..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suede-fin.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suisse-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suisse-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fd51b4ae727..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suisse-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suriname-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suriname-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d4150777022..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/suriname-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/svenska.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/svenska.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 107e836c413..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/svenska.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/swahili-m.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/swahili-m.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2067c58e869..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/swahili-m.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/swahili.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/swahili.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 48e3b950dfb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/swahili.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sweden-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sweden-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 00fd8da0aaf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sweden-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sweden.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sweden.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1e92863e44e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/sweden.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/syria-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/syria-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c3a0349d5e5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/syria-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/taiwan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/taiwan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 44612c49767..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/taiwan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tajikistan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tajikistan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8ff3490940e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tajikistan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tanzania-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tanzania-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6c72dda1b2d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tanzania-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thai.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thai.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index de213d0e977..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thai.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thai.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thai.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a33c1ac331f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thai.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thailand-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thailand-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index edfc567f496..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/thailand-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tmk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tmk index c68ac20c86d..169093b3611 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tmk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tmk @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/csh -f # set x # set verbose set UN=`whoami`.tmk @@ -9,78 +9,10 @@ else endif set TDSDIR=tds set TDS=$RD/$TDSDIR -echo "BIB files" if ( -d $TDS ) then else mkdir -m 755 $TDS endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bib ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bib -endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc -foreach i ( minitoc-fr.bib minitoc.bib ) - cp $i $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/bibtex/bib/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "BST files" -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bst ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bst -endif -if ( -d $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc -foreach i ( en-mtc.bst fr-mtc.bst) - cp $i $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/bibtex/bst/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "SCRIPT files" -if ( -d $TDS/scripts ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/scripts -endif -if ( -d $TDS/scripts/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/scripts/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/scripts/minitoc -foreach i ( emk fmk imk pmk rmk tmk cmk xmk ) - cp $i $TDS/scripts/minitoc - chmod 755 $TDS/scripts/minitoc/$i -end -# -echo "DVIPS files" -if ( -d $TDS/dvips ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/dvips -endif -if ( -d $TDS/dvips/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/dvips/minitoc -endif -# -echo "INDEXING files" -if ( -d $TDS/makeindex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/makeindex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/makeindex/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/makeindex/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/makeindex/minitoc -foreach i ( minitoc-fr.ist minitoc.ist ) - cp $i $TDS/makeindex/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/makeindex/minitoc/$i -end # echo "LATEX files" if ( -d $TDS/tex ) then @@ -322,14 +254,6 @@ xalx3.mld \ chmod 744 $TDS/tex/latex/minitoc/$i end # -## echo "TPM file" -## if ( -d $TDS/tpm ) then -## else -## mkdir -m 755 $TDS/tpm -## endif -## cp minitoc.tpm $TDS/tpm/minitoc.tpm -## chmod 744 $TDS/tpm/minitoc.tpm -# echo "DOCUMENTATION files" if ( -d $TDS/doc ) then else @@ -343,11 +267,22 @@ if ( -d $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc ) then \rm -rf $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc endif mkdir -m 755 $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc +# include .bst, .bib, .ist, .dtx, .ins, scripts, here, +# since they need all the other doc files . foreach i ( \ INSTALL \ README \ TODO \ -CATALOG \ +en-mtc.bst \ +fr-mtc.bst \ +minitoc-fr.bib \ +minitoc.bib \ +minitoc-fr.ist \ +minitoc.ist \ +minitoc-fr.dtx \ +minitoc.dtx \ +minitoc.ins \ +cmk emk fmk imk pmk rmk tmk xmk \ minitoc-fr.lan \ minitoc-fr.pdf \ minitoc.bug \ @@ -356,9 +291,12 @@ minitoc.lan \ minitoc.pdf \ minitoc.pre \ minitoc.sum \ +boldsc.sty \ +dblaccnt.sty \ franc.sty \ frbib.sty \ frnew.sty \ +mypatches.sty \ ) cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc end @@ -437,503 +375,16 @@ mtc-tsf.tex \ mtc-vti.pdf \ mtc-vti.tex \ ) -cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/examples + cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/examples/ end +# echo "IMAGE files" mkdir -m 755 $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images foreach i ( \ -aaland-f.png \ -acadian-m.pdf \ -acadie-f.png \ -acadien-m.pdf \ -afghan-f.png \ -africa-lf.png \ -africa-lo.pdf \ -afrsud-l.pdf \ -afrsud-p.pdf \ -albania.pdf \ -albania-f.png\ -alb2.png \ -alba-eth.pdf \ -algeria-f.png \ -allemand.jpg \ -alsace-f.png \ -andorra-f.png \ -argentina-f.png \ -anglo1.pdf \ -angola-f.png \ -arab-l.jpg \ -arabw.png \ -armenia-f.png \ -armeniad.pdf \ -armenian-l.png \ -armeniar.jpg \ -aruba-f.png \ -australia-f.png \ -austria-f.png \ -azerbaijan-f.png \ -bahamas-f.png \ -bahrain-f.png \ -baltes.jpg \ -bangla.png \ -bangla1.png \ -bangla2.png \ -bangladesh-f.png \ -barbados-f.png \ -basque-de.png \ -basque-df.png \ -basque1.pdf \ -basque2.pdf \ -be-dg-f.png \ -belarus-f.png \ -belgique.pdf \ -belgium-f.png \ -belize-f.png \ -bengali-m.jpg \ -benin-f.png \ -bolivia-f.png \ -bolzano-f.png \ -bosnia.pdf \ -bosnia-hz-f.png \ -bozen-f.png \ -brazil.pdf \ -brazil-f.png \ -brazilp.pdf \ -bretagne.pdf \ -brussels-f.png \ -bulgaria-f.png \ -bulgariar.jpg \ -bulgarski.png \ -bulgmap.png \ -bur-f.png \ -burkina-f.png \ -burundi-f.png \ -buryatia.pdf \ -buryatia-l.pdf \ -california-f.png \ -cambodia-f.png \ -cameroon-f.png \ -canada.pdf \ -canada-f.png \ -canada-l.pdf \ -canada-pe.png \ -canada-pf.pdf \ -canada1.pdf \ -cap-verde-f.png \ -castille-f.png \ -catalan-d.pdf \ -catalan-p.pdf \ -catalonia-f.png \ -caucasus.pdf \ -central-africa-f.png \ -chad-f.png \ -chile-f.png \ -china-ae.png \ -china-af.png \ -china-ch.png \ -china-f.png \ -china-l.pdf \ -china-w.png \ -chine1.pdf \ -chine2.pdf \ -cis-f.png \ -colombia-f.png \ -comoros-f.png \ -congo-f.png \ -corsica-f.jpg \ -costa-rica-f.jpg \ -cplp-0.png \ -cplpmap.png \ -croatia-f.png \ -croatia-un.png \ -croatie2.png \ -cuba-f.png \ -cyprus-f.png \ -cyr-alf.png \ -cz1.pdf \ -cz3.png \ -czech-f.png \ -czechd.pdf \ -dane-f.png \ -danemark.jpg \ -danishd.pdf \ -danishg.pdf \ -devanagari.png \ -djibouti-f.png \ -dominica-f.png \ -dominican-f.png \ -dutchw.pdf \ -east-timor-f.png \ -ecosse1.pdf \ -ecosse2.pdf \ -ecosse3.pdf \ -ecuador-f.jpg \ -egypt-f.png \ -el-salvador-f.png \ -england-f.jpg \ -equa-guinea-f.png \ -eritrea-f.png \ -espa-l.pdf \ -espa-o.png \ -esperanto-f.png \ -estonia-a.pdf \ -estonia-b.pdf \ -estonia-f.png \ -eth2.png \ -ethiolang.png \ -ethiopia.pdf \ -ethiopia-f.png \ -ethiopia-p.pdf \ -euro-lan.png \ -euro-lan1.png \ -euro-lan2.png \ -eusk-f.png \ -euskara.png \ -faroe-f.png \ -farsi.pdf \ -farsi-logo.png \ -feroe.jpg \ -fiji-f.png \ -finland-f.png \ -finlande1.png \ -finlande2.pdf \ -finnishd.pdf \ -finnishl.pdf \ -flanders-f.png \ -france-f.png \ -france-lr.png \ -franco.png \ -francophonie-f.png \ -gabon-f.png \ -gael-ft.pdf \ -gaid.jpg \ -galicia-f.png \ -galicia-m.pdf \ -galicia-mp.pdf \ -galician-l.png \ -galles1.pdf \ -galles2.pdf \ -georgia-f.png \ -germ-w.png \ -german-c.pdf \ -german-d.pdf \ -german-m.pdf \ -germany-f.jpg \ -ghana-f.png \ -gibraltar-f.png \ -grece1.pdf \ -grece2.pdf \ -greece-f.png \ -greeka.png \ -greekm.jpg \ -greenland-f.png \ -guatemala-f.jpg \ -guinea-bissau-f.png \ -guinea-f.png \ -gwenn-f.png \ -haiti-f.jpg \ -hangul.png \ -hanja.png \ -hanzi.png \ -hin.png \ -hindi-b.png \ -hindi-p.png \ -hispano.png \ -honduras-f.png \ -hrv.png \ -hun1.png \ -hun2.jpg \ -hungary-f.png \ -iceland-f.png \ -imongolia-f.png \ -inde1.pdf \ -inde2.jpg \ -india-f.png \ -indonesia-f.png \ -indonesia1.pdf \ -indonesia2.pdf \ -iran-f.png \ -iranian.jpg \ -iraq-f.png \ -ireland-f.png \ -irish.png \ -irlande.pdf \ -islam-pbc.png \ -islam-sw.pdf \ -islande.png \ -islandep.jpg \ -isr1.pdf \ -isr2.pdf \ -israel-f.png \ -italian.pdf \ -italy-f.png \ -italo1.png \ -italysm.png \ -ivory-f.png \ -ivrit.png \ -jamaica-f.png \ -japan-f.png \ -japon1.pdf \ -japon2.jpg \ -jordan-f.png \ -jutland-f.png \ -kannada-n.png \ -karnad1.jpg \ -karnataka.jpg \ -karnataka-f.jpg \ -kazakhstan-f.png \ -kenya-f.png \ -kerala.jpg \ -kerala-f.jpg \ -khalkha.pdf \ -kiribati-f.png \ -korea-n-f.png \ -korea-s-f.png \ -korean1.png \ -korean2.jpg \ -kos-alb.png \ -kos-ml.png \ -kosovo-f.png \ -kuwait-f.png \ -kyrgyzstan-f.png \ -lamed3.png \ -lang-g.png \ -laos-f.png \ -latvia-f.png \ -latvian-d.png \ -latvian-r1.png \ -lebanon-f.png \ -lettonie.jpg \ -leur.png \ -liberia-f.png \ -libya-f.jpg \ -liech-f.png \ -lithuania-f.jpg \ -lituanie.png \ -lorraine-f.jpg \ -louisiana-f.png \ -ls-f.png \ -luso1.pdf \ -luso2.pdf \ -lux-f.png \ -macau-f.png \ -macedonia-f.png \ -madagascar-f.png \ -maine-f.jpg \ -malawi-f.png \ -malayalam.pdf \ -malayalam.png \ -malaysia-f.png \ -malaysia1.pdf \ -malaysia2.pdf \ -mali-f.png \ -malta1-f.png \ -manchu.jpg \ -manchuria.jpg \ -manjuc.jpg \ -manjui.png \ -mauritania-f.png \ -mauritius-f.png \ -mex1.pdf \ -mex2.pdf \ -mex3.pdf \ -mexico-f.jpg \ -mexip.pdf \ -meyalu.png \ -moldova-f.png \ -monaco-f.png \ -mondep.png \ -mongasie.pdf \ -mongolcy.png \ -mongolia-f.png \ -mongolian.pdf \ -mongols.png \ -mongoltr.png \ -montenegro-f.jpg \ -morocco-f.png \ -mozambique-f.png \ -namibia-f.png \ -nbrunswick-f.png \ -ncyprus-f.png \ -neder.pdf \ -netherlands-antilles-f.png \ -netherlands-f.png \ -new-york-f.png \ -newzealand-f.png \ -nicaragua-f.png \ -nice-f.png \ -niger-f.png \ -nigeria-f.png \ -nihongo.png \ -norvege-c.pdf \ -norvege-t.pdf \ -norway-f.png \ -norway-p.pdf \ + lamed3.png \ ) -cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images -chmod 644 $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images/$i -end -# -foreach i ( \ -occ-f.png \ -occdial1.jpg \ -occdial2.png \ -occitanie.png \ -occtaur.jpg \ -oman-f.png \ -opole-f.png \ -pakistan-f.png \ -palestine-f.png \ -panama-f.png \ -paraguay.png \ -paraguay-f.png \ -paraguayp.pdf \ -peru-f.png \ -philippines-f.png \ -poland-f.png \ -polish-d.jpg \ -polmin.jpg \ -pologne.pdf \ -polski-f.png \ -portu-a.png \ -portu-b.png \ -portu-p.jpg \ -portu-r.jpg \ -portugal.pdf \ -portugal-f.png \ -puerto-rico-f.png \ -qatar-f.png \ -quebec-f.png \ -rdcongo-f.png \ -romania-f.png \ -romanian.pdf \ -rus-cyr.png \ -rus-re.png \ -rus-su.pdf \ -russia-f.png \ -russian.png \ -russian-e.pdf \ -russian-n.png \ -russian-w.png \ -rwanda-f.png \ -saint-lucia-f.png \ -same.png \ -same-f.png \ -sami-f.png \ -samoa-f.png \ -san-marino-f.png \ -sao-f.png \ -saudi-arabia-f.png \ -scotland-f.png \ -senegal-f.png \ -serb-a.pdf \ -serbia-f.png \ -serbia-f2.png \ -serbia1.pdf \ -seychelles-f.png \ -singapore-f.png \ -slovak-ok.png \ -slovakia.pdf \ -slovakia-f.png \ -slovenia-f.png \ -slovenian.png \ -slovenie.pdf \ -solomon-islands-f.png \ -somalia-f.png \ -sorabe-1.jpg \ -sorabe-2.jpg \ -sorben.jpg \ -sorbian.jpg \ -south-africa-f.png \ -spain.png \ -spain-f.png \ -spilhennig.png \ -start.jpg \ -stop.png \ -sudan-f.png \ -suede-a.pdf \ -suede-fin.pdf \ -suisse-f.png \ -suriname-f.png \ -svenska.png \ -swahili.pdf \ -swahili-m.png \ -fswahili.pdf \ -sweden.pdf \ -sweden-f.png \ -syria-f.png \ -taiwan-f.png \ -tajikistan-f.png \ -tanzania-f.png \ -thai.pdf \ -thai.png \ -thailand-f.png \ -togo-f.png \ -tonga-f.png \ -tunisia-f.png \ -turkey-f.png \ -turkish.png \ -turkmenistan-f.png \ -turquie.pdf \ -tuvalu-f.png \ -uae-f.png \ -uganda-f.png \ -uighur-f.png \ -uighur.pdf \ -uk-f.png \ -ukra.png \ -ukraine.jpg \ -ukraine-f.png \ -ukrainep.pdf \ -uruguay-f.png \ -us-f.png \ -usa-f.png \ -uzbekistan-f.png \ -vanuatu-f.png \ -vatican-f.jpg \ -venezuela-f.png \ -vermont-f.png \ -viet2.pdf \ -viet3.pdf \ -viet4.pdf \ -viet-w.pdf \ -vietnam-f.png \ -vojvodina-f.png \ -wales-f.png \ -wallonia-f.png \ -wallonie.pdf \ -wiki.png \ -wikif.png \ -wrs-a.png \ -wrs-c.png \ -xinjiang.png \ -xinjiangc.png \ -xyugo.png \ -yemen-f.png \ -zambia-f.png \ -zanzibar-f.png \ -zimbabwe-f.png \ -) -cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images -chmod 644 $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images/$i -end -# -echo "SOURCE files" -if ( -d $TDS/source ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/source -endif -if ( -d $TDS/source/latex ) then -else - mkdir -m 755 $TDS/source/latex -endif -if ( -d $TDS/source/latex/minitoc ) then - \rm -rf $TDS/source/latex/minitoc -endif -mkdir -m 755 $TDS/source/latex/minitoc -foreach i ( minitoc-fr.dtx minitoc.dtx minitoc.ins ) - cp $i $TDS/source/latex/minitoc - chmod 744 $TDS/source/latex/minitoc/$i + cp $i $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images/ + chmod 644 $TDS/doc/latex/minitoc/images/$i end # echo "MINITOC-TDS.ZIP" diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/togo-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/togo-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8cbba3a8aa5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/togo-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tonga-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tonga-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d0f4ab5189d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tonga-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tunisia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tunisia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index da5d01fb811..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tunisia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkey-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkey-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ebc0ce60ca6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkey-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkish.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkish.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ba7844138af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkish.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkmenistan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkmenistan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 738ade9401b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turkmenistan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turquie.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turquie.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 597b240397e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/turquie.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tuvalu-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tuvalu-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 14795a2b408..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/tuvalu-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uae-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uae-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 98dfa053cde..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uae-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uganda-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uganda-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dfd43fd51fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uganda-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uighur-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uighur-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a009d2f035d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uighur-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uighur.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uighur.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2ec8953af17..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uighur.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uk-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uk-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d36774f17ca..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uk-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukra.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukra.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 98add65a3e7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukra.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukraine-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukraine-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1f97bf5085c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukraine-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukraine.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukraine.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9877895693c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukraine.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukrainep.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukrainep.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8f33a5ccdfb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/ukrainep.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uruguay-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uruguay-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ea92fae98e4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uruguay-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/us-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/us-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d5377c2e96b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/us-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/usa-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/usa-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e8cdbaf5c5f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/usa-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uzbekistan-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uzbekistan-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 90b889ec357..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/uzbekistan-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vanuatu-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vanuatu-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d179805419e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vanuatu-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vatican-f.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vatican-f.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4c58ef44c00..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vatican-f.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/venezuela-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/venezuela-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ce5bc29e976..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/venezuela-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vermont-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vermont-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b7914707f5f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vermont-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet-w.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet-w.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 658abaa2eae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet-w.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet2.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 270f4294a82..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet2.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet3.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet3.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7b7b711b1d0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet3.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet4.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet4.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9cbd0d16d78..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/viet4.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vietnam-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vietnam-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0f9c98061f4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vietnam-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vojvodina-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vojvodina-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a039123e450..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/vojvodina-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wales-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wales-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e9762a0450a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wales-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wallonia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wallonia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 10ef9c575c5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wallonia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wallonie.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wallonie.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 73cf252beee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wallonie.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wiki.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wiki.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 216d991bc19..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wiki.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wikif.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wikif.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c7819999dd5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wikif.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wrs-a.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wrs-a.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3da5cc57470..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wrs-a.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wrs-c.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wrs-c.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a099cdb67a2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/wrs-c.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xinjiang.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xinjiang.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6ea4596c5ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xinjiang.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xinjiangc.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xinjiangc.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 56119e01641..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xinjiangc.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xmk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xmk index 744abf7328a..e5fcc4aceca 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xmk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xmk @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -#! /bin/csh +#! /bin/csh -f ####################### foreach f ( mtc-add mtc-ads ) foreach i ( 1 2 3 ) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xyugo.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xyugo.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bda46248845..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/xyugo.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/yemen-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/yemen-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 564351ce1e5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/yemen-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zambia-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zambia-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9019bc5803d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zambia-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zanzibar-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zanzibar-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 64962834e16..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zanzibar-f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zimbabwe-f.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zimbabwe-f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 97944162a39..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/minitoc/zimbabwe-f.png +++ /dev/null |
